diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 01:37:58 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 01:37:58 -0700 |
| commit | 365be7b12f4126a70dca93902bf13c4fb257ad43 (patch) | |
| tree | 8538c9b64350a7cc2dde1be16f6244ec8b0bef46 | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21242-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 500351 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21242-h/21242-h.htm | 10378 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21242-h/images/a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 33949 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21242-h/images/b.jpg | bin | 0 -> 39583 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21242-h/images/c.jpg | bin | 0 -> 32767 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21242-h/images/d.jpg | bin | 0 -> 33092 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21242-h/images/e.jpg | bin | 0 -> 34812 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21242-h/images/f.jpg | bin | 0 -> 32190 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21242-h/images/g.jpg | bin | 0 -> 35472 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21242-h/images/h.jpg | bin | 0 -> 36383 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21242.txt | 11856 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 21242.zip | bin | 0 -> 219596 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
15 files changed, 22250 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/21242-h.zip b/21242-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..39f9856 --- /dev/null +++ b/21242-h.zip diff --git a/21242-h/21242-h.htm b/21242-h/21242-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..62c7342 --- /dev/null +++ b/21242-h/21242-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,10378 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> +<head> +<meta name="generator" content= +"HTML Tidy for Cygwin (vers 1st September 2004), see www.w3.org" /> +<meta http-equiv="CONTENT-TYPE" content= +"text/html; charset=us-ascii" /> +<title>On The Irrawaddy:</title> + +<style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[*/ + body {background:#ffffff; + color:black; + font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; + font-size:14pt; + margin-top:70px; + margin-left:10%; + margin-right:10%; + text-align:justify} + caption { font-weight: bold; letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-family: "Arial"; + text-transform: uppercase; font-size: 18pt; } + div { text-align: center} + em {font-weight: bold} + h1 {text-align: center; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.05em} + h2 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + h3 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + hr {height: 5px} + p {text-indent: 4% } + pre {margin-left: 10%; font-size: 10pt;} + table {text-align: center} + td { font-family: "Arial"; text-align: left} + td.ltoc { letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; + text-transform: uppercase; text-align: right; vertical-align: top } + td.rtoc { font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; text-align: left} + thead { font-weight: bold;} +/*]]>*/ +</style> +</head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of On the Irrawaddy, by G. A. Henty + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: On the Irrawaddy + A Story of the First Burmese War + +Author: G. A. Henty + +Illustrator: W. H. Overend + +Release Date: April 27, 2007 [EBook #21242] +[Last updated: October 6, 2013] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ON THE IRRAWADDY *** + + + + +Produced by Martin Robb + + + + + +</pre> + +<h1>On The Irrawaddy:</h1> +<h2>A Story of the First Burmese War<br /> +By G. A. Henty<br /> +Illustrated by W. H. Overend.</h2> +<hr /> +<center> +<table summary="Table of Contents"> +<caption>Contents</caption> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"></td> +<td class="rtoc"><a href="#Preface">Preface</a>.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch1">Chapter 1</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A New Career.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch2">Chapter 2</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Outbreak of War.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch3">Chapter 3</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Prisoner.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch4">Chapter 4</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">A Ruined Temple.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch5">Chapter 5</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">With Brigands.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch6">Chapter 6</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Among Friends.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch7">Chapter 7</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">On The Staff.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch8">Chapter 8</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Pagoda.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch9">Chapter 9</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Victories.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch10">Chapter 10</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Advance.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch11">Chapter 11</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Donabew.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch12">Chapter 12</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Harry Carried Off.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch13">Chapter 13</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Preparing A Rescue.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch14">Chapter 14</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">In The Temple.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch15">Chapter 15</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Attack.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch16">Chapter 16</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Rejoining.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch17">Chapter 17</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Pride Of Burma Humbled.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch18">Chapter 18</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">In Business Again.</td> +</tr> +</table> +<br /> +<br /> +<br /> +<table summary="Illustrations"> +<caption>Illustrations<br /></caption> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicA">Stanley is brought before Bandoola, the Burmese +general.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicB">Stanley gave a sudden spring, and buried his +knife in the leopard.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicC">They forced the canoe behind bushes, so as to +be entirely concealed.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicD">The Burmese make a great effort to capture +Pagoda Hill.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicE">Stanley cut down the man who was about to fire +the hut.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicF">The great snake moved his head higher and +higher, hissing angrily.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicG">In vain the Burmese tried to force their way +into the chamber.</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><a href="#PicH">The old Burmese general was carried from point +to point in a litter.</a></td> +</tr> +</table> +</center> +<h2><a name="Preface" id="Preface">Preface</a>.</h2> +<p>With the exception of the terrible retreat from Afghanistan, +none of England's many little wars have been so fatal--in +proportion to the number of those engaged--as our first expedition +to Burma. It was undertaken without any due comprehension of the +difficulties to be encountered, from the effects of climate and the +deficiency of transport; the power, and still more the obstinacy +and arrogance of the court of Ava were altogether underrated; and +it was considered that our possession of her ports would assuredly +bring the enemy, who had wantonly forced the struggle upon us, to +submission. Events, however, proved the completeness of the error. +The Burman policy of carrying off every boat on the river, laying +waste the whole country, and driving away the inhabitants and the +herds, maintained our army as prisoners in Rangoon through the +first wet season; and caused the loss of half the white officers +and men first sent there. The subsequent campaign was no less fatal +and, although large reinforcements had been sent, fifty percent of +the whole died; so that less than two thousand fighting men +remained in the ranks, when the expedition arrived within a short +distance of Ava. Not until the last Burmese army had been scattered +did the court of Ava submit to the by no means onerous terms we +imposed.</p> +<p>Great, indeed, was the contrast presented by this first invasion +of the country with the last war in 1885, which brought about the +final annexation of Burma. Then a fleet of steamers conveyed the +troops up the noble river; while in 1824 a solitary steamer was all +that India could furnish, to aid the flotilla of rowboats. No worse +government has ever existed than that of Burma when, with the boast +that she intended to drive the British out of India, she began the +war. No people were ever kept down by a more grinding tyranny, and +the occupation of the country by the British has been an even +greater blessing to the population than has that of India.</p> +<p>Several works, some by eyewitnesses, others compiled from +official documents, appeared after the war. They differ remarkably +in the relation of details, and still more in the spelling of the +names both of persons and places. I have chiefly followed those +given in the narratives of Mr. H. H. Wilson, and of Major +Snodgrass, the military secretary to the commander of the +expedition.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch1" id="Ch1">Chapter 1</a>: A New Career.</h2> +<p>A party was assembled in a room of an hotel in Calcutta, at the +end of the year 1822. It consisted of a gentleman, a lady in deep +mourning, a boy of between fourteen and fifteen, and two girls of +thirteen and twelve.</p> +<p>"I think you had better accept my offer, Nellie," the gentleman +was saying. "You will find it hard work enough to make both ends +meet, with these two girls; and Stanley would be a heavy drain on +you. The girls cost nothing but their clothes; but he must go to a +decent school, and then there would be the trouble of thinking what +to do with him, afterwards. If I could have allowed you a couple of +hundred a year, it would have been altogether different; but you +see I am fighting an uphill fight, myself, and need every penny +that I can scrape together. I am getting on; and I can see well +enough that, unless something occurs to upset the whole thing, I +shall be doing a big trade, one of these days; but every half penny +of profit has to go into the business. So, as you know, I cannot +help you at present though, by the time the girls grow up, I hope I +shall be able to do so, and that to a good extent.</p> +<p>"I feel sure that it would not be a bad thing for Stanley. He +will soon get to be useful to me, and in three or four years will +be a valuable assistant. Speaking Hindustani as well as he does, he +won't be very long in picking up enough of the various dialects in +Kathee and Chittagong for our purpose and, by twenty, he will have +a share of the business, and be on the highway towards making his +fortune. It will be infinitely better than anything he is likely to +find in England, and he will be doing a man's work at the age when +he would still be a schoolboy in England.</p> +<p>"I have spoken to him about it. Of course, he does not like +leaving you, but he says that he should like it a thousand times +better than, perhaps, having to go into some humdrum office in +England."</p> +<p>"Thank you, Tom," Mrs. Brooke said with a sigh. "It will be very +hard to part with him--terribly hard--but I see that it is by far +the best thing for him and, as you say, in a monetary way it will +be a relief to me. I think I can manage very comfortably on the +pension, in some quiet place at home, with the two girls; but +Stanley's schooling would be a heavy drain. I might even manage +that, for I might earn a little money by painting; but there would +be the question of what to do with him when he left school and, +without friends or influence, it will be hopeless to get him into +any good situation.</p> +<p>"You see, Herbert's parents have both died since he came out +here and, though he was distantly related to the Earl of Netherly, +he was only a second cousin, or something of that kind, and knew +nothing about the family; and of course I could not apply to +them."</p> +<p>"Certainly not, Nellie," her brother agreed. "There is nothing +so hateful as posing as a poor relation--and that is a connection +rather than a relationship. Then you will leave the boy in my +hands?"</p> +<p>"I am sure that it will be best," she said, with a tremor in her +voice, "and at any rate, I shall have the comfort of knowing that +he will be well looked after."</p> +<p>Mrs. Brooke was the widow of a captain in one of the native +regiments of the East India Company. He had, six weeks before this, +been carried off suddenly by an outbreak of cholera; and she had +been waiting at Calcutta, in order to see her brother, before +sailing for England. She was the daughter of an English clergyman, +who had died some seventeen years before. Nellie, who was then +eighteen, being motherless as well as fatherless, had determined to +sail for India. A great friend of hers had married and gone out, a +year before. Nellie's father was at that time in bad health; and +her friend had said to her, at parting:</p> +<p>"Now mind, Nellie, I have your promise that, if you should find +yourself alone here, you will come out to me in India. I shall be +very glad to have you with me, and I don't suppose you will be on +my hands very long; pretty girls don't remain single many months, +in India."</p> +<p>So, seeing nothing better to do, Nellie had, shortly after her +father's death, sailed for Calcutta.</p> +<p>Lieutenant Brooke was also a passenger on board the Ava, and +during the long voyage he and Nellie Pearson became engaged; and +were married, from her friend's house, a fortnight after their +arrival. Nellie was told that she was a foolish girl, for that she +ought to have done better; but she was perfectly happy. The pay and +allowances of her husband were sufficient for them to live upon in +comfort; and though, when the children came, there was little to +spare, the addition of pay when he gained the rank of captain was +ample for their wants. They had been, in fact, a perfectly happy +couple--both had bright and sunny dispositions, and made the best +of everything; and she had never had a serious care, until he was +suddenly taken away from her.</p> +<p>Stanley had inherited his parents' disposition and, as his +sisters, coming so soon after him, occupied the greater portion of +his mother's care, he was left a good deal to his own devices; and +became a general pet in the regiment, and was equally at home in +the men's lines and in the officers' bungalows. The native language +came as readily to him as English and, by the time he was ten, he +could talk in their own tongue with the men from the three or four +different districts from which the regiment had been recruited. His +father devoted a couple of hours a day to his studies. He did not +attempt to teach him Latin--which would, he thought, be altogether +useless to him--but gave him a thorough grounding in English and +Indian history, and arithmetic, and insisted upon his spending a +certain time each day in reading standard English authors.</p> +<p>Tom Pearson, who was five years younger than his sister, had +come out to India four years after her. He was a lad full of life +and energy. As soon as he left school, finding himself the master +of a hundred pounds--the last remains of the small sum that his +father had left behind him--he took a second-class passage to +Calcutta. As soon as he had landed, he went round to the various +merchants and offices and, finding that he could not, owing to a +want of references, obtain a clerkship, he took a place in the +store of a Parsee merchant who dealt in English goods. Here he +remained for five years, by which time he had mastered two or three +native languages, and had obtained a good knowledge of +business.</p> +<p>He now determined to start on his own account. He had lived +hardly, saving up every rupee not needed for actual necessaries +and, at the end of the five years he had, in all, a hundred and +fifty pounds. He had, long before this, determined that the best +opening for trade was among the tribes on the eastern borders of +the British territory; and had specially devoted himself to the +study of the languages of Kathee and Chittagong.</p> +<p>Investing the greater portion of his money in goods suitable for +the trade, he embarked at Calcutta in a vessel bound for +Chittagong. There he took passage in a native craft going up the +great river to Sylhet, where he established his headquarters; and +thence--leaving the greater portion of his goods in the care of a +native merchant, with whom his late employer had had +dealings--started with a native, and four donkeys on which his +goods were packed, to trade among the wild tribes.</p> +<p>His success fully equalled his anticipations and, gradually, he +extended his operations; going as far east as Manipur, and south +almost as far as Chittagong. The firm in Calcutta from whom he had, +in the first place, purchased his goods, sent him up fresh stores +as he required them; and soon, seeing the energy with which he was +pushing his business, gave him considerable credit, and he was able +to carry on his operations on an increasingly larger scale. Sylhet +remained his headquarters; but he had a branch at Chittagong, +whither goods could be sent direct from Calcutta, and from this he +drew his supplies for his trade in that province.</p> +<p>Much of his business was carried on by means of the waterways, +and the very numerous streams that covered the whole country, and +enabled him to carry his goods at a far cheaper rate than he could +transport them by land; and for this purpose he had a boat +specially fitted up with a comfortable cabin. He determined, from +the first, to sell none but the best goods in the market; and thus +he speedily gained the confidence of the natives, and the arrival +of his boats was eagerly hailed by the villagers on the banks of +the rivers.</p> +<p>He soon found that money was scarce; and that, to do a good +business, he must take native products in barter for his goods; and +that in this way he not only did a much larger trade, but obtained +a very much better price for his wares than if he had sold only for +money; and he soon consigned considerable quantities to the firm in +Calcutta and, by so doing, obtained a profit both ways. He himself +paid a visit to Calcutta, every six months or so, to choose fresh +fashions of goods; and to visit the firm, with whom his dealings, +every year, became more extensive. But, though laying the +foundations for an extensive business, he was not, as he told his +sister, at present in a position to help her; for his increasing +trade continually demanded more and more capital, and the whole of +his profits were swallowed up by the larger stocks that had to be +held at his depots at Sylhet, Chittagong, and at the mouths of the +larger rivers.</p> +<p>Twice since he had been out he had met his sister at Calcutta, +and when she came down after her husband's death, and heard from +Tom's agents that he would probably arrive there in the course of a +fortnight, she decided to wait there and meet him. He was greatly +grieved at her loss, and especially so as he was unable to offer +her a home; for as his whole time was spent in travelling, it was +impossible for him to do so; nor indeed, would she have accepted +it. Now that her husband was gone, she yearned to be back in +England again. It was, too, far better for the girls that she +should take them home. But when he now offered to take the boy she +felt that, hard as it would be to leave Stanley behind, the offer +was a most advantageous one for him.</p> +<p>The boy's knowledge of Indian languages, which would be of +immense advantage to him in such a life, would be absolutely +useless in England and, from what Tom told her of his business, +there could be little doubt that the prospects were excellent. +Stanley himself, who now saw his uncle for the first time, was +attracted to him by the energy and cheeriness of manner that had +rendered him so successful in business; and he was stirred by the +enterprise and adventure of the life he proposed for him. More than +once, in the little-frequented rivers that stretched into Kathee, +his boats had been attacked by wild tribesmen; and he had to fight +hard to keep them off. Petty chiefs had, at times, endeavoured to +obstruct his trading and, when at Manipur, he had twice been +witness of desperate fights between rival claimants for the throne. +All this was, to a boy brought up among soldiers, irresistibly +fascinating; especially as the alternative seemed to be a seat in a +dull counting house in England.</p> +<p>He was, then, delighted when his mother gave her consent to his +remaining with his uncle; grieved as he was at being parted from +her and his sisters. The thought that he should, in time, be able +to be of assistance to her was a pleasant one; and aided him to +support the pain of parting when, a week later, she sailed with the +girls for England.</p> +<p>"I suppose you have not done any shooting, Stanley?" his uncle +asked.</p> +<p>"Not with a gun, but I have practised sometimes with pistols. +Father thought that it would be useful."</p> +<p>"Very useful; and you must learn to shoot well with them, and +with fowling-piece and rifle. What with river thieves, and dacoits, +and wild tribes--to say nothing of wild beasts--a man who travels +about, as I do, wants to be able to shoot straight. The straighter +you shoot, the less likely you are to have to do so. I have come to +be a good shot myself and, whenever we row up a river, I constantly +practise--either at floating objects in the water, or at birds or +other marks in the trees. I have the best weapons that money can +buy. It is my one extravagance, and the result is that, to my +boatmen and the men about me, my shooting seems to be marvellous; +they tell others of it, and the result is that I am regarded with +great respect. I have no doubt, whatever, that it has saved me from +much trouble; for the natives have almost got to believe that I +only have to point my gun, and the man I wish to kill falls dead, +however far distant."</p> +<p>Two days after the departure of Mrs. Brooke, her brother and +Stanley started down the Hoogly in a native trader.</p> +<p>"She is a curious-looking craft, uncle."</p> +<p>"Yes; she would not be called handsome in home waters, but she +is uncommonly fast; and I find her much more convenient, in many +ways, than a British merchantman."</p> +<p>"Is she yours, uncle?"</p> +<p>"No, she is not mine, and I do not exactly charter her; but she +works principally for me. You see, the wages are so low that they +can work a craft like this for next to nothing. Why, the captain +and his eight men, together, don't get higher pay than the +boatswain of an English trader.</p> +<p>"The captain owns the vessel. He is quite content if he gets a +few rupees a month, in addition to what he considers his own rate +of pay. His wife and his two children live on board. If the craft +can earn twenty rupees a week, he considers that he is doing +splendidly. At the outside, he would not pay his men more than four +rupees a month, each, and I suppose that he would put down his +services at eight; so that would leave him forty rupees a month as +the profit earned by the ship.</p> +<p>"In point of fact, I keep him going pretty steadily. He makes +trips backwards and forwards between the different depots; carries +me up the rivers for a considerable distance; does a little trade +on his own account--not in goods such as I sell, you know, but +purely native stores--takes a little freight when he can get it, +and generally a few native passengers. I pay him fifteen rupees a +week, and I suppose he earns from five to ten in addition; so that +the arrangement suits us both, admirably.</p> +<p>"I keep the stern cabin for myself. As you see, she has four +little brass guns, which I picked up for a song at Calcutta; and +there are twenty-four muskets aft. It is an arrangement that the +crew are to practise shooting once a week, so they have all come to +be pretty fair shots; and the captain, himself, can send a +two-pound shot from those little guns uncommonly straight.</p> +<p>"You will be amused when you see us practising for action. The +captain's wife and the two boys load the guns, and do it very +quickly, too. He runs round from gun to gun, takes aim, and fires. +The crew shout, and yell, and bang away with their muskets. I take +the command, and give a few pice among them, if the firing has been +accurate.</p> +<p>"We have been attacked, once or twice, in the upper waters; but +have always managed to beat the robbers off, without much +difficulty. The captain fires away, till they get pretty close; and +I pepper them with my rifles--I have three of them. When they get +within fifty yards, the crew open fire and, as they have three +muskets each, they can make it very hot for the pirates. I have a +store of hand grenades and, if they push on, I throw two or three +on board when they get within ten yards; and that has always +finished the matter. They don't understand the things bursting in +the middle of them. I don't mean to say that my armament would be +of much use, if we were trading along the coast of the Malay +Peninsula or among the Islands, but it is quite enough to deal with +the petty robbers of these rivers."</p> +<p>"But I thought that you had a boat that you went up the rivers +in, uncle?"</p> +<p>"Yes; we tow a rowboat and a store boat up, behind this craft, +as far as she can go; that is, as long as she has wind enough to +make against the sluggish stream. When she can go no further, I +take to the rowboat. It has eight rowers, carries a gun--it is a +twelve-pounder howitzer--that I have had cut short, so that it is +only about a foot long. Of course it won't carry far, but that is +not necessary. Its charge is a pound of powder and a ten-pound bag +of bullets and, at a couple of hundred yards, the balls scatter +enough to sweep two or three canoes coming abreast and, as we can +charge and fire the little thing three times in a minute, it is all +that we require, for practical purposes.</p> +<p>"It is only on a few of the rivers we go up that there is any +fear of trouble. On the river from Sylhet to the east and its +branches in Kathee or, as it is sometimes called, Kasi, the country +is comparatively settled. The Goomtee beyond Oudypore is well +enough, until it gets into Kaayn, which is what they call +independent. That is to say, it owns no authority; and some +villages are peaceable and well disposed, while others are savage. +The same may be said of the Munnoo and Fenny rivers.</p> +<p>"For the last two years I have done a good deal of trade in +Assam, up the Brahmaputra river. As far as Rungpoor there are a +great many villages on the banks, and the people are quiet and +peaceable."</p> +<p>"Then you don't go further south than Chittagong, uncle?"</p> +<p>"No. The Burmese hold Aracan on the south and, indeed, for some +distance north of it there is no very clearly-defined border. You +see, the great river runs from Rangoon very nearly due north, +though with a little east in it; and extends along at the back of +the districts I trade with; so that the Burmese are not very far +from Manipur which, indeed, stands on a branch of the Irrawaddy, of +which another branch runs nearly up to Rungpoor.</p> +<p>"We shall have big trouble with them, one of these days; indeed, +we have had troubles already. You see, the Burmese are a great and +increasing power, and have so easily conquered all their neighbours +that they regard themselves as invincible. Until the beginning of +the eighteenth century, the Burmese were masters of Pegu; then the +people of that country, with the help of the Dutch and Portuguese, +threw off their yoke. But the Burmese were not long kept down for, +in 1753, Alompra--a hunter--gathered a force round him and, after +keeping up an irregular warfare for some time, was joined by so +many of his countrymen that he attacked and captured Ava, conquered +the whole of Pegu and, in 1759, the English trading colony at +Negrais were massacred.</p> +<p>"This, however, was not the act of Alompra, but of the treachery +of a Frenchman named Levine, and of an Armenian; who incited the +Burmese of the district to exterminate the English--hoping, no +doubt, thus to retrieve, in a new quarter, the fortunes of France, +which in India were being extinguished by the genius of Clive. The +English were, at the time, far too occupied with the desperate +struggle they were having, in India, to attempt to revenge the +massacre of their countrymen at Negrais.</p> +<p>"Very rapidly the Burman power spread. They captured the +valuable Tenasserim coast, from Siam; repulsed a formidable +invasion from China; annexed Aracan, and dominated Manipur, and +thus became masters of the whole tract of country lying between +China and Hindustan. As they now bordered upon our territory, a +mission was sent in 1794 to them from India, with a proposal for +the settlement of boundaries, and for the arrangement of trade +between the two countries. Nothing came of it, for the Burmese had +already proposed, to themselves, the conquest of India; and +considered the mission as a proof of the terror that their advance +had inspired among us.</p> +<p>"After the conquest by them of Aracan, in 1784, there had been a +constant irritation felt against us by the Burmese; owing to the +fact that a great number of fugitives from that country had taken +refuge in the swamps and islands of Chittagong; from which they, +from time to time, issued and made raids against the Burmese. In +1811 these fugitives, in alliance with some predatory chiefs, +invaded Aracan in force and, being joined by the subject population +there, expelled the Burmese. These, however, soon reconquered the +province. The affair was, nevertheless, unfortunate, since the +Burmese naturally considered that, as the insurrection had begun +with an invasion by the fugitives in Chittagong, it had been +fomented by us.</p> +<p>"This was in no way the fact. We had no force there capable of +keeping the masses of fugitives in order; but we did our best, and +arrested many of the leaders, when they returned after their +defeat. This, however, was far from satisfying the Burmese. A +mission was sent, to Ava, to assure them of our friendly +intentions; and that we had had nothing whatever to do with the +invasion, and would do all we could to prevent its recurrence. The +Burmese government declined to receive the mission.</p> +<p>"We, ourselves, had much trouble with the insurgents for, +fearful of re-entering Burma after their defeat, they now carried +on a series of raids in our territory; and it was not until 1816 +that these were finally suppressed. Nevertheless, the court of Ava +remained dissatisfied; and a fresh demand was raised for the +surrender of the chiefs who had been captured, and of the whole of +the fugitives living in the government of Chittagong. The Marquis +of Hastings replied that the British government could not, without +a violation of the principles of justice, deliver up those who had +sought its protection; that tranquillity now existed, and there was +no probability of a renewal of the disturbances; but that the +greatest vigilance should be used, to prevent and punish the +authors of any raid that might be attempted against Aracan.</p> +<p>"A year later a second letter was received, demanding on the +part of the king the cession of Ramoo, Chittagong, Moorshedabad, +and Dacca; that is to say, of the whole British possessions east of +the Ganges. Lord Hastings simply replied that if it was possible to +suppose that the demand had been dictated by the King of Ava, the +British government would be justified in regarding it as a +declaration of war. To this the Burmese made no reply. Doubtless +they had heard of the successes we had gained in Central India, and +had learned that our whole force was disposable against them.</p> +<p>"Three years ago the old king died, and a more warlike monarch +succeeded him. Since 1810 they have been mixed up in the troubles +that have been going on in Assam, where a civil war had been +raging. One party or other has sought their assistance, and +fighting has been going on there nearly incessantly and, two months +ago, the Burmese settled the question by themselves taking +possession of the whole country.</p> +<p>"This has, of course, been a serious blow to me. Although +disorder has reigned, it has not interfered with my trading along +the banks of the river; but now that the Burmese have set up their +authority, I shall, for a time anyhow, be obliged to give up my +operations there; for they have evinced considerable hostility to +us--have made raids near Rungpoor, on our side of the river, and +have pulled down a British flag on an island in the Brahmaputra. We +have taken, in consequence, the principality of Cachar under our +protection--indeed its two princes, seeing that the Burmese were +beginning to invade their country, invited us to take this +step--and we thus occupy the passes from Manipur into the low +country of Sylhet."</p> +<p>"I wonder that you have been able to trade in Manipur, uncle, as +the Burmese have been masters there."</p> +<p>"I am not trading with the capital itself, and the Burmese have +been too occupied with their affairs in Assam to exercise much +authority in the country. Besides, you see, there has not been war +between the two countries. Our merchants at Rangoon still carry on +their trade up the Irrawaddy; and in Assam, this spring, the only +trouble I had was that I had to pay somewhat higher tolls than I +had done before. However, now that Cachar is under our protection, +I hope that I shall make up for my loss of trade, in Assam, by +doing better than before in that province."</p> +<p>"I thought you called it Kathee, uncle?"</p> +<p>"So it is generally named but, as it is spoken of as Cachar in +the proclamation assuming the protectorate, I suppose it will be +called so in future; but all these names, out here, are spelt +pretty much according to fancy."</p> +<p>While this conversation had been going on, the boat had been +running fast down the river, passing several European vessels +almost as if they had been standing still.</p> +<p>"I should not have thought that a boat like this would pass +these large ships," Stanley said.</p> +<p>"We have a good deal to learn in the art of sailing, yet," his +uncle replied. "A great many of these Indian dhows can run away +from a square-rigged ship, in light weather. I don't know whether +it is the lines of their hulls or the cut of the sails, but there +is no doubt about their speed. They seem to skim over the water, +while our bluff-bowed craft shove their way through it. I suppose, +some day, we shall adopt these long sharp bows; when we do, it will +make a wonderful difference in our rate of sailing. Then, too, +these craft have a very light draft of water but, on the other +hand, they have a deep keel, which helps them to lie close to the +wind; and that long, overhanging bow renders them capital craft in +heavy weather for, as they meet the sea, they rise over it +gradually; instead of its hitting them full on the bow, as it does +our ships. We have much to learn, yet, in the way of ship +building."</p> +<p>The trader had his own servant with him, and the man now came up +and said that a meal was ready, and they at once entered the cabin. +It was roomy and comfortable, and was, like the rest of the boat, +of varnished teak. There were large windows in the stern; it had a +table, with two fixed benches; and there were broad, low sofas on +each side. Above these the muskets were disposed, in racks; while +at the end by the door were Tom Pearson's own rifles, four brace of +pistols, and a couple of swords. Ten long spears were suspended +from the roof of the cabin, in leather slings. The floor, like the +rest of the cabin, was varnished.</p> +<p>"It looks very comfortable, uncle."</p> +<p>"Yes; you see, I live quite half my time on board, the rest +being spent in the boat. My man is a capital cook. He comes from +Chittagong, and is a Mug."</p> +<p>"What are Mugs, uncle?"</p> +<p>"They are the original inhabitants of Aracan. He was one of +those who remained there, after the Burmese had conquered it, and +speaks their language as well as his own. I recommend you to begin +it with him, at once. If things settle down in Assam, it will be +very useful for you in arranging with the Burmese officials. You +won't find it very easy, though of course your knowledge of three +or four Indian tongues will help you. It is said to be a mixture of +the old Tali, Sanscrit, Tartar, and Chinese. The Tartar and Chinese +words will, of course, be quite new to you; the other two elements +will resemble those that you are familiar with.</p> +<p>"I talk to the man in Hindustani. He picked up a little of it at +Chittagong, and has learned a good deal more, during the two years +that he has been with me; and through that you will be able to +learn Burmese."</p> +<p>A week later the dhow entered the harbour. Stanley had passed +most of his time in conversation with Khyen, Tom's servant. The +facility his tongue had acquired in the Indian languages was of +great benefit to him, and he speedily picked up a good many Burmese +sentences.</p> +<p>For the next six months he continued, with his uncle, the work +the latter had carried on; and enjoyed it much. They sailed up the +sluggish rivers, with their low, flat shores, in the dhow; towing +the rowboat and the store boat behind them. The crews of these +boats lived on board the dhow until their services were required, +helping in its navigation and aiding the crew when the wind dropped +and sweeps were got out.</p> +<p>The villages along the banks were for the most part small, but +were very numerous. At each of these the dhow brought up. There +was, in almost all cases, sufficient water to allow of her being +moored alongside the banks and, as soon as she did so, the natives +came on board to make their purchases and dispose of their produce. +In addition to the European and Indian goods carried, the dhow was +laden with rice, for which there was a considerable demand at most +of the villages.</p> +<p>As soon as he had learned the price of the various goods, and +their equivalent in the products of the country, Stanley did much +of the bartering; while his uncle went ashore and talked with the +head men of the village, with all of whom he made a point of +keeping on good terms, and so securing a great portion of the trade +that might, otherwise, have been carried by native craft.</p> +<p>Three times during the six months the dhow had gone back to +Calcutta, to fetch fresh supplies of goods and to take in another +cargo of rice; while the trader proceeded higher up the river, in +his own boats. While on the voyage, Stanley always had the rifle +and fowling piece that his uncle had handed over, for his special +use, leaning against the bulwark, close at hand; and frequently +shot waterfowl, which were so abundant that he was able to keep not +only their own table supplied, but to furnish the crew and boatmen +with a considerable quantity of food. They had had no trouble with +river pirates, for these had suffered so heavily, in previous +attacks upon the dhow, that they shunned any repetition of their +loss. At the same time every precaution was taken, for, owing to the +intestine troubles in Cachar and Assam, fugitives belonging to the +party that happened, for the time, to be worsted, were driven to +take refuge in the jungles near the rivers; and to subsist largely +on plunder, the local authorities being too feeble to root them +out. The boats, therefore, were always anchored in the middle of +the stream at night and two men were kept on watch.</p> +<p>To the south as well as in the north, the trading operations +were more restricted; for the Burmese became more and more +aggressive. Elephant hunters, in the hills that formed the boundary +of the British territory to the east, were seized and carried off; +twenty-three in one place being captured, and six in another--all +being ill treated and imprisoned, and the remonstrances of the +Indian government treated with contempt by the Rajah of Aracan. It +was evident that the object of the Burmese was to possess +themselves of this hill country in order that they might, if they +chose, pour down at any time into the cultivated country round the +town of Ramoo.</p> +<p>"There is no doubt, Stanley," said his uncle one day, "we shall +very shortly have a big war with the Burmese. The fact that these +constant acts of aggression are met only by remonstrances, on our +part, increases their arrogance; and they are convinced that we are +in mortal terror of them. They say that in Assam their leaders are +openly boasting that, ere long, they will drive us completely from +India; and one of their generals has confidently declared that, +after taking India, they intend to conquer England. With such +ignorant people, there is but one argument understood--namely, +force; and sooner or later we shall have to give them such a hearty +thrashing that they will be quiet for some time.</p> +<p>"Still, I grant that the difficulties are great. Their country +is a tremendous size, the beggars are brave, and the climate, at +any rate near the sea coast, is horribly unhealthy. Altogether it +will be a big job; but it will have to be done, or in a very short +time we shall see them marching against Calcutta."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch2" id="Ch2">Chapter 2</a>: The Outbreak of War.</h2> +<p>On the last day of September, 1823--just a year after Stanley +had joined his uncle--the dhow sailed into Chittagong; which had +now taken the place of Sylhet as the traders' chief depot, the +latter place being too near the Burmese, in Assam, for him to care +about keeping a large stock of his goods there. He went ashore as +soon as the dhow cast anchor, Stanley remaining on board.</p> +<p>"The fat is all in the fire, Stanley," Tom Pearson said, when he +returned. "The Burmese have attacked and killed some of our troops, +and it is certain that the government cannot put up with that."</p> +<p>"Where was it, uncle?"</p> +<p>"Down at the mouth of the Naaf. As you know, that is the +southern boundary of the province, and there was a row there in +January. One of our native boats laden with rice was coming up the +river, on our side of the channel, when an armed Burmese boat came +across and demanded duty. Of course, our fellows said they were in +their own waters, whereupon the Burmese fired upon them and killed +the steersman. There were reports, then, that bodies of Burmese +troops were moving about on their side of the river, and that it +was feared they would cross over and burn some of our villages. +Accordingly, our guard at the mouth of the river was increased to +fifty men, and a few of these were posted on the island of +Shapuree.</p> +<p>"This island lies close to our shore and, indeed, the channel +between can be forded at low water. It has always formed part of +the province of Chittagong, and there has never been any question +raised by the Burmese as to this. However, the Viceroy of Aracan +called upon our resident here to withdraw the guard, asserting the +right of the King of Ava to the island.</p> +<p>"Since then letters have passed to and fro, but I hear that the +Burmese have settled the question by landing on Shapuree. One night +last week they attacked our post there, killed and wounded four of +the sepoys, and drove the rest off the island. The Indian +government have put up with a great deal, rather than engage in so +costly and difficult an operation as a war with Burma, but it is +impossible that we can stand this."</p> +<p>The Indian government, however, used every endeavour to avert +the necessity for war; although the Rajah of Aracan lost no time in +writing a letter to the government of Calcutta, stating that he had +occupied the island of Shapuree, and that unless they submitted +quietly to this act of justice, the cities of Dacca and +Moorshedabad would be forcibly seized. In order, however, to +postpone, at any rate, the outbreak of war, the government of +Bengal resolved to give the court of Ava an opportunity to withdraw +from the position taken up. They therefore acted as if the attack +on the guard at Shapuree had been the action of the Viceroy of +Aracan alone, and addressed a declaration to the Burmese +government, recapitulating the facts of the case, pointing out that +Shapuree had always been acknowledged by Burma as forming part of +the province of Chittagong, and calling upon the government to +disavow the action of the local authorities. The Burmese considered +this, as it was in fact, a proof that the government of India was +reluctant to enter upon a contest with them; and confirmed Burma in +its confident expectation of annexing the eastern portions of +Bengal, if not of expelling the English altogether.</p> +<p>In the meantime, Shapuree had been reoccupied by us. The +Burmese--after driving out the little garrison--had retired and, +two months after the attack, two companies of the 20th Native +Infantry arrived by sea, from Calcutta, and landed there. A +stockade was built, and two six-pounders placed in position. +Another company was stationed on the mainland, and the Planet and +three gunboats, each carrying a twelve-pounder, were stationed in +the river.</p> +<p>The Burmese at once collected large bodies of troops, both in +Aracan and Assam. The government of Bengal made preparations to +defend our frontier, and especially the position in the north, as +an advance of the Burmese in this direction would not only threaten +the important towns of Dacca and Moorshedabad, but would place the +invaders in dangerous proximity to Calcutta. Accordingly, a portion +of the 10th and 23rd Native Infantry, and four companies of the +Rungpoor local force, were marched to Sylhet; and outposts thrown +forward to the frontier.</p> +<p>Seeing that the Burmese operations would probably commence in +the north, Tom Pearson had, after completing his arrangements at +Chittagong, sailed north to remove his depots from Sylhet, and +other places that would be exposed to an attack from that +direction. They reached Sylhet the first week in January. By this +time Stanley, from his constant conversation with his uncle's +servant, had come to speak Burmese as fluently as the Indian +languages. He was now nearly sixteen, tall for his age, and active +but, owing to the hot climate and the absence of vigorous exercise, +he was less broad and muscular than most English lads of his +age.</p> +<p>They found on landing that news had arrived, two days before, +that a powerful army of Burmese had entered Cachar, from Manipur, +and had defeated the troops of Jambhir Sing; that 4000 Burmese and +Assamese had advanced from Assam into Cachar, and had begun to +stockade themselves at Bickrampore, at the foot of the Bhortoka +Pass; and that the third division was crossing into the district of +Jyntea, immediately to the north of Sylhet. There was a complete +panic in the town, and the ryots were flocking in from all the +surrounding country, with their families and belongings; and were +making their way down the country, in boats, to Dacca.</p> +<p>"I am afraid, Stanley, there is an end of trade, for the +present. What we see here is, doubtless, taking place all over +Cachar; and it would be just as bad down at Chittagong. It is a +heavy blow, for I have done remarkably well this year, and was +building up the foundations for a good business. No doubt, when +this trouble is over. I shall be able to take it up again; and it +may be, if we thrash the Burmese heartily, which we are sure to do +in the long run, it may even prove a benefit. Still, there is no +doubt that it is a very bad business for me. However as, just at +present, there is nothing whatever to be done, I propose, as soon +as the goods are all on board, to take a holiday, and go out and +have a look at the fighting."</p> +<p>"You will take me with you, uncle?" Stanley asked eagerly.</p> +<p>"Certainly, lad. We don't mean to do any fighting ourselves, but +only to look on; and it may be that, after it is over, you may be +able to make yourself useful, if they want to ask questions of any +Burmese prisoners."</p> +<p>"You think that there is no chance of their beating us?"</p> +<p>"I should think not, though of course there is no saying; still, +I don't think these fellows will be able to stand against our +troops. Of course, they have no idea, whatever, of our style of +fighting, and have never met any really formidable foes; so that I +imagine we shall make pretty short work of them. However, as we +shall be mounted--for I will hire a couple of horses, there have +been plenty of them driven into the town--we shall be able to make +a bolt of it, if necessary. Of course, we will take our rifles and +pistols with us."</p> +<p>The goods were not placed on board the dhow, but in what was +called the store boat; as the trader had determined to take up his +abode in his rowboat, which could move about much faster than the +dhow; and to allow the captain of that craft to make a good thing +of it, by taking down to Dacca as many of the fugitives as she +would hold.</p> +<p>Finding that the Burmese division that had entered Jyntea was +intrenching itself, at a few miles' distance, Major Newton, the +officer commanding on the Sylhet frontier, concentrated his force +at Jatrapur, a village five miles beyond the Sylhet boundary. Tom +Pearson had introduced himself to Major Newton, and asked +permission to accompany his force; saying that his nephew would be +able, if necessary, to communicate with the Burmese either before +or after the action, and that both would willingly act as +aides-de-camp. The offer was accepted with thanks, and they rode +out with him, on the evening of the 16th of January, 1824, to +Jatrapur.</p> +<p>At one o'clock in the morning the troops were roused, and +marched an hour later. At daybreak they came in sight of the +stockade, and a few shots were at once fired upon the advanced +guard by the Burmese. A portion of their force was lying in a +village hard by.</p> +<p>Major Newton at once divided his command into two bodies. One of +these was led by Captain Johnston against the front of the +stockade. The other, under Captain Rowe, attacked the village +adjoining. The Burmese stationed there gave way, after a very faint +resistance. They were accustomed to rely always on stockades; and +this attack upon them, when not so protected, shook them at once. +Those in the stockade, however, made a resolute resistance.</p> +<p>Captain Rowe, after gaining possession of the village, and +seeing the occupants in full flight, moved his force to aid the +other division; and the Burmese, dispirited by the defeat of their +countrymen, and finding themselves attacked on two sides, gave way +and fled, leaving a hundred dead behind them; while on the British +side but six sepoys were killed.</p> +<p>The Burmese fled to the hills, at a speed that rendered pursuit +hopeless by the more heavily-armed troops; and the fugitives soon +rallied, and effected their junction with the division advancing +from Manipur. After the action Major Newton returned to Sylhet, and +a few days later Mr. Scott, who had been appointed commissioner, +arrived there and, advancing to Bhadrapur, opened communications +with the Burmese. As, however, it became evident that the latter +were only negotiating in order to gain time to intrench themselves +near Jatrapur, to which they had returned, he again placed the +matter in the hands of the military commanders.</p> +<p>The Burmese force amounted to about six thousand men. They had +erected strong stockades on each bank of the river Surma, and had +thrown a bridge across to connect them. Captain Johnston advanced +with a wing of the 10th Native Infantry, a company of the 23rd +Native Infantry, and a small party of men of a local corps. Small +as was this force, he divided it into two parties. One of these, +under Captain Rowe, crossed the river; and then both moved against +the enemy. The Burmese opened fire as they advanced, but the sepoys +marched gallantly forward, and drove the enemy out of their +unfinished intrenchments at the point of the bayonet. The Assam +division retreated hastily to the Bhortoka Pass, while the Manipur +force stockaded itself at Doodpatnee.</p> +<p>The Assam division was first attacked, and the stockade carried +at the point of the bayonet. Lieutenant Colonel Bowen, who now +commanded, then moved against the position at Doodpatnee. This was +very strong. Steep hills covered the rear; while the other faces of +the intrenchments were defended by a deep ditch, fourteen feet +wide, with a chevaux de frise of pointed bamboos on its outer edge. +Although the position was attacked with great gallantry, it was too +strong to be captured by so small a force; and they were obliged to +withdraw to Jatrapur, with the loss of one officer killed and four +wounded, and about one hundred and fifty sepoys killed and +wounded.</p> +<p>However, their bravery had not been without effect, for the +Burmese evacuated their stockade and retreated to Manipur, leaving +Cachar free from its invaders. Thus, in less than three weeks, the +Burmese invasion of the northern provinces had been hurled back by +a British force of less than a tenth of that of the invaders.</p> +<p>Stanley and his uncle had been present at all these engagements +and, in the absence of any cavalry, had done good service in +conveying messages and despatches; and the lad had several times +acted as interpreter between the officers and Burmese prisoners. +Both received letters from the commissioner, thanking them for the +assistance that they had rendered.</p> +<p>"That last affair was unfortunate, Stanley; and it is evident +that these stockades of theirs are nasty places to attack, and that +they ought to be breached by guns before the men are sent forward +to storm them. However, as the Burmese have gone, our repulse does +not matter much.</p> +<p>"Well, I felt sure that we should thrash them, but I certainly +gave them credit for having a great deal more pluck than they have +shown. As it is, if there is nothing fresh takes place here, the +natives and little traders will soon be coming back from Dacca, and +business will be better than before; for the Burmese have been +talking so big, for the last three years, that no one has bought +more than would just carry him on; while now they will be more +inclined to lay in good stocks of goods.</p> +<p>"Tomorrow we will start for Chittagong. You see, I have a +considerable store there; and there is a chance of much more +serious fighting, in that quarter, than this little affair we have +seen. The Governor of Aracan has, all along, been the source of +troubles; and we may expect that he will cross into the province at +the head of a large force, and may do an immense deal of damage, +before we can get enough troops there to oppose him."</p> +<p>Descending the river they coasted along until they arrived, +early in March, at Chittagong. They found that great alarm reigned +there. In January, Bandoola, the greatest military leader of the +Burmese, who was known to have been one of the most strenuous +supporters of the war policy at the court of Ava, had arrived at +Aracan and taken the command of the troops collected there, and had +brought with him considerable reinforcements.</p> +<p>A wanton outrage that had been committed by the Burmese showed +how intent they were upon hostilities. Owing to the unhealthiness +of the islet of Shapuree, the sepoys stationed there had been +withdrawn; and the Company's pilot vessel, Sophia, was ordered to +join the gunboats off that island. Four deputies from the Burmese +court arrived at Mungdoo, on the opposite shore; and these invited +the commander of the Sophia to come on shore, in order that they +might talk over with him, in a friendly way, the situation of +affairs. He unsuspectingly accepted their invitation and landed, +accompanied by an officer and some native seamen. The party were at +once seized and sent prisoners to Aracan, where they were detained +for a month, and then sent back to Mungdoo.</p> +<p>This wanton insult was followed by a formal declaration of war, +by the government of India; and a similar document was issued by +the court of Ava. The force at Sylhet was reinforced, and that in +Chittagong increased. It consisted of a wing of the 13th and of the +20th Native Regiments, and a battalion of the 23rd, with a local +levy, amounting in all to some 3000 men. Of these a wing of the +23rd, with two guns, and a portion of the native levies were posted +at Ramoo, which was the point most threatened by an invasion from +Aracan.</p> +<p>It was in the north that hostilities first commenced, a force +moving into Assam and driving the Burmese before them. Several +sharp blows were dealt the enemy and, had it not been for the +setting in of the wet season, they would have been driven entirely +out of Assam.</p> +<p>"I think, Stanley," his uncle said, after he had been a short +time at Chittagong, "you had better go up to Ramoo, and see about +matters there. Of course, until the Burmese move we cannot say what +their game is likely to be; but it will be as well to get the +stores ready for embarkation, in case they should advance in that +direction. If they do so, get everything on board at once; and you +can then be guided by circumstances. As the dhow came in yesterday, +I can spare both our boats; and shall, of course, ship the goods +here on board the big craft. Even if the Burmese come this way, I +have no fear of their taking the town; and shall, of course, lend a +hand in the defence, if they attempt it. You can do the same at +Ramoo, if you like.</p> +<p>"I was chatting with Colonel Shatland yesterday. He tells me +that a large fleet has been collected, and that an expedition will +be sent to capture Rangoon so, in that case, it is likely that +Bandoola and his force will march off in that direction.</p> +<p>"I think government are wrong. It will be impossible for the +troops to move, when the wet season once sets in; and they will +lose a tremendous lot of men from sickness, if they are cooped up +in Rangoon. They had very much better have sent a few thousand men +down here, to act on the defensive and repel any attempted +invasion, until the rains are over; when they could have been +shipped again, and join the expedition against Rangoon. It seems to +me a mad-headed thing, to begin at the present time of the year. We +have put up with the insults of the Burmese for so long that we +might just as well have waited for the favourable season, before we +began our operations in earnest."</p> +<p>Accordingly, on the following day Stanley started south for +Ramoo and, on arriving there, took charge of the trading +operations. Shortly after, meeting Captain Noton--who commanded +there--in the street, he recognized him as an officer who had been +stationed at the same cantonment as his father; and whom he had, +four years previously, known well.</p> +<p>"You don't recognize me, Captain Noton," he said. "I am the son +of Captain Brooke, of the 33rd."</p> +<p>"I certainly did not recognize you," the officer said, "but I am +glad to meet you again. Let me think; yes, your name is Stanley, +and a regular young pickle you used to be. What on earth are you +doing here? Of course, I heard of your poor father's death, and was +grieved, indeed, at his loss. Where is your mother? She is well, I +hope."</p> +<p>"She went back to England with my sisters, two months after my +father's death. I joined my uncle, her brother. He is a trader, and +carries on business in the district between here and Sylhet, +trading principally on the rivers; but of course the war has put a +stop to that, for the present. We saw the fighting up in the north, +and then came down to this district. He has remained at Chittagong, +and I am in charge of goods here. I speak Burmese fairly now and, +if I can be of any use to you, I shall be very glad to be so. There +is not much business here; and the Parsee clerk, who is generally +in charge, can look after it very well. I acted as interpreter with +the troops in the north, and have a letter from Mr. Scott, the +commissioner, thanking me for my services."</p> +<p>"I remember you used to be able to talk four or five of the +native languages, but how did you come to pick up Burmese?"</p> +<p>"From a servant of my uncle's. We thought that there would be +sure to be war, sooner or later; and that, after it was over, there +would be a good chance of profitable trade on the Burmese rivers. I +had no great difficulty in learning it from my uncle's man, who was +a native of Aracan."</p> +<p>"I have no doubt you will find it very useful. What a big fellow +you have grown, Stanley; at least, as far as height is concerned. +Let me see. How old are you, now?"</p> +<p>"I am past sixteen," Stanley replied. "I have had several +touches of fever--caught, I suppose, from the damp on the +rivers--but I think that I am pretty well acclimatized, now. I know +I don't look very strong, but I have not had much active exercise +and, of course, the climate is against me."</p> +<p>"Very much so. I wonder that you have kept your health as well +as you have, in this steamy climate.</p> +<p>"I am going to the mess room, now. You had better come and lunch +with me, and I will introduce you to the other officers. We are +very strong in comparison to the force for, counting the assistant +surgeon, there are ten of us."</p> +<p>"I shall be very glad, sir," Stanley said. "I have certainly +been feeling rather lonely here; for I know no one, and there is +very little to do. During the last year, I have often gone up one +of the rivers by myself; but there has always been occupation +while, at present, things are at a standstill."</p> +<p>"I tell you what, Brooke, if you would like it, I can appoint +you interpreter. There is not one of us who speaks this Mug +language--which is, you know, almost the same as Burmese--and the +officers in charge of the native levy would be delighted to have +some one with them who could make the fellows understand. I can +appoint you a first-class interpreter. The pay is not very high, +you know; but you might just as well be earning it as doing +nothing, and it would give you a sort of official position and, as +the son of a British officer, and my friend, you would be one of +us."</p> +<p>"Thank you very much, Captain Noton. I should like it immensely. +Should I have to get a uniform?"</p> +<p>"There will be no absolute necessity for it; but if you get a +white patrol jacket, like this, and a white cap cover, it will +establish you in the eyes of the natives as an officer, and give +you more authority. Oh, by the way, you need not get them, for one +of our lieutenants died, the other day, of fever. His effects have +not been sold, yet; but you may as well have his patrol jackets and +belts. We can settle what you are to pay for them, afterwards. It +will only be a matter of a few rupees, anyhow."</p> +<p>They now arrived at the house that had been taken for the use of +the officers. On entering, Captain Noton introduced him to the +others and, as several of these had at various times met his +father, in cantonments or on service, he was heartily welcomed by +them and, at luncheon, they listened with great interest to his +accounts of the fighting, in Cachar, with the Burmese.</p> +<p>"I fancy we shall find them more formidable, here, if they +come," Captain Noton said. "Bandoola has a great reputation, and is +immensely popular with them. From what you say, a considerable +proportion of the fellows you met up there were Assamese levies, +raised by the Burmese. I grant that the Burmese, themselves, do not +seem to have done much better; but they would never have conquered +all the peoples they have come across, and built up a great empire, +if there had not been good fighting stuff in them. I have no doubt +that we shall thrash them, but I don't think we shall do it as +easily as our troops did in the north."</p> +<p>The time now passed pleasantly with Stanley. He had, after +thinking it over, declined to accept payment for his services; for +this would have hindered his freedom of action, and prevented his +obeying any instructions that his uncle might send him. He +therefore joined as a volunteer interpreter, and was made a member +of the officers' mess. He was specially attached to the native levy +and, soon acquiring their words of command, assisted its officers +in drilling it into something like order.</p> +<p>Early in May a Burmese division, 8000 strong, crossed the Naaf +and established itself at Rutnapullung, fourteen miles south of +Ramoo. As soon as Captain Noton learned that the Burmese had +crossed the river, he sent news of the fact to Chittagong, with a +request that reinforcements should be at once sent to him; and then +moved out with his force from Ramoo, to ascertain the strength of +the enemy. The Burmese were seen upon some hills, where they were +constructing stockades. The small British force advanced against +them, drove them off the hills and, following them, prepared to +attack them in the plain beyond. The guns, however, had not come +up; partly owing to the cowardice of the elephant drivers, and +partly to the fact that it was found that several of the essential +parts of the guns had been left behind.</p> +<p>Without their assistance to clear the way, Captain Noton felt +that it would be imprudent to attack so great a force; and +therefore fell back to Ramoo. Here he was joined by three companies +of the 20th Native Infantry, bringing up his force to close upon a +thousand; of whom about half were sepoys, and the rest native +levies. Had any energy, whatever, been shown by the officer in +command of Chittagong, in sending up reinforcements--which he could +well have spared, now that the point of attack by the Burmese had +been made clear--Captain Noton might have taken the offensive, in +which case serious disaster would have been avoided, and the +Burmese would have been driven back across the Naaf. None, however, +came and, on the morning of the 13th of May, the enemy appeared on +the hill east of Ramoo, being separated from the British force by +the river of the same name.</p> +<p>There was some difference of opinion, among the officers, as to +whether it would be better to maintain a position outside the town, +or to retreat at once; but the belief that reinforcements might +arrive, at any hour, caused Captain Noton to determine to keep in +the open, and so to cover the town as long as possible.</p> +<p>On the evening of the 14th, the Burmese came down to the river +as if to cross it; but retired when the two six-pounder guns opened +fire upon them. That two small guns should produce such an effect +confirmed the British officers in their opinion that the Burmese, +although they might defend stockades well, were of little use in +the open. The next morning, however, the enemy effected the passage +of the river farther away and then, advancing, took possession of a +large tank surrounded by a high embankment.</p> +<p>Captain Noton placed his force in an enclosure, with a bank +three feet high. His right flank was protected by the river; and a +small tank, some sixty paces in front, was occupied by a strong +picket. On his left, somewhat to the rear, was another tank, and at +this the native levies were placed. The main position was held by +the sepoys, with the two six-pounders. As the Burmese advanced, a +sharp fire was opened upon them; but they availed themselves of +every irregularity of the ground, and of cover of all kinds, and +threw up shelter banks with such rapidity that the fire was, by no +means, so effective as had been expected.</p> +<p>During the day news came that the left wing of the 23rd Native +Infantry had left Chittagong on the 13th and, as it should arrive +the next day, Captain Noton determined to hold his ground; though +the Burmese continued to press forward, and a good many men, as +well as two or three officers, had been wounded by their fire. At +nightfall, a consultation was held. The reinforcements were +expected in the morning and, although the native levies had shown +signs of insubordination, and evidently could not be relied upon to +make a stand, if the Burmese attacked in earnest, it was resolved +to retain the position.</p> +<p>During the night, the Burmese pushed forward their trenches. A +heavy fire was maintained on both sides during the day, but it was +with considerable difficulty that the officers in command of the +levies kept the men from bolting.</p> +<p>"Things look very black," Captain Pringle said to Stanley, when +the firing died away, at nightfall. "Reinforcements should have +been here, today. It is scandalous that they should not have been +pushed forward, at once, when we asked for them. Still more so +that, when they once started, they should not have come on with the +greatest possible speed. I doubt whether we shall be able to hold +these cowardly curs together till tomorrow. If they bolt, the +sepoys will be sure to do so, too; in fact, their position would be +altogether untenable, for the Burmese could march round this flank +and take them in rear.</p> +<p>"I wish to Heaven we had two or three companies of white troops, +to cover a retreat. There would be no fear of the sepoys yielding +to a panic, if they had British troops with them; but when they are +outnumbered, as they are now, one can hardly blame them if they +lose heart, when the enemy are ten times their strength, and will +be twenty to one against them, if our fellows here bolt."</p> +<p>The next morning, the Burmese had pushed up their trenches to +within twelve paces of the British lines, and a tremendous fire was +opened. At nine o' clock, in spite of the efforts of their officers +to keep them steady, the native levies bolted; and the officers +with them dashed across the intervening ground towards the main +body. One of them fell dead, and two others were wounded. Stanley +was running, when he fell headlong, without a moment's thought or +consciousness.</p> +<p>The Burmese occupied the tank as soon as the levies had +abandoned it, and their fire at once took the defenders of the main +position in flank. A retreat was now necessary, and the sepoys drew +off in good order but, as the exulting Burmans pressed hotly upon +them, and their cavalry cut off and killed every man who fell +wounded from their ranks, they became seized with a panic. In vain +their officers exhorted them to keep steady. Reaching a rivulet, +the men threw down their rifles and accoutrements as they crossed +it, and took to headlong flight.</p> +<p>The little group of officers gathered together, and fought to +the end. Captains Noton, Truman, and Pringle; Lieutenant Grigg, +Ensign Bennet, and Maismore the doctor were killed. Three officers, +only, made their escape; of these, two were wounded.</p> +<p>The fugitives, both natives and sepoys, continued their flight; +and when, two or three days later, they straggled into Chittagong, +it was found that the total loss in killed and missing amounted to +about two hundred and fifty. Those taken prisoners numbered only +about twenty. All these were more or less severely wounded, for no +quarter had been given. They had, in the pursuit, been passed over +as dead; and when, after this was over, they were found to be +alive, they were spared from no feeling of humanity, but that they +might be sent to Ava, as proofs of the victory obtained over the +British. The number actually found alive was greater, but only +those were spared that were capable of travelling.</p> +<p>Among these was Stanley Brooke. He had remained insensible, +until the pursuit had been discontinued. A violent kick roused him +to consciousness and, sitting up, he found that half a dozen +Burmese were standing round him. His first action, on recovering +his senses, was to discover where he was wounded. Seeing no signs +of blood on his white clothes, he took off his cap and passed his +hand over his head; and found that the blood was flowing from a +wound just on the top, where a bullet had cut away the hair and +scalp, and made a wound nearly three inches long, at the bottom of +which he could feel the bone.</p> +<p>Looking up at the Burmese, he said, in their own language:</p> +<p>"That was a pretty close shave, wasn't it?"</p> +<p>Two or three of them laughed, and all looked amused. Two of them +then helped him to his feet; and the group, among whom there were +some officers, then took him some distance to the rear, where he +was ordered to sit down with three wounded sepoys who had been +brought in.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch3" id="Ch3">Chapter 3</a>: A Prisoner.</h2> +<p>The little group of prisoners received several additions, until +the number mounted up to twenty. The spot where they were placed +was close to the bank of the river and, as all were suffering +severely from thirst, Stanley asked and obtained permission from +the guard to fetch some water. He first knelt down and took a long +drink; then he bathed his head and, soaking his handkerchief with +water, made it into a pad, placed it on the wound, and put his cap +on over it. Then he filled a flask that he carried, and joined his +companions. These were permitted to go down, one by one, to the +river to drink and bathe their wounds.</p> +<p>Stanley had already learned, from them, all they knew of what +had happened after he had been stunned by the bullet. Two of them +had crossed the rivulet, before being wounded; and these said that +they believed all the white officers had been killed, but that they +thought most of the troops had got away.</p> +<p>"It is more than they deserved," Stanley said indignantly. "I +don't say much about the Mugs. They had very little drill or +discipline and, naturally, were afraid of the Burmese, who had long +been their masters; but if the sepoys had kept together under their +officers, they might all have escaped, for the Burmese would never +have been able to break their ranks."</p> +<p>"Some of the officers had been killed, and most of them wounded, +before the retreat began, sahib," one of the sepoys said +apologetically, "and they were ten to one against us."</p> +<p>"Yes, I know that; but you who had fought before should have +known well enough that, as long as you kept together, you could +have beaten them off; and they would have been glad enough to have +given up the pursuit, at last. No doubt they all wanted to have a +share in the plunder of Ramoo."</p> +<p>"What do you think that they are going to do with us, +sahib?"</p> +<p>"From what they said as they brought me here, I think that we +shall be sent to Ava, or Amarapura. They lie close together, and +the court is sometimes at one place and sometimes at the other. +What they will do with us when we get there, I don't know. They may +cut off our heads, they may put us in prison; anyhow, you may be +sure that we shall not have a pleasant time of it.</p> +<p>"All we have to hope for is that the capture of Rangoon, by our +fleet, may lower their pride and bring them to treat for terms. It +sailed nearly six weeks ago from Calcutta, and was to have been +joined by one from Madras and, allowing for delays, it ought to +have been at Rangoon a fortnight since, and would certainly capture +the place without any difficulty. So possibly by the time we reach +Ava we shall find that peace has been made.</p> +<p>"Still, the Burmese may not consider the loss of Rangoon to be +important, and may even try to recapture it--which you may be sure +they won't do, for I heard at Chittagong that there were some +twenty thousand troops coming; which would be quite enough, if +there were but good roads and plenty of transport for them, to +march through Burma from end to end."</p> +<p>In the evening food was brought to the prisoners and, talking +with some of the Burmese who came up to look at them, Stanley +learned that Bandoola himself had not accompanied the force across +the Naaf, and that it was commanded by the rajahs who ruled the +four provinces of Aracan. Upon the following morning the prisoners +were marched away, under a strong guard. Six days later they +reached the camp of Bandoola. They were drawn up at a distance from +the great man's tent. He came down, accompanied by a party of +officers, to look at them. He beckoned to Stanley.</p> +<a id="PicA" name="PicA"></a> +<center><img src="images/a.jpg" alt= +"Stanley is brought before Bandoola, the Burmese general." /></center> +<p>"Ask him if he is an officer," he said to an interpreter, +standing by his side.</p> +<p>The man put the question in Hindustani. Stanley replied, in +Burmese:</p> +<p>"I am an officer, your lordship, but a temporary one, only. I +served in the Mug levy, and was appointed for my knowledge of their +tongue."</p> +<p>"How is it that you come to speak our language?" Bandoola asked, +in surprise.</p> +<p>"I am a trader, your lordship, but when our trade was put an end +to, by the outbreak of the war, I entered the army to serve until +peace was made. I learned the language from a servant in the +service of my uncle, whose assistant I was."</p> +<p>The Burmese general was capable of acts of great cruelty, when +he considered it necessary; but at other times was kindly and good +natured.</p> +<p>"He is but a lad," he said to one of his officers, "and he seems +a bold young fellow. He would be useful as an interpreter to me, +for we shall want to question his countrymen when we make them all +prisoners. However, we must send him with the others to Ava, as he +is the only officer that we have taken; but I will send a message +to some of my friends, at the court, asking them to represent that +I consider he will be useful to me; and praying that he may be kept +for a time and treated well, and may be forwarded to me, again, +when I make my next move against the English."</p> +<p>The following day the prisoners started under the escort of +twenty soldiers, commanded by an officer of some rank, who was +specially charged to take them safely to Ava. It was a fortnight's +march to the Irrawaddy. Until they neared the river the country was +very thinly populated but, when they approached its banks, the +villages were comparatively thick, standing for the most part in +clearings in a great forest. On the march the Burmese officer +frequently talked with Stanley, asked many questions about England +and India; and was evidently surprised, and somewhat sceptical, as +to the account the lad gave him of the fighting strength of the +country. He treated him with considerable indulgence, and sent him +dishes from his own table.</p> +<p>When not talking with him, Stanley marched at the head of the +little party of prisoners--all of whom were sepoys, no quarter +having been given to the native levies. Of an evening, Stanley +endeavoured to keep up the sepoys' spirits by telling them that +probably, by this time, the British expedition had arrived at +Rangoon, and captured it; and that peace would most likely follow, +and they might be exchanged for any Burmese who fell into the hands +of the English.</p> +<p>When they reached a village on the banks of the river the +population, on seeing them, came round and would have maltreated +them; had not the officer interfered, and said he had Bandoola's +orders to carry them safely to the court, and that anyone +interfering with them would be severely punished. The head man of +the village bent low, on hearing the general's name.</p> +<p>"I ask your pardon, my lord. The prisoners shall not be touched. +But have you heard the news?"</p> +<p>"I have heard no news," the officer said.</p> +<p>"It arrived here yesterday, my lord. The barbarians have had the +audacity to sail up, with a great fleet of ships, to Rangoon. They +had vessels of war with them and, though our forts fired upon them, +they had so many cannon that we could not resist them, and they +have captured the town. This happened a fortnight since."</p> +<p>The officer stood thunderstruck at what appeared, to him, to be +an act of audacious insolence. However, after a moment's pause, he +said wrathfully:</p> +<p>"It is of little matter. The town was weak, and in no position +for defence; but a force will soon go down to sweep these +barbarians away. Now, get ready your war galley, as soon as +possible."</p> +<p>Each village on the river was compelled, by law, to furnish a +war galley for the king's service whenever it might be required. +These carried from fifty to a hundred men, and some three hundred +of these boats were always available for service, and constituted +one of the strongest divisions of the fighting force of the Burman +empire. The village was a large one, and in half an hour the crew +of the galley were on board and, rowing forty oars, started up the +river.</p> +<p>"What think you of this news?" the officer said, beckoning to +Stanley to take his place in front of him. "These men must be mad, +to tempt the anger of the Lord of the Golden Stool, the mighty +Emperor. Had you heard aught of this?"</p> +<p>"I heard but a vague rumour that a fleet had been collected, but +I heard nothing for certain as to its destination."</p> +<p>"It is madness," the officer repeated. "We shall sweep them into +the sea. How many of them are there, do you think?"</p> +<p>"As to that I can say little, my lord. I only heard a report +that some ships and troops were to sail--some from Madras and some +from Calcutta--but of the number of the men and ships, I know +nothing for certain."</p> +<p>"They have taken evil council," the officer said, gravely. "I +have heard that they gained some slight advantage, in Cachar; but +there they had but irregular troops to meet, largely Assamese, who +are but poor cowards. This little success must have turned their +heads. They will now have our regular forces to deal with, and +these will number a hundred thousand--or twice as many, if +necessary. Think you that the handful that would be transported in +ships can stand against such a host?"</p> +<p>"There may be more than you think, my lord. Many of the ships +will be very big, much bigger than those that trade with Rangoon; +and some of them will carry as many as five hundred men."</p> +<p>"Even so," the officer said scornfully; "if there were +twenty-five such ships, or even fifty, the force would be as +nothing to us. They will have to take to their vessels, as soon as +our army approaches."</p> +<p>"It may be so, sir; but I think that they will scarce go without +fighting. I would represent to you that, although much fewer in +numbers than your army which attacked us, at Ramoo, the troops made +a stout fight of it; and that they fought steadily, until the Mugs +ran away. After that, from what I hear, I admit that they fled +shamefully. But the troops that come to Rangoon will be better than +those were, for there will be white regiments among them; and +though these may, as you say, be overpowered with numbers and +destroyed, I do not think that you will see them running away."</p> +<p>"And you think that they will really venture to withstand +us?</p> +<p>"I think that they will endeavour to do so."</p> +<p>"Why, there will scarce be an occasion for fighting," the +officer said, disdainfully. "They were mad to come; they are +madder, still, to come now. The rainy season is just at hand. In +another week it will be upon us. The rivers will spread, the flat +country will be a marsh. Even we, who are accustomed to it, suffer. +In places like Rangoon fever and disease will sweep them away and, +when the dry season comes and our troops assemble to fight them, +there will be none left. They will die off like flies. We shall +scarce capture enough to send as prisoners to the emperor."</p> +<p>Stanley felt that, in this respect, the Burman's prophecies were +but too likely to be fulfilled. He knew how deadly were the swamp +fevers to white men; and that in spite of his comfortable home on +board the dhow and boat, he had himself suffered although, during +the wet season, his uncle made a point of sailing along the coast, +and of ascending only rivers that flowed between high banks and +through a country free from swamps. He remembered that his uncle +had spoken, very strongly, of the folly of the expedition being +timed to arrive on the coast of Burma at the beginning of the wet +season; and had said that they would suffer terribly from fever +before they could advance up the country, unless it was intended to +confine the operations to the coast towns, until the dry season set +in.</p> +<p>It would indeed have been impossible to have chosen a worse time +for the expedition but, doubtless, the government of India thought +chiefly of the necessity for forcing the Burmese to stand on the +defensive, and of so preventing the invasion of India by a vast +army. Unquestionably, too, they believed that the occupation of +Rangoon, and the stoppage of all trade, would show the court of Ava +that they had embarked in a struggle with no contemptible foe; and +would be glad to abate their pretensions, and to agree to fair +terms of peace.</p> +<p>The Bengal force that had been embarked consisted of two British +regiments--the 13th and 38th--a battalion of native infantry, and +two batteries of European artillery, amounting in all to 2175 men. +The Madras force--of which one division was sent on at once, the +other was to follow shortly--consisted of the 41st and 89th +Regiments, the Madras European regiment, seven battalions of native +infantry, and four batteries of artillery, amounting to 9300 men; +making a total of 11475 fighting men, of whom nearly five thousand +were Europeans. In addition to the transports, the Bengal force was +accompanied by a flotilla of twenty gun-brigs and as many +row-boats, each armed with an eighteen-pounder; the Larne and +Sophia sloop, belonging to the Royal Navy; several of the Company's +cruisers; and the steamboat Diana. General Sir A. Campbell was +appointed to the chief command, and Colonel M'Bean, with the rank +of Brigadier General, commanded the Madras force.</p> +<p>The Bengal squadron sailed from Saugur in the middle of April; +and reached the rendezvous, Port Cornwallis, in the Andaman +Islands, at the end of the month. The Madras first division sailed +at the same time, and joined them a few days later; and the whole +force, under the escort of H. M. frigate Liffey and the Slaney, +sloop of war, left Port Cornwallis on the 5th of May, and arrived +on the 9th at the mouth of the Irrawaddy.</p> +<p>Forces were detached for the capture of the islands of Chuduba +and Negrais. On the 10th the fleet entered the river and anchored +within the bar and, on the following morning, proceeded with the +flood tide up to Rangoon, the Liffey and the Larne leading the way. +A few shots were fired as they went up the river; but the Burmese +were taken wholly by surprise, the idea that the English would +venture to invade them never having entered their minds.</p> +<p>There was considerable disappointment on board the fleet, when +Rangoon came into sight. It was situated on the north bank of the +main branch of the river, thirty miles from the sea. It extended +about nine hundred yards along the bank, and was six or seven +hundred yards wide, at its broadest part. Beyond the town were some +suburbs, outside the palisade that inclosed it. The palisades were +ten or twelve feet high, strengthened by embankments of earth +thrown up against them, on the inner side. One face of the defences +ran along the river bank, while the others were protected by a +shallow creek communicating with the river. The town itself +consisted, for the most part, of miserable and dirty hovels; and of +a few official buildings of larger size.</p> +<p>At twelve o'clock the Liffey anchored abreast of the principal +battery, close to the water gate; the transports being ranged in a +line in rear of her. A proclamation had been sent on shore, on the +previous day, giving assurances of protection to the people at +large, and to all who should offer no resistance.</p> +<p>When the guns of the fleet were loaded, a pause ensued. The town +was evidently incapable of offering resistance, and it was hoped +that it would capitulate. The Burmese were seen standing at their +guns, but they also remained inactive, apparently paralysed at the +appearance of this great fleet of vessels--of a size hitherto +undreamt of by them--and the threatening guns pointed towards them. +However, they were at last goaded, by the orders and threats of +their officers, to open fire upon the ships.</p> +<p>The frigate at once replied with a broadside. In a very few +minutes, every gun on shore was silenced, and the Burmese fled in +confusion from their works. As soon as they did so, the signal for +disembarkation was made. The troops crowded into the boats, which +rowed for the shore; and the soldiers entered the town without +resistance, and found it completely deserted.</p> +<p>The whole of the population had been driven out by the governor +on the previous day and, according to Burmese custom, the men had +all been formed into a levy, while the women and children were held +under guard, as hostages for their husbands and fathers--their +lives being forfeited in case of desertion, or cowardice, by their +male relations.</p> +<p>The foreigners in the town had all been seized. They were few in +number, consisting of some eight or ten British traders and +American missionaries. These, after being fettered, were taken to +the Custom House prison. They were brought up and tried, early on +the morning of the attack, and were accused of having arranged the +assault on the town. They naturally urged that, if they had had the +least knowledge that it was going to be made, they would have left +the place in time. But the Burmese at once condemned them to death, +and they were taken back to the prison to be executed.</p> +<p>The sentence was not carried out. The Burmese had intended to +execute them on the walls, in sight of their countrymen; and the +authorities had all assembled at the prison for the purpose when, +fortunately, a shot from the first broadside fired passed through +the building, causing an instant stampede. The chiefs at once left +the city; and the prisoners, heavily chained, were marched some +distance into the country. A party of British troops were, however, +pushed forward in advance of the town, as soon as it was occupied; +and the guard, in alarm for their own safety, placed the prisoners +in a house and made off; and a patrol found them there, on the +following morning, and brought them into the town.</p> +<p>The great pagoda, standing two miles and a half from the town, +was at once occupied as an advanced position by the British. It +stood upon a conical hill, rising seventy-five feet above the +plain. The area on the top was somewhat over two acres; and in the +centre rose the pagoda, three hundred and thirty-eight feet +high.</p> +<p>Every boat on the river was found to have been removed. In spite +of proclamations promising good treatment, none of the inhabitants +returned to the town, being prevented from doing so by the Burmese +authorities and troops. No stores whatever had been found and, till +the end of the wet season, the army had to depend entirely upon the +fleet for provisions; and remained cooped up in the wretched and +unhealthy town, suffering severely from fever and malaria.</p> +<p>The boat in which Stanley and the other prisoners were conveyed +was changed at every village going up the river, as the officer was +carrying the despatches from Bandoola to the court. A flag was +hoisted as the boat came in sight of a village. This was the signal +that another was required and, within two or three minutes of their +arrival, the prisoners, their guard and officer were on their way +again.</p> +<p>Thus they proceeded, night and day and, in four days, arrived at +Ava. Leaving the prisoners in charge of the guard, the officer at +once proceeded to the palace. In an hour guns were fired, drums +beat, and the bells of the pagodas rung, to give notice to the +population that a great victory had been won over the English, and +their army annihilated, by Bandoola and his valiant troops. This +obliterated the impression produced by the news that had arrived, a +few days previously, of the landing at Rangoon; and there were +great rejoicings among the population.</p> +<p>An officer from the palace presently came down to the boat, and +the prisoners were marched through the streets to a jail, amid the +jeers of the mob. Stanley was surprised at the meanness of the +town; the great majority of the houses being built of bamboo, and +thatched with grass, and having a very poor appearance. The public +buildings and the houses of the great officers were constructed of +planks, and tiled; but were heavy and tasteless, and it was only +upon the innumerable pagodas, in and around the town, that any care +seemed to have been bestowed.</p> +<p>He had wondered much at the numerous pagodas that they had seen, +near every town and village, as they passed up; but the officer had +informed him that these were all private property, and that it was +considered the most meritorious of actions to erect one; +consequently every man who had means to do so built a pagoda, large +or small in proportion to the sum that he could bestow upon it. On +Stanley's remarking upon the great number that were in ruins, the +officer replied that it was considered so much more meritorious an +action to build a pagoda than to repair one that, after the death +of the founder, they were generally suffered to fall into +decay.</p> +<p>For some days the prisoners were taken out, every day, and +marched about the town for some time, so as to afford the +population ocular proof of the victory gained by Bandoola. The +place in which they were confined was small and filthy but, at the +end of a week, Stanley was taken out and placed in a room by +himself; and here the officer who had had charge of him paid him a +visit, an hour or two later.</p> +<p>"I have expressed to the court," he said, "the wishes of the +general, and have had permission accorded for you to receive +different treatment from the others; partly because you are an +officer, but principally because the general thinks that you may be +made useful to him. I have informed the officer of the prison that +you are to be at liberty to walk about in the city, when you +please; but that to protect you from violence, an officer and two +soldiers are to accompany you, so long as you may think such a +precaution necessary. I have ordered a dress of our fashion to be +brought to you as, otherwise, you could not go into the streets +without being mobbed."</p> +<p>Stanley expressed his gratitude to the officer for obtaining +these indulgences, and the latter replied:</p> +<p>"I acted upon the orders of the general, but it has been a +pleasure to me; for I see that you are a young man of merit, and I +have learned much from you about your people during the journey; +and have seen that, foolish as they have been to undertake to match +themselves against us, there are yet some things that might be +learned from them; and that, if they had remained in their island, +many months' journey away from here, they might have been worthy of +our friendship."</p> +<p>A short time after the officer had left, a soldier brought up +some food of a very much better nature than that with which Stanley +had been hitherto supplied. Half an hour later, the dress arrived. +It was that of a Burmese officer of inferior grade; and consisted +of a tunic of thick cloth, coming down to the knees; leathern sword +belt; a sort of tippet resembling that of an English coachman, with +three layers of cloth thickly quilted; and a leathern helmet going +up to a point in the centre, with a flap to protect the neck and +ears. With it were worn tight-fitting stockings of cloth, and low +shoes.</p> +<p>Presently an officer came in.</p> +<p>"I am ordered to go out with you, once a day, at whatever hour +you may desire. I am a relative of the officer who brought you +here, and he has requested me to look after your safety."</p> +<p>"I am much obliged to you, sir," Stanley said, "and shall be +glad, indeed, to go out to see the city. Your kinsman has kindly +sent me a dress; but if I am not to be noticed, it will be +necessary for me to stain my face and hands, somewhat."</p> +<p>"That I have thought of," the officer said, "and have brought +with me some dye which will darken your skin. It would be worse +than useless for you to dress as a Burman, unless you did so; for +it would seem even more singular, to the people in the streets, +that a white man should be seen walking about dressed as an +officer, than that a white prisoner should be taken through the +streets under a guard.</p> +<p>"I am ready to go out with you now, if you wish it."</p> +<p>"I shall be ready in a few minutes," Stanley replied and, on +being left alone, at once changed his attire and stained his face +and hands.</p> +<p>He had just finished when the officer returned. He smiled and +said:</p> +<p>"There is no fear of your being suspected, now; and you might +really go about safely without a guard, unless you were to enter +into conversation with anyone. You speak the language very well, +but your accent is not quite the same as ours, here, though in +Aracan it would pass unremarked."</p> +<p>As they went out from the prison, the officer told two soldiers +who were waiting there to follow, at a distance.</p> +<p>"Do not approach us," he said, "unless I call you up."</p> +<p>The houses were not constructed in continuous rows, but were +very scattered, each house having its inclosure or garden. The +population was very small, in comparison to the area occupied by +the town. This was divided into two parts--the inner and outer +town. The whole was surrounded by a brick wall, five miles and a +half in circumference, some sixteen feet high and ten feet in +thickness, strengthened on the inside by a great bank of earth. The +inner town was inclosed by a separate wall, with a deep ditch on +two sides, the river Irrawaddy on the third, and a tributary river +on the fourth.</p> +<p>A considerable portion of the inclosed area was occupied by the +royal quarter; containing the palace, the court of justice, the +council chamber, arsenal, and the houses of the ministers and chief +officials. This was cut off from the rest by a strong and +well-built wall, twenty feet high, outside which was a stockade of +the same height. The total population of Ava was but 25,000.</p> +<p>The officer did not take Stanley to the royal quarter, observing +that it was better not to go there as, although he had leave to +walk in the town, it might give offence were he to show himself +near the palace; but after going through the wall, they visited two +or three of the markets, of which there were eleven in the +town.</p> +<p>The markets consisted of thatched huts and sheds, and were well +supplied with the products of the country. Here were rice, maize, +wheat, and various other grains; sticks of sugar cane, tobacco, +cotton, and indigo; mangoes, oranges, pineapples, custard apples, +and plantains were in abundance; also peacocks, jungle fowl, +pigeons, partridges, geese, ducks, and snipes--but little meat was +on sale, as the Burman religion forbids the killing of animals for +food. Venison was the only meat allowed to be sold in the markets; +but there were lizards, iguanas, and snakes, which were exposed +freely for sale; and there were large quantities of turtle and +tortoise eggs, which had been brought up from the delta.</p> +<p>Stanley saw that there had really been no great occasion for him +to stain his skin, as the people were, for the most part, lighter +in colour than the Hindoos. Many of the men had, however, stained +their faces to a darker colour; and all were tattooed, more or +less. Men, women, and children were all smoking; and frequently, +when both hands were required for any purpose, thrust their cigars +into the large holes bored in the lobes of their ears. Both men and +women were somewhat short in stature, but squarely built and +muscular and, in the majority of cases, inclined to be fat.</p> +<p>The men wore a sort of kilt, consisting of a double piece of +cloth, wrapped round the body and falling to the knee. Over this +was a loose tunic, with sleeves open in front. The headdress was a +scanty white turban.</p> +<p>The dress of the women was somewhat similar to that of the +Hindoos, consisting of a single garment like a sheet wrapped round +the body, fastening under the arms and falling to the ankles. Those +of the upper classes were more elaborate. The rank among the women +was distinguished, so Stanley's guide pointed out to him, by the +manner in which the hair was plaited and twisted, and by the +ornaments in it.</p> +<p>The men, like the women, wore their hair long but, while the men +wore theirs in a knot at the top of the head, the women gathered it +in at the back. Their faces were broad at the cheekbones, but +narrowed in sharply, both at the forehead and chin. The narrow and +oblique eyes showed the relationship between the Burmese and their +Chinese neighbours. They seemed to Stanley a light-hearted, merry +people, going about their business with much chatter and laughter; +and the sound of musical instruments could often be heard, inside +the houses. Several men, in bright yellow garments, mingled with +the crowds in the market. These were priests, the officer told him; +and it would be a mortal act of sacrilege, were anyone else to wear +that colour.</p> +<p>Stanley remarked upon seeing so few soldiers, and the officer +told him that there was no regular army in Burma. Every man capable +of carrying arms was obliged to serve in case of war but, with the +exception of the king's bodyguard, and a very small body of men who +were police, rather than soldiers, there was no force permanently +kept up. Every man was expected to know something of military duty, +and all were able to build stockades. From the fact that the flesh +of wild fowl formed one of the principal articles of food, the +peasantry throughout the country were all accustomed to the use of +the gun, and were fair marksmen.</p> +<p>"But you yourself are an officer," Stanley said.</p> +<p>"At present, yes; but tomorrow I may return to my land. It is +the same with the highest minister. One day he may be a trader but, +if recommended to the king as one possessing ability, straightway +he is chosen to be a high official. If he does not please the king, +or fails in his duties, then the next day he may be selling cloth +in the bazaar again.</p> +<p>"Everything is at the will of the king. Nobody is born with +fortune or rank, for everything belongs to the king and, at a man's +death, all goes back to him. Thus everyone in the land has an equal +chance. In war the bravest becomes a general, in peace the +cleverest is chosen as a councillor."</p> +<p>Walking about, Stanley soon found that there were a great +variety of dialects talked in the streets, and that the language of +the Burmese of the coast, of the natives of Pegu and the central +province, and of those from districts bordering on the Shan states +or the frontiers of China, differed as widely as those of the most +remote parts of Great Britain did from each other. This being so, +he was convinced that there would be no difficulty, whatever, in +passing as a native, without attracting any observation or inquiry, +so far as the language went.</p> +<p>His features and, still more, the shape of his face might, +however, be noticed by the first comer, in the daytime. He thought, +indeed, that a little tinge of colour in the corner of the eyes, so +as to lengthen their appearance and give an oblique cast to them, +would make a difference. The general shape of the head was +unalterable, but the Burmese nose and mouth did not differ very +greatly from the European; except that the nostrils were smaller +and, in shape, were round rather than oval.</p> +<p>For three weeks he continued the same life, and then the Burmese +officer, with whom he had now become very friendly, said when he +entered one morning:</p> +<p>"You must not go out today. There is news that your people have +made two forward marches. The first was against a stockade, which +they took, and killed many of our men; the other time they marched +out four or five miles, had a fight with our troops, and again +killed many. These things have angered the king and the people. Of +course it is nothing, for our troops are only beginning to +assemble; but it is considered insolent in the extreme, and the +king's face is darkened against your countrymen. Four of the +prisoners have been taken out this morning and publicly executed +and, if the news of another defeat comes, I fear that it will be +very dangerous, even for you."</p> +<p>"What had I best do, my friend?"</p> +<p>"I would fain save you, for we have come to know each other; and +I see that there is much good in your ways, though they differ +greatly from ours. Were I to take you out, as usual, you might be +killed in the streets; were you to slip away and escape, I should +assuredly be put to death; but if in any way I can help you, I +would fain do so. My relation who brought you up here left, a +fortnight since, to rejoin Bandoola; so his influence cannot serve +you.</p> +<p>"I do not say that you might not escape from this prison--since +you are not, like the others, confined in a dungeon--but I see not +what you could do, or where you could go. Were you to disappear, +orders would be sent down the river to every village, and every +passing craft would be examined, and you would be sure to be +detected; while it would be well-nigh impossible to travel the +country on foot, for it is but thinly inhabited. There are often +very long distances between the villages, and much of the country +is swamp and forest, without paths; for the village trade goes by +the river, and they have little communication with each other.</p> +<p>"I know that, from what you say, you think that your troops will +beat ours, even when we assemble in large numbers. Were this so, I +fear that there would be little chance of your life being spared. +Were it not for that, I should say that, Bandoola having +recommended you, you would be in no danger here, and had better +remain until peace is made.</p> +<p>"What think you, yourself?"</p> +<p>"It is very difficult to reply, at once," Stanley said, "but I +thank you greatly for your offer to befriend me, in any way you +can. I do not say that I had not thought of escape, for I have of +course done so. But it seemed to me a thing in the distance; and +that, at any rate until the rains were over and the rivers had +sunk, it would be useless to attempt it. I see, now, that it will +be safest for me to try without delay. If you will come in again, +this afternoon, I will tell you what I have thought of."</p> +<p>"I will do so; and I, myself, will try to think how best the +matter can be managed. We must remember that the great thing is for +you to find concealment, for the present. After the search for you +has been made for some time, it will die away; and it will then be +the easiest plan for you to make your way down the river."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch4" id="Ch4">Chapter 4</a>: A Ruined Temple.</h2> +<p>After the officer left him, Stanley sat thinking for a long +time. He himself inclined strongly towards the river; but he saw +that, at present, the difficulties would be very great. The war +boats were passing up and down, and bodies of troops were being +carried down in large craft. In every village the men, he knew, +were assembling and drilling. Even in Ava he could see the +difference in the population, the proportion of men to women having +markedly decreased since his arrival.</p> +<p>As to the journey by land, it appeared to him impossible. He +was, too, altogether without money and, whether by water or land, +it would be necessary to go into the villages to buy provisions. +Indeed, money would have been almost useless, for there was no +coined money in Burma; payments being made in lead, for small +amounts, or in silver for large ones--the quantity necessary being +cut off from small sticks or bars, or paid in filings.</p> +<p>It seemed to him that the best thing would be to take to the +forest, for a time; and endeavour to subsist upon wild fruits or, +if these were not to be found there, to go out into the fields and +orchards at night, and so manage to hold on for a few weeks. His +friend told him that, in the forests along the principal lines of +route to the capital, were many bad characters--persons who had +committed crime and fled from justice. Some were cultivators who, +having been unable to pay their taxes, had deserted their land and +taken to the woods. All committed depredations, and traders coming +into the town from the Shan states, or from the country where +rubies and emeralds were found, always travelled in caravans for +mutual protection. At times levies were called out, and many of +these marauders were killed.</p> +<p>Stanley, then, had hit upon nothing definite when the officer +returned in the afternoon and, in reply to the latter's question, +he acknowledged at once that the only thing he could see was to +take to the forest, until the active search for him had ceased.</p> +<p>"You would find it difficult to maintain yourself. I have +thought of a better way than that. I am acquainted with a Phongee, +who lives in a temple in a lonely spot, four miles away. He is a +good man, though somewhat strange in his habits; and I feel sure +that, on my recommendation, he would take you in. There would be +little chance of your being discovered there. You could not go +dressed as you are, but must disguise yourself as a peasant; though +it might be well to retain your present attire, which may be useful +to you, afterwards. I fear that you will fare badly with him, in +the way of food; there will be enough to eat, but it will be of the +simplest."</p> +<p>"So that there is enough to keep life together, it matters +little what it is."</p> +<p>"Then that is settled.</p> +<p>"Now, about making your escape from here. Your door is closely +barred, at night; and there is no window save those four little +holes, high up in the wall, which scarce a bird could get +through."</p> +<p>"I could cut through the thatch above," Stanley said, "if I had +but something that I could stand upon to do so. There are some +bamboos lying just at the bottom of the steps. With these and some +cord I might make a sort of ladder, and should then be able to get +at the thatch."</p> +<p>"I will bring you some cord, tomorrow, for that and to let +yourself down to the ground. Then I will arrange where to meet you, +and will guide you out of the town and take you to the priest. I +will bring a disguise for you, and some stain for your body and +arms for, as a peasant, you would be naked to the waist. I can +think of nothing better."</p> +<p>"I thank you most heartily," Stanley said, "and trust that you +may get into no trouble for the kindness that you have shown +me."</p> +<p>"There is no fear of that, my friend. No one will know that I +have been away from the town. I am greatly afraid that this will be +all that I shall be able to do for you; for I am told that I am to +go down the river with the next batch of troops, which will start +in three days. I have only been informed of it since I saw you this +morning. Had it not been for you I should have been glad; for it is +in war time, only, that one can obtain honour and promotion."</p> +<p>"I am sorry that you are going, sir. I shall miss your kindness, +sorely; but I can understand your desire to go to the front. It is +the same with us; when there is a war, every officer and soldier +hopes that his regiment will be sent there. However, I shall see +you again.</p> +<p>"Has Bandoola's army moved yet?"</p> +<p>"No; nor do I think that it will do so. It is a long march down +to Rangoon from Ramoo; and I believe that he will remain where he +is, until he sees how matters go at Rangoon. As soon as your people +are driven out, he will be joined by a great army, and will march +to Dacca. There our troops from the north will join him; and then +he will go to India, we think."</p> +<p>"I fancy," Stanley said with a smile, "if he waits until we are +turned out from Rangoon, his stay at Ramoo will be a long one."</p> +<p>The next day the officer brought several yards of strong cloth, +such as was worn by the peasants; a piece of muslin to make the +circular band that was worn by the lower class, instead of a +complete turban; and a lot of horse hair to be worn on the top of +the head.</p> +<p>"Now," he said, "strip to the waist, and I will dye your body. I +have dyes of two colours here; one for the skin, and the other to +draw lines on the face, so as to make you look older; and with this +I can also imitate tattoo marks on your chest and shoulders. Here +is a long knife, such as everyone wears, and here is the cord.</p> +<p>"As soon as it is getting dark you must carry up two of the +bamboo poles, taking care that no one observes you do so. There is +seldom anyone in the courtyard. I have had the knife sharpened, and +it will cut through the thatch, easily enough. When you get away, +walk straight to the market that lies nearest to us. I will be at +its entrance. It will take you, I suppose, two hours to make your +ladder and get out. You cannot begin until the guard closes your +door. You tell me he never comes in."</p> +<p>"No, he brings the last meal an hour before sunset. I generally +sit on the top of the steps, till he comes up to lock the door, +which is about nine o'clock; and I do not see him again until he +unbars the door in the morning. I should not think that it will +take as long as two hours to make the ladder, and cut the thatch; +at any rate, by eleven I ought to join you.</p> +<p>"I suppose the gates are open."</p> +<p>"Oh, yes! They are never closed, though of course they would be, +if an enemy were near. There is no guard anywhere."</p> +<p>After staining Stanley's skin, the officer waited a quarter of +an hour for it to dry thoroughly; and then proceeded to draw lines +on his face, across the forehead, and from the corners of his eyes; +and then spent nearly an hour in executing rough tattoo marks on +his body and arms.</p> +<p>"This dye is very good, and will last for weeks before it begins +to fade. I will bring with me another bottle, tonight, so that you +can at least re-dye your skin.</p> +<p>"Here is some wax. You must turn your hair up from the neck, and +plaster it in its place with it. The turban will prevent anyone +seeing how short the hair is. Here is a little bottle of black dye, +with which you had better colour it, before fixing it with the +wax."</p> +<p>Stanley's hair had not been cut for some time before he had been +captured by the Burmese and, in the two months that had since +elapsed, it had grown very long; and could therefore be turned up +as the officer suggested. Putting on his usual garments, he sat at +his place, at the door of the cell, until the guard brought up his +evening meal. Having eaten this, he dyed his hair and, half an hour +later, turned it up, plastering it with wax, and tied a bit of +fibre round where the turban would come.</p> +<p>By this time it was getting dusk. He sat at the door at the top +of the steps, until he saw that the courtyard was deserted; the +guard at the gate having gone outside, to enjoy the coolness of the +air. Then he ran down the steps, took two bamboo poles about ten +feet in length, and two short pieces of the same wood no thicker +than his finger and, hurrying up the steps with them, laid them +down against the side of the room. Then he went to the steps again, +and sat there until he saw the guard coming across to fasten his +door; when he went in and, as soon as he heard the bars put up, +began his preparations.</p> +<p>First he lashed the short pieces across the ends of the two +bamboos, so as to keep them a foot apart; then he put ratlines +across, and soon had the ladder completed. He made up his clothes +into a bundle, wrapped the rough cloth round his waist, adjusted +the knot of horse hair on the top of his head, and fastened it +there with wax. He wound the turban round below, and his disguise +was complete.</p> +<p>Fixing the ladder against the wall he climbed it, and it was not +long before he cut a hole through the thatch of sufficient size to +pass out. The work had taken him longer than he had expected, for +it had to be done in absolute darkness; however, he was sure that +he was well within his time. Fastening the end of the rope to one +of the bamboo rafters, he descended the ladder and picked up his +bundle; then climbed up again, got halfway out of the hole, and +listened intently. Everything was quiet in the street and, in +another minute, he stood on the ground.</p> +<p>When he turned into the principal street, there were still many +people about. Sounds of music and singing came from the windows, +for the Burmese are very fond of music, and often pass the whole +night in playing and singing. There was no risk whatever of +detection now, and he stepped briskly along until he came to the +open space, with its rows of little thatched huts. Here he paused +for a minute, and the officer stepped out from behind a house and +joined him.</p> +<p>"I was not sure at first that it was you," he said. "Your +disguise is excellent. You had better follow me, now, until we get +beyond the busy streets."</p> +<p>Keeping some twenty yards behind his guide, Stanley went on +until, after nearly half an hour's walking, they passed through a +gate in the city walls. He now closed up to the officer and, after +another half-hour's walk across a cultivated country, they entered +a forest. The ground now rose steadily and, after keeping on for +two miles, they emerged from the trees at the top of a hill. The +space had been cleared of timber, but it was nearly covered with +bushes and young trees. In the centre were the ruins of a temple, +that had evidently existed long before the Burmese dynasty occupied +the country, and had been erected by some older race. It was +roofless; the walls had, in places, fallen; and the ruins were +covered with vegetation.</p> +<p>The Burman ascended some broken steps, entered the temple, and +crossed to one of the opposite corners. A dim light was burning in +a small apartment, which had been roofed with thatch. A man was +lying, dressed, on a heap of leaves at one side. He started up as +the officer entered.</p> +<p>"Who is it who comes here at this hour?" he asked.</p> +<p>"Thekyn," the officer answered.</p> +<p>"I am glad to see you," the Phongee said, "whatever may bring +you here. You have not fallen into trouble, I hope?"</p> +<p>"In no way, good priest. I am starting, in two days, down the +river to fight the barbarians; but before I go, I want you to do me +a favour."</p> +<p>The Phongee smiled.</p> +<p>"Beyond naming you in my prayers, Thekyn, there is but little +that a hermit can do for any man."</p> +<p>"Not so, in this case," the officer said. "I have one here with +me who needs rest, and concealment. I would rather that you did not +ask who he is. He has done no crime, and yet he is in danger; and +for a month, maybe, he needs a shelter. Will you give it him, for +my sake?"</p> +<p>"Assuredly I will," the priest said. "Your father was one of my +dearest friends, in the days when I dwelt in the city. I would +gladly do all in my power for his son, and this is but a small +thing that you ask. Let him enter."</p> +<p>Stanley went in. The priest took down the little lamp, from a +shelf on which it stood, and held it near the lad's face. Then he +turned, with a smile, to Thekyn:</p> +<p>"The painting is but clumsily done," he said, "though maybe it +would pass without close examination. He is a stranger, and comes +of a race unknown to me but, as you said, it matters not to me who +he is; suffice that he is a friend of yours. He is welcome to a +share of my shelter, and my food; though the shelter is rough, and +the food somewhat scanty. Of late few, indeed, have sought me for, +as I hear, most of the men have gone down to the war."</p> +<p>"I have brought you some food," the officer said; for Stanley +had observed that he also carried a bundle, a larger one than his +own. "Here is a supply of rice, that will last for some time; and +this, with your offerings, will suffice to keep things going. My +friend is not, like you, bound by his religion not to take life; +and I know that snakes are very plentiful round here."</p> +<p>Snakes had formed a frequent article of his diet, since he had +been captured; and Stanley had lost the repugnance to them that he +at first felt, so the prospect of their forming the staple of his +food was not disagreeable to him. It would also afford him some +employment to search for and kill them.</p> +<p>"I shall be well content," he said, "with anything that I can +get, and trust that I shall be no burden upon you."</p> +<p>"You will assuredly be none," the priest replied. "Here must be +at least thirty pounds of rice which, alone, would keep two men +alive for a month. As regards the snakes, though I may not kill +them, I may eat them when killed; and indeed, there are few things +better. In truth, I should not be sorry to have some of the +creatures out of the way; for they swarm round here so thickly that +I have to pay great heed, when I walk, lest I step upon them."</p> +<p>"Have you been troubled with robbers, of late, father?" Thekyn +asked.</p> +<p>"They trouble me not at all," the priest said. "Men come, +sometimes. They may be robbers, or they may not. I ask no +questions. They sometimes bring fruit and other offerings, and I +know that I need not fear them. I have nought to lose, save my +life; and he would be indeed an evil man who would dare to lift his +finger against a priest--one who harms not anyone, and is ready to +share what food he has with any man who comes to him hungry."</p> +<p>"Well, father, I will say goodbye. I must be back to the city +before men are about, as I would not that my absence should be +discovered."</p> +<p>"Peace be with you, my son. May you come back safe from the +wars. My prayers will be said for you, night and morning.</p> +<p>"Be in no uneasiness as to your friend. If any should ask me +about my companion, I shall reply that he is one who has undertaken +to rid me of some of the snakes, who dispute the possession of this +place with me."</p> +<p>Thekyn motioned to Stanley to come outside the hut with him and, +when he did so, handed to him a small but heavy bag.</p> +<p>"This is lead," he said. "You will need it, when you start on +your journey down the country. There are eight pounds of it and, +from what you have seen in the market, you will know how much food +can be got for a small amount of lead. I would that I could do more +for you, and assist your flight."</p> +<p>"You have done much indeed, very much and, should I regain my +friends, I will endeavour to do as much by one of your countrymen, +for your sake. I hope that, when this war is over, I may meet you +again."</p> +<p>"I hope so," the Burman said warmly. "I cannot but think that +you will succeed in getting away."</p> +<p>"My son," the old priest said, when Stanley returned to his +cell, "I am going to my prayers. I always rise at this hour, and +pray till morning; therefore you may as well lay yourself down on +these leaves. There is another cell, like this, in the opposite +corner of the temple. In the morning you can cut boughs, and roof +it like this; and make your bed there. There is no room for +another, here; and it will doubtless be more pleasant for you to +have a place to yourself, where you can go and come as you like; +for in the day women come up to consult me, and ask for my +prayers--but mind how you enter it for the first time as, like as +not, there will be snakes sheltering there."</p> +<p>Stanley lay awake for a time, listening to the monotonous voice +of the priest as he repeated his prayers; but his senses soon +wandered, and he slept soundly till daybreak.</p> +<p>His first step was to cut a stout stick, and he then proceeded +to the other cell, which was partially blocked up with stone from +the fallen roof. It took him two hours to carry this stuff out, and +he killed no less than nine snakes that he disturbed in his work. +The prospect of sleeping in a place so frequented was not a +pleasant one, especially as the cell had no door to it; and he +resolved at once to erect some sort of bed place, where he might be +beyond their reach. For this purpose he cut two poles, each three +or four inches longer than the cell. One end of each he sharpened, +and drove in between the interstices of the stone, at a distance of +some two feet and a half apart and four feet from the ground. The +other ends he hammered with a heavy stone against the opposite +wall, until they would go down no farther. Then he split up some +more wood and lashed strips, almost touching each other, underneath +the two poles, by the aid of some strong creepers. Then he filled +up the bed place, between the poles, with dry leaves.</p> +<p>One end of the bed was some inches higher than the other. This +was immaterial, and he felt satisfied that even the craftiest snake +could not reach him.</p> +<p>As to the roof, he was by no means particular about it. In this +part of Burma the rainfall is very small, the inundations being the +effect of heavy rains in the distant hill country which, as they +come down, raise the level of the rivers, in some cases, as much as +eighteen feet, and overflow the low-lying country.</p> +<p>Before beginning to construct the bed, he had carried the snakes +into the Phongee; after first cutting off their heads which, as he +knew, the Burmans never touch.</p> +<p>"This is good, indeed, my son," the priest said. "Here we have +our breakfast and dinner. I will boil some rice, and fry four of +them for breakfast."</p> +<p>The bed was but half completed, when he heard the priest sound a +bell. It was doubtless used as a call to prayer. However, Stanley +rightly conjectured that, in this case, it was a summons to a meal; +and was soon seated on the ground by the side of the priest. Little +was said at breakfast, which Stanley enjoyed heartily.</p> +<p>"So my friend Thekyn is starting for the wars. What think you of +it, my son? Shall we easily overpower these barbarians? We have +never met them in war before and, doubtless, their methods of +fighting are different from ours."</p> +<p>"Quite different. Their men are trained as soldiers. They act as +one man, while the Burmese fight each for himself. Then they have +cannon with them, which they can drag about quickly, and use with +great effect. Although they are few, in comparison with the armies +going down to attack them, the latter will find it very difficult +work to turn them out of Rangoon."</p> +<p>"Do you think that they will beat us, then?"</p> +<p>"That I cannot say, but I should not be surprised if it were to +prove so."</p> +<p>"The Burmese have never been beaten yet," the priest said. "They +have been victorious over all their enemies."</p> +<p>"The Burmese are very brave," Stanley agreed, "but, hitherto, +they have only fought against people less warlike than themselves. +Now they have to deal with a nation that has made war a study, and +which always keeps up a large army of men who are trained to fight, +and who spend all their time in military exercises. It is not that +they are stronger than the Burmese, for the Burmese are very strong +men; but only that men who are trained to act together must, +necessarily, possess a great advantage over those who have had no +such training--who simply take up arms for the occasion and, when +the trouble is over, return to their homes and lay them by, until +called out to fight again.</p> +<p>"Besides, their weapons are better than yours; and they have +many cannon which, by practice, they can load and fire very +quickly; and each of which, when the armies are near each other, +can fire fifty or sixty bullets at once."</p> +<p>"I have heard a strange story that the barbarians have a ship +without sails, with a great chimney that pours out quantities of +black smoke, and a wheel on each side and, as the wheels move +round, the vessel can go straight up the river against the tide, +even if the wind is blowing strongly down."</p> +<p>"It is true, father, there are many such ships; but only two or +three that have made the long voyage across stormy seas to +India."</p> +<p>"It is wonderful how these men can force fire to be their +servant, and how it can make the wheels of the ship to move +round."</p> +<p>"That I cannot tell you, father. I have never seen one of these +vessels, though I have heard of them."</p> +<p>The priest said no more, but evidently fell into a profound +meditation; and Stanley, getting quietly up, returned to his work. +The priest came in, just as he had completed his bed.</p> +<p>"That is well," he said, looking at it approvingly. "I myself, +although I know that, until my time has come, no creature can harm +me, cannot resist a shudder when I hear one rustling amid the +leaves of my bed; for they come in, although some of my friends +have had a door placed to exclude their entry at night. I wander +but little from my cell, and always close the door after me; but +they enter, sometimes, when I am meditating, and forgetful of +earthly matters, and the first I know of their presence is the +rustling of the leaves in the bed, at night. Were I as strong in +faith as I should be, I would heed it not. I tell myself so; but my +fear is stronger than my will, and I am forced to rise, turn up the +leaves with a stick until I find them, and then I open the door and +eject them, with as much gentleness as may be."</p> +<p>"I should get no sleep at all," Stanley said. "I don't think +that even a door would make me feel any safer, for I might forget +to shut it, sometimes. Tomorrow, father, I will wage war with them, +and see if I cannot decrease their numbers considerably."</p> +<p>Stanley's first task was to clear the bushes away from the court +of the temple; and this, after several days' hard work, he carried +out; although he soon saw that by so doing he would not diminish +the number of the snakes, for the greater portion of the area was +covered with blocks of fallen stone, among which the reptiles found +an impenetrable shelter. The clearance effected, however, was so +far useful that, while the creatures were before altogether hidden +from sight by the bushes, they could now be killed when they came +out to bask in the sun on the uncovered stones; and he could, every +day, destroy a dozen or more without the slightest difficulty.</p> +<p>Ten days after he had finished the work, he heard the sound of +men's voices and, peeping out, saw a Burmese officer with a party +of eight armed men going to the Phongee's cell. It was possible +that they might have come on other business, but it was more +probable they had come in search of him. Some of the women who had +come up to the hermit had seen him at work; and might have +mentioned, on their return, that the priest had a man at work +clearing away the bushes. The matter might have come to the ears of +some officer anxious to distinguish himself, and the idea that this +was the prisoner for whom a search was being made occurred to +him.</p> +<p>Stanley shrank back into his cell, took up the bundle of clothes +that served as his pillow, got on to the bed and, standing on it, +was able to get his fingers on to the top of the wall. He hoisted +himself up, made his way through the boughs of the roof, and +dropped on to the ground outside. Then he went round by the back of +the temple, until he stood outside the priest's cell, and could +hear the voices within without difficulty.</p> +<p>"Then you know nothing whatever of this man?"</p> +<p>"Nothing whatever," he replied. "As I have told you, he came to +me and asked for shelter. I gave him such poor assistance as I +could, as I should give it to anyone who asked me. He has been no +burden upon me, for he has killed enough snakes for my food and his +own."</p> +<p>"You know not of what part he is a native?"</p> +<p>"Not at all; I asked him no questions. It was no business of +mine."</p> +<p>"Could you form any idea from his speech?"</p> +<p>"His speech was ours. It seemed to me that it was that of a +native of the lower provinces."</p> +<p>"Where is he now?"</p> +<p>"I know not."</p> +<p>"You say that, at present, he is away."</p> +<p>"Not seeing him in front, I thought he had gone out; for he +comes and goes as he pleases. He is not a hired servant, but a +guest. He cut down the bushes here, in order that he might more +easily kill the snakes; for which, indeed, I am thankful to him, +not only for the food that they afford, but because they were in +such abundance, and so fearless, that they often came in here, +knowing that they had naught to fear from me."</p> +<p>"Then you think that he will return soon?"</p> +<p>"As he told me not of his intention of going out at all, I +cannot say. He is away, sometimes, for hours in the forest."</p> +<p>"Well, in any case, we shall watch here until his return. It may +be that he is some idle fellow, who prefers killing snakes to +honest work; but it may also be that he is the escaped prisoner of +whom we are in search."</p> +<p>"I hear little of what passes in the town," the priest said, +quietly. "News would disturb my meditations, and I never question +those who come here to ask for my prayers. I have heard of the +escape of no prisoner."</p> +<p>"It was a young English officer who got away. There has been a +great stir about it. Every house in the town has been searched, and +every guard boat on the river has been warned to allow no boat to +pass, without assuring themselves that he is not on board."</p> +<p>"This was a brown man, like ourselves, clad only in a petticoat +of rough cloth, like other peasants."</p> +<p>"He may have dyed his skin," the officer said. "At any rate, we +will stay until he returns, and question him. Two of my men shall +take their places just inside the entrance, and seize him as he +enters. Has he arms?"</p> +<p>"None, save his knife and the stick with which he kills the +snakes. It may be that he has seen you coming hither and, if he has +committed any crime, he would flee, and not return here at +all."</p> +<p>"If he does not come back before it is the hour when I must +return to the town, I shall leave four men to watch for him; and +they will wait here, if it is for a week, until he comes back +again."</p> +<p>"You can do as you please," the priest said, "only I pray you +withdraw your men from the neighbourhood of this cell. I would not +that my meditations were disturbed by their talk. I have come +hither for peace and quietness, and to be apart from the world and +its distractions."</p> +<p>"You shall not be disturbed," the officer said respectfully, and +Stanley heard a movement of feet, and then the closing of the +door.</p> +<p>Thinking it probable that the officer might make a search round +the temple, he at once made off into the wood behind the temple. As +soon as he was well among the trees, he exchanged his cloth for the +disguise he had worn in the town and, folding it up to be used as a +blanket at night, he went further into the wood, sat down, and +proceeded to think what his next step had best be. It was evident +that he could not return to the temple for the present; and it was +clear, also, that the search for him was still maintained, and that +it would not be safe to attempt to descend the river. He regretted +that he had been obliged to leave the place without saying goodbye +to the priest, and again thanking him for the shelter that he had +given him; but he was sure that, when he did not return, the old +man would guess that he had caught sight of the officer and his +party entering the temple, and had at once fled. Had he not known +that the guard would remain there, he would have waited until they +returned to the town, and would then have gone in and seen the +priest; but as they would remain there for some days, he thought it +was as well to abandon all idea of returning, as the suspicions +that he might be the man sought for would be heightened by his +continued absence, and the watch might be continued for a long +time, on the chance of his coming back.</p> +<p>He concluded that, at any rate, his best course would be to +endeavour to make his way for a considerable distance down the +country; and then to try and get a boat. He knew that the country +near the river was comparatively thickly populated, and that the +distances between the villages were not great, so that he would +find no great difficulty in purchasing provisions. The dress he had +brought with him was not altogether unfavourable for such a +purpose, as he could easily pass as a sub-officer, whose duty it +was to inquire whether the villages had each sent all their +able-bodied men to the war. The only drawback to it would be that, +if instructions for his arrest had been sent down to the villages +along the road, as well as those by the river, they would have +probably been directed to specially look for one clad in such +attire. However, it would be open to him, at any moment, to take to +his peasant's disguise again.</p> +<p>He at last determined to make a start and, by nightfall, had +traversed several miles through the great forest stretching along +by the side of the Panlaung river. He had asked many questions of +his friend the officer, as they went up to the temple, as to the +roads. He was told that there was one running almost due south to +Ramuthayn, by which he could travel down to Rangoon, by way of +Tannoo. This, however, would take him a long distance from the main +river, and he decided that he would presently strike the road that +ran about halfway between the hills and the Irrawaddy. He would +follow that for a time, and would try and strike the river +somewhere between Meloun and Keow-Uan.</p> +<p>Below this point there was a network of rivers, and but few +villages, and the country was swampy and unhealthy. He infinitely +preferred the risks of the descent by the river to those by road; +and it seemed to him that, if he could but obtain possession of one +of the small native fishing boats, he could drop down at night, +unnoticed, as the width of the river at Ava was upwards of a +thousand yards and, below that town, often considerably exceeded +that breadth.</p> +<p>When it became too dark to proceed further, he sat down at the +foot of a tree. He regretted that he had no means of lighting a +fire; and determined that, at any risk, he would obtain the means +of doing so at the first village that he came to--for he knew that +there were both tigers and leopards in the jungles. He thought, +however, that they were not likely to be numerous, so near the +capital; and the old priest had never alluded to them as a source +of danger though, indeed, it had never occurred to him to ask.</p> +<p>In the morning he continued his way. He had gone but a mile when +he heard a sudden scream in the wood, a short distance to his left. +Feeling sure that it was a human being, in great fear or pain, he +drew his knife and ran, at the top of his speed, in the direction +of the cry; thinking that it might be some man, or woman, attacked +by the robbers of the forest.</p> +<p>Suddenly he came upon a small open space, some twenty yards in +diameter. He hesitated, when his eyes fell on a group in the +centre. Two men were lying on the ground, and a leopard stood with +a paw on each of them. They had guns lying beside them, and a fire +was burning close by. He guessed that the animal had sprung from a +tree, one of whose boughs extended almost as far as the centre of +the opening. Probably it had killed one of the men in its spring +for, at the moment when he saw the animal, it was licking the blood +from the shoulder of the man on whom its right paw rested. The +other was, as far as Stanley could see, unhurt.</p> +<a id="PicB" name="PicB"></a> +<center><img src="images/b.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Stanley gave a sudden spring, and buried his knife in the leopard." /> +</center> +<p>His tread in the light Burmese shoes had been almost noiseless; +and the leopard, which was keeping up a low growling, and whose +back was towards him, had apparently not noticed it. He hesitated +for a moment, and then decided to endeavour to save the man who was +still alive. Creeping up stealthily, he gave a sudden spring upon +the leopard, and buried his knife to the hilt in its body, just +behind the shoulder.</p> +<p>With a terrible roar, it rolled over for a moment, and then +struggled to its feet. The time had been sufficient for Stanley to +pick up and cock one of the guns and, as the leopard turned to +spring at him, he aimed between its eyes and fired. Again the beast +rolled over, and Stanley caught up the other gun, thrust the muzzle +within a foot of its head, and fired. The leopard gave a convulsive +quiver, and lay dead.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch5" id="Ch5">Chapter 5</a>: With Brigands.</h2> +<p>Stanley uttered an involuntary hurrah as the leopard expired; +and at the sound the Burman, who had been lying motionless, leapt +to his feet. He looked at the leopard, and then at his rescuer, and +exclaimed in a tone of astonishment:</p> +<p>"You have slain the beast alone, and with no weapon but your +knife!"</p> +<p>"No," Stanley replied; "I began the fight with my knife, only; +but caught up one of those guns when I wounded him, and fired as he +charged me. Then I finished him with the other."</p> +<p>"Comrade," the Burman said, "you have done a great deed, with +courage. I, who am esteemed no coward, would never even have +thought of attacking that great leopard with but a knife, and that +to save the life of a stranger."</p> +<p>"I saw the guns lying on the ground. Had it not been for that, I +should not have dared to attack the leopard, for it would have been +certain death."</p> +<p>"Certain death, indeed. But tell me, first, how you did it. It +seems to me well nigh a miracle."</p> +<p>"I was passing along, not far distant, when I heard your cry," +Stanley said. "Thinking that it was some person in distress, I ran +hither, and saw you both lying, with the leopard's forepaws upon +you. The beast's back was turned to me and, as it was growling, it +had not heard my approach. Seeing the guns lying there--and having +no doubt that they were loaded--I stole up, sprang suddenly on the +leopard, and drove my knife into it behind the shoulder. The blow +rolled it over, and gave me time to pick up the gun. The rest was +easy."</p> +<p>The man, without a word, examined the body of the leopard.</p> +<p>"It is as you say," he said. "It was well struck, and would +probably have been fatal; but the animal would have torn you in +pieces before he died, but for the guns.</p> +<p>"Well, comrade, you have saved my life; and I am your servant, +so long as I live. I thought all was over with me. The leopard, as +it sprang, threw its full weight on my comrade, here. We had just +risen to our feet; and the blow struck me, also, to the ground. I +raised that cry as I fell. I lay there, immovable. I felt the +leopard's paw between my shoulders, and heard its angry growlings; +and I held my breath, expecting every moment to feel its teeth in +my neck.</p> +<p>"I had but one hope, namely, that the beast would carry off my +comrade--who, I was well assured, was dead--to the jungle to devour +him, and would then come back to fetch me. I managed to breathe +once, very quietly, when I felt a movement of the leopard and, +hearing a low sound, guessed that he was licking my comrade's +blood; but slightly as I moved, the leopard noticed it, and stood +straight up again over me. I dared not breathe again, but the time +had come when I felt that I must do so, though I was sure that it +would be the signal for my death.</p> +<p>"Then I knew not what had happened. There was a sharp pain as +the leopard's claws contracted, and then there was a loud roar, and +its weight was removed from me. Then I heard it snarl, as if about +to spring. Then came the sound of a gun, a fall, and a struggle; +and then the sound of another gun. Then I heard your shout, and +knew the beast was dead.</p> +<p>"Now, sir, what can I do for you? Shall I first skin the +leopard?"</p> +<p>"I care not for the skin," Stanley said. "It would be of no use +to me."</p> +<p>"Then, with your permission, I will take it off, and keep it as +long as I live, as a remembrance of the narrowest escape that I +ever had."</p> +<p>"Is your comrade dead?"</p> +<p>"Yes," the man replied. "The leopard struck him between the +shoulders as you see; and the force of the blow, and the weight of +the spring, must have killed him instantaneously."</p> +<p>"Then I will take his sword, gun, and cartridges."</p> +<p>So Stanley undid the sword belt, and buckled it round him; put +the bandolier of cartridges over his shoulders; and took up the gun +and reloaded it, while the man was at work skinning the leopard. +This operation the man performed with great speed. It was evidently +one that he had done before. As soon as the beast was flayed, he +rolled up the skin and placed it on his shoulder.</p> +<p>"You are an officer, sir?" he asked.</p> +<p>"No; I am a fugitive."</p> +<p>While he had been watching the man, Stanley had debated over +whether he should confide in him; and thought that, after the +service he had rendered him, he could do so with safety.</p> +<p>"I am an Englishman--I was captured by Bandoola, at Ramoo, and +sent a prisoner to Ava. I have escaped, and want to make my way +down to Rangoon; but I heard that orders had been sent along the +river to arrest me, and I do not, at present, know how to make my +way down."</p> +<p>"Come with me," the man said. "I have friends in the forest, +some distance from here. They will receive you gladly, when I tell +them what you have done for me; and you will be safe until you +choose to go. We are outlaws but, at present, we are masters of the +forest. The government has its hands full, and there is no fear of +their disturbing us."</p> +<p>Stanley thought over the matter, for a minute or two. Doubtless +it was a robber band that he was asked to join, but the offer +seemed to promise safety, for a time.</p> +<p>"I agree," he said, "so that you do not ask me to take part in +any deeds of violence."</p> +<p>"About that, you shall do as you like," the man said; "but I can +tell you that we make good hauls, sometimes. Our difficulty is not +to capture booty, but to dispose of it.</p> +<p>"Have you a turban? For that helmet of yours is out of place, in +the woods. The rest of your dress has nothing peculiar about it, +and would attract no attention."</p> +<p>"I have a turban. I have been, lately, in the dress of a +peasant. The cloth I wore lies fifty yards away; I dropped it as I +ran. It will be useful to cover me at night, if for nothing +else."</p> +<p>Stanley exchanged the helmet for the turban that he had before +worn, and fetched the cloth.</p> +<p>"Will you bury your companion?" he said.</p> +<p>"It would be useless. He will sleep above ground, as well as +below and, if we are to reach my comrades tonight, it is time for +us to be moving."</p> +<p>They at once set out. After five hours' walking, they came upon +the river Myitnge, the tributary that falls into the Irrawaddy at +Ava. It was some four hundred yards across. The Burman walked along +its banks for a short distance, and then pulled from a clump of +bushes a small boat, that was just capable of carrying two. He put +it in the water. They took their seats, and paddled across to the +other side; where he carefully concealed it, as before.</p> +<p>"That is our ferry boat," he said. "It is not often used, for +our headquarters are in the great forest we shall presently come +to; but it is as well when, occasionally, parties are sent out to +hunt us, to have the means of crossing to the other side."</p> +<p>Another two hours' walking, through cultivated fields, brought +them to the edge of the forest.</p> +<p>"Here you are as safe as if you were in Rangoon," the Burman +said. "In another hour we shall reach my comrades. As a rule, we +change our headquarters frequently. At present there is no question +of our being disturbed; so we have settled ourselves, for a +time."</p> +<p>"Why were you and your comrade on the other side of the +river?</p> +<p>"His village lies five miles beyond that forest," the man said. +"At ordinary times, he dared not venture there; but he thought +that, at present, most of the able men would be away, and so he +could pay a visit to his friends. He asked me to accompany him and, +as I had nothing better to do, I agreed to go. A convoy of traders, +too strong to be attacked, had passed down from the hill country +the morning before we started. There was not much probability that +anyone would come again, for a few days."</p> +<p>"They bring down rubies from there, do they not?"</p> +<p>"The mines are the property of the emperor," the man said, "and +the gems are sent down, once every two months, under a strong +guard; but for all that, many of the traders bring rubies down from +there--of course, secretly. The men who work the mines often +conceal stones that they come upon, and sell them for a small sum +to the traders; besides, sometimes the peasants pick them up +elsewhere--and these, too, make haste to sell them for anything +that they can get. We do not care for them much, for it is a risky +business going down to Ava to sell them; and the traders there, +knowing that, at a word from them, we should be arrested and most +likely executed, will give us next to nothing for them. We prefer +silver and lead for money; and garments, arms, and set jewels.</p> +<p>"Each man takes his share of what is captured and, when we have +enough, we go home to our villages. A pound of silver, or two or +three pounds of lead, are generally quite enough to buy the +goodwill of the head man of the village. We give out that we have +been working on the river, or in Ava, since we left; and everyone +knows better than to ask questions."</p> +<p>In another hour, they reached the encampment. It was now dusk, +and some five-and-twenty men were sitting round a great fire. A +number of leafy arbours had been constructed in a circle beyond +them.</p> +<p>"What, returned so soon!" one of the men said, as Stanley's +guide came near enough for the firelight to fall on his face; "but +where is Ranji, and whom have you brought here--a new recruit?"</p> +<p>"Not exactly, Parnik, but one to whom I have promised shelter, +for a while. Ranji is dead. I should have been dead, too, and +eaten; had it not been for my comrade, here. Here is the skin of +the beast who slew Ranji and, when I tell you that the leopard +stood with one paw on me, you may guess that my escape was a narrow +one."</p> +<p>"The brute was a large one," one of the other men said, as +Meinik--for such was the name of Stanley's companion--unrolled and +held the skin up. "I see it had a bullet between the eyes, and +another just behind the ear; and there is a knife cut behind the +shoulder. It must have been hot work, when it came to knives, with +a beast of that size."</p> +<p>"Give us some food, and cocoa; we have eaten nothing today, and +have walked far. When we have fed, I will tell you my story."</p> +<p>The Burman's recital of the adventure with the leopard excited +great applause, and admiration, from his comrades.</p> +<p>"'Tis wonderful," one said, "not so much that our new comrade +should have killed the leopard, though that was a great feat; but +that, armed only with a knife, he should attack a beast like this, +to save the life of a stranger. Truly I never heard of such a +thing. Has he all his senses?"</p> +<p>Meinik nodded. He had received permission from Stanley to say +who he was. Stanley had consented with some reluctance, but the man +assured him that he could trust his companions, as well as himself; +and that it was much better to tell the truth, as it would soon be +seen that his features differed altogether from their own and that, +therefore, he was some strange person in disguise.</p> +<p>"He is in his senses," he said, "but he does not see things as +we do. He is one of those English barbarians who have taken +Rangoon, and against whom our armies are marching. He was captured +at Ramoo; and sent by Bandoola, as a prisoner, to Ava. He has made +his escape and will, in a short time, go down the river; but at +present the search is too hot for him. So you see that he is, like +ourselves, a fugitive."</p> +<p>"What is his age?" one of the men asked, after a silence, during +which they all gazed at the newcomer.</p> +<p>"He is but a lad, being as he tells me between sixteen and +seventeen; but you see his skin is stained, and his face marked, so +as to give him the appearance of age."</p> +<p>"If the men of his race are as brave as he is, Meinik, our +troops will truly have harder work than they think to drive them +into the sea. Does he speak our tongue?"</p> +<p>"Yes," Stanley answered for himself. "I have been more than two +years in the province of Chittagong, and learned it from one who +was in our service."</p> +<p>"And would many of your people risk their lives in the way you +did, for a stranger?"</p> +<p>"Certainly. Many men constantly run risks as great to save +others."</p> +<p>"One life is all a man has," the Burman said. "Why should he +give it for a stranger?"</p> +<p>"I don't think that we stop to think of that," Stanley said. "It +seems to us natural that if we see another in danger of his life, +we should try to save it; whether it is a man or woman, whether it +be from fire or from any other fate."</p> +<p>"You must be a strange people," the Burman said gravely, "and I +should scarce have credited it, had I not heard that you had done +it, yourself. But it is wonderful; and you, too, a lad who has not +yet come to his full strength.</p> +<p>"We should be glad to have such a man for our comrade, my +friends. Whether he be Burman or English matters little. He has +risked his life for one of us; and he is our brother as long as he +likes to stay with us."</p> +<p>There was a warm exclamation of assent, round the circle; and +Stanley felt that he had no cause for uneasiness, as long as he +remained with them. In the evening the men sang many songs and, at +their request, Stanley sang some English ones, choosing some with +lively airs. The Burmese were much pleased and surprised at these, +and joined merrily in the chorus.</p> +<p>Half a dozen of them then set to work with their knives, cut +down some saplings and boughs, and constructed for Stanley an +arbour similar to the others; and he lay down well satisfied with +the results of his adventure, and feeling that he could remain with +these merry fellows, criminals though they might be, until it would +be safe to make his way down the river.</p> +<p>In the morning the men started early, leaving him in charge of +the fire. They went off in parties of four or five, to watch the +various roads leading to the capital; two or three of them, dressed +as peasants, going to towns where travellers would halt, so as to +gain information as to any party coming down. When they gathered +again, at dusk, one party only had had any success. They had met +six merchants coming down with horses laden with spices, indigo, +and cotton. These had offered no resistance, and they had taken as +much as they could carry, and then allowed them to go on with the +rest of their goods. There was a general feeling of regret that the +party had not been more numerous; and some expressions of anger, at +the spies on the road by which the traders had come, for not +letting them know beforehand, so that they could have placed their +whole force there and carried away all the goods.</p> +<p>"These are the things that suit us best," Meinik said to +Stanley. "You see, one can go down with a parcel of cinnamon or +pepper, or a bag of dyes, or fifty pounds of cotton into the town; +and sell it in the market, at a fair and proper price. Of course, +one dresses one's self as a small cultivator; and there is no +suspicion, whatever, that all is not right.</p> +<p>"We shall keep a sharp lookout for the men, as they come back +again, and relieve them of the silver or goods they may have taken +in exchange; that is, if they come by the same road--but it is more +likely that, after their adventure today, they will choose some +other, or take a guide and travel by village tracks. No doubt they +think that they have got off easily, for they have not lost more +than a quarter of their goods. It is war time now, and there is no +fear of a force being sent against us; but usually we do not take +so much as a quarter of the merchandise. Were they to lose +everything, they would make complaints; and then we should have a +force sent up against us, and be obliged to move away, for a time. +But as it is, they are so pleased with getting the greater part of +their goods safe to market that they do not care to make a fuss +about it; for they might have to pay the court officials, and +others, more than the value of the goods lost."</p> +<p>"They do not often resist, then?"</p> +<p>"Not often. If a man loses his goods, he can gather more again; +but when his life has gone, everything has gone. Besides, as a rule +we take care that we are so strong that they see, at once, that +resistance would be hopeless. Sometimes they bring armed guards +with them. These are men who make it their business to convoy +traders down, when the times are troubled. Sometimes we have fights +with these but, as a rule, we seldom attack them unless we are so +strong that they do not dare to oppose us. Still, we do have fights +sometimes, for these Shan guards are brave fellows. Their convoys +are generally rich ones, for it would not pay small traders to hire +men to protect them.</p> +<p>"In times of peace, we seldom stop long in one neighbourhood +for, when it once becomes known what road we are lying near, they +come along in parties too strong to be attacked and, as it matters +little to us where we live, we move away perhaps a hundred miles, +and then settle on another line of traffic. We have not been here +long; we were last down by Tannoo, and did well for a long time +there; until at last the governor raised all the villagers, and +hunted the woods, and we found that we had to leave. I expect we +shall stay here some time, now. There is no fear of troops being +sent out, and we can afford not to press too hardly on travellers; +for we have done so well, of late, that we could separate and +return to our homes, each with a good store of booty. Half our +number did leave, when we came up from the south; and more of us +would go, if it were not for this order that everyone shall join +the army. It is much pleasanter to live here, free to do as we +like, than to be driven down like a herd of beasts, to fight. +Besides, we have no quarrel with your people. It was the officials +at Aracan who began it; let them fight, if they like."</p> +<p>Stanley remained a fortnight with the band. At the end of that +time, they heard that a party of thirty traders were coming down +together, and that they had with them ten armed guards. This, they +no doubt supposed, was ample protection for, as the band generally +worked in such small parties, it was believed that there were but a +few outlaws in the forest. All the band went out, and returned in +the evening, laden with spoil. Two or three of them were wounded, +but not severely.</p> +<p>"So you had resistance today, Meinik."</p> +<p>"It lasted only for a minute," the man said. "As soon as they +saw how strong we were, the guard were glad enough to put up their +swords and let us bind them hand and foot, while we searched the +merchants. As you see, we have made a good capture, though we have +not seized more than a fifth of what they brought down with them; +but it will take them some time to pack their bales again, for we +searched everything thoroughly, and made all the merchants strip, +and searched their clothes and their hair."</p> +<p>"What did you do that for?"</p> +<p>"Well, it was this way. I said to my comrades, as we went along +this morning:</p> +<p>"'The Englishman is going to leave us, in a day or two. I have +not forgotten what I owe him, and should like to make him a +present. I propose that we search all the party thoroughly, today. +From what we heard, some of them come from the ruby country, and +are pretty sure to have gems concealed about them, or in their +baggage. I propose that all the stones we find we will give to our +friend.'</p> +<p>"They all agreed at once for, as you know, they all like you; +and rubies, as I told you, are of little use to us, for we cannot +dispose of them without great risk. So they did as I proposed, and +had good fortune. Twelve out of the number had gems hidden about +them, and some of them a good lot. You need not hesitate to take +them, for you may be sure that they bought them, for next to +nothing, from poor fellows who had risked their lives to hide +them.</p> +<p>"There they are. We have not looked at them, but just emptied +the parcels into this bag, as we found them. Of course, they are +all rough stones. You must take them as a present, from all of us; +and as a proof that a Burman, even if he is but a robber, is +grateful for such a service as that you rendered him."</p> +<p>Stanley felt that he could not refuse a gift so offered, even +though the goods were stolen. As Meinik said, the gems were of +little use to the robbers, since they were afraid to try and +dispose of them; and their owners had themselves broken the law in +having purchased them, and had doubtless given sums bearing no +proportion to their real value. Therefore he thanked Meinik very +heartily; and also, after they had had their meal, the rest of the +band, who made very light of the matter.</p> +<p>The things were useless to them, they said. If it had been +silver, or even lead, it would have been different; but to +endeavour to sell rubies they had to risk their lives. The goods +that they had got that day would fetch them far more money than the +rubies, and could be sold without difficulty and, as soon as the +war was over and they could go down to their villages, the band +would break up. They had enough silver and lead hidden away to keep +them for years, even if they never did any work, whatever.</p> +<p>"What do you do with it, when you get back?"</p> +<p>"We hide it. It would never do to enter a village with ten or +twelve pounds' weight of silver, and three or four times as much +lead, for the headman might take it into his head to have us +searched. So we generally dig a hole at the foot of a tree, in some +quiet spot; and take, perhaps, a pound of silver and two or three +of lead with us. A gift of half that silver is enough to convince +the headman that we are honest fellows, who have been working hard +since we went away; and from time to time we can go to our store +and get what we want from it, and can build a house and marry, and +take up a field or two, and perhaps become headmen ourselves, +before very long."</p> +<p>"Well, I am sure I wish you all well," Stanley said. "You have +all been very kind to me, since I joined you; and I shall be glad +to think of you all as settled quietly down in your villages, +rather than as remaining here when, some day or other, you might +all be captured and harm come to you."</p> +<p>The next morning Stanley started with Meinik, who was a native +of a small village on the river, some forty miles below Ava, and +who had resolved to accompany him down to Rangoon.</p> +<p>"I shall be able to get a boat and some nets, for a pound or two +of lead. If we are hailed, I can do the talking; and can land and +buy provisions, if wanted. I have arranged with my comrades to take +my share of the silver and lead we have stored up, at once; for it +is likely that they will also have gone to their homes before I +shall have returned, and we have changed everything into money, +except what we took yesterday."</p> +<p>Before starting Stanley was again dyed, and the tattoo marks +imitated--far more carefully than before, three or four of the men +operating upon him, at once. His face was almost entirely covered +with these marks. Some liquid was applied that extracted the colour +from his eyebrows, and left them snow white. Some of his hair was +similarly treated and, looking at himself in a pool of water, +Stanley did not in the slightest degree recognize himself; and felt +certain that no one would suspect him of being the young English +captive.</p> +<p>Resuming his peasant's cloth, he took a hearty farewell of the +band and started with Meinik. The latter carried a bundle, slung on +his gun. It contained some clothes, and did not look heavy; but in +the centre were two parcels that weighed some forty pounds. Stanley +carried a bundle with his other clothes, and several pounds of +rice.</p> +<p>Two days' walking took them to Meinik's village. Once out of the +forest they travelled at night, and reached the village just as the +people were astir. The place consisted of ten or twelve huts, and +Meinik created quite an excitement among the few people who +inhabited it. These consisted of two or three old men, some women, +and children.</p> +<p>"Where have you been for the last year and half, Meinik, if I +may ask?"</p> +<p>"Working near Ava," he said; "but as I should have to go to war +if I had remained there, I thought that I would come back, and see +how you all were. I have saved a little money, and may settle down; +but whether here or elsewhere I have not yet made up my mind."</p> +<p>"You will have to go to the war," one of the old men said. +"There is scarce a day that one of the war canoes does not stop +here, to see if there are any able-bodied men. They have taken +eight, and they will assuredly take you."</p> +<p>"Then I shall get a boat," he said, "and take to fishing. The +war cannot last long, and I shall do my best to keep out of the way +of the war canoes, until it is over. If any of you have a boat to +sell, I will buy it."</p> +<p>"I will sell you mine," the old man said. "Both of my sons have +been taken to the war, and I am too old to work it myself. It is a +good one; my sons made it only last year.</p> +<p>"Whom have you with you?"</p> +<p>Stanley had remained a short distance off, while Meinik was +talking to his friends.</p> +<p>"He is an old man I joined along the road," he said. "He is a +skilful fisherman; and he has agreed to go with me, if I can get a +boat.</p> +<p>"Is there an empty hut?"</p> +<p>"Yes, six of them. Of course, when the men were taken they +carried off the wives and children, as usual, as hostages for their +conduct."</p> +<p>Meinik nodded. He felt no surprise, as it was the custom in +Burma to hold the women and children of all the men going to the +war, as guarantees that their husbands would not desert or show +cowardice in battle. In either event their relatives would be, at +once, put to death.</p> +<p>"My companion is tired," he said. "We walked all night, so we +will cook some food and he will sleep."</p> +<p>They at once took possession of one of the empty huts, which was +just as it was left by its proprietor. One of the women brought a +brand or two from her hearth. An earthen cooking pot was filled +with water and placed above it, and a few handfuls of rice dropped +in. Two or three snakes, cut up into small pieces, and some pepper +pods were added; and then Meinik went out, talked to his +acquaintances, and arranged for the purchase of the boat. Stanley +watched the fire.</p> +<p>In an hour, Meinik returned.</p> +<p>"The boat is a good one," he said, "and the nets in fair order. +I have bought them for two pounds of lead; and have promised that, +when the war is over and the man's sons return, it is to be free to +them to buy it back, at the same price."</p> +<p>After eating their meal, they both lay down and slept until late +in the afternoon. Then Meinik bought an earthenware pot, and a flat +slab of the same material for making a fire on; some peppers and +capsicums, and a little cinnamon and nutmeg; a basket of mangoes, +and some tobacco. As soon as it became dusk, they took their places +in the boat, Meinik carrying down two or three faggots of wood.</p> +<p>The boat was a canoe, hewn out of a pine log. It would have +carried four people comfortably, and there was plenty of room for +them both to lie down at full length. It was very light, the wood +having been cut away until it was little thicker than cardboard. +This was the almost universal method of construction: even the war +canoes, that would carry sixty paddlers--sitting two by two on a +bench--and thirty soldiers, being hewn from great single logs of +teak. The nets were stowed one, at each end. In the middle was the +fireplace, on which the brands of the fire had already been laid. +Near it were the faggots and stores.</p> +<p>Meinik and Stanley sat on the nets, each with a paddle. The +former had hidden the greater portion of his store of money in the +ground, before entering the village. As soon as they had fairly +started, Stanley said:</p> +<p>"Had we not better get rid of the fire, Meinik? Its light would +draw attention to us."</p> +<p>"That matters little," the Burman replied. "There are not likely +to be war canoes about at night, and I expect that most of them +will have gone down the river. People fish either by night or by +day and, even if a war canoe came along, they would not trouble +about it for, of course, many men too old to go to the war remain +here, and go on fishing. People cannot starve because there is +fighting. The old men and women must cultivate the fields and fish, +or both they and the people of the towns would starve.</p> +<p>"Many even of the young men do not go. They keep away from their +villages during the day, and work in the fields; and the headmen +shut their eyes, for they know that if the fields are not +cultivated, the people cannot pay their share of the taxes.</p> +<p>"Still, it is as well to be on the safe side. When the fire has +burnt low we will lay a cloth over the top of the boat, so that the +glow of the embers will not be seen."</p> +<p>They kept their course near the middle of the river; partly +because the current there was stronger, partly because any war +canoes that might be coming up would keep close to one bank or the +other. They kept on their way until there was a faint gleam of +light in the sky; and then paddled into the shore, chose a spot +where some bushes drooped down into the water and, forcing the +canoe in behind these, so as to be entirely concealed from the +sight of any passing boat, cooked some food and, having eaten their +breakfast, lay down and slept until evening.</p> +<a id="PicC" name="PicC"></a> +<center><img src="images/c.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: They forced the canoe behind bushes, so as to be entirely concealed." /> +</center> +<p>Night after night the journey was continued. Their supply of +food was ample to last them; and there was, therefore, no occasion +to stop at any village to purchase more. The river, at the point +where they started, was about two miles wide; but at some points it +was double that width, while at others it contracted to little over +a mile. Its level was much lower, now, than it had been when +Stanley ascended it, two months before. Sometimes at night they +towed one of their nets behind them, and obtained an ample supply +of fish for their wants.</p> +<p>Each night they made, as Stanley calculated, about forty miles +and, after ten days' travel, they came to the point where the great +river divided, one small arm running down to Rangoon; another +descending to Bassein, and then falling into the sea at Cape +Negrais; while a large proportion of the water found its way down +by innumerable branches between the Rangoon and Bassein rivers.</p> +<p>For the last two or three days they had been obliged to observe +great caution for, below Prome, there were numbers of boats all +going down the river laden with men and stores. These, however, +only travelled by day; and the canoe was always, at that time, +either floating in the shelter of bushes, or hauled up on the bank +at spots where it could be concealed from view by thick growths of +rushes.</p> +<p>"We shall never be able to get down to Rangoon by water," said +Meinik. "The river will be crowded with rowboats near the town; and +there will be no chance, whatever, of making our way through them. +At the next village we come to, I will go in and learn the news. +Your countrymen may have been driven out by this time and, in that +case, there will be nothing to do but to travel north on foot, +until we reach Chittagong."</p> +<p>"I have no fear that we shall be driven out, Meinik."</p> +<p>This conversation had occurred on the night when they had passed +the point of division of the two arms of the river. They had caught +a larger supply of fish than usual and, as soon as the boat was +laid up, Meinik started along the bank, with a number of them, for +the nearest village. He returned in two hours.</p> +<p>"It is well I landed," he said, "for the point where the greater +portion of our people are gathered is Henzawaddy, only some fifteen +miles further on.</p> +<p>"You were right; your people have not been driven out. A large +number of our troops are down near Rangoon but, in the fighting +that has taken place, we have gained no advantage. Your people +marched out at the end of May, carried a stockade; and advanced to +Joazoang, and attacked some villages defended by stockades and +carried them, after having killed a hundred of our men. Then a +great stockade on a hill near the river, three miles from +Rangoon--which our people thought could not be taken, so strongly +was it protected--was attacked. The guns of your people made a +great gap in a stockade a mile in front of it. Two hundred men were +killed, and also the commander.</p> +<p>"Then your people marched on to the great stockade at +Kemmendine. Your troops, when they got there, saw how strong it was +and were afraid to attack it. They lay down all night, close to it; +and we thought we should destroy them, all when they attacked in +the morning; but their ships that had come up with them opened +fire, at daybreak. As the stockades were hidden from the sight of +those on the river, we had thought that the ships could do nothing; +but they shot great balls up into the air, and they came down +inside the stockade, where they burst with an explosion like the +noise of a big gun; and killed so many that the troops could not +remain under so terrible a fire, and went away, leaving it to your +people to enter the stockade, without fighting."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch6" id="Ch6">Chapter 6</a>: Among Friends.</h2> +<p>"It certainly seems to me," Stanley said, when he heard the +Burman's account of the state of things below, "that it will not be +possible for us to go any further, by water."</p> +<p>"It would be very dangerous," Meinik said. "It is certain that +all the men in this part of the country have been obliged to go +with the army and, even were we both natives, and had no special +reason for avoiding being questioned, we should be liable to be +seized and executed at once, for having disregarded the orders to +join the army. Assuredly we cannot pass down farther in our boat, +but must take to the land. I should say that we had best get spears +and shields, and join some newly-arrived party."</p> +<p>"But you forget that, though my disguise as a native is good +enough to mislead anyone passing us on the road, or in the dusk +after sunset, I should certainly attract attention if travelling +with them, by day."</p> +<p>"I forgot that. I have grown so accustomed to seeing you that I +forget that, to other people, your face would seem strange; as it +at first did to me, in the forest. Indeed you look to me now like +one of ourselves; but were we to join a band, someone would be sure +to ask questions concerning you, ere long. What, then, do you think +we had best do?"</p> +<p>"From what I heard of the country from one of your comrades, who +is a native of this province, it would be impossible for us, after +crossing the river, to make our way down on the opposite side, +since the whole country is swampy and cut up by branches of the +Irrawaddy. On this side there are few obstacles of that kind but, +on the other hand, we shall find the country full of troops going +down towards Rangoon. Your comrade told me that the hills that we +saw to the east, from the forest at Ava, extended right down into +Tenasserim; and were very high, and could not be traversed, for +that no food could be obtained, and that tigers and wild animals +and other beasts abounded. But he said that the smaller hills that +we crossed on the way to your village--which he called the Pegu +Yoma hills--some of whose swells come down to the bank, extend all +the way down to the sea between the Irrawaddy and the Sittang +rivers; and that, from them, streams flowed to one river or the +other. Therefore, if we could gain that range, we should avoid the +swamp country, altogether.</p> +<p>"A few miles back we passed a river coming in from the east and, +if we follow that up as far as there is water, we shall be among +the hills. He said that there were no mountains at all, there; but +just rounded hills, with many villages and much cultivated ground, +so there ought to be no difficulty in making our way along. We +shall be able to gather food in the fields; or can go into villages +and purchase some, for the men will all be away. Besides, we can +get spears and shields, and can say that having been away from home +on a journey--when the men were all ordered to war, we returned too +late to go with the rest of the villagers, and are making our way +down to join them. Many others must be doing the same, and the +story will be likely enough.</p> +<p>"In that way we can get down till we are close to the troops +round Rangoon, and must then take our chance of getting through +them."</p> +<p>"That seems better than the other way," Meinik said. "There is +such a river as you speak of, above Sarawa. We can paddle back +tonight, and hide near the town; then I can go there in the +morning, and buy a couple of spears and shields, and get some more +rice and other things. We have plenty of ammunition for our guns; +which we may want, if we meet any wild beasts."</p> +<p>"You don't think that there will be any danger in your going in +there, Meinik? Of course, there is no absolute occasion for us to +have spears and shields, as we have guns."</p> +<p>"We ought to have shields," Meinik replied, "and it were better +to have spears too, and also for us to carry axes--everyone carries +an axe in war time, for we always erect stockades and, though a +very poor man may only have his knife, everyone who can afford it +takes an axe. Most people have such a thing, for it is wanted for +cutting firewood, for clearing the ground, for building houses, and +for many other things; and a Burman must be poor, indeed, who does +not own one."</p> +<p>"By all means, then, get them for us, Meinik; besides, we may +find them useful for ourselves."</p> +<p>They now lay down and slept until evening; and then started up +the river again, keeping close in under shadow of the bank and, two +hours before daylight, concealed the canoe as usual, at a spot two +miles above Sarawa. Meinik started at daybreak, and returned three +hours later with two axes, spears, and shields.</p> +<p>That night they turned into the river running to the east and, +for four nights, paddled up it. The country was now assuming a +different character, and the stream was running in a valley with +rising ground--from a hundred to a hundred and fifty feet high--on +each side, and was narrowing very fast. Towards morning on the +fifth day the river had become a small stream, of but two or three +feet deep; and they decided to leave the boat, as it was evident +that they would be able to go but a short distance further.</p> +<p>"We may as well hide her carefully," Stanley said. "It is +certainly not likely that we shall want her again, but there is +never any saying and, at any rate, there is no great trouble in +doing it."</p> +<p>They cooked a meal and then started at once, so as to do a few +hours' walking before the sun became high. They determined to keep +on eastward, until they reached the highest point of the dividing +ridge between the two main rivers, and then to follow it southward. +The country was now well cultivated, and they had some trouble in +avoiding the small villages dotted thickly about, as the course +they were following was not the one they would take if making +straight to join the army. They slept for three or four hours in +the heat of the day; and then, pushing on, found themselves before +sunset on what seemed to them the highest point of the divide. To +the right they could see the flat country stretching towards the +Irrawaddy, to the left the ground was more sharply undulating. Two +miles away was a stream of fair size, which they judged to be the +river that runs down to Pegu, and afterwards joins the Rangoon +river below the town.</p> +<p>Stanley thought that the hill on which they stood was some five +hundred feet above the low country they had left. A great part of +the hills was covered with trees although, at the point where they +had made their way up, the hillside was bare. They went on until +they entered the forest, and there set to work to chop firewood. +Meinik carried a tinderbox, and soon had a fire blazing, and by its +side they piled a great stock of wood.</p> +<p>"I do not know that there are any leopards so far south as +this," he said, "but at any rate it will be safer to keep a big +fire blazing. I never used to think much about leopards but, ever +since I had that great beast's foot upon my back, I have had a +horror of them."</p> +<p>The next morning they continued their journey south, going along +boldly and passing through several villages.</p> +<p>"You are late for the war," an old man said, as they went +through one of them.</p> +<p>"I know we are," Meinik replied, "but we were away with a +caravan of traders when the order came; and so, instead of going +down the river, we have had to journey on foot. But we shall be +there in time. From what we have heard, there has not been much +fighting, yet."</p> +<p>"No; the white barbarians are all shut up in Rangoon. We have +not attacked them in earnest, but we shall soon do so and, +moreover, they will soon be all starved, for the country has been +swept clear of all cattle for twenty miles round, the villages +deserted, and everything laid waste; and we hear that half their +number are laid up with sickness, and that a great number have +died. I wish that I were younger, that I, too, could help to +destroy the insolent foes who have dared to set foot on our sacred +soil."</p> +<p>There was no need for haste, now, and they travelled by easy +stages until, by the smoke rising from different parts of the +forest, they knew that they were approaching the spot where the +Burmese forces lay around Rangoon and, indeed, could see the great +pagoda rising above the surrounding country. They had heard, at the +last villages through which they had passed, that there had been an +attack made upon the pagoda on the 1st of July. On that day the +Burmese, in great force, had moved down in a line parallel to the +road between the pagoda and the town, along which a considerable +number of our troops were encamped. They had advanced until within +half a mile of Rangoon, then had changed front and attacked the +British position near the town. They occupied a hill near our line, +and opened fire from there with jingals and small cannon; but two +British guns firing grape soon silenced their guns, and a Madras +regiment charged the hill and recaptured it.</p> +<p>This entirely upset the plan of the Wongee in command of the +Burmese. The signal for the whole of the army to attack was to have +been given, as soon as their left had broken through the British +line, and had thus cut off all the troops on the road leading to +the pagoda from the town. Seeing that this movement had failed, the +general did not give the signal for the general attack, but ordered +the troops to fall back. He had been recalled in disgrace to Ava; +and a senior officer, who arrived just after the battle, assumed +the command. He at once set to work to make a very strong stockade +at Kummeroot, five miles from the great pagoda; and also fortified +a point on the river above Kemmendine--the stockade that had been +captured by the British--and intended from this point to send down +fire rafts to destroy the British shipping and, at the same time, +made continuous attacks at night on the British lines.</p> +<p>The rains at this time were falling incessantly, and the Burmese +did not think that the British would be able to move out against +them. The position on the river was connected with that at +Kummeroot by strong stockades; and the Burmese general was +convinced that, if an attack was made, it could be easily defeated. +However, eight days after the repulse of the Burmese first attack, +the vessels came up the river, while a land column moved against +Kummeroot.</p> +<p>The position was a strong one. The river was here divided into +two branches and, on the point of land between these, the principal +stockade was erected and was well provided with artillery; while on +the opposite banks of both rivers other stockades with guns were +erected, so that any attack by water would be met by the direct +fire from the great stockade, and a cross fire from those on the +banks.</p> +<p>Four ships came up, and the Burmese guns opened upon them, but +the heavy fire from the men-of-war was not long in silencing them; +and then a number of boats full of troops had landed, and stormed +the stockade, and driven out the Burmese. The land column had been +unable to take guns with them, owing to the impossibility of +dragging them along the rain-sodden paths; and the Burmese chiefs, +confident in the strength of their principal post--which was +defended by three lines of strong stockades, one above another--and +in their immensely superior force, treated with absolute contempt +the advance of the little British column--of which they were +informed, as soon as it started, by their scouts thickly scattered +through the woods.</p> +<p>The general, Soomba Wongee, was just sitting down to dinner when +he was told that the column had nearly reached the first stockade. +He directed his chiefs to proceed to their posts and "drive the +audacious strangers away," and continued his meal until the heavy +and rapid musketry of the assailants convinced him that the matter +was more serious than he had expected. As a rule, the Burmese +generals do not take any active part in their battles; but Soomba +Wongee left his tent and at once went towards the point attacked. +He found his troops already retreating, and that the two outer +stockades had been carried by the enemy. He rallied his men, and +himself led the way to the attack; but the steady and continuous +fire of the British rendered it impossible for him to restore +order, and the Burmese remained crowded together, in hopeless +confusion. However, he managed to gather together a body of +officers and troops and, with them, charged desperately upon the +British soldiers. He, with several other leaders of rank, was +killed; and the Burmese were scattered through the jungle, leaving +eight hundred dead behind them.</p> +<p>The fact that ten stockades, provided with thirty pieces of +artillery, should have been captured in one day by the British, had +created a deep impression among the villagers of the +neighbourhood--from whom the truth could not be concealed--and +indeed, all the villages, for many miles round the scene of action, +were crowded with wounded. They told Meinik that the army was, for +a time, profoundly depressed. Many had deserted, and the fact that +stockades they had thought impregnable were of no avail, whatever, +against the enemy, whose regular and combined action was +irresistible, as against their own isolated and individual method +of fighting, had shaken their hitherto profound belief in their own +superiority to any people with whom they might come in contact.</p> +<p>Since that time no serious fighting had taken place. Occasional +night attacks had been made, and all efforts on the part of the +invaders to obtain food, by foraging parties, had proved +unsuccessful. The boats of the fleet had gone up the Puzendown +river, that joined the Rangoon river some distance below the town, +and had captured a large number of boats that had been lying there, +waiting until Rangoon was taken before going up the river with +their cargoes of rice and salt fish; but they had gained no other +advantage for, although the villages were crowded with fugitives +from the town, these were driven into the jungle by the troops +stationed there for the purpose, as soon as the boats were seen +coming up the river.</p> +<p>In some cases, however, the boats had arrived so suddenly that +there had not been time to do this; and the fugitives had been +taken to Rangoon, where it was said they had been very well +treated.</p> +<p>Great reinforcements had now come down from the upper provinces. +Two of the king's brothers had arrived, to take command of the +army; one had established himself at Donabew, the other at Pegu. +They had brought with them numbers of astrologers, to fix upon a +propitious time for an attack; and the king's Invulnerables, +several thousands strong--a special corps, whom neither shot nor +steel could injure--were with them.</p> +<p>About the 6th of August a strong position that had been taken +up, by a force sent by the prince at Pegu, in the old Portuguese +fort of Syriam had been attacked; with orders that the channel of +the Rangoon river should be blocked, so that none of the strangers +should escape the fate that awaited them. The position was a very +strong one. The trees and brushwood round the fort had been cleared +away; wherever there were gaps in the old wall stockades had been +erected; and great beams suspended from the parapet in order that, +if an attack was made, the ropes could be cut and the beams fall +upon the heads of the assailants.</p> +<p>The British had, however, thrown a bridge across a deep creek, +pushed on against the place, and carried it in a few minutes; the +garrison flying, as soon as the assailants gained the ramparts, to +a pagoda standing on a very steep hill, defended by guns, and +assailable only by a very steep flight of steps. The troops, +however, pressed up these fearlessly; and the garrison, discouraged +and shaken by the reports of the fugitives from the lower fort, had +fled as soon as the British arrived at the top of the steps.</p> +<p>Notwithstanding this and other, as successful, attacks upon +their stockades, the Burmese troops now felt confident that, with +their numerous forces, they would be victorious whenever the +astrologers decided that the favourable moment had arrived.</p> +<p>Meinik had ascertained, from the villagers, the name of the +leader and the locality to which the corps belonged that was posted +nearest to Rangoon. As soon as it was dark, he and Stanley entered +the forest. The smoke had served as a guide, to them, as to the +position of the different corps; and they were able to make their +way between these without being questioned. Presently, however, +they came upon a strong picket.</p> +<p>"Where are you going?" the officer in command asked.</p> +<p>"To join the corps of the Woondock Snodee," Meinik replied. "We +were away at Bhanno when the order came, and the rest had gone down +the river before we got to Mew; so we came on by ourselves, not +wishing to fail in our duty."</p> +<p>"You are just in time," the officer said. "The Woondock is a +quarter of a mile away, on the left."</p> +<p>They moved off in that direction; but soon left the track and, +avoiding the camp, kept away until they reached the edge of the +forest. Then they crept forward through the jungle and brushwood, +pausing to listen from time to time and, three times, changing +their course to avoid parties of the Burmese acting as +outposts.</p> +<p>On issuing from the jungle they crawled forward for three or +four hundred yards, so as to be beyond musket shot of the outposts; +and then remained quiet until morning broke. Then they could +perceive red coats moving about, in a small village before which a +breastwork had been thrown up, some four hundred yards away from +them and, getting up to their feet, ran towards it. Several shots +were fired at them, from the jungle behind; and some soldiers at +once appeared at the breastwork. Supposing that the two figures +approaching were Burmese deserters, they did not fire; and Stanley +and his companion were soon among them.</p> +<p>They were soldiers of one of the Bengal regiments; and Stanley, +to their surprise, addressed them in their own language.</p> +<p>"I am an Englishman," he said. "I am one of the prisoners whom +they took, at Ramoo, and have escaped from their hands. Are there +any of your officers in the village?"</p> +<p>"I will take you to them," a native sub-officer said; and +Stanley, in a minute or two, entered a cottage in which four +English officers were just taking their early breakfast, +preparatory to turning out on duty.</p> +<p>"Whom have you got here, jemadar?" one of them asked, in +Bengalee.</p> +<p>Stanley answered for himself.</p> +<p>"I am an Englishman, sir, and have just escaped from Ava."</p> +<p>The officer uttered an exclamation of surprise.</p> +<p>"Well, sir," the senior of them said, as he held out his hand to +Stanley, "I congratulate you on having got away, whoever you are; +but I am bound to say that, if it were not for your speech, I +should not have believed you; for I have never seen anyone look +less like an Englishman than you do."</p> +<p>"My name is Stanley Brooke, sir. I am the son of the late +Captain Brooke, of the 15th Native Regiment."</p> +<p>"Then I should know you," one of the other officers said, "for I +knew your father; and I remember seeing your name in the list of +officers killed, at Ramoo, and wondered if it could be the lad I +knew five or six years ago."</p> +<p>"I recollect you, Captain Cooke," Stanley said. "Your regiment +was at Agra, when we were there."</p> +<p>"Right you are; and I am heartily glad that the news of your +death was false," and he shook hands cordially with Stanley.</p> +<p>"And who is your companion?" the major asked. "Is he an +Englishman, also?"</p> +<p>"No, sir; he is a native. He is a most faithful fellow. He has +acted as my guide, all the way down from the point we started from, +twenty miles from Ava. I could never have accomplished it without +his aid for, although I speak Burmese well enough to pass anywhere, +my face is so different in shape from theirs that, if I were looked +at closely in the daylight, I should be suspected at once. I could +never have got here without his aid."</p> +<p>"How was it that he came to help you, sir?" Major Pemberton +asked. "As far as we can see, the Burmese hate us like poison. Even +when they are wounded to death, they will take a last shot at any +soldiers marching past them."</p> +<p>"I happened to save his life from a leopard," Stanley said, +"and, truly, he has shown his gratitude."</p> +<p>"Jemadar," the major said, "take that man away with you. See +that he is well treated. Give him some food, of course. He will +presently go with this officer to the general."</p> +<p>Stanley said a few words in Burmese to Meinik, telling him that +he was to have food, and would afterwards go with him to the +general; and he then, at the invitation of the officers, sat down +with them to breakfast. While eating it, Stanley told them +something of his adventures. After the meal was over, the major +said:</p> +<p>"You had better go with Mr. Brooke to the general, Captain +Cooke. I cannot well leave the regiment.</p> +<p>"We can let you have an outfit, Mr. Brooke; though we are, most +of us, reduced pretty well to our last garments. What with the +jungle and what with the damp, we have nearly all arrived at the +last state of dilapidation; but I am sure the general would like to +see you in your present disguise."</p> +<p>"It makes no difference to me, sir," Stanley said, with a laugh. +"I am so accustomed to this black petticoat, now, that I should +almost feel strange in anything else. I am afraid this dye will be +a long time before it wears itself out. It is nearly three weeks +since I was dyed last, and it has faded very little, yet."</p> +<p>"You need not take your arms, anyhow," Captain Cooke said. "You +will attract less attention going without them, for it will only be +supposed that you are one of the natives who have been brought in +by the boats."</p> +<p>Meinik was sitting on the ground, contentedly, outside the +cottage, the jemadar standing beside him.</p> +<p>"Have you had any food, Meinik?" Stanley asked.</p> +<p>The man nodded.</p> +<p>"Good food," he said.</p> +<p>"That is all right. Now, come along with us. You can leave your +weapons here--they won't be wanted."</p> +<p>Meinik rose and followed Stanley and Captain Cooke. There were +houses scattered all along the roadside. These were now all +occupied by officers and troops, and there were so many of them +that it had not been necessary to place any of the men under +canvas--an important consideration, during the almost continuous +rain of the last three months.</p> +<p>"Why, Cooke, I did not know that you talked Burmese," an officer +standing at one of the doors remarked, as the officer came along, +chatting with Stanley.</p> +<p>"You don't know all my accomplishments, Phillipson," the captain +laughed, for the idea that there existed such a thing as a Burmese +peasant who could talk English had not occurred to the other. "I am +taking him to the chief, to show off my powers;" and passed on, +leaving the officer looking after him, with a puzzled expression on +his face.</p> +<p>On their arrival at Sir Archibald Campbell's headquarters, +Captain Cooke sent in his name and, as the general was not at the +moment engaged, he was at once shown in; followed by Stanley, +Meinik remaining without.</p> +<p>"Good morning, sir. I see you have brought in a deserter," the +general said.</p> +<p>"He is not a deserter, sir. He is an escaped prisoner, who has +made his way down from Ava through the enemy's lines.</p> +<p>"This is Mr. Brooke. He was serving as an officer with the +native levy, at Ramoo, and was reported as killed. However, he was +fortunately only stunned and, being the only officer found alive, +was sent by Bandoola as a prisoner to Ava. I may say that he is a +son of the late Captain Brooke, of the 15th Native Infantry."</p> +<p>"You are certainly wonderfully disguised," the general said; +"and I congratulate you heartily on your escape. I should have +passed you by as a native without a second glance though, now that +I am told that you are an Englishman, I can see that you have not +the wide cheekbones and flat face of a Burman. How did you manage +to make your way down?"</p> +<p>"I travelled almost entirely by night, sir; and I had with me a +faithful guide. He is outside. I don't think that I should ever +have got down without him, though I speak Burmese well enough to +pass--especially as the language differs so much, in the different +districts."</p> +<p>"Is he a Burman?"</p> +<p>"Yes, general."</p> +<p>"Have you arranged with him for any particular sum for his +services? If so, it will of course be paid."</p> +<p>"No, sir; he came down simply in gratitude for a service I +rendered him. I do not know whether he intends to go back; but I +hope that he will remain here, with me."</p> +<p>"I have brought Mr. Brooke here, sir," Captain Cooke said, "at +the request of the major; thinking that you might like to ask him +some questions as to the state of things in the interior."</p> +<p>"I should like to have a long talk with Mr. Brooke," the general +said; "but unless he has any certain news of the date they intend +to attack us, I will not detain him now. The first thing will be +for him to get into civilized clothes again.</p> +<p>"By the way, poor young Hitchcock's effects are to be sold this +morning. I should think that they would fit Mr. Brooke very +well.</p> +<p>"Let me see. Of course, your pay has been running on, since you +were taken prisoner, Mr. Brooke."</p> +<p>"I am afraid, sir, that there is no pay due," Stanley said. "I +happened to be at Ramoo at the time, looking after some goods of my +uncle, who carries on a considerable trade on the coast; and as I +talk the language, and there were very few who did so, I +volunteered to act as an officer with the native levy. I preferred +to act as a volunteer, in order that I might be free to leave, at +any time, if I received an order from my uncle to join him at +Chittagong.</p> +<p>"I could give an order on him, but I do not know where he is to +be found. I have with me some uncut rubies; though I have no idea +what they are worth, for I have not even looked at them yet; but +they should certainly be good security for 50 pounds."</p> +<p>"We can settle that presently, Mr. Brooke. I will write an order +on the paymaster for 500 rupees; and we can talk the matter over, +afterwards. I am afraid that you will have to pay rather high for +the clothes, for almost everyone here has worn out his kit; and Mr. +Hitchcock only joined us a fortnight before his death, so that his +are in very good condition. Of course, they are all uniform--he was +on my staff--but that will not matter. You could hardly be going +about in civilian clothes, here.</p> +<p>"I shall be very glad if you will dine with me, at six o'clock +this evening. Have a talk with your man before that, and see what +he wants to do. If he is a sharp fellow, he might be very useful to +us."</p> +<p>The general wrote the order on the paymaster, and Captain Cooke +took Stanley across to the office and obtained the cash for it. +Making inquiry, he found that the sale was to come off in a quarter +of an hour.</p> +<p>"I will do the bidding for you, if you like, Brooke," Captain +Cooke said. "I dare say you would rather not be introduced, +generally, in your present rig."</p> +<p>"Much rather not, and I shall be much obliged by your doing +it."</p> +<p>"All right. I will make your money go as far as I can. Of +course, the poor fellow brought no full-dress uniform with him, or +anything of that sort."</p> +<p>"You will find me here with my Burman," Stanley said. "We will +stroll round the place for half an hour, and then come back here +again."</p> +<p>There was very little to see in the town. Meinik was astonished, +when they mounted the river bank and had a view of the ships lying +at anchor. For a time he was too surprised to speak, never having +seen anything larger than the clumsy cargo boats which made a +voyage, once a year, up the river.</p> +<p>"It is wonderful!" he said at last. "Who would have thought of +such great ships? If the emperor could but see them, I think that +he would make peace. It is easy to see that you know many things +more than we do. Could one go on board of them?"</p> +<p>"Not as I am, at present, Meinik; but when I get English clothes +on again, and rid myself from some of this stain, I have no doubt I +shall be able to take you on board one of the ships-of-war.</p> +<p>"And now, will you let me know what you are thinking of doing? I +told the general what service you had rendered me, and he asked me +what you were going to do. I told him that, as yet, I did not know +whether you were going to stay here, or go back again."</p> +<p>"Are you going to stay here?"</p> +<p>"I think so--at any rate, for a time. I do not know where the +uncle I have told you about is, at present. At any rate, while this +war is going on he can do very little trade, and can manage very +well without me."</p> +<p>"As long as you stay here, I shall stay," the Burman said. "If I +went back, I should have to fight against your people; and I don't +want to do that. I have no quarrel with them and, from what I see, +I am not so sure as I was that we shall drive you into the sea. You +have beaten us, whenever you have fought; and I would rather stay +with you, than be obliged to fight against you.</p> +<p>"Not many men want to fight. We heard that in the villages, and +that those who have not got wives and children held, as hostages +for them, get away from the army and hide in the woods.</p> +<p>"You will be a great man now and, if you will let me stop, I +will be your servant."</p> +<p>"I will gladly keep you with me, Meinik, if you are willing to +stay; and I am sure that you will be better off, here, than out in +the woods, and a good deal safer. At any rate, stay until after +your people make their next attack. You will see then how useless +it is for them to fight against us. When we can attack them in +their stockades, although they are ten to one against us, and drive +them out after a quarter of an hour's fighting; you may be sure +that in the open ground, without defences, they will have no chance +whatever.</p> +<p>"I hope they will soon get tired of fighting, and that the court +will make peace. We did not want to fight with them--it was they +who attacked us but, now that we have had all the expense of coming +here, we shall go on fighting till the emperor agrees to make +peace; but I don't think that we shall ever go out of Rangoon, +again, and believe that we shall also hold the ports in Tenasserim +that we have captured."</p> +<p>"The emperor will never agree to that," Meinik said, shaking his +head positively.</p> +<p>"Then if he does not, he will see that we shall go up the river +to Ava and, in the end, if he goes on fighting we shall capture the +whole country; and rule over it, just as we have done the greater +part of India."</p> +<p>"I think that would be good for us," the man said +philosophically. "It would not matter much to us to whom we paid +our taxes--and you would not tax us more heavily than we are +now--for as we came down you saw many villages deserted, and the +land uncultivated, because the people could not pay the heavy +exactions. It is not the king--he does not get much of it--but he +gives a province, or a district, or a dozen villages to someone at +court; and says, 'you must pay me so much, and all that you can get +out of it, besides, is for yourself;' so they heap on the taxes, +and the people are always in great poverty and, when they find that +they cannot pay what is demanded and live, then they all go away to +some other place, where the lord is not so harsh."</p> +<p>"I am sure that it would be a good thing for them, Meinik. The +people of India are a great deal better off, under us, than they +were under their native rulers. There is a fixed tax, and no one is +allowed to charge more, or to oppress the people in any way.</p> +<p>"But now we must be going. I said that I would be back at the +place we started from, in half an hour."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch7" id="Ch7">Chapter 7</a>: On The Staff.</h2> +<p>Captain Cooke had done his best, previous to the beginning of +the auction, to disarm opposition; by going about among the +officers who dropped in, with the intention of bidding, telling +them something of Stanley's capture, adventures, and escape; and +saying that the general had, himself, advised him to obtain an +outfit by buying a considerable portion of the young officer's +kit.</p> +<p>"I have no doubt that he will put him on his staff," he said. +"From his knowledge of the country, and the fact that he speaks the +language well, he would be very useful and, as he has gone through +all this from serving as a volunteer, without pay, I hope you +fellows won't run up the prices, except for things that you really +want."</p> +<p>His story had the desired effect; and when Captain Cooke met +Stanley, he was able to tell him that he had bought for him the +greater portion of the kit, including everything that was +absolutely necessary.</p> +<p>"Are there any plain clothes?" Stanley asked, after thanking him +warmly for the trouble he had taken.</p> +<p>"No. Of course, he left everything of that sort at Calcutta. No +one in his senses would think of bringing mufti out with him, +especially to such a country as this."</p> +<p>"Then I shall have to go in uniform to the general's," Stanley +said, in a tone of consternation. "It seems to me that it would be +an awfully impudent thing, to go in staff uniform to dine with the +general, when I have no right whatever to wear it."</p> +<p>"Well, as the general advised you himself to buy the things, he +cannot blame you for wearing them; and I have not the least doubt +that he is going to offer you a staff appointment of some +sort."</p> +<p>"I should like it very much, as long as the war lasted, Captain +Cooke; but I don't think that I should care about staying in the +army, permanently. You see, my uncle is working up a very good +business. He has been at it, now, seven or eight years; and he was +saying the last time that I was with him that, as soon as these +troubles were over, and trade began again, he should give me a +fourth share of it; and make it a third share, when I got to +twenty-one."</p> +<p>"Then you would be a great fool to give it up," Captain Cooke +said, heartily. "A man who has got a good business, out here, would +have an income as much as all the officers of a regiment, together. +He is his own master, and can retire when he likes, and enjoy his +money in England.</p> +<p>"Still, as trade is at a standstill at present, I think that it +would be wise of you to accept any offer that the general might +make to you. It might even be to your advantage, afterwards. To +have served on Campbell's staff will be an introduction to every +officers' mess in the country; and you may be sure that, not only +shall we hold Rangoon in future, but there will be a good many more +British stations between Assam and here than there now are; and it +would be a pull for you, even in the way of trade, to stand on a +good footing everywhere."</p> +<p>"I quite see that," Stanley agreed, "and if the general is good +enough to offer me an appointment, I shall certainly take it."</p> +<p>"You have almost a right to one, Brooke. In the Peninsula lots +of men got their commissions by serving for a time as volunteers; +and having been wounded at Ramoo, and being one of the few +survivors of that fight; and having gone through a captivity, at no +small risk of being put to death the first time that the king was +out of temper, your claim is a very strong one, indeed. Besides, +there is hardly a man here who speaks Burmese, and your services +will be very valuable.</p> +<p>"Here are fifty rupees," he went on, handing the money to +Stanley. "It is not much change out of five hundred; but I can +assure you that you have got the things at a bargain, for you would +have had to pay more than that for them, in England; and I fancy +most of the things are in very good condition, for Hitchcock only +came out about four months ago. Of course the clothes are nothing +like new but, at any rate, they are in a very much better state +than those of anyone who came here three months ago.</p> +<p>"I have ordered them all to be sent to my quarters where, of +course, you will take up your abode till something is settled about +you; which will probably be this evening. In that case, you will +have quarters allotted to you, tomorrow."</p> +<p>"Thank you very much. I shall devote the best portion of this +afternoon to trying to get rid of as much of this stain as I can, +at least off my face and hands. The rest does not matter, one way +or the other, and will wear off gradually; but I should like to get +my face decent."</p> +<p>"Well, you are rather an object, Stanley," he said. "It would +not matter so much about the colour, but all those tattoo marks +are, to say the least of it, singular. Of course they don't look so +rum, now, in that native undress; but when you get your uniform on, +the effect will be startling.</p> +<p>"We will have a chat with the doctor. He may have something in +his medicine chest that will at least soften them down a bit. Of +course, if they were real tattoo marks there would be nothing for +it; but as they are only dye, or paint of some sort, they must wear +themselves out before very long."</p> +<p>"I will try anything that he will give me. I don't care if it +takes the skin off."</p> +<p>On returning to the quarters of Captain Cooke, Stanley was +introduced to the other officers of the regiment; among them the +doctor, to whom he at once applied for some means of taking off the +dye.</p> +<p>"Have you asked the man you brought down with you?" the surgeon +said. "You say that he put it on, and he may know of something that +will take it off again."</p> +<p>"No; I have asked him, and he knows of nothing. He used some of +the dye stuffs of the country, but he said he never heard of anyone +wanting to take the dye out of things that had been coloured."</p> +<p>"If it were only cotton or cloth," the doctor said, "I have no +doubt a very strong solution of soda would take out the greater +portion of the dye; but the human skin won't stand boiling water. +However, I should say that if you have water as hot as you can bear +it, with plenty of soda and soap, it will do something for you. No +doubt, if you were to take a handful or two of very fine sand, it +would help a great deal; but if you use that, I should not put any +soda with the water, or you will practically take all the skin off, +and leave your face like a raw beef steak; which will be worse than +the stain and, indeed, in so hot a sun as we have, might be +dangerous, and bring on erysipelas. So you must be very careful; +and it will be far better for you to put up with being somewhat +singular in your appearance, for a bit, than to lay yourself up by +taking any strong measures to get rid of it."</p> +<p>After an hour spent in vigorous washing, and aided by several +rubs with very fine sand, Stanley succeeded, to his great +satisfaction, in almost getting rid of the tattoo marks on his +face. The general dye had faded a little, though not much; but that +with which the marks had been made was evidently of a less stable +character, and yielded to soap and friction.</p> +<p>Before he had concluded the work two trunks arrived and, finding +that his face was now beginning to smart a good deal, he abstained +for the time from further efforts; and turned to inspect his +purchases, with a good deal of interest. The uniforms consisted of +two undress suits; one with trousers, the other with breeches and +high boots, for riding. There was also a suit of mess jacket, +waistcoat, and trousers; three suits of white drill; half a dozen +white shirts for mess, and as many of thin flannel; and a good +stock of general underclothes, a pair of thick boots, and a light +pair for mess. There was also the sword, belt, and other +equipments; in fact, all the necessaries he would require for a +campaign.</p> +<p>Before beginning to dress, he began to free his hair from the +wax with which it had been plastered up. He had obtained from the +doctor some spirits of turpentine and, with the aid of this, he +found the task a less difficult one than he had expected and, the +regimental barber being sent for by Captain Cooke, his hair was +soon shortened to the ordinary length.</p> +<p>"You will do very well, now," the major said, as he went down +into the general room. "You have certainly succeeded a great deal +better than I thought you would. Of course you look very brown, but +there are a good many others nearly as dark as you are; for between +the rain showers the sun has tremendous power, and some of the +men's faces are almost skinned, while others have browned +wonderfully. I am sure that many of them are quite as dark as +yours. So you will pass muster very well."</p> +<p>Before beginning to wash and change, Stanley had given Meinik +the clothes he had carried down with him; and when he went out to +take a short look round before tiffin--for which the servants were +already laying the cloth--he found the man, now looking like a +respectable Burman, standing near the door. He walked slowly past +him, but the man did not move--not recognizing him, in the +slightest degree, in his present attire.</p> +<p>Then Stanley turned and faced him.</p> +<p>"So you don't know me, Meinik."</p> +<p>The Burman gave a start of surprise.</p> +<p>"Certainly I did not know you, my lord," he said. "Who could +have known you? Before you were a poor Burmese peasant, now you are +an English lord."</p> +<p>"Not a lord at all, Meinik. I am simply an English officer, and +dressed very much the same as I was when your people knocked me on +the head, at Ramoo."</p> +<p>"I know your voice," Meinik said; "but even now that I know it +is you, I hardly recognize your face. Of course, the tattoo marks +made a great difference, but that is not all."</p> +<p>"I think it is the hair that has made most difference, Meinik. +You see, it was all pulled off the brow and neck, before; and it +will be some time before it will grow naturally again. I had great +trouble to get it to lie down, even when it was wet; and it will +certainly have a tendency to stick up, for a long time.</p> +<p>"The dress has made a good deal of alteration in you, too."</p> +<p>"They are very good clothes," Meinik said. "I have never had +such good ones on before. I have had money enough to buy them; but +people would have asked where I got it from, and it never does to +make a show of being better off than one's neighbour. A man is sure +to be fleeced, if he does.</p> +<p>"What can I do for my lord?"</p> +<p>"Nothing, at present, Meinik. I am going to lunch with the +officers here, and to dine with the general, and sleep here. +Tomorrow I daresay I shall move into quarters of my own.</p> +<p>"You had better buy what you want, for today, in the market. I +don't know whether it is well supplied but, as we saw some of your +people about, there must be food to be obtained."</p> +<p>"They gave me plenty to eat when I came in," he said, "but I +will buy something for supper.</p> +<p>"No, I do not want money, I have plenty of lead left."</p> +<p>"You had better take a couple of rupees, anyhow. There are sure +to be some traders from India who have opened shops here, and they +won't care to take lead in payment. You must get some fresh muslin +for your turban; and you had better close it up at the top, this +time. It will go better with your clothes."</p> +<p>Meinik grinned.</p> +<p>"I shall look quite like a person of importance. I shall be +taken for, at least, the headman of a large village."</p> +<p>He took the two rupees and walked off towards the town, while +Stanley went in to luncheon. There were a good many remarks as to +his altered appearance.</p> +<p>"Do you know, Brooke," one of the young lieutenants said, "I did +not feel at all sure that Cooke was not humbugging us, when he +introduced you to us, and that you were not really a Burman who had +travelled, and had somehow learned to speak English extraordinarily +well."</p> +<p>"Clothes and soap and water make a wonderful difference," +Stanley laughed, "but I shall be a good many shades lighter, when +the rest of the dye wears off. At any rate, I can go about, now, +without anyone staring at me."</p> +<p>After tiffin, Stanley had to tell his story again, at a very +much greater length than before.</p> +<p>"You certainly have gone through some queer adventures," the +major said, when he had finished his relation; "and there is no +doubt that you have had wonderful luck. In the first place, if that +bullet had gone half an inch lower, you would not have been one of +the four white survivors of that ugly business at Ramoo; then you +were lucky that they did not chop off your head, either when they +first took you, or when they got you to Ava. Then again, it was +lucky that Bandoola sent a special message that he wanted you kept +as an interpreter for himself, and that the official in charge of +you turned out a decent fellow, and aided you to make your +escape.</p> +<p>"As to your obtaining the services of the man you brought down +with you, I do not regard that as a question of luck. You saved the +man's life, by an act of the greatest bravery--one that not one man +in ten would perform, or try to perform, for the life of a total +stranger. I hope that I should have made the effort, had I been in +your place; but I say frankly that I am by no means sure that I +should have done so.</p> +<p>"The betting was a good twenty to one against its being done +successfully. If the brute had heard your footstep, it would have +been certain death and, even when you reached him, the chances were +strongly against your being able to strike a blow at the animal +that would, for a moment, disable him; and so give you time to +snatch up one of the guns--which might not, after all, have been +loaded.</p> +<p>"It was a wonderfully gallant action, lad. You did not tell us +very much about it yourself but, while you were getting the dye +off, I got hold of one of the traders here, who happened to be +passing, and who understood their language; and with his assistance +I questioned your fellow, and got all the particulars from him. I +say again, it was as plucky a thing as I have ever heard of."</p> +<p>A few minutes later an orderly came in with a note from the +general, asking the major and Captain Cooke also to dine with him +that evening. Stanley was very pleased that the two officers were +going with him, as it took away the feeling of shyness he felt, at +the thought of presenting himself in staff uniform at the +general's.</p> +<p>Sir Archibald Campbell put him at ease, at once, by the kindness +with which he received him. Stanley began to apologize for his +dress, but the general stopped him, at once.</p> +<p>"I intended, of course, that you should wear it, Mr. Brooke. I +am sure that you would not find a dress suit in the camp. However, +we will make matters all right, tomorrow. Judging from what you +said that, as you cannot join your uncle at present, you would be +willing to remain here, your name will appear in orders, tomorrow +morning, as being granted a commission in the 89th, pending the +arrival of confirmation from home; which of course, in such a case, +is a mere form. You will also appear in the orders as being +appointed my aide-de-camp, in place of Mr. Hitchcock, with extra +pay as interpreter.</p> +<p>"No, do not thank me. Having served as a volunteer, taken part +in a severe action, and having been wounded and imprisoned, you had +almost a right to a commission. After dinner, I hope that you will +give us all a full account of your adventures; it was but a very +slight sketch that I heard from you, this morning."</p> +<p>The general then introduced Stanley to the other members of his +staff.</p> +<p>"If you had seen him as I saw him, this morning," he said, with +a smile, "you certainly would not recognize him now. He was naked +to the waist, and had nothing on but the usual peasant attire of a +piece of black cloth, reaching to his knees. I knew, of course, +that the question of costume would soon be got over; but I own that +I did not think that I should be able to employ him, for some +little time. Not only was his stain a great deal darker than it is +now, but he was thickly tattooed up to the eyes, and one could +hardly be sending messages by an aide-de-camp so singular in +appearance; but I see that, somehow, he has entirely got rid of the +tattoo marks; and his skin is now very little, if at all, darker +than that of many of us, so that I shall be able to put him in +harness at once."</p> +<p>After dinner was over and cigars lighted, Stanley told his story +as before, passing over lightly the manner in which he had gained +the friendship of the Burman. When he had finished, however, Major +Pemberton said:</p> +<p>"With your permission, general, I will supplement the story a +little. Mr. Brooke has told me somewhat more than he has told you, +but I gained the whole facts from his guide's own lips."</p> +<p>"No, major, please," Stanley said colouring, even under his dye. +"The matter is not worth telling."</p> +<p>"You must permit us to be a judge of that, Mr. Brooke," the +general said, with a smile at the young fellow's interruption of +his superior officer.</p> +<p>"I beg your pardon, Major Pemberton," Stanley stammered in some +confusion. "Only--"</p> +<p>"Only you would rather that I did not tell about your struggle +with the leopard. I think it ought to be told, and I am pretty sure +Sir Archibald Campbell will agree with me," and Major Pemberton +then gave a full account of the adventure in the forest.</p> +<p>"Thank you, major. You were certainly quite right in telling the +story, for it is one that ought to be told and, if Mr. Brooke will +forgive my saying so, is one of those cases in which it is a +mistake for a man to try to hide his light under a bushel.</p> +<p>"You see, it cannot but make a difference in the estimation in +which we hold you. Most young fellows would, as you did, have +joined their countrymen when threatened by a greatly superior enemy +and, again, most would, if prisoners, have taken any opportunity +that offered to effect their escape. Therefore, in the brief +account that you gave me, this morning, it appeared to me that you +had behaved pluckily and shrewdly, and had well earned a +commission, especially as you have a knowledge of the language. You +simply told me that you had been able to render some service to the +Burman who travelled down with you, but such service might have +been merely that you assisted him when he was in want, bound up a +wound, or any other small matter.</p> +<p>"Now we find that you performed an act of singular courage, an +act that even the oldest shikaree would have reason to be proud of. +Such an act--performed, too, for a stranger, and that stranger an +enemy--would, of itself, give any man a title to the esteem and +regard of any among whom he might be thrown, and would lead them to +regard him in an entirely different light to that in which they +would otherwise have held him.</p> +<p>"I think that you will all agree with me, gentlemen."</p> +<p>"Certainly."</p> +<p>There was a chorus of assent from the circle of officers. His +narrative had, as the general said, shown that the young fellow was +possessed of coolness, steadiness, and pluck; but this feat was +altogether out of the common and, as performed by a mere lad, +seemed little short of marvellous.</p> +<p>"You will, of course, have Hitchcock's quarters," the +quartermaster general said to Stanley, as the party broke up. "It +is a small room, but it has the advantage of being water tight, +which is more than one can say of most of our quarters. It is a +room in the upper storey of the next house. I fancy the poor +fellow's card is on the door still. The commissariat offices are in +the lower part of the house, and they occupy all the other rooms +upstairs; but we kept this for one of the aides-de-camp, so that +the general could send a message at once, night or day."</p> +<p>"Of course I shall want a horse, sir."</p> +<p>"Yes, you must have a horse. I will think over what we can do +for you, in that way. There is no buying one here, unless a field +officer is killed, or dies.</p> +<p>"By the way, Hitchcock's horses are not sold, yet. They were not +put up, yesterday. I have no doubt that some arrangement can be +made about them, and the saddlery."</p> +<p>"That would be excellent, sir. As I told the general this +morning, I have some rubies and other stones. I have no idea what +they are worth. They were given me by those men I was with, in the +forest. They said that they were very difficult to dispose of, as +the mines are monopolies of government so, when my man Meinik +proposed it, they acceded at once to his request, and handed a +number of them over to me.</p> +<p>"I have not even looked at them. There may be someone, here, who +could tell me what they are worth."</p> +<p>"Yes, I have no doubt some of those Parsee merchants, who have +lately set up stores, could tell you. I should only take down two +or three stones to them, if I were you. If they are really +valuable, you might be robbed of them; but I am rather afraid that +you will not find that they are so. Brigand fellows will hardly +have been likely to give you anything very valuable."</p> +<p>"I don't think that they looked at them, themselves; they were +the proceeds of one day's attack on a number of merchants. They +found them concealed on them, and they were so well satisfied with +the loot they got, in merchandise that they could dispose of, that +I doubt whether they even opened the little packages of what they +considered the most dangerous goods to keep; for if they were +captured, and gems found upon them, it would be sufficient to +condemn them, at once."</p> +<p>"Do you speak Hindustani? If not, I will send one of the clerks +with you."</p> +<p>"Yes, sir; and three or four other of the Indian languages."</p> +<p>"Ah! Then you can manage for yourself.</p> +<p>"When you have seen one of these Parsees, come round to my +office. I shall have seen the paymaster by that time, and have +talked over with him how we can arrange about the horses. I should +think that the best way would be to have a committee of three +officers to value them, and the saddlery; and then you might +authorize him to receive your extra pay as interpreter, and to +place it to Hitchcock's account. You will find your own staff pay +more than ample, here; as there are no expenses, whatever, except +your share of the mess."</p> +<p>"Thank you very much, indeed, Colonel."</p> +<p>In the morning, Stanley took one of the little parcels from the +bag and opened it. It contained thirty stones, of which twenty were +rubies, six sapphires, and four emeralds. They seemed to him of a +good size but, as they were in the rough state, he had no idea what +size they would be, when cut.</p> +<p>There were three of the Parsee merchants. The first he went to +said, at once, that he did not deal in gems. The next he called on +examined the stones carefully.</p> +<p>"It is impossible to say, for certain," he said, "how much they +are worth until they are cut, for there may be flaws in them that +cannot be detected. Now, if I were to buy them like this, I could +not give more than a hundred rupees each. If they are all flawless, +they would be worth much more; but it would be a pure speculation, +and I will not go beyond that sum."</p> +<p>Stanley then visited the third store. The trader here inspected +them a little more carefully than the last had done, examined them +with a magnifying glass, held them up to the light; then he weighed +each stone and jotted down some figures. At last, he said:</p> +<p>"The stones are worth five thousand rupees. If they are +flawless, they would be worth double that. I will give you five +thousand myself or, if you like, I will send them to a friend of +mine, at Madras. He is one of the best judges of gems in India. He +shall say what he will give for them, and you shall pay me five +percent commission. He is an honest trader; you can ask any of the +officers from Madras."</p> +<p>"I will accept that offer, if you will make me an advance of +fifteen hundred rupees upon them; and will pay you, at the rate of +ten percent per annum, interest till you receive the money for +them."</p> +<p>The Parsee again took the gems, and examined them carefully.</p> +<p>"Do you agree to take the jeweller's offer, whatever it is?"</p> +<p>"Yes; that is to say, if it is over the five thousand. If it is +under the five thousand, I will sell them to you at that sum."</p> +<p>"I agree to that," the man said. "But do not fear; if the two +largest stones are without a flaw, they alone are worth five +thousand."</p> +<p>"Let us draw up the agreement, at once," Stanley said.</p> +<p>And, accordingly, the terms were drawn up, in Hindustani, and +were signed by both parties. The Parsee then went to a safe, +unlocked it, and counted out the rupees, to the value of 150 +pounds. These he placed in a bag, and handed them to Stanley who, +delighted at the sum that he had obtained for but a small portion +of the gems, went to the quartermaster general's office.</p> +<p>"We have just finished your business," Colonel Adair said, as he +entered. "Major Moultrie, the paymaster, Colonel Watt, and myself +have examined the horses. I know that Hitchcock paid sixty pounds +apiece for them, at Calcutta. They are both Arabs, and good ones, +and were not dear at the money. Our opinion is that, if they were +put up to auction here, they would fetch 40 pounds apiece; and that +the saddle and bridle, holsters, and accoutrements would fetch +another 20 pounds. There are also a pair of well-finished pistols +in the holsters. They were overlooked, or they would have been put +up in the sale yesterday. They value them at 8 pounds the brace; in +all, 108 pounds.</p> +<p>"Will that suit you? The major will, as I proposed, stop the +money from your pay as a first-class interpreter--that is, two +hundred and fifty rupees a month--so that, in four months and a +half, you will have cleared it off."</p> +<p>"I am very much obliged to you, Colonel; but I have just +received an advance of fifteen hundred rupees, on some of my gems +which the Parsee is going to send to a jeweller, of the name of +Burragee, at Madras."</p> +<p>"I congratulate you, for I hardly hoped that they would turn out +to be worth so much. Burragee is a first-rate man, and you can rely +upon getting a fair price from him. Well, that obviates all +difficulty.</p> +<p>"By the way, I should recommend you to get a light bedstead and +bed, and a couple of blankets, at one of the Parsee stores. Of +course, you did not think of it, yesterday, or you might have +bought Hitchcock's. However, I noticed in one of the Parsees' shops +a number of light bamboo bedsteads; which are the coolest and best +in a climate like this. If you lay a couple of blankets on the +bamboos, you will find that you don't want a mattress."</p> +<p>"I don't know what my duties are, sir, or whether the general +will be wanting me."</p> +<p>"He will not want you, today. Anyhow, he will know that you will +be making your arrangements, and moving into your quarters.</p> +<p>"By the way, Hitchcock brought a syce with him. You must have a +man for your horses, and I have no doubt he will be glad to stay on +with you."</p> +<p>Two hours later Stanley was installed in his quarters--a room +some twelve feet long by eight wide. A bed stood in one corner. +There was a table for writing on, two light bamboo chairs, and an +Indian lounging chair. In the corner was a small bamboo table, on +which was a large brass basin; while a great earthenware jar for +water stood beside it, and a piece of Indian matting covered the +floor.</p> +<p>He learned that the staff messed together, in a large room in +the next house; and that he would there get a cup of coffee and a +biscuit, at six in the morning, breakfast at half-past eight, lunch +and dinner; so that he would not have to do any cooking, whatever, +for himself. He had given Meinik a small sum to lay out in cooking +pots and necessaries for his own use.</p> +<p>The syce had gladly entered his employ. Stanley had inspected +the horses which, although light to the eye, would be well capable +of bearing his weight through a long day's work. They were +picketed, with those of the general and staff, in a line behind the +house devoted to the headquarters. After lunch he went into the +general's, and reported himself as ready for duty.</p> +<p>"I shall not want you this afternoon, Mr. Brooke. Here is a plan +showing the position of the different corps. You had better get it +by heart. When it gets cooler, this afternoon, I should advise you +to ride out and examine the position and the roads; so that even at +night you can, if necessary, carry a message to any of the +regiments. The Burmese are constantly creeping up and stabbing our +sentries, and sometimes they attack in considerable force. When +anything like heavy firing begins, it will be your duty to find out +at once what is going on; and bring me word, as it may be necessary +to send up reinforcements.</p> +<p>"In the morning it will be your duty to examine any prisoners +who have been taken during the night, and also natives who have +made their way into the town; in order to ascertain whether any +date has been fixed for their next attack, and what forces are +likely to take part in it. You can make your man useful at this +work.</p> +<p>"By the way, I will tell Colonel Adair to put him down on the +list of the quartermaster's native followers. He need not do +anything else but this. But it is likely that the natives will +speak more freely to him than they would to a white officer, and he +may as well be earning thirty rupees a month, and drawing rations, +as hanging about all day, doing nothing."</p> +<p>Thanking the general, Stanley took the plan and, going back to +his quarters, studied it attentively. He told Meinik of the +arrangement that had been made for him, with which the Burman was +much pleased. Thirty rupees a month seemed a large sum to him, and +he was glad that he should not be costing Stanley money for his +food.</p> +<p>Three hours later one of his horses was brought round, and he +started on his ride through the camp. There were two roads leading +through the town to the great pagoda. Both were thickly bordered by +religious houses and pagodas--the latter, for the most part, being +in a state of dilapidation. Houses and pagodas alike had been +turned into quarters for the troops, and had been invaluable during +the wet season.</p> +<p>The terrace of the great pagoda was occupied by the 89th +Regiment and the Madras Artillery. This was the most advanced +position, and was the key of the defence. Leaving his horse in +charge of his syce, at the foot of the pagoda hill, Stanley went up +to the terrace and soon entered into conversation with some of the +British officers; who at once recognized him as having been, that +morning, put in orders as the general's aide-de-camp. As he was +unknown to everyone, and no ship had come in for some days, there +was naturally much curiosity felt as to who the stranger was who +had been appointed to a commission, and to the coveted post of +aide-de-camp, in one day.</p> +<p>After chatting for two or three minutes, they conducted Stanley +to the colonel's quarters, a small building at the foot of the +pagoda.</p> +<p>"This is Mr. Brooke, Colonel, the gentleman who was gazetted to +us, this morning."</p> +<p>"I am glad to see you, Mr. Brooke; but I should be more glad, +still, if you had been coming to join, for we have lost several +officers from sickness, and there are others unfit for duty. When +did you arrive?"</p> +<p>"I arrived only yesterday morning, sir. I came here in disguise, +having made my way down from Ava."</p> +<p>"Oh, indeed! We heard a report that a white man had arrived, in +disguise, at the lines of the 45th Native Infantry; but we have had +no particulars, beyond that."</p> +<p>"I was captured at Ramoo, sir, while I was acting as an officer +of the native levy. Fortunately I was stunned by the graze of a +musket ball and, being supposed dead, was not killed; as were all +the other officers who fell into the hands of the Burmese. Their +fury had abated by the time I came to myself, and I was carried up +to Ava with some twenty sepoy prisoners. After a time I made my +escape from prison, and took to the forest; where I remained some +weeks, till the search for me had abated somewhat. Then I made my +way down the country, for the most part in a fishing boat, +journeying only at night, and so succeeded in getting in here. +Fortunately I speak the Mug dialect, which is very closely akin to +the Burmese."</p> +<p>"Well," the colonel said, "I hope that you will consider the +regiment your home; though I suppose that, until the campaign is at +an end, you will only be able to pay us an occasional visit. You +are lucky in getting the staff appointment. No doubt your being +able to talk Burmese has a great deal to do with it."</p> +<p>"Everything, I think, sir. The general had no one on his staff +who could speak the language and, unless he happened to have with +him one of the very few men here who can do so, often had to wait +some time before a prisoner could be questioned."</p> +<p>He remained chatting for half an hour, and then rode back to the +town; taking the other road to that which he had before +traversed.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch8" id="Ch8">Chapter 8</a>: The Pagoda.</h2> +<p>Two days later a prisoner was captured, when endeavouring to +crawl up the pagoda hill--having slipped past the outposts--and was +sent into headquarters. Stanley questioned him closely; but could +obtain no information, whatever, from him. Telling him to sit down +by the house, he placed a British sentry over him.</p> +<p>"Keep your eye," he said, "on the door of the next house. You +will see a Burman come out. You are to let him talk with the +prisoner, but let no one else speak to him. Don't look as if you +had any orders about him, but stand carelessly by. The fellow will +tell us nothing, but it is likely enough that he will speak to one +of his own countrymen."</p> +<p>"I understand, sir."</p> +<p>Stanley went into his house and told Meinik what he was wanted +to do.</p> +<p>"I will find out," Meinik said confidently and, a minute or two +later, went out and strolled along past the prisoner. As he did so +he gave him a little nod and, returning again shortly, saluted him +in Burmese. The third time he passed he looked inquiringly at the +sentry, as if to ask whether he might speak to the prisoner. The +soldier, however, appeared to pay no attention to him; but stood +with grounded musket, leaning against the wall, and Meinik went up +to the man.</p> +<p>"You are in bad luck," he said. "How did you manage to fall into +the hands of these people?"</p> +<p>"It matters not to you," the Burman said indignantly, "since you +have gone over to them."</p> +<p>"Not at all, not at all," Meinik replied. "Do you not know that +there are many here who, like myself, have come in as fugitives, +with instructions what to do when our people attack? I am expecting +news as to when the soothsayers declare the day to be a fortunate +one. Then we shall all be in readiness to do our share, as soon as +the firing begins."</p> +<p>"It will be on the fourth day from this," the Burman said. "We +do not know whether it will be the night before, or the night +after. The soothsayers say both will be fortunate nights; and the +Invulnerables will then assault the pagoda, and sweep the +barbarians away. The princes and woongees will celebrate the great +annual festival there, two days later."</p> +<p>"That is good!" Meinik said. "We shall be on the lookout, never +fear."</p> +<p>"What are they going to do to me. Will they cut off my +head?"</p> +<p>"No, you need not be afraid of that. These white men never kill +prisoners. After they are once taken, they are safe. You will be +kept for a time and, when our countrymen have destroyed the +barbarians and taken the town, they will free you from prison.</p> +<p>"There are some of the white officers coming. I must get away, +or they will be asking questions."</p> +<p>As he walked away, the sentry put his musket to his shoulder and +began to march briskly up and down. A moment later the general +stepped up to him.</p> +<p>"What are you doing, my man? Who put you on guard over that +prisoner?"</p> +<p>"I don't know his name, sir," the sentry said, standing at +attention. "He was a young staff officer. He came to the guard tent +and called for a sentry and, as I was next on duty, the sergeant +sent me with him. He put me to watch this man."</p> +<p>"All right; keep a sharp lookout over him.</p> +<p>"I wonder what Brooke left the fellow here for, instead of +sending him to prison," the general said to Colonel Adair. "We +examined him, but could get nothing out of him, even when I +threatened to hang him."</p> +<p>"I will just run up to his quarters and ask him, sir."</p> +<p>Just as he entered the house, Stanley was coming down the +stairs.</p> +<p>"The general wants to know, Mr. Brooke, why you placed a +prisoner under a guard by his house; instead of sending him to the +prison, as usual?"</p> +<p>"I was just coming to tell him, sir."</p> +<p>"Ah, well, he is outside; so you can tell us both together."</p> +<p>"Well, Mr. Brooke, what made you put a sentry over the man, and +leave him here? The men are hard enough worked, without having +unnecessary sentry duty."</p> +<p>"Yes, sir; I only left him for a few minutes. I was convinced +the man knew something, by his demeanour when I questioned him; and +I thought I might as well try if my man could not get more out of +him than I could. So I put a sentry over him, and gave him +instructions that he was to let a Burman, who would come out of +this house, speak to the prisoner; but that no one else was to +approach him.</p> +<p>"Then I instructed my man as to the part that he was to play. He +passed two or three times, making a sign of friendship to the +prisoner. Then, as the sentry had apparently no objection to his +speaking to him, he came up. At first the man would say nothing to +him, but Meinik told him that he was one of those who had been sent +to Rangoon to aid, when the assault took place; and that he was +anxiously waiting for news when the favourable day would be +declared by the astrologers, so that he and those with him would be +ready to begin their work, as soon as the attack commenced. The +prisoner fell into the snare, and told him that it would be made +either on the night before or on the night of the fourth day from +this; when the Invulnerables had undertaken to storm the pagoda. It +seems that the date was fixed partly because it was a fortunate +one, and also in order that the princes and head officials might +properly celebrate the great annual festival of the pagoda; which +falls, it seems, on the sixth day from now."</p> +<p>"Excellent indeed, Mr. Brooke. It is a great relief to me to +know when the assault is going to take place, and from what point +it will be delivered. But what made you think of the story that the +Burman was one of a party that had come in to do something?"</p> +<p>"It was what Colonel Adair mentioned at dinner, last evening, +sir. He was saying how awkward it would be if some of these natives +who have come in were to fire the town, just as a strong attack was +going on, and most of the troops engaged with the enemy. It was not +unlikely that, if such a plan had been formed, the prisoner would +know of it; and that he might very well believe what my man said, +that some men had been sent into the town, with that or some +similar intention."</p> +<p>"True enough. The idea was a capital one, Mr. Brooke; and we +shall be ready for them, whichever night they come.</p> +<p>"Will you please go across to the guard tent, and tell the +sergeant to send a corporal across to the man on sentry, with +orders to take the prisoner to the jail, and hand him over to the +officer in command there? When you have done that, will you ride +out to the pagoda and inform your colonel what you have discovered? +It will be a relief to him, and to the men for, as the date of the +attack has been uncertain, he has been obliged to largely increase +his patrols, and to keep a portion of his force, all night, under +arms. He will be able to decrease the number, and let the men have +as much sleep as they can, for the next two nights.</p> +<p>"The clouds are banking up, and I am very much afraid that the +rain is going to set in again. They say that we shall have another +two months of it."</p> +<p>After seeing the prisoner marched away, Stanley rode to the +pagoda and, saying that he had come with a message from the +general, was at once shown into the colonel's quarters.</p> +<p>"Any news, Mr. Brooke?"</p> +<p>"Yes, Colonel; the general has requested me to inform you, at +once, of the news that I have obtained from a prisoner; namely +that, either on the night of the 30th or 31st, your position will +be attacked, by the men who are called the Invulnerables."</p> +<p>"We will give them a chance of proving whether their title is +justified," the colonel said, cheerfully. "That is very good news. +The men are getting thoroughly worn out with the extra night duty +caused by this uncertainty. You think that there is no doubt that +the news is correct?"</p> +<p>"None whatever, sir. I could do nothing with the prisoner; but +my Burman pretended to have a mission here, to kick up a row in the +town when the attack began; and the man, believing his story, at +once told him that the attack will be made on the pagoda, by the +Invulnerables, on the early morning of the fourth day from this--or +on the next night--the astrologers having declared that the time +would be propitious, and also because they were very anxious to +have the pagoda in their hands, in order that the princes might +celebrate the great annual festival that is held, it seems, two +days after."</p> +<p>The colonel laughed.</p> +<p>"I am afraid that they will have to put it off for another year. +The general gave no special orders, I suppose?"</p> +<p>"No, sir; he had only just received the news, and ordered me to +ride over at once to you, as he was sure that you would be glad to +know that it would not be necessary to keep so many men on night +duty, for the next two days."</p> +<p>"Thank you, Mr. Brooke. Will you kindly tell the general that I +am very pleased at the news? No doubt he will be up here, himself, +this afternoon or tomorrow."</p> +<p>Stanley rode back fast, and was just in time to escape a +tremendous downpour of rain, which began a few minutes after he +returned. He went in at once to the general's, but was told that he +was engaged with the quartermaster and adjutant generals. He +therefore went into the anteroom where Tollemache, his fellow +aide-de-camp, was standing at the window, looking out at the +rain.</p> +<p>"This is a beastly climate," he grumbled. "It is awful to think +that we are likely to get another two months of it; and shall then +have to wait at least another, before the country is dry enough to +make a move. You were lucky in getting in, just now, before it +began."</p> +<p>"I was indeed," Stanley agreed, "for I had ridden off without my +cloak, and should have been drenched, had it begun two minutes +earlier."</p> +<p>"I saw you gallop past, and wondered what you were in such a +hurry about. Was it like this when you were out in the woods?"</p> +<p>"Not in the least. There is very little rain near Ava; though +the country is a good deal flooded, where it is flat, from the +rivers being swollen by the rains in the hills. We had lovely +weather, all the time."</p> +<p>"I should like to see a little lovely weather here. The last +week has been almost worse than the rain--the steamy heat is like +being in a vapour bath. If it were not that I am on duty, I should +like to strip, and go out and enjoy a shower bath for half an +hour."</p> +<p>Stanley laughed.</p> +<p>"It really would be pleasant," he said. "I don't think that I +gained much by hurrying back, for the gallop has thrown me into +such a perspiration that I might almost as well be drenched by the +rain, except that my clothes won't suffer so much."</p> +<p>"Ah, it is all very well for you," the other grumbled. "Of +course, after once having wandered about in the forest, painted up +like a nigger, you feel cheerful under almost any circumstances; +but for us who have been cooped up, doing nothing, in this beastly +place, it is impossible to look at things cheerfully."</p> +<p>"Have you heard that the enemy are going to attack, on Tuesday +or Wednesday night?"</p> +<p>"No!" the other exclaimed, with a sudden animation. "The general +only came in a quarter of an hour ago and, as he had the two +bigwigs with him, of course I did not speak to him. Is it certain? +How did you hear it?"</p> +<p>"It is quite certain--that is, unless the Burmese change their +mind, which is not likely. The princes want to celebrate the great +annual festival at the pagoda, on Friday; and so the Invulnerables +are going, as they think, to capture it either on Tuesday or +Wednesday night. I have just been up there to tell the colonel.</p> +<p>"As to your other question--how did I learn it--I got it, or +rather my Burman did, from that prisoner we were questioning this +morning. He would not say anything then; but my man got round him +and, believing that he was a spy, or something of that kind, the +prisoner told him all about it."</p> +<p>"Are they only going to attack at the pagoda?"</p> +<p>"That I cannot say; that is the only point that the man +mentioned. I should say that it would only be there."</p> +<p>"Why should it only be there?"</p> +<p>"Because I should imagine that even the Burmese must be +beginning to doubt whether they could defeat our whole force and, +as they particularly wish to occupy the pagoda on Friday, they +would hardly risk an attack on other points, which might end in +disaster while, what with the propitious nature of the day, and the +fact that the Invulnerables have undertaken to capture the pagoda, +no doubt they look upon that as certain."</p> +<p>"I suppose that you are right, Brooke. Well, I do hope that the +general will let us go up to see the fun."</p> +<p>"What, even if it is raining?"</p> +<p>"Of course," the other said, indignantly. "What does one care +for rain, when there is something to do? Why, I believe that, if it +was coming down in a sheet, and the men had to wade through the +swamps waist deep, they would all march in the highest spirits, if +there was the chance of a fight with the Burmans at the end of the +day.</p> +<p>"However, I am afraid that there is no chance of our getting +off, unless the chief goes, himself. There may be attacks in other +places. As you say, it is not likely; but it is possible. +Therefore, of course, we should have to be at hand, to carry +orders. Of course, if he takes his post at the pagoda it will be +all right; though the betting is that we shall have to gallop off, +just at the most interesting moment."</p> +<p>Presently the two officers left the general. The latter's bell +rang, and Stanley went in.</p> +<p>"You saw the colonel, Mr. Brooke?"</p> +<p>"Yes, sir; and he begged me to say that he was extremely glad to +get the news, and much obliged to you for sending it so +promptly."</p> +<p>"There is no occasion for you and Mr. Tollemache to stay here +any longer, now; but at five o'clock I shall ride out to the +pagoda. At any rate, should I want you before then, I shall know +where to send for you."</p> +<p>This was the general order, for in the afternoon there was, when +things were quiet, a hush for two or three hours. The work of the +aides-de-camp was, indeed, generally very light for, as there were +no movements of troops, no useless parades, and very few military +orders to be carried, they had a great deal of time on their hands; +and usually took it by turns to be on duty for the day, the one off +duty being free to pay visits to acquaintances in the various +camps, or on board ship. During the rainy season, however, very few +officers or men went beyond shelter, unless obliged to do so and, +from two till four or five, no small proportion passed the time in +sleep.</p> +<p>Stanley had intended to pay a visit to the Larne; as Captain +Marryat, who had dined at the staff mess on the previous evening, +had invited him to go on board, whenever it might be convenient to +him. The Larne had performed good service, in the operations +against the stockades; and her boats had been particularly active +and successful. Her captain was one of the most popular, as well as +one of the most energetic officers in the service; and was to +become as popular, with future generations, as the brightest of all +writers of sea stories.</p> +<p>However, the day was not favourable for an excursion on the +water. Stanley therefore went back to his room where, divesting +himself of his jacket, he sat down at the open window, and read up +a batch of the last newspapers, from England, that had been lent +him by Colonel Adair.</p> +<p>At five o'clock Meinik came in, to say that his horse was at the +general's door. Stanley hastily put on his jacket and cloak, and +sallied out. The general came down in a few minutes, followed by +Tollemache and, mounting, they rode to the pagoda.</p> +<p>Here Sir Archibald had a talk with the colonel of the 89th, and +the officer commanding the battery of the Madras Artillery. Both +were of opinion that their force was amply sufficient to resist any +attack. The only approach to it from the forest was a long road +between two swamps which, a short distance away, had become lakes +since the wet weather set in.</p> +<p>"Had they taken us by surprise," the colonel said, "some of them +might have got across, before we were quite ready for them, and +might have given us some trouble but, as we shall be prepared, I +don't think that any of them will reach the foot of this hill and, +if they did, none of them would reach this terrace. If an attack +were made from the other side, it would of course be a good deal +more serious, as the ground is firm and they could attack all along +the foot of the hill; but as they cannot get there, until they have +defeated the rest of the army, I consider that, even without the +assistance of the guns, we could hold the hill with musket and +bayonet against any force that they are likely to bring against +us."</p> +<p>"Very well, then; I shall not reinforce you, Colonel. Of course, +we shall keep a considerable number of troops under arms, in case +they should attack all along the line, at the same time that they +make their principal effort here.</p> +<p>"I rather hope that the rain will keep on, until this affair is +over."</p> +<p>The colonel looked surprised.</p> +<p>"I am much more afraid," the general went on, "of fire in the +town, than I am of an attack without. The number of natives there +is constantly increasing. No doubt the greater number of those who +come in are natives of the place, who have managed, since we +cleared out their war galleys from some of the creeks and channels, +to escape from the authorities and to make their way in, either on +foot or in fishermen's boats; but some of them may be sent in as +spies, or to do us harm. I have been having a long talk over it +with Colonel Adair, this afternoon, and he quite agrees with me +that we must reckon on the probability of an attempt to fire the +town. It would be a terrible blow to us if they succeeded, for the +loss of our stores would completely cripple us. They would +naturally choose the occasion of an attack upon our lines for the +attempt for, in the first place, most of the troops will be under +arms and drawn up outside the town; and in the second place the +sight of the place on fire would cause much confusion, would +inspirit our assailants, and necessitate a considerable force being +withdrawn from the field, to fight the fire.</p> +<p>"If the rains continue we need feel no uneasiness, whatever, for +there would be no getting anything to burn; whereas in dry weather, +a man with a torch might light the thatch as fast as he could run +along, and a whole street would be in a blaze in two or three +minutes and, if a wind happened to be blowing, it might make a +sweep of the whole place, in spite of all our efforts."</p> +<p>"I see that, sir. I own that I had never given it a thought, +before."</p> +<p>"I shall come up here, Colonel, unless we obtain sure news, +before the time arrives, that the attack is going to be a general +one; indeed, it is in any case the best place to post myself, for I +can see over the whole country, and send orders to any point where +the enemy may be making progress, or where our men can advance with +advantage. The line of fire flashes will be as good a guide, at +night, as the smoke by day."</p> +<p>"I will get a cot rigged up for you, General, as we don't know +which night it is to be."</p> +<p>"Thank you. Yes, I may just as well turn in, all standing, as +the sailors say, and get a few hours' sleep; for in this climate +one cannot keep at it, night and day, as we had to do in +Spain."</p> +<p>The two aides-de-camp were kept in suspense as to what the +general's intentions were, and it was not until the morning of +Tuesday that he said to them:</p> +<p>"I am going up to the pagoda this evening, Mr. Tollemache; and +you had better, therefore, put some provisions and a bottle of +brandy into your holsters."</p> +<p>At nine in the evening they rode off. The rain had ceased; the +moon was shining through the clouds.</p> +<p>"It will be down by twelve o'clock," Tollemache said. "I should +think, most likely, they will wait for that. They will think that +we shall not be able to take aim at them, in the darkness; and that +they will manage to get to the foot of the hill, without loss."</p> +<p>When they reached the platform in front of the pagoda, their +syces took their horses. Meinik had begged Stanley to let him take +his groom's place on this occasion and, laying aside the dress he +ordinarily wore, assumed the light attire of an Indian syce, and +had run behind the horses with the others. He had a strong desire +to see the fighting, but his principal motive in asking to be +allowed to accompany Stanley was that, although greatly impressed +with what he had seen of the drill and discipline of the white and +native regiments, he could not shake off his faith in the +Invulnerables; and had a conviction that the pagoda would be +captured, and therefore wished to be at hand, to bring up Stanley's +horse at the critical moment, and to aid him to escape from the +assailants.</p> +<p>Fires were burning, as usual, at several points on the terrace. +Two companies were under arms, and were standing well back from the +edge of the platform, so as to be out of sight of those in the +forest. The rest of the men were sitting round the fires. Their +muskets were piled in lines hard by.</p> +<p>When he alighted, the general proceeded to the battery.</p> +<p>"Have you everything in readiness, Major?" he asked the officer +in command.</p> +<p>"Yes, sir. The guns are all loaded with grape and, as it will be +very dark when the moon has set, I have pegged a white tape along, +just under each gun; so that they can be trained upon the causeway, +however dark it may be."</p> +<p>"That is a very good idea," the general said. "There is nothing +more difficult than laying guns accurately in the dark."</p> +<p>The colonel now arrived, a soldier having brought the news to +him, as soon as the general reached the platform.</p> +<p>"I see that you are well prepared to give them a hot reception, +Colonel."</p> +<p>"I hope so, sir. I have a strong patrol out beyond the causeway. +My orders are that they are to resist strongly, for a minute or +two, so as to give us time to have the whole of our force in +readiness here. Then they are to retreat at the double to the foot +of the hill; and then to open fire again, so that we may know that +they are out of the way, and that we can begin when we like. We +have been making some port fires this afternoon, and I have a dozen +men halfway down the hill and, directly the outposts are safely +across, they are to light the port fires, which will enable us to +take aim. These white tapes will be guide enough for the artillery; +but my men would make very poor shooting, if they could not make +out the muzzles of their guns. Anyhow, I don't think that it is +likely that the enemy will get across the causeway, however +numerous they may be."</p> +<p>"I don't think they will, Colonel. Certainly, so far, they have +shown themselves contemptible in attack; and have never made a +successful stand, even for a minute, when we once entered their +stockades, though they defend them pluckily enough until we have +once got a footing inside.</p> +<p>"Still, these fellows ought to fight well tonight for, if they +are beaten, it will be a death blow to their reputation among their +countrymen. Besides, many of them do believe in the power they +claim and, as we have found before now, in India, fanatics are +always formidable."</p> +<p>After taking a look round with the colonel, the general +accompanied him to his quarters; while the two aides-de-camp +remained on the terrace, chatting with the officers; and then, +after a time, went with some of them to the mess tent, where they +sat smoking and talking until midnight, when all went out.</p> +<p>The troops were formed up under arms, and all listened +impatiently for something that would show that the long-delayed +assault would take place that night. At half-past twelve there was +the sound of a shot, which sent an electrical thrill through the +troops. It was followed almost immediately by others. The troops +were at once marched forward to the edge of the platform. A babel +of wild shouts went up at the sound of the first shots, followed by +a burst of firing.</p> +<p>The two aides-de-camp had taken their places close to the +general, who was standing in the gap between the infantry and the +guns; and was looking intently, through his night glasses, at the +forest.</p> +<p>"They are in a dense mass," he said. "I cannot see whether they +are in any regular order, but they are certainly packed a great +deal closer than I have ever before seen them. Those in front have +got lanterns. They are coming along fast."</p> +<p>As yet the enemy were half a mile away, but the lanterns and the +flash of their guns showed their exact position, while the fire of +the outposts was kept up steadily. As the latter fell back along +the causeway, the interval between the two forces decreased; and +then the fire of the outposts ceased as, in accordance with their +orders, they broke into the double.</p> +<a id="PicD" name="PicD"></a> +<center><img src="images/d.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: The Burmese make a great effort to capture Pagoda Hill." /> +</center> +<p>The uproar of the advancing crowd was prodigious. Every man was +yelling, at the top of his voice, imprecations upon the defenders +of the pagoda; who were standing in absolute silence, waiting +eagerly for the word of command. Suddenly the firing broke out +again at the foot of the hill and, immediately, a bright light shot +up from its face.</p> +<p>The edge of the dense mass of Burmese was now but some fifty +yards from the wall that surrounded the foot of the hill, and the +causeway behind was occupied by a solid mass of men. Then came the +sharp order to the artillerymen, and gun after gun poured its +charge of grape into the crowd while, at the same moment, the +infantry began to fire, by companies, in steady volleys. For an +instant the din of the assailants was silenced, then their shouts +rose again and, after a moment's hesitation, they continued their +advance.</p> +<p>But not for long. None but the most disciplined soldiers could +have advanced under that storm of grape and bullets and, in ten +minutes, they fled in wild confusion, leaving the causeway thickly +covered with the dead. Again and again the British cheers rose, +loud and triumphant; then the infantry were told to fall out, but +the guns continued their fire, until the fugitives were well in the +forest.</p> +<p>Between the shots the general listened attentively, and examined +the country towards the town through his glasses.</p> +<p>"Everything is quiet," he said. "It is probable that, if those +fellows had carried the hill, they would have made a signal, and +there might have been a general attack. As it is, the affair is +over for the night; and the Invulnerables will have some difficulty +in accounting for their failure, and loss.</p> +<p>"Now, gentlemen, we may as well have up the horses, and ride +back. We hardly expected to get away as soon as this."</p> +<p>"Well, Meinik, what do you think of your Invulnerables, now?" +Stanley said, as the Burman, after picketing his horse, came up to +his room to see if he wanted anything, before lying down on his bed +in the passage.</p> +<p>"I don't know," the Burman replied, gravely. "They may be holy +men; and proof, perhaps, against native weapons; but they are no +good against your cannon and muskets. I understand, now, how it is +that you beat us so easily. Your men all stood quiet, and in order; +one only heard the voices of the officers, and the crash as they +fired together.</p> +<p>"Then, your guns are terrible. I have seen ours firing but, +though our pieces are smaller than yours, your men fire five shots +to our one. I stood by while they were loading. It was wonderful. +Nobody talked, and nobody gave orders. Each man knew what he had to +do--one did something and, directly, another did something and, +almost before the smoke of the last shot was out of the gun, it was +ready to be fired again.</p> +<p>"It is clear to me that we have not learnt how to fight, and +that your way of having only a few men, well taught and knowing +exactly what they have to do, is better than ours of having great +numbers, and letting everyone fight as he pleases. It is bad, every +way. The brave men get to the front, and are killed; and then the +others run away.</p> +<p>"You were right. We shall never turn you out of Rangoon, till +Bandoola comes. He has all our best troops with him, and he has +never been beaten. All the troops know him, and will fight for him +as they will not fight for these princes--who know nothing of war, +and are chosen only because they are the king's brothers. When he +comes, you will see."</p> +<p>"No doubt we shall, Meinik; and you will see that, although they +may make a better fight of it than they have done tonight, it will +be just the same, in the end."</p> +<p>For the next two months the time passed slowly. No attacks were +made by the enemy, after the defeat of the assault upon the pagoda. +Peasants and deserters who came in reported that there was profound +depression among the Burmese troops. Great numbers had left the +colours, and there was no talk of another attack.</p> +<p>The troops being, therefore, relieved of much of their arduous +night duty, the English took the offensive. The stockades on the +Dalla river, and those upon the Panlang branch--the principal +passage into the main stream of the Irrawaddy--were attacked and +carried, the enemy suffering heavily, and many pieces of artillery +being captured.</p> +<p>The rains continued almost unceasingly, and the troops suffered +terribly in health. Scarce three thousand remained fit for duty, +and the greater portion of these were so emaciated and exhausted, +by the effects of the climate, that they were altogether unfit for +active operations.</p> +<p>Three weeks after the fight at the pagoda a vessel came up the +river, with a letter from the officer in command of the troops +assembled to bar the advance of Bandoola against Chittagong, saying +that the Burmese army had mysteriously disappeared. It had gone off +at night, so quietly and silently that our outposts, which were but +a short distance from it, heard no sign or movement, whatever. The +Burmese had taken with them their sick, tents, and stores; and +nothing but a large quantity of grain had been found in their +deserted stockades.</p> +<p>The news was received with satisfaction by the troops. There was +little doubt that the court of Ava--finding that their generals had +all failed in making the slightest impression upon our lines, and +had lost vast numbers of men--had at last turned to the leader who +had conquered province after province for it, and had sent him +orders to march, with his whole army, to bring the struggle to a +close. The soldiers rejoiced at the thought that they were at last +to meet a real Burmese army. Hitherto they had generally stood on +the defensive, and had to fight the climate rather than the foe; +and it seemed to them that the campaign was likely to be +interminable.</p> +<p>The march of the Burmese from Ramoo to Sembeughewn, the nearest +point of the river to the former town, must have been a terrible +one. The distance was over two hundred miles, the rains were +ceaseless, and the country covered with jungles and marshes, and +intersected by rivers. No other army could have accomplished such a +feat. The Burmans, however, accustomed to the unhealthy climate, +lightly clad, and carrying no weight save their arms and sixteen +days' supply of rice, passed rapidly over it.</p> +<p>Every man was accustomed to the use of an axe and to the +formation of rafts and, in an incredibly short time, rivers were +crossed, deep swamps traversed on roads made by closely-packed +faggots and, but a few days after hearing that Bandoola had +started, the general learned, from peasants, that the news had come +down that he and a portion of his army had arrived at +Sembeughewn.</p> +<p>Almost at the same time, other parties who travelled down along +the coast reached Donabew, a town on the Irrawaddy, some forty +miles in direct line from Rangoon. This had been named as the +rendezvous of the new army, and to this a considerable proportion +of Bandoola's force made their way direct from Ramoo; it being the +custom of the Burmese to move, when on a march through a country +where no opposition was to be looked for, in separate detachments, +each under its own leader, choosing its own way, and making for a +general rendezvous. Travelling in this manner, they performed the +journey far more rapidly than they could have done moving in one +body, and could better find shelter and food.</p> +<p>Other forces from Prome, Tannoo, and other quarters were known +to be marching towards Donabew. It was soon reported that the +dejected forces around Rangoon had gained courage and confidence, +at the news that Bandoola and his army were coming to their aid, +and that the deserters were returning in large numbers from their +villages. The British sick were sent away in the shipping to Mergy +and Tavoy, two coast towns of which we had taken possession, and +both of which were healthily situated.</p> +<p>The change had a marvellous effect, and men who would have +speedily succumbed to the poisonous exhalations of the swamps round +Rangoon rapidly regained their strength, in their new quarters.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch9" id="Ch9">Chapter 9</a>: Victories.</h2> +<p>In the meantime, negotiations had been going on with Siam, +between which state and Burma there was the bitterest enmity. It +had been thought that Siam would have willingly grasped the +opportunity to revenge itself for the many losses of territory that +it had suffered at the hands of Burma. This there was no doubt that +it would have been glad to do, but our occupation of several points +on the coast of Tenasserim roused the fears of Siam, and inclined +it to the belief that we might prove an even more dangerous +neighbour than Burma.</p> +<p>The court of Ava had, on its part, also sent urgent messages to +the King of Siam--when misfortunes had, to some extent, lowered its +pride--calling upon him to make common cause with Burma, and to +join it in repelling an enemy who would doubtless be as dangerous +to him as to Burma.</p> +<p>Siam, however, determined to steer a middle course. An army was +assembled, in readiness for any contingency; but Siam believed as +little as Burma, itself, that the British could possibly be +victorious over that power; and feared its vengeance, if she were +to ally herself with us while, upon the other hand, Siam had a long +sea coast, and feared the injury our fleet might inflict upon it, +were it to join Burma. The king, therefore, gave both powers an +assurance of his friendship; and marched his army down to the +frontier of the province of Martaban, which bordered on the great +Salween river on the Tenasserim coast, and lay some two hundred +miles from Rangoon, across the gulf of Martaban.</p> +<p>The intentions of the king being so doubtful, the advance of the +Siamese army in this direction could not be regarded with +indifference by the British. The town of Martaban was the centre of +the Burmese military power in Tenasserim, and the advance towards +it of the Siamese army would place it in direct communication with +that of Burma. On the 13th of October, therefore, a force, +consisting of a wing of the 41st Regiment and the 3rd Madras +Infantry, sailed from Rangoon against the town. The expedition was +delayed by light winds and, when it arrived at the mouth of the +river, found that every preparation had been made for an obstinate +defence. They learned, from a peasant, that strong works had been +erected on every eminence round the town; and that the road from +the coast had been cut, and stockaded.</p> +<p>Approach by this route was impossible, for there were twenty +miles of country to be traversed; and much of this was under water +from the inundations. It was, therefore, determined to go up the +river, although this was so shallow and full of shoals that the +navigation was extremely difficult. At last, after great +labour--incurred by the ships constantly getting ashore--they +succeeded in making their way up to Martaban, and anchored off the +town.</p> +<p>A heavy cannonade was carried on, for some time, between the +ships and the enemy's works. Then the troops were embarked in +boats, which rowed for the shore under a very heavy fire from the +enemy. As soon as they landed, and advanced to attack the +stockades, the Burmese lost heart and hastily retreated; while the +inhabitants received the troops as they entered with the warmest +welcome--for they were, for the most part, natives of Pegu, and +still entertained a deep hatred for the Burmese, because of the +long oppression that they had suffered at their hands.</p> +<p>Throughout the rest of Tenasserim, however; and indeed, +throughout the whole country traversed by the troops later on, the +inhabitants appeared to have entirely forgotten their ancient +nationality, and the conquest of their country by the Burmans; and +to have become completely absorbed by them. Throughout the whole +time that we occupied Martaban, the people gave no trouble whatever +and, indeed, offered to raise a force for service with us, if we +wished it.</p> +<p>At the end of October the rain ceased--to the intense delight of +the troops--and the cold season set in. November was, however, an +exceptionally deadly month--the occasional days of fine weather +drawing up the exhalations from the swamps--and the number of +deaths was greater than they had been at any previous time. There +was, too, no prospect of a forward movement, at present. The +expedition had come unprovided with boats or other means of +transport, making sure that an abundant supply would be obtained, +in a country where the whole trade was carried on by the rivers. +The promptness with which the native authorities had, on the first +appearance of the fleet, sent every boat away, had disappointed +this anticipation and, although the opening of some of the other +rivers had enabled the local fishermen to bring their boats to +Rangoon, where fish were eagerly purchased, the British troops were +still, up to the end of November, without the means of sending a +hundred men up the river, save in the boats of the fleet.</p> +<p>The Indian authorities--believing that, when the Burmese found +themselves impotent to turn us out of Rangoon, the court of Ava +would be glad to negotiate--had not, until the autumn was drawing +to a close, thought of making any preparations to supply the army +with water carriage. They now, however, began to bestir themselves. +Five hundred boatmen were sent from Chittagong, bringing many boats +down with them, and building others at Rangoon. Transports with +draft cattle sailed from Bengal, and a considerable reinforcement +of troops was on its way to join, at the end of December--for all +the natives agreed that no movement could be made, by land, until +the end of January.</p> +<p>In November, even Bandoola's army was obliged to make its +approach by water. Early in that month it was learned that the +Burmese general had given orders for the advance, and preparations +were at once begun to meet what none doubted would be a very +serious attack. The reinforcements had not yet arrived, and the +greatly diminished force was far too small for the length of the +line that had to be defended. Redoubts were therefore thrown up, +pagodas and other buildings were fortified; and two complete lines +of works constructed, from the great pagoda to the city, one facing +east and the other west.</p> +<p>The post at Kemmendine was strengthened, and was supported by H. +M. sloop Sophie, a company's cruiser, and a strong division of +gunboats. The retention of this post was of great importance, as it +barred the river approach to Rangoon, and prevented the enemy +sending down a huge fleet of war galleys and fire rafts to attack +the town, and set fire to the merchant shipping lying off it.</p> +<p>In the last week of November, smoke was seen to rise from many +points in the forest. Many fugitives came in from their villages, +and reported that Bandoola's army were all on their way down the +river; and by the end of the month some sixty thousand men, with a +large train of artillery and a body of cavalry, were assembled +round our position. Of this force, thirty thousand were armed with +muskets. They had with them, too, a great number of jingals. These +little guns carried ball of from six to twelve ounces, and were +mounted on a light carriage, which two men could wheel with ease. +The cannon were carried to the scene of action on elephants. The +cavalry were seven hundred strong, drawn from the borders of +Manipur.</p> +<p>The rest of the army were armed with swords and spears, and +carried implements for stockading and entrenching. The force was +accompanied by a number of astrologers; and by the +Invulnerables--who had, doubtless, satisfactorily explained their +failure to capture the pagoda.</p> +<p>A great semicircle of light smoke, rising from the trees, showed +that the position taken up by Bandoola extended from the river +above Kemmendine to the neighbourhood of Rangoon. On the night of +the 31st, the troops at the pagoda heard a loud and continuous stir +in the forest. It gradually approached and, by morning, great +masses of troops had gathered at the edge of the jungle, within +musket shot of the post. The garrison there were drawn up in +readiness to repel a sudden rush but, just as the sun rose, a din +made by thousands of men engaged in cutting down the trees began, +and it was evident that the Burmese were going to adopt their usual +plan of entrenching themselves behind stockades.</p> +<p>During the time that had elapsed between the repulse of the +Invulnerables and the arrival of Bandoola's army, Stanley's work +was light, and the life dull and monotonous. An hour was spent, +every morning, in examining the fugitives who had, by the retreat +of the Burmese, been enabled to make their way back to the town; +and of women who had escaped from the vigilance of the Burmese +police, and had come in from the villages where they had been held +as hostages for their husbands. Once or twice a week, he went off +with the general to the hospital ship, to inquire into the state of +the sick and to pay a visit to the long line of cots along the main +and lower deck. Almost every day he rode, in spite of the weather, +to one or other of the regimental camps; and soon came to know most +of the officers of the force. His previous experience on the rivers +had done much to acclimatise him, and his health continued +good.</p> +<p>On the evening of the 30th he had, at the general's order, +ridden up to the pagoda. It was considered likely that the attack +would be delivered there in the first place and, at three o'clock +in the morning, when it became evident that a large body of men +were approaching through the forest, he galloped back to Rangoon +with the news and, at five, rode out again with Sir A. +Campbell.</p> +<p>Among the garrison there was much disappointment when the sound +of wood chopping announced that the Burmese did not intend to +attack; but the general, who had been watching the edge of the +jungle through his glasses, lowered them and put them into their +case with an expression of satisfaction.</p> +<p>"I don't want them to attack, Colonel," he said. "If they do, +and we beat them off, we are no nearer the end than before. That +sort of thing might be carried on for months; as long, in fact, as +there remains a man to bring up. What we want is to inflict such a +heavy blow upon them, that even the court at Ava may become +convinced that they cannot hope to drive us out of Rangoon; in +which case they may consent to negotiate, and we may bring the war +to an end.</p> +<p>"Heaven knows that we have suffered enough loss, at present; and +I don't want to have to undertake such a difficult operation as an +advance against Ava. I am glad to see that they have begun to +construct stockades. I do not intend to interfere until they have +completely finished their work, and gained sufficient confidence to +make a general attack on us. Then we shall be able to give them a +heavy lesson.</p> +<p>"Ah, there they are, at work!"</p> +<p>As he spoke, a roar of musketry and artillery broke out suddenly +from Kemmendine, and all eyes were turned in that direction. The +spot was two miles distant, but the forest shut out, alike, the +view of the river and of the works held by us. The exact position, +however, was indicated by the masts of the two war vessels, rising +above the trees.</p> +<p>Soon great wreaths of heavy white smoke rose above the forest, +in and around Kemmendine, shutting out all view. The fire continued +without abatement, and it was evident that the attack was a hot and +determined one. Confident as all felt that the little fort would be +able to defend itself successfully, the great smoke clouds were +watched with some feeling of anxiety; for the garrison was, after +all, but a handful. In momentary intervals of the firing, the yells +and shouts of the natives could be distinctly heard and, once or +twice, after a heavy broadside from the ships of war, the cheers of +the British sailors could be plainly recognized.</p> +<p>After two hours' fighting the din gradually ceased. The clouds +of smoke rolled away, and the masts of the ships became visible, +and the garrison of the pagoda raised three hearty cheers, to tell +the defenders that their successful defence had been watched and +welcomed.</p> +<p>Presently some heavy columns of the enemy issued from the +forest, on the other side of the river; and marched across the +plain to Dalla, which faced Rangoon. They moved with great +regularity and order, led by their chiefs on horseback, their +gilded umbrellas glittering in the rays of the sun. On reaching the +bank of the river opposite Rangoon, they began entrenching +themselves and throwing up stockades and batteries; with the +evident intention of opening fire on the shipping. Soon afterwards +large bodies of men issued from the forest facing the pagoda and, +marching along a slight ridge, that extended from that point to the +creek below Rangoon, took up their position there, and began +entrenching themselves all along the line. Thus the British +position was now completely surrounded; there was, however, no +doubt that the main body of the enemy was still facing the +pagoda.</p> +<p>"We must see what they are doing," the general said. "This is +too important a point for us to allow them to erect a strongly +fortified position, close at hand."</p> +<p>Accordingly, Tollemache was sent down with an order to the 18th +Madras Infantry--supported by a detachment of the 13th Regiment, +under Major Sale--to advance against the enemy in the jungle. The +movements of this force were eagerly watched from the terrace of +the pagoda. At a rapid pace they crossed the intervening ground, +and a rattle of musketry broke out from the jungle as they +approached. The British made no response; but charged, with a +cheer, and were soon lost to sight in the trees. Their regular +volleys could be heard, at short intervals, above the scattered +rattle of the Burmese musketeers; and their cheers frequently rose, +loud and triumphant. In half an hour the red line emerged again +from the jungle, having destroyed the stockades the Burmese had +erected; captured several guns, a quantity of muskets, and +entrenching tools thrown away by the Burmese; and killed a large +number of the enemy.</p> +<p>During the day the enemy made repeated efforts to send fire +rafts down the river from above Kemmendine. These rafts were +constructed of bamboos, upon which were placed great numbers of +earthenware pots, filled with petroleum. These rafts were skilfully +constructed, and made in sections so that, when they drifted +against an anchor chain, they would divide--those on each side +swinging round, so as to envelop the ship on both sides with +fire.</p> +<p>The sailors from the sloops and gunboats rowed up to meet the +rafts and, although a heavy fire was kept up by the enemy, from the +jungles lining the banks, they succeeded in towing most of them +safely to shore; while the rest grounded on a projecting spit, off +Kemmendine.</p> +<p>So diligently did the Burmese work at all points throughout the +day that, by the afternoon, their whole line of circumvallation was +covered with earthworks; behind which they lay, entirely hidden +from sight.</p> +<p>"If they could fight as well as they dig, and build stockades," +Sir A. Campbell remarked, "they would be one of the most formidable +enemies in the world. No European army ever accomplished the work +of entrenching themselves so speedily as they have done. Their +arrangements have been admirable. Everything has been done without +confusion, and each body has taken up the position allotted to it; +as is evident by the fact that there is no gap in their lines.</p> +<p>"As to Bandoola's tactics, I cannot say so much for them. In the +first place, he has divided his force into two parts, separated by +a river, and incapable of helping each other. In the next place, +great as are his numbers, his lines are far too extended.</p> +<p>"Well, we will let them go on for a time; and then show them the +mistake that they have committed."</p> +<p>Major Sale's reports of the entrenchments were that they +consisted of a long line of holes, each capable of containing two +men. The earth was dug out on one side so as to form a sort of +cave. In this was a bed of straw or brushwood, on which one man +could sleep, while the other watched. Each hole contained a +sufficient supply of rice, water, and even fuel for its inmates. +One line of these holes had been completed, and another was being +dug a short distance in advance.</p> +<p>The Burmese do not relieve their men in the trenches. Those who +occupy the line first made remain there. Fresh men dig and occupy +the next line, and so the advance is continued, until close to the +work to be attacked. The system has the great advantage that a +shell falling into one of these holes only kills its two occupants; +instead of destroying many, as it might do if it fell in a +continuous trench.</p> +<p>In the afternoon the general returned to Rangoon, leaving +Stanley at the pagoda, with orders to ride down should there be any +change of importance. In the evening a considerable force of +Burmese issued from the jungle, and prepared to entrench themselves +near the northeast angle of the pagoda hill. Major Piper therefore +took two companies of the 38th and, descending the hill, drove the +Burmese, in confusion, back to the jungle.</p> +<p>In the morning it was found that the enemy had entrenched +themselves upon some high and open ground, within musket shot of +the north gate of the pagoda. It was separated from the gate by a +large tank; but as their jingals and musketry were able, from the +point they occupied, to sweep the plateau and the huts occupied by +the troops, a party of the 38th and the 28th Madras Infantry went +out, and drove them off. As soon, however, as our troops fell back +the Burmese reoccupied the position and, for the next few days, a +constant skirmishing went on at this point; while an artillery fire +was maintained, by the assailants and defenders, along the whole +line down to Rangoon, and the enemy's batteries at Dalla kept up an +incessant fire on the shipping. Kemmendine was attacked time after +time, and many attempts made to launch fire rafts down the +river.</p> +<p>The work was very harassing for the troops. Night and day they +were expecting an attack in force; and there was a general feeling +of delight when, on the evening of the 4th, orders were issued for +a general movement against the enemy.</p> +<p>The latter had, by this time, brought the greater portion of +their guns up from the jungle, and placed them in their +entrenchments; and it was therefore in the power of the British to +strike a heavy blow. A division of the flotilla of gunboats was +ordered up the creek by the town. These opened a heavy fire upon +the enemy's flank, thus attracting their attention to that point +and, after the cannonade had continued for some little time, the +two columns of attack--the one eight hundred strong, under Major +Sale; the other five hundred, under Major Walker of the Madras +army--issued out. The latter was to attack the enemy facing the +town, the former to force his way through the centre of their +position. He had with him a troop of horse, that had landed only +the previous day.</p> +<p>Major Walker's force was the first to encounter the enemy. Their +resistance was, for a time, obstinate. Major Walker and several +other officers fell, in the attack on the first line of +entrenchments; but the soldiers carried it at the point of the +bayonet and, as the enemy broke and retreated, followed them so +hotly that the works in the rear fell into their hands with but +slight opposition.</p> +<p>Major Sale's column now began its attack on the enemy's centre. +Here the resistance was more feeble and, bursting through the +enemy's lines, the British drove them before them in headlong +flight. Then, turning, they swept along the line of entrenchments; +carrying all before them until they effected a junction with the +other column, which was advancing to meet them. They then drove the +Burmese from every part of their works into the jungle, leaving the +ground behind them covered with dead and wounded.</p> +<p>Except at the point first attacked by Major Walker, the +resistance of the Burmese was very feeble, and the British loss +inconsiderable; and a large number of guns, entrenching tools, and +muskets fell into the hands of the victors. The next day Bandoola +rallied the troops that had been driven from the plain, and +gathered the greatest part of his force in the forest round the +pagoda, where they continued to push forward their works with +unabated energy.</p> +<p>The British had a day of rest given them and, on the 7th, +prepared to attack the enemy at this point. Four columns of attack +were formed, composed of detachments drawn from all the corps of +the army. In the morning a heavy cannonade was opened upon the +jungle; the artillery being assisted by several heavy guns which +had, with great labour, been brought up by the sailors from the +ships to the pagoda. The enemy returned it with a steady fire of +light artillery, jingals, and musketry.</p> +<p>While the firing was still going on, the four columns were +already in motion. One had entered the jungle on the enemy's left, +and another on the right. One of the central columns advanced from +the foot of the pagoda hill, while the 38th Regiment descended the +stairs from the north gate and advanced, one wing on each side of +the tank, against the enemy's entrenchments on the high ground. As +the four columns approached the enemy, our artillery fire +ceased.</p> +<p>The Burmese appeared, for a moment, bewildered at the sight of +their foes advancing against them from so many directions, but they +soon opened a very heavy fire upon the assailants; and kept it up +with undiminished steadiness until our troops, advancing at the +charge, dashed into their entrenchments and drove them headlong +before them into the thick forest behind--where pursuit, which +would at any time have been difficult, was now impossible; the +troops, exhausted by their seven days' and nights' watching, being +wholly incapable of following their active and lightly-armed +enemies.</p> +<p>There now remained but the force at Dalla to cope with and, in +the evening, a force composed of the 89th and 43rd Madras Infantry, +under Colonel Parlby, embarked in boats. The night was dark, and +the troops crossed unobserved. The alarm was not given until the +British actually entered the entrenchments, and opened fire upon +the enemy; who were sitting, unsuspicious of danger, round their +fires. Scarcely any opposition was encountered, and the whole of +the works, with the guns and the stores, were soon in our hands; +while the enemy were flying towards the forest.</p> +<p>In the actions during these three days, the Burmese lost some +5000 men, 240 pieces of artillery of every kind, and a great number +of muskets and vast supplies of ammunition; while the British had +but 50 killed and 300 wounded. Great numbers of Bandoola's men +never rejoined the army, and the whole force was dispersed through +the country.</p> +<p>Bandoola himself was retiring towards Donabew, with but a +remnant of his army, when he met considerable reinforcements on +their way to join him. During his operations he had left a reserve +corps at the village of Kokein, four miles from the pagoda; and +these had been busily entrenching the position, which commanded the +road leading from Rangoon to Donabew. The ground was elevated and, +on his arrival there, Bandoola set his troops--now some 25,000 in +number--to aid in the work. In a marvellously short time the +heights were completely stockaded with trunks of trees; and with a +broad, deep ditch in front. Beyond this were lines of felled trees, +their heads pointing outwards and each branch sharpened--forming a +very formidable abattis--and, believing this to be impregnable, +Bandoola awaited the attack of the British.</p> +<p>As soon as his army had been dispersed, great numbers of +deserters, and of the inhabitants of the villages, poured into +Rangoon. With the deserters were mingled a good many of the troops +sent in by Bandoola, himself, with instructions to fire the town. +In order to lull the suspicions of the British, he caused a report +to be spread that an imperial commissioner from the court of Ava +would arrive, in the course of a few days, to treat for terms of +peace.</p> +<p>The general, however, determined to attack Bandoola before the +commissioner could arrive; as it was evident that better terms +could be obtained, after the total dispersion of the Burmese, than +if their famous general remained, with 25,000 men, in a formidable +position close at hand. He was uneasy at the presence of so large a +number of natives in the town, and the precautions that had been +taken against fire, some time before, were now redoubled. Were one +to break out, not only might the whole of the stores collected for +the advance of the army be destroyed but, if Bandoola had his force +gathered in readiness at the edge of the jungle, he might take +advantage of the confusion that would be caused by the fire, and +rush forward to the attack of the town.</p> +<p>Numbers of troops, and of sailors from the fleet, patrolled the +streets in every direction at night but, in spite of their efforts, +a week after the retreat of Bandoola the dreaded cry of fire was +raised. At a dozen points, on the windward side of the town, fires +had been lighted by incendiaries and, as there was a brisk wind +blowing, the danger was extreme. The drums beat to arms along the +whole of the British lines. Orders had already been issued as to +what was to be done in such an emergency and, while a portion of +the troops lined the trenches, the rest were marched at once to the +town, and formed up between it and the jungle, to repel any attack +that might be made there; leaving the troops quartered in the town, +and the sailors of the fleet to battle with the flames.</p> +<p>For a time it seemed as if the whole place would be swept away +but, by levelling lines of huts, and beating out the flames at the +barrier so formed, their progress was at length checked; but not +until more than half the town had been destroyed. Fortunately this +was the half farthest from the river and--with the exception of the +commissariat stores for the supply of the troops of the Madras +Presidency--the buildings containing the food, ammunition, and +necessaries for the army escaped unharmed.</p> +<p>What had happened once might, however, happen again, in spite of +all precautions. The general therefore determined to attack +Bandoola at once as, were his force once scattered, the motive for +these incendiary fires would cease to operate.</p> +<p>The difficulties were formidable. One or two light field pieces +could, at the most, be taken with the column. They would have to +march by a narrow and winding footpath, through a thick forest, +exposed at any moment to a desperate attack by the enemy. Moreover, +it would be necessary to leave a strong force for the defence of +Rangoon, as Bandoola would be sure to learn, from his spies, of the +intended movement and, having with him men intimately acquainted +with every forest track, could make a rush down upon the town +during the absence of so many of its defenders.</p> +<p>The general felt it imperative, however, to attack without delay +and, early on the morning of the 15th, he moved out with a force of +1500 men against Kokein. They marched without molestation through +the forest and, on reaching its confines, could see the truly +formidable nature of the works that they were to attack. The moment +they issued from the forest, a dropping fire was opened upon them +by parties of the enemy, in flank and rear; and no time was lost in +preparing for the assault.</p> +<p>The 13th Light Infantry and the 18th Madras, with 60 cavalry, +under Brigadier General Cotton, were ordered to move round the +stockade and assault it on the left rear; while the rest of the +troops, some 800 strong, with 100 cavalry under the general +himself, were to attack in front. The enemy's works consisted of a +central entrenchment, connected with two large entrenched stockades +on its flank, but somewhat advanced in front of it.</p> +<p>As soon as the force under General Cotton had gained its +position in the rear of the enemy, a gun was fired, and the whole +force moved forward to the assault.. The Burmans regarded the +attack by so insignificant a force upon their works with such +contempt that they did not, for some time, fire a shot; but +continued chanting a war song, swaying themselves to its cadence, +stamping and beating time with their hands on their breasts.</p> +<p>This delay proved fatal to them. When they opened fire, their +assailants were already close to the ditch and, leaping down into +this, were sheltered from the fire of the defenders. Scaling +ladders were speedily placed and the troops, running up them, +leaped down into the entrenchment. Astounded at this sudden entry +into the works they had deemed impregnable, the Burmese hesitated; +and the assailants, being joined by their comrades from behind, +rushed impetuously upon the enemy.</p> +<p>The column in the rear had greater difficulty--for they had +several strong stockades to carry before they reached the central +work--and lost four officers and eight men killed, and forty-nine +officers and men wounded, in the 13th Regiment alone. Fifteen +minutes after the first shot was fired, the whole of the works were +in our possession and the Burmese, who gathered in a confused mass, +had been decimated by our volleys. They were now in full flight, +many being cut down by the cavalry before they reached the shelter +of the woods. The British troops marched back to Rangoon; while the +Burmese retreated to Donabew, leaving strong posts on the two +rivers leading in that direction.</p> +<p>Their retirement left it free to the country people to return to +Rangoon, and very large numbers came in, including very many of the +villagers who had been forced to fight against us. All had alike +suffered from famine and hardship. Even the women had been +compelled to labour in the work of stockading, and the sufferings +of all had been terrible. The work of rebuilding the town began at +once, and the wooden huts sprang up with great rapidity; markets +were opened and, in a short time, supplies of fish, fruit, game, +and vegetables poured in; sufficient not only for the native +population, but to effect a most welcome change in the diet of the +troops.</p> +<p>As most of the natives were accustomed to the construction and +management of boats, the work of preparing the flotilla by which +the troops were to proceed up the rivers went on rapidly; and +numbers of men were hired as servants and drivers for the +commissariat--with which the force was very insufficiently +supplied, as the natives of India of that class for the most part +refused, on account of their caste prejudices, to engage themselves +for service across the sea. Reinforcements arrived; and Rangoon, +which but six weeks before presented a miserable and deserted +appearance was, towards the beginning of January, a cheerful and +bustling town.</p> +<p>Preparations were being made in other quarters to assume the +offensive. Some 3000 men were driving the Burmese out of Assam; and +a force 7000 strong was marching from Sylhet, to expel them from +Cachar and capture Manipur; while 11,000 men were assembled at +Chittagong, and were advancing into Aracan with the intention of +driving the Burmese from that province--and they meant, if +possible, to cross the mountains and effect a junction with Sir +Archibald Campbell's force. The first part of the operations were +conducted with complete success, and Aracan wrested from Burma; but +it was found impossible to perform the terrible journey across +mountain and swamp, or to afford any aid to the main +expedition.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch10" id="Ch10">Chapter 10</a>: The Advance.</h2> +<p>But while the preparations for the advance were being made, the +general's aides-de-camp had been kept at work from morning until +night. There were constant communications between the military and +naval authorities, for the expedition was to be a mixed one. +Transports were daily arriving with troops and stores; innumerable +matters connected with the organization, both of the land and water +transport, required to be arranged; and the general himself was +indefatigable in superintending every detail of the work. It had +been settled that the advance could not take place until the second +week in February, as the roads would be impassable until that time, +and the 11th was fixed for the commencement of operations.</p> +<p>Upon the day after his arrival at Rangoon, Stanley had written a +letter to his uncle; giving him a brief account of his adventures, +and stating that he had been appointed one of the general's +aides-de-camp. He said that he should, of course, be guided by his +uncle's wishes; but that now that he had entered on the campaign as +an officer, he should certainly like to remain till the end, when +he would at once resign his commission and rejoin him.</p> +<p>He sent this to his uncle's agent at Calcutta, but received no +answer until the end of December. After expressing his delight at +hearing that Stanley had not, as he had supposed, been killed at +Ramoo, but was now safe and well in the British camp, he went +on:</p> +<p>"I only received your letter this morning, for I have been +moving about from point to point and, owing to the falling off of +trade, had no occasion to go to Calcutta, until now; and was, +indeed, astounded at finding your letter lying for me here, as they +had not forwarded it, having no idea where I was, and knowing that +the chance of any letter sent on reaching me was extremely +small.</p> +<p>"By all means, lad, stop where you are. Trade is improving again +for, now that Bandoola's army has marched away from Ramoo, the +scare among the natives has pretty well subsided. Still, I can +manage very well without you, and it will certainly be a great +advantage to you to serve for a year in the army; and to have been +one of Campbell's aides-de-camp will be a feather in your cap, and +will give you a good position at all the military stations.</p> +<p>"I am very glad, now, that I abstained from writing to your +mother after the battle at Ramoo. I thought it over and over, and +concluded that it was just as well to leave the matter alone for a +time; not that I had the slightest idea, or even a hope, that you +were alive, but because I thought that the cessation of letters +from you would, to some extent, prepare her mind for the blow, when +it came. It would be very improbable that she would see the +gazette, with the list of killed and wounded at Ramoo and, even if +she did so, she would not associate the death of Ensign Brooke in +any way with you. When we have been trading up country, there have +been, once or twice, no means of sending off a letter for a couple +of months and, therefore, she could not have begun to feel +seriously anxious about you before she received your letter from +Rangoon.</p> +<p>"Everyone says that you will not be able to advance until +February; so that, no doubt, this letter will reach you long before +you leave. I hear the losses have been very heavy, from fever; but +I am not anxious about you on that score, for I think that you are +thoroughly acclimatised. I am trying to get a contract for the +supply of a couple of thousand bullocks, for the use of the army; +and as I know all the country so well, from Chittagong to Sylhet, +and can buy below Indian prices, I think that I shall not only get +the contract, but make a very good thing of it, and it may lead to +other matters."</p> +<p>After this, Stanley was hardly surprised when, in the last week +of January, his uncle walked into his quarters. After the first +pleasure of meeting was over, Stanley said:</p> +<p>"I suppose you have got the contract, uncle?"</p> +<p>"I have, lad. I have come down from Ramgur with six dhows, +packed full. I have brought a thousand head down and, directly I +land them, am going back for the remainder; which will be ready for +me by the time I get there.</p> +<p>"I have got hold of an uncommonly good fellow. He was +established as a small trader at Chittagong. His business was +ruined there, and he was glad to accept my offer of a berth; and he +has turned out a very energetic and pushing fellow. He will come +down with the next consignment.</p> +<p>"I myself am going to work my way up along the edge of the +Tipperah forest; and shall pick up another thousand head, by the +time that I get to the Goomtee, and shall send them by water up to +Sylhet; and then go up by land, picking up more on the way. I have +a contract for five thousand to be sent in, a thousand a month, for +the force that is to move against Manipur; while Johnson is to send +another two thousand down here. So you see, for the present the +store business can wait. It is a good line that I have got into. I +shall make a big profit out of it, and have hopes that it will be, +to some extent, permanent; for I can get the cattle so cheap in the +interior, on the rivers we know, that I can ship them to Calcutta +at lower terms than they can buy them in India; and I was as much +as told that, if I carried out my present contracts satisfactorily, +I should get the supply of the troops there. Of course, that would +not be a very great thing of itself but, as I could work it without +trouble in connection with my own business, it would make a +handsome addition to the profits."</p> +<p>"But how about money, uncle?"</p> +<p>"That is all right, lad. I had no difficulty, whatever, in +getting an advance at Calcutta, on the strength of my contract and +upon the guarantee of my agents; so that I am all right, in that +respect."</p> +<p>"I asked, uncle, because I can let you have eighteen hundred +pounds, if you want them."</p> +<p>Tom Pearson looked at him in astonishment.</p> +<p>"Why, what on earth have you been doing--robbing the treasury of +the King of Ava?"</p> +<p>"No, uncle. I had a bag of gems given me, by some Burmese +bandits. When I got down here, I took a few of them to a merchant. +He advanced fifteen hundred rupees on them, and sent them to +Burragee, the jeweller at Madras and, six weeks afterwards, he paid +me another three thousand five hundred. I sent up another batch +and, last week, I got an order from the jewellers for fifteen +hundred pounds; so that I have more than eighteen hundred in hand +now, and I don't think that I have sent more than a third of the +gems away."</p> +<p>"Well, that is a piece of luck, Stanley! Why on earth did the +brigands give you the gems?"</p> +<p>"Well, uncle, they are things that, from what they told me, +there is great difficulty and risk in trying to dispose of. They +are a royal monopoly, and nobody dare buy them or, if they do, will +give next to nothing for them; because of the risk of the +transaction, and because they know that the vendors are in a fix, +and must sell. Besides, there is a strong chance of their handing +over anyone who offers such things to the authorities. That was one +reason why they gave them to me. Then, too, they had made a good +haul of merchandise which was, to them, a great deal more valuable, +as there was no difficulty in disposing of it. Lastly, they had +taken a fancy to me, because I saved one of their comrade's +lives--the man who showed you up here."</p> +<p>"Well, lad, you shall tell me all about it, this evening. I must +be going down to the commissariat yard, to arrange the landing of +my beasts. I came straight to see you, directly I landed. We +dropped anchor here at daybreak."</p> +<p>"I will go with you, uncle. I will run in and see the chief, +first, and get leave off for the day. I have earned a holiday, for +I have been at work pretty well morning, noon, and night for the +last two months. You see, I have not only the duties of +aide-de-camp, but of interpreter; and have helped both the +quartermaster's department and the commissariat in making their +arrangements with the natives. I daresay I shall be able to help to +hurry your business on, quicker than you would be able to get it +done, alone."</p> +<p>The general at once granted Stanley leave, and he went with his +uncle down to the commissariat office, and introduced him to the +senior officer.</p> +<p>"We shall be glad to do all in our power to help you, Mr. +Pearson," the officer said. "We have been expecting your arrival +for the last week. Of course, we heard from Calcutta that you had +the contract for two thousand head; at least half of these were to +be delivered by the tenth of February. We were getting rather +anxious about it. The force will probably want to start, before +that time; and we shall have to victual both the land and water +columns. Of course, I did not know that you were a relation of Mr. +Brooke, or I should have mentioned to him that you were likely to +come."</p> +<p>"I should like to get off as soon as possible," Tom Pearson +said; "for by the time that I get back to Ramgur, the rest of the +cattle will be in readiness for me."</p> +<p>"I will write you an order for four large boats, at once. If you +had come three weeks sooner, you might have been kept waiting some +days; but such a number of native craft have, of late, come down +the rivers that we are enabled to get sufficient for our work."</p> +<p>The officer gave him a note to the one in charge of the landing +arrangements.</p> +<p>"It is lucky that you have come just at this moment," the latter +said. "We have just made our last trip with the baggage of the +47th, and I have six boats disengaged. You may as well take them +all."</p> +<p>The craft in question were some of those that had been +captured--unwieldy craft, that took fish and salt up the river. +They were almost as large as the dhows in which the cattle had been +brought down, but drew very much less water. They were towed off to +the dhows, one by one, by two captured war canoes, each having +thirty rowers. One was taken to each dhow, and the work of +transhipping the cattle began at once. These were in good condition +for, although closely packed, they had been well supplied with food +and water on the way down; and a herdsman with four men under him +had been sent, in each boat, to take care of them, as Tom Pearson +was very anxious that his first consignment should be reported upon +favourably. The animals were all landed in the course of the +afternoon and, with the acknowledgment of their receipt, in +excellent order, in his pocket, the contractor went off again, with +Stanley, to his own dhow.</p> +<p>"I have told them to have everything in readiness to drop down +the river with the tide, tomorrow morning. It will turn just about +sunrise. That is a rare bit of business, Stanley; and I doubt if a +contractor ever got his work through so quickly, before. Of course, +it is principally due to you. They would never have pushed things +through so quickly, had you not gone with me. I thought that very +likely I might be detained here a week, before I could get all the +cattle on shore--and by that time, if all goes well, I shall be at +Ramgur again.</p> +<p>"Now we can have a comfortable evening's talk, which is very +much better than my going to dine with you at mess; for there is a +great deal to hear about, and I daresay that I can give you as good +a dinner as we should have had, on shore."</p> +<p>"A good deal better," Stanley said. "Things have improved +immensely, during the last month; still our mess cook is certainly +not so good as your man and, at any rate, the quiet of your cabin +makes a very pleasant change, after always sitting down with a +large party."</p> +<p>After dinner was over, Stanley gave a full account of his +adventures, from the time that he was taken prisoner.</p> +<p>"You have done wonderfully well for yourself, lad; wonderfully +well. Certainly when you picked up Burmese from my man, we had no +idea that it was ever likely to turn out so useful. I thought that +it would have been an assistance among the Mugs on the coast; and I +had, too, some idea that the war might lead to the opening of a +trade up the Irrawaddy; but it has turned out infinitely more +useful than that. If you could not have spoken Burmese, Bandoola +would never have thought of asking for you to be spared as an +interpreter and, if he had not done so, you would have had your +head chopped off, at Ava.</p> +<p>"Of course that leopard business was the turning point of your +fortunes but, though it has turned out so well, I must say that I +hardly think that you were justified in risking your life in such a +desperate act for a native; who might, for aught you know, be +already dead. Of course, it was a most gallant action; but the +betting was ten to one against your succeeding. However, as it +turned out, it was a fortunate business, altogether. I don't say +that you might not have made your way down to Rangoon, unaided; but +the odds would have been very heavily against it. However, these +rubies were a windfall, indeed."</p> +<p>"Will you take the rest of them, uncle, and sell them at +Calcutta--or shall I send them to Madras, or home to England?"</p> +<p>"I will take them with me to Calcutta, if you like, Stanley. I +don't say that there are better men there than the one you sent to, +at Madras; but I think some of them do a larger business up-country +with the native princes, who don't care what they give for good +gems. At any rate, I will take them there and get them valued by an +expert; and then try two or three of the leading firms, and get +their offers. If these are as high as the value put on them by the +expert, I would send them to England, through my agents, who would +do the best they could for you."</p> +<p>"For us, uncle. Of course, it is all in the partnership +business. You have just got some contracts that will pay well and, +while you have been doing that, I have been getting hold of these +rubies."</p> +<p>"I don't think that that is fair, Stanley," his uncle said, +gravely.</p> +<p>"It seems to me perfectly fair; and besides, the money put into +the business will make a lot of difference, and will certainly pay +me a great deal better than it would in any other way. I sent home +100 pounds for my mother, directly the money came from Calcutta; +and told her that I hoped to be able to send home at least as much, +every year."</p> +<p>"A good deal more, lad, if you like. I calculate these contracts +that I have got will bring in a pound a head so that, by the time +that the war is over, I hope to have cleared 8000 pounds, which +will be about what you will make by your rubies; and when trade +begins again, we shall be in a position to do it on a big scale. +But I still think that it will not be fair to take that money."</p> +<p>"Well, uncle, if you won't take it, I certainly won't have +anything to do with the money that you make, while I am away; so +please don't let us say anything more about it. Shall I give you +that eighteen hundred now; or will you have an order upon the +paymaster, in Calcutta?"</p> +<p>"That would be the best way, if you will have it so, lad. I have +left money with Johnson, at Ramgur, for the next herd that is to +come down here; and have orders from my agent on their agents, at +Dalla, for those that I am going to buy for the Manipur column. So +I don't want the money now and, suppose the dhow were to be lost +going up, the cash might go with it. So, do you get the order. You +had better send it straight to Bothron; and tell him to collect it, +and credit it to my account.</p> +<p>"How long do you think that this business is going to last?"</p> +<p>"It depends how far we have to go before the Burmese decide that +they have had enough of it. At present, the general hope is that, +as soon as we arrive at Prome, they will give in. If they don't we +may have to go up to Ava and, in that case, we may not finish it +until this time next year; for I suppose operations will have to +come to a stop, when the wet season begins again, and we could +hardly reach Ava before that."</p> +<p>"I expect, some day, we shall have to take the whole country, +Stanley. You may frighten the court into submission, when you +approach the capital; but I fancy they will never keep to the terms +that we shall insist upon, and that there will have to be another +expedition. That is generally our way--it was so at Mysore, it has +been so in a dozen other places. When we have done all the work, +and have got them at our mercy, we give them comparatively easy +terms. As soon as they recover from the effects of their defeat, +they set to work again to prepare for another tussle; and then we +have all the expense and loss of life to incur, again, and then end +by annexing their territory, which we might just as well have done +in the first place. It may be all very well to be lenient, when one +is dealing with a European enemy; but magnanimity does not pay when +you have to do with Orientals, who don't care a rap for treaty +engagements, and who always regard concessions as being simply a +proof of weakness.</p> +<p>"There would not be half the difficulty in annexing Burma that +there would be, in the case of a large province in India; for all +the towns, and most even of their villages, lie on rivers, and a +couple of dozen gunboats would suffice to keep the whole country in +order. You will see that that is what we shall have to do, some +day; but it will cost us two or three expeditions to do what might +just as well be done, now."</p> +<p>"Well, uncle, it is nearly twelve o'clock and, as I shall be on +duty at six, I think I had better be going. I wish that you could +have stayed for another two or three days, and paid a visit to the +pagoda and camps. I am very glad that I have had a sight of you +again, though it's a very short one."</p> +<p>"I should be glad to stay another day or two, Stanley; but it is +really of importance for me to get down to Ramgur, as soon as I +can, and send Johnson off with the cattle; for I want to set about +buying the herds for the other column, as quickly as possible. I +think I have left myself a fair margin of time, but there is +nothing like promptitude in delivery, and I want to get a good +name, for future business; and if this affair here is going to last +another twelve-month, regular supplies must be sent up for, as beef +is forbidden by the Burmese religion, they keep no cattle except +for draught purposes, and the army must get their bullocks by +sea."</p> +<p>Five minutes later Stanley was rowed ashore. The next morning he +accompanied the general, and went down to inspect the newly-arrived +cattle.</p> +<p>"They are a capital lot," he said to Stanley, "decidedly the +best that we have had, yet. You see, it is a good deal shorter +voyage, from Ramgur, than from either Calcutta or Madras; and the +animals probably had a much shorter land journey before they were +shipped. Then, too, as your uncle came down himself they were, no +doubt, much better looked after than usual on the voyage. However, +I will take care to mention, when I write next to Calcutta, that +the cattle are far above the average; and I shall be glad if they +will arrange for such further supplies as we may require from the +same source."</p> +<p>"Thank you, sir; that will be a great help to my uncle. Hitherto +he has had very uphill work of it; though he was beginning to get +on very well, when the war put a stop to trade. He knows the whole +country so thoroughly that he can certainly buy up cattle at many +places where no European trader, save himself, has ever +penetrated."</p> +<p>"No doubt, Brooke; and I hope, for your sake, that he will +succeed well in this contracting business. He has certainly made an +excellent start and, as he is first in the field in the country +between Assam and Ramgur, he ought to make a good thing of this +opportunity that has fallen in his way. I know that it takes a long +time to build up a business but, when the foundation is laid, and a +man is quick in taking advantage of an opportunity, he can do as +much in a year as he might do in twenty, without it.</p> +<p>"Now, I am going over to the lines of the 47th, to see how they +have shaken down into them."</p> +<p>This regiment had brought out tents for, as every building was +already occupied, it was necessary that they should be put under +canvas. The general found that everything was arranged in order, +and the encampment certainly presented a pleasing contrast to the +irregular, and often crowded quarters of the troops who had passed +the wet season there. The colonel and three of his officers dined +with the general, that evening; the party being made up of the +military staff, including the two aides-de-camp.</p> +<p>Two days later Stanley, with some of the other members of the +staff, dined at the 47th mess. Stanley was introduced to several of +the officers; and these were specially desirous of making his +acquaintance, as they had learned that he had been a prisoner at +Ava, and could therefore tell them much more than they had hitherto +learned of the country into which they were about to advance.</p> +<p>Among them was a young lieutenant, also of the name of Brooke. +Stanley had, three weeks before, attained the same rank. At the +time that he was appointed to the 83rd, there were already several +death vacancies in the regiment, and disease and fighting had +carried off six more officers. The whole of the ensigns had +consequently obtained their step. At dinner he found himself placed +next to his namesake.</p> +<p>"It is curious, our having the same name," the other remarked, +as he sat down. "It is not a very common one."</p> +<p>"No, I have not met anyone of the same name, before," Stanley +said. "Indeed, until the affair at Ramoo I was nearly three years +trading with an uncle of mine, up the rivers; and was not much in +the way of falling in with white men. But, before that, I had been +with my father in a good many stations in India; but I do not, as +far as I can remember, recollect meeting anyone of the same +name."</p> +<p>"Then your father was in the service, too?"</p> +<p>"Yes. He was a captain in the 15th Native Infantry."</p> +<p>"Indeed," the other said in surprise, "then we are connections. +But I had no idea that Captain Brooke was ever married."</p> +<p>"He was married just after he came out to India," Stanley said; +"so it is likely enough that you would never have heard of it. He +died three years ago, and my mother and sisters are now in England. +What is the connection between us? I have never heard my father +speak much of his family."</p> +<p>"Your father was a cousin of mine--second cousin, I think. I +fancy there was some row between your grandfather and the rest of +the family. I don't know anything about the right or wrongs of it; +for it was, of course, many years before we were born; and I never +heard of your father's existence, until a fortnight before I left +England. Then there were some inquiries made about the family, +owing to various deaths that took place in it. Do you know that +your father was related--distantly of course--to the Earl of +Netherly?"</p> +<p>"I do remember his mentioning it, once. I know he said that it +was a distant connection; and that he knew nothing, whatever, about +the earl or his family."</p> +<p>"Well, curiously enough, it is not so distant, now," the other +said. "I was a pretty distant connection of his. He was childless; +and the family, generally, don't seem to have been prolific. A good +many of them died; and the result was that, the year before I left +England, an uncle of mine succeeded to the title. He has no son, +and my father was his next brother. My father died, two years ago; +and the result is that, to my astonishment, I found that I was next +heir to the title. They wanted me to leave the army, when my +regiment was ordered out to India; but of course I was not going to +do that, for my aunt may die, and my uncle marry again and have +children. Besides, I was not going to leave, anyhow, just as the +regiment was ordered abroad, and might see service.</p> +<p>"However, there was a great hunting by the lawyers in the +genealogical tree; and I know it was decided that, in case anything +happened to me, your father would have been the next heir, had he +been alive. I don't know whether any further inquiries were made, +or whether they ever ascertained that he had married. I don't +suppose there were for, of course, as long as I live the matter is +of no importance.</p> +<p>"So that, as things stand now, if a Burmese bullet puts an end +to my career, you are the next heir to the title."</p> +<p>"You surprise me, indeed," Stanley said. "From the way my father +spoke of the matter, I am sure that he had not the slightest idea +there was any likelihood, whatever, that he would have any chance +of succeeding to the title."</p> +<p>"That I can well imagine, for it was not until a few years ago, +when the deaths of several who stood between him and the succession +occurred, that my uncle regarded his coming into it as a matter +worth thinking about; and of course all our family stood between it +and your father. However, as you see we have dwindled away and, if +I do not get safely through this business, you are the next +heir."</p> +<p>"It is curious news to hear, at a dinner in Burma," Stanley +said, thoughtfully. "At any rate, I can assure you honestly that +the news gives me no particular satisfaction. I suppose it would be +a nice thing, to come in for a peerage; but my prospects out here +are good. I have no intention of staying in the army, after the end +of the war; and am really in partnership with my uncle, with whom I +have been for the last three years in business, which is turning +out very well. I like the life, and have every chance of making +enough to retire on, with ample means. Certainly, I should not like +to come into the title by the death of anyone that I knew."</p> +<p>"That is the fortune of war," the other said, smiling. "We get +our steps by death vacancies. We are sorry for the deaths, but the +steps are not unwelcome.</p> +<p>"By the way, my name is Harry. I know that yours is Stanley. I +vote that we call each other by them. We are cousins, you know, and +I suppose that as you are my heir, you must be my nearest male +relation, at present; so I vote that we call each other by our +Christian names, instead of Brookeing each other, always."</p> +<p>"I shall be very glad to do so," Stanley said, cordially. "I +hope that we shall be close friends, as well as distant +relations."</p> +<p>Then, as there was a momentary lull in the conversation, Harry +raised his voice and said to the colonel:</p> +<p>"A very curious thing has just happened, Colonel. Brooke and +myself have just discovered that we are cousins and, what is still +more curious, that if anything happens to me, he takes my place as +next heir to my uncle, a fact of which he was entirely +ignorant."</p> +<p>"That is certainly a very curious coincidence, Brooke; very +singular. Then you have not met before?"</p> +<p>"I did not even know of his existence, Colonel; and had, indeed, +no idea that Captain Brooke, his father, had been married. The +cousinship is a distant one; but there is no question, whatever, as +to his being next in succession to myself to the peerage."</p> +<p>The discovery excited general interest; and quite turned the +conversation, for the time, from the subject of the war and of +their approaching advance. After dinner was finished, many of the +officers gathered round Stanley, asking him questions about the +nature of the country, and his experiences as a captive in the +hands of the Burmese. Presently Colonel Adair, who had also dined +at the mess, joined the group.</p> +<p>"I suppose, Mr. Brooke," he said, "your newly-found cousin has +told you about his adventure with the leopard?"</p> +<p>"No, Colonel, he has not said anything about a leopard."</p> +<p>"He is grievously afflicted with modesty," the colonel went on; +"and so I will tell it for him, for I think you ought to know that +he is not only able to speak half a dozen languages, but that he is +capable of doing deeds of exceptional gallantry.</p> +<p>"You can go and chat with the colonel, Brooke. He is anxious to +hear your report as to the country, and I will be your trumpeter +here."</p> +<p>Stanley gladly moved away, and entered into conversation with +the colonel of the 47th; while Colonel Adair related his adventures +with the leopard to his cousin, and the officers standing +round.</p> +<p>"By Jove, that was a plucky thing!" Harry Brooke said, +admiringly.</p> +<p>"It was, indeed!" the colonel agreed, as similar exclamations +went round the circle. "I don't think one man in a hundred would +have attacked a leopard with no weapon but a knife, except to save +the life of a comrade; even then, it would be a most desperate +action. I have done a good deal of big-game shooting, in India; but +I am certain that nothing but a strong affection, for a comrade in +the grasp of a leopard, would induce me to risk almost certain +death in the way your cousin did. We should never have heard of it, +if we had not got the details from the man he saved, and who has +since attached himself to him as a servant; and is the man who, as +I daresay he did tell you, served as his companion and guide in +making his way down here. At any rate you see, Brooke, your cousin +is an uncommonly fine young fellow, and you have reason to be proud +of the relationship."</p> +<p>"I feel so, Colonel; and it is really a pleasure to know that, +if one does go down, a thoroughly good fellow will benefit by it, +instead of some unknown person who might be a very objectionable +representative of the family."</p> +<p>For the next three or four days, the bustle of preparations went +on and, on the fifth, a detachment was sent up, with a sloop and +gunboats, to attack an advanced position of the enemy on the Lyne +river. Although the 3000 Burmese, who were posted in a strong +stockade, were supported by thirty-six guns; the works were carried +by storm, with little loss.</p> +<p>The two branches of the Pellang (or Rangoon) river, by which the +force were to advance against Donabew were, on the following day, +reconnoitred for some distance. A number of fire rafts were +destroyed, but the Burmese were too disheartened to offer any +resistance.</p> +<p>To the disappointment of the troops, the general was able to +take with him only a limited force; for the difficulties of +carriage were enormous and, as experience had shown that the +country was likely to be deserted, and devastated, on their +approach; it was, therefore, impossible for the bulk of the army to +be taken on, by land. There were other points, however, where the +troops left behind could be profitably employed. The capture of the +important town of Bassein, on the main branch of the Irrawaddy, +would open the river to the passage of our ships, and put an entire +stop to the trade of Ava.</p> +<p>The force told off for the advance against Donabew was divided +into two columns. The first, 2400 strong--consisting of the 38th, +41st, and 47th Regiments, three native battalions, the troop of +bodyguard; a battery of Bengal horse artillery, and part of the +rocket company--was to march by land.</p> +<p>The second column, which was to proceed by water, was 1169 +strong; and it consisted of the 89th Regiment, the 10th Madras +Europeans, and 250 of the 18th Native Infantry; a body of +dismounted artillery, and the rest of the rocket company. This +force was commanded by Brigadier General Cotton. It was to be +carried in a flotilla of sixty-two boats, each armed with one or +two guns; and the boats of all the ships of war at Rangoon, under +the command of Captain Alexander, R. N.</p> +<p>Major Sale was, at the same time, to advance against Bassein; +with 600 men of the 13th Regiment, and the 12th Madras Native +infantry, with some artillery. After occupying the town, he was to +cross the country lying between the two main arms of the Irrawaddy, +and to join the general's force near Donabew.</p> +<p>The rest of the force--nearly 4000 men, chiefly native regiments +and Europeans who had not, as yet, recovered sufficient strength to +take part in field operations--was to remain at Rangoon, under +Brigadier General M'Creigh; who was to form a reserve column, in +readiness to move as directed, as soon as sufficient transport was +collected.</p> +<p>It was to the water force that the capture of Donabew was +intrusted, as it lay upon the opposite bank of the Irrawaddy; while +the general's force was directed against Tharawa, at the junction +of the two main branches of the river. Here they were to be joined +by General Cotton's force, after the capture of Donabew; then, +unless the court of Ava sued for peace, a united advance was to be +made on the important town of Prome.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch11" id="Ch11">Chapter 11</a>: Donabew.</h2> +<p>Stanley Brooke did not accompany the land column, as the general +said to him, two days before:</p> +<p>"I have been speaking with General Cotton, and he said that he +should be glad if I would attach you to his staff, until the force +unites again. Not one of his staff officers speaks Burmese and, +although he has two or three interpreters with him, it will be +better, if Bandoola sends in an officer offering to surrender, that +he should be met by a British officer.</p> +<p>"In the next place, it may be necessary for him to communicate +with me and, assuredly, with your experience of the country, you +would be able to get through better than anyone else. I do not +apprehend that there would be any great danger, for we know that +every available fighting man has been impressed, by Bandoola; and +the passage of our column will completely cow the villagers lying +between us and the river.</p> +<p>"I suppose," he said, with a smile, "that you have no objection, +since it will save you a long and, I have no doubt, a very +unpleasant march; and you will also obtain a view of the affairs at +the stockades at Pellang and Donabew."</p> +<p>The land column started on the 13th of February, the water +column on the 16th, and the detachment for Bassein sailed on the +following day. Stanley was delighted at being appointed to +accompany the boat column. The march through the country would +present no novelty to him, and it was probable that the land column +would encounter no serious resistance until, after being joined by +General Cotton's force, it advanced against Prome. His horses went, +with those of General Cotton and his staff, under charge of the +syce and Meinik.</p> +<p>The one steamboat kept, at the start, in rear of the great +flotilla of boats so that, in case of any of them striking on a +sandbank, it could at once move to her assistance, and pull her +off. The scene was a very bright one as, in all, upwards of a +hundred craft, of various sizes, proceeded together. In front were +half a dozen gunboats; next to these came the two sloops of war; +followed by the rest of the boats, proceeding in irregular order. +There was very little stream, for the rivers were now quite low +and, although the flat country was still little more than a swamp, +the rains in the hills that supplied the main body of water to them +had long since ceased. The ships' boats were, of course, rowed by +the blue-jackets. The other craft were, for the most part, manned +by natives; though the soldiers on board occasionally lent a +hand.</p> +<p>Two days after starting, the boats destroyed three newly-erected +stockades, that were found unoccupied; and on the 19th reached +Pellang, where three very strong stockades had been erected. A +battery was thrown up next day from which, as well as from the +steamboat and sloops of war, shells were thrown into the stockade; +with such effect that two of the enemy's works were evacuated, as +soon as the troops took the offensive, and the main Pellang +stockade was also abandoned, without resistance. The two smaller +works were destroyed, and a portion of the 18th Madras Infantry was +left here, to maintain communication with Rangoon.</p> +<p>On the 27th the flotilla entered the main stream and, the next +day, the advance came in sight of Donabew. It was another five days +before the whole force was in position, for several of the most +heavily laden craft stuck fast on the sandbanks at the fork of the +river. The next day Donabew was summoned to surrender. Bandoola, +who was at the head of 15,000 men, returned a refusal; which was +given in courteous terms, differing very widely from the haughty +and peremptory language in which all previous communications had +been couched.</p> +<p>The next day a party of the 89th landed on the low-lying ground +between the main stockade and the river and, in spite of the heavy +fire, succeeded in ascertaining the strength and nature of the +defences. The main work was in the form of a parallelogram, about a +mile long, and stood on ground rising above the general level; and +fifty pieces of cannon, of various sizes, were in position on the +river face. Two outworks, constructed of square beams of timber, +with an outer ditch and a thick abbatis, defended the southern face +against an attack from an enemy landing below it.</p> +<p>It was necessary to leave a strong guard on board the flotilla, +lest an attack should be made by war canoes and fire rafts. The +general, therefore, had not more than 600 men available for the +assault. As the enemy's guns completely commanded the river, it was +necessary to land below it; and on the morning of the 7th the +troops were disembarked, with two six-pounder guns and a rocket +detachment. Forming in two columns, they advanced against the lower +of the two covering stockades and, after an exchange of fire with +the enemy, rushed forward and forced an entrance into it; although +the enemy resisted with more resolution than they had, for some +time, shown. 280 prisoners were taken, and the rest of the +defenders fled to the second work.</p> +<p>Two more guns and four mortars were landed and placed in +position and, after the stockades had been shelled for a short +time, a storming party--under Captain Rose--advanced to the +assault. So heavy a fire was opened upon them that the little +column was brought to a standstill, and forced to fall back; with +the loss of its commander, and of Captain Cannon of the 89th, while +most of the seamen with the storming party were either killed or +wounded.</p> +<p>This want of success, against a mere outwork, showed General +Cotton that--with the small force at his disposal--it would be +worse than useless to renew the attack for, were the outwork +carried, the loss would be so great that it would be hopeless to +think of attacking Bandoola's main position. He therefore +determined to abstain from further attack, until reinforced.</p> +<p>"Now, Mr. Brooke," he said, as soon as the troops had been taken +on board the boats again, "I must bring your services into +requisition. This is just the contingency that we thought might +possibly occur. I cannot advance up the river until Donabew is +taken, and I cannot attack the place with the force at my command. +Therefore I will at once write a despatch to General Campbell, for +you to carry. You will be accompanied by the two men of the +bodyguard, who have come with me as orderlies. I shall have no use +for them, here; and three of you, together, need not fear any +molestation from the few people remaining in their villages, and +may be able to cut your way through any of the bands of deserters, +or beaten troops, dispersed over the country."</p> +<p>"Very well, General. I shall also take my Burman, on my second +charger. He may be useful in getting news as to roads from the +natives; who will, as likely as not, fly into the jungle when they +see us approaching. However, there is not much fear of our losing +our way, as it will be along the river, as far as Tharawa."</p> +<p>A boat was at once sent off to the craft carrying the two +orderlies and the horses of the staff. As soon as the despatch was +written, Stanley, after shaking hands with his companions, was also +rowed to the horse barge. This was, at a signal of the general, +taken in tow by the steamer, and piloted to the opposite bank. A +boat, sounding ahead, presently found a spot where there was enough +water for the barge to get alongside the bank. The horses were led +ashore; and Stanley, the two troopers, and Meinik mounted.</p> +<p>The Burmese are poor riders but, during the wet season, Stanley +had often taken Meinik, on his spare horse, when riding about in +the camp; partly because he could trust him to look after the +horses carefully, and in the second place to accustom him to ride +on horseback so as to act, if required, as an orderly. Meinik was +quite of opinion that there would be no risk, whatever, in passing +through villages; but thought it probable that they might fall in +with disbanded troops, as it was known that the land column had, +soon after starting, captured the fort of Mophi; and that its +garrison, between two and three thousand strong, had taken to the +jungle and dispersed.</p> +<p>"Still, master," he said, "I don't think it likely that they +will attack us. They will be expecting no one, and we shall come +upon them by surprise; then they will run into the bushes, thinking +that you must have many more troops behind you. No, it is not +likely that they will have many guns; they would throw them away +when they fled, partly to run faster through the forest, partly +because most of them will be making off to the villages, hoping to +lie concealed until the war is over; while if they had guns in +their hands, it would be known that they were deserters, and they +might be seized and sent across the river to Bandoola, or up to +Prome."</p> +<p>They rode some fifteen miles before dark, and then took up their +quarters in a village. The few old men, women, and children +inhabiting it fled, at their approach; but when Meinik went to the +edge of the jungle, and shouted out loudly that they need not fear, +for that no harm would be done to any of them, and good prices +would be given for food, two or three returned and, finding the +statements to be true, one of them went into the jungle again, and +brought the others back. Fowls and eggs were brought into the hut +that Stanley occupied, and a good supply of grain for the horses +was also purchased. Thus, Stanley was able to avoid breaking into +the small stock of provisions they had brought with them.</p> +<p>The inhabitants of this part of Burma were a tribe known as +Carians. They were the tillers of the soil, and were an industrious +and hardy race. The country was so rich that they not only raised +sufficient for their own wants, but sent large supplies of grain +and rice to Ava. They were very heavily taxed but, as a rule, were +exempt from conscription. Nevertheless they had, on the present +occasion, been forced to labour at the stockades, and in +transporting food for the troops.</p> +<p>Their forest villages were small. They consisted of little huts, +erected either in trees shorn of their branches, or upon very +strong poles. These abodes were only accessible by rough ladders, +formed by nailing pieces of wood across the trees or poles. This +was absolutely necessary, on account of the number of tigers that +infested the forest. The village where they had halted was, +however, built upon the ground; but was surrounded by a strong +stockade. The people assured Stanley that none of the fugitives +from Mophi had come that way.</p> +<p>There had, they said, been many, after Bandoola's defeat; but +they had seen none, of late. They declared that they had far +greater fear of these than they had of the English; for that they +plundered wherever they went and, if they could not obtain enough +to satisfy their expectations, burnt the houses, and often killed +many of the inhabitants. The villagers volunteered to keep watch +all night, at the gate of the stockade; although they said that +there was no fear of anyone approaching, as strangers could not +find their way through the forest, in the dark and, even could they +do so, the fear of tigers would prevent them from making the +attempt. Stanley agreed to pay some of them to watch, but also +stationed one of his own men as sentry, relieving him every three +hours.</p> +<p>An hour after they reached the village, they saw one of the war +boats rowing rapidly up the stream; and had no doubt that it was +bearing a message from Bandoola, saying that he had repulsed the +attack of the British. Beyond hearing the howling of tigers in the +forest, Stanley passed the night undisturbed, except when he went +to change the sentry. Meinik took his share of watching; and +Stanley, himself, relieved him an hour before daybreak.</p> +<p>By the time the sun rose, the horses had been fed and breakfast +taken. After riding some miles, the country became more open. +Cultivated fields succeeded the dense forest. The ground was +higher, and little groups of huts could be seen, wherever a small +elevation rose above the general level. The change was very +welcome, for they were able to travel faster, and there was less +chance of their coming suddenly upon a party of the disbanded +troops.</p> +<p>Presently, just as they reached a larger village than usual, by +the river bank, a thick smoke arose from one of the houses, and +they could hear female screams.</p> +<p>"Come on!" Stanley shouted, to the three men riding behind him. +"See that your pistols are ready to hand, and draw your +swords."</p> +<a id="PicE" name="PicE"></a> +<center><img src="images/e.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: Stanley cut down the man who was about to fire the hut." /> +</center> +<p>This village was not, like the last, stockaded; being some miles +away from the forest. As they dashed into it, they saw some twenty +Burmese. Two women lay dead, in front of one house; and one of the +men, with a torch, was about to fire another. Absorbed in their own +doings, the Burmese did not notice the coming of the horsemen until +the latter were close to them. Then, with a cry of consternation, +they turned to fly; but it was too late. Stanley cut down the man +who was about to fire the hut, and he and the others then fell upon +the Burmans, with sword and pistol. Six of them were killed. The +rest were pursued but, dashing down to the river, they plunged in, +pistol shots being sent after them.</p> +<p>Stanley remained on the bank, until he saw that they had fairly +started to cross the river, then he re-entered the village. Two or +three frightened people came out from their hiding places, when +Meinik shouted to them that all was safe.</p> +<p>"They have all gone," he said, "you need not fear being +disturbed by them again. See, there are six guns lying in the road; +and you will find plenty of ammunition on those fellows that have +fallen. There are some spears and swords, too. Of course, you can +do nothing if a number of these fellows come; but if there are only +two or three, you and the women ought to be able to dispose of +them. Now we must ride on."</p> +<p>On the third day they arrived at Tharawa, and found that Sir A. +Campbell, who had been assured by the natives that Bandoola had +retreated, had continued his march the day before. The place was so +large that Stanley thought it unsafe for them to sleep there, and +they rode on to a little village, two miles away. Here they were +received with great deference, the passage of the troops the day +before having profoundly impressed the villagers. After waiting +three hours to rest the horses, they again mounted and, riding all +night, arrived in the morning at Yuadit--a village twenty-six miles +from Tharawa--and found the force on the point of starting.</p> +<p>"No bad news, I hope, Mr. Brooke?" the general said, as he rode +up to him.</p> +<p>"I am sorry to say, sir, that my news is not good. Here is the +brigadier's despatch."</p> +<p>"This is unfortunate, indeed," the general said, when he had run +his eye over the document.</p> +<p>"Mr. Tollemache, please to ride along the line, and say that the +column is not to get into motion until further orders."</p> +<p>Colonel Adair and the other officers of the staff had been on +the point of mounting, when Stanley rode up. The general called two +or three of the senior officers to him.</p> +<p>"Cotton can neither take Donabew, nor get past it," he said. +"Here is his despatch. You see, he has lost several officers and a +good many men; and that in the assault on an outlying work, only. I +am afraid that there is nothing for us to do, but go back to his +assistance."</p> +<p>"I am afraid not, sir," Colonel Adair said. "Our supplies are +running short already and, you see, we decided upon filling up all +the carts at Tharawa, where we made sure that we should be met by +the boats. The country round here has been completely stripped, and +it would be a very serious matter to endeavour to advance to Prome, +without supplies. Moreover, we might expect a much more serious +resistance than we have bargained for. The news that Bandoola has +repulsed his assailants--and you may be sure that this has been +exaggerated into a great victory--will restore the spirit of the +Burmese. It is evident that we must turn back, and finish off with +Bandoola before we advance further."</p> +<p>Orders were accordingly sent, to the officers commanding the +various corps, that the column was to retrace its steps and, while +they passed through the village, Stanley related, in much greater +detail than had been given in the despatch, the events of the +attack, and the nature of the defences at Donabew.</p> +<p>The troops marched along with a cheerful mien. It was, of +course, an annoyance to have to plod back along the road they had +before traversed but, upon the other hand, there was a general +satisfaction that they were, after all, to take part in the capture +of Bandoola's last stronghold.</p> +<p>Colonel Adair rode on with the little troop of cavalry. He was +to push forward to Tharawa, and was to offer rewards to the natives +there for every boat brought in. There was little doubt that many +of the fishermen had hauled up their craft into clumps of bushes +and brush wood, to prevent their being requisitioned by Bandoola +and, although it was not likely that a large number would now be +obtained, yet even if but a dozen were found, it would be of +assistance.</p> +<p>The rest of the force reached Tharawa on the following evening, +with the exception of a party left to protect the slow-moving +waggons. They found that nine canoes had been obtained, and that a +considerable portion of the scanty population had been, all day, +employed in cutting bamboos and timber for rafts.</p> +<p>The next morning the troops were all engaged on the same work, +and in the construction of rafts; and at nightfall three hundred +men of the 49th were taken across the river to the town of Henzada, +in case Bandoola, on hearing of the preparations for crossing, +should send a force to oppose the passage. It took four days' +continuous labour to get the little army across, as it was +necessary to make large timber rafts to carry the carts, horses and +bullocks, guns and stores.</p> +<p>Hearing that a force was posted, some fifteen miles away, to +intercept the detachment that was marching from Bassein; Colonel +Godwin, with a party, was sent off that night to endeavour to +surprise it. The Burmese, however, took the alarm before they were +attacked; and scattered in all directions, without firing a shot. +The army marched along the right bank, and arrived before Donabew +on the 25th of March. Communications were opened with General +Cotton's force, below the town; and both divisions set to work to +erect batteries.</p> +<p>The Burmese made several sorties to interrupt the work, and one +of these was accompanied by Bandoola's seventeen elephants. The +troop of cavalry, horse artillery, and the rocket company charged +close up to the elephants; and opened fire upon the howdahs, filled +with troops, that they carried. In a short time most of these and +the drivers were killed; and the elephants--many of which also had +received wounds--dashed off into the jungle, while the infantry +fled back into the stockade, into which a discharge of shells and +rockets was maintained, all day.</p> +<p>The next morning--the 1st of April--the mortar batteries were +completed; and these, and others armed with light guns, kept up a +continuous fire into the enemy's camp. At daybreak on the 2nd, the +heavy guns of the breaching batteries also opened fire and, in a +very short time, the enemy were seen pouring out in the rear of +their works, and making their way into the jungle. As there had +been no idea that they would so speedily evacuate the stockade, no +preparations had been made for cutting them off; and the garrison, +therefore, effected their escape with but little loss.</p> +<p>The troops at once occupied the work, and found large stores of +grain and ammunition there, as well as a great number of guns. From +some of the wounded Burmans, it was ascertained that the evacuation +of the fort was due to the death of Bandoola; who had been killed, +by the explosion of a shell, while watching the operations from a +lookout that had been erected for him, at the top of a lofty tree. +His death had caused the most profound depression among the +garrison. Their leaders in vain endeavoured to reanimate their +courage. The opening of the fire with the heavy guns completed +their discomfiture, and they fled without thought of resistance. +Indeed, the greater part had stolen away during the night.</p> +<p>A portion of the fleet had already passed up beyond the fort, +under a heavy fire; and the rest now came up. The supplies of grain +were renewed and, a guard being left to hold the works, which would +now serve as a base, the army again started up the river--the water +column proceeding to Tharawa, the land force marching back to +Henzada, whence they were carried across the river in the boats. +Here the force was joined by the reserve column from Rangoon, +consisting of several companies of the Royals and the 28th Native +Infantry, with a supply of elephants and carriage cattle which had +arrived from Calcutta.</p> +<p>On the 14th, Yuadit was again reached. No opposition, whatever, +was encountered; indeed, the whole country was deserted, the +inhabitants having been ordered away by the Burmese authorities, as +soon as the fall of Donabew was known. When within four days' march +of Prome, two native officials came in, with a communication to the +effect that the Burmese were ready to treat for peace. As it was +known, however, that reinforcements were on their way down from +Ava, it was evident that this was merely a pretext to gain time; +and the general sent word that, when he arrived at Prome, he would +be ready to open negotiations for peace.</p> +<p>The country through which the army was now passing was very +beautiful. In the far distance on the left, the mountains of Aracan +could be seen; while on the right the country was undulating, +richly cultivated, and broken by clumps of timber, with a +background of the range of hills running along near the Pegu river. +On the 24th the heights of Prome, eight miles away, were visible; +and the flotilla could be seen, lying at anchor a short distance +below the town. Messengers came out that afternoon, to endeavour to +induce the general not to enter it; but a reply was sent that this +was out of the question, that no harm would befall the inhabitants, +and that--as soon as he entered--the general would be ready to +receive any persons qualified to treat for peace.</p> +<p>Some hours before daybreak the army marched forward and, by +sunrise, were close to the town. The position was found to be +extremely strong. Every hill commanding the place had been +fortified, to the very summit. Strong stockades ran in every +direction, and it was evident that a great number of men must have +been engaged, for a long time, in attempting to render the place +impregnable.</p> +<p>Not a soldier, however, was to be found. A native of the place +presently met them, with the news that the governor and troops had +evacuated it, with the exception of a small party who were firing +the town. This story was corroborated by wreaths of smoke, rising +at various points.</p> +<p>The troops pressed forward at the top of their speed. On +entering the town, they found that the native population had all +been forced to leave and, piling their arms, they set to work to +extinguish the flames; which they did not, however, succeed in +doing until nearly half the town was destroyed. Fortunately the +fire was checked before it reached the great magazines of grain, +and other stores, for the army.</p> +<p>The belief that the negotiations had been only pretexts to +arrest the advance of the troops against the town, until the +expected reinforcements arrived, was confirmed by the natives; who +presently came in from hiding places where they had taken refuge, +until their army retired. They said that, as soon as the news came +of the fall of Donabew, fresh levies were ordered to be collected +in every part of Upper Burma; while the whole population of the +province had been employed in adding to the defences of the town, +which had been already very strongly stockaded.</p> +<p>It was a disappointment to the force, which had hoped that the +occupation of Prome would bring about the submission of the court +of Ava; and enable them to be taken down the river in boats, and +embark, before the rainy season again set in. Nevertheless, the +prospect of passing that season at Prome was vastly more pleasant +than if it had to be spent at Rangoon. They were now inland, beyond +the point where the rains were continuous. The town was situated on +high ground, and the country round was open and healthy. Although +for some little distance round the cattle had been driven off, and +the villages destroyed; it was certain that flying columns would be +able to bring in any amount of cattle, before the wet season +began.</p> +<p>For a short time, it was thought that the occupation of Prome +would show the king and court that it was useless to continue the +struggle, any longer; but these hopes were dissipated when it was +known that a further levy of 30,000 men had been called out. The +court, however, was apparently conscious that its commands would no +longer be obeyed with the alacrity before manifested. The early +levies had obeyed the call with cheerfulness; believing in their +invincibility, and confident that they would return home laden with +spoil after driving, without difficulty, the audacious strangers +into the sea. Things, however, had not turned out so. The troops +that had left Ava in high spirits had been routed, with very heavy +losses. Their great general, Bandoola, had been killed; and +fugitives from the army were scattered over the land, bearing with +them reports of the extraordinary fighting powers of these white +enemies, and of the hopelessness of attempting to resist them. The +consequence was that in issuing the order for the new levy a bounty +of twenty pounds, which to the Burmans was a very large sum, was +offered to each man who obeyed the call.</p> +<p>The first step, on the part of the British general, was to send +proclamations through the country; guaranteeing protection to all, +and inviting the population to return to their towns and villages. +The troops were employed in erecting, with the assistance of as +much native labour as could be procured, comfortable huts outside +the town; so that the natives, on returning should find their homes +unoccupied and untouched. It was not long before this excellent +policy had its due effect. As soon as those who first returned sent +the news to their friends, the fugitives came out from their hiding +places in the forests, in great numbers, and returned to the city. +Those whose homes were still standing settled down in them and +resumed their ordinary avocations, just as if their native rulers +were still in authority; while those whose houses had been burned +set to work, with a cheerfulness characteristic of their race, to +re-erect their light wooden dwellings.</p> +<p>So favourable were the reports spread through the country of our +conduct that, in a short time, the population of Prome was +considerably larger than it had been before the advance of our +army. Similar results were speedily manifest throughout the whole +district below the town. From the great forest that covered more +than half of it, the villagers poured out, driving before them +herds of cattle and, in two or three months, the country that had +appeared a desert became filled with an industrious population. +Order was established. The local civil officers were again +appointed to their former posts, but their powers of oppression and +intimidation were abrogated, by the order that no punishment beyond +a short term of imprisonment was to be inflicted on any person, +whatever, until the case had been brought before the British +authorities; and soon the only fear entertained by the people of +the rich district of the lower Irrawaddy was that the British +troops would march away, and leave them again to the oppression and +tyranny of their former masters.</p> +<p>The markets of Prome were abundantly supplied with food of all +sorts and, as everything was liberally paid for, any number of +bullocks were obtainable for, although the Burmese are forbidden by +their religion to kill cattle, and therefore keep them only for +draught purposes, they had no objection to our killing them; or +indeed, to eat the meat, when they could obtain it. Labour of all +kinds was abundant, and great numbers of canoes were constructed +for the purpose of bringing up supplies from the villages on the +river, and for the advance of the force at the end of the wet +season. Until this set in in earnest, small bodies of troops +marched through the forests; driving out the bands that infested +them, and plundered and killed the country people without +mercy.</p> +<p>The general's aides-de-camp had a busy time of it, being +constantly employed in carrying orders to the towns and villages, +in hearing complaints and, in Stanley's case, entering into +agreements for the purchase of cattle and grain. When in Prome, he +spent a good deal of his spare time with his cousin who, having +bought a horse, frequently obtained leave to accompany him on his +excursions on duty. A warm friendship had sprung up between them. +Harry was two years older than Stanley, and had been at Eton up to +the time that he entered the army. He was, however, in manner no +older than his cousin; whose work, for the three years previous to +the outbreak of the war, had rendered him graver and more manly +than a life spent among lads of his own age could have done.</p> +<p>Meinik always accompanied Stanley, wherever he went. He had now, +to the latter's quiet amusement, modified his Burmese costume; +making it look like that of some of the whites and, indeed, he +would have passed without notice as one of the Goa-Portuguese mess +waiters, in his suit of white nankeen. When riding, or on any +service away from the headquarter camp, he was dressed in a suit of +tough brown khaki which he had obtained from one of the traders at +Rangoon. The coat differed but little from that of the suit Stanley +had handed over to him; except that it was somewhat shorter and +without the small shoulder cape and, in fact, resembled closely the +modern regimental tunic. Below he wore knee breeches of the same +material; with putties, or long bands of cloth, wound round and +round the leg, and which possessed many advantages over gaiters. He +still clung to the turban but, instead of being white, it was of +the same colour as his clothes, and was much larger than the +Burmese turban.</p> +<p>"Burmese are great fools," he often said to Stanley. "They think +they know a great deal; they know nothing at all. They think they +are great fighters; they are no good at fighting, for one +Englishman beats ten of them. Their government is no good--it keeps +everyone very poor and miserable. You come here; you know nothing +of the country, and yet you make everyone comfortable. We ride +through the villages; we see everyone rejoicing that they are +governed by the English, and hoping that the English will never go +away again.</p> +<p>"What do you think, sir--will you stay here always? You have had +much trouble to take the country. A great many people have been +ill; a great many died. Now you have got it, why should you go away +again?"</p> +<p>"It is quite certain that we shall not give it all up, Meinik. +It has been, as you say, a troublesome and very expensive business; +and the farther the king obliges us to go up, before he makes +peace, the more he will have to pay, either in money or territory. +Of course, I cannot say what the terms of peace will be; but I +should think that, very likely, we shall hold the country from the +sea up to here, with Aracan and a strip along the sea coast of +Tenasserim."</p> +<p>"That will be good," Meinik said. "I shall never go outside the +English land, again. There will be plenty to do, and a great trade +on the river; everyone will be happy and contented. I should be a +fool to go back to Upper Burma; where they would chop off my head, +if they knew that I had been down to Rangoon when the English were +there."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch12" id="Ch12">Chapter 12</a>: Harry Carried +Off.</h2> +<p>Early in September, Stanley was sent to purchase cattle from +some of the villages near the foot of the hills and, at the same +time, to make inquiries as to the movements of a large band of +marauders who had been making raids in that neighbourhood. He had +with him four troopers of the bodyguard. Harry Brooke accompanied +him. Although from the healthier situation of Prome, the amount of +illness during the wet season did not approach that which had been +suffered at Rangoon, a great many men were in hospital, and there +were many deaths. Harry had had a sharp attack of fever and, as he +had now recovered, to a certain extent, the medical officer of his +regiment strongly recommended that he should have a change; and he +therefore, without difficulty, obtained his colonel's leave to +accompany Stanley, as the ground would be much higher than that on +the river, and the mere fact of getting away from a camp where so +many deaths took place every day would, in itself, be of great +value.</p> +<p>Stanley's daily journeys were not likely to be long ones, as he +had instructions to stop at all villages; and to see how things +were going on, and whether the people had any complaints to make of +oppression and exaction by their local authorities.</p> +<p>"It is a tremendous pull, your being able to speak the language, +Stanley," Harry said. "If it hadn't been for that, you would have +been stuck at Prome, like the rest of us. Instead of that, you are +always about; and you look as fresh and healthy as if you were at a +hill station, in India."</p> +<p>"Yes, it has been an immense advantage to me, in all ways. Of +course, I should never have got my staff appointment if it had not +been for that.</p> +<p>"By the way, I have not told you that, while you were down with +the fever, the gazette containing the confirmation of my +appointment by the general, and the notice of my commission, dated +on the day of my appointment, came out. I had quite a lump sum to +draw for although, I have been paid as interpreter all along, the +paymaster made a difficulty about my pay as a subaltern, until I +was gazetted regularly; so I have quite a large sum coming to me, +on my pay and allowances. I don't know how you stand for cash but, +if you are short at all, I can let you have anything that you +want."</p> +<p>"I have got really more than I know what to do with, Stanley. I +bought an uncommonly good native horse, as you know, six weeks ago; +and I am going to ride him for the first time now but, really, that +is almost the first penny that I have spent since we left Rangoon. +There is nothing to buy here except food and, of course, that is a +mess business. I had an idea that this was a rich country but, so +far, one has seen nothing in the way of rich dress materials, or +shawls, or carpets, or jewelry that one could send home as +presents. Why, in India I was always being tempted; but here it is +certainly the useful, rather than the ornamental, that meets the +eye."</p> +<p>"I saw some nice things at Ava but, of course, all the upper +classes bolted as we came up the country; and the traders in rich +goods did the same. Are you going to take a servant with you, +Harry? I don't think that there is any occasion to do so, for +Meinik can look after us both, well enough."</p> +<p>"Yes, I am thinking of taking my native, the man I hired just +after I got here. He is a very good fellow, and made himself very +useful, while I was ill. I picked up a tat for him, yesterday, for +a few rupees. I know that your man would do very well for us both +but, sometimes, when you make a village your headquarters and ride +to visit others from it, I may not feel well enough to go with you; +and then he would come in very handy, for he has picked up a good +many words of English. Your man is getting on very well, that +way."</p> +<p>"Yes; he was some time before he began for, of course, he had no +occasion for it; but now that he has taken to what he considers an +English costume, and has made up his mind that he will never settle +down again under a Burmese government, he has been trying hard to +pick up the language. I found that it was rather a nuisance at +first when, instead of telling him what was wanted in his own +language, I had to tell him in English, and then translate it for +him. However, he does understand a good deal now and, whenever he +has nothing else to do, he is talking with the soldiers. Of course, +from his riding about so much with me, he is pretty well known, +now; and as he is a good-tempered, merry fellow, he makes himself +at home with them and, if the campaign lasts another six months, I +think he will speak very fair English."</p> +<p>"I fancy that you will have to make up your mind that he is a +permanency, Stanley. I am sure he intends to follow you, wherever +you go; whether it is to England, India, or anywhere else."</p> +<p>"I sha'n't be sorry for that, Harry; certainly not as long as I +am out here. In the first place, he is really a very handy fellow, +and ready to make himself useful, in any way; then there is no +doubt that he is greatly attached to me, and would go through fire +and water for me. A man of that sort is invaluable to anyone +knocking about as I shall be, when the war is over and I take up +trading again. His only fault is that he is really too anxious to +do things for me. Of course, when I am on duty there is nothing +much he can do; but if I am sitting in a room, he will squat for +hours in the corner and watch me. If my cheroot gets low, there he +is with a fresh one and a light, in a moment. If I drop my +handkerchief, or a pen, there he is with it, before I have time to +stoop. Sometimes I have really to invent errands to send him on, so +as to give him something to do for me. I own that I have not +contemplated what position he would occupy, if I go trading; but I +quite recognize that he will go with me, and that he would become a +portion of my establishment, even if that establishment consisted +only of himself.</p> +<p>"Will you be ready to start at four in the morning? The sun is +tremendously hot now, on the days between the rain; at any rate, it +will be much better for you, till you get your strength, to travel +in the cool of the morning, or in the evening."</p> +<p>"I shall be ready. I will be round here, with my servant, by +that hour. By the way, what shall I bring with me?"</p> +<p>"Nothing at all. I shall take a couple of chickens, and some +bread and coffee and sugar, and a bottle of brandy for emergencies; +but we shall have no difficulty in getting food in the villages. +The troopers will only carry their day's rations with them. After +that I always act as mess caterer, and charge expenses when I get +back here."</p> +<p>Accordingly, the next morning they started at four o'clock. +Stanley insisted that Harry should ride his second horse, for the +present; as his own, having been six weeks without exercise, and +fed very much better than it had been accustomed to, was in much +too high spirits to be pleasant for an invalid. Meinik, therefore, +took Harry's; and the latter rode beside his cousin, whose horse +had had abundant exercise, and was well content to canter quietly +along by the side of his companion.</p> +<p>By the end of ten days, Harry had picked up some of his +strength. They now reached a village which Stanley decided to use +as his headquarters, for a few days, while he made excursions to +other places within a day's ride. It was a good place for a halt; +standing as it did at some height on the hills, where the air was +much cooler at night than in the flat country. It was surrounded by +a clearing of about a hundred acres in extent; planted with cacao +trees, pepper, and many kinds of vegetables.</p> +<p>"This is delightful!" Harry said, as they sat in front of the +hut that had been cleared for them, and looked over the plain. "It +must be twenty degrees cooler, here, than it was at Prome. I think +I shall do nothing tomorrow, Stanley, but just sit here and enjoy +myself. I know it is very lazy, for I am feeling quite myself +again; still, after ten days' riding, I do think that it will be +pleasant to have a day's rest."</p> +<p>"Do, by all means," Stanley said. "I think you had better stay +here for the three days that we shall remain. Your man is a very +good cook, and there is no lack of food. Those chickens we had just +now were excellent, and the people have promised to bring in some +game, tomorrow. There are plenty of snakes, too; and you lose a +good deal, I can assure you, by turning up your nose at them. They +are just as good as eels, as Meinik cooks them--stewed with a blade +of cinnamon, and some hot peppers. I cannot see that they can be a +bit more objectionable to eat than eels; indeed, for anything one +knows, the eel may have been feasting on a drowned man, the day +before he was caught; while the snakes only take a meal once a week +or so, and then only a small bird of some kind."</p> +<p>"I dare say that you are quite right, Stanley, and I own that +the dishes your man turns out look tempting; but I cannot bring +myself to try, at any rate as long as I can get anything else to +eat. If I knew that it was a case of snake, or nothing, I would try +it; but till then, I prefer sticking to birds and beasts."</p> +<p>The next morning Stanley rode off, with two of his escort and +Meinik, who declined altogether to be left behind.</p> +<p>"No, master," he said, "there is never any saying when you may +want me; and what should I ever say to myself if misfortune were to +come to you, and I were not to be there?"</p> +<p>Stanley had a long day's work. As a rule, the villagers had few +complaints to make but, at the place he went to on this occasion, +the headman had been behaving as in the old times; and Stanley had +to listen to a long series of complaints on behalf of the +villagers. The case was fully proved, both as to extortion and ill +treatment. Stanley at once deprived the man of his office, and +called upon the villagers to assemble and elect another in his +place.</p> +<p>"If you are not satisfied," he said to the fellow, "you can go +to Prome, and appeal to the general there; but I warn you that, if +you do, you must give notice to the villagers of your intention so +that they may, if they choose, send two or three of their number to +repeat the evidence that they have given me. I have noted this +fully down, and I can tell you that the general, when he reads it, +will be much more likely to order you a sound flogging, than to +reinstate you in your office."</p> +<p>It was dusk when Stanley arrived within two miles of the village +where he had left Harry. Meinik, who was riding just behind him, +brought his horse up alongside.</p> +<p>"Do you see that, sir? There is a light in the sky. It is just +over where the village is. I am afraid there is a fire there."</p> +<p>"You are right, Meinik. I hope nothing has gone wrong."</p> +<p>He touched his horse with his heel, and rode on at a gallop. He +became more and more anxious, as he approached the village. No +flames could be seen leaping up, but there was a dull glow in the +sky. As he rode into the clearing, he reined up his horse in +dismay. A number of glowing embers, alone, marked the place where +the village had stood; and no figures were to be seen moving +about.</p> +<p>"There has been foul play, Meinik.</p> +<p>"Get ready for action, men," he said to the two troopers, and +they dashed forward at a gallop.</p> +<p>Two or three little groups of people were sitting, in an +attitude of deep dejection, by the remains of their houses.</p> +<p>"What has happened?" Stanley shouted, as he rode up.</p> +<p>"The robbers have been here, and have slain many, and burned the +village."</p> +<p>"Where is my friend?"</p> +<p>"They have carried him off, my lord; or at least, we cannot find +his body. His servant and one of the soldiers are lying dead; but +of the other soldier, and the officer, there are no signs."</p> +<p>"This is terrible!" Stanley exclaimed. "Tell me exactly how it +happened."</p> +<p>"It was four hours ago, my lord. The robbers came suddenly out +from the plantation, and fell upon the people. Many they killed at +once; but many also have escaped as we did, by running in among the +plantations, and so into the forest. We heard the firing of guns, +for a little time; then everything was silent, and we knew that the +robbers were searching the houses. Half an hour later, smoke rose +in many places, and then flames; then after a time, all was quiet. +A boy crept up among the bushes, and came back with the news that +they had all gone.</p> +<p>"Then we came out again. Twenty-three of our people had been +killed, and eight carried off; at least, we cannot find the bodies. +The white officer and one of his soldiers have gone, also."</p> +<p>"Which way did they go?"</p> +<p>"The tracks show that they went up the hill. Most likely they +will have gone to Toungoo, if they have gone to any town at all; +but indeed, we think they have taken the prisoners to get a reward +for them."</p> +<p>Stanley had thrown himself off his horse, as he rode up; and he +stood for some time, silently leaning against it. Then he said to +Meinik:</p> +<p>"Picket the horses, and then come and have a talk with me."</p> +<p>Then he turned to the two troopers:</p> +<p>"There is nothing to be done now," he said. "You had better look +about, and see what you can find in the way of food; and then get a +grave dug for your comrade, and another for Mr. Brooke's +servant."</p> +<p>The two Mahommedan troopers saluted, and led their horses away. +Meinik, after picketing the animals, returned to Stanley but, +seeing that the latter was pacing up and down, and evidently not +disposed to speak, he went away.</p> +<p>There were a good many fowls walking about, in a bewildered way, +near the huts. They had been away, as usual, searching for food in +the plantations and fields when the robber band arrived and, on +their return home at dusk, had found everything changed. A boy at +once caught and killed two of these, plucked them and brought them +to Meinik who, getting some embers from the fires, cut the fowls in +two and put them on to roast. A few minutes sufficed to cook them. +As soon as they were ready, Meinik took them to Stanley.</p> +<p>"You must eat, master," he said. "You have had nothing since we +started, this morning; and sorrow, alone, makes a poor supper. You +will want to do something, I know; and will need all your +strength."</p> +<p>"You are right, Meinik. Yes, give me one of them, and take the +other one yourself and, while we eat, we can talk. Of course, I +must make an effort to rescue my cousin from the hands of this +band."</p> +<p>"Yes, master, I knew that you would do that."</p> +<p>"Did you ask how many there were of them, Meinik?"</p> +<p>"Some say forty, some say sixty."</p> +<p>"If we knew where they are now, and could come up to them, we +might manage to get them off while the robbers were asleep."</p> +<p>Meinik shook his head.</p> +<p>"They are sure to keep a strict guard, over a white officer," he +said; "but if we rushed in and shouted, and fired pistols, they +might all run away."</p> +<p>"I am afraid not, Meinik. There might be a scare for a minute +but, directly they saw that there were only two of us, they would +turn and kill us. Your people are brave enough. They may feel that +they cannot stand against our troops, owing to our discipline; but +they fight bravely hand-to-hand. However, we don't know exactly +which way they have gone; and it would be hopeless to search for +them in the forest, during the darkness.</p> +<p>"What should they go to Toungoo for?"</p> +<p>"I have been thinking it over, master; and it seems to me that +many of them may belong there, or to the villages near. They may +not dare return to their homes, because they are afraid that they +would be punished for having left the army, and would certainly be +sent off again to it. Now they may think that, if they go back with +a white officer and soldier, and tell some story of having beaten a +great many English, they will be rewarded; and may even be able to +remain some time in their homes, before they are sent off; or they +may be ordered to march with their prisoners to Ava, where they +would get still more reward. I can see no other reason for their +carrying off the officer."</p> +<p>"I think very likely that is so, Meinik. Anyhow, we are more +likely to rescue my cousin, at Toungoo, than we should be while on +the road. It would be next to impossible to find them among all the +hills and trees and, even if we did come upon them at night, and +could creep into the midst of them, we might find that my cousin is +too severely wounded to travel for, as there was a fight, it is +almost certain he must have been wounded before he was captured. +Therefore, I think it is best to make straight for Toungoo.</p> +<p>"How many miles is it from here, do you think?"</p> +<p>Meinik went over to the natives and asked the question. "About +forty-five miles, they say; very bad travelling; all mountains, but +ten miles to the north is a road that runs straight there."</p> +<p>"Then we had better follow that, Meinik. In this broken country, +and forest, we should be losing our way continually."</p> +<p>"How will you go, master? On horse or foot?"</p> +<p>"We will go on horseback, as far as we can; we are not likely to +meet people travelling along the road, at present. Another thing is +that, if we can get the horses as near the town as possible, they +would be very useful for, if Mr. Brooke has been wounded badly, he +may not be able to walk far.</p> +<p>"You do not know whether the country near the town is open, or +whether the forests approach it closely?"</p> +<p>The natives were again applied to.</p> +<p>"It is a rich country there, they say; and well cultivated, for +five or six miles round the town."</p> +<p>"I will go and have a talk with them, presently. It will, of +course, be necessary for me to disguise myself again."</p> +<p>Meinik nodded.</p> +<p>"Yes, you must do that, master."</p> +<p>"Do you think that we can get two or three men to go with us, +from here?"</p> +<p>"If you will pay them, master, no doubt they will be ready to +go. They are well content with the white rulers. They find that +they are not oppressed, and everything is paid for; and that the +white officers treat them kindly and well. They have lost many +things, in this affair today, and would be glad to earn a little +money.</p> +<p>"How many would you like to have?"</p> +<p>"Four or five, Meinik. I don't exactly know, at present, what +there would be for them to do; but they could help to make fires, +and keep watch, while we are doing something. At any rate, they may +be useful.</p> +<p>"Of course, I shall get the trooper out, too, if I can. Very +likely they will be confined together and, if we rescue one, we can +of course rescue the other.</p> +<p>"Now I must do some writing. Get me a torch of some sort, and I +will do it while you are speaking to the natives."</p> +<p>Stanley always carried a notebook and pen and ink, to take down +statements and complaints, as he rode about. He now sat down and +wrote an account of what had taken place during his absence.</p> +<p>"We had no previous news of the existence of the band," he went +on, "and the natives, themselves, had certainly no fear of any +attack being imminent. Had I thought that there was the slightest +risk, I should not have made the village my headquarters; or have +left Mr. Brooke there, with only his servant and two troopers. I +regret the matter, most deeply; and am about to set off to Toungoo, +with my man. I shall, of course, go in disguise; and shall make +every endeavour to free my cousin.</p> +<p>"I trust, General, that you will grant me leave for this +purpose. I am, of course, unable to say how long it may take me +but, however long, I shall persevere until I learn that my cousin +is dead, or until I am, myself, killed. I trust that in starting at +once, on the assumption that you will grant me leave, I am not +committing a breach of duty. But if so, and you feel that you +cannot, under the circumstances in which you are placed, grant +leave to an officer to be absent on private business, I inclose a +formal resignation of my commission, stating why I feel myself +constrained, even in the presence of the enemy, to endeavour to +rescue my cousin from the band that has carried him off. At any +rate, it could not be said that I resigned in order to shirk +danger.</p> +<p>"I sent off two days ago, by one of the natives here, a report +of my proceedings up to that date; and have now the honour to +inclose the notes I took of my investigations, today, into the +conduct of the headman of Pilboora, and my reasons for depriving +him of his office. I shall leave the two troopers of my escort +here, with orders to remain until either I return, or they receive +instructions from Prome. I am taking a few of the villagers with +me. Should anything occur to me, at Toungoo, they will bring back +the news to the troopers; and I shall leave instructions with them +to carry it, at once, to you. If I find that Mr. Brooke has been +sent on to Ava I shall, of course, follow and endeavour to effect +his rescue on the road.</p> +<p>"As it is possible, General, that I may not have another +opportunity of thanking you for the many kindnesses that you have +shown me, allow me to do so, most heartily, now."</p> +<p>When Stanley had concluded the letter, and written the paper +offering his resignation, and giving his reasons for so doing, he +called Meinik to him.</p> +<p>"Well, Meinik, have you found men willing to go with us?"</p> +<p>"Yes, master, I have got five men; two of them know Toungoo +well. All are stout fellows. I offered them the terms that you +mentioned--fifty ounces of silver, to each man, if you succeeded by +their aid in rescuing the officer. They were delighted at the +offer, which would enable them to replace everything that they have +lost.</p> +<p>"I told them, of course, that if it were necessary to fight, +they would have to do so; and that, as many of their countrymen +were enlisted, as gun lascars and in other occupations, with the +English; and are, of course, exposed to the attacks of their +countrymen, they would only be doing what others have been willing +to do.</p> +<p>"They said that they were ready enough to fight. You were the +government, now; and you were a good government, and they would +fight for you and, besides, as the officer was carried off from +their village, it was their duty to help to get him back.</p> +<p>"One of them said, 'These men who attacked us are Burmese +soldiers. As they attack us, there is no reason why we should not +attack them.'</p> +<p>"So I think, master, that you can count upon them. The Burmese +have always been fond of fighting, because fighting means booty. +The troops don't want to fight any more, because they get no booty, +and a number of them are killed. But, now that the villagers have +been forced to go to the war against their will; and have been +plundered, and many killed, by Burmese soldiers, they are quite +ready to take sides with you. Three of them have had wives or +children killed, today; and that makes them full of fight."</p> +<p>"Well, you had better tell them to cook, at once, food for two +or three days. At four o'clock they are to start, through the +forest, to the road you spoke of. We will set out at the same time, +on horseback; but we shall have to make a detour, so they will be +on the road before we are. Tell them when they get there to stop, +until we come up."</p> +<p>"Yes, master. It is a good thing that I rode your second horse, +yesterday, instead of Mr. Brooke's animal."</p> +<p>"Yes, he is worth a good deal more than the other, Meinik, and I +should certainly have been sorry to lose him."</p> +<p>"One of the men who is going with us says that he knows of the +ruins of an old temple, eight or nine miles this side of Toungoo; +and that this would be a good place for us to leave our horses. It +is very, very old; one of those built by the people who lived in +the land before we came to it, and the Burmans do not like to go +near it; so that there would be no fear of our being disturbed, +there. Even these men do not much like going there; but I told them +that no evil spirits would come, where white men were."</p> +<p>"It is rather far off, Meinik; but as you say the country is +cultivated, for some distance round the town, we shall certainly +have to leave our horses some six or seven miles away; and two or +three miles will not make much difference. We can put on our +disguises there.</p> +<p>"You had better take a couple of boys to look after the horses, +while we are away."</p> +<p>"They would not sleep there, at night," Meinik said, doubtfully. +"I don't think the men would, either, if you were not there."</p> +<p>"That would not matter, Meinik, if as you say, there is no fear +of anyone else going there."</p> +<p>"Certainly, no one else will go there at night, master."</p> +<p>"At any rate, if you can get two boys to go, we may as well take +them. They might go there in the day, and feed and water the +horses; and sleep some distance away, at night."</p> +<p>Meinik found two boys, sixteen years old, who said that they +would go with them and, at the hour agreed on, Stanley and Meinik +started on horseback. They descended the hill to the plain at its +foot and, turning to the right, rode for some ten or twelve miles; +when they struck into the road and, following this at an easy pace +they came, in the course of another hour, upon the party of +villagers sitting by the roadside.</p> +<p>The sun was just rising, and they travelled for three hours +without meeting anyone; then they drew off into the wood, at a +point where a small stream crossed the road and, after eating a +meal, and giving a good feed to the horses, lay down to sleep till +the heat of the day abated--the natives, who were all armed with +spears and swords, keeping watch by turns.</p> +<p>At four o'clock they started again and, at ten, approached the +spot where, in the depth of the wood, lay the temple. The man who +knew its position declared, however, that he could not find it, at +night. Stanley had no doubt that he was really afraid to go there +but, as he did not wish to press them against their will, he said +carelessly that it made no difference if they halted there, or +close by the road, and a fire being speedily lit, they bivouacked +round it.</p> +<p>Meinik had procured the necessary dyes from a village, and +Stanley was again stained, and covered with tattoo marks, as +before.</p> +<p>"What am I to do about your hair, master?" he asked. "It will +never do for you to go, like this."</p> +<p>Stanley had not thought of this point and, for a time, was +completely at a loss. His own hair was now short, and could not +possibly be turned up.</p> +<p>"The only thing that I can see," he said, after a long pause, +"is for you and the men each to cut off a lock of hair from the top +of your heads, where it will not show. The six locks would be +ample; but I don't see how you are to fasten it, below the +turban."</p> +<p>"There are berries we can get wax from," Meinik said. "We boil +them in water, and the wax floats at the top. With that, master, we +could fasten the hair in among yours, so that it would look all +right."</p> +<p>The men had all laughed at the proposal, but willingly consented +to part with a portion of their hair. Meinik therefore proceeded to +stain Stanley's close crop black and, the first thing in the +morning, the boys went out, soon returning with a quantity of +berries. Some water was poured over them, in an earthenware pot, +and placed over the fire and, in half an hour, a thick scum of oil +gathered on the surface. Meinik skimmed it off, as fast as it +formed and, as it cooled, it solidified into a tenacious mass, +somewhat resembling cobblers' wax. The six locks of hair had +already been cut off, and the ends were smeared with the wax, and +worked in among Stanley's own hair; then a little of the hot wax +was rubbed in, and the men all declared that no one would notice +anything peculiar in his appearance. The long tresses were curled +round, at the top of the head, and a ring of muslin tied round. The +Burmans were immensely amused at the transformation that had been +wrought in Stanley's appearance; and followed him through the wood, +to the temple, without any signs of nervousness.</p> +<p>The ruins were extensive. A considerable portion of the building +had been hewn out of the face of a precipitous rock, in the manner +of some Hindoo temples; and it was evident that it had been the +work of a people more closely allied to the Indian race than to the +Tartar or Chinese people, from whom the Burmese sprung. Uncouth +figures were sculptured on the walls. At these the Burmese looked +with some awe but, as Stanley laughed and joked over them, they +soon recovered their usual demeanour.</p> +<p>"I am a great deal more afraid of tigers than of ghosts," +Stanley said; "a deserted place like this is just the sort of spot +they would be likely to be in. At any rate, if these caves do not +go any further into the hill--and there are no signs of their doing +so--it may be hoped that the tigers have their superstitions about +it, too. At any rate, it will be a good thing to pile a great +quantity of firewood at the entrance; and I think one of you had +better stay here, with the boys. They and the horses would be a +great deal safer here, with a fire burning; than they would be in +the woods, where a tiger might pounce upon them, at any moment. As +to this folly about spirits, it is only old women's chatter."</p> +<p>The Burmese talked among themselves, and one of the men finally +agreed to stay with the boys. An hour was spent in gathering a pile +of brushwood and logs, and the man said that he and the two boys +would gather plenty more, during the day. They were, at four +o'clock, to take the horses down to the river, a mile distant, and +let them drink their fill. They had brought with them a large bag +of grain--which had been carried by the men--a quantity of +plantains, and some fowls. Therefore, the party that were to remain +would be well provided.</p> +<p>Moreover, in collecting the wood a score of snakes had been +killed. Some of these and a chicken had been cooking while they +were at work and, as soon as this was eaten, they started for the +town. When they came within a mile of it, Stanley entered a +plantation of fruit trees, and Meinik and the four men went on.</p> +<p>They returned, in two hours, with the news that a party of ten +men had arrived in the town, on the previous day, with two +prisoners. One, a coloured man, had been able to walk. The other, a +white man, had been carried in on a litter. They had both been +lodged in the jail.</p> +<p>By this time, the conduct of the English towards the natives, at +Rangoon and the territory they occupied, had had one good effect. +Signally as they had been defeated by them, the Burmese had lost +their individual hatred of the strangers. They knew that their +wounded and prisoners always received kind treatment at their hands +and, although the court of Ava remained as arrogant and bigoted as +ever, the people in lower Burma had learned to respect their +invaders, and the few prisoners they had taken received much better +treatment than those who had been captured at the commencement of +the war.</p> +<p>As soon as it was dusk, Stanley went with Meinik into the town. +It was a place of considerable size, with buildings at least equal +to those at Prome. Toungoo had formed part of the kingdom of Pegu, +before it had been subdued by the Burmese. The peculiar and +characteristic facial outline of the latter was, here, much less +strongly marked and, in many cases, entirely absent; so Stanley +felt that, even in daylight, he would pass without attracting any +attention.</p> +<p>The prison was surrounded by a strong and high bamboo fence, and +in the space inclosed by this were eight or ten dwellings of the +usual wooden construction. A dozen armed men were seated by a fire +in the yard, and two sentries were carelessly leaning against the +gate.</p> +<p>"There should be no difficulty in getting in there with two rope +ladders--one to climb up with, and one to drop on the other side," +Stanley said. "You may be sure that most of the guard go to sleep, +at night. The first thing to ascertain is which house the prisoners +are kept in and, in the second place, how my cousin is going on. We +can do nothing until he is able to walk for a short distance.</p> +<p>"Let us move round to the other side of the inclosure. It may be +that a sentry is posted at their door."</p> +<p>On getting to the other side, and looking through the crevices +between the bamboos, they could make out two figures squatted by +the door of one of the houses; and had no doubt that this was the +one in which Harry Brooke was confined.</p> +<p>"Now, Meinik, the first thing is for you to go and buy a rope. +When the place gets quite quiet, we will make a loop and throw it +over the top of the palisade, behind that hut; then I will climb up +and let myself down, inside, and then crawl up to the hut and see +what is going on there. If my cousin is alone, I will endeavour to +speak to him; but of course there may be a guard inside, as well as +at the door. If he is very ill, there will probably be a +light."</p> +<p>"Let me go, master!"</p> +<p>"No, Meinik, I would rather go myself. I shall be able to judge +how he is, if I can catch a sight of him."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch13" id="Ch13">Chapter 13</a>: Preparing A +Rescue.</h2> +<p>Stanley remained where he was until Meinik returned, in half an +hour, with the rope. Stanley made a loop at one end; and then +knotted it, at distances of about a foot apart, to enable him to +climb it more easily. Then they waited until the guard fire burnt +down low, and most of the men went off into a hut a few yards +distant, three only remaining talking before the fire. Then Stanley +moved round to the other side of the palisade and, choosing a spot +immediately behind the hut where the sentries were posted, threw up +the rope. It needed many attempts before the loop caught at the top +of one of the bamboos. As soon as it did so, he climbed up.</p> +<p>He found that the position was an exceedingly unpleasant one. +The bamboos were all so cut that each of them terminated in three +spikes, and so impossible was it to cross this that he had to slip +down the rope again. On telling Meinik what was the matter, the +latter at once took off his garment and folded it up into a roll, +two feet long.</p> +<p>"If you lay that on the top, master, you will be able to +cross."</p> +<p>This time Stanley had little difficulty. On reaching the top, he +laid the roll on the bamboo spikes; and was able to raise himself +on to it and sit there, while he pulled up the rope and dropped it +on the inside. Descending, he at once began to crawl towards the +hut. As he had seen before climbing, a light was burning within, +and the window was at the back of the house. This was but some +twenty yards from the palisade and, when he reached it, he stood up +and cautiously looked in.</p> +<p>The Indian trooper was seated in a chair, asleep, without his +tunic. One arm was bandaged, and a blood-stained cloth was wrapped +round his head. On a bamboo pallet, with a dark rug thrown over it, +was another figure. The lamp on the wall gave too feeble a light +for Stanley to be able to make out whether the figure lying there +was Harry, but he had no doubt that it was so.</p> +<p>In a low tone he said, in Hindustani, "Wake up, man!"</p> +<p>The soldier moved a little. Stanley repeated the words in a +somewhat louder tone, and the trooper sprang to his feet, and +looked round in a bewildered way.</p> +<p>"Come to the window," Stanley said. "It is I, your officer."</p> +<p>The man's glance turned to the window but, surprised at seeing a +Burmese peasant--as he supposed--instead of the officer, he stood +hesitating.</p> +<p>"Come on," Stanley said. "I am Lieutenant Brooke."</p> +<p>The soldier recognized the voice, drew himself up, made the +military salute, and then stepped to the window.</p> +<p>"I have come," Stanley said, "to try and rescue Lieutenant +Brooke, and yourself. I have some friends without. How is he?"</p> +<p>"He is very ill, sir. He is badly wounded, and is unconscious. +Sometimes he lies for hours without moving; sometimes he talks to +himself but, as I cannot understand the language, I know not what +he says; but sometimes he certainly calls upon you. He uses your +name often.</p> +<p>"I do what I can for him, but it is very little. I bathe his +forehead with water, and pour it between his lips. Of course he can +eat nothing, but I keep the water my rice is boiled in and, when it +is cool, give it him to drink. There is some strength in it."</p> +<p>"Then nothing can be done, at present," Stanley said. "Tomorrow +night I will bring some fruit. You can squeeze the juice of some +limes into a little water, and give it to him. There is nothing +better for fever. As soon as he is well enough for us to get him +through the palisades, we will have a litter ready for him, and +carry him off; but nothing can be done until then.</p> +<p>"How are you treated?"</p> +<p>"They give me plenty of rice, sahib, and I am at liberty to go +out into the courtyard in the daytime and, now that I know that you +are near, I shall have no fear. I have been expecting that they +would send me to Ava where, no doubt, they would kill me; but I +have thought most that, if they were to send me away from here, and +there was no one to look after the sahib, he would surely die."</p> +<p>At this moment Stanley felt a hand roughly placed on his +shoulder. Turning round, he struck out with all his strength, full +in a man's face, and he fell like a log.</p> +<p>"If they ask you who was here," he said hastily to the trooper, +"say that you know not who it was. A Burmese came and spoke to you, +but of course you thought that he was one of the guard."</p> +<p>Then he ran to the rope, climbed up and, as he got over, pulled +it up and threw it down to Meinik--as he thought that there might +be some difficulty in shaking it off from the bamboo--then he +dropped to the ground, bringing down the pad with him.</p> +<p>"Did you kill him, master?" Meinik asked, as they hurried away. +"I was watching the window, and saw you talking to someone inside; +then I saw a man suddenly come into the light and put his hand upon +you, and saw you turn round, and he fell without a sound being +heard."</p> +<p>"There is no fear of his being killed, Meinik. I simply hit him +hard; and he went down, I have no doubt, stunned. It is unfortunate +but, though they may set extra guards for a time, I think they will +not believe the man's story; or at any rate, will suppose that it +was only one of the guard who, not being able to sleep, wandered +round there and looked into the hut from behind. The worst of it is +that I am afraid that there is no chance of my being able to take +my cousin some limes and other fruit, tomorrow night, as I said I +would. He is very ill, and quite unconscious."</p> +<p>"That is very bad, master. I will try and take him in some +fruit, tomorrow. If they won't let me in, I will watch outside the +gates and, when one of the guard comes out, will take him aside; +and I have no doubt that, for a small bribe, he will carry in the +fruit and give it to the trooper. I wonder that they put them into +that hut with the window at the back."</p> +<p>"I don't suppose they would have done so, if my cousin had not +been so ill that it was evident that he could not, for some time, +attempt to escape."</p> +<p>They joined the villagers outside the town and, telling them +that there was nothing to do that night, returned to the temple. +They found the man and the two boys, sitting by a great fire, but +shivering with terror.</p> +<p>"What is the matter?" Stanley asked.</p> +<p>"The spirits have been making all sorts of noises outside, and +there are other noises at the end of the cave, close to the +horses."</p> +<p>Stanley took a brand and went over to them. They were both +munching their grain quietly.</p> +<p>"Well, you see the horses are not frightened; so you may be sure +that whatever were the noises you heard, there was nothing +unnatural about them. What were they like?"</p> +<p>The question was not answered for, at that moment, a sound like +a loud deep sigh was heard overhead. The natives started back; and +even Stanley felt, for a moment, uncomfortable.</p> +<p>"It is only the wind," he said. "There must be some opening +above there; and the wind makes a noise in it, just as it does in a +chimney. We will see all about it, in the morning.</p> +<p>"Now, as to the noises outside."</p> +<p>"They were wailing cries," the man said.</p> +<p>"Pooh! They must have been tigers or leopards, or perhaps only +wild cats. No doubt they smelt you and the horses, but were too +much afraid of the fire to come any nearer. Why, you must have +heard tigers often enough to know their cries."</p> +<p>"I thought myself that they were tigers," the man said, rather +shamefacedly, "but the boys said they were certain that they were +not; and I was not sure, myself, one way or the other."</p> +<p>Sitting down by the fire, Stanley told the men the exact +position of the prisoners; and said that he feared it would be +altogether impossible to get Harry out, for the present.</p> +<p>"I would give anything to have him here," he said; "but it would +be impossible to get him over the palisade."</p> +<p>"We might cut through it, master," Meinik said. "With a sharp +saw we could cut a hole big enough, in an hour, to carry his litter +out. The only thing is, we could not get his bed through that +window."</p> +<p>"We might get over that, by making a narrow litter," Stanley +said, "and lifting him from the bed on to it. The difficulty would +be, what to do with him when we got him out? As to carrying him any +distance, in his present state it would be out of the question; +besides, the guard are sure to be vigilant, for some considerable +time. I think that the best plan would be for you all to go back to +your village, tomorrow, taking the horses with you; and for one of +you to come over, every other day, for orders. Then there would be +no occasion for anyone to watch the horses. They certainly will be +of no use to us, at present, for it will be weeks before my cousin +is strong enough to ride.</p> +<p>"Meinik and I will take up our abode close to the edge of the +forest, for that will save us some four or five miles' walk, each +day. The first thing in the morning, you shall go with me and +choose a spot; so that you may both know where to find us. Two of +you have got axes, and we will make a shelter in a tree; so as to +be able to sleep without fear of tigers when we go out there, +though I dare say that we shall generally sleep near the town. +However, one or other of us will always be at the spot, at midday, +on the days when you are to meet us.</p> +<p>"Now that I think of it, two of you may as well stay at the +shelter, for the present, while the other three and the two boys go +home. Then there will be no occasion to take the long journey so +often. When we do get my cousin out, we shall have to take up our +abode, for a time, either here or in the forest, until he is well +enough to bear the journey."</p> +<p>In the morning Stanley closely examined the roof of the cave, +but could see no opening to account for the noise that he had +heard. He had, however, no doubt that one existed somewhere. He +left a man with the two boys in charge of the horses, and went with +the others until they approached the edge of the forest. They kept +along within the trees for half a mile, so that any fire they might +light would be unseen by people travelling along the road. The men +considered this precaution needless, as they declared that no one +would venture to pass along it after nightfall; partly owing to the +fear of tigers, and partly to the vicinity of the temple.</p> +<p>A suitable tree was soon fixed on; and the Burmese, now in their +element, ascended it by driving in pegs at distances of two feet +apart. Once among the high branches, they lopped off all small +boughs that would be in the way and then, descending, cut a number +of poles, and many lengths of tough creeper and, with these, they +constructed a platform among the higher branches; and on it erected +a sort of arbour, amply sufficient to hold four or five people, +lying down. This arbour would hardly be noticed, even by persons +searching; as it was, to a great extent, hidden by the foliage +beneath it. Stanley told Meinik that they had better buy some rope +for a ladder, and take out the pegs; as these might catch the eye +of a passer-by, and cause him to make a close search above.</p> +<p>As soon as the work was finished, two of the men went back to +the temple, to start at once for home with their companion, the +boys, and the horses. Stanley had brought with him his pistols, the +two horse blankets, and other things that might be useful and, when +these were stored above he, with Meinik and the two men, went +towards the town. He stopped, as before, a short distance outside. +Just as it was dusk, the men returned carrying the rope that Meinik +had bought, and a store of food. With these they were sent to the +shelter, and Stanley entered the town, where he met Meinik.</p> +<p>"I have sent in the fruit," the latter said. "I had no +difficulty about it. I told the first soldier who came out, after I +had bought it, that I came from the village where the white officer +had been captured by the bandits. He had been very kind to us all +and, as we knew that he had been carried off badly wounded, I had +come over to get some fruit for him; but I found that they would +not let me in at the gate. I said I would give an ounce of silver +to him, if he would hand the things to the prisoner for me.</p> +<p>"He said, at once, that he would do so. He had heard that the +whites always treated their wounded prisoners very well; and that +there would be no difficulty about it, for that there was a window +at the back of the hut where he was lying, and he could easily pass +things in there without anyone noticing it. If the prisoner was, as +I said, a good man, it was only right that he should be helped.</p> +<p>"I told him that I should look out for him, and might want him +to do the same, another day. I think that he was an honest fellow, +and might have passed the fruit in, even without a reward. Still, +everyone is glad to earn a little money.</p> +<p>"He told me that a strange thing had happened, last night. One +of his comrades had declared that he had found a giant, standing at +the window where the prisoner was. He put his hand upon him, when +he was struck down by lightning. No one would have believed his +tale at all, if it had not been that his nose was broken. The other +prisoner had been questioned but, as he did not understand Burmese, +they could learn nothing from him. Two guards were, in future, to +be placed at the back of the house, as well as in the front."</p> +<p>"That part of the business is bad, Meinik."</p> +<p>"I dare say we shall be able to bribe them, master. You may be +sure that most of them are eager to get back to their own villages +and, for a few ounces of silver, they would be glad enough to help +us, and then to make their escape and go off to their homes. The +man I saw today might find one among them ready to do so, with him; +especially if their homes happened to be on the other side of the +hills, and there would then be no chance of their being seized, and +sent back again, by their headman. The sentry would only have to +let us know what night he would arrange for them both to be on +guard, together, behind the hut; then we should be able to manage +it well."</p> +<p>"It would be a capital plan that, Meinik, if it could be +arranged.</p> +<p>"Well, it is a great comfort to know that the fruit has got in +safely. The limes, especially, will be a great help to my cousin. +Next time you see the man, you must try and get him to find out how +he is going on."</p> +<p>For a fortnight, Stanley remained in the forest. Meinik met the +soldier every other day, and sent in fruit and, at the end of the +ten days, he heard that the prisoner had recovered his senses. It +was said that, as soon as he was well enough to move, he was to be +sent to Ava.</p> +<p>"Now you had better begin to sound the man, as to his +willingness to aid him to escape."</p> +<p>"I have very little doubt about it, master, for I have already +learned that his home is on the other side of the hills. He went +down with Bandoola; and returned after his defeat, with a number of +others, travelling up the bank of the Pegu river. If they had not +had their military chief with them, they would have started +straight for home. But they were marched here, and have been kept +on duty in the town, ever since. He has heard how well off the +people are on the other side of the hills, under English rule; so I +feel sure that he will be glad to escape, if he sees a chance of +getting off."</p> +<p>"That is good. In the first place, let him know that the other +English officer, who was at the village with the one they captured, +had said that he would be ready to pay well anyone who would aid in +his escape. If he says that he would willingly do so, if he also +could get away, tell him that one man would be of no use but that, +if he could get another to join him, so that they could both go on +guard together behind the house, it could be managed.</p> +<p>"But say that, in the first place, I must myself speak to the +white officer, and learn exactly how he is, and whether he can +endure a journey as far as this tree, or the temple--whichever we +may decide upon as best. When I have seen him, I will send for the +other men from the village. I am in no hurry to get him away, for +the longer he stays quiet, the better. But at any moment the +governor may decide that he is sufficiently recovered to be +carried, and may send him off to Ava, under a strong escort. +Therefore, although we will put off moving him as long as possible, +we must not run the risk of his being sent away."</p> +<p>Four days later, Meinik said that the man had arranged with +another to join him, and that both would be on duty behind the hut, +that evening, between nine and midnight. Accordingly, at ten +o'clock Stanley arrived, with Meinik and the two villagers, at the +palisade. Meinik had insisted upon accompanying him to the hut.</p> +<p>"I believe that the man is to be trusted, master; indeed I am +sure he is, but I do not know the second man. He may have pretended +to accept the offer, only on purpose to betray his comrade, and to +obtain honour and reward for preventing the escape of the white +man. Therefore, I must be with you, in case you are attacked. Our +other two men may be useful, to give the alarm, if a party is sent +round to cut us off."</p> +<p>Stanley, who had brought a horse blanket with him to lay on the +top of the palisade, was the first to drop into the inclosure. +Meinik followed him closely. Nothing had been said to the guard as +to the white officer, of whom Meinik had spoken, being himself of +the party; and Stanley had purposely left his pistols behind him, +lest he should be tempted to use them. In case he was attacked, he +carried a spear and a long Burmese knife.</p> +<p>Meinik had begged to be allowed to go forward first, while +Stanley remained by the rope. He pointed out that some change might +possibly have been made, and that other men might have been placed +on sentry.</p> +<p>"I know you, master," he said; "if you got there, and found two +strangers, and they attacked you, you would fight; then they would +give the alarm, and others would come up before you could cross the +palisade. I shall steal up. When I am close, I shall make a noise +like the hiss of a snake. If my men are both there, they will +repeat the sound. If they are not, and one comes forward to look +for and kill the snake, I shall slay him before he has time to +utter a sound. If the other runs forward at the sound of his fall, +I shall kill him, also.</p> +<p>"If no alarm is given, you can come forward and speak to your +cousin. If there is an alarm, you must climb the rope. They will +not know which way I have run, and I shall have plenty of time to +get over the palisade and pull up the rope; then they will think +that the guards have been killed by some of their comrades."</p> +<p>"I hope no such misfortune will happen," Stanley said, gravely, +"for there would then be no chance, whatever, of our getting him +away. He would probably be moved to some other place, and our one +hope would be that we might rescue him on the road; which would be +a difficult matter, indeed, if he were sent, as he certainly would +be, under a strong escort. However, your plan is no doubt the best +for, if I were killed or captured, there would be an end of any +chance of his being rescued."</p> +<p>Meinik crawled forward and, in a minute or two, Stanley heard a +low hissing sound, followed by two others. He walked forward a step +or two to meet Meinik, as he came back.</p> +<p>"It is all right, master; you can go on fearlessly."</p> +<p>Meinik returned with him to the window, and posted himself +outside, standing in the shadow; while Stanley stepped in through +the open casement which, indeed, was provided only with a shutter +outside. This would ordinarily have been closed but, owing to the +illness of the prisoner, and the strong desire of the governor that +he should live to be sent to Ava, it had been opened to allow a +free passage of air.</p> +<p>The trooper sprung from his couch, as Stanley made a slight +sound before attempting to enter; but Stanley said, in +Hindustani:</p> +<p>"Silence! It is I, Mr. Brooke."</p> +<p>The trooper stared doubtfully at the dark, tattooed, half-naked +figure.</p> +<p>"It is I, Runkoor, but I am disguised. I was like this when I +spoke to you through the window a fortnight since, but you could +not then see my figure.</p> +<p>"Are you awake, Harry?" he asked in English, as he approached +the pallet.</p> +<p>"Yes, I am awake; at least I think so. Is it really you, +Stanley?"</p> +<p>"It is I, sure enough, man," Stanley replied, as he pressed the +thin hands of the invalid. "Did not Runkoor tell you that I had +been here before?"</p> +<p>But Harry had broken down, altogether. The surprise and delight +was too much for him, in his weak state.</p> +<p>"Of course," Stanley went on quietly, "I knew that he could not +speak English, but I thought that he might make signs."</p> +<p>"He did make a sign. Each time he gave me fruit, he said 'Sahib +Brooke,' pointed outside, and waved his arms about; but I could not +make head or tail of what he meant. Why he should keep on repeating +my name, each time he gave me the fruit, was a complete puzzle for +me. As to the signs that he made, it seemed to me that he had gone +off his head. I have been too weak to think it over, so I gave up +worrying about it; and it never once struck me that it was you who +sent me the fruit.</p> +<p>"What an awful figure you are!"</p> +<p>"Never mind about that, Harry. I have come in to see how strong +you are. I have bribed the two guards stationed behind."</p> +<p>"I can just sit up in bed to take my food, Stanley, that is all. +I could not walk a step to save my life."</p> +<p>"I did not expect you to walk. What I want to know is whether +you are strong enough to be carried a few miles, on a litter. I +have five men from the village where we were, and they can cut +through the palisading behind the hut. I want to give you as long a +time as possible; but I am afraid that, any day, the governor may +have you taken out and sent in a litter to Ava, under a strong +escort."</p> +<p>"I could bear being carried out, no doubt; but if I could not, I +should think it would do me no harm, so long as my wounds do not +break out afresh. I suppose the worst that could happen to me would +be that I should faint, before I got to the end of the journey.</p> +<p>"Are you sure, old man, that this is not a dream?"</p> +<p>"Quite certain; if you were well enough, I would give you a +sharp pinch. If you are willing to venture, I will make my +preparations at once. I have to send to the village; but in three +days I shall be ready and, the first night after that the men +manage to be on guard together behind, we shall be here. It may be +a week, it may be more but, at any rate, don't worry about it if +they take you away suddenly. I shall try to get you out of their +hands, somehow."</p> +<p>"My dear Stanley," Harry said, with a feeble laugh, "do you know +that you are spoiling your chance of an earldom?"</p> +<p>"You may take it that if you don't succeed to the title, old +fellow, I sha'n't; for if you go under, I shall, too.</p> +<p>"Now goodbye; it would be fatal were I to be caught here. Try to +get yourself as strong as you can, but don't let them notice that +you are doing so."</p> +<p>Without giving Harry time to reply, Stanley pressed his hand and +left his bedside. He paused for a minute, to inform the trooper of +the plans for the escape, and then he got through the window. +Meinik joined him at once and, without a word being spoken, they +crossed the palisade, threw down the rope and blankets, and dropped +after them to the ground.</p> +<p>On their way back to their tree, Stanley told the two men that +the officer was better; and that the next morning, at daybreak, one +of them must start for the village to fetch their three comrades. +The boys were also to come back with him, as they were big fellows +and carried spears; and might, as Stanley thought, be useful either +in a fight or in assisting to carry Harry.</p> +<p>On the following morning, after the man had started, Stanley +went with Meinik to examine the temple more closely than he had +done before. He thought that it would be a far better hiding place +than their hut in the tree. There would certainly be a hot pursuit, +and the next day they might be discovered, whether in the temple or +in the tree; but in the latter they would be powerless to defend +themselves, for the Burmese, with their axes, would be able to fell +it in a few minutes; whereas in the temple a stout defence might be +made for a time. Moreover, the rock chambers would be far cooler, +in the middle of the day, than the hut.</p> +<p>His chief object in visiting the temple was to find a chamber +with a narrow entrance, that could be held by half a dozen men +against a number of foes; and it was desirable, if possible, to +find one so situated that they might, in case of necessity, retreat +into another chamber, or into the open air. Meinik was so +confident, in the white man's power to combat even evil spirits, +that he approached the temple with Stanley without betraying any +nervousness. They had provided themselves with some torches of +resinous wood, and Meinik carried a couple of brands from their +fire.</p> +<p>The chamber they had before been in was apparently the largest +in the temple, but there were several other openings in the +rock.</p> +<p>"That is the entrance we will try first," Stanley said, pointing +to one some ten feet from the ground. "You see there were once some +steps leading up to it. No doubt, where we are standing there was a +temple built against the face of that rock; and probably that +doorway led into one of the priests' chambers."</p> +<p>It was necessary to pile three or four blocks of stone on the +top of the two steps that alone remained intact, in order to enable +them to reach the entrance.</p> +<p>"Let me light the torches before you go in," Meinik said. "There +may be snakes."</p> +<p>"That is hardly likely, Meinik. You see, the face of the rock +has been chiselled flat, and I don't think any snake could climb up +to that entrance."</p> +<p>"Perhaps not, master, but it is best to be ready for them."</p> +<p>They lighted two torches, and passed through the doorway. There +was an angry hiss, some distance away.</p> +<p>"That is a snake, sure enough, Meinik. I wonder how it got +here."</p> +<p>Holding their torches above their heads, they saw that the +chamber was some fourteen feet wide and twenty long. In the corner +to the left something was lying and, above it, a dark object was +moving backwards and forwards.</p> +<p>"It is a big boa," Meinik said. "Now, master, do you take the +two torches in one hand, and have your knife ready in the other. If +it coils round you, cut through it at once. This is a good place +for fighting it, for there is nothing here for it to get its tail +round; and a boa cannot squeeze very hard, unless he does +that."</p> +<p>Stanley, feeling that in a combat of this sort the Burman would +be perfectly at home, while he himself knew nothing about it, did +as he was told; determining to rush in, should it attack his +follower.</p> +<p>"You can advance straight towards him, master. I will steal +round. He will be watching you, and I may get a cut at him, before +he notices me."</p> +<a id="PicF" name="PicF"></a> +<center><img src="images/f.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: The great snake moved his head higher and higher, hissing angrily." /> +</center> +<p>Stanley moved slowly forward. As he did so, the great snake +moved its head higher and higher, hissing angrily, with its eyes +fixed on the torches. Stanley did not take his gaze from it; but +advanced, grasping his knife. He knew that the boa's bite was +harmless, and that it was only its embrace that was to be +feared.</p> +<p>He was within some eight feet of the reptile, when there was a +spring. The snake's head disappeared and, in a moment, it was +writhing, twisting, and lashing its tail so quickly that his eyes +could hardly follow its contortions.</p> +<p>"Stand back, master," Meinik shouted. "If its tail strikes you, +it might do you an injury. It is harmless, otherwise. I have cut +its head off."</p> +<p>Stanley stepped back a pace or two, and stood gazing in awe at +the tremendous writhing of the headless snake.</p> +<p>"It is a monster, Meinik," he said.</p> +<p>"It is a big snake, master. Indeed, I should say that it must be +about forty feet long, and it is as thick as my body. It would be +more than a match for a tiger."</p> +<p>"Well, I hope there are not many more of them about, +Meinik."</p> +<p>"That depends, master. It may have its mate, but it is more +likely there will be no other. It would eat any smaller ones of its +own kind, of course; but there may be some small poisonous ones +about."</p> +<p>As the writhing of the snake ceased, Stanley looked round and +saw a narrow doorway, in the corner opposite that in which it had +been lying.</p> +<p>"Here is a passage, Meinik. Let us see where it goes to."</p> +<p>Meinik had, by this time, lighted two more torches.</p> +<p>"The more light the better," he said, "when you are looking for +snakes," and, holding them in one hand and his knife in the other, +he passed through the doorway, which was about four feet high.</p> +<p>Stanley followed him. The apartment was similar to the last, but +narrower; and was lighted by an opening not more than a foot +square.</p> +<p>"See, Meinik, there is a staircase, in the corner facing +us."</p> +<p>The steps were very narrow, but in perfect preservation. Without +staying to examine the room, Meinik led the way up; examining every +step carefully, and holding the knife in readiness to strike. They +mounted some forty steps, and then entered a room about ten feet +square. Except a window, some eighteen inches by three feet, there +was no apparent exit from the chamber.</p> +<p>"I should think that there must be some way out of this place, +Meinik. Why should they have taken the trouble to cut that long +flight of steps through the rock, just to reach this miserable +little chamber?"</p> +<p>Meinik shook his head. The ways of these ancient builders were +beyond him.</p> +<p>"There must be an outlet somewhere, if we could but find it. +Besides, we have not found where the snake came in, yet."</p> +<p>"He could have come in at the door, master. A small snake could +not have climbed up, but that big fellow could rear his head up and +come in, quite easily. We have found no little snakes at all."</p> +<p>"Well, that may be so, but I still think that there must be some +way out from here. Why should men go to the labour of cutting this +long stair, and excavating this chamber here, without any reason +whatever? Let us look through the window, Meinik."</p> +<p>It was a passage, rather than a window; for the rock face had +been left four feet in thickness. Crawling out, Stanley saw that he +was fifty feet above the foot of the cliff. A yard below him was a +ledge of rock, some two feet wide. It was level, and had deep +grooves cut, at regular intervals, across it. He had no doubt that +the roof of the outside temple had started from this point; and +that the grooves were made for the ends of massive rafters, of teak +or stone. At that time the passage to the chamber that he had left +was, doubtless, used for an exit on to the flat roof.</p> +<p>Stepping on to the ledge, he called Meinik to him.</p> +<p>"Now, Meinik," he said, "we will follow this ledge. There may be +some way up from it."</p> +<p>Walking with a good deal of care, Stanley made his way along to +a point where the ledge stopped, abruptly. Looking down, he saw the +remains of a wall of solid masonry, and perceived that he had been +correct in his surmise as to the purpose of the ledge. Then they +turned, and went back to the other end of the ledge. A few feet +before they reached this, Meinik--who was now leading the +way--stopped.</p> +<p>"Here is a passage, master."</p> +<p>The entrance was about the same size as that through which they +had stepped out on to the ledge but, instead of going straight in, +it started upwards.</p> +<p>"Another flight of steps, Meinik. I am beginning to hope that we +shall find some way out, at the top. If we can do so, it will make +us safe. We could defend those stairs and the entrance for a long +time and, when we wanted to get away, we could make quietly off, +without anyone knowing that we had left."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch14" id="Ch14">Chapter 14</a>: In The Temple.</h2> +<p>They went up the flight of steps for a considerable distance, +then they found the passage blocked by a number of great stones. +Stanley uttered an exclamation of disgust.</p> +<p>"It has fallen in," he said. "No doubt we are near the top of +the rock. Either the staircase was roofed in, or there was a +building erected over the entrance; and either the roof or +building, whichever it was, has fallen in. That is very unlucky. +When we go down, we will climb up the hill and see if we can +discover anything about it.</p> +<p>"With plenty of food and water," he went on, as they descended +into the lowest chamber, "one could hold this place for any +time."</p> +<p>"Yes, master, one could store away the food; but where should we +store the water? We might bring skins in that would last us for a +week, perhaps two weeks, but after that?"</p> +<p>"After that we should make our way off, somehow, Meinik," +Stanley said, confidently. "Well, there is no doubt that this is +the place to shelter in. They are less likely to find us here than +anywhere and, if they do find us, we can defend ourselves stoutly. +I should say, too, that if we think it over, we ought to be able to +hit upon some plan for making noises that would frighten them. You +know how scared the man and the two boys were, at that sighing +sound in the other chamber. We certainly could make more alarming +noises than that."</p> +<p>Meinik nodded.</p> +<p>"That we could, master. With some reeds of different sizes I +could make noises, some as deep as the roar of a tiger, and others +like the singing of a bird."</p> +<p>"Then we will certainly bring some reeds in here with us, +Meinik. I don't suppose they will mind, in the daytime, what sounds +they hear; but at night I don't think even their officers would +care to move about here, if we can but make a few noises they do +not understand.</p> +<p>"Well, for the present we have done our work here; and you had +best go off with the Burman to buy food, to serve in case of a +siege. You had better go to some of the cultivators' houses, near +the edge of the wood, for rice and fruit. If you can get the food +there, you will be able to make two or three journeys a day, +instead of one.</p> +<p>"But, before we start back, we will climb round to the top of +the hill, and see what has happened to shut up the staircase."</p> +<p>It took them a quarter of an hour's climbing, through the forest +and undergrowth, before they reached the upper edge of the rock +wall in which the chambers had been excavated. It had evidently, in +the first place, been a natural cliff for, when on the ledge, +Stanley had noticed that while below that point the rock was as +smooth as a built wall, above it was rough, and evidently untouched +by the hand of man. Following the edge of the cliff, until standing +as nearly as they could guess above the entrance to the steps, they +walked back among the trees. At a distance of some thirty yards, +they came upon a ruin. It was built of massive stones, like those +which strewed the ground where the temple had stood. A great tree +rose on one side, and it was evident that its growth had, in the +first place, overthrown the wall at this point. Climbers and shrubs +had thrust their roots in between the blocks that had been but +slightly moved, by the growth of the tree; and had, in time, forced +them asunder; and so, gradually, the whole building had +collapsed.</p> +<p>"This tree must be a very old one," Stanley said, looking up at +it, "for it is evident that this wall was thrown down a great many +years ago."</p> +<p>"Very old, master. It is one of our hardest woods, and such +trees live, they say, five or six hundred years. There are some +which are known to be even older than that."</p> +<p>"Well, it is clear that the staircase came up here; but we have +no means of knowing how far the point we reached is below this. I +should say that the stones we saw are the remains of the pavement +and roof, for you see these great blocks that formed the walls +don't go as far as the middle, where there is a great depression. +Still, of course, the steps may have come up on one side or the +other, and not just in the middle of this little temple--for, no +doubt, it was a temple.</p> +<p>"Now, you see, the reason for the steps up to that little square +room are explained. Probably those three chambers were the +apartments of the principal priests, and from them they could +either go out on to the roof of the temple; or could, by taking the +upper staircase to this point, leave or enter without +observation.</p> +<p>"Now, let us be off."</p> +<p>On arriving at their tree shelter, they found that the Burman +had got a meal ready and, after partaking of this, Meinik, with the +man, started to buy provisions. It was fortunate that Stanley had, +before starting from Prome, drawn some twenty pounds' worth of +silver from the paymaster. He had expected to be away for three or +four weeks and, during that time, would have had to buy provisions +for himself, Harry, and the four troopers; and might possibly have +occasion for money for other matters. He had not paid the men from +the village, for he knew that one of these would willingly +accompany him to Prome, to receive payment for them all.</p> +<p>A very small amount of silver sufficed for the purchase of a +considerable quantity of food in Burma. Fruit, of which many kinds +grew wild in the woods, was extremely cheap; as was rice and grain. +Therefore as yet, with the exception of the small sum expended in +Toungoo, his money was virtually untouched.</p> +<p>The two Burmans made three journeys before nightfall and +returned, each time, with large baskets of fruit, grain, and rice. +On the following morning, they went into the town and bought six of +the largest sized water skins--such as are carried for the use of +the troops in India, one on each side of a bullock. As soon as they +returned with these, they started for the temple. At a stream about +a hundred yards from the entrance they partially filled one of the +skins and, placing a strong bamboo through the straps sewn on it +for the purpose, Meinik and the Burmans carried it to the temple +and, with Stanley's assistance, lifted it into the lower chamber. +The others were, one by one, placed beside it; then water was +carried in the smaller skins and poured in, until they were all as +full as they could hold.</p> +<p>"There is water enough to last us for a month, if needs be," +Stanley said as, after securely tying up the mouths, they laid the +skins down, side by side.</p> +<p>The smaller mussucks were then filled and placed with the large +skins; and then, having done a long day's work, they returned to +their tree just as the sun was setting. The four men and two boys +were already there, they having done the sixty miles from the +village without a halt. They had already cooked some rice and some +slices of venison--which Meinik had brought, with the water skins, +from the town that morning--and were now lying smoking their cigars +with placid contentment.</p> +<p>For the next six days Meinik went to the town every afternoon. +On his return on the last evening, he said that the guard had told +him that the governor had paid a visit to the prison, that day, and +had seen the white captive; and had decided that he was now well +enough to travel, and that in two days' time he was to start for +Ava, the court having sent down an urgent order that he should be +carried there as soon as he was well enough to bear the +fatigue.</p> +<p>"Then tomorrow we must get him out," Stanley said. "Will our two +men be on duty?"</p> +<p>"Yes, master, they have not been on since the last night we were +there. They will form the second watch, and will go on guard at +midnight. I have bought two very sharp saws, and have cut two +strong bamboos for the litter."</p> +<p>This was constructed the next day. It was very simple, being +formed by sewing a blanket strongly to the two bamboos. Two +slighter bamboos, each four feet long, were tied loosely to the +main poles. These were to be lashed across, as soon as they had got +beyond the palisade, so as to keep the poles three feet +apart--which, as the blanket was four feet, from pole to pole, +would allow it to bag comfortably. The cross pieces could not be +attached until they were beyond the palisade; for the window was +but two feet wide, and it was therefore proposed to make the gap +through the palisade the same width, only.</p> +<p>Late in the evening they entered the town, and sat down in a +deserted corner until the time came for them to begin their work. +At last Meinik said that, by the stars, it was already past +midnight; and they then proceeded to the spot where they had before +climbed the palisade. Here they at once set to work. The saws were +well oiled and, in a very few minutes, five bamboos were cut away, +at the level of the ground and six feet above it. As the stockade +was bound together by cross pieces, behind, the other portions of +the bamboos remained in their places.</p> +<p>Meinik and Stanley went first, followed by three of the Burmans, +one of whom carried the litter. The other two Burmans with the +boys, remained on guard at the opening. All were barefooted, except +that Stanley wore a pair of the lightest leather sandals. They went +noiselessly up to the window; the guard, as before, responding to +Meinik's hiss. Without a word, one after another entered the +chamber. The trooper had been sitting at the table, evidently +anxiously expecting their arrival.</p> +<p>Stanley went up to the bed.</p> +<p>"Are you better, Harry?" he asked, in a whisper.</p> +<p>"Better, but still weak."</p> +<p>Everything had been arranged beforehand. The litter was laid +down on the ground, with the poles as far apart as possible. Then +Stanley made a sign, to the trooper, to take one end of the rug on +which Harry was lying; while he took the other. The Burmans ranged +themselves on each side; and the blanket was lifted up, with the +occupant and the pillow composed of his clothes, and laid quietly +on to the blanket of the litter. Then two Burmans went outside, +while the other four men lifted the poles and carried one end to +the window.</p> +<p>The Burmans outside held the ends well above their heads, +Stanley and the trooper raising their hands similarly. The other +Burmans then crawled, under it, out of the window. As the litter +was moved forward through the window, they took the places of +Stanley and the trooper at the poles, and silently moved on towards +the palisade. Stanley and Meinik followed, joined by the two +Burmese guards.</p> +<p>Not the slightest sound was made, as the eight men crossed the +short distance to the palisade and passed through the opening where +the others, spear in hand, were awaiting them; ready to rush in and +take part in the fray, should an alarm be given. Stanley breathed a +great sigh of relief, as they passed out. A few paces further they +halted, and the cross pieces were lashed to the poles.</p> +<p>"Thank God that you are out, Harry!" Stanley said, as soon as +they did this. "Has it hurt you much?"</p> +<p>"Nothing to speak of," Harry replied. "You managed it +marvellously. Am I really outside the place altogether?"</p> +<p>"Yes, fairly out. You will be more comfortable when we have +lashed these cross pieces. You will not be lying, then, at the +bottom of a bag; as you are now."</p> +<p>When the work was completed, they proceeded at a rapid pace; for +Harry's weight, reduced by fever as he had been, was a trifle to +his bearers. The others followed close behind and, in a quarter of +an hour, they were well beyond the town. Stanley spoke to Harry +once or twice, but received no answer; so he had no doubt that his +cousin had dozed quietly off to sleep. The gentle motion of the +litter would be likely to have that effect; especially as Harry had +probably been lying awake, for the last night or two, listening for +the friends who might arrive at any time.</p> +<p>When they reached the confines of the forest the torches, which +had been carried by the boys, were all lit; and each carried +two--with the exception of the bearers, who had but one each--while +all kept close together round the litter. They waved their torches +as they went and, although they heard the cries of several tigers +in the forest, they had no fear of being attacked; as so many +waving lights would deter the most hungry beast from venturing +near.</p> +<p>Once in the chamber at the temple, the litter was laid down on a +pile of reeds and leaves that had been gathered the day before, +together with a great store of brushwood and logs. Harry still +sleeping quietly. In a short time a bright fire was blazing and, +with this and the light of the torches, the chamber assumed quite a +cheerful appearance. On the way, Stanley had spoken to the two +guards, thanked them for their service, and assured them that they +would receive the reward promised by Meinik.</p> +<p>"I am the British officer," he said, "who was at the village +with my friend, though I was absent when he was carried off. As you +see, I am disguised."</p> +<p>Both had shown signs of uneasiness, when they approached the +temple; but Meinik had assured them that the spirits would not +venture to approach a party having a white man with them, and that +a night had already been passed in the temple, without any harm +coming of it. A meal, consisting of slices of venison, was at once +prepared and, when this was eaten, and the whole party had lighted +cigars, their spirits rose at the success of the enterprise. The +soldiers, however, had been disappointed at hearing that there was +going to be a stay for some little time there, to enable the +wounded man to gain strength.</p> +<p>"We may not stop long," Stanley said; "but, you see, with the +litter we could not travel fast; and you may be sure by this time +the alarm has been given for, when they came to relieve you at the +end of three hours, it would be found that you were missing; and +then they would, at once, discover that the captives had gone, too. +By daybreak the whole garrison will be out. How many are there of +them?"</p> +<p>"There are three thousand men, in the town," the guard said. +"After a party of your soldiers came within a short distance of it, +two months ago, fifteen hundred men were added to the +garrison."</p> +<p>"Well, you see, with three thousand men they could scour all the +woods and, if they overtook us, we should be unable to make any +defence. Here, we may hope that they will not discover us; but if +they do we can make a desperate resistance for, as only one man can +enter that door at a time, it would be next to impossible for them +to force their way in. You have your guns, and I have a brace of +pistols and, as all the others have spears, it will be as much as +the three thousand men could do, to get in through that door. If +they did, there is a still narrower door in the corner to defend; +and beyond that there is a long, narrow, steep flight of stairs, +that one man could hold against a host.</p> +<p>"The first thing in the morning, we will carry our stores to the +upper chamber. We have water and rice enough to last us for a +month, if we are careful; so that, although I hope they won't find +us, I shall not be at all afraid of our beating them off, if they +do so."</p> +<p>As soon as it was daylight, the stones that had been added to +the steps at the doorway were flung down; and then, by their united +efforts, the two remaining steps were removed. Then they helped +each other up, the last man being aided by two of his comrades, +above.</p> +<p>"There," Stanley said; "if they do come to search for us, they +are not likely to suspect that we have got a badly wounded man up +here. They may search the big chamber that we were in, before, and +any others there may be on the same level; but this narrow +entrance, ten feet above them, is scarcely likely to attract their +attention. If it does, as I said, we must fight it out; but it will +be a wonderfully hard nut for them to crack."</p> +<p>He then ordered the men to carry all the stores to the upper +chamber. Just as they began the work, there was a slight movement +on the bed. Stanley at once went up to it. Harry was looking round, +in a bewildered way.</p> +<p>"Well, Harry, how are you feeling? You have had a capital +sleep."</p> +<p>"Oh, is it you, Stanley? I was not quite sure but that I was +dreaming. Where am I? I must have gone off to sleep, directly we +started; for I don't remember anything, after you spoke to me when +they were making the hammock more comfortable."</p> +<p>"You are in a temple--some four or five thousand years old, I +should say--and this is a rock chamber. The temple itself is in +ruins. We are ten miles from Toungoo, and shall wait here till the +pursuit for you has slackened. In another week, you will be more +fit to move than you are, at present. I should not like to carry +you far, as you are now. Besides, if we had pushed on, they would +have been sure to overtake us; for these fellows can run like +hares."</p> +<p>"But why should not they find us here, Stanley?"</p> +<p>"Well, of course they may do so, but the entrance to this +chamber is ten feet above the ground; and another thing is, they +have all sorts of superstitions about the place. Nothing would +induce them to approach it, after nightfall; and even in the +daytime, they don't like coming near it. Lastly, if they do find +us, it will take them all their time to force their way in. I have +five men, and two young fellows quite capable of fighting; then +there are your two guards, Meinik, the trooper, and myself. So you +see, we muster twelve. We have two guns, and a brace of pistols, +and spears for us all; and if we cannot defend that narrow passage, +against any number of Burmans, we shall deserve our fate.</p> +<p>"Besides, there is another, and even narrower door, in the +corner behind you. They would have to force that; and in the +chamber beyond there is a narrow, straight staircase, some forty +feet high, which a man with an axe ought to be able to hold against +an army. They are taking the stores up there, now. We have got +provisions and water for a month. When everything is straight, +there we shall carry you up and, unless they sit down in front of +this place and regularly starve us out, we are as safe as if we +were in Prome."</p> +<p>"I wish to goodness you had that hideous dye off you, Stanley. I +know it is you by your voice but, what with the colour, and all +that tattooing, and your extraordinary hair, I don't know you in +the least."</p> +<p>"I am in just the same disguise as that in which I made my way +down from Ava," Stanley laughed. "I felt very uncomfortable, at +first, with nothing on but this short petticoat thing; but I have +got accustomed to it, now, and I am bound to say that it is cool +and comfortable.</p> +<p>"Now, tell me about your wounds."</p> +<p>"They are not very serious, Stanley. I had a lick across the +head with a sword--that was the one that brought me down--and a +slice taken out of my arm from the elbow, nearly up to the +shoulder. Also a spear-wound in the side; but that was a trifle, as +it glanced off the ribs. If I had been left as I fell, and somebody +had bound up my wounds at once, I should have been all right by +this time. The fellows did bandage them up, to some extent; but the +movement of the litter set them off bleeding again, and I fancy +that I lost pretty nearly all the blood in my body. I think that it +was pure weakness, rather than fever, that kept me unconscious so +long; for I gather, from the pantomime of the trooper, that I must +have been nearly a fortnight unconscious."</p> +<p>"Yes, you were certainly so when I came the first time, Harry; +but I think, perhaps, on the whole, it is lucky that you were. You +would probably have had a great deal more fever, if you had not +been so very weak; and if you had escaped that, and had gone on +well, you might have been sent off to Ava before I could get all +the arrangements made for your escape."</p> +<p>"Tell me all about it," Harry said. "It seems to me wonderful +how you managed it."</p> +<p>Stanley told him the whole story. By the time that he had +finished, the stores had all been taken upstairs; and the fire most +carefully extinguished, as the smoke would at once have betrayed +them. The cross pieces of the litter had been taken off, to allow +Harry to be carried in through the door, and he was now lifted. Two +of the men took off their cloths, and wrapped the materials of the +bed into these, carrying them up at once. As soon as they had gone +on, Harry was slowly and carefully taken to the upper chamber, and +laid down again on the bed. Stanley took his place beside him, and +the rest of the party went down to the lower room; having received +the strictest orders not to show themselves near the entrance, and +not to smoke until well assured that their pursuers must have +passed on ahead.</p> +<p>The bamboos of the litter were converted into a rough ladder +and, on this, Meinik took his post at the little window in the +second of the lower rooms. Owing to the immense thickness of the +rock wall, he did not get an extensive view, but he could see the +path by which anyone coming up through the forest would approach +the temple. It was now about half-past seven and, by this time, the +pursuers might be at hand; in ten minutes, indeed, distant shouts +could be heard, and Stanley at once went down and joined the men +below.</p> +<p>He placed himself in the line of the doorway. As the wall here +was four feet thick, the room was in semi-darkness and, standing +well back, he was certain that his figure could not be perceived by +anyone standing in the glare of sunshine outside. The sounds grew +louder and louder; and in a minute or two an officer, followed by +some twenty men, emerged from the trees. All paused, when they saw +the temple. The men would have drawn back at once; but the officer +shouted to them to advance, although showing small inclination to +do so, himself.</p> +<p>They were still standing, irresolute, when a superior officer on +horseback, followed by some fifty footmen, came up the path. He +shouted orders for them to search the temple and, as the fear of +him was even greater than their dread of the spirits, the whole of +the men made their way over the fallen stones, and up to the face +of the rock. They first entered the chamber where the horses had +been stabled. The officer who had first arrived went in with his +men and, coming out, reported to his senior that there had been a +fire made, and that some horses had also been there; but that three +weeks, or a month, must have passed since then.</p> +<p>"Are you sure of that?"</p> +<p>"Quite certain, my lord. It is extraordinary that anyone should +have dared to enter there, still less to stable horses when, as +everyone knows, the temple is haunted by evil spirits."</p> +<p>"I care nothing for spirits," the officer said. "It is men we +are in search of. Go and look into any other chambers there may +be."</p> +<p>At this moment a deep, mournful sound was heard. Louder and +louder it rose, and then gradually died away. The soldiers stood as +if paralysed. Even the high official--who had been obliged to leave +his horse, and make his way across the fallen blocks on +foot--stepped back a pace, with an expression of awe. He soon +recovered himself, and shouted angrily to the men to go on. But +again the dirge-like noise rose, louder and louder. It swelled, and +then as gradually died away; but this time with a quavering +modulation.</p> +<p>The men looked up, and round. Some gazed at the upper part of +the rock, some straight ahead, while others turned round and faced +the forest.</p> +<p>"Search!" the officer shouted, furiously. "Evil spirits or no +evil spirits, not a man shall stir from here, until the place is +searched."</p> +<p>Then rose a shrill, vibrating sound, as if of eerie laughter. +Not even the officer's authority, or the fear of punishment, could +restrain the soldiers. With cries of alarm, they rushed across the +ruins and plunged into the forest; followed, at a rate which he +tried in vain to make dignified, by the officer who, as soon as he +reached his horse, leapt upon it and galloped away.</p> +<p>The Burmese keenly appreciate a joke and, as soon as the troops +had fled, the villagers and guards inside the temple threw +themselves down on the ground, and roared with laughter. Stanley at +once made his way into the upper room.</p> +<p>"Splendidly done, Meinik! It was like the note of an organ. +Although I knew what you were going to do, I felt almost startled, +myself, when that deep note rose. No wonder they were +frightened."</p> +<p>"Well, at any rate, master, we are safe for the present."</p> +<p>"For the present, no doubt, Meinik; but I question if we sha'n't +hear of them, again. That officer was a determined-looking fellow +and, though he was scared, too, he stuck to it like a man."</p> +<p>"That is the governor of the town, master. I saw him carried +through the streets in his chair. Everyone was bending to the +ground, as he passed. He was a famous general, at one time; and +they say that he is likely to command a part of the army, again, +when fighting begins."</p> +<p>"Well, I think that we shall hear of them again, Meinik. I don't +suppose that he really thought that we were here for, certainly, no +Burman would take up his abode in this place, even to save his +life. They will push on the chase through the woods all day and, by +that time, they will feel sure that they would have overtaken us, +had we gone straight on. Then I should not be at all surprised if +he tries here, again."</p> +<p>"Perhaps he will, master. Like enough, he will chop off the +heads of some of the men that ran away, and pick out some of his +best troops for the search. Still, I hope he won't think of +it."</p> +<p>Stanley shook his head.</p> +<p>"I hope so, too, Meinik. There is one thing about which I feel +certain--if he does find us here, he will stay here or, at any +rate, leave some troops here, until he gets us. He would know that +he would get into trouble, at Ava, for letting the prisoners +escape; and it would be all important for him to recapture +them.</p> +<p>"Now we are up here, Meinik, we will go and have a look at that +upper staircase, again. If we are besieged, that is our only hope +of safety."</p> +<p>They again went along the ledge, and up the staircase. Stanley +examined the stones that blocked the passage, for some time, and at +last exclaimed:</p> +<p>"There, Meinik, look along by the side of this stone. I can see +a ray of light. Yes, and some leaves. I don't think they are more +than thirty feet above us!"</p> +<p>Meinik applied his eye to the crevice.</p> +<p>"I see them, master. Yes, I don't think those leaves are more +than that distance away."</p> +<p>"That is what I came to look for," Stanley said. "It was evident +that this rubbish could only be the stones of the root, and +pavement over the depression in the middle of the ruin; and that +these could not block up this staircase very far. The question is, +will it be possible to clear them away? Evidently it will be +frightfully dangerous work. One might manage to get one stone out, +at a time, in safety. But at any moment, the loosening of one stone +might bring a number of others down, with a run; and anyone on this +narrow staircase would be swept away like a straw."</p> +<p>Meinik agreed as to the danger.</p> +<p>"Well, we need not think it over now, Meinik; but if we are +really besieged, it is by this way that we must escape, if at all. +We must hope that we sha'n't be beset; but if we are, we must try +here. I would rather be killed, at once, by the fall of a stone on +my head, than tortured to death."</p> +<p>Meinik nodded, and they descended the stairs, put out the +torches that they had used there, and returned along the ledge to +the chamber where Harry was lying.</p> +<p>"So Meinik scared them away," the latter said, as Stanley sat +down beside him. "I could not think what he was going to do when he +came up here with that long reed, as thick as my leg. He showed it +to me, and I saw that it had a sort of mouthpiece fixed into it; +and he made signs that he was going to blow down it. When he did, +it was tremendous and, as it got louder and louder, I put my hands +to my ears. Everything seemed to quiver. The other row--that +diabolical laughing noise--he made with a smaller one. It was +frightful; but the big note was more like a trombone, only twenty +times louder.</p> +<p>"Well, do you think that we have done with them?"</p> +<p>"I hope so, Harry. At any rate, you can be assured that they +will never fight their way up here and, long before our provisions +are finished, I have no doubt that I shall be able to hit on some +plan of escape."</p> +<p>The day passed quietly. The woods were as silent as usual. The +Burmans were all in high spirits at the success of Meinik's horn. +When it became dark, they hung a blanket before the entrance, +placed one of the lads on watch just outside it, and then lighted a +fire. Stanley took a couple of torches and went up to Harry, taking +the precaution to hang a cloth before the window.</p> +<p>"I have not said much about thanking you, old fellow," Harry +said, "but you must know how I feel."</p> +<p>"You had better say nothing about it, Harry. I have only done +what you would have done, had you been in my place. Had you been in +charge of that party, and I had been carried off, I know you would +have done all in your power to rescue me. You might not have +succeeded quite so well, because you do not know their language; +but I know that you would have tried. After all, I have not run +anything like so much risk as I did when I rescued Meinik from the +leopard. And he, of course, was an absolute stranger to me.</p> +<p>"Besides, you are not rescued, yet; and we won't holloa until we +are out of the wood."</p> +<p>"It is very cool and pleasant here," Harry said, after lying +without speaking for a few minutes. "It was dreadfully hot in that +hut, in the middle of the day; and I used to feel that I lost +almost as much strength, in the day, as I picked up at night. I am +wonderfully better this evening. Of course, that long sleep had +something to do with it, and the pleasure of being free and with +you had still more; but certainly the coolness, and the air blowing +through that opening, have counted for something."</p> +<p>"Well, we shall feed you up as long as you are here, Harry; and +I hope, in a fortnight, to see you pretty firm on your legs again; +and then, if there is nothing to prevent it, we will carry you off +triumphantly."</p> +<p>Meinik here came in, with two bowls of broth; for they had +bought a few earthenware utensils on one of the visits to +Toungoo.</p> +<p>"That is first rate!" Harry said, as he finished his first one. +"What is it made of?"</p> +<p>"I never ask questions," Stanley replied--who tried, +successfully, to keep down a smile. "Meinik is a capital cook, and +turns out all sorts of nice little dishes. Here comes his step +again.</p> +<p>"What have you there, Meinik?" he asked, as the Burman entered, +with two plates.</p> +<p>"A slice of mutton done on sticks over the fire, master, and +some rice with it."</p> +<p>"That is first rate!" Harry said heartily, when he had finished. +"They did not give me meat, in prison. I suppose they thought that +I was not strong enough for it."</p> +<p>"They eat very little meat themselves, Harry. Now I fancy your +dinner is done, except some fruit. We have got plenty of that."</p> +<p>There were, however, some fried bananas, and Harry declared that +he had feasted like a king.</p> +<p>"If this goes on, Stanley, I will wager that I shall be about in +a week; and shall be offering to run a race with you, in a +fortnight."</p> +<p>"You will be a good deal longer than that, before you are fit to +walk any distance. Still, with a good appetite--which you are sure +to have, after your illness--plenty of food, and the cool air in +these caves, I do expect that you will pick up fast."</p> +<p>The next day passed quietly.</p> +<p>"I shall be glad when tomorrow is over," Stanley said to Meinik, +the last thing before going up to Harry's cell. "Today I expect +they are all marching back again and, if they pay us another visit, +it will be early tomorrow morning. Be sure that two men are on +watch. They can relieve each other, every hour; and I shall come +down myself, occasionally, to see that all is right; but I don't +think that even the governor could get his men to come near this +place, after dark."</p> +<p>"We will keep good watch, master, but I have no fear of their +coming."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch15" id="Ch15">Chapter 15</a>: The Attack.</h2> +<p>Stanley got up several times during the night, and went below to +the watches; as he felt sure they would be nervous for, though they +had now, to a large extent, got over their superstitious fears, +they would still be timid at night. They reported that everything +was still round the temple, but that they had heard distant sounds +in the woods; and on the first of these occasions he had, after +returning to the room above, gone out on to the ledge; and from +that height could see the reflection, in the sky, of a number of +fires extending in a semicircle, at a distance of a mile or so from +the temple. From this he felt convinced that the governor was +determined to have a thorough search made in the morning.</p> +<p>As soon as it was daylight, the sound of the blowing of horns +and the beating of drums was heard in the forest and, half an hour +later, a large body of men poured out from the trees, headed by the +governor, himself.</p> +<p>"Now," he shouted, "this place is to be searched, in every hole +and corner.</p> +<p>"As to the evil spirits, there is no fear of them, either by day +or night. Did you ever hear of their attacking a large body of men? +They may strangle a single traveller, who ventures into their +haunts; but no one ever heard of a Burmese army being attacked by +them. Now, every man has to do his duty; and the first who wavers, +his head is to be struck off, at once.</p> +<p>"Forward!"</p> +<p>The troops rushed impetuously across the ruins, penetrated into +the various chambers in the rock and, in a few minutes, all these +were reported to be empty.</p> +<p>"There are chambers higher up," the governor said. "We will +search them, and--look at that door up there, it must lead to +somewhere. Bring stones, and make a stair up to it."</p> +<p>It was evident now that there was no longer any hope of +concealment, and Stanley stepped to the entrance.</p> +<p>"My Lord Governor," he shouted, "there is a strong force here, +and all your army could not gain an entrance. We do not wish to +take the lives of brave men; but if we are attacked we must defend +ourselves, and I pray you to withdraw with them, and not to throw +away life."</p> +<p>This address from an apparent peasant excited the wrath of the +governor, who shouted:</p> +<p>"Shoot him, men!"</p> +<p>But before the order could be obeyed, Stanley had stepped back +into the chamber, where he had already ordered the men to stand out +of the line of the door. A number of muskets were fired, and +several bullets struck the back wall of the chamber. The firing +continued, and Stanley said:</p> +<p>"Keep where you are, men, until they have finished; then +approach the door for, directly they begin the attack, the men +behind must stop firing. They will be some minutes, yet."</p> +<p>He ran quickly up to Harry's room.</p> +<p>"They are attacking us," Harry exclaimed; "oh, how I wish I +could come down and help!"</p> +<p>"They can never get in, Harry. British soldiers might do it, but +not these fellows. They can only enter two abreast and, with a +dozen spear points facing them, what can they do? I thought that I +would just come up and tell you it was all right. It will take them +five minutes, at least, to pile up stones level with the +doorway."</p> +<p>Stanley again joined those below. Meinik, the trooper, and one +of the Burmese were to form the first line; the four other Burmese +were to stand behind, with their spears, between the men in front; +the two guards with their muskets, and the boys were to act as a +reserve. Stanley had armed himself with one of the axes, and was to +stand by the side of the entrance so that, if the spearmen were +pressed back, and any of the assailants succeeded in passing the +entrance, he would strike them down.</p> +<p>Presently, there was a silence outside.</p> +<p>"Keep well back," he said. "They have laid their stones, and we +shall have a rush, directly; but they will most likely pour in a +volley, first."</p> +<p>The pause lasted for a minute or two. Then a drum was beaten, +and a hundred muskets were fired. A rain of bullets flew into the +cave.</p> +<p>"Now," Stanley shouted, "form up."</p> +<a id="PicG" name="PicG"></a> +<center><img src="images/g.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: In vain the Burmese tried to force their way into the chamber." /> +</center> +<p>A wild yell was raised by the Burmese. Now they knew that they +were fighting human foes, their courage returned, and there was a +rush of men up the pile of stones to the entrance; but in vain they +tried to force their way into the chamber. Those in front fell +pierced by the spears and, while the defenders could see their +figures against the light, the assailants, coming out from the +sunshine, could see nothing in the chamber, which was now darkened +by their filling up the entrance. Not once was it necessary for +Stanley to strike. The Burmans' spears did their work thoroughly +and, in two or three minutes, the entrance was nigh choked up with +dead bodies, adding to the difficulty of the assailants.</p> +<p>Pressed on by those behind, the foremost fell over these +obstacles, and were instantly pierced by the spears; until it was +no longer possible to get through the outer entrance, much less +make their way into the chamber. Again and again the attack was +repeated and, as often, repulsed. Before advancing the Burmese, +each time, endeavoured to clear the passage by drawing out the +bodies of their comrades; but the two guards now posted themselves +in front, and shot man after man who made the attempt. At last the +Burmese drew off, but not till some fifty or sixty had been +killed.</p> +<p>The governor was seen gesticulating furiously to a party of +officers and, presently, a final attack was made, led by several +officers of rank. This was as unsuccessful as the others. The +bodies, indeed, of the killed now forming a well-nigh impassable +barrier and, after several of the officers and many of the bravest +men had fallen, the remainder withdrew suddenly. The governor +appeared to recognize that the task was an impossible one; and two +or three hundred men were at once set to work felling trees and, by +nightfall, a high stockade had been erected round the open ground +in front of the temple.</p> +<p>"They are going to try to starve us out," Stanley said. "There +is no more chance of fighting, tonight."</p> +<p>As soon as the stockade was finished, musketeers took their +place behind it and opened a dropping fire at the entrance, while +the woodcutters continued to fell trees.</p> +<p>"We must get rid of these dead bodies, if we can," Stanley said, +"or the place will be uninhabitable, in a day or two.</p> +<p>"Get those two bamboos we had for the litter, Meinik. We will +push the bodies out, one by one, beginning with those on the top of +the heap. We can keep down behind the shelter of the pile, till we +have got most of them out. After that, we must take our chance of a +shot."</p> +<p>It took them some hours' work but, at last, the passage was +cleared, and the bodies all thrown outside. The fire was lighted in +the next room; and Stanley, bidding two men listen attentively for +any movement, went up again to Harry--to whom he had paid a flying +visit, as soon as the Burmese drew off.</p> +<p>"We cannot risk having a light here, Harry," he said. "I don't +want them to have any idea that this chamber, which is nearly fifty +feet above the entrance, is in any way connected with the rooms +below. If such an idea struck them, they might lower men from above +by ropes, and so take us in the rear."</p> +<p>"Did you say that we are regularly shut up, in front, by that +stockade?"</p> +<p>"Yes; there is certainly no getting out, that way. Behind, you +know, it is a sheer wall of rock; and the only possibility, that I +can see, is that we may clear a staircase which runs up through the +rock, from a ledge on the level of this room, to the ruins of a +building above. At present, the upper part is entirely choked up +with blocks of stone and rubbish, and it will be a very awkward job +to get through it; but so far, it seems to me, it is that or +nothing."</p> +<p>"What are they going on chopping down trees for?"</p> +<p>"I believe their general is doing it to bring large numbers of +his troops close up to the stockade; partly perhaps to keep up the +spirits of the front line, by their company; partly to render +impossible any attempt, on our part, to make our way out by a +sudden rush. Of course, they don't know what our strength is; but +they have had so sharp a lesson, today, that they will take every +precaution, in future.</p> +<p>"Well, what is it, Meinik?"</p> +<p>"We have been talking together, master; and we think that, if we +were to call out that they might take the bodies away, without any +interference by us, they would do so. Several officers of rank have +fallen there, and it is our custom always to carry off the dead, +when it is possible."</p> +<p>"It would be worth trying the experiment, anyhow, Meinik. But we +must all stand to arms, while they are doing it; as they might make +a sudden rush. However, we would risk that, for those bodies have +been worrying me very much, and I would give anything to have them +taken away. I will go down with you."</p> +<p>Meinik accordingly went down to the entrance, and shouted +out:</p> +<p>"Peace, peace! I am ordered, by the English officer, to say that +he would wish those who have fought so bravely to be honoured, +after death; and that no shot shall be fired, and no interference +made, with those who come to carry away the dead."</p> +<p>There was silence for two or three minutes, and then a voice +called back:</p> +<p>"It is well; for two hours there shall be peace between us."</p> +<p>"I have no doubt the governor is as glad to do this as we are. +It is considered a disgrace, if the dead are not carried off the +ground to burial; and if he sends despatches to Ava, he will be +glad to be able to put in that the brave men who fell have all been +buried, with due honours. Besides, Meinik, it would not be +encouraging to his troops for them to have that pile of dead bodies +before them and, indeed, would be enough to cause a pestilence, in +a few days."</p> +<p>The men were formed up again, round the entrance. The Burmese +did their work silently. Occasionally a slight movement was heard, +but no one could have imagined that a hundred men were busy +outside. A number of them carried torches, and all worked steadily +and in good order, under the direction of two or three officers. +One of the posts of the stockade had been pulled up and through +this the bodies were carried. It was less than two hours before a +horn sounded, and there was a loud call of:</p> +<p>"The peace is over; all is done."</p> +<p>Beyond the stockade great fires blazed among the trees. The work +of chopping down the forest continued, and by the morning the +ground had been cleared for a distance of thirty or forty yards +from the paling. Then the Burmese raised another stockade forty +feet behind the first, so that, if by carelessness or treachery the +besieged should manage to pass through the first line, there would +yet be another in front of them.</p> +<p>"I expect, master," Meinik said as, standing well back, he +watched the men at work, "the general is building this second line, +not because he thinks that there is a chance of our getting through +the first, but to keep the men at work, so as to prevent them from +thinking anything about the spirits. Now that they have passed one +night there, they will have got somewhat over their fear and, of +course, every day that passes, without ill befalling them, they +will think less and less about the evil ones."</p> +<p>"Do you believe in them, Meinik?"</p> +<p>Meinik hesitated.</p> +<p>"Everyone knows, master, that evil spirits guard the treasures +of the people that lived in the land long, long ago. No one can +doubt that people who have rashly sought the treasures have been +found dead, with staring eyes and swollen bodies; but as, at +present, they must know well that neither we nor those outside are +searching for treasure, they may not interfere."</p> +<p>"Then you think that there are treasures buried here, +somewhere?"</p> +<p>"I cannot say, master; everyone says so. The story has been +handed down that this was once the greatest of the temples of the +old people; and that, when they were defeated by tribes from the +east--I know not whether it was us, or some people before us--the +priests from all the other temples came here. The remains of their +army came here, too, and fought outside the temple until all were +killed.</p> +<p>"When the conquerors entered, they found the priests all lying, +in regular lines, on the pavements. All were dead. One story is +that they had stabbed themselves; another, that they had taken +poison. At any rate, no treasures were found; although it was known +that the riches of the temple were great, and that all the other +priests that had come here had brought the treasures from their +temples with them. That was the beginning of the destruction of the +place; for the pavement was torn up, and the walls in some places +levelled, and the images of the gods broken up in search for the +treasures.</p> +<p>"The work of the guardian spirits had already begun. They say +that all who took part in the search died, of a terrible pestilence +that broke out. Since that time, the place has been accursed. Once +or twice, kings have sent bodies of troops to search; and they say +that some could never find the temple, but wandered about the +forest for days, searching in vain for it. Others found so thick a +darkness, like the blackest of smoke, filling the forest, that even +the bravest dare not enter. I say not that those things were so; I +only say that these are the stories that have come down to us."</p> +<p>"Well, Meinik, we are not going to search for the treasure; and +it is evident that the spirits bear us no ill will; indeed, I feel +obliged to them, for it is likely enough that the soldiers will put +down their misfortune to their influence, and that even the +governor may feel that it would be useless to try to get them to +renew the assault. This evening we will go up, and have another +look at the stairs; and see how we can best set to work to clear +them. There is no great hurry about it, but the sooner we set to +work, the better."</p> +<p>All day long a dropping fire was maintained on the entrance, by +the troops behind the first stockade; but as, with the exception of +three men kept always on watch, the defenders were stationed in the +next chamber, the bullets pattered harmlessly against the wall. +During the night the accumulated dust of ages had been swept up +from the floor; and this had been strewn, three inches deep, in the +passage between the outer air and the chamber, so as to cover the +blood that had been shed there.</p> +<p>As soon as it was quite dark, Stanley, Meinik, and three of the +villagers went out on to the ledge in front of the upper opening, +made their way along it to the entrance of the stairs, and mounted. +They carried with them two or three glowing brands from the fire, +in one of the earthenware cooking pots, which was covered with a +cloth to prevent the slightest glow being noticed by the enemy. The +men, by Stanley's order, brought with them the bamboos of the +litter, the saw they had used at the stockade, a hatchet, and some +blocks of firewood.</p> +<p>When they got to the point where the steps were choked up, they +lighted the two torches--the men who brought up the rear of the +party holding up a rug, to prevent any reflection from the torches +being seen outside. When Stanley and Meinik had again examined the +obstacle, the latter retired; and the Burmans, one by one, came up +and looked at it.</p> +<p>"What do you think of it?" Stanley asked them.</p> +<p>"It would be dangerous to touch it, my lord," one of them said. +"If only one stone moved out from its place, it would be death to +us all. They are firm now, quite firm; but if two or three were +disturbed, the whole might come down at once."</p> +<p>"I quite see that," Stanley said. "Can any of you suggest a plan +by which we could get out, without much risk of setting them in +motion?"</p> +<p>The Burmese were silent,</p> +<p>"I will tell you my scheme then. I propose to cut the bamboos +into lengths that will just reach across the passage. It is the +lower stones that one is most afraid of. So long as these remain +fixed, there is no fear of any general movement but, if they went, +the whole mass might come down. This passage is less than three +feet wide, and the bamboos are twelve feet long; so that each would +make four, the width of the passage. I propose to drive them +tightly in, and fix them firmly with wedges. They must be put in so +that they will actually touch the stones, so as to prevent their +making the slightest downward movement. If they began to slide, no +doubt they would carry away the bamboos; but if these were fixed +firmly, by wedges, they ought to be sufficient to prevent any +movement from taking place--especially as there would be enough of +them almost to touch each other, extending from this lowest step, +on which the rocks rest, some five feet upwards--that is, to within +some two feet of the roof, which would be sufficient for us to +crawl through, and the bamboos would serve as a ladder. Then I +propose that we should work our way along the top, passing the +small stones and rubbish backwards, after filling up all the cracks +and crevices below us.</p> +<p>"I see, of course, that we should meet with many obstacles. +Great stones may be sticking up, perhaps jammed against the roof; +these would have to be broken off, or chipped in pieces. No doubt +the work will take time but, at any rate, there is plenty of food +for three weeks and, working by turns night and day, we ought to be +able to burrow our way out. As we get on, we may not find the +stones so tightly pressed together as they are, here. At any rate, +as we saw the light above us, only some thirty feet up, there ought +not to be above twenty feet of closely-packed stuff to get +through.</p> +<p>"No doubt the work will be dangerous, as well as hard but, as we +know that if we do not succeed all our lives are forfeited, we can +face the danger. Everyone of us will take his share in turn; I +shall do so, myself, and shall direct the work in general. What do +you think of the plan?"</p> +<p>"I think that it is possible, master," Meinik said. "At any +rate, we must try it; since it is the only way that offers us any +chance of life."</p> +<p>The Burmese all agreed, and they at once set to work. The +bamboos were first cut into lengths; and then, by means of the axe +and wedges, were jammed so firmly, from side to side, that it would +have required great force to dislodge them. These supports were +somewhat irregularly placed, as it was necessary that they should +absolutely touch the stones. As they proceeded with the work, the +spaces behind the bamboos were filled tightly up with rubble, so as +to solidify the whole.</p> +<p>When the last support was in its place, Stanley said:</p> +<p>"Now, Meinik, do you with these three work, tonight; four others +will take your place, before dawn. Mind, at first I don't want you +to attempt to move any fixed stones; but simply to clear away all +small stones, and rubble. You can stow a good deal behind the two +upper bamboos. The rest you must put on the stairs. I will see, +tonight, what we can manage in the way of tools for chipping away +the big stones that cannot be moved. You had better relieve each +other very often. The three who are not at work should sit down on +the ledge, outside, so that any stone accidentally dislodged will +not fall on anyone. Every ten minutes, one will come up to take the +place of the man at work. Be sure that each, as he passes up or +down, replaces the blanket carefully."</p> +<p>They had, indeed, before beginning to saw up the bamboos, +fastened the blanket to one of the cross pieces of the stretcher +and, cutting this to the width of the passage, had jammed it close +up to the roof; so that the curtain, hanging down, effectually shut +off the light.</p> +<p>Stanley then descended the steps, and rejoined Harry below. +Before going down further, Stanley, who had during the day informed +Harry of his plan, told him of the start that they had made.</p> +<p>"Of course, it all depends upon what stones you meet with," +Harry said. "If you come to a big solid block, I don't see how you +are going to get through it."</p> +<p>"We have the hatchets, and can whittle it away; and perhaps we +can make some chisels, from the ramrods of your guards' guns. A lot +can be done, with patience and plenty of hands."</p> +<p>Stanley then went down below, and explained to the others the +plan proposed. The news gave them great satisfaction; for although +Meinik had told them there was a staircase above blocked with +stones, it had seemed so impossible, to him, to clear it that he +had placed no stress upon the fact; and the preparations made by +the enemy to cut off any possible retreat had greatly depressed +them.</p> +<p>Stanley took one of the iron ramrods and, raking some of the +embers from the fire, placed it in them, about a foot from one end; +then he directed the others to fan the embers, until they raised +them almost to white heat. Taking the ramrod out, he laid the edge +of one of their knives upon it and, striking its back with a stone, +soon cut through the glowing rod. He repeated the operation and +had, then, three short rods of equal length. He now heated one end +of each and, laying it on an axe on the ground, hammered it into +chisel shape with the back of a light hatchet; repeating this +several times, until it had the required shape and sharpness; then +he plunged this into a pot of water. He did the same with the other +two; and had, now, three chisels with which he hoped to be able to +chip away the stones. The other ramrod he left intact, except that +he sharpened one end.</p> +<p>Then, going up to Harry's room, he lay down and slept for some +hours; putting the two boys on watch, and bidding the trooper look +after them. The two Burmans, with one of the guards, were to go to +work with him. Several times he woke. The last time, on looking +out, he thought that there was a faint light in the sky and, going +down, called up the three men and, bidding them bring up the two +heavy axes, a light hatchet, and the three short chisels, he led +them up the steps to the working party.</p> +<p>"How have you got on, Meinik?"</p> +<p>"We have cleared four feet, master; but there is a big stone +sticking up, now, and we can do nothing with it."</p> +<p>"We will have a try, and do you all go down, at once.</p> +<p>"Take off your cloth, one of you, and fill it with this rubbish +on the steps. Do it as quickly as you can. The day will be +breaking, in a few minutes."</p> +<p>Stanley now climbed up, and investigated the passage. The bottom +was level. Every crack and crevice between the stones being filled +up with rubbish. The obstacle Meinik had spoken of evidently formed +part of a flat slab. It reached within an inch of the roof and, at +one side, touched the rock wall; at the other there was an +interval, of some four or five inches, and the earth and rubbish +had already been scraped out from behind it. Putting his hand in, +he found that the block was some four inches in thickness.</p> +<p>He thought that if he could but get a fair blow at it, with the +back of one of the heavy axes, he might break it off; but this was +impossible. The total width of the passage did not exceed three +feet; and as the men had, as they went, worked down somewhat, there +was now about thirty inches between the bed of earth and rubbish, +on which he was lying, and the roof. Taking the handle of the axe +in both hands, he used the head as a battering ram; but without any +success. He then called up the slightest of the three men, and told +him to crawl in beside him and, with their united strength, they +pounded the stone for some time. Finding that nothing could be done +this way, Stanley sent the man back again; and then, taking one of +the three chisels and a small hatchet, he proceeded to mark a line +along the bottom of the stone; and then, for ten minutes, worked +away on it with the chisel and hammer. Then he called up one of the +others, and showed him what he was to do. All day they worked by +turns and, though progress was very slow, by nightfall the groove +was half an inch deep.</p> +<p>Stanley and the strongest Burman then went in together and, +lying on their backs again, tried the effect of the heavy axe; but +still without success. Then Stanley told the man to get down and +take out the wedge, at the top of the axe; and to cut away the wood +below the head, so that the latter would slip down, four or five +inches; then to take off the head of the other heavy axe and put it +on above it, and replace the wedge. In a few minutes, the man +rejoined him.</p> +<p>"We must strike it as near the roof as we can," Stanley said. +Both grasped the handle firmly. "We will sway it backwards and +forwards three times and, the third time, strike.</p> +<p>"One, two, three--hooray!"</p> +<p>As the two-headed axe, driven with their united force, struck +the stone, there was a sharp crack.</p> +<p>"That has done it," Stanley said, turning over.</p> +<p>There was a dark line along the groove, and the top of the stone +inclined back, two inches from the perpendicular; being kept in its +place by the rubbish behind it. Stanley put his hand into the hole, +and got his fingers behind the stone; while the Burmese put the +chisel into the crack, and used it as a lever. In two or three +minutes the stone was moved out of its position, taken out of the +hole, and laid down on the steps.</p> +<p>Half an hour later Meinik came up, with a trooper, another +guard, and one of the boys; and was delighted to find that the +obstacle, which had seemed to him fatal to their hopes, had been +removed. Stanley showed how they had carried out the work; and +then, with his party, went down into the rock chambers.</p> +<p>"It was pretty tiring work, Harry," he said, "though we were +only at it about a quarter of an hour, at a time. My wrists and +arms and shoulders are aching, as if I had been beaten with sticks. +Tomorrow I will take up a good supply of firewood. The chisels got +blunted before we had worked an hour; and we should get on a deal +faster, if we could sharpen them frequently."</p> +<p>"Is the stone hard?"</p> +<p>"No; it is a sort of marble, I think. We had the underpart of +the slab on our side, and I did not think of looking when we took +it down. Anyhow, it was not very hard and, with a good strong +chisel and a short, heavy hammer, I am sure we could have done it +in an hour.</p> +<p>"Anyhow, it is a comfort that nothing came down on top of us. I +examined the pile carefully, and there had not been the slightest +movement among the lower stones; so that part of the difficulty +seems to have been got over.</p> +<p>"Now, I must go down and get something to eat, and then I will +go in for a good sleep. You are feeling all right, I hope?"</p> +<p>"Could not be doing better, Stanley. I have eaten three solid +meals, today; and have been sitting up on the edge of my bed, for +some time. I tried standing, but it was no go; still, I do think +that, in a day or two, I shall manage it."</p> +<p>For six days the work continued. One party watched, another +slept, and the third worked, by turns. Some of the stones gave much +greater trouble than the first they had met with; but having the +fire close by proved a great assistance, as the chisels could be +frequently sharpened. The men became more accustomed to the work, +and the steady progress they made greatly excited their hopes.</p> +<p>At the end of the week, but one stone barred the way. This, +however, was much the most formidable that they had encountered. It +seemed to have been a pillar, or a huge gate post; and was square, +measuring some twenty inches on each face. The obstacle was all the +more formidable, as the upper end was inclined towards them, +greatly increasing the difficulty in using the chisel. Beyond this, +as far as they could see, there was merely a mass of smaller +stones.</p> +<p>The party who had been working upon this block were much +disheartened, when Stanley went up to relieve them. Owing to the +inclination of the stone, their chisels could get but little bite +and, though they had been working for six hours at it, they had +scarcely made any impression; indeed, at only one point had they so +far broken the face that the chisel would cut. Meinik had come down +two hours before, to report to Stanley the nature of the obstacle +and, when he went up, he took with him the second ramrod, which had +not hitherto been used.</p> +<p>He saw at once that, as Meinik had told him, it would be +impossible to get through this block by the same means as before +for, as the groove deepened, the labour would become greater and +greater and, from the inclination of the stone, they would in time +arrive at a point where the axe could no longer be used to strike +the chisel.</p> +<p>The point at which the slight indentation had been made was +nearly at the corner of the stone. This was gradually enlarged, by +hammering upon it with the head of the axe and, after an hour's +work, the surface had been so far pounded that the chisel could get +a flat hold upon it. Then Stanley and one of the Burmans lay down, +and placed the cutting end of the long ramrod against it; and the +others, by turns, struck the end with the back of a light hatchet, +those holding the rod turning it, slightly, after each blow. Every +half hour the edge of the chisel was resharpened and, by the time +the next party relieved them, a hole of half an inch in diameter, +and two inches deep, had been drilled in the stone. Stanley +remained with the newcomers for half an hour, instructing them in +the work, and then went below.</p> +<p>"Well, Stanley, what are you going to do with this monstrous +stone Meinik tells me of?"</p> +<p>"There is only one thing to do with it, Harry; that is, to blast +it. The block is so inclined that one can do nothing with the +chisels, and we are now drilling a hole. I don't know that I shall +succeed but, at any rate, I am going to have a try. If it fails, I +must hit on some other way. The provisions are holding out all +right; and Meinik calculates that, with a little stinginess, we +could manage for another three weeks. We have drilled the hole in +two inches today and, as we get more accustomed to the work, I dare +say we could do three inches in each shift. The block is twenty +inches through on the straight, and may be two feet on the line +that we follow; so that in four days we shall be nearly through +it.</p> +<p>"In three weeks we shall have made five holes, which will weaken +it so that we may be able to break it off. However, I hope we shall +find one hole sufficient. I shall make it fifteen inches deep, and +then charge it with the contents of a dozen cartridges. I think +that ought to do it."</p> +<p>In two days and a half, the hole was of the required depth. +Harry had progressed so rapidly that he was able, that morning, to +walk across his room.</p> +<p>"We must try the shot, at once," Stanley said, "because if it +fails, we must go on working. If it succeeds we can, if we like, +wait for another week before we make off. By that time you will be +strong enough to be got through that low passage, and walk for a +little distance; when we can cut some poles, and rig up that +hammock again.</p> +<p>"Do you know anything about mining, for I know nothing? I only +had an idea how to drill the hole from seeing some engineers at +work at Agra, years ago; but I am sure I don't know how they fired +the shot, or prepared it."</p> +<p>"I can tell you a little about it, Stanley; for I have been down +a coal mine once or twice, and watched the men doing it. They first +of all put in the charge; then they put in a wooden rod, just the +thickness of the fuse they use; then they dropped in a little dry +dust round it, which they pressed down very carefully, with a small +wooden rod; then they damped some dust, and hammered that down +hard. After putting in about half an inch of this, they used dust +slightly moistened, beating it down as before. When it was quite +full, they pulled out the centre stick, and put the fuse into the +hole that it left."</p> +<p>"We have not got any fuse," Stanley said, "but I think that if +we take a narrow strip of cloth, moisten it, and rub gunpowder into +it; let it dry, and then roll it up, it would be all right. Then we +could lay a train of damp powder to it, set the end alight, and +bolt."</p> +<p>"I should think that that would do," Harry agreed, "but you +would have to bolt very sharp for, if it went off before you got to +the bottom of the steps, it might be very awkward."</p> +<p>"I don't think the effect of the shock will be as great as that, +Harry. It may crack the stone, but I should hardly think it would +send anything flying out of the hole."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch16" id="Ch16">Chapter 16</a>: Rejoining.</h2> +<p>Every day, since the siege had begun, the defenders had fired an +occasional shot at the stockade; not with any idea of doing any +damage, but in order that the assailants should know that they were +still in the cavern. That evening, when the hole had got to the +proper depth, Stanley, having prepared his fuse, went up with +twenty cartridges in his pocket, accompanied by Meinik. The hole +was charged and tamped, and the fuse inserted. This took a +considerable time. The fuse had been cut so that an inch of it +projected outside the hole. The other eight cartridges were then +broken up, and the powder moistened; and a train some two feet long +laid, from the fuse towards the entrance of the hole. Then a piece +of rag was wrapped round one end of the ramrod; and this, again, +was tied to a long rod that had, the night before, been cut by one +of the boys, who had slipped out noiselessly from the entrance. The +rag had been moistened, and rubbed with gunpowder.</p> +<p>"Now, Meinik," Stanley said, "everything is ready. This rod is +sixteen feet long, so that, lying down, my feet will be just at the +edge of the hole; and I shall be able to drop down, as soon as I +have lighted the train, and bolt. I shall fix a torch, a foot or so +from the train; then I shall only have to lift the rod to it, light +the rag, set fire to the train, and then slide down and bolt.</p> +<p>"Now, you must go down first."</p> +<p>"No, master," Meinik said firmly; "I will light the train. I do +not think that there is any danger but, whether there is or not, I +shall undertake it. If I am killed, it does not matter; while if +you were killed all would be lost for, if the explosion did not +burst the stone, I am sure that we should never be able to get +through it, without you to direct us. No, master, if you stay, I +stay; and that would only lessen our chances of running down the +steps in time."</p> +<p>Stanley argued, and even ordered, but Meinik was obstinate and, +seeing that the faithful Burman was not to be moved, he reluctantly +left the matter in his hands, and went downstairs. He moved a short +distance along the ledge, and waited. The time seemed an age to +him, so that he gave an exclamation of delight when Meinik suddenly +came into sight, and took his place beside him.</p> +<p>"I have lit the train, master. The powder fizzed up, but did not +seem to burn very fast."</p> +<p>It was, indeed, another two minutes before a deep muffled roar +was heard. There was no further noise, but they heard shouts from +the Burmans, behind the stockades.</p> +<p>"They will be wondering what the sound is," Stanley said, "but +they will not be able to tell from what direction it came; for I +expect they were pretty nearly all sound asleep. Now, let us go up +and see the result."</p> +<p>They made their way up the steps, which were now in entire +darkness. The curtain still hung in its place, some ten feet below +the obstacle. They lit a torch, from the embers in the pan; and +then Stanley climbed up into the passage, and hastily crawled +along.</p> +<p>He gave a cry of satisfaction, as he approached the end. The +explosion had been completely successful--the end of the block lay +on the ground. Whether the whole of it had been blown off, or not, +he could not see; but he felt sure that the greater portion must +have split off. It was evident that it would take a considerable +amount of time, and would require the strength of several men, to +get the block out. They therefore descended, at once, to gladden +the hearts of those below; with the news that the way out was now +available to them, whenever they chose to leave.</p> +<p>Harry manifested no surprise, whatever, at the news.</p> +<p>"I made sure that you would succeed, Stanley. After getting me +off, as you did; and making your own escape, before, it seems to me +that you have got hold of the 'open sesame' of Ali Baba, and have +only to use the cabalistic words to walk in and out, wherever you +want to go."</p> +<p>"I don't feel, by any means, so certain of my own powers as you +seem to be, Harry; and I can assure you I was very doubtful whether +that shot would succeed. I hoped, at any rate, that it would blow a +good bit of the stone out and, in that case, we could have got the +chisels to work again. It was the slanting position of the block +that beat us. However, thank goodness, the work is done now; and +you have only to get a bit stronger, and we will be off."</p> +<p>"I am quite ready to start now, Stanley. I think it is absurd +waiting any longer, for there is never any saying what might take +place. That Burmese general, who seems to be an obstinate beggar, +might take it into his head to place a guard on the top of the +hill; and then all your labour will have been thrown away."</p> +<p>"That is true enough, Harry; and as I really don't think that +travelling now would be likely to do you any serious harm, I will +decide on tomorrow. At any rate, I will take some men up, at once, +and get that stone out."</p> +<p>The task was a difficult one. The block of stone was so nearly +the size of the passage that they could not get a rope round behind +it and, after trying for two hours, in vain, they determined that +the only course was to push it before them. They soon found, +however, that this was impossible; and that a part, at least, of +the stone was remaining in its place. Finally, they succeeded in +pushing a loop in the rope over the top of the block; and then, by +main force, eight of them pulled it out of the hole, and lowered it +on to the top step.</p> +<p>By the time that they had done this, dawn was approaching; and +they therefore returned, at once, to the chambers below.</p> +<p>The men were all much pleased, when Stanley told them that they +would leave that night. Confident as they felt that the Burmese +could not force their way in, a new feeling of nervousness seized +them, now that the way was open, lest some unforeseen circumstances +might occur to prevent their going. The rice that remained was made +up into three or four packages. The meat had long before been +finished.</p> +<p>Stanley had a discussion, with Meinik, as to how Harry had best +be taken through the passage. He could, they agreed, walk along the +ledge, with one before and one behind to steady him; and could then +be carried up the steps, in a blanket, by four men. He must, of +course, be lifted into the passage, and dragged through it to the +end; after that, it would be easy enough. Six men could carry him, +in a blanket, until far enough away for them to chop poles, without +the sound of the axes being heard by the Burmese.</p> +<p>From the time they began their work, every pains had been taken +to deaden sounds. The blanket hung across the passage had acted as +a muffler, to some extent; but a piece of cloth had always been +tied over the hammer heads of the axes, to prevent the sharp +clinking sounds of the blows on the chisels, or stone, being +heard.</p> +<p>As soon as it was dark enough for them to pass along the ledge, +Meinik went with Stanley to examine the ground. Fortunately, the +portion of stone that remained above the level, and prevented the +rock from being rolled back, was but small; and they were able to +break it up in half an hour, with the axes. Then, making their way +along without difficulty for another four feet, they found +themselves standing upright in the depression in the centre of the +ruin. Mounting six more steps, they were among the bushes that +covered the site of the temple.</p> +<p>They now carefully cleared away every fragment of stone from the +floor of the passage and, returning, Stanley gave orders for the +start to be made. Two or three shots were fired, from the lower +entrance, to show the enemy that they were there and on the watch; +and then all went up to Harry's room. He had been dressed, for the +first time, and was ready for the start. Two of the strongest of +the Burmans went on first.</p> +<p>"Now, Harry, you are to put your hands on my shoulders. Meinik +will follow close behind you, and will keep his arms round you, in +case you need help. Of course, we shall go along very slowly."</p> +<p>"I don't think that all these precautions are necessary," Harry +said. "I am sure that I can walk that distance, easily enough. Why, +you say the stair is only about forty feet."</p> +<p>"I dare say you could, Harry; but we don't want to run any +risks. Your head is not very strong, at present; and you might turn +giddy, or you might stumble. So, at present, you will have just to +do as you are told.</p> +<p>"Let us start."</p> +<p>Harry did not find it as easy as he had expected, getting out +through the lower opening; and he was by no means sorry to have the +support of Stanley and Meinik, as he proceeded along the ledge. +They moved very carefully, and slowly; and all were greatly +relieved when he sat down, on a blanket laid on the steps.</p> +<p>"Now lie back, Harry. We shall have no difficulty in getting you +up here."</p> +<p>Two Burmans took the upper end of the blanket, Stanley and +Meinik the lower, and they were soon at the top of the steps.</p> +<p>"You are not very heavy now, Harry; but you are a good deal +heavier than you were, when we brought you in below.</p> +<p>"Now, the next is the most difficult part of the work--once we +get you through this passage, it will be plain sailing. You see, +you will have to be dragged. The place is only two feet high, so +that it would be impossible to lift you at all. We have made the +floor as smooth as we can, but I am afraid that there are a good +many projecting corners, that will try you a good deal."</p> +<p>"It cannot be helped, Stanley. Fire away, as soon as you +like."</p> +<p>The rest of the party were now all gathered, on the steps below; +and Meinik and Stanley, getting up first into the hole, received +Harry as the others lifted him and, with the aid of two of the +Burmans, laid him on his blanket in the passage.</p> +<p>"Now," Stanley said, to the two men who took the other end of +the blanket, "keep it as tight as you can and, when I say 'lift,' +we will all lift together, and move him forward a few inches. Do +not hurry over it--we have plenty of time before us."</p> +<p>They were packed so closely that they had each but one arm +available. Little by little they moved him along, gaining some six +inches, each time; then all had to move, so as to place themselves +for the next effort. However, in five or six minutes they had him +through, and carried him up into the open air. The rest of the +party at once joined them and, with three of the natives on each +side of the blanket, they were soon beyond the circle of ruins, and +making at a brisk pace through the forest. After going for a +quarter of a mile they stopped, cut some poles for the hammock and, +in a short time, were on their way again; having placed in it one +of the bags of rice, as a pillow for Harry.</p> +<p>They travelled for some hours, and then halted to cook some +rice. All had slept a good deal during the day so that, after +resting for an hour, they proceeded on their way again. They had no +fear, whatever, of pursuit; and the only danger that they could +incur was from meeting with a band, similar to that which had +carried Harry off. When they rigged up the hammock, they had cut +wood for torches, to protect themselves from tigers. These were +thrown away, as soon as daylight broke.</p> +<p>At midday they halted again, for another hour; and then, +continuing their journey, arrived at the village before nightfall. +They were received with great joy, the villagers setting up a shout +of welcome--the friends of the men and boys being especially +exuberant in their joy, for they had become extremely anxious at +their long absence. The two troopers were still there; and these +saluted Stanley, with less than the usual stiff formality of the +Mohammedan soldier.</p> +<p>He himself laughed.</p> +<p>"I don't look much like a British officer, at present," he said, +in their language. "Well, has everything been quiet here?"</p> +<p>"Yes, sahib. A sowar brought us orders, from the general, to +remain here; and to send at once, if we heard any news of you. We +sent off one of the villagers, when the man came back to fetch the +others, and said that you had good hopes of getting Lieutenant +Brooke sahib out of the hands of the Burmese."</p> +<p>"I will write a note," Stanley said. "Get your horse saddled, at +once. Directly we have made Mr. Brooke comfortable, I will give you +the letter."</p> +<p>During the time that Stanley had been absent, the houses had +been re-erected, and the village had assumed its general +appearance. A hut was at once handed over to them, and Harry laid +on a bamboo pallet. He had not slept, most of the way down.</p> +<p>"You see I was quite right, Stanley. I told you that the journey +would be nothing."</p> +<p>"Fortunately, it has turned out so. Meinik has already killed a +chicken, and will make it into broth for you. It will be a change, +for you, after your diet of rice. The cooking was excellent, for +the first three or four days; but it fell off sadly. That was one +of the reasons why I gave way to your wish to start at once. You +have done wonderfully well, but a constant diet of rice is not +quite the thing for building up a sick man.</p> +<p>"Now, I am going to write a few lines to the general to say that +you have got safely down, but will need at least another week +before you are able to sit on a horse. Of course, you can be +carried on; but I think that the air here is a great deal more +healthy, and bracing, than it is at Prome and, the longer you stay +here, the better."</p> +<p>Stanley's note was a short one. It merely said that he had +succeeded in getting his cousin, and the trooper who was carried +off at the same time, from the hands of the Burmese, but that Harry +was still very weak; and that, if he himself could be spared, he +would stay with him at the village for another week or ten days, at +the end of which time he would ride, by easy stages, to Prome.</p> +<p>Three days later, the trooper returned with a note from the +general.</p> +<p>"I congratulate you most heartily on having rescued your +cousin," he wrote. "By all means, stay where you are until he is +quite strong again. This place is not at all healthy, at present. +We shall not be moving forward for another three weeks."</p> +<p>Stanley remained at the village for another fortnight and, at +the end of that time, Harry had so far recovered that he was quite +capable of making a short day's journey on horseback. Two of the +men who had aided in the rescue had gone to Prome, with an order +from Stanley on the staff paymaster, for the rewards that had been +promised to the villagers and the two Burmese soldiers. They +returned with the money, and the men were all highly delighted at +the result of the expedition.</p> +<p>Stanley retained the services of the two soldiers, as long as he +remained in the village. He had no fear, whatever, of the same band +returning that had, before, visited the village; and he learned +that no others had been heard of in the neighbourhood but, at the +same time, he thought it as well that a man should be on guard, +night and day, at each end of the village. The peasants agreed to +watch at one end, while the two Burmese soldiers and the troopers +took charge of the other end. The bulk of the villagers were +engaged in forming a strong stockade round, it to defend themselves +in case of further attack; and Stanley promised to send them down +twenty muskets, and a supply of ammunition, as soon as he got to +Prome.</p> +<p>There was real regret, on the part of the Burmese, when the time +came for the party to start. It had been something altogether new +to them to have officials among them who paid for everything. These +Englishmen had treated them kindly, and were pleased and contented +with everything. The money that the five men and two boys had +earned had enriched the village, and had enabled them to more than +replace their losses by the recent raid and, if Stanley had +accepted all the presents of fruit, fowls, and eggs they would have +given him, he would have needed a couple of extra horses to convey +them. A strong pony had been purchased for Meinik and, after taking +a hearty leave of the villagers, the party rode off.</p> +<p>"I wish we had such a good cook as your man is, Stanley," Harry +said, as they journeyed along at a walk. "I never tasted better +soup than he serves up. I must really get him to teach our mess +cook how to make it."</p> +<p>"Do you know what it is, Harry?"</p> +<p>"I have not the least idea; it might be anything. I think that +it tasted, to me, more like stewed eels than anything else."</p> +<p>"You are not very far out. It is made of the creatures you +turned up your nose at--snakes."</p> +<p>"Nonsense, Stanley!"</p> +<p>"It is, I can assure you. I would not tell you before, because +it might have set you against it. That soup you had in the cave was +made from snake flesh. The recesses in parts of the caves swarmed +with them, and the men laid in quite a store of them, before we +were besieged. Unfortunately they would not keep well, even in +these cool chambers, so we had to fall back on rice. You liked it +so much that, though there was no occasion to have gone on with +snake soup, after we got to the village, I continued to give it to +you; for it is very nourishing."</p> +<p>"Well, I am glad you did not tell me, at the time; but I must +own that it was excellent, and I think that, in future, I shall +have no objection to snake in that form."</p> +<p>"They are just as good, in other ways," Stanley replied. "The +Burmans are no fools, and I consider that snake and lizards are +very much better eating than their mutton; which is tasteless +stuff, at the best."</p> +<p>"We shall have to have a big settlement, when we get back, +Stanley. Of course, all those men you paid, and the guards you +bribed, are entirely my account; to say nothing of my share of the +general expenditure."</p> +<p>"The general expenses are practically nothing, Harry. I invited +you to come with me and, of course, you were my guest. As to the +other matter, that also is my business. I would not say so, if I +had not plenty of funds, but what with my pay as interpreter, and +the year of back pay that I got when the Gazette came out, I have +plenty out of my income to pay for it, without breaking in upon the +amount I told you I had got for those rubies."</p> +<p>"I should pay you, Stanley, if you were rolling in money. Not +that I should mind taking money from you, if I wanted it, but my +expenses since I landed here have not been anything approaching my +pay and allowances; and I have besides, as I told you, an income of +500 pounds a year of my own. You have risked your life for me, and +I am not going to let you pay the piper, as well."</p> +<p>"All right, if it pleases you, Harry. I am delighted at having +been able to save you and, just at present, money does not seem an +important matter one way or the other; so if it really would be a +satisfaction to you to pay, I will certainly not deprive you of +it."</p> +<p>Although they only travelled ten miles the first day, Harry +acknowledged that he was as tired as a dog when he dismounted; and +was so stiff, the next morning, that he had to be helped on to his +horse. However, this gradually wore off and, on the evening of the +fourth day, they arrived at Prome. Leaving Harry at his regimental +camp, Stanley rode to the headquarters, and there dismounted. +Meinik had led the second horse, after Harry dismounted; and now +took them both across to the lines, with the air of a man who has +only been away a few hours. Stanley at once went up to the +general.</p> +<p>"Welcome back, lad!" Sir Archibald said. "You have been longer +away than we expected, when you started. I am glad, indeed, that +you succeeded in rescuing your cousin; and we are all burning to +hear about it. I wrote that note to you in a hurry, for I was on +the point of going on a round of inspection of the camp, when your +sowar arrived. I intended to question him concerning you, on my +return; for I had no idea that, after making such a long journey, +he would start back at once, but I found that he had ridden +straight off, directly the note was handed to him. You must dine +with me, today, and tell me all the story. I see, from the colour +of your skin, that you have been in disguise again."</p> +<p>"Yes, sir. There were materials for dyeing the skin in the +village, but nothing that availed to take it off. It is gradually +going and, as I shall be now able to get some strong alkali, from +the doctor, I hope I shall be presentable by tomorrow."</p> +<p>"They are honourable marks," the general said, with a smile. "I +don't think any of us would mind being so coloured, for a bit, if +we had done such good work as you have; but I won't detain you now, +for dinner will be ready in half an hour."</p> +<p>Stanley hurried to his room, took a bath, donned his mess +uniform, and was ready by the time the bugle sounded. Three or four +of the staff were, as usual, members of the party. After the meal +was over, he was requested to narrate his adventures, at full +length. The story was necessarily a long one and, when he +concluded, all joined the general in hearty commendation for the +manner in which he had carried out the adventure.</p> +<p>"Your last story was a stirring one, Mr. Brooke," the general +said; "but this is even more so. When I received your first note, I +thought it next door to madness for you to try to get your cousin, +badly wounded as you knew him to be, from the hands of the Burmese. +It is not an easy thing to get any man out of prison but, when the +man was unable to help himself, it seemed well-nigh impossible; and +I was greatly afraid that, instead of saving his life, you would +lose your own. Of course, the fact that you had successfully +traversed the country before was strongly in your favour; but then +you were unencumbered, and the two things were, therefore, not to +be compared with each other. I shall, of course, put you in orders +tomorrow as having performed a singularly gallant action, in +rescuing Lieutenant Brooke of the 47th and a sowar from their +captivity, by the Burmese, in a prison at Toungoo.</p> +<p>"You have arrived just in time for, after endeavouring to fool +us for the past three months, by negotiations never meant to come +to anything, the enemy are now advancing in great force, and are +within a few miles of the town. So we are likely to have hot work +of it for from all accounts, they have got nearly as large an army +together as Bandoola had. I don't know whether they have learned +anything from his misfortunes, but I am bound to say that the court +does not seem to have taken the lesson, in the slightest degree, to +heart; and their arrogance is just as insufferable as it was before +a shot was fired."</p> +<p>Stanley learnt that there had already been one fight. The enemy +were advancing in three columns. Their right--consisting of 15,000 +men, commanded by Sudda Woon--had crossed the Irrawaddy, and was +marching down the other bank; with the apparent object of +recrossing, below Prome, and cutting the British line of +communication. The centre--from 25,000 to 30,000 strong, commanded +by the Kee Wongee--was coming down the left bank of the river, +accompanied by a great fleet of war boats. The left +division--15,000 strong, led by an old and experienced general, +Maha Nemiow--was moving parallel with the others, about ten miles +distant from the centre, but separated from it by a thick and +impenetrable forest. A reserve of 10,000 men, commanded by the +king's half-brother, occupied a strongly fortified post at Melloon. +In addition to these, a large force was gathered near Pegu, and +threatened an attack upon Rangoon.</p> +<p>On the 10th of November, a fortnight before Stanley's return, +two brigades of native infantry--under Colonel M'Dowall--had +marched out to dislodge Maha Nemiow; whose division threatened to +turn the British right, and to move round to its rear. The force +was divided into three columns; one moving directly towards the +enemy's position, the others--marching by circuitous routes, so +arranged as to arrive at the point of attack at the same time--were +to attack in flank and rear, while the main body assailed the enemy +in front. The Burmese had, however, obtained information from spies +of the intended movement and, advancing boldly, met the British +columns half way; skirmishing with them hotly in the woods, and +threatening an attack by large bodies of horse.</p> +<p>The centre drove the Burmese before them, and reached their +stockaded position. Colonel M'Dowall, while reconnoitring it, was +killed by a ball from a musket and, as the two flanking columns did +not arrive as expected, the force was compelled to fall back. The +retreat was conducted in good order, but the loss was heavy, as the +Burmese pressed hotly upon them for several miles.</p> +<p>Since this unfortunate affair, the enemy had steadily advanced. +Maha Nemiow had moved directly upon Prome; advancing slowly, and +constantly stockading himself. The centre had also advanced; and +was now fortifying some heights above the river five miles away, +within sight of Prome. Sudda Woon was intrenching himself on the +opposite bank. All these divisions were working, day and night; +advancing steadily but slowly, and erecting formidable lines of +intrenchments as they went; and it seemed to be the intention of +the Burmese general to proceed in that manner, until the whole of +his troops were gathered within a very short distance of the town, +and then to rush upon it from all sides.</p> +<p>In the morning, Stanley went to the lines of the 47th. Harry +had, of course, told his story on his arrival; and the tale had +circulated generally through the regiment and, as he rode in, the +men ran out from their huts and cheered him heartily. No less warm +a greeting did he receive from the officers, in spite of his +protest that there had really been no great difficulty or danger in +the affair.</p> +<p>"What I specially admire," one of the officers said, laughing, +"is that any man should have run all this risk, on purpose, to +prevent himself from coming into an earldom. You had only to leave +the matter alone, and there you were--heir to title and +estates."</p> +<p>"I should have been haunted by Harry's ghost," Stanley laughed. +"It would have been as bad as Banquo and Macbeth; he would have sat +at my table, and stood at the head of my bed. No, no; that would +have been a much more serious affair, to face, than a party of +Burmese. The title and estates would have been too dear, at the +price."</p> +<p>"Well, you behaved like a brick, anyhow," the colonel said, "and +there is not a man in the regiment who would not have been proud, +indeed, if he had accomplished such a feat. Half my subalterns were +talking, at dinner last night, of learning the language so that, if +the chance fell in their way, they might emulate your doings."</p> +<p>"It is rather a tough language to master," Stanley replied. "It +gave me more trouble than the four or five Indian languages I +speak. I am afraid the campaign will be over, a long time, before +any of your officers learn to talk Burmese well enough to pass as +natives."</p> +<p>After the failure of the expedition of the 10th, no further +effort had been made against the enemy. Indeed, the troops had been +withdrawn from their outlying positions; and there had even been a +feint made of embarking stores, as if with the intention of +retiring down the river, in hopes of tempting the Burmese to make +an attack.</p> +<p>The season had now come when operations could again be carried +on, and the general was anxious to strike a decisive blow at the +enemy, and then to set forward on the march towards Ava. As to the +result of the fight, no one entertained the slightest doubt; +although the disparity in numbers was very great for, while the +Burmese commander had nearly 70,000 men at his disposal, Sir +Archibald Campbell had no more than 6,000, of whom about one half +were British.</p> +<p>It was determined that the main attack should be made on the +division of Maha Nemiow. This was now some six or seven miles away +and, beyond the fact that it was very strongly intrenched in the +jungle, no information whatever could be gained; for the most +vigilant watch was kept up by them, and all efforts to pass native +spies into their lines failed. But it was known that among his +division were 8,000 Shans, from Upper Burma and, as these men had +not hitherto come in contact with us, it was expected that they +would fight with more courage and resolution than those who had +become acquainted with our power.</p> +<p>A large number of princes and nobles were with the force; and +great reliance was placed, by the Burmese, upon three young ladies +of high rank; who were believed by them to be endowed with +supernatural gifts, and to have the power of rendering the missiles +of the English innocuous. These young women, dressed in warlike +costume, constantly rode among the troops; animating them by their +presence, and exhorting them to deeds of courage. The English had +received vague rumours of the doings of these Burmese Joans of Arc, +and thought it probable that the enemy would fight better than +usual.</p> +<p>On November 30th, arrangements were made for attacking the enemy +on the following morning. The flotilla were to open a furious +cannonade upon their works, on both sides of the river. A body of +native infantry were to drive in the advance posts of the centre; +while the main force was to attack their left in two columns, one +moving directly against it, while the other was to attack on the +right flank--thus preventing the enemy from retreating in the +direction of the centre. Four regiments of native infantry were +left in Prome.</p> +<p>General Cotton commanded the main attack and, soon after the +column moved out from the camp, a tremendous cannonade showed that +the flotilla was engaged with the Burmese, on both sides of the +river. The column, which was composed of the 41st and 89th +Regiments, with two battalions of native infantry, proceeded some +distance before becoming engaged with the enemy's outposts; as the +Burmese had been deceived by the cannonade, and believed that the +attack was entirely upon the centre. The troops therefore reached +their main position, around two native villages, without serious +opposition.</p> +<a id="PicH" name="PicH"></a> +<center><img src="images/h.jpg" alt= +"Illustration: The old Burmese general was carried from point to point in a litter." /> +</center> +<p>As they issued from the jungle into the cleared space in front +of the stockade they rapidly formed up, under a tremendous fire, +and rushed forward to the attack. The old Burmese general--who was +too infirm to walk--could be seen, carried from point to point in a +litter, cheering on his men, while the three Amazons exposed +themselves fearlessly to the fire. The ladder parties, however, +rushed forward unchecked and, in spite of the opposition of the +enemy, scaled the stockade at one point, and won a footing on the +rampart of earth behind it. Others pressed after them and, soon, a +destructive fire was opened upon the crowded mass, pent up between +the outer stockade and the next. The Burmese method of forming +stockade behind stockade was useful, against a foe of no greater +dash and energy than themselves; but was absolutely fatal when +opposed to English troops, who gave them no time to fall back +through the narrow openings in the palings. These were soon blocked +by the dying and dead.</p> +<p>Some of the Shans, led by their chiefs, fought with desperate +courage; but were unable to stand the advance of the British, whose +steady volleys, poured in at distances of a few yards, swept them +away. Wounded horses, rushing wildly about in the throng, added to +the terrible confusion. Groups of men endeavoured to cut a way +through the stockades behind, others strove to climb over. Maha +Nemiow was killed, while bravely exhorting his men to stand their +ground, and one of the heroic Amazons was shot. As soon as the +troops reached the spot where she fell, and saw that she was a +woman, she was carried into a cottage; and there died, a few hours +afterwards. Stockade after stockade was carried, until the whole +position fell into our hands.</p> +<p>In the meantime the other column, commanded by General Campbell +himself, and consisting of the 13th, 38th, 47th, and 87th +Regiments, and the 38th Madras Infantry, had moved down on the +other side of the Nawine river; and taken up a position to command +the ford there, by which the fugitives from the stockade must +cross, on their way to join the centre. As the crowd of frightened +men issued from the jungle, and poured across the ford, the +artillery opened upon them with shrapnel, and completed their +discomfiture. All thought of joining the centre was abandoned and, +re-entering the jungle, they scattered; and the greater portion of +them started for their homes, intent only on avoiding another +contest with their foes. Another of the Burmese heroines was +killed, at the ford.</p> +<p>Three hundred men had been killed, at the storming of the +stockade; but a far greater loss took place in the retreat--very +few of the Shans ever regaining their country; the greater portion +perishing from starvation, in the great forests through which they +travelled in order to escape the Burmese authorities, who would +have forced them to rejoin the army.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch17" id="Ch17">Chapter 17</a>: The Pride Of Burma +Humbled.</h2> +<p>As soon as the victory was completed, the troops piled arms; and +were allowed two hours' rest. Then they marched back, to the point +where General Campbell's division had forded the Nawine river in +the morning. From this point, a path led towards the enemy's +centre; this it was determined to attack, at daybreak on the +following morning, before the news of the defeat of its left could +reach it.</p> +<p>The day had been a long and fatiguing one, and it was late +before the troops all reached their halting place. A meal was +served out, and then all lay down to rest. A messenger was sent to +Prome, to announce the success that had been gained; and to request +the commander of the flotilla to open fire, in the morning, as soon +as the foe was seen to issue from the jungle in front of the +Wongee's main position at Napadee.</p> +<p>Long before daylight, the troops were in motion. General +Campbell's division led the way, along the narrow track leading +towards the river; while General Cotton, who followed, was ordered +to break off at any path which led towards the Burmese division, to +make his way through the forest, and to attack the stockades +directly he reached them. The main division would attack, as soon +as they heard his guns.</p> +<p>After a two hours' march, the first division came out on open +ground by the river side, signalled their arrival to the flotilla, +and formed up in front of the stockaded heights of Napadee. The +position was an extremely strong one. The enemy occupied three +ranges of hills, rising one behind the other, and each commanding +the one in front of it. One flank of these hills was protected by +the river, the other by the almost impenetrable forest. The hills +were all covered with stockades and, as they moved forward, the +troops were exposed to so heavy a fire from an enemy entrenched at +the edge of the jungle on the right that, before they could advance +further, it was necessary to first drive them from this position. +Six companies of the 87th were sent back into the forest and, +making their way through this, came down in the rear of the +stockades, speedily cleared them of their defenders, and compelled +the advance force of the enemy to join their main body.</p> +<p>The troops then moved forward to the foot of the first hill, +where two strong redoubts had been erected by the enemy. The fleet +opened fire; but the column was halted, for a time, awaiting the +sound of firing that should tell them General Cotton's column was +engaged. No sound, however, was heard, for this force had been +unable to make its way through the dense forest; and General +Campbell, at last, gave the order for the attack.</p> +<p>It was commenced by the 47th and 38th Native Infantry, under +Colonel Elvington; who pushed through the jungle and forest, until +they reached some of the flanking outworks on the hill. These they +attacked with such dash and determination that they speedily +obtained possession of them, and thus produced a favourable +diversion for the main attack.</p> +<p>This, consisting of the 13th, 38th, and 87th Regiments, advanced +steadily, without returning a shot to the incessant fire from the +enemy's various entrenchments; captured the two redoubts at the +bottom of the hill; and then pressed upwards, carrying position +after position at the point of the bayonet, till they arrived at +the summit of the first hill.</p> +<p>The Burmese fugitives, as they fled to the next line of defence, +shook the courage of the troops there; and the British, pushing +forward hotly on the rear of the flying crowd, carried work after +work until, in the course of an hour, the whole position, nearly +three miles in extent, was entirely in their possession. Between +forty and fifty guns were captured, and the enemy's loss in killed +and wounded was very great while, by desertion alone, the Wongee +lost a third of his army. While the attack had been going on, the +flotilla had passed the works protecting the river face of the +hills, and had captured all the boats and stores, filled with +supplies for the use of the Burmese army.</p> +<p>Thus, two of the three Burmese divisions had now been completely +routed; and there remained only that of Sudda Woon, on the other +side of the river. The troops were allowed two days' rest and, on +the morning of the 5th, a force advanced on board the flotilla. +Their passage across the river was covered by the fire of a rocket +brigade and a mortar battery--which had on the previous night been +established on an island--and they landed at some distance above +the enemy's stockades. They then marched round and attacked these +in flank and rear, while the batteries and boats of the flotilla +cannonaded them in front.</p> +<p>The enemy's troops were already disheartened, by the defeat they +had seen inflicted upon the Wongee's army and, after a feeble +resistance, fled to a second line of stockades in the jungle to +their rear. The troops, however, pressed so hotly upon them that +they were unable to make any effectual opposition here. Numbers +fell, while endeavouring to pass through the narrow entrances of +the work; and the rest fled, in terror, into the woods.</p> +<p>These extensive operations had been carried out with the loss of +six officers, and some seventy or eighty men, only.</p> +<p>It was known that the enemy had very strongly fortified several +positions, in and around Meaday; and it was determined to push +forward, at once, on the long march of three hundred miles to Ava, +before the enemy could rally from their defeat, and gather for the +defence of these positions. On the 9th the first division, under +General Campbell himself, started from Prome. The roads were +extremely bad, and they were able to move but slowly.</p> +<p>Their course was first directed inland; as it was intended to +turn the enemy's position at Meaday, by following a road several +miles from the river, and thus forcing them to fall back as we +advanced. On the next day the force reached the spot where Colonel +M'Dowall had been killed, in the unsuccessful attack upon Maha +Nemiow; and it then turned north, and followed the road parallel to +the river.</p> +<p>On the 12th tremendous rains, for some hours, converted the road +into a morass and, although the march was but five miles long, the +greater portion of the column failed to reach its destination. +This, however, was not the worst. Cholera broke out at once, and +carried off a large number of victims--two of the British regiments +being rendered almost unfit for service by its ravages.</p> +<p>On the 14th the division encamped on dry ground, on a ridge of +wooded hills, and waited for a couple of days to allow the baggage +train to come up. The change greatly benefited the health of the +troops, and amusement was afforded by the partridges, jungle fowl, +and deer which abounded in the neighbourhood of the camp.</p> +<p>Up to this point, no single native had been seen. The villages +were all destroyed, and the country was completely deserted. On the +16th a strong Burmese fortification was taken, it being unoccupied +save by a small picket, which retired on our advance. This had +evidently been erected for the purpose of preventing the river +fortifications from being turned, and its abandonment proved that +the object of the land march had been gained; and that the enemy +had abandoned the positions they had, with so much care, prepared +for the defence of the river.</p> +<p>On the 18th they joined General Cotton's column and, the next +day, entered Meaday. Here a terrible spectacle was met with. The +town and the ground within the stockades was strewn with dead and +dying; some from wounds, others from cholera--for the ravages of +this plague had been as great, among the Burmese, as in the British +force. A number of men were found crucified on gibbets, doubtless +as a punishment for attempting to desert. The air was pestilent; +and the force was glad, indeed, to march on the next morning from +the locality.</p> +<p>They gained something, but not much, from the change. For the +next fifty miles, dead bodies were met with at very short intervals +and, each day before camping, many corpses had to be removed before +the tents could be fixed.</p> +<p>It was now known that the Burmese army, in its retreat, had been +concentrated at Melloon, where the reserve of 10,000 men had been +posted. On the 27th, the division encamped within four miles of +that town. They had now marched a hundred and forty miles, from +Prome, without meeting a single inhabitant of the country, or being +enabled to obtain any cattle, whatever, for the supply of the +troops, so effectually had the enemy wasted the country as they +retired.</p> +<p>Melloon stood on the opposite bank of the Irrawaddy; and letters +had arrived from that town saying that a commissioner had arrived, +from Ava, with full powers from the king to conclude a treaty of +peace. Colonel Adair and Stanley, accordingly, were sent off the +next morning to Melloon, to arrange for an immediate meeting for +the commissioners. However, they could come to no arrangement, the +Burmese leaders insisting that so important a business could only +be carried on when a favourable day arrived; and that no time +could, at present, be stated. Seeing that the principal object of +the Burmese was to gain time, the colonel informed them through +Stanley that, as no arrangements had been made, the troops would +recommence their advance as soon as he returned to the camp and, +accordingly, the next morning the division moved forward to a town +immediately opposite Melloon.</p> +<p>That place stood on the face of a sloping hill and, as the +Irrawaddy was here but 600 yards broad, a good view was obtained of +the fortifications. The principal stockade was in the form of a +square, about a mile on each face, mounting a considerable number +of guns--especially on the side facing the river; and a succession +of stockades extended for a mile farther along the banks. The great +work was crowded with men. In front of the town lay a large fleet +of war boats, and larger craft with stores.</p> +<p>A short time after the troops reached the spot, a great noise of +gongs, drums, and other warlike instruments arose on the other +side, and crowds of boatmen were seen running down to the vessels. +These were soon manned, and oars got out, and they began to row up +the river. As, owing to the intricacy of the channel, the steamboat +and flotilla had not yet arrived, a few shots were fired at the +boats by the field guns. This had the desired effect, many of the +boatmen jumping overboard, leaving their craft to drift down the +river; while the great bulk hastily turned their vessels about, and +anchored in their former position.</p> +<p>As soon as the steamer with the flotilla came up, two war boats +pushed off from shore, saluted the steamer, and rowed alongside of +her until she and the flotilla were safely anchored above the town. +This was so evidently a mark of a real desire for the suspension of +hostilities that the two officers were again sent across the river. +A truce was agreed upon, and an arrangement made for the meeting of +the negotiators, upon the following day.</p> +<p>Four meetings were held, between the two commissioners and those +appointed by the British general, the meetings taking place on +boats moored in the centre of the river. At length the treaty was +accepted and signed, by the Burmese, and fifteen days' truce +allowed for the ratification of the treaty by the king. As the end +of that period approached, the Burmese protested that they had not +yet received an answer, and asked for further time; which was +refused, unless on the condition that Melloon was evacuated, and +the Burmese army fell back until the ratification of the treaty +reached them. As had been for some time strongly suspected, the +negotiations were simply a device to arrest our advance; and the +treaty was afterwards found in the Burmese camp, it never having +been forwarded to Ava.</p> +<p>At midnight on the 18th, when the armistice came to a +conclusion, the troops began throwing up earthworks, the heavy guns +were landed from the flotilla and, at ten o'clock the next morning, +twenty-eight guns were in position ready to open fire. In spite of +remonstrances that had been made, the Burmese had, night after +night during the armistice, continued to work surreptitiously at +their entrenchments. It was hoped for a moment that, when they saw +the speed with which our batteries had been thrown up and armed, +they would offer no farther resistance. As, however, they were +evidently preparing for action, our guns opened fire at eleven +o'clock.</p> +<p>This was kept up for two hours. While it was going on, the +troops intended for the assault were embarked in boats, some +distance up the river, so as to ensure their not being carried by +the force of the stream across the face of the Burmese works, and +exposed to the concentrated fire of the enemy. They were divided +into four brigades; the first of which--consisting of the 13th and +38th Regiments, under Lieutenant Colonel Sale--were to land below +the stockade, and to attack its south-western angle; while the +other three brigades were to land above it, to carry some outworks +there, and to attack the northern face.</p> +<p>A strong northerly wind, and the violent current, prevented the +assaults being made simultaneously. The first brigade was carried +too far across and, as it passed the stockade, was exposed to the +fire of the guns and musketry of the river defences; while the +three other brigades were unable, for some time, to reach their +intended landing places. Colonel Sale was among those wounded by +the Burmese fire but, directly the first brigade reached the shore, +they formed up under the partial cover of a shelving bank and, led +by Lieutenant Colonel Frith, moved forward to the assault in +admirable order. When within a short distance there was a forward +rush, in spite of the storm of shot. The ladder party gained the +foot of the stockade and, placing the ladders, climbed up, and +leapt down among the surging crowd of the enemy. Others followed +and, soon, a firm footing was obtained in the works. Then the men +of the two regiments--whose total strength did not exceed five +hundred--advanced steadily, drove before them some 10,000 armed +men, and expelled them from the works that the Burmese had deemed +impregnable.</p> +<p>While this was going on, the other three brigades had landed +above the stockade and, now falling upon the enemy as they poured +out from their works, completed their defeat. All the stockades +were carried, and the whole of the artillery and stores fell into +our possession.</p> +<p>Four days later, the army again began its advance. They were met +by four Englishmen, who had been taken prisoners; and an American, +who had also been held in confinement. These had been sent to +assure the English general that the king was in earnest in his +desire for peace. It was but too evident, however, that no +confidence could be placed in Burmese negotiations; and it was, +moreover, known that another army was being assembled, in the +greatest haste, to bar the advance.</p> +<p>On the 14th of February the British reached Pakang-Yay, having +passed Sembeughewn on the opposite shore. This was the point where +the road from Aracan reached the Irrawaddy, and it had been +arranged that the force that had been operating in Aracan should, +if possible, effect a junction with Sir Archibald Campbell here. A +message brought down by a native was, however, received; stating +that the force had suffered very severely from fever and cholera, +and that the natural obstacles were found to be too great to be +overcome by troops debilitated by disease--that the attempt had, +therefore, been abandoned. Fortunately, the English general was +well able to do without this addition to his strength. He had +already proved that his command was perfectly capable of defeating +any Burmese force that could be brought against him, and an +addition would only have increased the difficulty of transport.</p> +<p>On the 9th of March the British force which, owing to the +necessity for leaving strong bodies to hold Melloon and other +points that had been captured, now mustered less than 2,000 +fighting men, advanced to attack the enemy, whose numbers were +estimated at 16,000.</p> +<p>The new commander of the Burmese adopted other tactics than his +predecessors. His stockaded position was in front of the town of +Pagahn, but he occupied the jungle in great force, and attacked our +advance guard, five miles from the town. As the enemy occupied the +hills on both sides of the main road, Sir A. Campbell divided his +force and led half of it through the jungle on the right, while +General Cotton led the other half through the woods on the +left.</p> +<p>The Burmese fought with considerable obstinacy. General Campbell +and his staff, with thirty-eight troopers and fifty men of the +13th, were somewhat in advance of the column; when the enemy closed +in on both flanks, and even got in their rear. These were, however, +dispersed by the rest of the 13th and, driving back the Burmese on +the flanks, the advance was continued. Presently, however, as the +British issued from the jungle, a mass of the enemy's horse charged +down, drove back the skirmishers and, for a time, the position of +the general and his staff was one of great peril. His little body +of troopers, however, dashed boldly at the assailants and held them +in check, until the guns that had followed the staff were brought +forward from the jungle. Then the troopers divided and rode right +and left; and the guns, opening fire, checked the assailants until +the infantry came up.</p> +<p>The Burmese army was now seen, drawn up in the form of a +semicircle, in the open. The two British columns were united and, +together, moved forward to attack the centre of the crescent, +disregarding the fire from its wings. When within charging +distance, they went forward with a rush and, cheering lustily, fell +upon the Burmese; and broke their centre, thus isolating the two +wings. The Burmese at once retreated, with the greatest haste, to +the stockaded position in their rear. As usual, the narrow +entrances to the stockades caused great delay; and the British were +upon them before they were, in any way, prepared to resist the +assault.</p> +<p>Heralding their advance by sweeping volleys, they fell upon the +Burmese with the bayonet, and drove them out of their works. The +enemy made an attempt to rally, behind the walls and in the pagodas +of the town, but the effort was vain. They were driven out with +great slaughter, hundreds were drowned in endeavouring to swim the +river, and the army was finally dispersed in all directions.</p> +<p>The effect of this victory was at once apparent. The country +people--who had, on the advance of the British force from Prome, +been cleared out from the villages along the whole line of +route--being now freed from the restraint of their troops, came +flocking back in great numbers--some by the roads and some in +boats--and it was evident that they regarded the struggle as +definitely terminated. There was, indeed, no possibility of further +resistance; as the armies of Burma, raised with immense difficulty +and by heavy bounties and the promises of great reward, were +hopelessly scattered, and Ava lay open to the British advance.</p> +<p>In other directions their position was equally desperate. Aracan +had been wholly rescued from their grasp. A British force in Pegu +had marched up the river Sitang and, after the repulse of a party +of a hundred and fifty men, imprudently sent to attack Sitang +itself, captured the place after a sharp fight and, receiving +reinforcements from Rangoon, continued their way up the river and +captured Toungoo; while the northern force had driven the Burmese +out of Manipur, and had reached the river Ningti by the 2nd of +February, and were in a position to advance direct upon Ava.</p> +<p>After a halt of two days, General Campbell advanced on the 12th +of February. Mr. Price, the American who had been sent down after +the capture of Melloon, went forward to Ava with the treaty that +had been drawn up before the capture of that place; and the king +had no longer any hesitation in complying with its terms--and was, +indeed, delighted to find that the recent victory of the invaders +had not increased their demands. He at once sent down to accept +them but, as no official ratification was sent, the march +continued; while Mr. Price again returned to Ava. When the force +was within four days' march of the capital, the latter returned +with the Burmese commissioners and other high functionaries, with +the ratified treaty, and the first instalment of the money that was +to be paid.</p> +<p>It was a disappointment to the army that, after their long march +and many sufferings, they were not to be allowed to enter the +enemy's capital in triumph. Undoubtedly, however, the course taken +was the wisest. Ava was regarded as a sacred city, and it was to +save it from the humiliation of being occupied by the invaders that +the king had brought himself to accept the terms of the treaty. Had +the English general insisted upon entering the capital, and signing +the treaty there, he would have found no one to meet him. The +population would have been driven out, the king and court would +have retired farther up the country, and the war might have +continued for an indefinite time.</p> +<p>Already its cost had been enormous, exceeding 5,000,000 pounds +sterling. During the first eleven months after landing at Rangoon, +nearly half of the Europeans died and, from the time they advanced +from that town with fresh reinforcements from India, to the arrival +near Ava, a similarly heavy loss was sustained. Four percent of the +number engaged was killed in action. The climate of Aracan was +still more deadly, as three-fourths of the white troops employed +there died, and very few of the survivors were ever fit for service +afterwards. The sepoys suffered less in Aracan, losing only ten +percent of their number, though nearly half the force were in +hospital for some time.</p> +<p>According to agreement the Burmese, as soon as peace was +concluded, sent down a large number of boats for the conveyance of +the troops down the river. As they descended it, the garrisons left +at Melloon and other places were withdrawn. One of the native +regiments, with some elephants and guns, left the force at +Sembeughewn; and marched thence to Aracan, for the purpose of +investigating the country, and proving whether it was practicable +for the passage of troops in case another advance upon Ava should +ever be necessary. They found the road unexpectedly good, and met +with no resistance whatever, except in the passage of some passes +over the mountains.</p> +<p>At Melloon, Stanley was very glad to meet his cousin again, for +the 47th had been left in garrison there. Harry had been down +again, with a sharp attack of fever, but was now recovering.</p> +<p>"So it is all over, Stanley, and your chances of an earldom have +nearly slipped through your fingers."</p> +<p>"I am glad, indeed, that it is so," Stanley laughed, "in the +first place, because I could only have succeeded to it at your +death; and in the second place, because I have no ambition, +whatever, for a title. I am not nineteen yet, and should greatly +prefer to make my own way, than to find myself with nothing +whatever to do, except to spend money as it dropped into my +lap.</p> +<p>"Now that everything is settled, and that Aracan has become +English, and we have the seaports on the Tenasserim coast, trade +will increase tremendously. You may be sure that the Burmese will +be only too glad to flock into our provinces, and to live under a +fair rule, to escape the tyranny of their own officials; and my +uncle is just the man to take advantage of the new openings. I +don't say that I want to live out here all my life. At any rate, I +hope by the time that I am thirty, to be able to come home for a +year's holiday; and it is just possible that, by then, we may have +grown into such a big firm that we may establish headquarters in +London, instead of getting all our goods from Calcutta.</p> +<p>"There is certain to be a very big trade here, in teak alone. +The price in Pegu is a great deal below that in India and, if we +had a house in London, we should avoid having to pay commissions, +and perhaps get better prices for our wood. Of course, my uncle may +by that time think of retiring himself and, in that case, I might +have to stay somewhat longer out here; but I know that he likes the +climate, and I have heard him say that, as he has very few +acquaintances in England, he thinks that he should prefer a life in +Calcutta to one in London."</p> +<p>"I should not wonder if I go home, very shortly," Harry said. +"My last letter told me that my uncle was in failing health, and +that he would like to have me at home with him. If the next letter +confirms that, I am afraid I shall have either to resign my +commission, or exchange into a regiment at home. Of course, at his +death I should have to leave the army, anyhow. It would be +ridiculous for a subaltern to be an earl; besides, there are things +one would have to do. I suppose there are estates to be looked +after, and all sorts of nuisances.</p> +<p>"Anyhow, I shall always be glad I have had my share in this +expedition. I have learned what campaigning is; and I must say +that, under such circumstances as we have gone through, it is not +quite so pleasurable as I had expected. Half one's friends are dead +or invalided home; and one never knows, when one wakes in the +morning, whether one may not be down with cholera before night. The +fighting is all well enough but, after all, that takes up but a +very small portion of one's time; and marching and, I may say, +living generally in this hot, sweltering climate, with its six +months of rain, is not enviable work. However, I have gone through +one regular campaign, and that as severe a one as British troops +have ever performed; and above all, old man, I have met you, and we +have come to be great friends, and I have learned what one fellow +will do for another."</p> +<p>"I am sure I am very glad to have gone through it, too. I have +been fortunate, indeed, in never having been laid up for a single +day; and there is no doubt that having served on the staff will be +of great advantage to me, even as a trader. I own that I should +like to have retired a captain. Of course, promotion has been +tremendously fast, owing to the death vacancies, but I have still +two lieutenants over me."</p> +<p>"You are sure to get the step, Stanley. You have been in general +orders twice, besides that notice you got for my rescue. Also, the +doctors say that a number of the men who have been sent down to the +coast are not likely to live many weeks and, as five of your +seniors have been invalided, you may get your step, in the natural +course of things, at any moment.</p> +<p>"If I were you, I should ask for three months' leave before +rejoining your regiment. There will be no difficulty about that, +after you have been upwards of two years in constant work; and the +general will certainly not refuse. Before the end of that time you +will have seen your uncle, and talked matters over. Then, if you +choose to resign your commission, you can of course do so but, as +you are pretty sure to get your step, by death, before the end of +the three months; and as the general's despatches strongly +recommend your services, you may get your brevet majority before +your resignation reaches England. A man who has been mentioned two +or three times in despatches, and is specially recommended for +honours, is sure to get his brevet majority directly he gets his +company."</p> +<p>On reaching Rangoon, Stanley learned that two of the invalids +had died, either on the way down or before they could be put on +board a ship; and that one of the majors, who had been sent to +India for change, four months before, had also succumbed; so that +he had already obtained his company--a promotion which would have +been, at any other time, extraordinary; but which, in a campaign +where half those engaged were carried off, was nothing remarkable. +Being still on the headquarter staff, he embarked with Sir +Archibald Campbell.</p> +<p>"You still hold firm to your determination to leave the service, +Captain Brooke?" the general said, in the course of the passage to +Calcutta.</p> +<p>"Yes, sir. I am sure that it is best for me."</p> +<p>"I think it is, Brooke. Of course, you have been exceptionally +fortunate in getting such rapid promotion. Still, a good business +is a great deal better than soldiering. I wrote very strongly in +your favour, when I sent off my despatches the day we came down to +the coast; and you are certain of your brevet. Still, it is just as +well that the news of your resignation should not get home before +the Gazette comes out, with your name in it. I think the best thing +that I can do is to give you leave, for a time, as soon as we get +to Calcutta. I am sure that you deserve a rest, for your work has +been terribly heavy."</p> +<p>"Thank you, sir; that was just the favour that I was going to +ask you. I shall find out, as soon as I get there, where my uncle +is; and join him. My own mind is quite made up, but he has +certainly a right to be consulted, before I take any final +step."</p> +<p>"Quite right. I feel no doubt that his opinion will agree with +yours; and I think that you are showing a good deal more wisdom +than most fellows would do, to give up the service when you have +distinguished yourself, and have a much better chance than falls to +the lot of one man in a hundred. Still, there can be no real doubt +that a man in a good business, out here, can retire early and go +home with a fortune; while in the army you are liable at any time, +after you get to the rank of colonel, to be laid on the shelf for +years.</p> +<p>"Besides, you will be your own master, which is more than anyone +in the army can say. You can go home when you like, either for a +stay or for a permanency; and you are not liable to have to run the +risk of another campaign such as this has been."</p> +<p>"If one was sure of campaigns, I don't think that I could +possibly bring myself to leave the service; but it is the +probability of being kept, for three or four years at a time, doing +nothing at Calcutta or Madras that decided me."</p> +<p>The general nodded.</p> +<p>"You are quite right, Brooke; on active service a soldier's life +is, indeed, a stirring one; but there is nothing more dull and +monotonous than garrison life, in peace time."</p> +<p>Accordingly, as soon as they landed in Calcutta, Stanley was put +in orders for absence on leave, for three months. He learned, from +his uncle's agent, that they had heard from him only a few days +before, at Chittagong; and that he was then on the point of leaving +for Aracan, whither he had ordered a large consignment of goods to +be forwarded to him, by the next ship.</p> +<p>Three days later, Stanley started to join him, leaving his +address at Aracan with Sir Archibald Campbell, in case there should +be need to recall him before the three months' leave expired. The +vessel in which he was sailing carried the consignment of goods to +his uncle; and he had, therefore, no fear of finding that the +latter had left Aracan before his arrival. Meinik was still with +him. He had left the army after the last battle had been fought, +and had travelled to the spot where he had buried his money before +embarking with Stanley in the canoe and, after an absence of three +days, rejoined the force. On the way down to Rangoon, Stanley had a +long talk with him as to his future plans.</p> +<p>"I have only one plan, master, and that is to stay with you, as +long as I live."</p> +<p>"But you will have plenty to live comfortably upon now, Meinik. +For, after all that you have done for me, of course I shall arrange +for you to have a sum that will keep you in comfort."</p> +<p>Meinik shook his head.</p> +<p>"Burma is a bad country, master. After living with the English, +I would not go back to live under the king's officers, in any case. +Any money that I had would be squeezed out of me, before long. No, +master, I will go with you, unless you drive me from you; if you +do, I will go to Chittagong, and live there, but I do not think +that you will do that."</p> +<p>"Certainly not, Meinik. As long as you are willing to remain +with me, I shall be very glad, indeed, to have you; but if, at any +time, you wish to marry and settle down on land of your own, I +shall give you five hundred pounds--which is only a small portion +of the sum those rubies, which you got your band to give me, +brought me in."</p> +<p>"I daresay I shall marry," Meinik said, "but that will make no +difference. As long as I live, I shall stay with you."</p> +<p>Meinik had been astounded at Calcutta; which presented a strong +contrast, indeed, to the city which, as a Burman, he had regarded +as the most important place in the world.</p> +<p>"The Burmese are fools, master. They should have sent two or +three men here, before they made up their minds to go to war. If +they had been truly told what Calcutta was like, they would never +have ventured to make war with the English."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch18" id="Ch18">Chapter 18</a>: In Business +Again.</h2> +<p>When the vessel arrived at the mouth of the Aracan river, a +canoe was seen coming out from Akyah--a town situated at the +entrance to the principal of the several channels by which the +river makes its way, through a number of sand banks and islands, +into the sea. As it approached, Stanley recognized his uncle +sitting in the stern.</p> +<p>"Well, uncle, how are you?" he called out, as the boat +approached the side.</p> +<p>"What, is it you, Stanley? I am glad, indeed, to see you. I have +watched the papers anxiously, to see if your name appeared among +those who have been killed or have died; not seeing it, I hoped +that you were all right. Of course we heard, from the Madras +regiment that came across from Sembeughewn, that it was all over; +and that all the troops would be shipped off, as soon as they went +down to Rangoon; but I have not seen any papers lately, and so have +not had a chance of learning any news of you. I fancied, though, +that you would be back at Calcutta by this time; and thought that I +might get a letter from you, by this ship."</p> +<p>By this time he was on deck, and after a hearty shaking of +hands, Stanley asked what he was doing here.</p> +<p>"I did not expect to see you until we got to Aracan."</p> +<p>"I have been up there, lad. It is a decaying old place, and the +stream is in many places shallow; so that it would be very +difficult to take up a ship of any size. I foresee, therefore, that +this is going to be the chief port of the province--timber will be +floated down here, and rice brought down in native boats--so I +shall make my headquarters here, as far as this district is +concerned, and put Johnson in charge. I doubt whether, for a time, +we shall do as much trade as we shall higher up the coast; but +everyone expects a great Burmese immigration, and a large trade is +likely to spring up, in time.</p> +<p>"I have not quite determined on my next move, and it is not +improbable that I shall go down in this ship and establish myself, +for a time, at Martaban; and open a trade in Tenasserim. If I +decide on that, I shall only get on shore a portion of my goods, +and take the rest on with me there.</p> +<p>"Now, what are you going to do, Stanley?"</p> +<p>"Just what you think best, uncle. I should have thought that, as +I speak the language, it would be better for me to go on to +Martaban; and for you to work Chittagong, and the district up to +Assam."</p> +<p>"Then you are going to stay with me, lad!" his uncle exclaimed, +in a tone of much satisfaction. "I was afraid that you would have +got so fond of soldiering that you would have thrown this over, +altogether."</p> +<p>"Not a bit of it, uncle. I am on three months' leave at present +and, at the end of that time, I shall resign. You know I am a +captain, now--that is to say, that I have got my rank by death +vacancies, though until the Gazette comes out from England, I can +hardly be said to be a pucka captain; and, what is more, the +general himself assured me that, after being mentioned in +despatches two or three times, and at his strong commendation of my +services, I was sure of the brevet rank of major."</p> +<p>His uncle took off his hat, gravely.</p> +<p>"I must apologize to you," he said, "for addressing you as +'lad.' I had no idea that you were a full-grown captain, still less +that you might soon be a major."</p> +<p>"I don't care a snap for the title, uncle," Stanley said, +laughing, "except that it may be an advantage to me, in places +where there are garrisons; and indeed, generally where there are +white officials."</p> +<p>"A very great advantage, Stanley.</p> +<p>"Well, lad, I have been coining money, since I saw you at +Rangoon. I have been sending a consignment of bullocks down there, +every week; and have done almost as much with the Manipur force. I +have also got the contract regularly, now, for the supply of the +troops at Calcutta. Other trade has, of course, been at a +standstill. Now that everything has quieted down, there will be a +perfect rush; and I have been sorely troubled, in my mind, whether +it would be best to stay up here and take advantage of it, or to be +one of the first to open trade at these new ports. Of course, if +you are ready to take Martaban, that will decide me; and I shall +take passage in the first ship going up to Chittagong. My own boat +and the dhow are both there, and I shall at once work up all the +rivers, and set things going again.</p> +<p>"I have a capital fellow, a native, who is carrying on the +cattle business for me and, at Chittagong, I shall try and get hold +of three or four more trustworthy fellows, to take charge of +depots. I see a big future before us, and that before long. I did +well with those gems of yours--they fetched 3500 pounds, which I +used, besides what you handed over to me--for there was no buying +up the cattle without cash and, as I generally have to wait two +months after they are shipped, before I get paid, ready money was +invaluable and, indeed, I could not have gone into the thing on +anything like the same scale, if it had not been for your money. +The Calcutta people would have helped me, to a certain point; but +they would never have ventured upon such advances as I required. +Your 5000 pounds has doubled itself since I met you at Rangoon. I +calculate that our stores at the different depots are worth 4000 +pounds so that, at the present moment, the firm of Pearson & +Brooke have at their command a capital of 14,000 pounds."</p> +<p>A portion of the cargo was landed at Akyah. Stanley went down +with the rest to Martaban, and his uncle sailed for Chittagong. A +few months later, a store was opened at Rangoon. Parsee +store-keepers were sent from Calcutta, by Tom Pearson; and these +were placed in control of the stores there, and at +Martaban--Stanley being in charge of these two stations, and Akyah; +and having a native craft of his own, and a boat for river work +similar to that of his uncle.</p> +<p>A year later he received a letter from Harry, saying that his +uncle had died, a month after his return to England; and that he +was now established as one of the pillars of the state.</p> +<p>"As I went through London, on my arrival," he said, "I looked up +your mother at the address you gave me, at Dulwich. I found her +very well, and very comfortable. She was full of your praises and, +as I was equally so, your ears ought to have tingled while we were +together. Of course they wanted to hear all about you, and most of +it was new to them; for you had said nothing of your adventure with +that leopard, and only a few lines about the rescue of your humble +servant; though you had told them that I stood in your way of the +earldom. Your mother said that she was prouder of you than if you +were an earl, only that she would have liked to have you at home. I +told her that you and your uncle were shaking the pagoda tree, and +that you would come home as yellow as a guinea and as rich as a +nabob, in the course of a few years.</p> +<p>"Your sisters are older than I expected to find them. Of course, +you always spoke of them as when you saw them last. They are both +growing into very pretty girls, the elder especially. I made your +mother promise to bring them down to stay with me, for a bit, when +I came into the title; which I knew could not be long, for I had +called that morning on my uncle's solicitors, and they told me that +he was not expected to live many weeks. As it is only a month since +he died, I suppose I ought not to have visitors, just yet; but in a +few weeks I shall go up to town, and bring them down with me. I +cannot help thinking that it is a little selfish for, when they see +this place, they would not be human if they did not feel that it +would have been yours, if it had not been for your getting me out +of the hands of those Burmese.</p> +<p>"I see that you are gazetted captain, this week. I suppose, long +before this, you have settled down to your old work of going up +sluggish streams; and trying to stir up the equally sluggish native +to a sense of the advantages of British goods. At present, I am +quite content to do nothing particular--to ride and drive about, +return calls, and so on--but I expect, before very long, I shall +get restless, and want to be doing something. However, there is the +Continent open to one, and decent hotels to stop at. No fevers +there, and no Burmese brigands."</p> +<p>A month later he had a letter from his mother, which had been +written before that of Harry, but had been sent to Calcutta and +thence to Akyah; and had there lain until his return, two months +later, from a boat journey up to Pegu. She said how kind it was of +his cousin to come in, to give them news of him, the very day he +arrived in London.</p> +<p>"Of course, we were delighted with all that he told us about +you; but it made us anxious to think of your running into so many +dangers. We like him very much. We could not help laughing, because +he seemed quite concerned that you should not have the peerage, +instead of him. He seems likely to come into it soon, for he tells +us that the earl is very ill. He says that we must come down and +pay him a visit, as soon as he is master there; but I don't know +whether that can be. Of course it would be a nice change, and I +believe that it is a very fine place. I said that it would seem +strange our going there, when there are no ladies, and that +bachelors did not generally entertain; but he said that, in the +first place he should have his sisters there, who were about the +same age as my girls; and that as we were his nearest relations, +and you were at present his heir, it would be quite the right and +proper thing for us to come down. He seemed quite in earnest about +it, and I should not be surprised if we go."</p> +<p>Three months later, Stanley heard that the visit had been paid, +and that they had stayed a fortnight there.</p> +<p>"It feels quite funny, settling down here again after being in +that big house, with all those servants and grandeur; not that +there is any grandeur about Harry. He insists, being relations, +that we shall call him by his Christian name. Everything was +delightful. Every afternoon we used to go driving and, of a +morning, he generally rode with the girls. He had a very pretty, +gentle horse for Agnes; and a gray pony, a beauty, for Kate. I have +a strong suspicion that he had bought them both, on purpose. I +should not be surprised--but no, I won't say anything about +it."</p> +<p>Stanley puzzled over this sentence, which was followed by:</p> +<p>"His sisters are very nice girls."</p> +<p>"It is evidently something about Harry," he said to himself; +"possibly she has taken the idea into her head that he may fall in +love with Agnes. That, certainly, would be a very nice thing; but I +don't suppose it is anything more than an idea of mother's."</p> +<p>However, four months later he received a letter from Harry, +announcing his engagement.</p> +<p>"I told your mother that she must let me write by the mail, +before she did; as it was only right that I should have the +pleasure of telling you the news, myself. It is splendid, old man; +upon my word, I don't know which I ought to feel most grateful to +you--for saving my life, or for getting me to know your sister. It +seems to me a regular dispensation of Providence. You did +everything you could to prevent yourself from coming into a title; +and now your sister is going to take it, and me. It is quite right +that we should come to be brothers-in-law, for we are quite like +brothers, already.</p> +<p>"We are to be married in the spring. How I wish you could be +with us. Your absence will be the only thing wanting, to make +everything perfect. I do hope you don't mean to stay, grilling out +there, many years. It seems to me monstrous that I should be having +estates and a big income, and all that sort of thing, when I have +done nothing to deserve it; and that you should be toiling in that +beastly climate. If I thought that there was the least chance of +your rushing home, when you get this letter, I declare that I would +put off the marriage for a month or so, so that you should be here +in time; but as I feel sure that you won't do anything of the sort, +it will be of no use for me to make such a noble sacrifice."</p> +<p>Stanley had received the news that he was gazetted brevet-major, +a month after he was promoted to the rank of captain, and two +months before his name appeared as having retired from the army. He +derived, as he expected, much benefit from his connection with the +army in his position at his three receiving ports, as it placed him +on a very pleasant footing with the military and civil officials; +and it rendered his occasional visits to Calcutta and Madras +exceedingly pleasant, for in both towns he found many officers +whose acquaintance he had made, during the expedition. He was +always made an honorary member of the messes and clubs, during his +stays there.</p> +<p>The business grew rapidly. The work of the earlier years had so +well paved the way for larger operations that they were able to +more than hold their own against other traders who, after the +troubles were at an end, sought to establish themselves at various +points on the western coast of the peninsula; and after six more +years of hard and continuous work, the business came to be a very +large and important one.</p> +<p>"I think it more than probable," Stanley wrote to his mother, +"that before very long I shall be returning home. My uncle spoke +about it, the last time that I saw him; and said that we were +outgrowing Calcutta, and ought to establish ourselves in +London.</p> +<p>"'We can hold on a bit longer,' he said, 'but we must come to +that, sooner or later and, when it does, you must be the one to go +to England and take charge. I may go home before that for a few +months, but I have no wish or desire to stop there. We have now got +a good staff; and I shall probably fix myself, permanently, at +Calcutta.'"</p> +<p>Two years later Tom Pearson, on his return from England, brought +back a wife with him, and established himself at Calcutta. Stanley +joined him there, three weeks after his return. They had a long +talk together, that evening.</p> +<p>"I see, Stanley," his uncle said, "that things have gone on +improving, since I have been away; and that our turnover last year +was 150,000 pounds, and the profits close upon 15,000 pounds. I +think, now, that it is high time we opened a place in London. We +have almost a monopoly of the teak trade, in Burma; and it would be +much more advantageous for us to make our purchases in England, +instead of here. We should save in carriage and in trans-shipment, +besides the profits that the people here make out of their sales to +us. I have made a great many inquiries, at home, as to the prices +for cash in Manchester and Birmingham; and find that we should get +goods there some fifteen percent cheaper than we pay at Calcutta, +even after putting on the freights. So you see, it is an important +matter. Besides, there would be a better choice of goods, and you +know exactly the sort of thing that we require, and the quantities +that we can get rid of; and would be able, therefore, to send +consignments each month, without waiting for advices from me; and +so we should get the things just as readily as we do now, from +here.</p> +<p>"I will give you the names of some of the firms that I have +visited, and with whom I have already paved the way for opening +extensive transactions. During the eighteen months that I have been +away, you have learned all about the banking business; and will +find no more difficulty in managing, in London, than here. Your +brother-in-law Netherly went with me to the Bank of England, and +introduced me to one of the directors. I told him that we intended +to open a house in London, and that as soon as we did so, we should +open an account with them by paying in 30,000 pounds; and that we +should, of course, require some facilities, but probably not to a +large extent, as our payments for teak there would fairly balance +our exports from England; and that I reckoned our trade to be, as a +minimum, 50,000 pounds, each way.</p> +<p>"The matter was made extremely easy by Netherly saying, to my +astonishment:</p> +<p>"'You can let them draw what they like, Mr. Townshend, for I +will give my personal guarantee, up to 50,000 pounds.'</p> +<p>"I remonstrated, but he would not hear anything said.</p> +<p>"'Ridiculous,' he exclaimed, hotly; 'Stanley is my +brother-in-law. He risked his life for me, and you don't suppose +that I should mind risking 50,000 pounds for him.</p> +<p>"'Not,' he went on, turning to the director, 'that there is any +risk in the matter. I know all about the business they do in India, +and that there is not a shadow of risk in it. I know that my +guarantee will be a mere form but, as it may put them on a better +footing with you, to begin with, I shall be very pleased to do +it.'</p> +<p>"Of course, we know that there will be no risk in it. The +greater portion of our business is a ready-money one and although, +of late, we have been dealing more with native local firms instead +of selling direct from our own stores, the amounts are never large +and, so far, we have never lost a penny. Of course, I shall let you +know, by every mail, how things are going on at all our depots; and +you will then be able to form an estimate as to the amount of goods +you will have to despatch to each--sending them direct, of course, +if there happens to be a ship going.</p> +<p>"But all these things, of course, we shall go into, at length, +before you start for England."</p> +<p>"Did you go down to Harry's place?"</p> +<p>"Yes, I stopped there a week. Your sister seems perfectly happy, +and plays the part of queen of the county admirably. The four +youngsters are jolly little things. As to your mother, you will +find very little change in her. I really don't think that she looks +a day older than when we saw her off, at Calcutta, something like +ten years ago. Of course, then she was cut up with her loss; but +quiet and comfort have agreed with her, and the climate is a good +deal less trying than it is out here. At any rate, I should not +take her for a day over forty, and she is something like five years +older than that."</p> +<p>Three months later, Stanley sailed for England. There was the +same argument between him and Meinik that there had been when +Stanley first left Rangoon, but this time it terminated +differently.</p> +<p>"You would be out of your element in England, Meinik. Of course, +my life there will be very different from what it is here. I shall +go away from home to business, every morning, and not get back +until perhaps seven o' clock in the evening. As a consequence, +there would be nothing for you to do for me, and we should see very +little of each other. You know I should like to have you with me, +and would do all that I could to make you comfortable; but I am +sure that you would not like the life. Here you have always been on +the move, and there is always something for you to do, and think +of.</p> +<p>"I have spoken to my uncle about you, and he will be glad to +appoint you to the position of purchaser, for our house, of teak +and other native products in these provinces. Besides being buyer, +you would go up the country, and see to the felling and getting the +timber down to the coast, as you have often done before. He knows +how absolutely I trust you, and how much you have done for me, and +he said that he should be very glad to have you in charge of the +buying side of the work, here. Besides, you know you have now a +wife and children and, even if you could make yourself comfortable +in England, they would never be able to do so; and the bitter cold +that we sometimes have, in winter, would try them terribly, and +might even carry them all off."</p> +<p>To these arguments Meinik had reluctantly yielded. He was +somewhat proud of the position that he occupied, as one of some +authority in the establishment of the principal merchants on the +coast. He was fond of his wife and little children; and felt that +to be established among strangers, of different habits and race, +would be very terrible for them. Stanley bought him a nice house at +Rangoon and, as his rate of pay, which had been gradually +increased, was now sufficient to cause him to rank high among the +native population, he himself came to feel that he had done wisely +in accepting Stanley's advice.</p> +<p>The voyage to England was an uneventful one; and to Stanley, +after the active life he had had for ten years, the five months +spent at sea seemed almost interminable.</p> +<p>"I should not have known you, in the least," his mother said, +after the first joyful greetings were over. "How much you have gone +through, since we parted at Calcutta."</p> +<p>"I had a pretty rough time of it for two years, mother, during +the war but, with that exception, my life has been a very pleasant +one; and I have had nothing, whatever, to grumble about.</p> +<p>"This is a pretty house that you have chosen, mother, and the +garden is charming. How I have longed, sometimes, for the sight of +an English garden. Of course I have never seen one before, but I +have heard you talk of them, and thought how delightful the green +grass must be. Of course we had flowers in Burma--plenty of +them--and shrubs; but it was not green, like this. It is +charming."</p> +<p>"Yes, it is a pretty house, Stanley. We moved in here five years +ago--thanks to you, dear boy--and it has been a very quiet, happy +time. We have a good many friends now, among our neighbours; and +have quite as much society as I care for.</p> +<p>"I suppose you have not yet decided whether you will live here, +with us," she said, a little anxiously, "or set up an establishment +of your own."</p> +<p>"Of course I shall stay here, mother. I never thought of +anything else. I see that you have some stables. I shall get a +couple of horses, and drive into town, in the mornings. I have got +out of the way of walking, altogether.</p> +<p>"And where is Kate?"</p> +<p>"You will see her presently. She will be here to dinner, with +Agnes and Harry. I sent her off, because I wanted to have you all +to myself, for the first hour. The others came up to town, three +days ago, on purpose to be here when you arrived. Of course, we +heard when your ship called at Plymouth. We had been looking for +her, for your last letter told us the name of the vessel that you +were coming by; so I wrote to them, and they came up at once. They +wanted us to go and dine with them, but I would not hear of it. I +was sure that you would much rather dine quietly, here, than in +state in Portman Square, with three or four footmen behind our +chairs."</p> +<p>"Ever so much better, mother. I suppose I shall hardly know +Agnes, but Harry cannot have altered much; besides, I have seen him +four years later than her."</p> +<p>Harry's greeting was of the heartiest kind. Stanley's sisters +felt, at first, a little strange with this brother of whom they had +but a faint remembrance.</p> +<p>"It does not seem to me, Harry, that your dignities have tamed +you down much."</p> +<p>"No, indeed," Harry laughed. "I find it, sometimes, very +difficult to act up to my position. I never quite feel that I am an +earl, except on the rare occasions when I go to the House of +Lords--which I only do when my vote is wanted, on an important +division.</p> +<p>"The gloom of that place is enough to sober anyone. I can assure +you that, when I heard of the fire, I felt absolutely pleased. Of +course, they will build another one, perhaps grander than the last, +and as gloomy but, thank goodness, it must be years before it can +be finished and, until then, we shall have to put up with temporary +premises.</p> +<p>"Your chances of an earldom are getting more and more remote, +Stanley. There are three boys barring the way, already. I had +proposed to myself not to marry--in which case you or a son of +yours would have followed me--but your sister overpersuaded +me."</p> +<p>Agnes tossed her head, as she said:</p> +<p>"At any rate, Harry, if you made that resolution, it was not +worth much, as you gave it up at the first opportunity. I was the +first girl you met, when you arrived in England; and I doubt +whether you had seen another, before we came down to stay at +Netherly. I had not been there two days before you began to make +love to me."</p> +<p>"The temptation would excuse anything, my dear," Harry laughed. +"Besides, you see, I saw at once that it was but fair and right to +Stanley that, if he could not get the peerage himself, he might +some day have the satisfaction of being uncle to an earl.</p> +<p>"And so you are home for good, old fellow?"</p> +<p>"Yes, and just at present I feel very much at sea as to how to +get to work, as Tom Pearson arranged nothing except as to the +banking account. Everything else he has left to me. I know nothing +of London, and have no idea of the situation where I should look +for offices."</p> +<p>"I will put you up to all that, Stanley. I don't know anything +about it myself, as you may suppose; but if you will go with me to +my solicitors, tomorrow, they will be able to tell you. But I do +know that Leadenhall Street is the centre of the Indian trade, and +it's somewhere about there that you will have to fix yourself.</p> +<p>"Of course, when you have taken a place, you will have to get +hold of some clerks. If you put an advertisement in the paper, you +will get any number of applicants; or possibly my men may, through +their connection with merchants, be able to hear of some to suit +you. Anyhow, I am sure that you will find no difficulty."</p> +<p>Thanks to Harry's introductions, Stanley was established in a +handsome suite of offices, with three clerks, with much greater +ease than he had anticipated. Being thoroughly versed in business, +he was not long before he was at home in his new life.</p> +<p>Three years after his return, he married Harry's youngest +sister. The firm flourished greatly, and became one of the leading +houses in the Eastern trade. At the age of sixty, Stanley retired +from business with a large fortune. He could do this comfortably, +as his eldest son and a nephew had become active partners in the +firm. He still lives, at the age of eighty-six, in a noble mansion +near Staines; and retains all the faculties, even at advanced +age.</p> + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of On the Irrawaddy, by G. A. Henty + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ON THE IRRAWADDY *** + +***** This file should be named 21242-h.htm or 21242-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/2/4/21242/ + +Produced by Martin Robb + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/21242-h/images/a.jpg b/21242-h/images/a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f618209 --- /dev/null +++ b/21242-h/images/a.jpg diff --git a/21242-h/images/b.jpg b/21242-h/images/b.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8c3c6b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/21242-h/images/b.jpg diff --git a/21242-h/images/c.jpg b/21242-h/images/c.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..077fc9c --- /dev/null +++ b/21242-h/images/c.jpg diff --git a/21242-h/images/d.jpg b/21242-h/images/d.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e308863 --- /dev/null +++ b/21242-h/images/d.jpg diff --git a/21242-h/images/e.jpg b/21242-h/images/e.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..954cad9 --- /dev/null +++ b/21242-h/images/e.jpg diff --git a/21242-h/images/f.jpg b/21242-h/images/f.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d2f5bcd --- /dev/null +++ b/21242-h/images/f.jpg diff --git a/21242-h/images/g.jpg b/21242-h/images/g.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b41283d --- /dev/null +++ b/21242-h/images/g.jpg diff --git a/21242-h/images/h.jpg b/21242-h/images/h.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0148283 --- /dev/null +++ b/21242-h/images/h.jpg diff --git a/21242.txt b/21242.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..74ab573 --- /dev/null +++ b/21242.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11856 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of On the Irrawaddy, by G. A. Henty + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: On the Irrawaddy + A Story of the First Burmese War + +Author: G. A. Henty + +Illustrator: W. H. Overend + +Release Date: April 27, 2007 [EBook #21242] +[Last updated: October 6, 2013] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ON THE IRRAWADDY *** + + + + +Produced by Martin Robb + + + + +On The Irrawaddy: +A Story of the First Burmese War +By G. A. Henty +Illustrated by W. H. Overend. + +Contents + +Preface. +Chapter 1: A New Career. +Chapter 2: The Outbreak of War. +Chapter 3: A Prisoner. +Chapter 4: A Ruined Temple. +Chapter 5: With Brigands. +Chapter 6: Among Friends. +Chapter 7: On The Staff. +Chapter 8: The Pagoda. +Chapter 9: Victories. +Chapter 10: The Advance. +Chapter 11: Donabew. +Chapter 12: Harry Carried Off. +Chapter 13: Preparing A Rescue. +Chapter 14: In The Temple. +Chapter 15: The Attack. +Chapter 16: Rejoining. +Chapter 17: The Pride Of Burma Humbled. +Chapter 18: In Business Again. + +Illustrations + +Stanley is brought before Bandoola, the Burmese general. +Stanley gave a sudden spring, and buried his knife in the leopard. +They forced the canoe behind bushes, so as to be entirely concealed. +The Burmese make a great effort to capture Pagoda Hill. +Stanley cut down the man who was about to fire the hut. +The great snake moved his head higher and higher, hissing angrily. +In vain the Burmese tried to force their way into the chamber. +The old Burmese general was carried from point to point in a litter. + + + +Preface. + + +With the exception of the terrible retreat from Afghanistan, none +of England's many little wars have been so fatal--in proportion to +the number of those engaged--as our first expedition to Burma. It +was undertaken without any due comprehension of the difficulties to +be encountered, from the effects of climate and the deficiency of +transport; the power, and still more the obstinacy and arrogance of +the court of Ava were altogether underrated; and it was considered +that our possession of her ports would assuredly bring the enemy, +who had wantonly forced the struggle upon us, to submission. +Events, however, proved the completeness of the error. The Burman +policy of carrying off every boat on the river, laying waste the +whole country, and driving away the inhabitants and the herds, +maintained our army as prisoners in Rangoon through the first wet +season; and caused the loss of half the white officers and men +first sent there. The subsequent campaign was no less fatal and, +although large reinforcements had been sent, fifty percent of the +whole died; so that less than two thousand fighting men remained in +the ranks, when the expedition arrived within a short distance of +Ava. Not until the last Burmese army had been scattered did the +court of Ava submit to the by no means onerous terms we imposed. + +Great, indeed, was the contrast presented by this first invasion of +the country with the last war in 1885, which brought about the +final annexation of Burma. Then a fleet of steamers conveyed the +troops up the noble river; while in 1824 a solitary steamer was all +that India could furnish, to aid the flotilla of rowboats. No worse +government has ever existed than that of Burma when, with the boast +that she intended to drive the British out of India, she began the +war. No people were ever kept down by a more grinding tyranny, and +the occupation of the country by the British has been an even +greater blessing to the population than has that of India. + +Several works, some by eyewitnesses, others compiled from official +documents, appeared after the war. They differ remarkably in the +relation of details, and still more in the spelling of the names +both of persons and places. I have chiefly followed those given in +the narratives of Mr. H. H. Wilson, and of Major Snodgrass, the +military secretary to the commander of the expedition. + + + +Chapter 1: A New Career. + + +A party was assembled in a room of an hotel in Calcutta, at the end +of the year 1822. It consisted of a gentleman, a lady in deep +mourning, a boy of between fourteen and fifteen, and two girls of +thirteen and twelve. + +"I think you had better accept my offer, Nellie," the gentleman was +saying. "You will find it hard work enough to make both ends meet, +with these two girls; and Stanley would be a heavy drain on you. +The girls cost nothing but their clothes; but he must go to a +decent school, and then there would be the trouble of thinking what +to do with him, afterwards. If I could have allowed you a couple of +hundred a year, it would have been altogether different; but you +see I am fighting an uphill fight, myself, and need every penny +that I can scrape together. I am getting on; and I can see well +enough that, unless something occurs to upset the whole thing, I +shall be doing a big trade, one of these days; but every half penny +of profit has to go into the business. So, as you know, I cannot +help you at present though, by the time the girls grow up, I hope I +shall be able to do so, and that to a good extent. + +"I feel sure that it would not be a bad thing for Stanley. He will +soon get to be useful to me, and in three or four years will be a +valuable assistant. Speaking Hindustani as well as he does, he +won't be very long in picking up enough of the various dialects in +Kathee and Chittagong for our purpose and, by twenty, he will have +a share of the business, and be on the highway towards making his +fortune. It will be infinitely better than anything he is likely to +find in England, and he will be doing a man's work at the age when +he would still be a schoolboy in England. + +"I have spoken to him about it. Of course, he does not like leaving +you, but he says that he should like it a thousand times better +than, perhaps, having to go into some humdrum office in England." + +"Thank you, Tom," Mrs. Brooke said with a sigh. "It will be very +hard to part with him--terribly hard--but I see that it is by far +the best thing for him and, as you say, in a monetary way it will +be a relief to me. I think I can manage very comfortably on the +pension, in some quiet place at home, with the two girls; but +Stanley's schooling would be a heavy drain. I might even manage +that, for I might earn a little money by painting; but there would +be the question of what to do with him when he left school and, +without friends or influence, it will be hopeless to get him into +any good situation. + +"You see, Herbert's parents have both died since he came out here +and, though he was distantly related to the Earl of Netherly, he +was only a second cousin, or something of that kind, and knew +nothing about the family; and of course I could not apply to them." + +"Certainly not, Nellie," her brother agreed. "There is nothing so +hateful as posing as a poor relation--and that is a connection +rather than a relationship. Then you will leave the boy in my +hands?" + +"I am sure that it will be best," she said, with a tremor in her +voice, "and at any rate, I shall have the comfort of knowing that +he will be well looked after." + +Mrs. Brooke was the widow of a captain in one of the native +regiments of the East India Company. He had, six weeks before this, +been carried off suddenly by an outbreak of cholera; and she had +been waiting at Calcutta, in order to see her brother, before +sailing for England. She was the daughter of an English clergyman, +who had died some seventeen years before. Nellie, who was then +eighteen, being motherless as well as fatherless, had determined to +sail for India. A great friend of hers had married and gone out, a +year before. Nellie's father was at that time in bad health; and +her friend had said to her, at parting: + +"Now mind, Nellie, I have your promise that, if you should find +yourself alone here, you will come out to me in India. I shall be +very glad to have you with me, and I don't suppose you will be on +my hands very long; pretty girls don't remain single many months, +in India." + +So, seeing nothing better to do, Nellie had, shortly after her +father's death, sailed for Calcutta. + +Lieutenant Brooke was also a passenger on board the Ava, and during +the long voyage he and Nellie Pearson became engaged; and were +married, from her friend's house, a fortnight after their arrival. +Nellie was told that she was a foolish girl, for that she ought to +have done better; but she was perfectly happy. The pay and +allowances of her husband were sufficient for them to live upon in +comfort; and though, when the children came, there was little to +spare, the addition of pay when he gained the rank of captain was +ample for their wants. They had been, in fact, a perfectly happy +couple--both had bright and sunny dispositions, and made the best +of everything; and she had never had a serious care, until he was +suddenly taken away from her. + +Stanley had inherited his parents' disposition and, as his sisters, +coming so soon after him, occupied the greater portion of his +mother's care, he was left a good deal to his own devices; and +became a general pet in the regiment, and was equally at home in +the men's lines and in the officers' bungalows. The native language +came as readily to him as English and, by the time he was ten, he +could talk in their own tongue with the men from the three or four +different districts from which the regiment had been recruited. His +father devoted a couple of hours a day to his studies. He did not +attempt to teach him Latin--which would, he thought, be altogether +useless to him--but gave him a thorough grounding in English and +Indian history, and arithmetic, and insisted upon his spending a +certain time each day in reading standard English authors. + +Tom Pearson, who was five years younger than his sister, had come +out to India four years after her. He was a lad full of life and +energy. As soon as he left school, finding himself the master of a +hundred pounds--the last remains of the small sum that his father +had left behind him--he took a second-class passage to Calcutta. As +soon as he had landed, he went round to the various merchants and +offices and, finding that he could not, owing to a want of +references, obtain a clerkship, he took a place in the store of a +Parsee merchant who dealt in English goods. Here he remained for +five years, by which time he had mastered two or three native +languages, and had obtained a good knowledge of business. + +He now determined to start on his own account. He had lived hardly, +saving up every rupee not needed for actual necessaries and, at the +end of the five years he had, in all, a hundred and fifty pounds. +He had, long before this, determined that the best opening for +trade was among the tribes on the eastern borders of the British +territory; and had specially devoted himself to the study of the +languages of Kathee and Chittagong. + +Investing the greater portion of his money in goods suitable for the +trade, he embarked at Calcutta in a vessel bound for Chittagong. +There he took passage in a native craft going up the great river to +Sylhet, where he established his headquarters; and thence--leaving +the greater portion of his goods in the care of a native merchant, +with whom his late employer had had dealings--started with a native, +and four donkeys on which his goods were packed, to trade among the +wild tribes. + +His success fully equalled his anticipations and, gradually, he +extended his operations; going as far east as Manipur, and south +almost as far as Chittagong. The firm in Calcutta from whom he had, +in the first place, purchased his goods, sent him up fresh stores +as he required them; and soon, seeing the energy with which he was +pushing his business, gave him considerable credit, and he was able +to carry on his operations on an increasingly larger scale. Sylhet +remained his headquarters; but he had a branch at Chittagong, +whither goods could be sent direct from Calcutta, and from this he +drew his supplies for his trade in that province. + +Much of his business was carried on by means of the waterways, and +the very numerous streams that covered the whole country, and +enabled him to carry his goods at a far cheaper rate than he could +transport them by land; and for this purpose he had a boat +specially fitted up with a comfortable cabin. He determined, from +the first, to sell none but the best goods in the market; and thus +he speedily gained the confidence of the natives, and the arrival +of his boats was eagerly hailed by the villagers on the banks of +the rivers. + +He soon found that money was scarce; and that, to do a good +business, he must take native products in barter for his goods; and +that in this way he not only did a much larger trade, but obtained +a very much better price for his wares than if he had sold only for +money; and he soon consigned considerable quantities to the firm in +Calcutta and, by so doing, obtained a profit both ways. He himself +paid a visit to Calcutta, every six months or so, to choose fresh +fashions of goods; and to visit the firm, with whom his dealings, +every year, became more extensive. But, though laying the +foundations for an extensive business, he was not, as he told his +sister, at present in a position to help her; for his increasing +trade continually demanded more and more capital, and the whole of +his profits were swallowed up by the larger stocks that had to be +held at his depots at Sylhet, Chittagong, and at the mouths of the +larger rivers. + +Twice since he had been out he had met his sister at Calcutta, and +when she came down after her husband's death, and heard from Tom's +agents that he would probably arrive there in the course of a +fortnight, she decided to wait there and meet him. He was greatly +grieved at her loss, and especially so as he was unable to offer +her a home; for as his whole time was spent in travelling, it was +impossible for him to do so; nor indeed, would she have accepted +it. Now that her husband was gone, she yearned to be back in +England again. It was, too, far better for the girls that she +should take them home. But when he now offered to take the boy she +felt that, hard as it would be to leave Stanley behind, the offer +was a most advantageous one for him. + +The boy's knowledge of Indian languages, which would be of immense +advantage to him in such a life, would be absolutely useless in +England and, from what Tom told her of his business, there could be +little doubt that the prospects were excellent. Stanley himself, +who now saw his uncle for the first time, was attracted to him by +the energy and cheeriness of manner that had rendered him so +successful in business; and he was stirred by the enterprise and +adventure of the life he proposed for him. More than once, in the +little-frequented rivers that stretched into Kathee, his boats had +been attacked by wild tribesmen; and he had to fight hard to keep +them off. Petty chiefs had, at times, endeavoured to obstruct his +trading and, when at Manipur, he had twice been witness of +desperate fights between rival claimants for the throne. All this +was, to a boy brought up among soldiers, irresistibly fascinating; +especially as the alternative seemed to be a seat in a dull +counting house in England. + +He was, then, delighted when his mother gave her consent to his +remaining with his uncle; grieved as he was at being parted from +her and his sisters. The thought that he should, in time, be able +to be of assistance to her was a pleasant one; and aided him to +support the pain of parting when, a week later, she sailed with the +girls for England. + +"I suppose you have not done any shooting, Stanley?" his uncle +asked. + +"Not with a gun, but I have practised sometimes with pistols. +Father thought that it would be useful." + +"Very useful; and you must learn to shoot well with them, and with +fowling-piece and rifle. What with river thieves, and dacoits, and +wild tribes--to say nothing of wild beasts--a man who travels +about, as I do, wants to be able to shoot straight. The straighter +you shoot, the less likely you are to have to do so. I have come to +be a good shot myself and, whenever we row up a river, I constantly +practise--either at floating objects in the water, or at birds or +other marks in the trees. I have the best weapons that money can +buy. It is my one extravagance, and the result is that, to my +boatmen and the men about me, my shooting seems to be marvellous; +they tell others of it, and the result is that I am regarded with +great respect. I have no doubt, whatever, that it has saved me from +much trouble; for the natives have almost got to believe that I +only have to point my gun, and the man I wish to kill falls dead, +however far distant." + +Two days after the departure of Mrs. Brooke, her brother and +Stanley started down the Hoogly in a native trader. + +"She is a curious-looking craft, uncle." + +"Yes; she would not be called handsome in home waters, but she is +uncommonly fast; and I find her much more convenient, in many ways, +than a British merchantman." + +"Is she yours, uncle?" + +"No, she is not mine, and I do not exactly charter her; but she +works principally for me. You see, the wages are so low that they +can work a craft like this for next to nothing. Why, the captain +and his eight men, together, don't get higher pay than the +boatswain of an English trader. + +"The captain owns the vessel. He is quite content if he gets a few +rupees a month, in addition to what he considers his own rate of +pay. His wife and his two children live on board. If the craft can +earn twenty rupees a week, he considers that he is doing +splendidly. At the outside, he would not pay his men more than four +rupees a month, each, and I suppose that he would put down his +services at eight; so that would leave him forty rupees a month as +the profit earned by the ship. + +"In point of fact, I keep him going pretty steadily. He makes trips +backwards and forwards between the different depots; carries me up +the rivers for a considerable distance; does a little trade on his +own account--not in goods such as I sell, you know, but purely +native stores--takes a little freight when he can get it, and +generally a few native passengers. I pay him fifteen rupees a week, +and I suppose he earns from five to ten in addition; so that the +arrangement suits us both, admirably. + +"I keep the stern cabin for myself. As you see, she has four little +brass guns, which I picked up for a song at Calcutta; and there are +twenty-four muskets aft. It is an arrangement that the crew are to +practise shooting once a week, so they have all come to be pretty +fair shots; and the captain, himself, can send a two-pound shot +from those little guns uncommonly straight. + +"You will be amused when you see us practising for action. The +captain's wife and the two boys load the guns, and do it very +quickly, too. He runs round from gun to gun, takes aim, and fires. +The crew shout, and yell, and bang away with their muskets. I take +the command, and give a few pice among them, if the firing has been +accurate. + +"We have been attacked, once or twice, in the upper waters; but +have always managed to beat the robbers off, without much +difficulty. The captain fires away, till they get pretty close; and +I pepper them with my rifles--I have three of them. When they get +within fifty yards, the crew open fire and, as they have three +muskets each, they can make it very hot for the pirates. I have a +store of hand grenades and, if they push on, I throw two or three +on board when they get within ten yards; and that has always +finished the matter. They don't understand the things bursting in +the middle of them. I don't mean to say that my armament would be +of much use, if we were trading along the coast of the Malay +Peninsula or among the Islands, but it is quite enough to deal with +the petty robbers of these rivers." + +"But I thought that you had a boat that you went up the rivers in, +uncle?" + +"Yes; we tow a rowboat and a store boat up, behind this craft, as +far as she can go; that is, as long as she has wind enough to make +against the sluggish stream. When she can go no further, I take to +the rowboat. It has eight rowers, carries a gun--it is a +twelve-pounder howitzer--that I have had cut short, so that it is +only about a foot long. Of course it won't carry far, but that is +not necessary. Its charge is a pound of powder and a ten-pound bag +of bullets and, at a couple of hundred yards, the balls scatter +enough to sweep two or three canoes coming abreast and, as we can +charge and fire the little thing three times in a minute, it is all +that we require, for practical purposes. + +"It is only on a few of the rivers we go up that there is any fear +of trouble. On the river from Sylhet to the east and its branches +in Kathee or, as it is sometimes called, Kasi, the country is +comparatively settled. The Goomtee beyond Oudypore is well enough, +until it gets into Kaayn, which is what they call independent. That +is to say, it owns no authority; and some villages are peaceable +and well disposed, while others are savage. The same may be said of +the Munnoo and Fenny rivers. + +"For the last two years I have done a good deal of trade in Assam, +up the Brahmaputra river. As far as Rungpoor there are a great many +villages on the banks, and the people are quiet and peaceable." + +"Then you don't go further south than Chittagong, uncle?" + +"No. The Burmese hold Aracan on the south and, indeed, for some +distance north of it there is no very clearly-defined border. You +see, the great river runs from Rangoon very nearly due north, +though with a little east in it; and extends along at the back of +the districts I trade with; so that the Burmese are not very far +from Manipur which, indeed, stands on a branch of the Irrawaddy, of +which another branch runs nearly up to Rungpoor. + +"We shall have big trouble with them, one of these days; indeed, we +have had troubles already. You see, the Burmese are a great and +increasing power, and have so easily conquered all their neighbours +that they regard themselves as invincible. Until the beginning of +the eighteenth century, the Burmese were masters of Pegu; then the +people of that country, with the help of the Dutch and Portuguese, +threw off their yoke. But the Burmese were not long kept down for, +in 1753, Alompra--a hunter--gathered a force round him and, after +keeping up an irregular warfare for some time, was joined by so +many of his countrymen that he attacked and captured Ava, conquered +the whole of Pegu and, in 1759, the English trading colony at +Negrais were massacred. + +"This, however, was not the act of Alompra, but of the treachery of +a Frenchman named Levine, and of an Armenian; who incited the +Burmese of the district to exterminate the English--hoping, no +doubt, thus to retrieve, in a new quarter, the fortunes of France, +which in India were being extinguished by the genius of Clive. The +English were, at the time, far too occupied with the desperate +struggle they were having, in India, to attempt to revenge the +massacre of their countrymen at Negrais. + +"Very rapidly the Burman power spread. They captured the valuable +Tenasserim coast, from Siam; repulsed a formidable invasion from +China; annexed Aracan, and dominated Manipur, and thus became +masters of the whole tract of country lying between China and +Hindustan. As they now bordered upon our territory, a mission was +sent in 1794 to them from India, with a proposal for the settlement +of boundaries, and for the arrangement of trade between the two +countries. Nothing came of it, for the Burmese had already +proposed, to themselves, the conquest of India; and considered the +mission as a proof of the terror that their advance had inspired +among us. + +"After the conquest by them of Aracan, in 1784, there had been a +constant irritation felt against us by the Burmese; owing to the +fact that a great number of fugitives from that country had taken +refuge in the swamps and islands of Chittagong; from which they, +from time to time, issued and made raids against the Burmese. In +1811 these fugitives, in alliance with some predatory chiefs, +invaded Aracan in force and, being joined by the subject population +there, expelled the Burmese. These, however, soon reconquered the +province. The affair was, nevertheless, unfortunate, since the +Burmese naturally considered that, as the insurrection had begun +with an invasion by the fugitives in Chittagong, it had been +fomented by us. + +"This was in no way the fact. We had no force there capable of +keeping the masses of fugitives in order; but we did our best, and +arrested many of the leaders, when they returned after their +defeat. This, however, was far from satisfying the Burmese. A +mission was sent, to Ava, to assure them of our friendly +intentions; and that we had had nothing whatever to do with the +invasion, and would do all we could to prevent its recurrence. The +Burmese government declined to receive the mission. + +"We, ourselves, had much trouble with the insurgents for, fearful +of re-entering Burma after their defeat, they now carried on a +series of raids in our territory; and it was not until 1816 that +these were finally suppressed. Nevertheless, the court of Ava +remained dissatisfied; and a fresh demand was raised for the +surrender of the chiefs who had been captured, and of the whole of +the fugitives living in the government of Chittagong. The Marquis +of Hastings replied that the British government could not, without +a violation of the principles of justice, deliver up those who had +sought its protection; that tranquillity now existed, and there was +no probability of a renewal of the disturbances; but that the +greatest vigilance should be used, to prevent and punish the +authors of any raid that might be attempted against Aracan. + +"A year later a second letter was received, demanding on the part +of the king the cession of Ramoo, Chittagong, Moorshedabad, and +Dacca; that is to say, of the whole British possessions east of the +Ganges. Lord Hastings simply replied that if it was possible to +suppose that the demand had been dictated by the King of Ava, the +British government would be justified in regarding it as a +declaration of war. To this the Burmese made no reply. Doubtless +they had heard of the successes we had gained in Central India, and +had learned that our whole force was disposable against them. + +"Three years ago the old king died, and a more warlike monarch +succeeded him. Since 1810 they have been mixed up in the troubles +that have been going on in Assam, where a civil war had been +raging. One party or other has sought their assistance, and +fighting has been going on there nearly incessantly and, two months +ago, the Burmese settled the question by themselves taking +possession of the whole country. + +"This has, of course, been a serious blow to me. Although disorder +has reigned, it has not interfered with my trading along the banks +of the river; but now that the Burmese have set up their authority, +I shall, for a time anyhow, be obliged to give up my operations +there; for they have evinced considerable hostility to us--have made +raids near Rungpoor, on our side of the river, and have pulled down +a British flag on an island in the Brahmaputra. We have taken, in +consequence, the principality of Cachar under our protection--indeed +its two princes, seeing that the Burmese were beginning to invade +their country, invited us to take this step--and we thus occupy the +passes from Manipur into the low country of Sylhet." + +"I wonder that you have been able to trade in Manipur, uncle, as +the Burmese have been masters there." + +"I am not trading with the capital itself, and the Burmese have +been too occupied with their affairs in Assam to exercise much +authority in the country. Besides, you see, there has not been war +between the two countries. Our merchants at Rangoon still carry on +their trade up the Irrawaddy; and in Assam, this spring, the only +trouble I had was that I had to pay somewhat higher tolls than I +had done before. However, now that Cachar is under our protection, +I hope that I shall make up for my loss of trade, in Assam, by +doing better than before in that province." + +"I thought you called it Kathee, uncle?" + +"So it is generally named but, as it is spoken of as Cachar in the +proclamation assuming the protectorate, I suppose it will be called +so in future; but all these names, out here, are spelt pretty much +according to fancy." + +While this conversation had been going on, the boat had been +running fast down the river, passing several European vessels +almost as if they had been standing still. + +"I should not have thought that a boat like this would pass these +large ships," Stanley said. + +"We have a good deal to learn in the art of sailing, yet," his +uncle replied. "A great many of these Indian dhows can run away +from a square-rigged ship, in light weather. I don't know whether +it is the lines of their hulls or the cut of the sails, but there +is no doubt about their speed. They seem to skim over the water, +while our bluff-bowed craft shove their way through it. I suppose, +some day, we shall adopt these long sharp bows; when we do, it will +make a wonderful difference in our rate of sailing. Then, too, +these craft have a very light draft of water but, on the other +hand, they have a deep keel, which helps them to lie close to the +wind; and that long, overhanging bow renders them capital craft in +heavy weather for, as they meet the sea, they rise over it +gradually; instead of its hitting them full on the bow, as it does +our ships. We have much to learn, yet, in the way of ship +building." + +The trader had his own servant with him, and the man now came up +and said that a meal was ready, and they at once entered the cabin. +It was roomy and comfortable, and was, like the rest of the boat, +of varnished teak. There were large windows in the stern; it had a +table, with two fixed benches; and there were broad, low sofas on +each side. Above these the muskets were disposed, in racks; while +at the end by the door were Tom Pearson's own rifles, four brace of +pistols, and a couple of swords. Ten long spears were suspended +from the roof of the cabin, in leather slings. The floor, like the +rest of the cabin, was varnished. + +"It looks very comfortable, uncle." + +"Yes; you see, I live quite half my time on board, the rest being +spent in the boat. My man is a capital cook. He comes from +Chittagong, and is a Mug." + +"What are Mugs, uncle?" + +"They are the original inhabitants of Aracan. He was one of those +who remained there, after the Burmese had conquered it, and speaks +their language as well as his own. I recommend you to begin it with +him, at once. If things settle down in Assam, it will be very +useful for you in arranging with the Burmese officials. You won't +find it very easy, though of course your knowledge of three or four +Indian tongues will help you. It is said to be a mixture of the old +Tali, Sanscrit, Tartar, and Chinese. The Tartar and Chinese words +will, of course, be quite new to you; the other two elements will +resemble those that you are familiar with. + +"I talk to the man in Hindustani. He picked up a little of it at +Chittagong, and has learned a good deal more, during the two years +that he has been with me; and through that you will be able to +learn Burmese." + +A week later the dhow entered the harbour. Stanley had passed most +of his time in conversation with Khyen, Tom's servant. The facility +his tongue had acquired in the Indian languages was of great +benefit to him, and he speedily picked up a good many Burmese +sentences. + +For the next six months he continued, with his uncle, the work the +latter had carried on; and enjoyed it much. They sailed up the +sluggish rivers, with their low, flat shores, in the dhow; towing +the rowboat and the store boat behind them. The crews of these +boats lived on board the dhow until their services were required, +helping in its navigation and aiding the crew when the wind dropped +and sweeps were got out. + +The villages along the banks were for the most part small, but were +very numerous. At each of these the dhow brought up. There was, in +almost all cases, sufficient water to allow of her being moored +alongside the banks and, as soon as she did so, the natives came on +board to make their purchases and dispose of their produce. In +addition to the European and Indian goods carried, the dhow was +laden with rice, for which there was a considerable demand at most +of the villages. + +As soon as he had learned the price of the various goods, and their +equivalent in the products of the country, Stanley did much of the +bartering; while his uncle went ashore and talked with the head men +of the village, with all of whom he made a point of keeping on good +terms, and so securing a great portion of the trade that might, +otherwise, have been carried by native craft. + +Three times during the six months the dhow had gone back to +Calcutta, to fetch fresh supplies of goods and to take in another +cargo of rice; while the trader proceeded higher up the river, in +his own boats. While on the voyage, Stanley always had the rifle +and fowling piece that his uncle had handed over, for his special +use, leaning against the bulwark, close at hand; and frequently +shot waterfowl, which were so abundant that he was able to keep not +only their own table supplied, but to furnish the crew and boatmen +with a considerable quantity of food. They had had no trouble with +river pirates, for these had suffered so heavily, in previous +attacks upon the dhow, that they shunned any repetition of their +loss. At the same time every precaution was taken, for, owing to the +intestine troubles in Cachar and Assam, fugitives belonging to the +party that happened, for the time, to be worsted, were driven to +take refuge in the jungles near the rivers; and to subsist largely +on plunder, the local authorities being too feeble to root them +out. The boats, therefore, were always anchored in the middle of +the stream at night and two men were kept on watch. + +To the south as well as in the north, the trading operations were +more restricted; for the Burmese became more and more aggressive. +Elephant hunters, in the hills that formed the boundary of the +British territory to the east, were seized and carried off; +twenty-three in one place being captured, and six in another--all +being ill treated and imprisoned, and the remonstrances of the +Indian government treated with contempt by the Rajah of Aracan. It +was evident that the object of the Burmese was to possess +themselves of this hill country in order that they might, if they +chose, pour down at any time into the cultivated country round the +town of Ramoo. + +"There is no doubt, Stanley," said his uncle one day, "we shall +very shortly have a big war with the Burmese. The fact that these +constant acts of aggression are met only by remonstrances, on our +part, increases their arrogance; and they are convinced that we are +in mortal terror of them. They say that in Assam their leaders are +openly boasting that, ere long, they will drive us completely from +India; and one of their generals has confidently declared that, +after taking India, they intend to conquer England. With such +ignorant people, there is but one argument understood--namely, +force; and sooner or later we shall have to give them such a hearty +thrashing that they will be quiet for some time. + +"Still, I grant that the difficulties are great. Their country is a +tremendous size, the beggars are brave, and the climate, at any +rate near the sea coast, is horribly unhealthy. Altogether it will +be a big job; but it will have to be done, or in a very short time +we shall see them marching against Calcutta." + + + +Chapter 2: The Outbreak of War. + + +On the last day of September, 1823--just a year after Stanley had +joined his uncle--the dhow sailed into Chittagong; which had now +taken the place of Sylhet as the traders' chief depot, the latter +place being too near the Burmese, in Assam, for him to care about +keeping a large stock of his goods there. He went ashore as soon as +the dhow cast anchor, Stanley remaining on board. + +"The fat is all in the fire, Stanley," Tom Pearson said, when he +returned. "The Burmese have attacked and killed some of our troops, +and it is certain that the government cannot put up with that." + +"Where was it, uncle?" + +"Down at the mouth of the Naaf. As you know, that is the southern +boundary of the province, and there was a row there in January. One +of our native boats laden with rice was coming up the river, on our +side of the channel, when an armed Burmese boat came across and +demanded duty. Of course, our fellows said they were in their own +waters, whereupon the Burmese fired upon them and killed the +steersman. There were reports, then, that bodies of Burmese troops +were moving about on their side of the river, and that it was +feared they would cross over and burn some of our villages. +Accordingly, our guard at the mouth of the river was increased to +fifty men, and a few of these were posted on the island of +Shapuree. + +"This island lies close to our shore and, indeed, the channel +between can be forded at low water. It has always formed part of +the province of Chittagong, and there has never been any question +raised by the Burmese as to this. However, the Viceroy of Aracan +called upon our resident here to withdraw the guard, asserting the +right of the King of Ava to the island. + +"Since then letters have passed to and fro, but I hear that the +Burmese have settled the question by landing on Shapuree. One night +last week they attacked our post there, killed and wounded four of +the sepoys, and drove the rest off the island. The Indian +government have put up with a great deal, rather than engage in so +costly and difficult an operation as a war with Burma, but it is +impossible that we can stand this." + +The Indian government, however, used every endeavour to avert the +necessity for war; although the Rajah of Aracan lost no time in +writing a letter to the government of Calcutta, stating that he had +occupied the island of Shapuree, and that unless they submitted +quietly to this act of justice, the cities of Dacca and +Moorshedabad would be forcibly seized. In order, however, to +postpone, at any rate, the outbreak of war, the government of +Bengal resolved to give the court of Ava an opportunity to withdraw +from the position taken up. They therefore acted as if the attack +on the guard at Shapuree had been the action of the Viceroy of +Aracan alone, and addressed a declaration to the Burmese +government, recapitulating the facts of the case, pointing out that +Shapuree had always been acknowledged by Burma as forming part of +the province of Chittagong, and calling upon the government to +disavow the action of the local authorities. The Burmese considered +this, as it was in fact, a proof that the government of India was +reluctant to enter upon a contest with them; and confirmed Burma in +its confident expectation of annexing the eastern portions of +Bengal, if not of expelling the English altogether. + +In the meantime, Shapuree had been reoccupied by us. The +Burmese--after driving out the little garrison--had retired and, +two months after the attack, two companies of the 20th Native +Infantry arrived by sea, from Calcutta, and landed there. A +stockade was built, and two six-pounders placed in position. +Another company was stationed on the mainland, and the Planet and +three gunboats, each carrying a twelve-pounder, were stationed in +the river. + +The Burmese at once collected large bodies of troops, both in +Aracan and Assam. The government of Bengal made preparations to +defend our frontier, and especially the position in the north, as +an advance of the Burmese in this direction would not only threaten +the important towns of Dacca and Moorshedabad, but would place the +invaders in dangerous proximity to Calcutta. Accordingly, a portion +of the 10th and 23rd Native Infantry, and four companies of the +Rungpoor local force, were marched to Sylhet; and outposts thrown +forward to the frontier. + +Seeing that the Burmese operations would probably commence in the +north, Tom Pearson had, after completing his arrangements at +Chittagong, sailed north to remove his depots from Sylhet, and +other places that would be exposed to an attack from that +direction. They reached Sylhet the first week in January. By this +time Stanley, from his constant conversation with his uncle's +servant, had come to speak Burmese as fluently as the Indian +languages. He was now nearly sixteen, tall for his age, and active +but, owing to the hot climate and the absence of vigorous exercise, +he was less broad and muscular than most English lads of his age. + +They found on landing that news had arrived, two days before, that +a powerful army of Burmese had entered Cachar, from Manipur, and +had defeated the troops of Jambhir Sing; that 4000 Burmese and +Assamese had advanced from Assam into Cachar, and had begun to +stockade themselves at Bickrampore, at the foot of the Bhortoka +Pass; and that the third division was crossing into the district of +Jyntea, immediately to the north of Sylhet. There was a complete +panic in the town, and the ryots were flocking in from all the +surrounding country, with their families and belongings; and were +making their way down the country, in boats, to Dacca. + +"I am afraid, Stanley, there is an end of trade, for the present. +What we see here is, doubtless, taking place all over Cachar; and +it would be just as bad down at Chittagong. It is a heavy blow, for +I have done remarkably well this year, and was building up the +foundations for a good business. No doubt, when this trouble is +over. I shall be able to take it up again; and it may be, if we +thrash the Burmese heartily, which we are sure to do in the long +run, it may even prove a benefit. Still, there is no doubt that it +is a very bad business for me. However as, just at present, there +is nothing whatever to be done, I propose, as soon as the goods are +all on board, to take a holiday, and go out and have a look at the +fighting." + +"You will take me with you, uncle?" Stanley asked eagerly. + +"Certainly, lad. We don't mean to do any fighting ourselves, but +only to look on; and it may be that, after it is over, you may be +able to make yourself useful, if they want to ask questions of any +Burmese prisoners." + +"You think that there is no chance of their beating us?" + +"I should think not, though of course there is no saying; still, I +don't think these fellows will be able to stand against our troops. +Of course, they have no idea, whatever, of our style of fighting, +and have never met any really formidable foes; so that I imagine we +shall make pretty short work of them. However, as we shall be +mounted--for I will hire a couple of horses, there have been plenty +of them driven into the town--we shall be able to make a bolt of +it, if necessary. Of course, we will take our rifles and pistols +with us." + +The goods were not placed on board the dhow, but in what was called +the store boat; as the trader had determined to take up his abode +in his rowboat, which could move about much faster than the dhow; +and to allow the captain of that craft to make a good thing of it, +by taking down to Dacca as many of the fugitives as she would hold. + +Finding that the Burmese division that had entered Jyntea was +intrenching itself, at a few miles' distance, Major Newton, the +officer commanding on the Sylhet frontier, concentrated his force +at Jatrapur, a village five miles beyond the Sylhet boundary. Tom +Pearson had introduced himself to Major Newton, and asked +permission to accompany his force; saying that his nephew would be +able, if necessary, to communicate with the Burmese either before +or after the action, and that both would willingly act as +aides-de-camp. The offer was accepted with thanks, and they rode +out with him, on the evening of the 16th of January, 1824, to +Jatrapur. + +At one o'clock in the morning the troops were roused, and marched +an hour later. At daybreak they came in sight of the stockade, and +a few shots were at once fired upon the advanced guard by the +Burmese. A portion of their force was lying in a village hard by. + +Major Newton at once divided his command into two bodies. One of +these was led by Captain Johnston against the front of the +stockade. The other, under Captain Rowe, attacked the village +adjoining. The Burmese stationed there gave way, after a very faint +resistance. They were accustomed to rely always on stockades; and +this attack upon them, when not so protected, shook them at once. +Those in the stockade, however, made a resolute resistance. + +Captain Rowe, after gaining possession of the village, and seeing +the occupants in full flight, moved his force to aid the other +division; and the Burmese, dispirited by the defeat of their +countrymen, and finding themselves attacked on two sides, gave way +and fled, leaving a hundred dead behind them; while on the British +side but six sepoys were killed. + +The Burmese fled to the hills, at a speed that rendered pursuit +hopeless by the more heavily-armed troops; and the fugitives soon +rallied, and effected their junction with the division advancing +from Manipur. After the action Major Newton returned to Sylhet, and +a few days later Mr. Scott, who had been appointed commissioner, +arrived there and, advancing to Bhadrapur, opened communications +with the Burmese. As, however, it became evident that the latter +were only negotiating in order to gain time to intrench themselves +near Jatrapur, to which they had returned, he again placed the +matter in the hands of the military commanders. + +The Burmese force amounted to about six thousand men. They had +erected strong stockades on each bank of the river Surma, and had +thrown a bridge across to connect them. Captain Johnston advanced +with a wing of the 10th Native Infantry, a company of the 23rd +Native Infantry, and a small party of men of a local corps. Small +as was this force, he divided it into two parties. One of these, +under Captain Rowe, crossed the river; and then both moved against +the enemy. The Burmese opened fire as they advanced, but the sepoys +marched gallantly forward, and drove the enemy out of their +unfinished intrenchments at the point of the bayonet. The Assam +division retreated hastily to the Bhortoka Pass, while the Manipur +force stockaded itself at Doodpatnee. + +The Assam division was first attacked, and the stockade carried at +the point of the bayonet. Lieutenant Colonel Bowen, who now +commanded, then moved against the position at Doodpatnee. This was +very strong. Steep hills covered the rear; while the other faces of +the intrenchments were defended by a deep ditch, fourteen feet +wide, with a chevaux de frise of pointed bamboos on its outer edge. +Although the position was attacked with great gallantry, it was too +strong to be captured by so small a force; and they were obliged to +withdraw to Jatrapur, with the loss of one officer killed and four +wounded, and about one hundred and fifty sepoys killed and wounded. + +However, their bravery had not been without effect, for the Burmese +evacuated their stockade and retreated to Manipur, leaving Cachar +free from its invaders. Thus, in less than three weeks, the Burmese +invasion of the northern provinces had been hurled back by a +British force of less than a tenth of that of the invaders. + +Stanley and his uncle had been present at all these engagements +and, in the absence of any cavalry, had done good service in +conveying messages and despatches; and the lad had several times +acted as interpreter between the officers and Burmese prisoners. +Both received letters from the commissioner, thanking them for the +assistance that they had rendered. + +"That last affair was unfortunate, Stanley; and it is evident that +these stockades of theirs are nasty places to attack, and that they +ought to be breached by guns before the men are sent forward to +storm them. However, as the Burmese have gone, our repulse does not +matter much. + +"Well, I felt sure that we should thrash them, but I certainly gave +them credit for having a great deal more pluck than they have +shown. As it is, if there is nothing fresh takes place here, the +natives and little traders will soon be coming back from Dacca, and +business will be better than before; for the Burmese have been +talking so big, for the last three years, that no one has bought +more than would just carry him on; while now they will be more +inclined to lay in good stocks of goods. + +"Tomorrow we will start for Chittagong. You see, I have a +considerable store there; and there is a chance of much more +serious fighting, in that quarter, than this little affair we have +seen. The Governor of Aracan has, all along, been the source of +troubles; and we may expect that he will cross into the province at +the head of a large force, and may do an immense deal of damage, +before we can get enough troops there to oppose him." + +Descending the river they coasted along until they arrived, early +in March, at Chittagong. They found that great alarm reigned there. +In January, Bandoola, the greatest military leader of the Burmese, +who was known to have been one of the most strenuous supporters of +the war policy at the court of Ava, had arrived at Aracan and taken +the command of the troops collected there, and had brought with him +considerable reinforcements. + +A wanton outrage that had been committed by the Burmese showed how +intent they were upon hostilities. Owing to the unhealthiness of +the islet of Shapuree, the sepoys stationed there had been +withdrawn; and the Company's pilot vessel, Sophia, was ordered to +join the gunboats off that island. Four deputies from the Burmese +court arrived at Mungdoo, on the opposite shore; and these invited +the commander of the Sophia to come on shore, in order that they +might talk over with him, in a friendly way, the situation of +affairs. He unsuspectingly accepted their invitation and landed, +accompanied by an officer and some native seamen. The party were at +once seized and sent prisoners to Aracan, where they were detained +for a month, and then sent back to Mungdoo. + +This wanton insult was followed by a formal declaration of war, by +the government of India; and a similar document was issued by the +court of Ava. The force at Sylhet was reinforced, and that in +Chittagong increased. It consisted of a wing of the 13th and of the +20th Native Regiments, and a battalion of the 23rd, with a local +levy, amounting in all to some 3000 men. Of these a wing of the +23rd, with two guns, and a portion of the native levies were posted +at Ramoo, which was the point most threatened by an invasion from +Aracan. + +It was in the north that hostilities first commenced, a force +moving into Assam and driving the Burmese before them. Several +sharp blows were dealt the enemy and, had it not been for the +setting in of the wet season, they would have been driven entirely +out of Assam. + +"I think, Stanley," his uncle said, after he had been a short time +at Chittagong, "you had better go up to Ramoo, and see about +matters there. Of course, until the Burmese move we cannot say what +their game is likely to be; but it will be as well to get the +stores ready for embarkation, in case they should advance in that +direction. If they do so, get everything on board at once; and you +can then be guided by circumstances. As the dhow came in yesterday, +I can spare both our boats; and shall, of course, ship the goods +here on board the big craft. Even if the Burmese come this way, I +have no fear of their taking the town; and shall, of course, lend a +hand in the defence, if they attempt it. You can do the same at +Ramoo, if you like. + +"I was chatting with Colonel Shatland yesterday. He tells me that a +large fleet has been collected, and that an expedition will be sent +to capture Rangoon so, in that case, it is likely that Bandoola and +his force will march off in that direction. + +"I think government are wrong. It will be impossible for the troops +to move, when the wet season once sets in; and they will lose a +tremendous lot of men from sickness, if they are cooped up in +Rangoon. They had very much better have sent a few thousand men +down here, to act on the defensive and repel any attempted +invasion, until the rains are over; when they could have been +shipped again, and join the expedition against Rangoon. It seems to +me a mad-headed thing, to begin at the present time of the year. We +have put up with the insults of the Burmese for so long that we +might just as well have waited for the favourable season, before we +began our operations in earnest." + +Accordingly, on the following day Stanley started south for Ramoo +and, on arriving there, took charge of the trading operations. +Shortly after, meeting Captain Noton--who commanded there--in the +street, he recognized him as an officer who had been stationed at +the same cantonment as his father; and whom he had, four years +previously, known well. + +"You don't recognize me, Captain Noton," he said. "I am the son of +Captain Brooke, of the 33rd." + +"I certainly did not recognize you," the officer said, "but I am +glad to meet you again. Let me think; yes, your name is Stanley, +and a regular young pickle you used to be. What on earth are you +doing here? Of course, I heard of your poor father's death, and was +grieved, indeed, at his loss. Where is your mother? She is well, I +hope." + +"She went back to England with my sisters, two months after my +father's death. I joined my uncle, her brother. He is a trader, and +carries on business in the district between here and Sylhet, +trading principally on the rivers; but of course the war has put a +stop to that, for the present. We saw the fighting up in the north, +and then came down to this district. He has remained at Chittagong, +and I am in charge of goods here. I speak Burmese fairly now and, +if I can be of any use to you, I shall be very glad to be so. There +is not much business here; and the Parsee clerk, who is generally +in charge, can look after it very well. I acted as interpreter with +the troops in the north, and have a letter from Mr. Scott, the +commissioner, thanking me for my services." + +"I remember you used to be able to talk four or five of the native +languages, but how did you come to pick up Burmese?" + +"From a servant of my uncle's. We thought that there would be sure +to be war, sooner or later; and that, after it was over, there +would be a good chance of profitable trade on the Burmese rivers. I +had no great difficulty in learning it from my uncle's man, who was +a native of Aracan." + +"I have no doubt you will find it very useful. What a big fellow +you have grown, Stanley; at least, as far as height is concerned. +Let me see. How old are you, now?" + +"I am past sixteen," Stanley replied. "I have had several touches +of fever--caught, I suppose, from the damp on the rivers--but I +think that I am pretty well acclimatized, now. I know I don't look +very strong, but I have not had much active exercise and, of +course, the climate is against me." + +"Very much so. I wonder that you have kept your health as well as +you have, in this steamy climate. + +"I am going to the mess room, now. You had better come and lunch +with me, and I will introduce you to the other officers. We are +very strong in comparison to the force for, counting the assistant +surgeon, there are ten of us." + +"I shall be very glad, sir," Stanley said. "I have certainly been +feeling rather lonely here; for I know no one, and there is very +little to do. During the last year, I have often gone up one of the +rivers by myself; but there has always been occupation while, at +present, things are at a standstill." + +"I tell you what, Brooke, if you would like it, I can appoint you +interpreter. There is not one of us who speaks this Mug +language--which is, you know, almost the same as Burmese--and the +officers in charge of the native levy would be delighted to have +some one with them who could make the fellows understand. I can +appoint you a first-class interpreter. The pay is not very high, +you know; but you might just as well be earning it as doing +nothing, and it would give you a sort of official position and, as +the son of a British officer, and my friend, you would be one of +us." + +"Thank you very much, Captain Noton. I should like it immensely. +Should I have to get a uniform?" + +"There will be no absolute necessity for it; but if you get a white +patrol jacket, like this, and a white cap cover, it will establish +you in the eyes of the natives as an officer, and give you more +authority. Oh, by the way, you need not get them, for one of our +lieutenants died, the other day, of fever. His effects have not +been sold, yet; but you may as well have his patrol jackets and +belts. We can settle what you are to pay for them, afterwards. It +will only be a matter of a few rupees, anyhow." + +They now arrived at the house that had been taken for the use of +the officers. On entering, Captain Noton introduced him to the +others and, as several of these had at various times met his +father, in cantonments or on service, he was heartily welcomed by +them and, at luncheon, they listened with great interest to his +accounts of the fighting, in Cachar, with the Burmese. + +"I fancy we shall find them more formidable, here, if they come," +Captain Noton said. "Bandoola has a great reputation, and is +immensely popular with them. From what you say, a considerable +proportion of the fellows you met up there were Assamese levies, +raised by the Burmese. I grant that the Burmese, themselves, do not +seem to have done much better; but they would never have conquered +all the peoples they have come across, and built up a great empire, +if there had not been good fighting stuff in them. I have no doubt +that we shall thrash them, but I don't think we shall do it as +easily as our troops did in the north." + +The time now passed pleasantly with Stanley. He had, after thinking +it over, declined to accept payment for his services; for this +would have hindered his freedom of action, and prevented his +obeying any instructions that his uncle might send him. He +therefore joined as a volunteer interpreter, and was made a member +of the officers' mess. He was specially attached to the native levy +and, soon acquiring their words of command, assisted its officers +in drilling it into something like order. + +Early in May a Burmese division, 8000 strong, crossed the Naaf and +established itself at Rutnapullung, fourteen miles south of Ramoo. +As soon as Captain Noton learned that the Burmese had crossed the +river, he sent news of the fact to Chittagong, with a request that +reinforcements should be at once sent to him; and then moved out +with his force from Ramoo, to ascertain the strength of the enemy. +The Burmese were seen upon some hills, where they were constructing +stockades. The small British force advanced against them, drove +them off the hills and, following them, prepared to attack them in +the plain beyond. The guns, however, had not come up; partly owing +to the cowardice of the elephant drivers, and partly to the fact +that it was found that several of the essential parts of the guns +had been left behind. + +Without their assistance to clear the way, Captain Noton felt that +it would be imprudent to attack so great a force; and therefore +fell back to Ramoo. Here he was joined by three companies of the +20th Native Infantry, bringing up his force to close upon a +thousand; of whom about half were sepoys, and the rest native +levies. Had any energy, whatever, been shown by the officer in +command of Chittagong, in sending up reinforcements--which he could +well have spared, now that the point of attack by the Burmese had +been made clear--Captain Noton might have taken the offensive, in +which case serious disaster would have been avoided, and the +Burmese would have been driven back across the Naaf. None, however, +came and, on the morning of the 13th of May, the enemy appeared on +the hill east of Ramoo, being separated from the British force by +the river of the same name. + +There was some difference of opinion, among the officers, as to +whether it would be better to maintain a position outside the town, +or to retreat at once; but the belief that reinforcements might +arrive, at any hour, caused Captain Noton to determine to keep in +the open, and so to cover the town as long as possible. + +On the evening of the 14th, the Burmese came down to the river as +if to cross it; but retired when the two six-pounder guns opened +fire upon them. That two small guns should produce such an effect +confirmed the British officers in their opinion that the Burmese, +although they might defend stockades well, were of little use in +the open. The next morning, however, the enemy effected the passage +of the river farther away and then, advancing, took possession of a +large tank surrounded by a high embankment. + +Captain Noton placed his force in an enclosure, with a bank three +feet high. His right flank was protected by the river; and a small +tank, some sixty paces in front, was occupied by a strong picket. +On his left, somewhat to the rear, was another tank, and at this +the native levies were placed. The main position was held by the +sepoys, with the two six-pounders. As the Burmese advanced, a sharp +fire was opened upon them; but they availed themselves of every +irregularity of the ground, and of cover of all kinds, and threw up +shelter banks with such rapidity that the fire was, by no means, so +effective as had been expected. + +During the day news came that the left wing of the 23rd Native +Infantry had left Chittagong on the 13th and, as it should arrive +the next day, Captain Noton determined to hold his ground; though +the Burmese continued to press forward, and a good many men, as +well as two or three officers, had been wounded by their fire. At +nightfall, a consultation was held. The reinforcements were +expected in the morning and, although the native levies had shown +signs of insubordination, and evidently could not be relied upon to +make a stand, if the Burmese attacked in earnest, it was resolved +to retain the position. + +During the night, the Burmese pushed forward their trenches. A +heavy fire was maintained on both sides during the day, but it was +with considerable difficulty that the officers in command of the +levies kept the men from bolting. + +"Things look very black," Captain Pringle said to Stanley, when the +firing died away, at nightfall. "Reinforcements should have been +here, today. It is scandalous that they should not have been pushed +forward, at once, when we asked for them. Still more so that, when +they once started, they should not have come on with the greatest +possible speed. I doubt whether we shall be able to hold these +cowardly curs together till tomorrow. If they bolt, the sepoys will +be sure to do so, too; in fact, their position would be altogether +untenable, for the Burmese could march round this flank and take +them in rear. + +"I wish to Heaven we had two or three companies of white troops, to +cover a retreat. There would be no fear of the sepoys yielding to a +panic, if they had British troops with them; but when they are +outnumbered, as they are now, one can hardly blame them if they +lose heart, when the enemy are ten times their strength, and will +be twenty to one against them, if our fellows here bolt." + +The next morning, the Burmese had pushed up their trenches to +within twelve paces of the British lines, and a tremendous fire was +opened. At nine o' clock, in spite of the efforts of their officers +to keep them steady, the native levies bolted; and the officers +with them dashed across the intervening ground towards the main +body. One of them fell dead, and two others were wounded. Stanley +was running, when he fell headlong, without a moment's thought or +consciousness. + +The Burmese occupied the tank as soon as the levies had abandoned +it, and their fire at once took the defenders of the main position +in flank. A retreat was now necessary, and the sepoys drew off in +good order but, as the exulting Burmans pressed hotly upon them, +and their cavalry cut off and killed every man who fell wounded +from their ranks, they became seized with a panic. In vain their +officers exhorted them to keep steady. Reaching a rivulet, the men +threw down their rifles and accoutrements as they crossed it, and +took to headlong flight. + +The little group of officers gathered together, and fought to the +end. Captains Noton, Truman, and Pringle; Lieutenant Grigg, Ensign +Bennet, and Maismore the doctor were killed. Three officers, only, +made their escape; of these, two were wounded. + +The fugitives, both natives and sepoys, continued their flight; and +when, two or three days later, they straggled into Chittagong, it +was found that the total loss in killed and missing amounted to +about two hundred and fifty. Those taken prisoners numbered only +about twenty. All these were more or less severely wounded, for no +quarter had been given. They had, in the pursuit, been passed over +as dead; and when, after this was over, they were found to be +alive, they were spared from no feeling of humanity, but that they +might be sent to Ava, as proofs of the victory obtained over the +British. The number actually found alive was greater, but only +those were spared that were capable of travelling. + +Among these was Stanley Brooke. He had remained insensible, until +the pursuit had been discontinued. A violent kick roused him to +consciousness and, sitting up, he found that half a dozen Burmese +were standing round him. His first action, on recovering his +senses, was to discover where he was wounded. Seeing no signs of +blood on his white clothes, he took off his cap and passed his hand +over his head; and found that the blood was flowing from a wound +just on the top, where a bullet had cut away the hair and scalp, +and made a wound nearly three inches long, at the bottom of which +he could feel the bone. + +Looking up at the Burmese, he said, in their own language: + +"That was a pretty close shave, wasn't it?" + +Two or three of them laughed, and all looked amused. Two of them +then helped him to his feet; and the group, among whom there were +some officers, then took him some distance to the rear, where he +was ordered to sit down with three wounded sepoys who had been +brought in. + + + +Chapter 3: A Prisoner. + + +The little group of prisoners received several additions, until the +number mounted up to twenty. The spot where they were placed was +close to the bank of the river and, as all were suffering severely +from thirst, Stanley asked and obtained permission from the guard +to fetch some water. He first knelt down and took a long drink; +then he bathed his head and, soaking his handkerchief with water, +made it into a pad, placed it on the wound, and put his cap on over +it. Then he filled a flask that he carried, and joined his +companions. These were permitted to go down, one by one, to the +river to drink and bathe their wounds. + +Stanley had already learned, from them, all they knew of what had +happened after he had been stunned by the bullet. Two of them had +crossed the rivulet, before being wounded; and these said that they +believed all the white officers had been killed, but that they +thought most of the troops had got away. + +"It is more than they deserved," Stanley said indignantly. "I don't +say much about the Mugs. They had very little drill or discipline +and, naturally, were afraid of the Burmese, who had long been their +masters; but if the sepoys had kept together under their officers, +they might all have escaped, for the Burmese would never have been +able to break their ranks." + +"Some of the officers had been killed, and most of them wounded, +before the retreat began, sahib," one of the sepoys said +apologetically, "and they were ten to one against us." + +"Yes, I know that; but you who had fought before should have known +well enough that, as long as you kept together, you could have +beaten them off; and they would have been glad enough to have given +up the pursuit, at last. No doubt they all wanted to have a share +in the plunder of Ramoo." + +"What do you think that they are going to do with us, sahib?" + +"From what they said as they brought me here, I think that we shall +be sent to Ava, or Amarapura. They lie close together, and the +court is sometimes at one place and sometimes at the other. What +they will do with us when we get there, I don't know. They may cut +off our heads, they may put us in prison; anyhow, you may be sure +that we shall not have a pleasant time of it. + +"All we have to hope for is that the capture of Rangoon, by our +fleet, may lower their pride and bring them to treat for terms. It +sailed nearly six weeks ago from Calcutta, and was to have been +joined by one from Madras and, allowing for delays, it ought to +have been at Rangoon a fortnight since, and would certainly capture +the place without any difficulty. So possibly by the time we reach +Ava we shall find that peace has been made. + +"Still, the Burmese may not consider the loss of Rangoon to be +important, and may even try to recapture it--which you may be sure +they won't do, for I heard at Chittagong that there were some +twenty thousand troops coming; which would be quite enough, if +there were but good roads and plenty of transport for them, to +march through Burma from end to end." + +In the evening food was brought to the prisoners and, talking with +some of the Burmese who came up to look at them, Stanley learned +that Bandoola himself had not accompanied the force across the +Naaf, and that it was commanded by the rajahs who ruled the four +provinces of Aracan. Upon the following morning the prisoners were +marched away, under a strong guard. Six days later they reached the +camp of Bandoola. They were drawn up at a distance from the great +man's tent. He came down, accompanied by a party of officers, to +look at them. He beckoned to Stanley. + +Stanley is brought before Bandoola, the Burmese general. + +"Ask him if he is an officer," he said to an interpreter, standing +by his side. + +The man put the question in Hindustani. Stanley replied, in +Burmese: + +"I am an officer, your lordship, but a temporary one, only. I +served in the Mug levy, and was appointed for my knowledge of their +tongue." + +"How is it that you come to speak our language?" Bandoola asked, in +surprise. + +"I am a trader, your lordship, but when our trade was put an end +to, by the outbreak of the war, I entered the army to serve until +peace was made. I learned the language from a servant in the +service of my uncle, whose assistant I was." + +The Burmese general was capable of acts of great cruelty, when he +considered it necessary; but at other times was kindly and good +natured. + +"He is but a lad," he said to one of his officers, "and he seems a +bold young fellow. He would be useful as an interpreter to me, for +we shall want to question his countrymen when we make them all +prisoners. However, we must send him with the others to Ava, as he +is the only officer that we have taken; but I will send a message +to some of my friends, at the court, asking them to represent that +I consider he will be useful to me; and praying that he may be kept +for a time and treated well, and may be forwarded to me, again, +when I make my next move against the English." + +The following day the prisoners started under the escort of twenty +soldiers, commanded by an officer of some rank, who was specially +charged to take them safely to Ava. It was a fortnight's march to +the Irrawaddy. Until they neared the river the country was very +thinly populated but, when they approached its banks, the villages +were comparatively thick, standing for the most part in clearings +in a great forest. On the march the Burmese officer frequently +talked with Stanley, asked many questions about England and India; +and was evidently surprised, and somewhat sceptical, as to the +account the lad gave him of the fighting strength of the country. +He treated him with considerable indulgence, and sent him dishes +from his own table. + +When not talking with him, Stanley marched at the head of the +little party of prisoners--all of whom were sepoys, no quarter +having been given to the native levies. Of an evening, Stanley +endeavoured to keep up the sepoys' spirits by telling them that +probably, by this time, the British expedition had arrived at +Rangoon, and captured it; and that peace would most likely follow, +and they might be exchanged for any Burmese who fell into the hands +of the English. + +When they reached a village on the banks of the river the +population, on seeing them, came round and would have maltreated +them; had not the officer interfered, and said he had Bandoola's +orders to carry them safely to the court, and that anyone +interfering with them would be severely punished. The head man of +the village bent low, on hearing the general's name. + +"I ask your pardon, my lord. The prisoners shall not be touched. +But have you heard the news?" + +"I have heard no news," the officer said. + +"It arrived here yesterday, my lord. The barbarians have had the +audacity to sail up, with a great fleet of ships, to Rangoon. They +had vessels of war with them and, though our forts fired upon them, +they had so many cannon that we could not resist them, and they +have captured the town. This happened a fortnight since." + +The officer stood thunderstruck at what appeared, to him, to be an +act of audacious insolence. However, after a moment's pause, he +said wrathfully: + +"It is of little matter. The town was weak, and in no position for +defence; but a force will soon go down to sweep these barbarians +away. Now, get ready your war galley, as soon as possible." + +Each village on the river was compelled, by law, to furnish a war +galley for the king's service whenever it might be required. These +carried from fifty to a hundred men, and some three hundred of +these boats were always available for service, and constituted one +of the strongest divisions of the fighting force of the Burman +empire. The village was a large one, and in half an hour the crew +of the galley were on board and, rowing forty oars, started up the +river. + +"What think you of this news?" the officer said, beckoning to +Stanley to take his place in front of him. "These men must be mad, +to tempt the anger of the Lord of the Golden Stool, the mighty +Emperor. Had you heard aught of this?" + +"I heard but a vague rumour that a fleet had been collected, but I +heard nothing for certain as to its destination." + +"It is madness," the officer repeated. "We shall sweep them into +the sea. How many of them are there, do you think?" + +"As to that I can say little, my lord. I only heard a report that +some ships and troops were to sail--some from Madras and some from +Calcutta--but of the number of the men and ships, I know nothing +for certain." + +"They have taken evil council," the officer said, gravely. "I have +heard that they gained some slight advantage, in Cachar; but there +they had but irregular troops to meet, largely Assamese, who are +but poor cowards. This little success must have turned their heads. +They will now have our regular forces to deal with, and these will +number a hundred thousand--or twice as many, if necessary. Think +you that the handful that would be transported in ships can stand +against such a host?" + +"There may be more than you think, my lord. Many of the ships will +be very big, much bigger than those that trade with Rangoon; and +some of them will carry as many as five hundred men." + +"Even so," the officer said scornfully; "if there were twenty-five +such ships, or even fifty, the force would be as nothing to us. +They will have to take to their vessels, as soon as our army +approaches." + +"It may be so, sir; but I think that they will scarce go without +fighting. I would represent to you that, although much fewer in +numbers than your army which attacked us, at Ramoo, the troops made +a stout fight of it; and that they fought steadily, until the Mugs +ran away. After that, from what I hear, I admit that they fled +shamefully. But the troops that come to Rangoon will be better than +those were, for there will be white regiments among them; and +though these may, as you say, be overpowered with numbers and +destroyed, I do not think that you will see them running away." + +"And you think that they will really venture to withstand us? + +"I think that they will endeavour to do so." + +"Why, there will scarce be an occasion for fighting," the officer +said, disdainfully. "They were mad to come; they are madder, still, +to come now. The rainy season is just at hand. In another week it +will be upon us. The rivers will spread, the flat country will be a +marsh. Even we, who are accustomed to it, suffer. In places like +Rangoon fever and disease will sweep them away and, when the dry +season comes and our troops assemble to fight them, there will be +none left. They will die off like flies. We shall scarce capture +enough to send as prisoners to the emperor." + +Stanley felt that, in this respect, the Burman's prophecies were +but too likely to be fulfilled. He knew how deadly were the swamp +fevers to white men; and that in spite of his comfortable home on +board the dhow and boat, he had himself suffered although, during +the wet season, his uncle made a point of sailing along the coast, +and of ascending only rivers that flowed between high banks and +through a country free from swamps. He remembered that his uncle +had spoken, very strongly, of the folly of the expedition being +timed to arrive on the coast of Burma at the beginning of the wet +season; and had said that they would suffer terribly from fever +before they could advance up the country, unless it was intended to +confine the operations to the coast towns, until the dry season set +in. + +It would indeed have been impossible to have chosen a worse time +for the expedition but, doubtless, the government of India thought +chiefly of the necessity for forcing the Burmese to stand on the +defensive, and of so preventing the invasion of India by a vast +army. Unquestionably, too, they believed that the occupation of +Rangoon, and the stoppage of all trade, would show the court of Ava +that they had embarked in a struggle with no contemptible foe; and +would be glad to abate their pretensions, and to agree to fair +terms of peace. + +The Bengal force that had been embarked consisted of two British +regiments--the 13th and 38th--a battalion of native infantry, and +two batteries of European artillery, amounting in all to 2175 men. +The Madras force--of which one division was sent on at once, the +other was to follow shortly--consisted of the 41st and 89th +Regiments, the Madras European regiment, seven battalions of native +infantry, and four batteries of artillery, amounting to 9300 men; +making a total of 11475 fighting men, of whom nearly five thousand +were Europeans. In addition to the transports, the Bengal force was +accompanied by a flotilla of twenty gun-brigs and as many +row-boats, each armed with an eighteen-pounder; the Larne and +Sophia sloop, belonging to the Royal Navy; several of the Company's +cruisers; and the steamboat Diana. General Sir A. Campbell was +appointed to the chief command, and Colonel M'Bean, with the rank +of Brigadier General, commanded the Madras force. + +The Bengal squadron sailed from Saugur in the middle of April; and +reached the rendezvous, Port Cornwallis, in the Andaman Islands, at +the end of the month. The Madras first division sailed at the same +time, and joined them a few days later; and the whole force, under +the escort of H. M. frigate Liffey and the Slaney, sloop of war, +left Port Cornwallis on the 5th of May, and arrived on the 9th at +the mouth of the Irrawaddy. + +Forces were detached for the capture of the islands of Chuduba and +Negrais. On the 10th the fleet entered the river and anchored +within the bar and, on the following morning, proceeded with the +flood tide up to Rangoon, the Liffey and the Larne leading the way. +A few shots were fired as they went up the river; but the Burmese +were taken wholly by surprise, the idea that the English would +venture to invade them never having entered their minds. + +There was considerable disappointment on board the fleet, when +Rangoon came into sight. It was situated on the north bank of the +main branch of the river, thirty miles from the sea. It extended +about nine hundred yards along the bank, and was six or seven +hundred yards wide, at its broadest part. Beyond the town were some +suburbs, outside the palisade that inclosed it. The palisades were +ten or twelve feet high, strengthened by embankments of earth +thrown up against them, on the inner side. One face of the defences +ran along the river bank, while the others were protected by a +shallow creek communicating with the river. The town itself +consisted, for the most part, of miserable and dirty hovels; and of +a few official buildings of larger size. + +At twelve o'clock the Liffey anchored abreast of the principal +battery, close to the water gate; the transports being ranged in a +line in rear of her. A proclamation had been sent on shore, on the +previous day, giving assurances of protection to the people at +large, and to all who should offer no resistance. + +When the guns of the fleet were loaded, a pause ensued. The town +was evidently incapable of offering resistance, and it was hoped +that it would capitulate. The Burmese were seen standing at their +guns, but they also remained inactive, apparently paralysed at the +appearance of this great fleet of vessels--of a size hitherto +undreamt of by them--and the threatening guns pointed towards them. +However, they were at last goaded, by the orders and threats of +their officers, to open fire upon the ships. + +The frigate at once replied with a broadside. In a very few +minutes, every gun on shore was silenced, and the Burmese fled in +confusion from their works. As soon as they did so, the signal for +disembarkation was made. The troops crowded into the boats, which +rowed for the shore; and the soldiers entered the town without +resistance, and found it completely deserted. + +The whole of the population had been driven out by the governor on +the previous day and, according to Burmese custom, the men had all +been formed into a levy, while the women and children were held +under guard, as hostages for their husbands and fathers--their +lives being forfeited in case of desertion, or cowardice, by their +male relations. + +The foreigners in the town had all been seized. They were few in +number, consisting of some eight or ten British traders and +American missionaries. These, after being fettered, were taken to +the Custom House prison. They were brought up and tried, early on +the morning of the attack, and were accused of having arranged the +assault on the town. They naturally urged that, if they had had the +least knowledge that it was going to be made, they would have left +the place in time. But the Burmese at once condemned them to death, +and they were taken back to the prison to be executed. + +The sentence was not carried out. The Burmese had intended to +execute them on the walls, in sight of their countrymen; and the +authorities had all assembled at the prison for the purpose when, +fortunately, a shot from the first broadside fired passed through +the building, causing an instant stampede. The chiefs at once left +the city; and the prisoners, heavily chained, were marched some +distance into the country. A party of British troops were, however, +pushed forward in advance of the town, as soon as it was occupied; +and the guard, in alarm for their own safety, placed the prisoners +in a house and made off; and a patrol found them there, on the +following morning, and brought them into the town. + +The great pagoda, standing two miles and a half from the town, was +at once occupied as an advanced position by the British. It stood +upon a conical hill, rising seventy-five feet above the plain. The +area on the top was somewhat over two acres; and in the centre rose +the pagoda, three hundred and thirty-eight feet high. + +Every boat on the river was found to have been removed. In spite of +proclamations promising good treatment, none of the inhabitants +returned to the town, being prevented from doing so by the Burmese +authorities and troops. No stores whatever had been found and, till +the end of the wet season, the army had to depend entirely upon the +fleet for provisions; and remained cooped up in the wretched and +unhealthy town, suffering severely from fever and malaria. + +The boat in which Stanley and the other prisoners were conveyed was +changed at every village going up the river, as the officer was +carrying the despatches from Bandoola to the court. A flag was +hoisted as the boat came in sight of a village. This was the signal +that another was required and, within two or three minutes of their +arrival, the prisoners, their guard and officer were on their way +again. + +Thus they proceeded, night and day and, in four days, arrived at +Ava. Leaving the prisoners in charge of the guard, the officer at +once proceeded to the palace. In an hour guns were fired, drums +beat, and the bells of the pagodas rung, to give notice to the +population that a great victory had been won over the English, and +their army annihilated, by Bandoola and his valiant troops. This +obliterated the impression produced by the news that had arrived, a +few days previously, of the landing at Rangoon; and there were +great rejoicings among the population. + +An officer from the palace presently came down to the boat, and the +prisoners were marched through the streets to a jail, amid the +jeers of the mob. Stanley was surprised at the meanness of the +town; the great majority of the houses being built of bamboo, and +thatched with grass, and having a very poor appearance. The public +buildings and the houses of the great officers were constructed of +planks, and tiled; but were heavy and tasteless, and it was only +upon the innumerable pagodas, in and around the town, that any care +seemed to have been bestowed. + +He had wondered much at the numerous pagodas that they had seen, +near every town and village, as they passed up; but the officer had +informed him that these were all private property, and that it was +considered the most meritorious of actions to erect one; +consequently every man who had means to do so built a pagoda, large +or small in proportion to the sum that he could bestow upon it. On +Stanley's remarking upon the great number that were in ruins, the +officer replied that it was considered so much more meritorious an +action to build a pagoda than to repair one that, after the death +of the founder, they were generally suffered to fall into decay. + +For some days the prisoners were taken out, every day, and marched +about the town for some time, so as to afford the population ocular +proof of the victory gained by Bandoola. The place in which they +were confined was small and filthy but, at the end of a week, +Stanley was taken out and placed in a room by himself; and here the +officer who had had charge of him paid him a visit, an hour or two +later. + +"I have expressed to the court," he said, "the wishes of the +general, and have had permission accorded for you to receive +different treatment from the others; partly because you are an +officer, but principally because the general thinks that you may be +made useful to him. I have informed the officer of the prison that +you are to be at liberty to walk about in the city, when you +please; but that to protect you from violence, an officer and two +soldiers are to accompany you, so long as you may think such a +precaution necessary. I have ordered a dress of our fashion to be +brought to you as, otherwise, you could not go into the streets +without being mobbed." + +Stanley expressed his gratitude to the officer for obtaining these +indulgences, and the latter replied: + +"I acted upon the orders of the general, but it has been a pleasure +to me; for I see that you are a young man of merit, and I have +learned much from you about your people during the journey; and +have seen that, foolish as they have been to undertake to match +themselves against us, there are yet some things that might be +learned from them; and that, if they had remained in their island, +many months' journey away from here, they might have been worthy of +our friendship." + +A short time after the officer had left, a soldier brought up some +food of a very much better nature than that with which Stanley had +been hitherto supplied. Half an hour later, the dress arrived. It +was that of a Burmese officer of inferior grade; and consisted of a +tunic of thick cloth, coming down to the knees; leathern sword +belt; a sort of tippet resembling that of an English coachman, with +three layers of cloth thickly quilted; and a leathern helmet going +up to a point in the centre, with a flap to protect the neck and +ears. With it were worn tight-fitting stockings of cloth, and low +shoes. + +Presently an officer came in. + +"I am ordered to go out with you, once a day, at whatever hour you +may desire. I am a relative of the officer who brought you here, +and he has requested me to look after your safety." + +"I am much obliged to you, sir," Stanley said, "and shall be glad, +indeed, to go out to see the city. Your kinsman has kindly sent me +a dress; but if I am not to be noticed, it will be necessary for me +to stain my face and hands, somewhat." + +"That I have thought of," the officer said, "and have brought with +me some dye which will darken your skin. It would be worse than +useless for you to dress as a Burman, unless you did so; for it +would seem even more singular, to the people in the streets, that a +white man should be seen walking about dressed as an officer, than +that a white prisoner should be taken through the streets under a +guard. + +"I am ready to go out with you now, if you wish it." + +"I shall be ready in a few minutes," Stanley replied and, on being +left alone, at once changed his attire and stained his face and +hands. + +He had just finished when the officer returned. He smiled and said: + +"There is no fear of your being suspected, now; and you might +really go about safely without a guard, unless you were to enter +into conversation with anyone. You speak the language very well, +but your accent is not quite the same as ours, here, though in +Aracan it would pass unremarked." + +As they went out from the prison, the officer told two soldiers who +were waiting there to follow, at a distance. + +"Do not approach us," he said, "unless I call you up." + +The houses were not constructed in continuous rows, but were very +scattered, each house having its inclosure or garden. The +population was very small, in comparison to the area occupied by +the town. This was divided into two parts--the inner and outer +town. The whole was surrounded by a brick wall, five miles and a +half in circumference, some sixteen feet high and ten feet in +thickness, strengthened on the inside by a great bank of earth. The +inner town was inclosed by a separate wall, with a deep ditch on +two sides, the river Irrawaddy on the third, and a tributary river +on the fourth. + +A considerable portion of the inclosed area was occupied by the +royal quarter; containing the palace, the court of justice, the +council chamber, arsenal, and the houses of the ministers and chief +officials. This was cut off from the rest by a strong and +well-built wall, twenty feet high, outside which was a stockade of +the same height. The total population of Ava was but 25,000. + +The officer did not take Stanley to the royal quarter, observing +that it was better not to go there as, although he had leave to +walk in the town, it might give offence were he to show himself +near the palace; but after going through the wall, they visited two +or three of the markets, of which there were eleven in the town. + +The markets consisted of thatched huts and sheds, and were well +supplied with the products of the country. Here were rice, maize, +wheat, and various other grains; sticks of sugar cane, tobacco, +cotton, and indigo; mangoes, oranges, pineapples, custard apples, +and plantains were in abundance; also peacocks, jungle fowl, +pigeons, partridges, geese, ducks, and snipes--but little meat was +on sale, as the Burman religion forbids the killing of animals for +food. Venison was the only meat allowed to be sold in the markets; +but there were lizards, iguanas, and snakes, which were exposed +freely for sale; and there were large quantities of turtle and +tortoise eggs, which had been brought up from the delta. + +Stanley saw that there had really been no great occasion for him to +stain his skin, as the people were, for the most part, lighter in +colour than the Hindoos. Many of the men had, however, stained +their faces to a darker colour; and all were tattooed, more or +less. Men, women, and children were all smoking; and frequently, +when both hands were required for any purpose, thrust their cigars +into the large holes bored in the lobes of their ears. Both men and +women were somewhat short in stature, but squarely built and +muscular and, in the majority of cases, inclined to be fat. + +The men wore a sort of kilt, consisting of a double piece of cloth, +wrapped round the body and falling to the knee. Over this was a +loose tunic, with sleeves open in front. The headdress was a scanty +white turban. + +The dress of the women was somewhat similar to that of the Hindoos, +consisting of a single garment like a sheet wrapped round the body, +fastening under the arms and falling to the ankles. Those of the +upper classes were more elaborate. The rank among the women was +distinguished, so Stanley's guide pointed out to him, by the manner +in which the hair was plaited and twisted, and by the ornaments in +it. + +The men, like the women, wore their hair long but, while the men +wore theirs in a knot at the top of the head, the women gathered it +in at the back. Their faces were broad at the cheekbones, but +narrowed in sharply, both at the forehead and chin. The narrow and +oblique eyes showed the relationship between the Burmese and their +Chinese neighbours. They seemed to Stanley a light-hearted, merry +people, going about their business with much chatter and laughter; +and the sound of musical instruments could often be heard, inside +the houses. Several men, in bright yellow garments, mingled with +the crowds in the market. These were priests, the officer told him; +and it would be a mortal act of sacrilege, were anyone else to wear +that colour. + +Stanley remarked upon seeing so few soldiers, and the officer told +him that there was no regular army in Burma. Every man capable of +carrying arms was obliged to serve in case of war but, with the +exception of the king's bodyguard, and a very small body of men who +were police, rather than soldiers, there was no force permanently +kept up. Every man was expected to know something of military duty, +and all were able to build stockades. From the fact that the flesh +of wild fowl formed one of the principal articles of food, the +peasantry throughout the country were all accustomed to the use of +the gun, and were fair marksmen. + +"But you yourself are an officer," Stanley said. + +"At present, yes; but tomorrow I may return to my land. It is the +same with the highest minister. One day he may be a trader but, if +recommended to the king as one possessing ability, straightway he +is chosen to be a high official. If he does not please the king, or +fails in his duties, then the next day he may be selling cloth in +the bazaar again. + +"Everything is at the will of the king. Nobody is born with fortune +or rank, for everything belongs to the king and, at a man's death, +all goes back to him. Thus everyone in the land has an equal +chance. In war the bravest becomes a general, in peace the +cleverest is chosen as a councillor." + +Walking about, Stanley soon found that there were a great variety +of dialects talked in the streets, and that the language of the +Burmese of the coast, of the natives of Pegu and the central +province, and of those from districts bordering on the Shan states +or the frontiers of China, differed as widely as those of the most +remote parts of Great Britain did from each other. This being so, +he was convinced that there would be no difficulty, whatever, in +passing as a native, without attracting any observation or inquiry, +so far as the language went. + +His features and, still more, the shape of his face might, however, +be noticed by the first comer, in the daytime. He thought, indeed, +that a little tinge of colour in the corner of the eyes, so as to +lengthen their appearance and give an oblique cast to them, would +make a difference. The general shape of the head was unalterable, +but the Burmese nose and mouth did not differ very greatly from the +European; except that the nostrils were smaller and, in shape, were +round rather than oval. + +For three weeks he continued the same life, and then the Burmese +officer, with whom he had now become very friendly, said when he +entered one morning: + +"You must not go out today. There is news that your people have +made two forward marches. The first was against a stockade, which +they took, and killed many of our men; the other time they marched +out four or five miles, had a fight with our troops, and again +killed many. These things have angered the king and the people. Of +course it is nothing, for our troops are only beginning to +assemble; but it is considered insolent in the extreme, and the +king's face is darkened against your countrymen. Four of the +prisoners have been taken out this morning and publicly executed +and, if the news of another defeat comes, I fear that it will be +very dangerous, even for you." + +"What had I best do, my friend?" + +"I would fain save you, for we have come to know each other; and I +see that there is much good in your ways, though they differ +greatly from ours. Were I to take you out, as usual, you might be +killed in the streets; were you to slip away and escape, I should +assuredly be put to death; but if in any way I can help you, I +would fain do so. My relation who brought you up here left, a +fortnight since, to rejoin Bandoola; so his influence cannot serve +you. + +"I do not say that you might not escape from this prison--since you +are not, like the others, confined in a dungeon--but I see not what +you could do, or where you could go. Were you to disappear, orders +would be sent down the river to every village, and every passing +craft would be examined, and you would be sure to be detected; +while it would be well-nigh impossible to travel the country on +foot, for it is but thinly inhabited. There are often very long +distances between the villages, and much of the country is swamp +and forest, without paths; for the village trade goes by the river, +and they have little communication with each other. + +"I know that, from what you say, you think that your troops will +beat ours, even when we assemble in large numbers. Were this so, I +fear that there would be little chance of your life being spared. +Were it not for that, I should say that, Bandoola having +recommended you, you would be in no danger here, and had better +remain until peace is made. + +"What think you, yourself?" + +"It is very difficult to reply, at once," Stanley said, "but I +thank you greatly for your offer to befriend me, in any way you +can. I do not say that I had not thought of escape, for I have of +course done so. But it seemed to me a thing in the distance; and +that, at any rate until the rains were over and the rivers had +sunk, it would be useless to attempt it. I see, now, that it will +be safest for me to try without delay. If you will come in again, +this afternoon, I will tell you what I have thought of." + +"I will do so; and I, myself, will try to think how best the matter +can be managed. We must remember that the great thing is for you to +find concealment, for the present. After the search for you has +been made for some time, it will die away; and it will then be the +easiest plan for you to make your way down the river." + + + +Chapter 4: A Ruined Temple. + + +After the officer left him, Stanley sat thinking for a long time. +He himself inclined strongly towards the river; but he saw that, at +present, the difficulties would be very great. The war boats were +passing up and down, and bodies of troops were being carried down +in large craft. In every village the men, he knew, were assembling +and drilling. Even in Ava he could see the difference in the +population, the proportion of men to women having markedly +decreased since his arrival. + +As to the journey by land, it appeared to him impossible. He was, +too, altogether without money and, whether by water or land, it +would be necessary to go into the villages to buy provisions. +Indeed, money would have been almost useless, for there was no +coined money in Burma; payments being made in lead, for small +amounts, or in silver for large ones--the quantity necessary being +cut off from small sticks or bars, or paid in filings. + +It seemed to him that the best thing would be to take to the +forest, for a time; and endeavour to subsist upon wild fruits or, +if these were not to be found there, to go out into the fields and +orchards at night, and so manage to hold on for a few weeks. His +friend told him that, in the forests along the principal lines of +route to the capital, were many bad characters--persons who had +committed crime and fled from justice. Some were cultivators who, +having been unable to pay their taxes, had deserted their land and +taken to the woods. All committed depredations, and traders coming +into the town from the Shan states, or from the country where +rubies and emeralds were found, always travelled in caravans for +mutual protection. At times levies were called out, and many of +these marauders were killed. + +Stanley, then, had hit upon nothing definite when the officer +returned in the afternoon and, in reply to the latter's question, +he acknowledged at once that the only thing he could see was to +take to the forest, until the active search for him had ceased. + +"You would find it difficult to maintain yourself. I have thought +of a better way than that. I am acquainted with a Phongee, who +lives in a temple in a lonely spot, four miles away. He is a good +man, though somewhat strange in his habits; and I feel sure that, +on my recommendation, he would take you in. There would be little +chance of your being discovered there. You could not go dressed as +you are, but must disguise yourself as a peasant; though it might +be well to retain your present attire, which may be useful to you, +afterwards. I fear that you will fare badly with him, in the way of +food; there will be enough to eat, but it will be of the simplest." + +"So that there is enough to keep life together, it matters little +what it is." + +"Then that is settled. + +"Now, about making your escape from here. Your door is closely +barred, at night; and there is no window save those four little +holes, high up in the wall, which scarce a bird could get through." + +"I could cut through the thatch above," Stanley said, "if I had but +something that I could stand upon to do so. There are some bamboos +lying just at the bottom of the steps. With these and some cord I +might make a sort of ladder, and should then be able to get at the +thatch." + +"I will bring you some cord, tomorrow, for that and to let yourself +down to the ground. Then I will arrange where to meet you, and will +guide you out of the town and take you to the priest. I will bring +a disguise for you, and some stain for your body and arms for, as a +peasant, you would be naked to the waist. I can think of nothing +better." + +"I thank you most heartily," Stanley said, "and trust that you may +get into no trouble for the kindness that you have shown me." + +"There is no fear of that, my friend. No one will know that I have +been away from the town. I am greatly afraid that this will be all +that I shall be able to do for you; for I am told that I am to go +down the river with the next batch of troops, which will start in +three days. I have only been informed of it since I saw you this +morning. Had it not been for you I should have been glad; for it is +in war time, only, that one can obtain honour and promotion." + +"I am sorry that you are going, sir. I shall miss your kindness, +sorely; but I can understand your desire to go to the front. It is +the same with us; when there is a war, every officer and soldier +hopes that his regiment will be sent there. However, I shall see +you again. + +"Has Bandoola's army moved yet?" + +"No; nor do I think that it will do so. It is a long march down to +Rangoon from Ramoo; and I believe that he will remain where he is, +until he sees how matters go at Rangoon. As soon as your people are +driven out, he will be joined by a great army, and will march to +Dacca. There our troops from the north will join him; and then he +will go to India, we think." + +"I fancy," Stanley said with a smile, "if he waits until we are +turned out from Rangoon, his stay at Ramoo will be a long one." + +The next day the officer brought several yards of strong cloth, +such as was worn by the peasants; a piece of muslin to make the +circular band that was worn by the lower class, instead of a +complete turban; and a lot of horse hair to be worn on the top of +the head. + +"Now," he said, "strip to the waist, and I will dye your body. I +have dyes of two colours here; one for the skin, and the other to +draw lines on the face, so as to make you look older; and with this +I can also imitate tattoo marks on your chest and shoulders. Here +is a long knife, such as everyone wears, and here is the cord. + +"As soon as it is getting dark you must carry up two of the bamboo +poles, taking care that no one observes you do so. There is seldom +anyone in the courtyard. I have had the knife sharpened, and it +will cut through the thatch, easily enough. When you get away, walk +straight to the market that lies nearest to us. I will be at its +entrance. It will take you, I suppose, two hours to make your +ladder and get out. You cannot begin until the guard closes your +door. You tell me he never comes in." + +"No, he brings the last meal an hour before sunset. I generally sit +on the top of the steps, till he comes up to lock the door, which +is about nine o'clock; and I do not see him again until he unbars +the door in the morning. I should not think that it will take as +long as two hours to make the ladder, and cut the thatch; at any +rate, by eleven I ought to join you. + +"I suppose the gates are open." + +"Oh, yes! They are never closed, though of course they would be, if +an enemy were near. There is no guard anywhere." + +After staining Stanley's skin, the officer waited a quarter of an +hour for it to dry thoroughly; and then proceeded to draw lines on +his face, across the forehead, and from the corners of his eyes; +and then spent nearly an hour in executing rough tattoo marks on +his body and arms. + +"This dye is very good, and will last for weeks before it begins to +fade. I will bring with me another bottle, tonight, so that you can +at least re-dye your skin. + +"Here is some wax. You must turn your hair up from the neck, and +plaster it in its place with it. The turban will prevent anyone +seeing how short the hair is. Here is a little bottle of black dye, +with which you had better colour it, before fixing it with the +wax." + +Stanley's hair had not been cut for some time before he had been +captured by the Burmese and, in the two months that had since +elapsed, it had grown very long; and could therefore be turned up +as the officer suggested. Putting on his usual garments, he sat at +his place, at the door of the cell, until the guard brought up his +evening meal. Having eaten this, he dyed his hair and, half an hour +later, turned it up, plastering it with wax, and tied a bit of +fibre round where the turban would come. + +By this time it was getting dusk. He sat at the door at the top of +the steps, until he saw that the courtyard was deserted; the guard +at the gate having gone outside, to enjoy the coolness of the air. +Then he ran down the steps, took two bamboo poles about ten feet in +length, and two short pieces of the same wood no thicker than his +finger and, hurrying up the steps with them, laid them down against +the side of the room. Then he went to the steps again, and sat +there until he saw the guard coming across to fasten his door; when +he went in and, as soon as he heard the bars put up, began his +preparations. + +First he lashed the short pieces across the ends of the two +bamboos, so as to keep them a foot apart; then he put ratlines +across, and soon had the ladder completed. He made up his clothes +into a bundle, wrapped the rough cloth round his waist, adjusted +the knot of horse hair on the top of his head, and fastened it +there with wax. He wound the turban round below, and his disguise +was complete. + +Fixing the ladder against the wall he climbed it, and it was not +long before he cut a hole through the thatch of sufficient size to +pass out. The work had taken him longer than he had expected, for +it had to be done in absolute darkness; however, he was sure that +he was well within his time. Fastening the end of the rope to one +of the bamboo rafters, he descended the ladder and picked up his +bundle; then climbed up again, got halfway out of the hole, and +listened intently. Everything was quiet in the street and, in +another minute, he stood on the ground. + +When he turned into the principal street, there were still many +people about. Sounds of music and singing came from the windows, +for the Burmese are very fond of music, and often pass the whole +night in playing and singing. There was no risk whatever of +detection now, and he stepped briskly along until he came to the +open space, with its rows of little thatched huts. Here he paused +for a minute, and the officer stepped out from behind a house and +joined him. + +"I was not sure at first that it was you," he said. "Your disguise +is excellent. You had better follow me, now, until we get beyond +the busy streets." + +Keeping some twenty yards behind his guide, Stanley went on until, +after nearly half an hour's walking, they passed through a gate in +the city walls. He now closed up to the officer and, after another +half-hour's walk across a cultivated country, they entered a +forest. The ground now rose steadily and, after keeping on for two +miles, they emerged from the trees at the top of a hill. The space +had been cleared of timber, but it was nearly covered with bushes +and young trees. In the centre were the ruins of a temple, that had +evidently existed long before the Burmese dynasty occupied the +country, and had been erected by some older race. It was roofless; +the walls had, in places, fallen; and the ruins were covered with +vegetation. + +The Burman ascended some broken steps, entered the temple, and +crossed to one of the opposite corners. A dim light was burning in +a small apartment, which had been roofed with thatch. A man was +lying, dressed, on a heap of leaves at one side. He started up as +the officer entered. + +"Who is it who comes here at this hour?" he asked. + +"Thekyn," the officer answered. + +"I am glad to see you," the Phongee said, "whatever may bring you +here. You have not fallen into trouble, I hope?" + +"In no way, good priest. I am starting, in two days, down the river +to fight the barbarians; but before I go, I want you to do me a +favour." + +The Phongee smiled. + +"Beyond naming you in my prayers, Thekyn, there is but little that +a hermit can do for any man." + +"Not so, in this case," the officer said. "I have one here with me +who needs rest, and concealment. I would rather that you did not +ask who he is. He has done no crime, and yet he is in danger; and +for a month, maybe, he needs a shelter. Will you give it him, for +my sake?" + +"Assuredly I will," the priest said. "Your father was one of my +dearest friends, in the days when I dwelt in the city. I would +gladly do all in my power for his son, and this is but a small +thing that you ask. Let him enter." + +Stanley went in. The priest took down the little lamp, from a shelf +on which it stood, and held it near the lad's face. Then he turned, +with a smile, to Thekyn: + +"The painting is but clumsily done," he said, "though maybe it +would pass without close examination. He is a stranger, and comes +of a race unknown to me but, as you said, it matters not to me who +he is; suffice that he is a friend of yours. He is welcome to a +share of my shelter, and my food; though the shelter is rough, and +the food somewhat scanty. Of late few, indeed, have sought me for, +as I hear, most of the men have gone down to the war." + +"I have brought you some food," the officer said; for Stanley had +observed that he also carried a bundle, a larger one than his own. +"Here is a supply of rice, that will last for some time; and this, +with your offerings, will suffice to keep things going. My friend +is not, like you, bound by his religion not to take life; and I +know that snakes are very plentiful round here." + +Snakes had formed a frequent article of his diet, since he had been +captured; and Stanley had lost the repugnance to them that he at +first felt, so the prospect of their forming the staple of his food +was not disagreeable to him. It would also afford him some +employment to search for and kill them. + +"I shall be well content," he said, "with anything that I can get, +and trust that I shall be no burden upon you." + +"You will assuredly be none," the priest replied. "Here must be at +least thirty pounds of rice which, alone, would keep two men alive +for a month. As regards the snakes, though I may not kill them, I +may eat them when killed; and indeed, there are few things better. +In truth, I should not be sorry to have some of the creatures out +of the way; for they swarm round here so thickly that I have to pay +great heed, when I walk, lest I step upon them." + +"Have you been troubled with robbers, of late, father?" Thekyn +asked. + +"They trouble me not at all," the priest said. "Men come, +sometimes. They may be robbers, or they may not. I ask no +questions. They sometimes bring fruit and other offerings, and I +know that I need not fear them. I have nought to lose, save my +life; and he would be indeed an evil man who would dare to lift his +finger against a priest--one who harms not anyone, and is ready to +share what food he has with any man who comes to him hungry." + +"Well, father, I will say goodbye. I must be back to the city +before men are about, as I would not that my absence should be +discovered." + +"Peace be with you, my son. May you come back safe from the wars. +My prayers will be said for you, night and morning. + +"Be in no uneasiness as to your friend. If any should ask me about +my companion, I shall reply that he is one who has undertaken to +rid me of some of the snakes, who dispute the possession of this +place with me." + +Thekyn motioned to Stanley to come outside the hut with him and, +when he did so, handed to him a small but heavy bag. + +"This is lead," he said. "You will need it, when you start on your +journey down the country. There are eight pounds of it and, from +what you have seen in the market, you will know how much food can +be got for a small amount of lead. I would that I could do more for +you, and assist your flight." + +"You have done much indeed, very much and, should I regain my +friends, I will endeavour to do as much by one of your countrymen, +for your sake. I hope that, when this war is over, I may meet you +again." + +"I hope so," the Burman said warmly. "I cannot but think that you +will succeed in getting away." + +"My son," the old priest said, when Stanley returned to his cell, +"I am going to my prayers. I always rise at this hour, and pray +till morning; therefore you may as well lay yourself down on these +leaves. There is another cell, like this, in the opposite corner of +the temple. In the morning you can cut boughs, and roof it like +this; and make your bed there. There is no room for another, here; +and it will doubtless be more pleasant for you to have a place to +yourself, where you can go and come as you like; for in the day +women come up to consult me, and ask for my prayers--but mind how +you enter it for the first time as, like as not, there will be +snakes sheltering there." + +Stanley lay awake for a time, listening to the monotonous voice of +the priest as he repeated his prayers; but his senses soon +wandered, and he slept soundly till daybreak. + +His first step was to cut a stout stick, and he then proceeded to +the other cell, which was partially blocked up with stone from the +fallen roof. It took him two hours to carry this stuff out, and he +killed no less than nine snakes that he disturbed in his work. The +prospect of sleeping in a place so frequented was not a pleasant +one, especially as the cell had no door to it; and he resolved at +once to erect some sort of bed place, where he might be beyond +their reach. For this purpose he cut two poles, each three or four +inches longer than the cell. One end of each he sharpened, and +drove in between the interstices of the stone, at a distance of +some two feet and a half apart and four feet from the ground. The +other ends he hammered with a heavy stone against the opposite +wall, until they would go down no farther. Then he split up some +more wood and lashed strips, almost touching each other, underneath +the two poles, by the aid of some strong creepers. Then he filled +up the bed place, between the poles, with dry leaves. + +One end of the bed was some inches higher than the other. This was +immaterial, and he felt satisfied that even the craftiest snake +could not reach him. + +As to the roof, he was by no means particular about it. In this +part of Burma the rainfall is very small, the inundations being the +effect of heavy rains in the distant hill country which, as they +come down, raise the level of the rivers, in some cases, as much as +eighteen feet, and overflow the low-lying country. + +Before beginning to construct the bed, he had carried the snakes +into the Phongee; after first cutting off their heads which, as he +knew, the Burmans never touch. + +"This is good, indeed, my son," the priest said. "Here we have our +breakfast and dinner. I will boil some rice, and fry four of them +for breakfast." + +The bed was but half completed, when he heard the priest sound a +bell. It was doubtless used as a call to prayer. However, Stanley +rightly conjectured that, in this case, it was a summons to a meal; +and was soon seated on the ground by the side of the priest. Little +was said at breakfast, which Stanley enjoyed heartily. + +"So my friend Thekyn is starting for the wars. What think you of +it, my son? Shall we easily overpower these barbarians? We have +never met them in war before and, doubtless, their methods of +fighting are different from ours." + +"Quite different. Their men are trained as soldiers. They act as +one man, while the Burmese fight each for himself. Then they have +cannon with them, which they can drag about quickly, and use with +great effect. Although they are few, in comparison with the armies +going down to attack them, the latter will find it very difficult +work to turn them out of Rangoon." + +"Do you think that they will beat us, then?" + +"That I cannot say, but I should not be surprised if it were to +prove so." + +"The Burmese have never been beaten yet," the priest said. "They +have been victorious over all their enemies." + +"The Burmese are very brave," Stanley agreed, "but, hitherto, they +have only fought against people less warlike than themselves. Now +they have to deal with a nation that has made war a study, and +which always keeps up a large army of men who are trained to fight, +and who spend all their time in military exercises. It is not that +they are stronger than the Burmese, for the Burmese are very strong +men; but only that men who are trained to act together must, +necessarily, possess a great advantage over those who have had no +such training--who simply take up arms for the occasion and, when +the trouble is over, return to their homes and lay them by, until +called out to fight again. + +"Besides, their weapons are better than yours; and they have many +cannon which, by practice, they can load and fire very quickly; and +each of which, when the armies are near each other, can fire fifty +or sixty bullets at once." + +"I have heard a strange story that the barbarians have a ship +without sails, with a great chimney that pours out quantities of +black smoke, and a wheel on each side and, as the wheels move +round, the vessel can go straight up the river against the tide, +even if the wind is blowing strongly down." + +"It is true, father, there are many such ships; but only two or +three that have made the long voyage across stormy seas to India." + +"It is wonderful how these men can force fire to be their servant, +and how it can make the wheels of the ship to move round." + +"That I cannot tell you, father. I have never seen one of these +vessels, though I have heard of them." + +The priest said no more, but evidently fell into a profound +meditation; and Stanley, getting quietly up, returned to his work. +The priest came in, just as he had completed his bed. + +"That is well," he said, looking at it approvingly. "I myself, +although I know that, until my time has come, no creature can harm +me, cannot resist a shudder when I hear one rustling amid the +leaves of my bed; for they come in, although some of my friends +have had a door placed to exclude their entry at night. I wander +but little from my cell, and always close the door after me; but +they enter, sometimes, when I am meditating, and forgetful of +earthly matters, and the first I know of their presence is the +rustling of the leaves in the bed, at night. Were I as strong in +faith as I should be, I would heed it not. I tell myself so; but my +fear is stronger than my will, and I am forced to rise, turn up the +leaves with a stick until I find them, and then I open the door and +eject them, with as much gentleness as may be." + +"I should get no sleep at all," Stanley said. "I don't think that +even a door would make me feel any safer, for I might forget to +shut it, sometimes. Tomorrow, father, I will wage war with them, +and see if I cannot decrease their numbers considerably." + +Stanley's first task was to clear the bushes away from the court of +the temple; and this, after several days' hard work, he carried +out; although he soon saw that by so doing he would not diminish +the number of the snakes, for the greater portion of the area was +covered with blocks of fallen stone, among which the reptiles found +an impenetrable shelter. The clearance effected, however, was so +far useful that, while the creatures were before altogether hidden +from sight by the bushes, they could now be killed when they came +out to bask in the sun on the uncovered stones; and he could, every +day, destroy a dozen or more without the slightest difficulty. + +Ten days after he had finished the work, he heard the sound of +men's voices and, peeping out, saw a Burmese officer with a party +of eight armed men going to the Phongee's cell. It was possible +that they might have come on other business, but it was more +probable they had come in search of him. Some of the women who had +come up to the hermit had seen him at work; and might have +mentioned, on their return, that the priest had a man at work +clearing away the bushes. The matter might have come to the ears of +some officer anxious to distinguish himself, and the idea that this +was the prisoner for whom a search was being made occurred to him. + +Stanley shrank back into his cell, took up the bundle of clothes +that served as his pillow, got on to the bed and, standing on it, +was able to get his fingers on to the top of the wall. He hoisted +himself up, made his way through the boughs of the roof, and +dropped on to the ground outside. Then he went round by the back of +the temple, until he stood outside the priest's cell, and could +hear the voices within without difficulty. + +"Then you know nothing whatever of this man?" + +"Nothing whatever," he replied. "As I have told you, he came to me +and asked for shelter. I gave him such poor assistance as I could, +as I should give it to anyone who asked me. He has been no burden +upon me, for he has killed enough snakes for my food and his own." + +"You know not of what part he is a native?" + +"Not at all; I asked him no questions. It was no business of mine." + +"Could you form any idea from his speech?" + +"His speech was ours. It seemed to me that it was that of a native +of the lower provinces." + +"Where is he now?" + +"I know not." + +"You say that, at present, he is away." + +"Not seeing him in front, I thought he had gone out; for he comes +and goes as he pleases. He is not a hired servant, but a guest. He +cut down the bushes here, in order that he might more easily kill +the snakes; for which, indeed, I am thankful to him, not only for +the food that they afford, but because they were in such abundance, +and so fearless, that they often came in here, knowing that they +had naught to fear from me." + +"Then you think that he will return soon?" + +"As he told me not of his intention of going out at all, I cannot +say. He is away, sometimes, for hours in the forest." + +"Well, in any case, we shall watch here until his return. It may be +that he is some idle fellow, who prefers killing snakes to honest +work; but it may also be that he is the escaped prisoner of whom we +are in search." + +"I hear little of what passes in the town," the priest said, +quietly. "News would disturb my meditations, and I never question +those who come here to ask for my prayers. I have heard of the +escape of no prisoner." + +"It was a young English officer who got away. There has been a +great stir about it. Every house in the town has been searched, and +every guard boat on the river has been warned to allow no boat to +pass, without assuring themselves that he is not on board." + +"This was a brown man, like ourselves, clad only in a petticoat of +rough cloth, like other peasants." + +"He may have dyed his skin," the officer said. "At any rate, we +will stay until he returns, and question him. Two of my men shall +take their places just inside the entrance, and seize him as he +enters. Has he arms?" + +"None, save his knife and the stick with which he kills the snakes. +It may be that he has seen you coming hither and, if he has +committed any crime, he would flee, and not return here at all." + +"If he does not come back before it is the hour when I must return +to the town, I shall leave four men to watch for him; and they will +wait here, if it is for a week, until he comes back again." + +"You can do as you please," the priest said, "only I pray you +withdraw your men from the neighbourhood of this cell. I would not +that my meditations were disturbed by their talk. I have come +hither for peace and quietness, and to be apart from the world and +its distractions." + +"You shall not be disturbed," the officer said respectfully, and +Stanley heard a movement of feet, and then the closing of the door. + +Thinking it probable that the officer might make a search round the +temple, he at once made off into the wood behind the temple. As +soon as he was well among the trees, he exchanged his cloth for the +disguise he had worn in the town and, folding it up to be used as a +blanket at night, he went further into the wood, sat down, and +proceeded to think what his next step had best be. It was evident +that he could not return to the temple for the present; and it was +clear, also, that the search for him was still maintained, and that +it would not be safe to attempt to descend the river. He regretted +that he had been obliged to leave the place without saying goodbye +to the priest, and again thanking him for the shelter that he had +given him; but he was sure that, when he did not return, the old +man would guess that he had caught sight of the officer and his +party entering the temple, and had at once fled. Had he not known +that the guard would remain there, he would have waited until they +returned to the town, and would then have gone in and seen the +priest; but as they would remain there for some days, he thought it +was as well to abandon all idea of returning, as the suspicions +that he might be the man sought for would be heightened by his +continued absence, and the watch might be continued for a long +time, on the chance of his coming back. + +He concluded that, at any rate, his best course would be to +endeavour to make his way for a considerable distance down the +country; and then to try and get a boat. He knew that the country +near the river was comparatively thickly populated, and that the +distances between the villages were not great, so that he would +find no great difficulty in purchasing provisions. The dress he had +brought with him was not altogether unfavourable for such a +purpose, as he could easily pass as a sub-officer, whose duty it +was to inquire whether the villages had each sent all their +able-bodied men to the war. The only drawback to it would be that, +if instructions for his arrest had been sent down to the villages +along the road, as well as those by the river, they would have +probably been directed to specially look for one clad in such +attire. However, it would be open to him, at any moment, to take to +his peasant's disguise again. + +He at last determined to make a start and, by nightfall, had +traversed several miles through the great forest stretching along +by the side of the Panlaung river. He had asked many questions of +his friend the officer, as they went up to the temple, as to the +roads. He was told that there was one running almost due south to +Ramuthayn, by which he could travel down to Rangoon, by way of +Tannoo. This, however, would take him a long distance from the main +river, and he decided that he would presently strike the road that +ran about halfway between the hills and the Irrawaddy. He would +follow that for a time, and would try and strike the river +somewhere between Meloun and Keow-Uan. + +Below this point there was a network of rivers, and but few +villages, and the country was swampy and unhealthy. He infinitely +preferred the risks of the descent by the river to those by road; +and it seemed to him that, if he could but obtain possession of one +of the small native fishing boats, he could drop down at night, +unnoticed, as the width of the river at Ava was upwards of a +thousand yards and, below that town, often considerably exceeded +that breadth. + +When it became too dark to proceed further, he sat down at the foot +of a tree. He regretted that he had no means of lighting a fire; +and determined that, at any risk, he would obtain the means of +doing so at the first village that he came to--for he knew that +there were both tigers and leopards in the jungles. He thought, +however, that they were not likely to be numerous, so near the +capital; and the old priest had never alluded to them as a source +of danger though, indeed, it had never occurred to him to ask. + +In the morning he continued his way. He had gone but a mile when he +heard a sudden scream in the wood, a short distance to his left. +Feeling sure that it was a human being, in great fear or pain, he +drew his knife and ran, at the top of his speed, in the direction +of the cry; thinking that it might be some man, or woman, attacked +by the robbers of the forest. + +Suddenly he came upon a small open space, some twenty yards in +diameter. He hesitated, when his eyes fell on a group in the +centre. Two men were lying on the ground, and a leopard stood with +a paw on each of them. They had guns lying beside them, and a fire +was burning close by. He guessed that the animal had sprung from a +tree, one of whose boughs extended almost as far as the centre of +the opening. Probably it had killed one of the men in its spring +for, at the moment when he saw the animal, it was licking the blood +from the shoulder of the man on whom its right paw rested. The +other was, as far as Stanley could see, unhurt. + +Illustration: Stanley gave a sudden spring, and buried his knife in +the leopard. + +His tread in the light Burmese shoes had been almost noiseless; and +the leopard, which was keeping up a low growling, and whose back +was towards him, had apparently not noticed it. He hesitated for a +moment, and then decided to endeavour to save the man who was still +alive. Creeping up stealthily, he gave a sudden spring upon the +leopard, and buried his knife to the hilt in its body, just behind +the shoulder. + +With a terrible roar, it rolled over for a moment, and then +struggled to its feet. The time had been sufficient for Stanley to +pick up and cock one of the guns and, as the leopard turned to +spring at him, he aimed between its eyes and fired. Again the beast +rolled over, and Stanley caught up the other gun, thrust the muzzle +within a foot of its head, and fired. The leopard gave a convulsive +quiver, and lay dead. + + + +Chapter 5: With Brigands. + + +Stanley uttered an involuntary hurrah as the leopard expired; and +at the sound the Burman, who had been lying motionless, leapt to +his feet. He looked at the leopard, and then at his rescuer, and +exclaimed in a tone of astonishment: + +"You have slain the beast alone, and with no weapon but your +knife!" + +"No," Stanley replied; "I began the fight with my knife, only; but +caught up one of those guns when I wounded him, and fired as he +charged me. Then I finished him with the other." + +"Comrade," the Burman said, "you have done a great deed, with +courage. I, who am esteemed no coward, would never even have +thought of attacking that great leopard with but a knife, and that +to save the life of a stranger." + +"I saw the guns lying on the ground. Had it not been for that, I +should not have dared to attack the leopard, for it would have been +certain death." + +"Certain death, indeed. But tell me, first, how you did it. It +seems to me well nigh a miracle." + +"I was passing along, not far distant, when I heard your cry," +Stanley said. "Thinking that it was some person in distress, I ran +hither, and saw you both lying, with the leopard's forepaws upon +you. The beast's back was turned to me and, as it was growling, it +had not heard my approach. Seeing the guns lying there--and having +no doubt that they were loaded--I stole up, sprang suddenly on the +leopard, and drove my knife into it behind the shoulder. The blow +rolled it over, and gave me time to pick up the gun. The rest was +easy." + +The man, without a word, examined the body of the leopard. + +"It is as you say," he said. "It was well struck, and would +probably have been fatal; but the animal would have torn you in +pieces before he died, but for the guns. + +"Well, comrade, you have saved my life; and I am your servant, so +long as I live. I thought all was over with me. The leopard, as it +sprang, threw its full weight on my comrade, here. We had just +risen to our feet; and the blow struck me, also, to the ground. I +raised that cry as I fell. I lay there, immovable. I felt the +leopard's paw between my shoulders, and heard its angry growlings; +and I held my breath, expecting every moment to feel its teeth in +my neck. + +"I had but one hope, namely, that the beast would carry off my +comrade--who, I was well assured, was dead--to the jungle to devour +him, and would then come back to fetch me. I managed to breathe +once, very quietly, when I felt a movement of the leopard and, +hearing a low sound, guessed that he was licking my comrade's +blood; but slightly as I moved, the leopard noticed it, and stood +straight up again over me. I dared not breathe again, but the time +had come when I felt that I must do so, though I was sure that it +would be the signal for my death. + +"Then I knew not what had happened. There was a sharp pain as the +leopard's claws contracted, and then there was a loud roar, and its +weight was removed from me. Then I heard it snarl, as if about to +spring. Then came the sound of a gun, a fall, and a struggle; and +then the sound of another gun. Then I heard your shout, and knew +the beast was dead. + +"Now, sir, what can I do for you? Shall I first skin the leopard?" + +"I care not for the skin," Stanley said. "It would be of no use to +me." + +"Then, with your permission, I will take it off, and keep it as +long as I live, as a remembrance of the narrowest escape that I +ever had." + +"Is your comrade dead?" + +"Yes," the man replied. "The leopard struck him between the +shoulders as you see; and the force of the blow, and the weight of +the spring, must have killed him instantaneously." + +"Then I will take his sword, gun, and cartridges." + +So Stanley undid the sword belt, and buckled it round him; put the +bandolier of cartridges over his shoulders; and took up the gun and +reloaded it, while the man was at work skinning the leopard. This +operation the man performed with great speed. It was evidently one +that he had done before. As soon as the beast was flayed, he rolled +up the skin and placed it on his shoulder. + +"You are an officer, sir?" he asked. + +"No; I am a fugitive." + +While he had been watching the man, Stanley had debated over +whether he should confide in him; and thought that, after the +service he had rendered him, he could do so with safety. + +"I am an Englishman--I was captured by Bandoola, at Ramoo, and sent +a prisoner to Ava. I have escaped, and want to make my way down to +Rangoon; but I heard that orders had been sent along the river to +arrest me, and I do not, at present, know how to make my way down." + +"Come with me," the man said. "I have friends in the forest, some +distance from here. They will receive you gladly, when I tell them +what you have done for me; and you will be safe until you choose to +go. We are outlaws but, at present, we are masters of the forest. +The government has its hands full, and there is no fear of their +disturbing us." + +Stanley thought over the matter, for a minute or two. Doubtless it +was a robber band that he was asked to join, but the offer seemed +to promise safety, for a time. + +"I agree," he said, "so that you do not ask me to take part in any +deeds of violence." + +"About that, you shall do as you like," the man said; "but I can +tell you that we make good hauls, sometimes. Our difficulty is not +to capture booty, but to dispose of it. + +"Have you a turban? For that helmet of yours is out of place, in +the woods. The rest of your dress has nothing peculiar about it, +and would attract no attention." + +"I have a turban. I have been, lately, in the dress of a peasant. +The cloth I wore lies fifty yards away; I dropped it as I ran. It +will be useful to cover me at night, if for nothing else." + +Stanley exchanged the helmet for the turban that he had before +worn, and fetched the cloth. + +"Will you bury your companion?" he said. + +"It would be useless. He will sleep above ground, as well as below +and, if we are to reach my comrades tonight, it is time for us to +be moving." + +They at once set out. After five hours' walking, they came upon the +river Myitnge, the tributary that falls into the Irrawaddy at Ava. +It was some four hundred yards across. The Burman walked along its +banks for a short distance, and then pulled from a clump of bushes +a small boat, that was just capable of carrying two. He put it in +the water. They took their seats, and paddled across to the other +side; where he carefully concealed it, as before. + +"That is our ferry boat," he said. "It is not often used, for our +headquarters are in the great forest we shall presently come to; +but it is as well when, occasionally, parties are sent out to hunt +us, to have the means of crossing to the other side." + +Another two hours' walking, through cultivated fields, brought them +to the edge of the forest. + +"Here you are as safe as if you were in Rangoon," the Burman said. +"In another hour we shall reach my comrades. As a rule, we change +our headquarters frequently. At present there is no question of our +being disturbed; so we have settled ourselves, for a time." + +"Why were you and your comrade on the other side of the river? + +"His village lies five miles beyond that forest," the man said. "At +ordinary times, he dared not venture there; but he thought that, at +present, most of the able men would be away, and so he could pay a +visit to his friends. He asked me to accompany him and, as I had +nothing better to do, I agreed to go. A convoy of traders, too +strong to be attacked, had passed down from the hill country the +morning before we started. There was not much probability that +anyone would come again, for a few days." + +"They bring down rubies from there, do they not?" + +"The mines are the property of the emperor," the man said, "and the +gems are sent down, once every two months, under a strong guard; +but for all that, many of the traders bring rubies down from +there--of course, secretly. The men who work the mines often +conceal stones that they come upon, and sell them for a small sum +to the traders; besides, sometimes the peasants pick them up +elsewhere--and these, too, make haste to sell them for anything +that they can get. We do not care for them much, for it is a risky +business going down to Ava to sell them; and the traders there, +knowing that, at a word from them, we should be arrested and most +likely executed, will give us next to nothing for them. We prefer +silver and lead for money; and garments, arms, and set jewels. + +"Each man takes his share of what is captured and, when we have +enough, we go home to our villages. A pound of silver, or two or +three pounds of lead, are generally quite enough to buy the +goodwill of the head man of the village. We give out that we have +been working on the river, or in Ava, since we left; and everyone +knows better than to ask questions." + +In another hour, they reached the encampment. It was now dusk, and +some five-and-twenty men were sitting round a great fire. A number +of leafy arbours had been constructed in a circle beyond them. + +"What, returned so soon!" one of the men said, as Stanley's guide +came near enough for the firelight to fall on his face; "but where +is Ranji, and whom have you brought here--a new recruit?" + +"Not exactly, Parnik, but one to whom I have promised shelter, for +a while. Ranji is dead. I should have been dead, too, and eaten; +had it not been for my comrade, here. Here is the skin of the beast +who slew Ranji and, when I tell you that the leopard stood with one +paw on me, you may guess that my escape was a narrow one." + +"The brute was a large one," one of the other men said, as +Meinik--for such was the name of Stanley's companion--unrolled and +held the skin up. "I see it had a bullet between the eyes, and +another just behind the ear; and there is a knife cut behind the +shoulder. It must have been hot work, when it came to knives, with +a beast of that size." + +"Give us some food, and cocoa; we have eaten nothing today, and +have walked far. When we have fed, I will tell you my story." + +The Burman's recital of the adventure with the leopard excited +great applause, and admiration, from his comrades. + +"'Tis wonderful," one said, "not so much that our new comrade +should have killed the leopard, though that was a great feat; but +that, armed only with a knife, he should attack a beast like this, +to save the life of a stranger. Truly I never heard of such a +thing. Has he all his senses?" + +Meinik nodded. He had received permission from Stanley to say who +he was. Stanley had consented with some reluctance, but the man +assured him that he could trust his companions, as well as himself; +and that it was much better to tell the truth, as it would soon be +seen that his features differed altogether from their own and that, +therefore, he was some strange person in disguise. + +"He is in his senses," he said, "but he does not see things as we +do. He is one of those English barbarians who have taken Rangoon, +and against whom our armies are marching. He was captured at Ramoo; +and sent by Bandoola, as a prisoner, to Ava. He has made his escape +and will, in a short time, go down the river; but at present the +search is too hot for him. So you see that he is, like ourselves, a +fugitive." + +"What is his age?" one of the men asked, after a silence, during +which they all gazed at the newcomer. + +"He is but a lad, being as he tells me between sixteen and +seventeen; but you see his skin is stained, and his face marked, so +as to give him the appearance of age." + +"If the men of his race are as brave as he is, Meinik, our troops +will truly have harder work than they think to drive them into the +sea. Does he speak our tongue?" + +"Yes," Stanley answered for himself. "I have been more than two +years in the province of Chittagong, and learned it from one who +was in our service." + +"And would many of your people risk their lives in the way you did, +for a stranger?" + +"Certainly. Many men constantly run risks as great to save others." + +"One life is all a man has," the Burman said. "Why should he give +it for a stranger?" + +"I don't think that we stop to think of that," Stanley said. "It +seems to us natural that if we see another in danger of his life, +we should try to save it; whether it is a man or woman, whether it +be from fire or from any other fate." + +"You must be a strange people," the Burman said gravely, "and I +should scarce have credited it, had I not heard that you had done +it, yourself. But it is wonderful; and you, too, a lad who has not +yet come to his full strength. + +"We should be glad to have such a man for our comrade, my friends. +Whether he be Burman or English matters little. He has risked his +life for one of us; and he is our brother as long as he likes to +stay with us." + +There was a warm exclamation of assent, round the circle; and +Stanley felt that he had no cause for uneasiness, as long as he +remained with them. In the evening the men sang many songs and, at +their request, Stanley sang some English ones, choosing some with +lively airs. The Burmese were much pleased and surprised at these, +and joined merrily in the chorus. + +Half a dozen of them then set to work with their knives, cut down +some saplings and boughs, and constructed for Stanley an arbour +similar to the others; and he lay down well satisfied with the +results of his adventure, and feeling that he could remain with +these merry fellows, criminals though they might be, until it would +be safe to make his way down the river. + +In the morning the men started early, leaving him in charge of the +fire. They went off in parties of four or five, to watch the +various roads leading to the capital; two or three of them, dressed +as peasants, going to towns where travellers would halt, so as to +gain information as to any party coming down. When they gathered +again, at dusk, one party only had had any success. They had met +six merchants coming down with horses laden with spices, indigo, +and cotton. These had offered no resistance, and they had taken as +much as they could carry, and then allowed them to go on with the +rest of their goods. There was a general feeling of regret that the +party had not been more numerous; and some expressions of anger, at +the spies on the road by which the traders had come, for not +letting them know beforehand, so that they could have placed their +whole force there and carried away all the goods. + +"These are the things that suit us best," Meinik said to Stanley. +"You see, one can go down with a parcel of cinnamon or pepper, or a +bag of dyes, or fifty pounds of cotton into the town; and sell it +in the market, at a fair and proper price. Of course, one dresses +one's self as a small cultivator; and there is no suspicion, +whatever, that all is not right. + +"We shall keep a sharp lookout for the men, as they come back +again, and relieve them of the silver or goods they may have taken +in exchange; that is, if they come by the same road--but it is more +likely that, after their adventure today, they will choose some +other, or take a guide and travel by village tracks. No doubt they +think that they have got off easily, for they have not lost more +than a quarter of their goods. It is war time now, and there is no +fear of a force being sent against us; but usually we do not take +so much as a quarter of the merchandise. Were they to lose +everything, they would make complaints; and then we should have a +force sent up against us, and be obliged to move away, for a time. +But as it is, they are so pleased with getting the greater part of +their goods safe to market that they do not care to make a fuss +about it; for they might have to pay the court officials, and +others, more than the value of the goods lost." + +"They do not often resist, then?" + +"Not often. If a man loses his goods, he can gather more again; but +when his life has gone, everything has gone. Besides, as a rule we +take care that we are so strong that they see, at once, that +resistance would be hopeless. Sometimes they bring armed guards +with them. These are men who make it their business to convoy +traders down, when the times are troubled. Sometimes we have fights +with these but, as a rule, we seldom attack them unless we are so +strong that they do not dare to oppose us. Still, we do have fights +sometimes, for these Shan guards are brave fellows. Their convoys +are generally rich ones, for it would not pay small traders to hire +men to protect them. + +"In times of peace, we seldom stop long in one neighbourhood for, +when it once becomes known what road we are lying near, they come +along in parties too strong to be attacked and, as it matters +little to us where we live, we move away perhaps a hundred miles, +and then settle on another line of traffic. We have not been here +long; we were last down by Tannoo, and did well for a long time +there; until at last the governor raised all the villagers, and +hunted the woods, and we found that we had to leave. I expect we +shall stay here some time, now. There is no fear of troops being +sent out, and we can afford not to press too hardly on travellers; +for we have done so well, of late, that we could separate and +return to our homes, each with a good store of booty. Half our +number did leave, when we came up from the south; and more of us +would go, if it were not for this order that everyone shall join +the army. It is much pleasanter to live here, free to do as we +like, than to be driven down like a herd of beasts, to fight. +Besides, we have no quarrel with your people. It was the officials +at Aracan who began it; let them fight, if they like." + +Stanley remained a fortnight with the band. At the end of that +time, they heard that a party of thirty traders were coming down +together, and that they had with them ten armed guards. This, they +no doubt supposed, was ample protection for, as the band generally +worked in such small parties, it was believed that there were but a +few outlaws in the forest. All the band went out, and returned in +the evening, laden with spoil. Two or three of them were wounded, +but not severely. + +"So you had resistance today, Meinik." + +"It lasted only for a minute," the man said. "As soon as they saw +how strong we were, the guard were glad enough to put up their +swords and let us bind them hand and foot, while we searched the +merchants. As you see, we have made a good capture, though we have +not seized more than a fifth of what they brought down with them; +but it will take them some time to pack their bales again, for we +searched everything thoroughly, and made all the merchants strip, +and searched their clothes and their hair." + +"What did you do that for?" + +"Well, it was this way. I said to my comrades, as we went along +this morning: + +"'The Englishman is going to leave us, in a day or two. I have not +forgotten what I owe him, and should like to make him a present. I +propose that we search all the party thoroughly, today. From what +we heard, some of them come from the ruby country, and are pretty +sure to have gems concealed about them, or in their baggage. I +propose that all the stones we find we will give to our friend.' + +"They all agreed at once for, as you know, they all like you; and +rubies, as I told you, are of little use to us, for we cannot +dispose of them without great risk. So they did as I proposed, and +had good fortune. Twelve out of the number had gems hidden about +them, and some of them a good lot. You need not hesitate to take +them, for you may be sure that they bought them, for next to +nothing, from poor fellows who had risked their lives to hide them. + +"There they are. We have not looked at them, but just emptied the +parcels into this bag, as we found them. Of course, they are all +rough stones. You must take them as a present, from all of us; and +as a proof that a Burman, even if he is but a robber, is grateful +for such a service as that you rendered him." + +Stanley felt that he could not refuse a gift so offered, even +though the goods were stolen. As Meinik said, the gems were of +little use to the robbers, since they were afraid to try and +dispose of them; and their owners had themselves broken the law in +having purchased them, and had doubtless given sums bearing no +proportion to their real value. Therefore he thanked Meinik very +heartily; and also, after they had had their meal, the rest of the +band, who made very light of the matter. + +The things were useless to them, they said. If it had been silver, +or even lead, it would have been different; but to endeavour to +sell rubies they had to risk their lives. The goods that they had +got that day would fetch them far more money than the rubies, and +could be sold without difficulty and, as soon as the war was over +and they could go down to their villages, the band would break up. +They had enough silver and lead hidden away to keep them for years, +even if they never did any work, whatever. + +"What do you do with it, when you get back?" + +"We hide it. It would never do to enter a village with ten or +twelve pounds' weight of silver, and three or four times as much +lead, for the headman might take it into his head to have us +searched. So we generally dig a hole at the foot of a tree, in some +quiet spot; and take, perhaps, a pound of silver and two or three +of lead with us. A gift of half that silver is enough to convince +the headman that we are honest fellows, who have been working hard +since we went away; and from time to time we can go to our store +and get what we want from it, and can build a house and marry, and +take up a field or two, and perhaps become headmen ourselves, +before very long." + +"Well, I am sure I wish you all well," Stanley said. "You have all +been very kind to me, since I joined you; and I shall be glad to +think of you all as settled quietly down in your villages, rather +than as remaining here when, some day or other, you might all be +captured and harm come to you." + +The next morning Stanley started with Meinik, who was a native of a +small village on the river, some forty miles below Ava, and who had +resolved to accompany him down to Rangoon. + +"I shall be able to get a boat and some nets, for a pound or two of +lead. If we are hailed, I can do the talking; and can land and buy +provisions, if wanted. I have arranged with my comrades to take my +share of the silver and lead we have stored up, at once; for it is +likely that they will also have gone to their homes before I shall +have returned, and we have changed everything into money, except +what we took yesterday." + +Before starting Stanley was again dyed, and the tattoo marks +imitated--far more carefully than before, three or four of the men +operating upon him, at once. His face was almost entirely covered +with these marks. Some liquid was applied that extracted the colour +from his eyebrows, and left them snow white. Some of his hair was +similarly treated and, looking at himself in a pool of water, +Stanley did not in the slightest degree recognize himself; and felt +certain that no one would suspect him of being the young English +captive. + +Resuming his peasant's cloth, he took a hearty farewell of the band +and started with Meinik. The latter carried a bundle, slung on his +gun. It contained some clothes, and did not look heavy; but in the +centre were two parcels that weighed some forty pounds. Stanley +carried a bundle with his other clothes, and several pounds of +rice. + +Two days' walking took them to Meinik's village. Once out of the +forest they travelled at night, and reached the village just as the +people were astir. The place consisted of ten or twelve huts, and +Meinik created quite an excitement among the few people who +inhabited it. These consisted of two or three old men, some women, +and children. + +"Where have you been for the last year and half, Meinik, if I may +ask?" + +"Working near Ava," he said; "but as I should have to go to war if +I had remained there, I thought that I would come back, and see how +you all were. I have saved a little money, and may settle down; but +whether here or elsewhere I have not yet made up my mind." + +"You will have to go to the war," one of the old men said. "There +is scarce a day that one of the war canoes does not stop here, to +see if there are any able-bodied men. They have taken eight, and +they will assuredly take you." + +"Then I shall get a boat," he said, "and take to fishing. The war +cannot last long, and I shall do my best to keep out of the way of +the war canoes, until it is over. If any of you have a boat to +sell, I will buy it." + +"I will sell you mine," the old man said. "Both of my sons have +been taken to the war, and I am too old to work it myself. It is a +good one; my sons made it only last year. + +"Whom have you with you?" + +Stanley had remained a short distance off, while Meinik was talking +to his friends. + +"He is an old man I joined along the road," he said. "He is a +skilful fisherman; and he has agreed to go with me, if I can get a +boat. + +"Is there an empty hut?" + +"Yes, six of them. Of course, when the men were taken they carried +off the wives and children, as usual, as hostages for their +conduct." + +Meinik nodded. He felt no surprise, as it was the custom in Burma +to hold the women and children of all the men going to the war, as +guarantees that their husbands would not desert or show cowardice +in battle. In either event their relatives would be, at once, put +to death. + +"My companion is tired," he said. "We walked all night, so we will +cook some food and he will sleep." + +They at once took possession of one of the empty huts, which was +just as it was left by its proprietor. One of the women brought a +brand or two from her hearth. An earthen cooking pot was filled +with water and placed above it, and a few handfuls of rice dropped +in. Two or three snakes, cut up into small pieces, and some pepper +pods were added; and then Meinik went out, talked to his +acquaintances, and arranged for the purchase of the boat. Stanley +watched the fire. + +In an hour, Meinik returned. + +"The boat is a good one," he said, "and the nets in fair order. I +have bought them for two pounds of lead; and have promised that, +when the war is over and the man's sons return, it is to be free to +them to buy it back, at the same price." + +After eating their meal, they both lay down and slept until late in +the afternoon. Then Meinik bought an earthenware pot, and a flat +slab of the same material for making a fire on; some peppers and +capsicums, and a little cinnamon and nutmeg; a basket of mangoes, +and some tobacco. As soon as it became dusk, they took their places +in the boat, Meinik carrying down two or three faggots of wood. + +The boat was a canoe, hewn out of a pine log. It would have carried +four people comfortably, and there was plenty of room for them both +to lie down at full length. It was very light, the wood having been +cut away until it was little thicker than cardboard. This was the +almost universal method of construction: even the war canoes, that +would carry sixty paddlers--sitting two by two on a bench--and +thirty soldiers, being hewn from great single logs of teak. The +nets were stowed one, at each end. In the middle was the fireplace, +on which the brands of the fire had already been laid. Near it were +the faggots and stores. + +Meinik and Stanley sat on the nets, each with a paddle. The former +had hidden the greater portion of his store of money in the ground, +before entering the village. As soon as they had fairly started, +Stanley said: + +"Had we not better get rid of the fire, Meinik? Its light would +draw attention to us." + +"That matters little," the Burman replied. "There are not likely to +be war canoes about at night, and I expect that most of them will +have gone down the river. People fish either by night or by day +and, even if a war canoe came along, they would not trouble about +it for, of course, many men too old to go to the war remain here, +and go on fishing. People cannot starve because there is fighting. +The old men and women must cultivate the fields and fish, or both +they and the people of the towns would starve. + +"Many even of the young men do not go. They keep away from their +villages during the day, and work in the fields; and the headmen +shut their eyes, for they know that if the fields are not +cultivated, the people cannot pay their share of the taxes. + +"Still, it is as well to be on the safe side. When the fire has +burnt low we will lay a cloth over the top of the boat, so that the +glow of the embers will not be seen." + +They kept their course near the middle of the river; partly because +the current there was stronger, partly because any war canoes that +might be coming up would keep close to one bank or the other. They +kept on their way until there was a faint gleam of light in the +sky; and then paddled into the shore, chose a spot where some +bushes drooped down into the water and, forcing the canoe in behind +these, so as to be entirely concealed from the sight of any passing +boat, cooked some food and, having eaten their breakfast, lay down +and slept until evening. + +Illustration: They forced the canoe behind bushes, so as to be +entirely concealed. + +Night after night the journey was continued. Their supply of food +was ample to last them; and there was, therefore, no occasion to +stop at any village to purchase more. The river, at the point where +they started, was about two miles wide; but at some points it was +double that width, while at others it contracted to little over a +mile. Its level was much lower, now, than it had been when Stanley +ascended it, two months before. Sometimes at night they towed one +of their nets behind them, and obtained an ample supply of fish for +their wants. + +Each night they made, as Stanley calculated, about forty miles and, +after ten days' travel, they came to the point where the great +river divided, one small arm running down to Rangoon; another +descending to Bassein, and then falling into the sea at Cape +Negrais; while a large proportion of the water found its way down +by innumerable branches between the Rangoon and Bassein rivers. + +For the last two or three days they had been obliged to observe +great caution for, below Prome, there were numbers of boats all +going down the river laden with men and stores. These, however, +only travelled by day; and the canoe was always, at that time, +either floating in the shelter of bushes, or hauled up on the bank +at spots where it could be concealed from view by thick growths of +rushes. + +"We shall never be able to get down to Rangoon by water," said +Meinik. "The river will be crowded with rowboats near the town; and +there will be no chance, whatever, of making our way through them. +At the next village we come to, I will go in and learn the news. +Your countrymen may have been driven out by this time and, in that +case, there will be nothing to do but to travel north on foot, +until we reach Chittagong." + +"I have no fear that we shall be driven out, Meinik." + +This conversation had occurred on the night when they had passed +the point of division of the two arms of the river. They had caught +a larger supply of fish than usual and, as soon as the boat was +laid up, Meinik started along the bank, with a number of them, for +the nearest village. He returned in two hours. + +"It is well I landed," he said, "for the point where the greater +portion of our people are gathered is Henzawaddy, only some fifteen +miles further on. + +"You were right; your people have not been driven out. A large +number of our troops are down near Rangoon but, in the fighting +that has taken place, we have gained no advantage. Your people +marched out at the end of May, carried a stockade; and advanced to +Joazoang, and attacked some villages defended by stockades and +carried them, after having killed a hundred of our men. Then a +great stockade on a hill near the river, three miles from +Rangoon--which our people thought could not be taken, so strongly +was it protected--was attacked. The guns of your people made a +great gap in a stockade a mile in front of it. Two hundred men were +killed, and also the commander. + +"Then your people marched on to the great stockade at Kemmendine. +Your troops, when they got there, saw how strong it was and were +afraid to attack it. They lay down all night, close to it; and we +thought we should destroy them, all when they attacked in the +morning; but their ships that had come up with them opened fire, at +daybreak. As the stockades were hidden from the sight of those on +the river, we had thought that the ships could do nothing; but they +shot great balls up into the air, and they came down inside the +stockade, where they burst with an explosion like the noise of a +big gun; and killed so many that the troops could not remain under +so terrible a fire, and went away, leaving it to your people to +enter the stockade, without fighting." + + + +Chapter 6: Among Friends. + + +"It certainly seems to me," Stanley said, when he heard the +Burman's account of the state of things below, "that it will not be +possible for us to go any further, by water." + +"It would be very dangerous," Meinik said. "It is certain that all +the men in this part of the country have been obliged to go with +the army and, even were we both natives, and had no special reason +for avoiding being questioned, we should be liable to be seized and +executed at once, for having disregarded the orders to join the +army. Assuredly we cannot pass down farther in our boat, but must +take to the land. I should say that we had best get spears and +shields, and join some newly-arrived party." + +"But you forget that, though my disguise as a native is good enough +to mislead anyone passing us on the road, or in the dusk after +sunset, I should certainly attract attention if travelling with +them, by day." + +"I forgot that. I have grown so accustomed to seeing you that I +forget that, to other people, your face would seem strange; as it +at first did to me, in the forest. Indeed you look to me now like +one of ourselves; but were we to join a band, someone would be sure +to ask questions concerning you, ere long. What, then, do you think +we had best do?" + +"From what I heard of the country from one of your comrades, who is +a native of this province, it would be impossible for us, after +crossing the river, to make our way down on the opposite side, +since the whole country is swampy and cut up by branches of the +Irrawaddy. On this side there are few obstacles of that kind but, +on the other hand, we shall find the country full of troops going +down towards Rangoon. Your comrade told me that the hills that we +saw to the east, from the forest at Ava, extended right down into +Tenasserim; and were very high, and could not be traversed, for +that no food could be obtained, and that tigers and wild animals +and other beasts abounded. But he said that the smaller hills that +we crossed on the way to your village--which he called the Pegu +Yoma hills--some of whose swells come down to the bank, extend all +the way down to the sea between the Irrawaddy and the Sittang +rivers; and that, from them, streams flowed to one river or the +other. Therefore, if we could gain that range, we should avoid the +swamp country, altogether. + +"A few miles back we passed a river coming in from the east and, if +we follow that up as far as there is water, we shall be among the +hills. He said that there were no mountains at all, there; but just +rounded hills, with many villages and much cultivated ground, so +there ought to be no difficulty in making our way along. We shall +be able to gather food in the fields; or can go into villages and +purchase some, for the men will all be away. Besides, we can get +spears and shields, and can say that having been away from home on +a journey--when the men were all ordered to war, we returned too +late to go with the rest of the villagers, and are making our way +down to join them. Many others must be doing the same, and the +story will be likely enough. + +"In that way we can get down till we are close to the troops round +Rangoon, and must then take our chance of getting through them." + +"That seems better than the other way," Meinik said. "There is such +a river as you speak of, above Sarawa. We can paddle back tonight, +and hide near the town; then I can go there in the morning, and buy +a couple of spears and shields, and get some more rice and other +things. We have plenty of ammunition for our guns; which we may +want, if we meet any wild beasts." + +"You don't think that there will be any danger in your going in +there, Meinik? Of course, there is no absolute occasion for us to +have spears and shields, as we have guns." + +"We ought to have shields," Meinik replied, "and it were better to +have spears too, and also for us to carry axes--everyone carries an +axe in war time, for we always erect stockades and, though a very +poor man may only have his knife, everyone who can afford it takes +an axe. Most people have such a thing, for it is wanted for cutting +firewood, for clearing the ground, for building houses, and for +many other things; and a Burman must be poor, indeed, who does not +own one." + +"By all means, then, get them for us, Meinik; besides, we may find +them useful for ourselves." + +They now lay down and slept until evening; and then started up the +river again, keeping close in under shadow of the bank and, two +hours before daylight, concealed the canoe as usual, at a spot two +miles above Sarawa. Meinik started at daybreak, and returned three +hours later with two axes, spears, and shields. + +That night they turned into the river running to the east and, for +four nights, paddled up it. The country was now assuming a +different character, and the stream was running in a valley with +rising ground--from a hundred to a hundred and fifty feet high--on +each side, and was narrowing very fast. Towards morning on the +fifth day the river had become a small stream, of but two or three +feet deep; and they decided to leave the boat, as it was evident +that they would be able to go but a short distance further. + +"We may as well hide her carefully," Stanley said. "It is certainly +not likely that we shall want her again, but there is never any +saying and, at any rate, there is no great trouble in doing it." + +They cooked a meal and then started at once, so as to do a few +hours' walking before the sun became high. They determined to keep +on eastward, until they reached the highest point of the dividing +ridge between the two main rivers, and then to follow it southward. +The country was now well cultivated, and they had some trouble in +avoiding the small villages dotted thickly about, as the course +they were following was not the one they would take if making +straight to join the army. They slept for three or four hours in +the heat of the day; and then, pushing on, found themselves before +sunset on what seemed to them the highest point of the divide. To +the right they could see the flat country stretching towards the +Irrawaddy, to the left the ground was more sharply undulating. Two +miles away was a stream of fair size, which they judged to be the +river that runs down to Pegu, and afterwards joins the Rangoon +river below the town. + +Stanley thought that the hill on which they stood was some five +hundred feet above the low country they had left. A great part of +the hills was covered with trees although, at the point where they +had made their way up, the hillside was bare. They went on until +they entered the forest, and there set to work to chop firewood. +Meinik carried a tinderbox, and soon had a fire blazing, and by its +side they piled a great stock of wood. + +"I do not know that there are any leopards so far south as this," +he said, "but at any rate it will be safer to keep a big fire +blazing. I never used to think much about leopards but, ever since +I had that great beast's foot upon my back, I have had a horror of +them." + +The next morning they continued their journey south, going along +boldly and passing through several villages. + +"You are late for the war," an old man said, as they went through +one of them. + +"I know we are," Meinik replied, "but we were away with a caravan +of traders when the order came; and so, instead of going down the +river, we have had to journey on foot. But we shall be there in +time. From what we have heard, there has not been much fighting, +yet." + +"No; the white barbarians are all shut up in Rangoon. We have not +attacked them in earnest, but we shall soon do so and, moreover, +they will soon be all starved, for the country has been swept clear +of all cattle for twenty miles round, the villages deserted, and +everything laid waste; and we hear that half their number are laid +up with sickness, and that a great number have died. I wish that I +were younger, that I, too, could help to destroy the insolent foes +who have dared to set foot on our sacred soil." + +There was no need for haste, now, and they travelled by easy stages +until, by the smoke rising from different parts of the forest, they +knew that they were approaching the spot where the Burmese forces +lay around Rangoon and, indeed, could see the great pagoda rising +above the surrounding country. They had heard, at the last villages +through which they had passed, that there had been an attack made +upon the pagoda on the 1st of July. On that day the Burmese, in +great force, had moved down in a line parallel to the road between +the pagoda and the town, along which a considerable number of our +troops were encamped. They had advanced until within half a mile of +Rangoon, then had changed front and attacked the British position +near the town. They occupied a hill near our line, and opened fire +from there with jingals and small cannon; but two British guns +firing grape soon silenced their guns, and a Madras regiment +charged the hill and recaptured it. + +This entirely upset the plan of the Wongee in command of the +Burmese. The signal for the whole of the army to attack was to have +been given, as soon as their left had broken through the British +line, and had thus cut off all the troops on the road leading to +the pagoda from the town. Seeing that this movement had failed, the +general did not give the signal for the general attack, but ordered +the troops to fall back. He had been recalled in disgrace to Ava; +and a senior officer, who arrived just after the battle, assumed +the command. He at once set to work to make a very strong stockade +at Kummeroot, five miles from the great pagoda; and also fortified +a point on the river above Kemmendine--the stockade that had been +captured by the British--and intended from this point to send down +fire rafts to destroy the British shipping and, at the same time, +made continuous attacks at night on the British lines. + +The rains at this time were falling incessantly, and the Burmese +did not think that the British would be able to move out against +them. The position on the river was connected with that at +Kummeroot by strong stockades; and the Burmese general was +convinced that, if an attack was made, it could be easily defeated. +However, eight days after the repulse of the Burmese first attack, +the vessels came up the river, while a land column moved against +Kummeroot. + +The position was a strong one. The river was here divided into two +branches and, on the point of land between these, the principal +stockade was erected and was well provided with artillery; while on +the opposite banks of both rivers other stockades with guns were +erected, so that any attack by water would be met by the direct +fire from the great stockade, and a cross fire from those on the +banks. + +Four ships came up, and the Burmese guns opened upon them, but the +heavy fire from the men-of-war was not long in silencing them; and +then a number of boats full of troops had landed, and stormed the +stockade, and driven out the Burmese. The land column had been +unable to take guns with them, owing to the impossibility of +dragging them along the rain-sodden paths; and the Burmese chiefs, +confident in the strength of their principal post--which was +defended by three lines of strong stockades, one above another--and +in their immensely superior force, treated with absolute contempt +the advance of the little British column--of which they were +informed, as soon as it started, by their scouts thickly scattered +through the woods. + +The general, Soomba Wongee, was just sitting down to dinner when he +was told that the column had nearly reached the first stockade. He +directed his chiefs to proceed to their posts and "drive the +audacious strangers away," and continued his meal until the heavy +and rapid musketry of the assailants convinced him that the matter +was more serious than he had expected. As a rule, the Burmese +generals do not take any active part in their battles; but Soomba +Wongee left his tent and at once went towards the point attacked. +He found his troops already retreating, and that the two outer +stockades had been carried by the enemy. He rallied his men, and +himself led the way to the attack; but the steady and continuous +fire of the British rendered it impossible for him to restore +order, and the Burmese remained crowded together, in hopeless +confusion. However, he managed to gather together a body of +officers and troops and, with them, charged desperately upon the +British soldiers. He, with several other leaders of rank, was +killed; and the Burmese were scattered through the jungle, leaving +eight hundred dead behind them. + +The fact that ten stockades, provided with thirty pieces of artillery, +should have been captured in one day by the British, had created a +deep impression among the villagers of the neighbourhood--from whom +the truth could not be concealed--and indeed, all the villages, for +many miles round the scene of action, were crowded with wounded. They +told Meinik that the army was, for a time, profoundly depressed. Many +had deserted, and the fact that stockades they had thought impregnable +were of no avail, whatever, against the enemy, whose regular and +combined action was irresistible, as against their own isolated and +individual method of fighting, had shaken their hitherto profound +belief in their own superiority to any people with whom they might +come in contact. + +Since that time no serious fighting had taken place. Occasional +night attacks had been made, and all efforts on the part of the +invaders to obtain food, by foraging parties, had proved +unsuccessful. The boats of the fleet had gone up the Puzendown +river, that joined the Rangoon river some distance below the town, +and had captured a large number of boats that had been lying there, +waiting until Rangoon was taken before going up the river with +their cargoes of rice and salt fish; but they had gained no other +advantage for, although the villages were crowded with fugitives +from the town, these were driven into the jungle by the troops +stationed there for the purpose, as soon as the boats were seen +coming up the river. + +In some cases, however, the boats had arrived so suddenly that +there had not been time to do this; and the fugitives had been +taken to Rangoon, where it was said they had been very well +treated. + +Great reinforcements had now come down from the upper provinces. +Two of the king's brothers had arrived, to take command of the +army; one had established himself at Donabew, the other at Pegu. +They had brought with them numbers of astrologers, to fix upon a +propitious time for an attack; and the king's Invulnerables, +several thousands strong--a special corps, whom neither shot nor +steel could injure--were with them. + +About the 6th of August a strong position that had been taken up, +by a force sent by the prince at Pegu, in the old Portuguese fort +of Syriam had been attacked; with orders that the channel of the +Rangoon river should be blocked, so that none of the strangers +should escape the fate that awaited them. The position was a very +strong one. The trees and brushwood round the fort had been cleared +away; wherever there were gaps in the old wall stockades had been +erected; and great beams suspended from the parapet in order that, +if an attack was made, the ropes could be cut and the beams fall +upon the heads of the assailants. + +The British had, however, thrown a bridge across a deep creek, +pushed on against the place, and carried it in a few minutes; the +garrison flying, as soon as the assailants gained the ramparts, to +a pagoda standing on a very steep hill, defended by guns, and +assailable only by a very steep flight of steps. The troops, +however, pressed up these fearlessly; and the garrison, discouraged +and shaken by the reports of the fugitives from the lower fort, had +fled as soon as the British arrived at the top of the steps. + +Notwithstanding this and other, as successful, attacks upon their +stockades, the Burmese troops now felt confident that, with their +numerous forces, they would be victorious whenever the astrologers +decided that the favourable moment had arrived. + +Meinik had ascertained, from the villagers, the name of the leader +and the locality to which the corps belonged that was posted +nearest to Rangoon. As soon as it was dark, he and Stanley entered +the forest. The smoke had served as a guide, to them, as to the +position of the different corps; and they were able to make their +way between these without being questioned. Presently, however, +they came upon a strong picket. + +"Where are you going?" the officer in command asked. + +"To join the corps of the Woondock Snodee," Meinik replied. "We +were away at Bhanno when the order came, and the rest had gone down +the river before we got to Mew; so we came on by ourselves, not +wishing to fail in our duty." + +"You are just in time," the officer said. "The Woondock is a +quarter of a mile away, on the left." + +They moved off in that direction; but soon left the track and, +avoiding the camp, kept away until they reached the edge of the +forest. Then they crept forward through the jungle and brushwood, +pausing to listen from time to time and, three times, changing +their course to avoid parties of the Burmese acting as outposts. + +On issuing from the jungle they crawled forward for three or four +hundred yards, so as to be beyond musket shot of the outposts; and +then remained quiet until morning broke. Then they could perceive +red coats moving about, in a small village before which a +breastwork had been thrown up, some four hundred yards away from +them and, getting up to their feet, ran towards it. Several shots +were fired at them, from the jungle behind; and some soldiers at +once appeared at the breastwork. Supposing that the two figures +approaching were Burmese deserters, they did not fire; and Stanley +and his companion were soon among them. + +They were soldiers of one of the Bengal regiments; and Stanley, to +their surprise, addressed them in their own language. + +"I am an Englishman," he said. "I am one of the prisoners whom they +took, at Ramoo, and have escaped from their hands. Are there any of +your officers in the village?" + +"I will take you to them," a native sub-officer said; and Stanley, +in a minute or two, entered a cottage in which four English +officers were just taking their early breakfast, preparatory to +turning out on duty. + +"Whom have you got here, jemadar?" one of them asked, in Bengalee. + +Stanley answered for himself. + +"I am an Englishman, sir, and have just escaped from Ava." + +The officer uttered an exclamation of surprise. + +"Well, sir," the senior of them said, as he held out his hand to +Stanley, "I congratulate you on having got away, whoever you are; +but I am bound to say that, if it were not for your speech, I +should not have believed you; for I have never seen anyone look +less like an Englishman than you do." + +"My name is Stanley Brooke, sir. I am the son of the late Captain +Brooke, of the 15th Native Regiment." + +"Then I should know you," one of the other officers said, "for I +knew your father; and I remember seeing your name in the list of +officers killed, at Ramoo, and wondered if it could be the lad I +knew five or six years ago." + +"I recollect you, Captain Cooke," Stanley said. "Your regiment was +at Agra, when we were there." + +"Right you are; and I am heartily glad that the news of your death +was false," and he shook hands cordially with Stanley. + +"And who is your companion?" the major asked. "Is he an Englishman, +also?" + +"No, sir; he is a native. He is a most faithful fellow. He has +acted as my guide, all the way down from the point we started from, +twenty miles from Ava. I could never have accomplished it without +his aid for, although I speak Burmese well enough to pass anywhere, +my face is so different in shape from theirs that, if I were looked +at closely in the daylight, I should be suspected at once. I could +never have got here without his aid." + +"How was it that he came to help you, sir?" Major Pemberton asked. +"As far as we can see, the Burmese hate us like poison. Even when +they are wounded to death, they will take a last shot at any +soldiers marching past them." + +"I happened to save his life from a leopard," Stanley said, "and, +truly, he has shown his gratitude." + +"Jemadar," the major said, "take that man away with you. See that +he is well treated. Give him some food, of course. He will +presently go with this officer to the general." + +Stanley said a few words in Burmese to Meinik, telling him that he +was to have food, and would afterwards go with him to the general; +and he then, at the invitation of the officers, sat down with them +to breakfast. While eating it, Stanley told them something of his +adventures. After the meal was over, the major said: + +"You had better go with Mr. Brooke to the general, Captain Cooke. I +cannot well leave the regiment. + +"We can let you have an outfit, Mr. Brooke; though we are, most of +us, reduced pretty well to our last garments. What with the jungle +and what with the damp, we have nearly all arrived at the last +state of dilapidation; but I am sure the general would like to see +you in your present disguise." + +"It makes no difference to me, sir," Stanley said, with a laugh. "I +am so accustomed to this black petticoat, now, that I should almost +feel strange in anything else. I am afraid this dye will be a long +time before it wears itself out. It is nearly three weeks since I +was dyed last, and it has faded very little, yet." + +"You need not take your arms, anyhow," Captain Cooke said. "You +will attract less attention going without them, for it will only be +supposed that you are one of the natives who have been brought in +by the boats." + +Meinik was sitting on the ground, contentedly, outside the cottage, +the jemadar standing beside him. + +"Have you had any food, Meinik?" Stanley asked. + +The man nodded. + +"Good food," he said. + +"That is all right. Now, come along with us. You can leave your +weapons here--they won't be wanted." + +Meinik rose and followed Stanley and Captain Cooke. There were +houses scattered all along the roadside. These were now all +occupied by officers and troops, and there were so many of them +that it had not been necessary to place any of the men under +canvas--an important consideration, during the almost continuous +rain of the last three months. + +"Why, Cooke, I did not know that you talked Burmese," an officer +standing at one of the doors remarked, as the officer came along, +chatting with Stanley. + +"You don't know all my accomplishments, Phillipson," the captain +laughed, for the idea that there existed such a thing as a Burmese +peasant who could talk English had not occurred to the other. "I am +taking him to the chief, to show off my powers;" and passed on, +leaving the officer looking after him, with a puzzled expression on +his face. + +On their arrival at Sir Archibald Campbell's headquarters, Captain +Cooke sent in his name and, as the general was not at the moment +engaged, he was at once shown in; followed by Stanley, Meinik +remaining without. + +"Good morning, sir. I see you have brought in a deserter," the +general said. + +"He is not a deserter, sir. He is an escaped prisoner, who has made +his way down from Ava through the enemy's lines. + +"This is Mr. Brooke. He was serving as an officer with the native +levy, at Ramoo, and was reported as killed. However, he was +fortunately only stunned and, being the only officer found alive, +was sent by Bandoola as a prisoner to Ava. I may say that he is a +son of the late Captain Brooke, of the 15th Native Infantry." + +"You are certainly wonderfully disguised," the general said; "and I +congratulate you heartily on your escape. I should have passed you +by as a native without a second glance though, now that I am told +that you are an Englishman, I can see that you have not the wide +cheekbones and flat face of a Burman. How did you manage to make +your way down?" + +"I travelled almost entirely by night, sir; and I had with me a +faithful guide. He is outside. I don't think that I should ever +have got down without him, though I speak Burmese well enough to +pass--especially as the language differs so much, in the different +districts." + +"Is he a Burman?" + +"Yes, general." + +"Have you arranged with him for any particular sum for his +services? If so, it will of course be paid." + +"No, sir; he came down simply in gratitude for a service I rendered +him. I do not know whether he intends to go back; but I hope that +he will remain here, with me." + +"I have brought Mr. Brooke here, sir," Captain Cooke said, "at the +request of the major; thinking that you might like to ask him some +questions as to the state of things in the interior." + +"I should like to have a long talk with Mr. Brooke," the general +said; "but unless he has any certain news of the date they intend +to attack us, I will not detain him now. The first thing will be +for him to get into civilized clothes again. + +"By the way, poor young Hitchcock's effects are to be sold this +morning. I should think that they would fit Mr. Brooke very well. + +"Let me see. Of course, your pay has been running on, since you +were taken prisoner, Mr. Brooke." + +"I am afraid, sir, that there is no pay due," Stanley said. "I +happened to be at Ramoo at the time, looking after some goods of my +uncle, who carries on a considerable trade on the coast; and as I +talk the language, and there were very few who did so, I +volunteered to act as an officer with the native levy. I preferred +to act as a volunteer, in order that I might be free to leave, at +any time, if I received an order from my uncle to join him at +Chittagong. + +"I could give an order on him, but I do not know where he is to be +found. I have with me some uncut rubies; though I have no idea what +they are worth, for I have not even looked at them yet; but they +should certainly be good security for 50 pounds." + +"We can settle that presently, Mr. Brooke. I will write an order on +the paymaster for 500 rupees; and we can talk the matter over, +afterwards. I am afraid that you will have to pay rather high for +the clothes, for almost everyone here has worn out his kit; and Mr. +Hitchcock only joined us a fortnight before his death, so that his +are in very good condition. Of course, they are all uniform--he was +on my staff--but that will not matter. You could hardly be going +about in civilian clothes, here. + +"I shall be very glad if you will dine with me, at six o'clock this +evening. Have a talk with your man before that, and see what he +wants to do. If he is a sharp fellow, he might be very useful to +us." + +The general wrote the order on the paymaster, and Captain Cooke +took Stanley across to the office and obtained the cash for it. +Making inquiry, he found that the sale was to come off in a quarter +of an hour. + +"I will do the bidding for you, if you like, Brooke," Captain Cooke +said. "I dare say you would rather not be introduced, generally, in +your present rig." + +"Much rather not, and I shall be much obliged by your doing it." + +"All right. I will make your money go as far as I can. Of course, +the poor fellow brought no full-dress uniform with him, or anything +of that sort." + +"You will find me here with my Burman," Stanley said. "We will +stroll round the place for half an hour, and then come back here +again." + +There was very little to see in the town. Meinik was astonished, +when they mounted the river bank and had a view of the ships lying +at anchor. For a time he was too surprised to speak, never having +seen anything larger than the clumsy cargo boats which made a +voyage, once a year, up the river. + +"It is wonderful!" he said at last. "Who would have thought of such +great ships? If the emperor could but see them, I think that he +would make peace. It is easy to see that you know many things more +than we do. Could one go on board of them?" + +"Not as I am, at present, Meinik; but when I get English clothes on +again, and rid myself from some of this stain, I have no doubt I +shall be able to take you on board one of the ships-of-war. + +"And now, will you let me know what you are thinking of doing? I +told the general what service you had rendered me, and he asked me +what you were going to do. I told him that, as yet, I did not know +whether you were going to stay here, or go back again." + +"Are you going to stay here?" + +"I think so--at any rate, for a time. I do not know where the uncle +I have told you about is, at present. At any rate, while this war +is going on he can do very little trade, and can manage very well +without me." + +"As long as you stay here, I shall stay," the Burman said. "If I +went back, I should have to fight against your people; and I don't +want to do that. I have no quarrel with them and, from what I see, +I am not so sure as I was that we shall drive you into the sea. You +have beaten us, whenever you have fought; and I would rather stay +with you, than be obliged to fight against you. + +"Not many men want to fight. We heard that in the villages, and +that those who have not got wives and children held, as hostages +for them, get away from the army and hide in the woods. + +"You will be a great man now and, if you will let me stop, I will +be your servant." + +"I will gladly keep you with me, Meinik, if you are willing to +stay; and I am sure that you will be better off, here, than out in +the woods, and a good deal safer. At any rate, stay until after +your people make their next attack. You will see then how useless +it is for them to fight against us. When we can attack them in +their stockades, although they are ten to one against us, and drive +them out after a quarter of an hour's fighting; you may be sure +that in the open ground, without defences, they will have no chance +whatever. + +"I hope they will soon get tired of fighting, and that the court +will make peace. We did not want to fight with them--it was they +who attacked us but, now that we have had all the expense of coming +here, we shall go on fighting till the emperor agrees to make +peace; but I don't think that we shall ever go out of Rangoon, +again, and believe that we shall also hold the ports in Tenasserim +that we have captured." + +"The emperor will never agree to that," Meinik said, shaking his +head positively. + +"Then if he does not, he will see that we shall go up the river to +Ava and, in the end, if he goes on fighting we shall capture the +whole country; and rule over it, just as we have done the greater +part of India." + +"I think that would be good for us," the man said philosophically. +"It would not matter much to us to whom we paid our taxes--and you +would not tax us more heavily than we are now--for as we came down +you saw many villages deserted, and the land uncultivated, because +the people could not pay the heavy exactions. It is not the +king--he does not get much of it--but he gives a province, or a +district, or a dozen villages to someone at court; and says, 'you +must pay me so much, and all that you can get out of it, besides, +is for yourself;' so they heap on the taxes, and the people are +always in great poverty and, when they find that they cannot pay +what is demanded and live, then they all go away to some other +place, where the lord is not so harsh." + +"I am sure that it would be a good thing for them, Meinik. The +people of India are a great deal better off, under us, than they +were under their native rulers. There is a fixed tax, and no one is +allowed to charge more, or to oppress the people in any way. + +"But now we must be going. I said that I would be back at the place +we started from, in half an hour." + + + +Chapter 7: On The Staff. + + +Captain Cooke had done his best, previous to the beginning of the +auction, to disarm opposition; by going about among the officers +who dropped in, with the intention of bidding, telling them +something of Stanley's capture, adventures, and escape; and saying +that the general had, himself, advised him to obtain an outfit by +buying a considerable portion of the young officer's kit. + +"I have no doubt that he will put him on his staff," he said. "From +his knowledge of the country, and the fact that he speaks the +language well, he would be very useful and, as he has gone through +all this from serving as a volunteer, without pay, I hope you +fellows won't run up the prices, except for things that you really +want." + +His story had the desired effect; and when Captain Cooke met +Stanley, he was able to tell him that he had bought for him the +greater portion of the kit, including everything that was +absolutely necessary. + +"Are there any plain clothes?" Stanley asked, after thanking him +warmly for the trouble he had taken. + +"No. Of course, he left everything of that sort at Calcutta. No one +in his senses would think of bringing mufti out with him, +especially to such a country as this." + +"Then I shall have to go in uniform to the general's," Stanley +said, in a tone of consternation. "It seems to me that it would be +an awfully impudent thing, to go in staff uniform to dine with the +general, when I have no right whatever to wear it." + +"Well, as the general advised you himself to buy the things, he +cannot blame you for wearing them; and I have not the least doubt +that he is going to offer you a staff appointment of some sort." + +"I should like it very much, as long as the war lasted, Captain +Cooke; but I don't think that I should care about staying in the +army, permanently. You see, my uncle is working up a very good +business. He has been at it, now, seven or eight years; and he was +saying the last time that I was with him that, as soon as these +troubles were over, and trade began again, he should give me a +fourth share of it; and make it a third share, when I got to +twenty-one." + +"Then you would be a great fool to give it up," Captain Cooke said, +heartily. "A man who has got a good business, out here, would have +an income as much as all the officers of a regiment, together. He +is his own master, and can retire when he likes, and enjoy his +money in England. + +"Still, as trade is at a standstill at present, I think that it +would be wise of you to accept any offer that the general might +make to you. It might even be to your advantage, afterwards. To +have served on Campbell's staff will be an introduction to every +officers' mess in the country; and you may be sure that, not only +shall we hold Rangoon in future, but there will be a good many more +British stations between Assam and here than there now are; and it +would be a pull for you, even in the way of trade, to stand on a +good footing everywhere." + +"I quite see that," Stanley agreed, "and if the general is good +enough to offer me an appointment, I shall certainly take it." + +"You have almost a right to one, Brooke. In the Peninsula lots of +men got their commissions by serving for a time as volunteers; and +having been wounded at Ramoo, and being one of the few survivors of +that fight; and having gone through a captivity, at no small risk +of being put to death the first time that the king was out of +temper, your claim is a very strong one, indeed. Besides, there is +hardly a man here who speaks Burmese, and your services will be +very valuable. + +"Here are fifty rupees," he went on, handing the money to Stanley. +"It is not much change out of five hundred; but I can assure you +that you have got the things at a bargain, for you would have had +to pay more than that for them, in England; and I fancy most of the +things are in very good condition, for Hitchcock only came out +about four months ago. Of course the clothes are nothing like new +but, at any rate, they are in a very much better state than those +of anyone who came here three months ago. + +"I have ordered them all to be sent to my quarters where, of +course, you will take up your abode till something is settled about +you; which will probably be this evening. In that case, you will +have quarters allotted to you, tomorrow." + +"Thank you very much. I shall devote the best portion of this +afternoon to trying to get rid of as much of this stain as I can, +at least off my face and hands. The rest does not matter, one way +or the other, and will wear off gradually; but I should like to get +my face decent." + +"Well, you are rather an object, Stanley," he said. "It would not +matter so much about the colour, but all those tattoo marks are, to +say the least of it, singular. Of course they don't look so rum, +now, in that native undress; but when you get your uniform on, the +effect will be startling. + +"We will have a chat with the doctor. He may have something in his +medicine chest that will at least soften them down a bit. Of +course, if they were real tattoo marks there would be nothing for +it; but as they are only dye, or paint of some sort, they must wear +themselves out before very long." + +"I will try anything that he will give me. I don't care if it takes +the skin off." + +On returning to the quarters of Captain Cooke, Stanley was +introduced to the other officers of the regiment; among them the +doctor, to whom he at once applied for some means of taking off the +dye. + +"Have you asked the man you brought down with you?" the surgeon +said. "You say that he put it on, and he may know of something that +will take it off again." + +"No; I have asked him, and he knows of nothing. He used some of the +dye stuffs of the country, but he said he never heard of anyone +wanting to take the dye out of things that had been coloured." + +"If it were only cotton or cloth," the doctor said, "I have no +doubt a very strong solution of soda would take out the greater +portion of the dye; but the human skin won't stand boiling water. +However, I should say that if you have water as hot as you can bear +it, with plenty of soda and soap, it will do something for you. No +doubt, if you were to take a handful or two of very fine sand, it +would help a great deal; but if you use that, I should not put any +soda with the water, or you will practically take all the skin off, +and leave your face like a raw beef steak; which will be worse than +the stain and, indeed, in so hot a sun as we have, might be +dangerous, and bring on erysipelas. So you must be very careful; +and it will be far better for you to put up with being somewhat +singular in your appearance, for a bit, than to lay yourself up by +taking any strong measures to get rid of it." + +After an hour spent in vigorous washing, and aided by several rubs +with very fine sand, Stanley succeeded, to his great satisfaction, +in almost getting rid of the tattoo marks on his face. The general +dye had faded a little, though not much; but that with which the +marks had been made was evidently of a less stable character, and +yielded to soap and friction. + +Before he had concluded the work two trunks arrived and, finding +that his face was now beginning to smart a good deal, he abstained +for the time from further efforts; and turned to inspect his +purchases, with a good deal of interest. The uniforms consisted of +two undress suits; one with trousers, the other with breeches and +high boots, for riding. There was also a suit of mess jacket, +waistcoat, and trousers; three suits of white drill; half a dozen +white shirts for mess, and as many of thin flannel; and a good +stock of general underclothes, a pair of thick boots, and a light +pair for mess. There was also the sword, belt, and other +equipments; in fact, all the necessaries he would require for a +campaign. + +Before beginning to dress, he began to free his hair from the wax +with which it had been plastered up. He had obtained from the +doctor some spirits of turpentine and, with the aid of this, he +found the task a less difficult one than he had expected and, the +regimental barber being sent for by Captain Cooke, his hair was +soon shortened to the ordinary length. + +"You will do very well, now," the major said, as he went down into +the general room. "You have certainly succeeded a great deal better +than I thought you would. Of course you look very brown, but there +are a good many others nearly as dark as you are; for between the +rain showers the sun has tremendous power, and some of the men's +faces are almost skinned, while others have browned wonderfully. I +am sure that many of them are quite as dark as yours. So you will +pass muster very well." + +Before beginning to wash and change, Stanley had given Meinik the +clothes he had carried down with him; and when he went out to take +a short look round before tiffin--for which the servants were +already laying the cloth--he found the man, now looking like a +respectable Burman, standing near the door. He walked slowly past +him, but the man did not move--not recognizing him, in the +slightest degree, in his present attire. + +Then Stanley turned and faced him. + +"So you don't know me, Meinik." + +The Burman gave a start of surprise. + +"Certainly I did not know you, my lord," he said. "Who could have +known you? Before you were a poor Burmese peasant, now you are an +English lord." + +"Not a lord at all, Meinik. I am simply an English officer, and +dressed very much the same as I was when your people knocked me on +the head, at Ramoo." + +"I know your voice," Meinik said; "but even now that I know it is +you, I hardly recognize your face. Of course, the tattoo marks made +a great difference, but that is not all." + +"I think it is the hair that has made most difference, Meinik. You +see, it was all pulled off the brow and neck, before; and it will +be some time before it will grow naturally again. I had great +trouble to get it to lie down, even when it was wet; and it will +certainly have a tendency to stick up, for a long time. + +"The dress has made a good deal of alteration in you, too." + +"They are very good clothes," Meinik said. "I have never had such +good ones on before. I have had money enough to buy them; but +people would have asked where I got it from, and it never does to +make a show of being better off than one's neighbour. A man is sure +to be fleeced, if he does. + +"What can I do for my lord?" + +"Nothing, at present, Meinik. I am going to lunch with the officers +here, and to dine with the general, and sleep here. Tomorrow I +daresay I shall move into quarters of my own. + +"You had better buy what you want, for today, in the market. I +don't know whether it is well supplied but, as we saw some of your +people about, there must be food to be obtained." + +"They gave me plenty to eat when I came in," he said, "but I will +buy something for supper. + +"No, I do not want money, I have plenty of lead left." + +"You had better take a couple of rupees, anyhow. There are sure to +be some traders from India who have opened shops here, and they +won't care to take lead in payment. You must get some fresh muslin +for your turban; and you had better close it up at the top, this +time. It will go better with your clothes." + +Meinik grinned. + +"I shall look quite like a person of importance. I shall be taken +for, at least, the headman of a large village." + +He took the two rupees and walked off towards the town, while +Stanley went in to luncheon. There were a good many remarks as to +his altered appearance. + +"Do you know, Brooke," one of the young lieutenants said, "I did +not feel at all sure that Cooke was not humbugging us, when he +introduced you to us, and that you were not really a Burman who had +travelled, and had somehow learned to speak English extraordinarily +well." + +"Clothes and soap and water make a wonderful difference," Stanley +laughed, "but I shall be a good many shades lighter, when the rest +of the dye wears off. At any rate, I can go about, now, without +anyone staring at me." + +After tiffin, Stanley had to tell his story again, at a very much +greater length than before. + +"You certainly have gone through some queer adventures," the major +said, when he had finished his relation; "and there is no doubt +that you have had wonderful luck. In the first place, if that +bullet had gone half an inch lower, you would not have been one of +the four white survivors of that ugly business at Ramoo; then you +were lucky that they did not chop off your head, either when they +first took you, or when they got you to Ava. Then again, it was +lucky that Bandoola sent a special message that he wanted you kept +as an interpreter for himself, and that the official in charge of +you turned out a decent fellow, and aided you to make your escape. + +"As to your obtaining the services of the man you brought down with +you, I do not regard that as a question of luck. You saved the +man's life, by an act of the greatest bravery--one that not one man +in ten would perform, or try to perform, for the life of a total +stranger. I hope that I should have made the effort, had I been in +your place; but I say frankly that I am by no means sure that I +should have done so. + +"The betting was a good twenty to one against its being done +successfully. If the brute had heard your footstep, it would have +been certain death and, even when you reached him, the chances were +strongly against your being able to strike a blow at the animal +that would, for a moment, disable him; and so give you time to +snatch up one of the guns--which might not, after all, have been +loaded. + +"It was a wonderfully gallant action, lad. You did not tell us very +much about it yourself but, while you were getting the dye off, I +got hold of one of the traders here, who happened to be passing, +and who understood their language; and with his assistance I +questioned your fellow, and got all the particulars from him. I say +again, it was as plucky a thing as I have ever heard of." + +A few minutes later an orderly came in with a note from the +general, asking the major and Captain Cooke also to dine with him +that evening. Stanley was very pleased that the two officers were +going with him, as it took away the feeling of shyness he felt, at +the thought of presenting himself in staff uniform at the +general's. + +Sir Archibald Campbell put him at ease, at once, by the kindness +with which he received him. Stanley began to apologize for his +dress, but the general stopped him, at once. + +"I intended, of course, that you should wear it, Mr. Brooke. I am +sure that you would not find a dress suit in the camp. However, we +will make matters all right, tomorrow. Judging from what you said +that, as you cannot join your uncle at present, you would be +willing to remain here, your name will appear in orders, tomorrow +morning, as being granted a commission in the 89th, pending the +arrival of confirmation from home; which of course, in such a case, +is a mere form. You will also appear in the orders as being +appointed my aide-de-camp, in place of Mr. Hitchcock, with extra +pay as interpreter. + +"No, do not thank me. Having served as a volunteer, taken part in a +severe action, and having been wounded and imprisoned, you had +almost a right to a commission. After dinner, I hope that you will +give us all a full account of your adventures; it was but a very +slight sketch that I heard from you, this morning." + +The general then introduced Stanley to the other members of his +staff. + +"If you had seen him as I saw him, this morning," he said, with a +smile, "you certainly would not recognize him now. He was naked to +the waist, and had nothing on but the usual peasant attire of a +piece of black cloth, reaching to his knees. I knew, of course, +that the question of costume would soon be got over; but I own that +I did not think that I should be able to employ him, for some +little time. Not only was his stain a great deal darker than it is +now, but he was thickly tattooed up to the eyes, and one could +hardly be sending messages by an aide-de-camp so singular in +appearance; but I see that, somehow, he has entirely got rid of the +tattoo marks; and his skin is now very little, if at all, darker +than that of many of us, so that I shall be able to put him in +harness at once." + +After dinner was over and cigars lighted, Stanley told his story as +before, passing over lightly the manner in which he had gained the +friendship of the Burman. When he had finished, however, Major +Pemberton said: + +"With your permission, general, I will supplement the story a +little. Mr. Brooke has told me somewhat more than he has told you, +but I gained the whole facts from his guide's own lips." + +"No, major, please," Stanley said colouring, even under his dye. +"The matter is not worth telling." + +"You must permit us to be a judge of that, Mr. Brooke," the general +said, with a smile at the young fellow's interruption of his +superior officer. + +"I beg your pardon, Major Pemberton," Stanley stammered in some +confusion. "Only--" + +"Only you would rather that I did not tell about your struggle with +the leopard. I think it ought to be told, and I am pretty sure Sir +Archibald Campbell will agree with me," and Major Pemberton then +gave a full account of the adventure in the forest. + +"Thank you, major. You were certainly quite right in telling the +story, for it is one that ought to be told and, if Mr. Brooke will +forgive my saying so, is one of those cases in which it is a +mistake for a man to try to hide his light under a bushel. + +"You see, it cannot but make a difference in the estimation in +which we hold you. Most young fellows would, as you did, have +joined their countrymen when threatened by a greatly superior enemy +and, again, most would, if prisoners, have taken any opportunity +that offered to effect their escape. Therefore, in the brief +account that you gave me, this morning, it appeared to me that you +had behaved pluckily and shrewdly, and had well earned a +commission, especially as you have a knowledge of the language. You +simply told me that you had been able to render some service to the +Burman who travelled down with you, but such service might have +been merely that you assisted him when he was in want, bound up a +wound, or any other small matter. + +"Now we find that you performed an act of singular courage, an act +that even the oldest shikaree would have reason to be proud of. +Such an act--performed, too, for a stranger, and that stranger an +enemy--would, of itself, give any man a title to the esteem and +regard of any among whom he might be thrown, and would lead them to +regard him in an entirely different light to that in which they +would otherwise have held him. + +"I think that you will all agree with me, gentlemen." + +"Certainly." + +There was a chorus of assent from the circle of officers. His +narrative had, as the general said, shown that the young fellow was +possessed of coolness, steadiness, and pluck; but this feat was +altogether out of the common and, as performed by a mere lad, +seemed little short of marvellous. + +"You will, of course, have Hitchcock's quarters," the quartermaster +general said to Stanley, as the party broke up. "It is a small +room, but it has the advantage of being water tight, which is more +than one can say of most of our quarters. It is a room in the upper +storey of the next house. I fancy the poor fellow's card is on the +door still. The commissariat offices are in the lower part of the +house, and they occupy all the other rooms upstairs; but we kept +this for one of the aides-de-camp, so that the general could send a +message at once, night or day." + +"Of course I shall want a horse, sir." + +"Yes, you must have a horse. I will think over what we can do for +you, in that way. There is no buying one here, unless a field +officer is killed, or dies. + +"By the way, Hitchcock's horses are not sold, yet. They were not +put up, yesterday. I have no doubt that some arrangement can be +made about them, and the saddlery." + +"That would be excellent, sir. As I told the general this morning, +I have some rubies and other stones. I have no idea what they are +worth. They were given me by those men I was with, in the forest. +They said that they were very difficult to dispose of, as the mines +are monopolies of government so, when my man Meinik proposed it, +they acceded at once to his request, and handed a number of them +over to me. + +"I have not even looked at them. There may be someone, here, who +could tell me what they are worth." + +"Yes, I have no doubt some of those Parsee merchants, who have +lately set up stores, could tell you. I should only take down two +or three stones to them, if I were you. If they are really +valuable, you might be robbed of them; but I am rather afraid that +you will not find that they are so. Brigand fellows will hardly +have been likely to give you anything very valuable." + +"I don't think that they looked at them, themselves; they were the +proceeds of one day's attack on a number of merchants. They found +them concealed on them, and they were so well satisfied with the +loot they got, in merchandise that they could dispose of, that I +doubt whether they even opened the little packages of what they +considered the most dangerous goods to keep; for if they were +captured, and gems found upon them, it would be sufficient to +condemn them, at once." + +"Do you speak Hindustani? If not, I will send one of the clerks +with you." + +"Yes, sir; and three or four other of the Indian languages." + +"Ah! Then you can manage for yourself. + +"When you have seen one of these Parsees, come round to my office. +I shall have seen the paymaster by that time, and have talked over +with him how we can arrange about the horses. I should think that +the best way would be to have a committee of three officers to +value them, and the saddlery; and then you might authorize him to +receive your extra pay as interpreter, and to place it to +Hitchcock's account. You will find your own staff pay more than +ample, here; as there are no expenses, whatever, except your share +of the mess." + +"Thank you very much, indeed, Colonel." + +In the morning, Stanley took one of the little parcels from the bag +and opened it. It contained thirty stones, of which twenty were +rubies, six sapphires, and four emeralds. They seemed to him of a +good size but, as they were in the rough state, he had no idea what +size they would be, when cut. + +There were three of the Parsee merchants. The first he went to +said, at once, that he did not deal in gems. The next he called on +examined the stones carefully. + +"It is impossible to say, for certain," he said, "how much they are +worth until they are cut, for there may be flaws in them that +cannot be detected. Now, if I were to buy them like this, I could +not give more than a hundred rupees each. If they are all flawless, +they would be worth much more; but it would be a pure speculation, +and I will not go beyond that sum." + +Stanley then visited the third store. The trader here inspected +them a little more carefully than the last had done, examined them +with a magnifying glass, held them up to the light; then he weighed +each stone and jotted down some figures. At last, he said: + +"The stones are worth five thousand rupees. If they are flawless, +they would be worth double that. I will give you five thousand +myself or, if you like, I will send them to a friend of mine, at +Madras. He is one of the best judges of gems in India. He shall say +what he will give for them, and you shall pay me five percent +commission. He is an honest trader; you can ask any of the officers +from Madras." + +"I will accept that offer, if you will make me an advance of +fifteen hundred rupees upon them; and will pay you, at the rate of +ten percent per annum, interest till you receive the money for +them." + +The Parsee again took the gems, and examined them carefully. + +"Do you agree to take the jeweller's offer, whatever it is?" + +"Yes; that is to say, if it is over the five thousand. If it is +under the five thousand, I will sell them to you at that sum." + +"I agree to that," the man said. "But do not fear; if the two +largest stones are without a flaw, they alone are worth five +thousand." + +"Let us draw up the agreement, at once," Stanley said. + +And, accordingly, the terms were drawn up, in Hindustani, and were +signed by both parties. The Parsee then went to a safe, unlocked +it, and counted out the rupees, to the value of 150 pounds. These +he placed in a bag, and handed them to Stanley who, delighted at +the sum that he had obtained for but a small portion of the gems, +went to the quartermaster general's office. + +"We have just finished your business," Colonel Adair said, as he +entered. "Major Moultrie, the paymaster, Colonel Watt, and myself +have examined the horses. I know that Hitchcock paid sixty pounds +apiece for them, at Calcutta. They are both Arabs, and good ones, +and were not dear at the money. Our opinion is that, if they were +put up to auction here, they would fetch 40 pounds apiece; and that +the saddle and bridle, holsters, and accoutrements would fetch +another 20 pounds. There are also a pair of well-finished pistols +in the holsters. They were overlooked, or they would have been put +up in the sale yesterday. They value them at 8 pounds the brace; in +all, 108 pounds. + +"Will that suit you? The major will, as I proposed, stop the money +from your pay as a first-class interpreter--that is, two hundred +and fifty rupees a month--so that, in four months and a half, you +will have cleared it off." + +"I am very much obliged to you, Colonel; but I have just received +an advance of fifteen hundred rupees, on some of my gems which the +Parsee is going to send to a jeweller, of the name of Burragee, at +Madras." + +"I congratulate you, for I hardly hoped that they would turn out to +be worth so much. Burragee is a first-rate man, and you can rely +upon getting a fair price from him. Well, that obviates all +difficulty. + +"By the way, I should recommend you to get a light bedstead and +bed, and a couple of blankets, at one of the Parsee stores. Of +course, you did not think of it, yesterday, or you might have +bought Hitchcock's. However, I noticed in one of the Parsees' shops +a number of light bamboo bedsteads; which are the coolest and best +in a climate like this. If you lay a couple of blankets on the +bamboos, you will find that you don't want a mattress." + +"I don't know what my duties are, sir, or whether the general will +be wanting me." + +"He will not want you, today. Anyhow, he will know that you will be +making your arrangements, and moving into your quarters. + +"By the way, Hitchcock brought a syce with him. You must have a man +for your horses, and I have no doubt he will be glad to stay on +with you." + +Two hours later Stanley was installed in his quarters--a room some +twelve feet long by eight wide. A bed stood in one corner. There +was a table for writing on, two light bamboo chairs, and an Indian +lounging chair. In the corner was a small bamboo table, on which +was a large brass basin; while a great earthenware jar for water +stood beside it, and a piece of Indian matting covered the floor. + +He learned that the staff messed together, in a large room in the +next house; and that he would there get a cup of coffee and a +biscuit, at six in the morning, breakfast at half-past eight, lunch +and dinner; so that he would not have to do any cooking, whatever, +for himself. He had given Meinik a small sum to lay out in cooking +pots and necessaries for his own use. + +The syce had gladly entered his employ. Stanley had inspected the +horses which, although light to the eye, would be well capable of +bearing his weight through a long day's work. They were picketed, +with those of the general and staff, in a line behind the house +devoted to the headquarters. After lunch he went into the +general's, and reported himself as ready for duty. + +"I shall not want you this afternoon, Mr. Brooke. Here is a plan +showing the position of the different corps. You had better get it +by heart. When it gets cooler, this afternoon, I should advise you +to ride out and examine the position and the roads; so that even at +night you can, if necessary, carry a message to any of the +regiments. The Burmese are constantly creeping up and stabbing our +sentries, and sometimes they attack in considerable force. When +anything like heavy firing begins, it will be your duty to find out +at once what is going on; and bring me word, as it may be necessary +to send up reinforcements. + +"In the morning it will be your duty to examine any prisoners who +have been taken during the night, and also natives who have made +their way into the town; in order to ascertain whether any date has +been fixed for their next attack, and what forces are likely to +take part in it. You can make your man useful at this work. + +"By the way, I will tell Colonel Adair to put him down on the list +of the quartermaster's native followers. He need not do anything +else but this. But it is likely that the natives will speak more +freely to him than they would to a white officer, and he may as +well be earning thirty rupees a month, and drawing rations, as +hanging about all day, doing nothing." + +Thanking the general, Stanley took the plan and, going back to his +quarters, studied it attentively. He told Meinik of the arrangement +that had been made for him, with which the Burman was much pleased. +Thirty rupees a month seemed a large sum to him, and he was glad +that he should not be costing Stanley money for his food. + +Three hours later one of his horses was brought round, and he +started on his ride through the camp. There were two roads leading +through the town to the great pagoda. Both were thickly bordered by +religious houses and pagodas--the latter, for the most part, being +in a state of dilapidation. Houses and pagodas alike had been +turned into quarters for the troops, and had been invaluable during +the wet season. + +The terrace of the great pagoda was occupied by the 89th Regiment +and the Madras Artillery. This was the most advanced position, and +was the key of the defence. Leaving his horse in charge of his +syce, at the foot of the pagoda hill, Stanley went up to the +terrace and soon entered into conversation with some of the British +officers; who at once recognized him as having been, that morning, +put in orders as the general's aide-de-camp. As he was unknown to +everyone, and no ship had come in for some days, there was +naturally much curiosity felt as to who the stranger was who had +been appointed to a commission, and to the coveted post of +aide-de-camp, in one day. + +After chatting for two or three minutes, they conducted Stanley to +the colonel's quarters, a small building at the foot of the pagoda. + +"This is Mr. Brooke, Colonel, the gentleman who was gazetted to us, +this morning." + +"I am glad to see you, Mr. Brooke; but I should be more glad, +still, if you had been coming to join, for we have lost several +officers from sickness, and there are others unfit for duty. When +did you arrive?" + +"I arrived only yesterday morning, sir. I came here in disguise, +having made my way down from Ava." + +"Oh, indeed! We heard a report that a white man had arrived, in +disguise, at the lines of the 45th Native Infantry; but we have had +no particulars, beyond that." + +"I was captured at Ramoo, sir, while I was acting as an officer of +the native levy. Fortunately I was stunned by the graze of a musket +ball and, being supposed dead, was not killed; as were all the +other officers who fell into the hands of the Burmese. Their fury +had abated by the time I came to myself, and I was carried up to +Ava with some twenty sepoy prisoners. After a time I made my escape +from prison, and took to the forest; where I remained some weeks, +till the search for me had abated somewhat. Then I made my way down +the country, for the most part in a fishing boat, journeying only +at night, and so succeeded in getting in here. Fortunately I speak +the Mug dialect, which is very closely akin to the Burmese." + +"Well," the colonel said, "I hope that you will consider the +regiment your home; though I suppose that, until the campaign is at +an end, you will only be able to pay us an occasional visit. You +are lucky in getting the staff appointment. No doubt your being +able to talk Burmese has a great deal to do with it." + +"Everything, I think, sir. The general had no one on his staff who +could speak the language and, unless he happened to have with him +one of the very few men here who can do so, often had to wait some +time before a prisoner could be questioned." + +He remained chatting for half an hour, and then rode back to the +town; taking the other road to that which he had before traversed. + + + +Chapter 8: The Pagoda. + + +Two days later a prisoner was captured, when endeavouring to crawl +up the pagoda hill--having slipped past the outposts--and was sent +into headquarters. Stanley questioned him closely; but could obtain +no information, whatever, from him. Telling him to sit down by the +house, he placed a British sentry over him. + +"Keep your eye," he said, "on the door of the next house. You will +see a Burman come out. You are to let him talk with the prisoner, +but let no one else speak to him. Don't look as if you had any +orders about him, but stand carelessly by. The fellow will tell us +nothing, but it is likely enough that he will speak to one of his +own countrymen." + +"I understand, sir." + +Stanley went into his house and told Meinik what he was wanted to +do. + +"I will find out," Meinik said confidently and, a minute or two +later, went out and strolled along past the prisoner. As he did so +he gave him a little nod and, returning again shortly, saluted him +in Burmese. The third time he passed he looked inquiringly at the +sentry, as if to ask whether he might speak to the prisoner. The +soldier, however, appeared to pay no attention to him; but stood +with grounded musket, leaning against the wall, and Meinik went up +to the man. + +"You are in bad luck," he said. "How did you manage to fall into +the hands of these people?" + +"It matters not to you," the Burman said indignantly, "since you +have gone over to them." + +"Not at all, not at all," Meinik replied. "Do you not know that +there are many here who, like myself, have come in as fugitives, +with instructions what to do when our people attack? I am expecting +news as to when the soothsayers declare the day to be a fortunate +one. Then we shall all be in readiness to do our share, as soon as +the firing begins." + +"It will be on the fourth day from this," the Burman said. "We do +not know whether it will be the night before, or the night after. +The soothsayers say both will be fortunate nights; and the +Invulnerables will then assault the pagoda, and sweep the +barbarians away. The princes and woongees will celebrate the great +annual festival there, two days later." + +"That is good!" Meinik said. "We shall be on the lookout, never +fear." + +"What are they going to do to me. Will they cut off my head?" + +"No, you need not be afraid of that. These white men never kill +prisoners. After they are once taken, they are safe. You will be +kept for a time and, when our countrymen have destroyed the +barbarians and taken the town, they will free you from prison. + +"There are some of the white officers coming. I must get away, or +they will be asking questions." + +As he walked away, the sentry put his musket to his shoulder and +began to march briskly up and down. A moment later the general +stepped up to him. + +"What are you doing, my man? Who put you on guard over that +prisoner?" + +"I don't know his name, sir," the sentry said, standing at +attention. "He was a young staff officer. He came to the guard tent +and called for a sentry and, as I was next on duty, the sergeant +sent me with him. He put me to watch this man." + +"All right; keep a sharp lookout over him. + +"I wonder what Brooke left the fellow here for, instead of sending +him to prison," the general said to Colonel Adair. "We examined +him, but could get nothing out of him, even when I threatened to +hang him." + +"I will just run up to his quarters and ask him, sir." + +Just as he entered the house, Stanley was coming down the stairs. + +"The general wants to know, Mr. Brooke, why you placed a prisoner +under a guard by his house; instead of sending him to the prison, +as usual?" + +"I was just coming to tell him, sir." + +"Ah, well, he is outside; so you can tell us both together." + +"Well, Mr. Brooke, what made you put a sentry over the man, and +leave him here? The men are hard enough worked, without having +unnecessary sentry duty." + +"Yes, sir; I only left him for a few minutes. I was convinced the +man knew something, by his demeanour when I questioned him; and I +thought I might as well try if my man could not get more out of him +than I could. So I put a sentry over him, and gave him instructions +that he was to let a Burman, who would come out of this house, +speak to the prisoner; but that no one else was to approach him. + +"Then I instructed my man as to the part that he was to play. He +passed two or three times, making a sign of friendship to the +prisoner. Then, as the sentry had apparently no objection to his +speaking to him, he came up. At first the man would say nothing to +him, but Meinik told him that he was one of those who had been sent +to Rangoon to aid, when the assault took place; and that he was +anxiously waiting for news when the favourable day would be +declared by the astrologers, so that he and those with him would be +ready to begin their work, as soon as the attack commenced. The +prisoner fell into the snare, and told him that it would be made +either on the night before or on the night of the fourth day from +this; when the Invulnerables had undertaken to storm the pagoda. It +seems that the date was fixed partly because it was a fortunate +one, and also in order that the princes and head officials might +properly celebrate the great annual festival of the pagoda; which +falls, it seems, on the sixth day from now." + +"Excellent indeed, Mr. Brooke. It is a great relief to me to know +when the assault is going to take place, and from what point it +will be delivered. But what made you think of the story that the +Burman was one of a party that had come in to do something?" + +"It was what Colonel Adair mentioned at dinner, last evening, sir. +He was saying how awkward it would be if some of these natives who +have come in were to fire the town, just as a strong attack was +going on, and most of the troops engaged with the enemy. It was not +unlikely that, if such a plan had been formed, the prisoner would +know of it; and that he might very well believe what my man said, +that some men had been sent into the town, with that or some +similar intention." + +"True enough. The idea was a capital one, Mr. Brooke; and we shall +be ready for them, whichever night they come. + +"Will you please go across to the guard tent, and tell the sergeant +to send a corporal across to the man on sentry, with orders to take +the prisoner to the jail, and hand him over to the officer in +command there? When you have done that, will you ride out to the +pagoda and inform your colonel what you have discovered? It will be +a relief to him, and to the men for, as the date of the attack has +been uncertain, he has been obliged to largely increase his +patrols, and to keep a portion of his force, all night, under arms. +He will be able to decrease the number, and let the men have as +much sleep as they can, for the next two nights. + +"The clouds are banking up, and I am very much afraid that the rain +is going to set in again. They say that we shall have another two +months of it." + +After seeing the prisoner marched away, Stanley rode to the pagoda +and, saying that he had come with a message from the general, was +at once shown into the colonel's quarters. + +"Any news, Mr. Brooke?" + +"Yes, Colonel; the general has requested me to inform you, at once, +of the news that I have obtained from a prisoner; namely that, +either on the night of the 30th or 31st, your position will be +attacked, by the men who are called the Invulnerables." + +"We will give them a chance of proving whether their title is +justified," the colonel said, cheerfully. "That is very good news. +The men are getting thoroughly worn out with the extra night duty +caused by this uncertainty. You think that there is no doubt that +the news is correct?" + +"None whatever, sir. I could do nothing with the prisoner; but my +Burman pretended to have a mission here, to kick up a row in the +town when the attack began; and the man, believing his story, at +once told him that the attack will be made on the pagoda, by the +Invulnerables, on the early morning of the fourth day from this--or +on the next night--the astrologers having declared that the time +would be propitious, and also because they were very anxious to +have the pagoda in their hands, in order that the princes might +celebrate the great annual festival that is held, it seems, two +days after." + +The colonel laughed. + +"I am afraid that they will have to put it off for another year. +The general gave no special orders, I suppose?" + +"No, sir; he had only just received the news, and ordered me to +ride over at once to you, as he was sure that you would be glad to +know that it would not be necessary to keep so many men on night +duty, for the next two days." + +"Thank you, Mr. Brooke. Will you kindly tell the general that I am +very pleased at the news? No doubt he will be up here, himself, +this afternoon or tomorrow." + +Stanley rode back fast, and was just in time to escape a tremendous +downpour of rain, which began a few minutes after he returned. He +went in at once to the general's, but was told that he was engaged +with the quartermaster and adjutant generals. He therefore went +into the anteroom where Tollemache, his fellow aide-de-camp, was +standing at the window, looking out at the rain. + +"This is a beastly climate," he grumbled. "It is awful to think +that we are likely to get another two months of it; and shall then +have to wait at least another, before the country is dry enough to +make a move. You were lucky in getting in, just now, before it +began." + +"I was indeed," Stanley agreed, "for I had ridden off without my +cloak, and should have been drenched, had it begun two minutes +earlier." + +"I saw you gallop past, and wondered what you were in such a hurry +about. Was it like this when you were out in the woods?" + +"Not in the least. There is very little rain near Ava; though the +country is a good deal flooded, where it is flat, from the rivers +being swollen by the rains in the hills. We had lovely weather, all +the time." + +"I should like to see a little lovely weather here. The last week +has been almost worse than the rain--the steamy heat is like being +in a vapour bath. If it were not that I am on duty, I should like +to strip, and go out and enjoy a shower bath for half an hour." + +Stanley laughed. + +"It really would be pleasant," he said. "I don't think that I +gained much by hurrying back, for the gallop has thrown me into +such a perspiration that I might almost as well be drenched by the +rain, except that my clothes won't suffer so much." + +"Ah, it is all very well for you," the other grumbled. "Of course, +after once having wandered about in the forest, painted up like a +nigger, you feel cheerful under almost any circumstances; but for +us who have been cooped up, doing nothing, in this beastly place, +it is impossible to look at things cheerfully." + +"Have you heard that the enemy are going to attack, on Tuesday or +Wednesday night?" + +"No!" the other exclaimed, with a sudden animation. "The general +only came in a quarter of an hour ago and, as he had the two +bigwigs with him, of course I did not speak to him. Is it certain? +How did you hear it?" + +"It is quite certain--that is, unless the Burmese change their +mind, which is not likely. The princes want to celebrate the great +annual festival at the pagoda, on Friday; and so the Invulnerables +are going, as they think, to capture it either on Tuesday or +Wednesday night. I have just been up there to tell the colonel. + +"As to your other question--how did I learn it--I got it, or rather +my Burman did, from that prisoner we were questioning this morning. +He would not say anything then; but my man got round him and, +believing that he was a spy, or something of that kind, the +prisoner told him all about it." + +"Are they only going to attack at the pagoda?" + +"That I cannot say; that is the only point that the man mentioned. +I should say that it would only be there." + +"Why should it only be there?" + +"Because I should imagine that even the Burmese must be beginning +to doubt whether they could defeat our whole force and, as they +particularly wish to occupy the pagoda on Friday, they would hardly +risk an attack on other points, which might end in disaster while, +what with the propitious nature of the day, and the fact that the +Invulnerables have undertaken to capture the pagoda, no doubt they +look upon that as certain." + +"I suppose that you are right, Brooke. Well, I do hope that the +general will let us go up to see the fun." + +"What, even if it is raining?" + +"Of course," the other said, indignantly. "What does one care for +rain, when there is something to do? Why, I believe that, if it was +coming down in a sheet, and the men had to wade through the swamps +waist deep, they would all march in the highest spirits, if there +was the chance of a fight with the Burmans at the end of the day. + +"However, I am afraid that there is no chance of our getting off, +unless the chief goes, himself. There may be attacks in other +places. As you say, it is not likely; but it is possible. +Therefore, of course, we should have to be at hand, to carry +orders. Of course, if he takes his post at the pagoda it will be +all right; though the betting is that we shall have to gallop off, +just at the most interesting moment." + +Presently the two officers left the general. The latter's bell +rang, and Stanley went in. + +"You saw the colonel, Mr. Brooke?" + +"Yes, sir; and he begged me to say that he was extremely glad to +get the news, and much obliged to you for sending it so promptly." + +"There is no occasion for you and Mr. Tollemache to stay here any +longer, now; but at five o'clock I shall ride out to the pagoda. At +any rate, should I want you before then, I shall know where to send +for you." + +This was the general order, for in the afternoon there was, when +things were quiet, a hush for two or three hours. The work of the +aides-de-camp was, indeed, generally very light for, as there were +no movements of troops, no useless parades, and very few military +orders to be carried, they had a great deal of time on their hands; +and usually took it by turns to be on duty for the day, the one off +duty being free to pay visits to acquaintances in the various +camps, or on board ship. During the rainy season, however, very few +officers or men went beyond shelter, unless obliged to do so and, +from two till four or five, no small proportion passed the time in +sleep. + +Stanley had intended to pay a visit to the Larne; as Captain +Marryat, who had dined at the staff mess on the previous evening, +had invited him to go on board, whenever it might be convenient to +him. The Larne had performed good service, in the operations +against the stockades; and her boats had been particularly active +and successful. Her captain was one of the most popular, as well as +one of the most energetic officers in the service; and was to +become as popular, with future generations, as the brightest of all +writers of sea stories. + +However, the day was not favourable for an excursion on the water. +Stanley therefore went back to his room where, divesting himself of +his jacket, he sat down at the open window, and read up a batch of +the last newspapers, from England, that had been lent him by +Colonel Adair. + +At five o'clock Meinik came in, to say that his horse was at the +general's door. Stanley hastily put on his jacket and cloak, and +sallied out. The general came down in a few minutes, followed by +Tollemache and, mounting, they rode to the pagoda. + +Here Sir Archibald had a talk with the colonel of the 89th, and the +officer commanding the battery of the Madras Artillery. Both were +of opinion that their force was amply sufficient to resist any +attack. The only approach to it from the forest was a long road +between two swamps which, a short distance away, had become lakes +since the wet weather set in. + +"Had they taken us by surprise," the colonel said, "some of them +might have got across, before we were quite ready for them, and +might have given us some trouble but, as we shall be prepared, I +don't think that any of them will reach the foot of this hill and, +if they did, none of them would reach this terrace. If an attack +were made from the other side, it would of course be a good deal +more serious, as the ground is firm and they could attack all along +the foot of the hill; but as they cannot get there, until they have +defeated the rest of the army, I consider that, even without the +assistance of the guns, we could hold the hill with musket and +bayonet against any force that they are likely to bring against +us." + +"Very well, then; I shall not reinforce you, Colonel. Of course, we +shall keep a considerable number of troops under arms, in case they +should attack all along the line, at the same time that they make +their principal effort here. + +"I rather hope that the rain will keep on, until this affair is +over." + +The colonel looked surprised. + +"I am much more afraid," the general went on, "of fire in the town, +than I am of an attack without. The number of natives there is +constantly increasing. No doubt the greater number of those who +come in are natives of the place, who have managed, since we +cleared out their war galleys from some of the creeks and channels, +to escape from the authorities and to make their way in, either on +foot or in fishermen's boats; but some of them may be sent in as +spies, or to do us harm. I have been having a long talk over it +with Colonel Adair, this afternoon, and he quite agrees with me +that we must reckon on the probability of an attempt to fire the +town. It would be a terrible blow to us if they succeeded, for the +loss of our stores would completely cripple us. They would +naturally choose the occasion of an attack upon our lines for the +attempt for, in the first place, most of the troops will be under +arms and drawn up outside the town; and in the second place the +sight of the place on fire would cause much confusion, would +inspirit our assailants, and necessitate a considerable force being +withdrawn from the field, to fight the fire. + +"If the rains continue we need feel no uneasiness, whatever, for +there would be no getting anything to burn; whereas in dry weather, +a man with a torch might light the thatch as fast as he could run +along, and a whole street would be in a blaze in two or three +minutes and, if a wind happened to be blowing, it might make a +sweep of the whole place, in spite of all our efforts." + +"I see that, sir. I own that I had never given it a thought, +before." + +"I shall come up here, Colonel, unless we obtain sure news, before +the time arrives, that the attack is going to be a general one; +indeed, it is in any case the best place to post myself, for I can +see over the whole country, and send orders to any point where the +enemy may be making progress, or where our men can advance with +advantage. The line of fire flashes will be as good a guide, at +night, as the smoke by day." + +"I will get a cot rigged up for you, General, as we don't know +which night it is to be." + +"Thank you. Yes, I may just as well turn in, all standing, as the +sailors say, and get a few hours' sleep; for in this climate one +cannot keep at it, night and day, as we had to do in Spain." + +The two aides-de-camp were kept in suspense as to what the +general's intentions were, and it was not until the morning of +Tuesday that he said to them: + +"I am going up to the pagoda this evening, Mr. Tollemache; and you +had better, therefore, put some provisions and a bottle of brandy +into your holsters." + +At nine in the evening they rode off. The rain had ceased; the moon +was shining through the clouds. + +"It will be down by twelve o'clock," Tollemache said. "I should +think, most likely, they will wait for that. They will think that +we shall not be able to take aim at them, in the darkness; and that +they will manage to get to the foot of the hill, without loss." + +When they reached the platform in front of the pagoda, their syces +took their horses. Meinik had begged Stanley to let him take his +groom's place on this occasion and, laying aside the dress he +ordinarily wore, assumed the light attire of an Indian syce, and +had run behind the horses with the others. He had a strong desire +to see the fighting, but his principal motive in asking to be +allowed to accompany Stanley was that, although greatly impressed +with what he had seen of the drill and discipline of the white and +native regiments, he could not shake off his faith in the +Invulnerables; and had a conviction that the pagoda would be +captured, and therefore wished to be at hand, to bring up Stanley's +horse at the critical moment, and to aid him to escape from the +assailants. + +Fires were burning, as usual, at several points on the terrace. Two +companies were under arms, and were standing well back from the +edge of the platform, so as to be out of sight of those in the +forest. The rest of the men were sitting round the fires. Their +muskets were piled in lines hard by. + +When he alighted, the general proceeded to the battery. + +"Have you everything in readiness, Major?" he asked the officer in +command. + +"Yes, sir. The guns are all loaded with grape and, as it will be +very dark when the moon has set, I have pegged a white tape along, +just under each gun; so that they can be trained upon the causeway, +however dark it may be." + +"That is a very good idea," the general said. "There is nothing +more difficult than laying guns accurately in the dark." + +The colonel now arrived, a soldier having brought the news to him, +as soon as the general reached the platform. + +"I see that you are well prepared to give them a hot reception, +Colonel." + +"I hope so, sir. I have a strong patrol out beyond the causeway. My +orders are that they are to resist strongly, for a minute or two, +so as to give us time to have the whole of our force in readiness +here. Then they are to retreat at the double to the foot of the +hill; and then to open fire again, so that we may know that they +are out of the way, and that we can begin when we like. We have +been making some port fires this afternoon, and I have a dozen men +halfway down the hill and, directly the outposts are safely across, +they are to light the port fires, which will enable us to take aim. +These white tapes will be guide enough for the artillery; but my +men would make very poor shooting, if they could not make out the +muzzles of their guns. Anyhow, I don't think that it is likely that +the enemy will get across the causeway, however numerous they may +be." + +"I don't think they will, Colonel. Certainly, so far, they have +shown themselves contemptible in attack; and have never made a +successful stand, even for a minute, when we once entered their +stockades, though they defend them pluckily enough until we have +once got a footing inside. + +"Still, these fellows ought to fight well tonight for, if they are +beaten, it will be a death blow to their reputation among their +countrymen. Besides, many of them do believe in the power they +claim and, as we have found before now, in India, fanatics are +always formidable." + +After taking a look round with the colonel, the general accompanied +him to his quarters; while the two aides-de-camp remained on the +terrace, chatting with the officers; and then, after a time, went +with some of them to the mess tent, where they sat smoking and +talking until midnight, when all went out. + +The troops were formed up under arms, and all listened impatiently +for something that would show that the long-delayed assault would +take place that night. At half-past twelve there was the sound of a +shot, which sent an electrical thrill through the troops. It was +followed almost immediately by others. The troops were at once +marched forward to the edge of the platform. A babel of wild shouts +went up at the sound of the first shots, followed by a burst of +firing. + +The two aides-de-camp had taken their places close to the general, +who was standing in the gap between the infantry and the guns; and +was looking intently, through his night glasses, at the forest. + +"They are in a dense mass," he said. "I cannot see whether they are +in any regular order, but they are certainly packed a great deal +closer than I have ever before seen them. Those in front have got +lanterns. They are coming along fast." + +As yet the enemy were half a mile away, but the lanterns and the +flash of their guns showed their exact position, while the fire of +the outposts was kept up steadily. As the latter fell back along +the causeway, the interval between the two forces decreased; and +then the fire of the outposts ceased as, in accordance with their +orders, they broke into the double. + +Illustration: The Burmese make a great effort to capture Pagoda +Hill. + +The uproar of the advancing crowd was prodigious. Every man was +yelling, at the top of his voice, imprecations upon the defenders +of the pagoda; who were standing in absolute silence, waiting +eagerly for the word of command. Suddenly the firing broke out +again at the foot of the hill and, immediately, a bright light shot +up from its face. + +The edge of the dense mass of Burmese was now but some fifty yards +from the wall that surrounded the foot of the hill, and the +causeway behind was occupied by a solid mass of men. Then came the +sharp order to the artillerymen, and gun after gun poured its +charge of grape into the crowd while, at the same moment, the +infantry began to fire, by companies, in steady volleys. For an +instant the din of the assailants was silenced, then their shouts +rose again and, after a moment's hesitation, they continued their +advance. + +But not for long. None but the most disciplined soldiers could have +advanced under that storm of grape and bullets and, in ten minutes, +they fled in wild confusion, leaving the causeway thickly covered +with the dead. Again and again the British cheers rose, loud and +triumphant; then the infantry were told to fall out, but the guns +continued their fire, until the fugitives were well in the forest. + +Between the shots the general listened attentively, and examined +the country towards the town through his glasses. + +"Everything is quiet," he said. "It is probable that, if those +fellows had carried the hill, they would have made a signal, and +there might have been a general attack. As it is, the affair is +over for the night; and the Invulnerables will have some difficulty +in accounting for their failure, and loss. + +"Now, gentlemen, we may as well have up the horses, and ride back. +We hardly expected to get away as soon as this." + +"Well, Meinik, what do you think of your Invulnerables, now?" +Stanley said, as the Burman, after picketing his horse, came up to +his room to see if he wanted anything, before lying down on his bed +in the passage. + +"I don't know," the Burman replied, gravely. "They may be holy men; +and proof, perhaps, against native weapons; but they are no good +against your cannon and muskets. I understand, now, how it is that +you beat us so easily. Your men all stood quiet, and in order; one +only heard the voices of the officers, and the crash as they fired +together. + +"Then, your guns are terrible. I have seen ours firing but, though +our pieces are smaller than yours, your men fire five shots to our +one. I stood by while they were loading. It was wonderful. Nobody +talked, and nobody gave orders. Each man knew what he had to +do--one did something and, directly, another did something and, +almost before the smoke of the last shot was out of the gun, it was +ready to be fired again. + +"It is clear to me that we have not learnt how to fight, and that +your way of having only a few men, well taught and knowing exactly +what they have to do, is better than ours of having great numbers, +and letting everyone fight as he pleases. It is bad, every way. The +brave men get to the front, and are killed; and then the others run +away. + +"You were right. We shall never turn you out of Rangoon, till +Bandoola comes. He has all our best troops with him, and he has +never been beaten. All the troops know him, and will fight for him +as they will not fight for these princes--who know nothing of war, +and are chosen only because they are the king's brothers. When he +comes, you will see." + +"No doubt we shall, Meinik; and you will see that, although they +may make a better fight of it than they have done tonight, it will +be just the same, in the end." + +For the next two months the time passed slowly. No attacks were +made by the enemy, after the defeat of the assault upon the pagoda. +Peasants and deserters who came in reported that there was profound +depression among the Burmese troops. Great numbers had left the +colours, and there was no talk of another attack. + +The troops being, therefore, relieved of much of their arduous +night duty, the English took the offensive. The stockades on the +Dalla river, and those upon the Panlang branch--the principal +passage into the main stream of the Irrawaddy--were attacked and +carried, the enemy suffering heavily, and many pieces of artillery +being captured. + +The rains continued almost unceasingly, and the troops suffered +terribly in health. Scarce three thousand remained fit for duty, +and the greater portion of these were so emaciated and exhausted, +by the effects of the climate, that they were altogether unfit for +active operations. + +Three weeks after the fight at the pagoda a vessel came up the +river, with a letter from the officer in command of the troops +assembled to bar the advance of Bandoola against Chittagong, saying +that the Burmese army had mysteriously disappeared. It had gone off +at night, so quietly and silently that our outposts, which were but +a short distance from it, heard no sign or movement, whatever. The +Burmese had taken with them their sick, tents, and stores; and +nothing but a large quantity of grain had been found in their +deserted stockades. + +The news was received with satisfaction by the troops. There was +little doubt that the court of Ava--finding that their generals had +all failed in making the slightest impression upon our lines, and +had lost vast numbers of men--had at last turned to the leader who +had conquered province after province for it, and had sent him +orders to march, with his whole army, to bring the struggle to a +close. The soldiers rejoiced at the thought that they were at last +to meet a real Burmese army. Hitherto they had generally stood on +the defensive, and had to fight the climate rather than the foe; +and it seemed to them that the campaign was likely to be +interminable. + +The march of the Burmese from Ramoo to Sembeughewn, the nearest +point of the river to the former town, must have been a terrible +one. The distance was over two hundred miles, the rains were +ceaseless, and the country covered with jungles and marshes, and +intersected by rivers. No other army could have accomplished such a +feat. The Burmans, however, accustomed to the unhealthy climate, +lightly clad, and carrying no weight save their arms and sixteen +days' supply of rice, passed rapidly over it. + +Every man was accustomed to the use of an axe and to the formation +of rafts and, in an incredibly short time, rivers were crossed, +deep swamps traversed on roads made by closely-packed faggots and, +but a few days after hearing that Bandoola had started, the general +learned, from peasants, that the news had come down that he and a +portion of his army had arrived at Sembeughewn. + +Almost at the same time, other parties who travelled down along the +coast reached Donabew, a town on the Irrawaddy, some forty miles in +direct line from Rangoon. This had been named as the rendezvous of +the new army, and to this a considerable proportion of Bandoola's +force made their way direct from Ramoo; it being the custom of the +Burmese to move, when on a march through a country where no +opposition was to be looked for, in separate detachments, each +under its own leader, choosing its own way, and making for a +general rendezvous. Travelling in this manner, they performed the +journey far more rapidly than they could have done moving in one +body, and could better find shelter and food. + +Other forces from Prome, Tannoo, and other quarters were known to +be marching towards Donabew. It was soon reported that the dejected +forces around Rangoon had gained courage and confidence, at the +news that Bandoola and his army were coming to their aid, and that +the deserters were returning in large numbers from their villages. +The British sick were sent away in the shipping to Mergy and Tavoy, +two coast towns of which we had taken possession, and both of which +were healthily situated. + +The change had a marvellous effect, and men who would have speedily +succumbed to the poisonous exhalations of the swamps round Rangoon +rapidly regained their strength, in their new quarters. + + + +Chapter 9: Victories. + + +In the meantime, negotiations had been going on with Siam, between +which state and Burma there was the bitterest enmity. It had been +thought that Siam would have willingly grasped the opportunity to +revenge itself for the many losses of territory that it had +suffered at the hands of Burma. This there was no doubt that it +would have been glad to do, but our occupation of several points on +the coast of Tenasserim roused the fears of Siam, and inclined it +to the belief that we might prove an even more dangerous neighbour +than Burma. + +The court of Ava had, on its part, also sent urgent messages to the +King of Siam--when misfortunes had, to some extent, lowered its +pride--calling upon him to make common cause with Burma, and to +join it in repelling an enemy who would doubtless be as dangerous +to him as to Burma. + +Siam, however, determined to steer a middle course. An army was +assembled, in readiness for any contingency; but Siam believed as +little as Burma, itself, that the British could possibly be +victorious over that power; and feared its vengeance, if she were +to ally herself with us while, upon the other hand, Siam had a long +sea coast, and feared the injury our fleet might inflict upon it, +were it to join Burma. The king, therefore, gave both powers an +assurance of his friendship; and marched his army down to the +frontier of the province of Martaban, which bordered on the great +Salween river on the Tenasserim coast, and lay some two hundred +miles from Rangoon, across the gulf of Martaban. + +The intentions of the king being so doubtful, the advance of the +Siamese army in this direction could not be regarded with +indifference by the British. The town of Martaban was the centre of +the Burmese military power in Tenasserim, and the advance towards +it of the Siamese army would place it in direct communication with +that of Burma. On the 13th of October, therefore, a force, +consisting of a wing of the 41st Regiment and the 3rd Madras +Infantry, sailed from Rangoon against the town. The expedition was +delayed by light winds and, when it arrived at the mouth of the +river, found that every preparation had been made for an obstinate +defence. They learned, from a peasant, that strong works had been +erected on every eminence round the town; and that the road from +the coast had been cut, and stockaded. + +Approach by this route was impossible, for there were twenty miles +of country to be traversed; and much of this was under water from +the inundations. It was, therefore, determined to go up the river, +although this was so shallow and full of shoals that the navigation +was extremely difficult. At last, after great labour--incurred by +the ships constantly getting ashore--they succeeded in making their +way up to Martaban, and anchored off the town. + +A heavy cannonade was carried on, for some time, between the ships +and the enemy's works. Then the troops were embarked in boats, +which rowed for the shore under a very heavy fire from the enemy. +As soon as they landed, and advanced to attack the stockades, the +Burmese lost heart and hastily retreated; while the inhabitants +received the troops as they entered with the warmest welcome--for +they were, for the most part, natives of Pegu, and still +entertained a deep hatred for the Burmese, because of the long +oppression that they had suffered at their hands. + +Throughout the rest of Tenasserim, however; and indeed, throughout +the whole country traversed by the troops later on, the inhabitants +appeared to have entirely forgotten their ancient nationality, and +the conquest of their country by the Burmans; and to have become +completely absorbed by them. Throughout the whole time that we +occupied Martaban, the people gave no trouble whatever and, indeed, +offered to raise a force for service with us, if we wished it. + +At the end of October the rain ceased--to the intense delight of +the troops--and the cold season set in. November was, however, an +exceptionally deadly month--the occasional days of fine weather +drawing up the exhalations from the swamps--and the number of +deaths was greater than they had been at any previous time. There +was, too, no prospect of a forward movement, at present. The +expedition had come unprovided with boats or other means of +transport, making sure that an abundant supply would be obtained, +in a country where the whole trade was carried on by the rivers. +The promptness with which the native authorities had, on the first +appearance of the fleet, sent every boat away, had disappointed +this anticipation and, although the opening of some of the other +rivers had enabled the local fishermen to bring their boats to +Rangoon, where fish were eagerly purchased, the British troops were +still, up to the end of November, without the means of sending a +hundred men up the river, save in the boats of the fleet. + +The Indian authorities--believing that, when the Burmese found +themselves impotent to turn us out of Rangoon, the court of Ava +would be glad to negotiate--had not, until the autumn was drawing +to a close, thought of making any preparations to supply the army +with water carriage. They now, however, began to bestir themselves. +Five hundred boatmen were sent from Chittagong, bringing many boats +down with them, and building others at Rangoon. Transports with +draft cattle sailed from Bengal, and a considerable reinforcement +of troops was on its way to join, at the end of December--for all +the natives agreed that no movement could be made, by land, until +the end of January. + +In November, even Bandoola's army was obliged to make its approach +by water. Early in that month it was learned that the Burmese +general had given orders for the advance, and preparations were at +once begun to meet what none doubted would be a very serious +attack. The reinforcements had not yet arrived, and the greatly +diminished force was far too small for the length of the line that +had to be defended. Redoubts were therefore thrown up, pagodas and +other buildings were fortified; and two complete lines of works +constructed, from the great pagoda to the city, one facing east and +the other west. + +The post at Kemmendine was strengthened, and was supported by H. M. +sloop Sophie, a company's cruiser, and a strong division of +gunboats. The retention of this post was of great importance, as it +barred the river approach to Rangoon, and prevented the enemy +sending down a huge fleet of war galleys and fire rafts to attack +the town, and set fire to the merchant shipping lying off it. + +In the last week of November, smoke was seen to rise from many +points in the forest. Many fugitives came in from their villages, +and reported that Bandoola's army were all on their way down the +river; and by the end of the month some sixty thousand men, with a +large train of artillery and a body of cavalry, were assembled +round our position. Of this force, thirty thousand were armed with +muskets. They had with them, too, a great number of jingals. These +little guns carried ball of from six to twelve ounces, and were +mounted on a light carriage, which two men could wheel with ease. +The cannon were carried to the scene of action on elephants. The +cavalry were seven hundred strong, drawn from the borders of +Manipur. + +The rest of the army were armed with swords and spears, and carried +implements for stockading and entrenching. The force was accompanied by +a number of astrologers; and by the Invulnerables--who had, doubtless, +satisfactorily explained their failure to capture the pagoda. + +A great semicircle of light smoke, rising from the trees, showed +that the position taken up by Bandoola extended from the river +above Kemmendine to the neighbourhood of Rangoon. On the night of +the 31st, the troops at the pagoda heard a loud and continuous stir +in the forest. It gradually approached and, by morning, great +masses of troops had gathered at the edge of the jungle, within +musket shot of the post. The garrison there were drawn up in +readiness to repel a sudden rush but, just as the sun rose, a din +made by thousands of men engaged in cutting down the trees began, +and it was evident that the Burmese were going to adopt their usual +plan of entrenching themselves behind stockades. + +During the time that had elapsed between the repulse of the +Invulnerables and the arrival of Bandoola's army, Stanley's work +was light, and the life dull and monotonous. An hour was spent, +every morning, in examining the fugitives who had, by the retreat +of the Burmese, been enabled to make their way back to the town; +and of women who had escaped from the vigilance of the Burmese +police, and had come in from the villages where they had been held +as hostages for their husbands. Once or twice a week, he went off +with the general to the hospital ship, to inquire into the state of +the sick and to pay a visit to the long line of cots along the main +and lower deck. Almost every day he rode, in spite of the weather, +to one or other of the regimental camps; and soon came to know most +of the officers of the force. His previous experience on the rivers +had done much to acclimatise him, and his health continued good. + +On the evening of the 30th he had, at the general's order, ridden +up to the pagoda. It was considered likely that the attack would be +delivered there in the first place and, at three o'clock in the +morning, when it became evident that a large body of men were +approaching through the forest, he galloped back to Rangoon with +the news and, at five, rode out again with Sir A. Campbell. + +Among the garrison there was much disappointment when the sound of +wood chopping announced that the Burmese did not intend to attack; +but the general, who had been watching the edge of the jungle +through his glasses, lowered them and put them into their case with +an expression of satisfaction. + +"I don't want them to attack, Colonel," he said. "If they do, and +we beat them off, we are no nearer the end than before. That sort +of thing might be carried on for months; as long, in fact, as there +remains a man to bring up. What we want is to inflict such a heavy +blow upon them, that even the court at Ava may become convinced +that they cannot hope to drive us out of Rangoon; in which case +they may consent to negotiate, and we may bring the war to an end. + +"Heaven knows that we have suffered enough loss, at present; and I +don't want to have to undertake such a difficult operation as an +advance against Ava. I am glad to see that they have begun to +construct stockades. I do not intend to interfere until they have +completely finished their work, and gained sufficient confidence to +make a general attack on us. Then we shall be able to give them a +heavy lesson. + +"Ah, there they are, at work!" + +As he spoke, a roar of musketry and artillery broke out suddenly +from Kemmendine, and all eyes were turned in that direction. The +spot was two miles distant, but the forest shut out, alike, the +view of the river and of the works held by us. The exact position, +however, was indicated by the masts of the two war vessels, rising +above the trees. + +Soon great wreaths of heavy white smoke rose above the forest, in +and around Kemmendine, shutting out all view. The fire continued +without abatement, and it was evident that the attack was a hot and +determined one. Confident as all felt that the little fort would be +able to defend itself successfully, the great smoke clouds were +watched with some feeling of anxiety; for the garrison was, after +all, but a handful. In momentary intervals of the firing, the yells +and shouts of the natives could be distinctly heard and, once or +twice, after a heavy broadside from the ships of war, the cheers of +the British sailors could be plainly recognized. + +After two hours' fighting the din gradually ceased. The clouds of +smoke rolled away, and the masts of the ships became visible, and +the garrison of the pagoda raised three hearty cheers, to tell the +defenders that their successful defence had been watched and +welcomed. + +Presently some heavy columns of the enemy issued from the forest, +on the other side of the river; and marched across the plain to +Dalla, which faced Rangoon. They moved with great regularity and +order, led by their chiefs on horseback, their gilded umbrellas +glittering in the rays of the sun. On reaching the bank of the +river opposite Rangoon, they began entrenching themselves and +throwing up stockades and batteries; with the evident intention of +opening fire on the shipping. Soon afterwards large bodies of men +issued from the forest facing the pagoda and, marching along a +slight ridge, that extended from that point to the creek below +Rangoon, took up their position there, and began entrenching +themselves all along the line. Thus the British position was now +completely surrounded; there was, however, no doubt that the main +body of the enemy was still facing the pagoda. + +"We must see what they are doing," the general said. "This is too +important a point for us to allow them to erect a strongly +fortified position, close at hand." + +Accordingly, Tollemache was sent down with an order to the 18th +Madras Infantry--supported by a detachment of the 13th Regiment, +under Major Sale--to advance against the enemy in the jungle. The +movements of this force were eagerly watched from the terrace of +the pagoda. At a rapid pace they crossed the intervening ground, +and a rattle of musketry broke out from the jungle as they +approached. The British made no response; but charged, with a +cheer, and were soon lost to sight in the trees. Their regular +volleys could be heard, at short intervals, above the scattered +rattle of the Burmese musketeers; and their cheers frequently rose, +loud and triumphant. In half an hour the red line emerged again +from the jungle, having destroyed the stockades the Burmese had +erected; captured several guns, a quantity of muskets, and +entrenching tools thrown away by the Burmese; and killed a large +number of the enemy. + +During the day the enemy made repeated efforts to send fire rafts +down the river from above Kemmendine. These rafts were constructed +of bamboos, upon which were placed great numbers of earthenware +pots, filled with petroleum. These rafts were skilfully +constructed, and made in sections so that, when they drifted +against an anchor chain, they would divide--those on each side +swinging round, so as to envelop the ship on both sides with fire. + +The sailors from the sloops and gunboats rowed up to meet the rafts +and, although a heavy fire was kept up by the enemy, from the +jungles lining the banks, they succeeded in towing most of them +safely to shore; while the rest grounded on a projecting spit, off +Kemmendine. + +So diligently did the Burmese work at all points throughout the day +that, by the afternoon, their whole line of circumvallation was +covered with earthworks; behind which they lay, entirely hidden +from sight. + +"If they could fight as well as they dig, and build stockades," Sir +A. Campbell remarked, "they would be one of the most formidable +enemies in the world. No European army ever accomplished the work +of entrenching themselves so speedily as they have done. Their +arrangements have been admirable. Everything has been done without +confusion, and each body has taken up the position allotted to it; +as is evident by the fact that there is no gap in their lines. + +"As to Bandoola's tactics, I cannot say so much for them. In the +first place, he has divided his force into two parts, separated by +a river, and incapable of helping each other. In the next place, +great as are his numbers, his lines are far too extended. + +"Well, we will let them go on for a time; and then show them the +mistake that they have committed." + +Major Sale's reports of the entrenchments were that they consisted +of a long line of holes, each capable of containing two men. The +earth was dug out on one side so as to form a sort of cave. In this +was a bed of straw or brushwood, on which one man could sleep, +while the other watched. Each hole contained a sufficient supply of +rice, water, and even fuel for its inmates. One line of these holes +had been completed, and another was being dug a short distance in +advance. + +The Burmese do not relieve their men in the trenches. Those who +occupy the line first made remain there. Fresh men dig and occupy +the next line, and so the advance is continued, until close to the +work to be attacked. The system has the great advantage that a +shell falling into one of these holes only kills its two occupants; +instead of destroying many, as it might do if it fell in a +continuous trench. + +In the afternoon the general returned to Rangoon, leaving Stanley +at the pagoda, with orders to ride down should there be any change +of importance. In the evening a considerable force of Burmese +issued from the jungle, and prepared to entrench themselves near +the northeast angle of the pagoda hill. Major Piper therefore took +two companies of the 38th and, descending the hill, drove the +Burmese, in confusion, back to the jungle. + +In the morning it was found that the enemy had entrenched +themselves upon some high and open ground, within musket shot of +the north gate of the pagoda. It was separated from the gate by a +large tank; but as their jingals and musketry were able, from the +point they occupied, to sweep the plateau and the huts occupied by +the troops, a party of the 38th and the 28th Madras Infantry went +out, and drove them off. As soon, however, as our troops fell back +the Burmese reoccupied the position and, for the next few days, a +constant skirmishing went on at this point; while an artillery fire +was maintained, by the assailants and defenders, along the whole +line down to Rangoon, and the enemy's batteries at Dalla kept up an +incessant fire on the shipping. Kemmendine was attacked time after +time, and many attempts made to launch fire rafts down the river. + +The work was very harassing for the troops. Night and day they were +expecting an attack in force; and there was a general feeling of +delight when, on the evening of the 4th, orders were issued for a +general movement against the enemy. + +The latter had, by this time, brought the greater portion of their +guns up from the jungle, and placed them in their entrenchments; +and it was therefore in the power of the British to strike a heavy +blow. A division of the flotilla of gunboats was ordered up the +creek by the town. These opened a heavy fire upon the enemy's +flank, thus attracting their attention to that point and, after the +cannonade had continued for some little time, the two columns of +attack--the one eight hundred strong, under Major Sale; the other +five hundred, under Major Walker of the Madras army--issued out. +The latter was to attack the enemy facing the town, the former to +force his way through the centre of their position. He had with him +a troop of horse, that had landed only the previous day. + +Major Walker's force was the first to encounter the enemy. Their +resistance was, for a time, obstinate. Major Walker and several +other officers fell, in the attack on the first line of +entrenchments; but the soldiers carried it at the point of the +bayonet and, as the enemy broke and retreated, followed them so +hotly that the works in the rear fell into their hands with but +slight opposition. + +Major Sale's column now began its attack on the enemy's centre. +Here the resistance was more feeble and, bursting through the +enemy's lines, the British drove them before them in headlong +flight. Then, turning, they swept along the line of entrenchments; +carrying all before them until they effected a junction with the +other column, which was advancing to meet them. They then drove the +Burmese from every part of their works into the jungle, leaving the +ground behind them covered with dead and wounded. + +Except at the point first attacked by Major Walker, the resistance +of the Burmese was very feeble, and the British loss inconsiderable; +and a large number of guns, entrenching tools, and muskets fell into +the hands of the victors. The next day Bandoola rallied the troops +that had been driven from the plain, and gathered the greatest part +of his force in the forest round the pagoda, where they continued to +push forward their works with unabated energy. + +The British had a day of rest given them and, on the 7th, prepared +to attack the enemy at this point. Four columns of attack were +formed, composed of detachments drawn from all the corps of the +army. In the morning a heavy cannonade was opened upon the jungle; +the artillery being assisted by several heavy guns which had, with +great labour, been brought up by the sailors from the ships to the +pagoda. The enemy returned it with a steady fire of light +artillery, jingals, and musketry. + +While the firing was still going on, the four columns were already +in motion. One had entered the jungle on the enemy's left, and +another on the right. One of the central columns advanced from the +foot of the pagoda hill, while the 38th Regiment descended the +stairs from the north gate and advanced, one wing on each side of +the tank, against the enemy's entrenchments on the high ground. As +the four columns approached the enemy, our artillery fire ceased. + +The Burmese appeared, for a moment, bewildered at the sight of +their foes advancing against them from so many directions, but they +soon opened a very heavy fire upon the assailants; and kept it up +with undiminished steadiness until our troops, advancing at the +charge, dashed into their entrenchments and drove them headlong +before them into the thick forest behind--where pursuit, which +would at any time have been difficult, was now impossible; the +troops, exhausted by their seven days' and nights' watching, being +wholly incapable of following their active and lightly-armed +enemies. + +There now remained but the force at Dalla to cope with and, in the +evening, a force composed of the 89th and 43rd Madras Infantry, +under Colonel Parlby, embarked in boats. The night was dark, and +the troops crossed unobserved. The alarm was not given until the +British actually entered the entrenchments, and opened fire upon +the enemy; who were sitting, unsuspicious of danger, round their +fires. Scarcely any opposition was encountered, and the whole of +the works, with the guns and the stores, were soon in our hands; +while the enemy were flying towards the forest. + +In the actions during these three days, the Burmese lost some 5000 +men, 240 pieces of artillery of every kind, and a great number of +muskets and vast supplies of ammunition; while the British had but +50 killed and 300 wounded. Great numbers of Bandoola's men never +rejoined the army, and the whole force was dispersed through the +country. + +Bandoola himself was retiring towards Donabew, with but a remnant +of his army, when he met considerable reinforcements on their way +to join him. During his operations he had left a reserve corps at +the village of Kokein, four miles from the pagoda; and these had +been busily entrenching the position, which commanded the road +leading from Rangoon to Donabew. The ground was elevated and, on +his arrival there, Bandoola set his troops--now some 25,000 in +number--to aid in the work. In a marvellously short time the +heights were completely stockaded with trunks of trees; and with a +broad, deep ditch in front. Beyond this were lines of felled trees, +their heads pointing outwards and each branch sharpened--forming a +very formidable abattis--and, believing this to be impregnable, +Bandoola awaited the attack of the British. + +As soon as his army had been dispersed, great numbers of deserters, +and of the inhabitants of the villages, poured into Rangoon. With +the deserters were mingled a good many of the troops sent in by +Bandoola, himself, with instructions to fire the town. In order to +lull the suspicions of the British, he caused a report to be spread +that an imperial commissioner from the court of Ava would arrive, +in the course of a few days, to treat for terms of peace. + +The general, however, determined to attack Bandoola before the +commissioner could arrive; as it was evident that better terms +could be obtained, after the total dispersion of the Burmese, than +if their famous general remained, with 25,000 men, in a formidable +position close at hand. He was uneasy at the presence of so large a +number of natives in the town, and the precautions that had been +taken against fire, some time before, were now redoubled. Were one +to break out, not only might the whole of the stores collected for +the advance of the army be destroyed but, if Bandoola had his force +gathered in readiness at the edge of the jungle, he might take +advantage of the confusion that would be caused by the fire, and +rush forward to the attack of the town. + +Numbers of troops, and of sailors from the fleet, patrolled the +streets in every direction at night but, in spite of their efforts, +a week after the retreat of Bandoola the dreaded cry of fire was +raised. At a dozen points, on the windward side of the town, fires +had been lighted by incendiaries and, as there was a brisk wind +blowing, the danger was extreme. The drums beat to arms along the +whole of the British lines. Orders had already been issued as to +what was to be done in such an emergency and, while a portion of +the troops lined the trenches, the rest were marched at once to the +town, and formed up between it and the jungle, to repel any attack +that might be made there; leaving the troops quartered in the town, +and the sailors of the fleet to battle with the flames. + +For a time it seemed as if the whole place would be swept away but, +by levelling lines of huts, and beating out the flames at the +barrier so formed, their progress was at length checked; but not +until more than half the town had been destroyed. Fortunately this +was the half farthest from the river and--with the exception of the +commissariat stores for the supply of the troops of the Madras +Presidency--the buildings containing the food, ammunition, and +necessaries for the army escaped unharmed. + +What had happened once might, however, happen again, in spite of +all precautions. The general therefore determined to attack +Bandoola at once as, were his force once scattered, the motive for +these incendiary fires would cease to operate. + +The difficulties were formidable. One or two light field pieces +could, at the most, be taken with the column. They would have to +march by a narrow and winding footpath, through a thick forest, +exposed at any moment to a desperate attack by the enemy. Moreover, +it would be necessary to leave a strong force for the defence of +Rangoon, as Bandoola would be sure to learn, from his spies, of the +intended movement and, having with him men intimately acquainted +with every forest track, could make a rush down upon the town +during the absence of so many of its defenders. + +The general felt it imperative, however, to attack without delay +and, early on the morning of the 15th, he moved out with a force of +1500 men against Kokein. They marched without molestation through +the forest and, on reaching its confines, could see the truly +formidable nature of the works that they were to attack. The moment +they issued from the forest, a dropping fire was opened upon them +by parties of the enemy, in flank and rear; and no time was lost in +preparing for the assault. + +The 13th Light Infantry and the 18th Madras, with 60 cavalry, under +Brigadier General Cotton, were ordered to move round the stockade +and assault it on the left rear; while the rest of the troops, some +800 strong, with 100 cavalry under the general himself, were to +attack in front. The enemy's works consisted of a central +entrenchment, connected with two large entrenched stockades on its +flank, but somewhat advanced in front of it. + +As soon as the force under General Cotton had gained its position +in the rear of the enemy, a gun was fired, and the whole force +moved forward to the assault.. The Burmans regarded the attack by +so insignificant a force upon their works with such contempt that +they did not, for some time, fire a shot; but continued chanting a +war song, swaying themselves to its cadence, stamping and beating +time with their hands on their breasts. + +This delay proved fatal to them. When they opened fire, their +assailants were already close to the ditch and, leaping down into +this, were sheltered from the fire of the defenders. Scaling +ladders were speedily placed and the troops, running up them, +leaped down into the entrenchment. Astounded at this sudden entry +into the works they had deemed impregnable, the Burmese hesitated; +and the assailants, being joined by their comrades from behind, +rushed impetuously upon the enemy. + +The column in the rear had greater difficulty--for they had several +strong stockades to carry before they reached the central work--and +lost four officers and eight men killed, and forty-nine officers +and men wounded, in the 13th Regiment alone. Fifteen minutes after +the first shot was fired, the whole of the works were in our +possession and the Burmese, who gathered in a confused mass, had +been decimated by our volleys. They were now in full flight, many +being cut down by the cavalry before they reached the shelter of +the woods. The British troops marched back to Rangoon; while the +Burmese retreated to Donabew, leaving strong posts on the two +rivers leading in that direction. + +Their retirement left it free to the country people to return to +Rangoon, and very large numbers came in, including very many of the +villagers who had been forced to fight against us. All had alike +suffered from famine and hardship. Even the women had been +compelled to labour in the work of stockading, and the sufferings +of all had been terrible. The work of rebuilding the town began at +once, and the wooden huts sprang up with great rapidity; markets +were opened and, in a short time, supplies of fish, fruit, game, +and vegetables poured in; sufficient not only for the native +population, but to effect a most welcome change in the diet of the +troops. + +As most of the natives were accustomed to the construction and +management of boats, the work of preparing the flotilla by which +the troops were to proceed up the rivers went on rapidly; and +numbers of men were hired as servants and drivers for the +commissariat--with which the force was very insufficiently +supplied, as the natives of India of that class for the most part +refused, on account of their caste prejudices, to engage themselves +for service across the sea. Reinforcements arrived; and Rangoon, +which but six weeks before presented a miserable and deserted +appearance was, towards the beginning of January, a cheerful and +bustling town. + +Preparations were being made in other quarters to assume the +offensive. Some 3000 men were driving the Burmese out of Assam; and +a force 7000 strong was marching from Sylhet, to expel them from +Cachar and capture Manipur; while 11,000 men were assembled at +Chittagong, and were advancing into Aracan with the intention of +driving the Burmese from that province--and they meant, if +possible, to cross the mountains and effect a junction with Sir +Archibald Campbell's force. The first part of the operations were +conducted with complete success, and Aracan wrested from Burma; but +it was found impossible to perform the terrible journey across +mountain and swamp, or to afford any aid to the main expedition. + + + +Chapter 10: The Advance. + + +But while the preparations for the advance were being made, the +general's aides-de-camp had been kept at work from morning until +night. There were constant communications between the military and +naval authorities, for the expedition was to be a mixed one. +Transports were daily arriving with troops and stores; innumerable +matters connected with the organization, both of the land and water +transport, required to be arranged; and the general himself was +indefatigable in superintending every detail of the work. It had +been settled that the advance could not take place until the second +week in February, as the roads would be impassable until that time, +and the 11th was fixed for the commencement of operations. + +Upon the day after his arrival at Rangoon, Stanley had written a +letter to his uncle; giving him a brief account of his adventures, +and stating that he had been appointed one of the general's +aides-de-camp. He said that he should, of course, be guided by his +uncle's wishes; but that now that he had entered on the campaign as +an officer, he should certainly like to remain till the end, when +he would at once resign his commission and rejoin him. + +He sent this to his uncle's agent at Calcutta, but received no +answer until the end of December. After expressing his delight at +hearing that Stanley had not, as he had supposed, been killed at +Ramoo, but was now safe and well in the British camp, he went on: + +"I only received your letter this morning, for I have been moving +about from point to point and, owing to the falling off of trade, +had no occasion to go to Calcutta, until now; and was, indeed, +astounded at finding your letter lying for me here, as they had not +forwarded it, having no idea where I was, and knowing that the +chance of any letter sent on reaching me was extremely small. + +"By all means, lad, stop where you are. Trade is improving again +for, now that Bandoola's army has marched away from Ramoo, the +scare among the natives has pretty well subsided. Still, I can +manage very well without you, and it will certainly be a great +advantage to you to serve for a year in the army; and to have been +one of Campbell's aides-de-camp will be a feather in your cap, and +will give you a good position at all the military stations. + +"I am very glad, now, that I abstained from writing to your mother +after the battle at Ramoo. I thought it over and over, and +concluded that it was just as well to leave the matter alone for a +time; not that I had the slightest idea, or even a hope, that you +were alive, but because I thought that the cessation of letters +from you would, to some extent, prepare her mind for the blow, when +it came. It would be very improbable that she would see the +gazette, with the list of killed and wounded at Ramoo and, even if +she did so, she would not associate the death of Ensign Brooke in +any way with you. When we have been trading up country, there have +been, once or twice, no means of sending off a letter for a couple +of months and, therefore, she could not have begun to feel +seriously anxious about you before she received your letter from +Rangoon. + +"Everyone says that you will not be able to advance until February; +so that, no doubt, this letter will reach you long before you +leave. I hear the losses have been very heavy, from fever; but I am +not anxious about you on that score, for I think that you are +thoroughly acclimatised. I am trying to get a contract for the +supply of a couple of thousand bullocks, for the use of the army; +and as I know all the country so well, from Chittagong to Sylhet, +and can buy below Indian prices, I think that I shall not only get +the contract, but make a very good thing of it, and it may lead to +other matters." + +After this, Stanley was hardly surprised when, in the last week of +January, his uncle walked into his quarters. After the first +pleasure of meeting was over, Stanley said: + +"I suppose you have got the contract, uncle?" + +"I have, lad. I have come down from Ramgur with six dhows, packed +full. I have brought a thousand head down and, directly I land +them, am going back for the remainder; which will be ready for me +by the time I get there. + +"I have got hold of an uncommonly good fellow. He was established +as a small trader at Chittagong. His business was ruined there, and +he was glad to accept my offer of a berth; and he has turned out a +very energetic and pushing fellow. He will come down with the next +consignment. + +"I myself am going to work my way up along the edge of the Tipperah +forest; and shall pick up another thousand head, by the time that I +get to the Goomtee, and shall send them by water up to Sylhet; and +then go up by land, picking up more on the way. I have a contract +for five thousand to be sent in, a thousand a month, for the force +that is to move against Manipur; while Johnson is to send another +two thousand down here. So you see, for the present the store +business can wait. It is a good line that I have got into. I shall +make a big profit out of it, and have hopes that it will be, to +some extent, permanent; for I can get the cattle so cheap in the +interior, on the rivers we know, that I can ship them to Calcutta +at lower terms than they can buy them in India; and I was as much +as told that, if I carried out my present contracts satisfactorily, +I should get the supply of the troops there. Of course, that would +not be a very great thing of itself but, as I could work it without +trouble in connection with my own business, it would make a +handsome addition to the profits." + +"But how about money, uncle?" + +"That is all right, lad. I had no difficulty, whatever, in getting +an advance at Calcutta, on the strength of my contract and upon the +guarantee of my agents; so that I am all right, in that respect." + +"I asked, uncle, because I can let you have eighteen hundred +pounds, if you want them." + +Tom Pearson looked at him in astonishment. + +"Why, what on earth have you been doing--robbing the treasury of +the King of Ava?" + +"No, uncle. I had a bag of gems given me, by some Burmese bandits. +When I got down here, I took a few of them to a merchant. He +advanced fifteen hundred rupees on them, and sent them to Burragee, +the jeweller at Madras and, six weeks afterwards, he paid me +another three thousand five hundred. I sent up another batch and, +last week, I got an order from the jewellers for fifteen hundred +pounds; so that I have more than eighteen hundred in hand now, and +I don't think that I have sent more than a third of the gems away." + +"Well, that is a piece of luck, Stanley! Why on earth did the +brigands give you the gems?" + +"Well, uncle, they are things that, from what they told me, there +is great difficulty and risk in trying to dispose of. They are a +royal monopoly, and nobody dare buy them or, if they do, will give +next to nothing for them; because of the risk of the transaction, +and because they know that the vendors are in a fix, and must sell. +Besides, there is a strong chance of their handing over anyone who +offers such things to the authorities. That was one reason why they +gave them to me. Then, too, they had made a good haul of +merchandise which was, to them, a great deal more valuable, as +there was no difficulty in disposing of it. Lastly, they had taken +a fancy to me, because I saved one of their comrade's lives--the +man who showed you up here." + +"Well, lad, you shall tell me all about it, this evening. I must be +going down to the commissariat yard, to arrange the landing of my +beasts. I came straight to see you, directly I landed. We dropped +anchor here at daybreak." + +"I will go with you, uncle. I will run in and see the chief, first, +and get leave off for the day. I have earned a holiday, for I have +been at work pretty well morning, noon, and night for the last two +months. You see, I have not only the duties of aide-de-camp, but of +interpreter; and have helped both the quartermaster's department +and the commissariat in making their arrangements with the natives. +I daresay I shall be able to help to hurry your business on, +quicker than you would be able to get it done, alone." + +The general at once granted Stanley leave, and he went with his +uncle down to the commissariat office, and introduced him to the +senior officer. + +"We shall be glad to do all in our power to help you, Mr. Pearson," +the officer said. "We have been expecting your arrival for the last +week. Of course, we heard from Calcutta that you had the contract +for two thousand head; at least half of these were to be delivered +by the tenth of February. We were getting rather anxious about it. +The force will probably want to start, before that time; and we +shall have to victual both the land and water columns. Of course, I +did not know that you were a relation of Mr. Brooke, or I should +have mentioned to him that you were likely to come." + +"I should like to get off as soon as possible," Tom Pearson said; +"for by the time that I get back to Ramgur, the rest of the cattle +will be in readiness for me." + +"I will write you an order for four large boats, at once. If you +had come three weeks sooner, you might have been kept waiting some +days; but such a number of native craft have, of late, come down +the rivers that we are enabled to get sufficient for our work." + +The officer gave him a note to the one in charge of the landing +arrangements. + +"It is lucky that you have come just at this moment," the latter +said. "We have just made our last trip with the baggage of the +47th, and I have six boats disengaged. You may as well take them +all." + +The craft in question were some of those that had been +captured--unwieldy craft, that took fish and salt up the river. +They were almost as large as the dhows in which the cattle had been +brought down, but drew very much less water. They were towed off to +the dhows, one by one, by two captured war canoes, each having +thirty rowers. One was taken to each dhow, and the work of +transhipping the cattle began at once. These were in good condition +for, although closely packed, they had been well supplied with food +and water on the way down; and a herdsman with four men under him +had been sent, in each boat, to take care of them, as Tom Pearson +was very anxious that his first consignment should be reported upon +favourably. The animals were all landed in the course of the +afternoon and, with the acknowledgment of their receipt, in +excellent order, in his pocket, the contractor went off again, with +Stanley, to his own dhow. + +"I have told them to have everything in readiness to drop down the +river with the tide, tomorrow morning. It will turn just about +sunrise. That is a rare bit of business, Stanley; and I doubt if a +contractor ever got his work through so quickly, before. Of course, +it is principally due to you. They would never have pushed things +through so quickly, had you not gone with me. I thought that very +likely I might be detained here a week, before I could get all the +cattle on shore--and by that time, if all goes well, I shall be at +Ramgur again. + +"Now we can have a comfortable evening's talk, which is very much +better than my going to dine with you at mess; for there is a great +deal to hear about, and I daresay that I can give you as good a +dinner as we should have had, on shore." + +"A good deal better," Stanley said. "Things have improved +immensely, during the last month; still our mess cook is certainly +not so good as your man and, at any rate, the quiet of your cabin +makes a very pleasant change, after always sitting down with a +large party." + +After dinner was over, Stanley gave a full account of his +adventures, from the time that he was taken prisoner. + +"You have done wonderfully well for yourself, lad; wonderfully +well. Certainly when you picked up Burmese from my man, we had no +idea that it was ever likely to turn out so useful. I thought that +it would have been an assistance among the Mugs on the coast; and I +had, too, some idea that the war might lead to the opening of a +trade up the Irrawaddy; but it has turned out infinitely more +useful than that. If you could not have spoken Burmese, Bandoola +would never have thought of asking for you to be spared as an +interpreter and, if he had not done so, you would have had your +head chopped off, at Ava. + +"Of course that leopard business was the turning point of your +fortunes but, though it has turned out so well, I must say that I +hardly think that you were justified in risking your life in such a +desperate act for a native; who might, for aught you know, be +already dead. Of course, it was a most gallant action; but the +betting was ten to one against your succeeding. However, as it +turned out, it was a fortunate business, altogether. I don't say +that you might not have made your way down to Rangoon, unaided; but +the odds would have been very heavily against it. However, these +rubies were a windfall, indeed." + +"Will you take the rest of them, uncle, and sell them at +Calcutta--or shall I send them to Madras, or home to England?" + +"I will take them with me to Calcutta, if you like, Stanley. I +don't say that there are better men there than the one you sent to, +at Madras; but I think some of them do a larger business up-country +with the native princes, who don't care what they give for good +gems. At any rate, I will take them there and get them valued by an +expert; and then try two or three of the leading firms, and get +their offers. If these are as high as the value put on them by the +expert, I would send them to England, through my agents, who would +do the best they could for you." + +"For us, uncle. Of course, it is all in the partnership business. +You have just got some contracts that will pay well and, while you +have been doing that, I have been getting hold of these rubies." + +"I don't think that that is fair, Stanley," his uncle said, +gravely. + +"It seems to me perfectly fair; and besides, the money put into the +business will make a lot of difference, and will certainly pay me a +great deal better than it would in any other way. I sent home 100 +pounds for my mother, directly the money came from Calcutta; and +told her that I hoped to be able to send home at least as much, +every year." + +"A good deal more, lad, if you like. I calculate these contracts +that I have got will bring in a pound a head so that, by the time +that the war is over, I hope to have cleared 8000 pounds, which +will be about what you will make by your rubies; and when trade +begins again, we shall be in a position to do it on a big scale. +But I still think that it will not be fair to take that money." + +"Well, uncle, if you won't take it, I certainly won't have anything +to do with the money that you make, while I am away; so please +don't let us say anything more about it. Shall I give you that +eighteen hundred now; or will you have an order upon the paymaster, +in Calcutta?" + +"That would be the best way, if you will have it so, lad. I have +left money with Johnson, at Ramgur, for the next herd that is to +come down here; and have orders from my agent on their agents, at +Dalla, for those that I am going to buy for the Manipur column. So +I don't want the money now and, suppose the dhow were to be lost +going up, the cash might go with it. So, do you get the order. You +had better send it straight to Bothron; and tell him to collect it, +and credit it to my account. + +"How long do you think that this business is going to last?" + +"It depends how far we have to go before the Burmese decide that +they have had enough of it. At present, the general hope is that, +as soon as we arrive at Prome, they will give in. If they don't we +may have to go up to Ava and, in that case, we may not finish it +until this time next year; for I suppose operations will have to +come to a stop, when the wet season begins again, and we could +hardly reach Ava before that." + +"I expect, some day, we shall have to take the whole country, +Stanley. You may frighten the court into submission, when you +approach the capital; but I fancy they will never keep to the terms +that we shall insist upon, and that there will have to be another +expedition. That is generally our way--it was so at Mysore, it has +been so in a dozen other places. When we have done all the work, +and have got them at our mercy, we give them comparatively easy +terms. As soon as they recover from the effects of their defeat, +they set to work again to prepare for another tussle; and then we +have all the expense and loss of life to incur, again, and then end +by annexing their territory, which we might just as well have done +in the first place. It may be all very well to be lenient, when one +is dealing with a European enemy; but magnanimity does not pay when +you have to do with Orientals, who don't care a rap for treaty +engagements, and who always regard concessions as being simply a +proof of weakness. + +"There would not be half the difficulty in annexing Burma that +there would be, in the case of a large province in India; for all +the towns, and most even of their villages, lie on rivers, and a +couple of dozen gunboats would suffice to keep the whole country in +order. You will see that that is what we shall have to do, some +day; but it will cost us two or three expeditions to do what might +just as well be done, now." + +"Well, uncle, it is nearly twelve o'clock and, as I shall be on +duty at six, I think I had better be going. I wish that you could +have stayed for another two or three days, and paid a visit to the +pagoda and camps. I am very glad that I have had a sight of you +again, though it's a very short one." + +"I should be glad to stay another day or two, Stanley; but it is +really of importance for me to get down to Ramgur, as soon as I +can, and send Johnson off with the cattle; for I want to set about +buying the herds for the other column, as quickly as possible. I +think I have left myself a fair margin of time, but there is +nothing like promptitude in delivery, and I want to get a good +name, for future business; and if this affair here is going to last +another twelve-month, regular supplies must be sent up for, as beef +is forbidden by the Burmese religion, they keep no cattle except +for draught purposes, and the army must get their bullocks by sea." + +Five minutes later Stanley was rowed ashore. The next morning he +accompanied the general, and went down to inspect the newly-arrived +cattle. + +"They are a capital lot," he said to Stanley, "decidedly the best +that we have had, yet. You see, it is a good deal shorter voyage, +from Ramgur, than from either Calcutta or Madras; and the animals +probably had a much shorter land journey before they were shipped. +Then, too, as your uncle came down himself they were, no doubt, +much better looked after than usual on the voyage. However, I will +take care to mention, when I write next to Calcutta, that the +cattle are far above the average; and I shall be glad if they will +arrange for such further supplies as we may require from the same +source." + +"Thank you, sir; that will be a great help to my uncle. Hitherto he +has had very uphill work of it; though he was beginning to get on +very well, when the war put a stop to trade. He knows the whole +country so thoroughly that he can certainly buy up cattle at many +places where no European trader, save himself, has ever +penetrated." + +"No doubt, Brooke; and I hope, for your sake, that he will succeed +well in this contracting business. He has certainly made an +excellent start and, as he is first in the field in the country +between Assam and Ramgur, he ought to make a good thing of this +opportunity that has fallen in his way. I know that it takes a long +time to build up a business but, when the foundation is laid, and a +man is quick in taking advantage of an opportunity, he can do as +much in a year as he might do in twenty, without it. + +"Now, I am going over to the lines of the 47th, to see how they +have shaken down into them." + +This regiment had brought out tents for, as every building was +already occupied, it was necessary that they should be put under +canvas. The general found that everything was arranged in order, +and the encampment certainly presented a pleasing contrast to the +irregular, and often crowded quarters of the troops who had passed +the wet season there. The colonel and three of his officers dined +with the general, that evening; the party being made up of the +military staff, including the two aides-de-camp. + +Two days later Stanley, with some of the other members of the +staff, dined at the 47th mess. Stanley was introduced to several of +the officers; and these were specially desirous of making his +acquaintance, as they had learned that he had been a prisoner at +Ava, and could therefore tell them much more than they had hitherto +learned of the country into which they were about to advance. + +Among them was a young lieutenant, also of the name of Brooke. +Stanley had, three weeks before, attained the same rank. At the +time that he was appointed to the 83rd, there were already several +death vacancies in the regiment, and disease and fighting had +carried off six more officers. The whole of the ensigns had +consequently obtained their step. At dinner he found himself placed +next to his namesake. + +"It is curious, our having the same name," the other remarked, as +he sat down. "It is not a very common one." + +"No, I have not met anyone of the same name, before," Stanley said. +"Indeed, until the affair at Ramoo I was nearly three years trading +with an uncle of mine, up the rivers; and was not much in the way +of falling in with white men. But, before that, I had been with my +father in a good many stations in India; but I do not, as far as I +can remember, recollect meeting anyone of the same name." + +"Then your father was in the service, too?" + +"Yes. He was a captain in the 15th Native Infantry." + +"Indeed," the other said in surprise, "then we are connections. But +I had no idea that Captain Brooke was ever married." + +"He was married just after he came out to India," Stanley said; "so +it is likely enough that you would never have heard of it. He died +three years ago, and my mother and sisters are now in England. What +is the connection between us? I have never heard my father speak +much of his family." + +"Your father was a cousin of mine--second cousin, I think. I fancy +there was some row between your grandfather and the rest of the +family. I don't know anything about the right or wrongs of it; for +it was, of course, many years before we were born; and I never +heard of your father's existence, until a fortnight before I left +England. Then there were some inquiries made about the family, +owing to various deaths that took place in it. Do you know that +your father was related--distantly of course--to the Earl of +Netherly?" + +"I do remember his mentioning it, once. I know he said that it was +a distant connection; and that he knew nothing, whatever, about the +earl or his family." + +"Well, curiously enough, it is not so distant, now," the other +said. "I was a pretty distant connection of his. He was childless; +and the family, generally, don't seem to have been prolific. A good +many of them died; and the result was that, the year before I left +England, an uncle of mine succeeded to the title. He has no son, +and my father was his next brother. My father died, two years ago; +and the result is that, to my astonishment, I found that I was next +heir to the title. They wanted me to leave the army, when my +regiment was ordered out to India; but of course I was not going to +do that, for my aunt may die, and my uncle marry again and have +children. Besides, I was not going to leave, anyhow, just as the +regiment was ordered abroad, and might see service. + +"However, there was a great hunting by the lawyers in the +genealogical tree; and I know it was decided that, in case anything +happened to me, your father would have been the next heir, had he +been alive. I don't know whether any further inquiries were made, +or whether they ever ascertained that he had married. I don't +suppose there were for, of course, as long as I live the matter is +of no importance. + +"So that, as things stand now, if a Burmese bullet puts an end to +my career, you are the next heir to the title." + +"You surprise me, indeed," Stanley said. "From the way my father +spoke of the matter, I am sure that he had not the slightest idea +there was any likelihood, whatever, that he would have any chance +of succeeding to the title." + +"That I can well imagine, for it was not until a few years ago, +when the deaths of several who stood between him and the succession +occurred, that my uncle regarded his coming into it as a matter +worth thinking about; and of course all our family stood between it +and your father. However, as you see we have dwindled away and, if +I do not get safely through this business, you are the next heir." + +"It is curious news to hear, at a dinner in Burma," Stanley said, +thoughtfully. "At any rate, I can assure you honestly that the news +gives me no particular satisfaction. I suppose it would be a nice +thing, to come in for a peerage; but my prospects out here are +good. I have no intention of staying in the army, after the end of +the war; and am really in partnership with my uncle, with whom I +have been for the last three years in business, which is turning +out very well. I like the life, and have every chance of making +enough to retire on, with ample means. Certainly, I should not like +to come into the title by the death of anyone that I knew." + +"That is the fortune of war," the other said, smiling. "We get our +steps by death vacancies. We are sorry for the deaths, but the +steps are not unwelcome. + +"By the way, my name is Harry. I know that yours is Stanley. I vote +that we call each other by them. We are cousins, you know, and I +suppose that as you are my heir, you must be my nearest male +relation, at present; so I vote that we call each other by our +Christian names, instead of Brookeing each other, always." + +"I shall be very glad to do so," Stanley said, cordially. "I hope +that we shall be close friends, as well as distant relations." + +Then, as there was a momentary lull in the conversation, Harry +raised his voice and said to the colonel: + +"A very curious thing has just happened, Colonel. Brooke and myself +have just discovered that we are cousins and, what is still more +curious, that if anything happens to me, he takes my place as next +heir to my uncle, a fact of which he was entirely ignorant." + +"That is certainly a very curious coincidence, Brooke; very +singular. Then you have not met before?" + +"I did not even know of his existence, Colonel; and had, indeed, no +idea that Captain Brooke, his father, had been married. The +cousinship is a distant one; but there is no question, whatever, as +to his being next in succession to myself to the peerage." + +The discovery excited general interest; and quite turned the +conversation, for the time, from the subject of the war and of +their approaching advance. After dinner was finished, many of the +officers gathered round Stanley, asking him questions about the +nature of the country, and his experiences as a captive in the +hands of the Burmese. Presently Colonel Adair, who had also dined +at the mess, joined the group. + +"I suppose, Mr. Brooke," he said, "your newly-found cousin has told +you about his adventure with the leopard?" + +"No, Colonel, he has not said anything about a leopard." + +"He is grievously afflicted with modesty," the colonel went on; +"and so I will tell it for him, for I think you ought to know that +he is not only able to speak half a dozen languages, but that he is +capable of doing deeds of exceptional gallantry. + +"You can go and chat with the colonel, Brooke. He is anxious to +hear your report as to the country, and I will be your trumpeter +here." + +Stanley gladly moved away, and entered into conversation with the +colonel of the 47th; while Colonel Adair related his adventures +with the leopard to his cousin, and the officers standing round. + +"By Jove, that was a plucky thing!" Harry Brooke said, admiringly. + +"It was, indeed!" the colonel agreed, as similar exclamations went +round the circle. "I don't think one man in a hundred would have +attacked a leopard with no weapon but a knife, except to save the +life of a comrade; even then, it would be a most desperate action. +I have done a good deal of big-game shooting, in India; but I am +certain that nothing but a strong affection, for a comrade in the +grasp of a leopard, would induce me to risk almost certain death in +the way your cousin did. We should never have heard of it, if we +had not got the details from the man he saved, and who has since +attached himself to him as a servant; and is the man who, as I +daresay he did tell you, served as his companion and guide in +making his way down here. At any rate you see, Brooke, your cousin +is an uncommonly fine young fellow, and you have reason to be proud +of the relationship." + +"I feel so, Colonel; and it is really a pleasure to know that, if +one does go down, a thoroughly good fellow will benefit by it, +instead of some unknown person who might be a very objectionable +representative of the family." + +For the next three or four days, the bustle of preparations went on +and, on the fifth, a detachment was sent up, with a sloop and +gunboats, to attack an advanced position of the enemy on the Lyne +river. Although the 3000 Burmese, who were posted in a strong +stockade, were supported by thirty-six guns; the works were carried +by storm, with little loss. + +The two branches of the Pellang (or Rangoon) river, by which the +force were to advance against Donabew were, on the following day, +reconnoitred for some distance. A number of fire rafts were +destroyed, but the Burmese were too disheartened to offer any +resistance. + +To the disappointment of the troops, the general was able to take +with him only a limited force; for the difficulties of carriage +were enormous and, as experience had shown that the country was +likely to be deserted, and devastated, on their approach; it was, +therefore, impossible for the bulk of the army to be taken on, by +land. There were other points, however, where the troops left +behind could be profitably employed. The capture of the important +town of Bassein, on the main branch of the Irrawaddy, would open +the river to the passage of our ships, and put an entire stop to +the trade of Ava. + +The force told off for the advance against Donabew was divided into +two columns. The first, 2400 strong--consisting of the 38th, 41st, +and 47th Regiments, three native battalions, the troop of +bodyguard; a battery of Bengal horse artillery, and part of the +rocket company--was to march by land. + +The second column, which was to proceed by water, was 1169 strong; +and it consisted of the 89th Regiment, the 10th Madras Europeans, +and 250 of the 18th Native Infantry; a body of dismounted +artillery, and the rest of the rocket company. This force was +commanded by Brigadier General Cotton. It was to be carried in a +flotilla of sixty-two boats, each armed with one or two guns; and +the boats of all the ships of war at Rangoon, under the command of +Captain Alexander, R. N. + +Major Sale was, at the same time, to advance against Bassein; with +600 men of the 13th Regiment, and the 12th Madras Native infantry, +with some artillery. After occupying the town, he was to cross the +country lying between the two main arms of the Irrawaddy, and to +join the general's force near Donabew. + +The rest of the force--nearly 4000 men, chiefly native regiments +and Europeans who had not, as yet, recovered sufficient strength to +take part in field operations--was to remain at Rangoon, under +Brigadier General M'Creigh; who was to form a reserve column, in +readiness to move as directed, as soon as sufficient transport was +collected. + +It was to the water force that the capture of Donabew was +intrusted, as it lay upon the opposite bank of the Irrawaddy; while +the general's force was directed against Tharawa, at the junction +of the two main branches of the river. Here they were to be joined +by General Cotton's force, after the capture of Donabew; then, +unless the court of Ava sued for peace, a united advance was to be +made on the important town of Prome. + + + +Chapter 11: Donabew. + + +Stanley Brooke did not accompany the land column, as the general +said to him, two days before: + +"I have been speaking with General Cotton, and he said that he +should be glad if I would attach you to his staff, until the force +unites again. Not one of his staff officers speaks Burmese and, +although he has two or three interpreters with him, it will be +better, if Bandoola sends in an officer offering to surrender, that +he should be met by a British officer. + +"In the next place, it may be necessary for him to communicate with +me and, assuredly, with your experience of the country, you would +be able to get through better than anyone else. I do not apprehend +that there would be any great danger, for we know that every +available fighting man has been impressed, by Bandoola; and the +passage of our column will completely cow the villagers lying +between us and the river. + +"I suppose," he said, with a smile, "that you have no objection, +since it will save you a long and, I have no doubt, a very +unpleasant march; and you will also obtain a view of the affairs at +the stockades at Pellang and Donabew." + +The land column started on the 13th of February, the water column +on the 16th, and the detachment for Bassein sailed on the following +day. Stanley was delighted at being appointed to accompany the boat +column. The march through the country would present no novelty to +him, and it was probable that the land column would encounter no +serious resistance until, after being joined by General Cotton's +force, it advanced against Prome. His horses went, with those of +General Cotton and his staff, under charge of the syce and Meinik. + +The one steamboat kept, at the start, in rear of the great flotilla +of boats so that, in case of any of them striking on a sandbank, it +could at once move to her assistance, and pull her off. The scene +was a very bright one as, in all, upwards of a hundred craft, of +various sizes, proceeded together. In front were half a dozen +gunboats; next to these came the two sloops of war; followed by the +rest of the boats, proceeding in irregular order. There was very +little stream, for the rivers were now quite low and, although the +flat country was still little more than a swamp, the rains in the +hills that supplied the main body of water to them had long since +ceased. The ships' boats were, of course, rowed by the blue-jackets. +The other craft were, for the most part, manned by natives; though +the soldiers on board occasionally lent a hand. + +Two days after starting, the boats destroyed three newly-erected +stockades, that were found unoccupied; and on the 19th reached +Pellang, where three very strong stockades had been erected. A +battery was thrown up next day from which, as well as from the +steamboat and sloops of war, shells were thrown into the stockade; +with such effect that two of the enemy's works were evacuated, as +soon as the troops took the offensive, and the main Pellang +stockade was also abandoned, without resistance. The two smaller +works were destroyed, and a portion of the 18th Madras Infantry was +left here, to maintain communication with Rangoon. + +On the 27th the flotilla entered the main stream and, the next day, +the advance came in sight of Donabew. It was another five days +before the whole force was in position, for several of the most +heavily laden craft stuck fast on the sandbanks at the fork of the +river. The next day Donabew was summoned to surrender. Bandoola, +who was at the head of 15,000 men, returned a refusal; which was +given in courteous terms, differing very widely from the haughty +and peremptory language in which all previous communications had +been couched. + +The next day a party of the 89th landed on the low-lying ground +between the main stockade and the river and, in spite of the heavy +fire, succeeded in ascertaining the strength and nature of the +defences. The main work was in the form of a parallelogram, about a +mile long, and stood on ground rising above the general level; and +fifty pieces of cannon, of various sizes, were in position on the +river face. Two outworks, constructed of square beams of timber, +with an outer ditch and a thick abbatis, defended the southern face +against an attack from an enemy landing below it. + +It was necessary to leave a strong guard on board the flotilla, +lest an attack should be made by war canoes and fire rafts. The +general, therefore, had not more than 600 men available for the +assault. As the enemy's guns completely commanded the river, it was +necessary to land below it; and on the morning of the 7th the +troops were disembarked, with two six-pounder guns and a rocket +detachment. Forming in two columns, they advanced against the lower +of the two covering stockades and, after an exchange of fire with +the enemy, rushed forward and forced an entrance into it; although +the enemy resisted with more resolution than they had, for some +time, shown. 280 prisoners were taken, and the rest of the +defenders fled to the second work. + +Two more guns and four mortars were landed and placed in position +and, after the stockades had been shelled for a short time, a +storming party--under Captain Rose--advanced to the assault. So +heavy a fire was opened upon them that the little column was +brought to a standstill, and forced to fall back; with the loss of +its commander, and of Captain Cannon of the 89th, while most of the +seamen with the storming party were either killed or wounded. + +This want of success, against a mere outwork, showed General Cotton +that--with the small force at his disposal--it would be worse than +useless to renew the attack for, were the outwork carried, the loss +would be so great that it would be hopeless to think of attacking +Bandoola's main position. He therefore determined to abstain from +further attack, until reinforced. + +"Now, Mr. Brooke," he said, as soon as the troops had been taken on +board the boats again, "I must bring your services into +requisition. This is just the contingency that we thought might +possibly occur. I cannot advance up the river until Donabew is +taken, and I cannot attack the place with the force at my command. +Therefore I will at once write a despatch to General Campbell, for +you to carry. You will be accompanied by the two men of the +bodyguard, who have come with me as orderlies. I shall have no use +for them, here; and three of you, together, need not fear any +molestation from the few people remaining in their villages, and +may be able to cut your way through any of the bands of deserters, +or beaten troops, dispersed over the country." + +"Very well, General. I shall also take my Burman, on my second +charger. He may be useful in getting news as to roads from the +natives; who will, as likely as not, fly into the jungle when they +see us approaching. However, there is not much fear of our losing +our way, as it will be along the river, as far as Tharawa." + +A boat was at once sent off to the craft carrying the two orderlies +and the horses of the staff. As soon as the despatch was written, +Stanley, after shaking hands with his companions, was also rowed to +the horse barge. This was, at a signal of the general, taken in tow +by the steamer, and piloted to the opposite bank. A boat, sounding +ahead, presently found a spot where there was enough water for the +barge to get alongside the bank. The horses were led ashore; and +Stanley, the two troopers, and Meinik mounted. + +The Burmese are poor riders but, during the wet season, Stanley had +often taken Meinik, on his spare horse, when riding about in the +camp; partly because he could trust him to look after the horses +carefully, and in the second place to accustom him to ride on +horseback so as to act, if required, as an orderly. Meinik was +quite of opinion that there would be no risk, whatever, in passing +through villages; but thought it probable that they might fall in +with disbanded troops, as it was known that the land column had, +soon after starting, captured the fort of Mophi; and that its +garrison, between two and three thousand strong, had taken to the +jungle and dispersed. + +"Still, master," he said, "I don't think it likely that they will +attack us. They will be expecting no one, and we shall come upon +them by surprise; then they will run into the bushes, thinking that +you must have many more troops behind you. No, it is not likely +that they will have many guns; they would throw them away when they +fled, partly to run faster through the forest, partly because most +of them will be making off to the villages, hoping to lie concealed +until the war is over; while if they had guns in their hands, it +would be known that they were deserters, and they might be seized +and sent across the river to Bandoola, or up to Prome." + +They rode some fifteen miles before dark, and then took up their +quarters in a village. The few old men, women, and children +inhabiting it fled, at their approach; but when Meinik went to the +edge of the jungle, and shouted out loudly that they need not fear, +for that no harm would be done to any of them, and good prices +would be given for food, two or three returned and, finding the +statements to be true, one of them went into the jungle again, and +brought the others back. Fowls and eggs were brought into the hut +that Stanley occupied, and a good supply of grain for the horses +was also purchased. Thus, Stanley was able to avoid breaking into +the small stock of provisions they had brought with them. + +The inhabitants of this part of Burma were a tribe known as +Carians. They were the tillers of the soil, and were an industrious +and hardy race. The country was so rich that they not only raised +sufficient for their own wants, but sent large supplies of grain +and rice to Ava. They were very heavily taxed but, as a rule, were +exempt from conscription. Nevertheless they had, on the present +occasion, been forced to labour at the stockades, and in +transporting food for the troops. + +Their forest villages were small. They consisted of little huts, +erected either in trees shorn of their branches, or upon very +strong poles. These abodes were only accessible by rough ladders, +formed by nailing pieces of wood across the trees or poles. This +was absolutely necessary, on account of the number of tigers that +infested the forest. The village where they had halted was, +however, built upon the ground; but was surrounded by a strong +stockade. The people assured Stanley that none of the fugitives +from Mophi had come that way. + +There had, they said, been many, after Bandoola's defeat; but they +had seen none, of late. They declared that they had far greater +fear of these than they had of the English; for that they plundered +wherever they went and, if they could not obtain enough to satisfy +their expectations, burnt the houses, and often killed many of the +inhabitants. The villagers volunteered to keep watch all night, at +the gate of the stockade; although they said that there was no fear +of anyone approaching, as strangers could not find their way +through the forest, in the dark and, even could they do so, the +fear of tigers would prevent them from making the attempt. Stanley +agreed to pay some of them to watch, but also stationed one of his +own men as sentry, relieving him every three hours. + +An hour after they reached the village, they saw one of the war +boats rowing rapidly up the stream; and had no doubt that it was +bearing a message from Bandoola, saying that he had repulsed the +attack of the British. Beyond hearing the howling of tigers in the +forest, Stanley passed the night undisturbed, except when he went +to change the sentry. Meinik took his share of watching; and +Stanley, himself, relieved him an hour before daybreak. + +By the time the sun rose, the horses had been fed and breakfast +taken. After riding some miles, the country became more open. +Cultivated fields succeeded the dense forest. The ground was +higher, and little groups of huts could be seen, wherever a small +elevation rose above the general level. The change was very +welcome, for they were able to travel faster, and there was less +chance of their coming suddenly upon a party of the disbanded +troops. + +Presently, just as they reached a larger village than usual, by the +river bank, a thick smoke arose from one of the houses, and they +could hear female screams. + +"Come on!" Stanley shouted, to the three men riding behind him. +"See that your pistols are ready to hand, and draw your swords." + +Illustration: Stanley cut down the man who was about to fire the +hut. + +This village was not, like the last, stockaded; being some miles +away from the forest. As they dashed into it, they saw some twenty +Burmese. Two women lay dead, in front of one house; and one of the +men, with a torch, was about to fire another. Absorbed in their own +doings, the Burmese did not notice the coming of the horsemen until +the latter were close to them. Then, with a cry of consternation, +they turned to fly; but it was too late. Stanley cut down the man +who was about to fire the hut, and he and the others then fell upon +the Burmans, with sword and pistol. Six of them were killed. The +rest were pursued but, dashing down to the river, they plunged in, +pistol shots being sent after them. + +Stanley remained on the bank, until he saw that they had fairly +started to cross the river, then he re-entered the village. Two or +three frightened people came out from their hiding places, when +Meinik shouted to them that all was safe. + +"They have all gone," he said, "you need not fear being disturbed +by them again. See, there are six guns lying in the road; and you +will find plenty of ammunition on those fellows that have fallen. +There are some spears and swords, too. Of course, you can do +nothing if a number of these fellows come; but if there are only +two or three, you and the women ought to be able to dispose of +them. Now we must ride on." + +On the third day they arrived at Tharawa, and found that Sir A. +Campbell, who had been assured by the natives that Bandoola had +retreated, had continued his march the day before. The place was so +large that Stanley thought it unsafe for them to sleep there, and +they rode on to a little village, two miles away. Here they were +received with great deference, the passage of the troops the day +before having profoundly impressed the villagers. After waiting +three hours to rest the horses, they again mounted and, riding all +night, arrived in the morning at Yuadit--a village twenty-six miles +from Tharawa--and found the force on the point of starting. + +"No bad news, I hope, Mr. Brooke?" the general said, as he rode up +to him. + +"I am sorry to say, sir, that my news is not good. Here is the +brigadier's despatch." + +"This is unfortunate, indeed," the general said, when he had run +his eye over the document. + +"Mr. Tollemache, please to ride along the line, and say that the +column is not to get into motion until further orders." + +Colonel Adair and the other officers of the staff had been on the +point of mounting, when Stanley rode up. The general called two or +three of the senior officers to him. + +"Cotton can neither take Donabew, nor get past it," he said. "Here +is his despatch. You see, he has lost several officers and a good +many men; and that in the assault on an outlying work, only. I am +afraid that there is nothing for us to do, but go back to his +assistance." + +"I am afraid not, sir," Colonel Adair said. "Our supplies are +running short already and, you see, we decided upon filling up all +the carts at Tharawa, where we made sure that we should be met by +the boats. The country round here has been completely stripped, and +it would be a very serious matter to endeavour to advance to Prome, +without supplies. Moreover, we might expect a much more serious +resistance than we have bargained for. The news that Bandoola has +repulsed his assailants--and you may be sure that this has been +exaggerated into a great victory--will restore the spirit of the +Burmese. It is evident that we must turn back, and finish off with +Bandoola before we advance further." + +Orders were accordingly sent, to the officers commanding the +various corps, that the column was to retrace its steps and, while +they passed through the village, Stanley related, in much greater +detail than had been given in the despatch, the events of the +attack, and the nature of the defences at Donabew. + +The troops marched along with a cheerful mien. It was, of course, +an annoyance to have to plod back along the road they had before +traversed but, upon the other hand, there was a general +satisfaction that they were, after all, to take part in the capture +of Bandoola's last stronghold. + +Colonel Adair rode on with the little troop of cavalry. He was to +push forward to Tharawa, and was to offer rewards to the natives +there for every boat brought in. There was little doubt that many +of the fishermen had hauled up their craft into clumps of bushes +and brush wood, to prevent their being requisitioned by Bandoola +and, although it was not likely that a large number would now be +obtained, yet even if but a dozen were found, it would be of +assistance. + +The rest of the force reached Tharawa on the following evening, +with the exception of a party left to protect the slow-moving +waggons. They found that nine canoes had been obtained, and that a +considerable portion of the scanty population had been, all day, +employed in cutting bamboos and timber for rafts. + +The next morning the troops were all engaged on the same work, and +in the construction of rafts; and at nightfall three hundred men of +the 49th were taken across the river to the town of Henzada, in +case Bandoola, on hearing of the preparations for crossing, should +send a force to oppose the passage. It took four days' continuous +labour to get the little army across, as it was necessary to make +large timber rafts to carry the carts, horses and bullocks, guns +and stores. + +Hearing that a force was posted, some fifteen miles away, to +intercept the detachment that was marching from Bassein; Colonel +Godwin, with a party, was sent off that night to endeavour to +surprise it. The Burmese, however, took the alarm before they were +attacked; and scattered in all directions, without firing a shot. +The army marched along the right bank, and arrived before Donabew +on the 25th of March. Communications were opened with General +Cotton's force, below the town; and both divisions set to work to +erect batteries. + +The Burmese made several sorties to interrupt the work, and one of +these was accompanied by Bandoola's seventeen elephants. The troop +of cavalry, horse artillery, and the rocket company charged close +up to the elephants; and opened fire upon the howdahs, filled with +troops, that they carried. In a short time most of these and the +drivers were killed; and the elephants--many of which also had +received wounds--dashed off into the jungle, while the infantry +fled back into the stockade, into which a discharge of shells and +rockets was maintained, all day. + +The next morning--the 1st of April--the mortar batteries were +completed; and these, and others armed with light guns, kept up a +continuous fire into the enemy's camp. At daybreak on the 2nd, the +heavy guns of the breaching batteries also opened fire and, in a +very short time, the enemy were seen pouring out in the rear of +their works, and making their way into the jungle. As there had +been no idea that they would so speedily evacuate the stockade, no +preparations had been made for cutting them off; and the garrison, +therefore, effected their escape with but little loss. + +The troops at once occupied the work, and found large stores of +grain and ammunition there, as well as a great number of guns. From +some of the wounded Burmans, it was ascertained that the evacuation +of the fort was due to the death of Bandoola; who had been killed, +by the explosion of a shell, while watching the operations from a +lookout that had been erected for him, at the top of a lofty tree. +His death had caused the most profound depression among the +garrison. Their leaders in vain endeavoured to reanimate their +courage. The opening of the fire with the heavy guns completed +their discomfiture, and they fled without thought of resistance. +Indeed, the greater part had stolen away during the night. + +A portion of the fleet had already passed up beyond the fort, under +a heavy fire; and the rest now came up. The supplies of grain were +renewed and, a guard being left to hold the works, which would now +serve as a base, the army again started up the river--the water +column proceeding to Tharawa, the land force marching back to +Henzada, whence they were carried across the river in the boats. +Here the force was joined by the reserve column from Rangoon, +consisting of several companies of the Royals and the 28th Native +Infantry, with a supply of elephants and carriage cattle which had +arrived from Calcutta. + +On the 14th, Yuadit was again reached. No opposition, whatever, was +encountered; indeed, the whole country was deserted, the +inhabitants having been ordered away by the Burmese authorities, as +soon as the fall of Donabew was known. When within four days' march +of Prome, two native officials came in, with a communication to the +effect that the Burmese were ready to treat for peace. As it was +known, however, that reinforcements were on their way down from +Ava, it was evident that this was merely a pretext to gain time; +and the general sent word that, when he arrived at Prome, he would +be ready to open negotiations for peace. + +The country through which the army was now passing was very +beautiful. In the far distance on the left, the mountains of Aracan +could be seen; while on the right the country was undulating, +richly cultivated, and broken by clumps of timber, with a +background of the range of hills running along near the Pegu river. +On the 24th the heights of Prome, eight miles away, were visible; +and the flotilla could be seen, lying at anchor a short distance +below the town. Messengers came out that afternoon, to endeavour to +induce the general not to enter it; but a reply was sent that this +was out of the question, that no harm would befall the inhabitants, +and that--as soon as he entered--the general would be ready to +receive any persons qualified to treat for peace. + +Some hours before daybreak the army marched forward and, by +sunrise, were close to the town. The position was found to be +extremely strong. Every hill commanding the place had been +fortified, to the very summit. Strong stockades ran in every +direction, and it was evident that a great number of men must have +been engaged, for a long time, in attempting to render the place +impregnable. + +Not a soldier, however, was to be found. A native of the place +presently met them, with the news that the governor and troops had +evacuated it, with the exception of a small party who were firing +the town. This story was corroborated by wreaths of smoke, rising +at various points. + +The troops pressed forward at the top of their speed. On entering +the town, they found that the native population had all been forced +to leave and, piling their arms, they set to work to extinguish the +flames; which they did not, however, succeed in doing until nearly +half the town was destroyed. Fortunately the fire was checked +before it reached the great magazines of grain, and other stores, +for the army. + +The belief that the negotiations had been only pretexts to arrest +the advance of the troops against the town, until the expected +reinforcements arrived, was confirmed by the natives; who presently +came in from hiding places where they had taken refuge, until their +army retired. They said that, as soon as the news came of the fall +of Donabew, fresh levies were ordered to be collected in every part +of Upper Burma; while the whole population of the province had been +employed in adding to the defences of the town, which had been +already very strongly stockaded. + +It was a disappointment to the force, which had hoped that the +occupation of Prome would bring about the submission of the court +of Ava; and enable them to be taken down the river in boats, and +embark, before the rainy season again set in. Nevertheless, the +prospect of passing that season at Prome was vastly more pleasant +than if it had to be spent at Rangoon. They were now inland, beyond +the point where the rains were continuous. The town was situated on +high ground, and the country round was open and healthy. Although +for some little distance round the cattle had been driven off, and +the villages destroyed; it was certain that flying columns would be +able to bring in any amount of cattle, before the wet season began. + +For a short time, it was thought that the occupation of Prome would +show the king and court that it was useless to continue the +struggle, any longer; but these hopes were dissipated when it was +known that a further levy of 30,000 men had been called out. The +court, however, was apparently conscious that its commands would no +longer be obeyed with the alacrity before manifested. The early +levies had obeyed the call with cheerfulness; believing in their +invincibility, and confident that they would return home laden with +spoil after driving, without difficulty, the audacious strangers +into the sea. Things, however, had not turned out so. The troops +that had left Ava in high spirits had been routed, with very heavy +losses. Their great general, Bandoola, had been killed; and +fugitives from the army were scattered over the land, bearing with +them reports of the extraordinary fighting powers of these white +enemies, and of the hopelessness of attempting to resist them. The +consequence was that in issuing the order for the new levy a bounty +of twenty pounds, which to the Burmans was a very large sum, was +offered to each man who obeyed the call. + +The first step, on the part of the British general, was to send +proclamations through the country; guaranteeing protection to all, +and inviting the population to return to their towns and villages. +The troops were employed in erecting, with the assistance of as +much native labour as could be procured, comfortable huts outside +the town; so that the natives, on returning should find their homes +unoccupied and untouched. It was not long before this excellent +policy had its due effect. As soon as those who first returned sent +the news to their friends, the fugitives came out from their hiding +places in the forests, in great numbers, and returned to the city. +Those whose homes were still standing settled down in them and +resumed their ordinary avocations, just as if their native rulers +were still in authority; while those whose houses had been burned +set to work, with a cheerfulness characteristic of their race, to +re-erect their light wooden dwellings. + +So favourable were the reports spread through the country of our +conduct that, in a short time, the population of Prome was +considerably larger than it had been before the advance of our +army. Similar results were speedily manifest throughout the whole +district below the town. From the great forest that covered more +than half of it, the villagers poured out, driving before them +herds of cattle and, in two or three months, the country that had +appeared a desert became filled with an industrious population. +Order was established. The local civil officers were again +appointed to their former posts, but their powers of oppression and +intimidation were abrogated, by the order that no punishment beyond +a short term of imprisonment was to be inflicted on any person, +whatever, until the case had been brought before the British +authorities; and soon the only fear entertained by the people of +the rich district of the lower Irrawaddy was that the British +troops would march away, and leave them again to the oppression and +tyranny of their former masters. + +The markets of Prome were abundantly supplied with food of all +sorts and, as everything was liberally paid for, any number of +bullocks were obtainable for, although the Burmese are forbidden by +their religion to kill cattle, and therefore keep them only for +draught purposes, they had no objection to our killing them; or +indeed, to eat the meat, when they could obtain it. Labour of all +kinds was abundant, and great numbers of canoes were constructed +for the purpose of bringing up supplies from the villages on the +river, and for the advance of the force at the end of the wet +season. Until this set in in earnest, small bodies of troops +marched through the forests; driving out the bands that infested +them, and plundered and killed the country people without mercy. + +The general's aides-de-camp had a busy time of it, being constantly +employed in carrying orders to the towns and villages, in hearing +complaints and, in Stanley's case, entering into agreements for the +purchase of cattle and grain. When in Prome, he spent a good deal +of his spare time with his cousin who, having bought a horse, +frequently obtained leave to accompany him on his excursions on +duty. A warm friendship had sprung up between them. Harry was two +years older than Stanley, and had been at Eton up to the time that +he entered the army. He was, however, in manner no older than his +cousin; whose work, for the three years previous to the outbreak of +the war, had rendered him graver and more manly than a life spent +among lads of his own age could have done. + +Meinik always accompanied Stanley, wherever he went. He had now, to +the latter's quiet amusement, modified his Burmese costume; making +it look like that of some of the whites and, indeed, he would have +passed without notice as one of the Goa-Portuguese mess waiters, in +his suit of white nankeen. When riding, or on any service away from +the headquarter camp, he was dressed in a suit of tough brown khaki +which he had obtained from one of the traders at Rangoon. The coat +differed but little from that of the suit Stanley had handed over +to him; except that it was somewhat shorter and without the small +shoulder cape and, in fact, resembled closely the modern regimental +tunic. Below he wore knee breeches of the same material; with +putties, or long bands of cloth, wound round and round the leg, and +which possessed many advantages over gaiters. He still clung to the +turban but, instead of being white, it was of the same colour as +his clothes, and was much larger than the Burmese turban. + +"Burmese are great fools," he often said to Stanley. "They think +they know a great deal; they know nothing at all. They think they +are great fighters; they are no good at fighting, for one +Englishman beats ten of them. Their government is no good--it keeps +everyone very poor and miserable. You come here; you know nothing +of the country, and yet you make everyone comfortable. We ride +through the villages; we see everyone rejoicing that they are +governed by the English, and hoping that the English will never go +away again. + +"What do you think, sir--will you stay here always? You have had +much trouble to take the country. A great many people have been +ill; a great many died. Now you have got it, why should you go away +again?" + +"It is quite certain that we shall not give it all up, Meinik. It +has been, as you say, a troublesome and very expensive business; +and the farther the king obliges us to go up, before he makes +peace, the more he will have to pay, either in money or territory. +Of course, I cannot say what the terms of peace will be; but I +should think that, very likely, we shall hold the country from the +sea up to here, with Aracan and a strip along the sea coast of +Tenasserim." + +"That will be good," Meinik said. "I shall never go outside the +English land, again. There will be plenty to do, and a great trade +on the river; everyone will be happy and contented. I should be a +fool to go back to Upper Burma; where they would chop off my head, +if they knew that I had been down to Rangoon when the English were +there." + + + +Chapter 12: Harry Carried Off. + + +Early in September, Stanley was sent to purchase cattle from some +of the villages near the foot of the hills and, at the same time, +to make inquiries as to the movements of a large band of marauders +who had been making raids in that neighbourhood. He had with him +four troopers of the bodyguard. Harry Brooke accompanied him. +Although from the healthier situation of Prome, the amount of +illness during the wet season did not approach that which had been +suffered at Rangoon, a great many men were in hospital, and there +were many deaths. Harry had had a sharp attack of fever and, as he +had now recovered, to a certain extent, the medical officer of his +regiment strongly recommended that he should have a change; and he +therefore, without difficulty, obtained his colonel's leave to +accompany Stanley, as the ground would be much higher than that on +the river, and the mere fact of getting away from a camp where so +many deaths took place every day would, in itself, be of great +value. + +Stanley's daily journeys were not likely to be long ones, as he had +instructions to stop at all villages; and to see how things were +going on, and whether the people had any complaints to make of +oppression and exaction by their local authorities. + +"It is a tremendous pull, your being able to speak the language, +Stanley," Harry said. "If it hadn't been for that, you would have +been stuck at Prome, like the rest of us. Instead of that, you are +always about; and you look as fresh and healthy as if you were at a +hill station, in India." + +"Yes, it has been an immense advantage to me, in all ways. Of +course, I should never have got my staff appointment if it had not +been for that. + +"By the way, I have not told you that, while you were down with the +fever, the gazette containing the confirmation of my appointment by +the general, and the notice of my commission, dated on the day of +my appointment, came out. I had quite a lump sum to draw for +although, I have been paid as interpreter all along, the paymaster +made a difficulty about my pay as a subaltern, until I was gazetted +regularly; so I have quite a large sum coming to me, on my pay and +allowances. I don't know how you stand for cash but, if you are +short at all, I can let you have anything that you want." + +"I have got really more than I know what to do with, Stanley. I +bought an uncommonly good native horse, as you know, six weeks ago; +and I am going to ride him for the first time now but, really, that +is almost the first penny that I have spent since we left Rangoon. +There is nothing to buy here except food and, of course, that is a +mess business. I had an idea that this was a rich country but, so +far, one has seen nothing in the way of rich dress materials, or +shawls, or carpets, or jewelry that one could send home as +presents. Why, in India I was always being tempted; but here it is +certainly the useful, rather than the ornamental, that meets the +eye." + +"I saw some nice things at Ava but, of course, all the upper +classes bolted as we came up the country; and the traders in rich +goods did the same. Are you going to take a servant with you, +Harry? I don't think that there is any occasion to do so, for +Meinik can look after us both, well enough." + +"Yes, I am thinking of taking my native, the man I hired just after +I got here. He is a very good fellow, and made himself very useful, +while I was ill. I picked up a tat for him, yesterday, for a few +rupees. I know that your man would do very well for us both but, +sometimes, when you make a village your headquarters and ride to +visit others from it, I may not feel well enough to go with you; +and then he would come in very handy, for he has picked up a good +many words of English. Your man is getting on very well, that way." + +"Yes; he was some time before he began for, of course, he had no +occasion for it; but now that he has taken to what he considers an +English costume, and has made up his mind that he will never settle +down again under a Burmese government, he has been trying hard to +pick up the language. I found that it was rather a nuisance at +first when, instead of telling him what was wanted in his own +language, I had to tell him in English, and then translate it for +him. However, he does understand a good deal now and, whenever he +has nothing else to do, he is talking with the soldiers. Of course, +from his riding about so much with me, he is pretty well known, +now; and as he is a good-tempered, merry fellow, he makes himself +at home with them and, if the campaign lasts another six months, I +think he will speak very fair English." + +"I fancy that you will have to make up your mind that he is a +permanency, Stanley. I am sure he intends to follow you, wherever +you go; whether it is to England, India, or anywhere else." + +"I sha'n't be sorry for that, Harry; certainly not as long as I am +out here. In the first place, he is really a very handy fellow, and +ready to make himself useful, in any way; then there is no doubt +that he is greatly attached to me, and would go through fire and +water for me. A man of that sort is invaluable to anyone knocking +about as I shall be, when the war is over and I take up trading +again. His only fault is that he is really too anxious to do things +for me. Of course, when I am on duty there is nothing much he can +do; but if I am sitting in a room, he will squat for hours in the +corner and watch me. If my cheroot gets low, there he is with a +fresh one and a light, in a moment. If I drop my handkerchief, or a +pen, there he is with it, before I have time to stoop. Sometimes I +have really to invent errands to send him on, so as to give him +something to do for me. I own that I have not contemplated what +position he would occupy, if I go trading; but I quite recognize +that he will go with me, and that he would become a portion of my +establishment, even if that establishment consisted only of +himself. + +"Will you be ready to start at four in the morning? The sun is +tremendously hot now, on the days between the rain; at any rate, it +will be much better for you, till you get your strength, to travel +in the cool of the morning, or in the evening." + +"I shall be ready. I will be round here, with my servant, by that +hour. By the way, what shall I bring with me?" + +"Nothing at all. I shall take a couple of chickens, and some bread +and coffee and sugar, and a bottle of brandy for emergencies; but +we shall have no difficulty in getting food in the villages. The +troopers will only carry their day's rations with them. After that +I always act as mess caterer, and charge expenses when I get back +here." + +Accordingly, the next morning they started at four o'clock. Stanley +insisted that Harry should ride his second horse, for the present; +as his own, having been six weeks without exercise, and fed very +much better than it had been accustomed to, was in much too high +spirits to be pleasant for an invalid. Meinik, therefore, took +Harry's; and the latter rode beside his cousin, whose horse had had +abundant exercise, and was well content to canter quietly along by +the side of his companion. + +By the end of ten days, Harry had picked up some of his strength. +They now reached a village which Stanley decided to use as his +headquarters, for a few days, while he made excursions to other +places within a day's ride. It was a good place for a halt; +standing as it did at some height on the hills, where the air was +much cooler at night than in the flat country. It was surrounded by +a clearing of about a hundred acres in extent; planted with cacao +trees, pepper, and many kinds of vegetables. + +"This is delightful!" Harry said, as they sat in front of the hut +that had been cleared for them, and looked over the plain. "It must +be twenty degrees cooler, here, than it was at Prome. I think I +shall do nothing tomorrow, Stanley, but just sit here and enjoy +myself. I know it is very lazy, for I am feeling quite myself +again; still, after ten days' riding, I do think that it will be +pleasant to have a day's rest." + +"Do, by all means," Stanley said. "I think you had better stay here +for the three days that we shall remain. Your man is a very good +cook, and there is no lack of food. Those chickens we had just now +were excellent, and the people have promised to bring in some game, +tomorrow. There are plenty of snakes, too; and you lose a good +deal, I can assure you, by turning up your nose at them. They are +just as good as eels, as Meinik cooks them--stewed with a blade of +cinnamon, and some hot peppers. I cannot see that they can be a bit +more objectionable to eat than eels; indeed, for anything one +knows, the eel may have been feasting on a drowned man, the day +before he was caught; while the snakes only take a meal once a week +or so, and then only a small bird of some kind." + +"I dare say that you are quite right, Stanley, and I own that the +dishes your man turns out look tempting; but I cannot bring myself +to try, at any rate as long as I can get anything else to eat. If I +knew that it was a case of snake, or nothing, I would try it; but +till then, I prefer sticking to birds and beasts." + +The next morning Stanley rode off, with two of his escort and +Meinik, who declined altogether to be left behind. + +"No, master," he said, "there is never any saying when you may want +me; and what should I ever say to myself if misfortune were to come +to you, and I were not to be there?" + +Stanley had a long day's work. As a rule, the villagers had few +complaints to make but, at the place he went to on this occasion, +the headman had been behaving as in the old times; and Stanley had +to listen to a long series of complaints on behalf of the +villagers. The case was fully proved, both as to extortion and ill +treatment. Stanley at once deprived the man of his office, and +called upon the villagers to assemble and elect another in his +place. + +"If you are not satisfied," he said to the fellow, "you can go to +Prome, and appeal to the general there; but I warn you that, if you +do, you must give notice to the villagers of your intention so that +they may, if they choose, send two or three of their number to +repeat the evidence that they have given me. I have noted this +fully down, and I can tell you that the general, when he reads it, +will be much more likely to order you a sound flogging, than to +reinstate you in your office." + +It was dusk when Stanley arrived within two miles of the village +where he had left Harry. Meinik, who was riding just behind him, +brought his horse up alongside. + +"Do you see that, sir? There is a light in the sky. It is just over +where the village is. I am afraid there is a fire there." + +"You are right, Meinik. I hope nothing has gone wrong." + +He touched his horse with his heel, and rode on at a gallop. He +became more and more anxious, as he approached the village. No +flames could be seen leaping up, but there was a dull glow in the +sky. As he rode into the clearing, he reined up his horse in +dismay. A number of glowing embers, alone, marked the place where +the village had stood; and no figures were to be seen moving about. + +"There has been foul play, Meinik. + +"Get ready for action, men," he said to the two troopers, and they +dashed forward at a gallop. + +Two or three little groups of people were sitting, in an attitude +of deep dejection, by the remains of their houses. + +"What has happened?" Stanley shouted, as he rode up. + +"The robbers have been here, and have slain many, and burned the +village." + +"Where is my friend?" + +"They have carried him off, my lord; or at least, we cannot find +his body. His servant and one of the soldiers are lying dead; but +of the other soldier, and the officer, there are no signs." + +"This is terrible!" Stanley exclaimed. "Tell me exactly how it +happened." + +"It was four hours ago, my lord. The robbers came suddenly out from +the plantation, and fell upon the people. Many they killed at once; +but many also have escaped as we did, by running in among the +plantations, and so into the forest. We heard the firing of guns, +for a little time; then everything was silent, and we knew that the +robbers were searching the houses. Half an hour later, smoke rose +in many places, and then flames; then after a time, all was quiet. +A boy crept up among the bushes, and came back with the news that +they had all gone. + +"Then we came out again. Twenty-three of our people had been +killed, and eight carried off; at least, we cannot find the bodies. +The white officer and one of his soldiers have gone, also." + +"Which way did they go?" + +"The tracks show that they went up the hill. Most likely they will +have gone to Toungoo, if they have gone to any town at all; but +indeed, we think they have taken the prisoners to get a reward for +them." + +Stanley had thrown himself off his horse, as he rode up; and he +stood for some time, silently leaning against it. Then he said to +Meinik: + +"Picket the horses, and then come and have a talk with me." + +Then he turned to the two troopers: + +"There is nothing to be done now," he said. "You had better look +about, and see what you can find in the way of food; and then get a +grave dug for your comrade, and another for Mr. Brooke's servant." + +The two Mahommedan troopers saluted, and led their horses away. +Meinik, after picketing the animals, returned to Stanley but, +seeing that the latter was pacing up and down, and evidently not +disposed to speak, he went away. + +There were a good many fowls walking about, in a bewildered way, +near the huts. They had been away, as usual, searching for food in +the plantations and fields when the robber band arrived and, on +their return home at dusk, had found everything changed. A boy at +once caught and killed two of these, plucked them and brought them +to Meinik who, getting some embers from the fires, cut the fowls in +two and put them on to roast. A few minutes sufficed to cook them. +As soon as they were ready, Meinik took them to Stanley. + +"You must eat, master," he said. "You have had nothing since we +started, this morning; and sorrow, alone, makes a poor supper. You +will want to do something, I know; and will need all your +strength." + +"You are right, Meinik. Yes, give me one of them, and take the +other one yourself and, while we eat, we can talk. Of course, I +must make an effort to rescue my cousin from the hands of this +band." + +"Yes, master, I knew that you would do that." + +"Did you ask how many there were of them, Meinik?" + +"Some say forty, some say sixty." + +"If we knew where they are now, and could come up to them, we might +manage to get them off while the robbers were asleep." + +Meinik shook his head. + +"They are sure to keep a strict guard, over a white officer," he +said; "but if we rushed in and shouted, and fired pistols, they +might all run away." + +"I am afraid not, Meinik. There might be a scare for a minute but, +directly they saw that there were only two of us, they would turn +and kill us. Your people are brave enough. They may feel that they +cannot stand against our troops, owing to our discipline; but they +fight bravely hand-to-hand. However, we don't know exactly which +way they have gone; and it would be hopeless to search for them in +the forest, during the darkness. + +"What should they go to Toungoo for?" + +"I have been thinking it over, master; and it seems to me that many +of them may belong there, or to the villages near. They may not +dare return to their homes, because they are afraid that they would +be punished for having left the army, and would certainly be sent +off again to it. Now they may think that, if they go back with a +white officer and soldier, and tell some story of having beaten a +great many English, they will be rewarded; and may even be able to +remain some time in their homes, before they are sent off; or they +may be ordered to march with their prisoners to Ava, where they +would get still more reward. I can see no other reason for their +carrying off the officer." + +"I think very likely that is so, Meinik. Anyhow, we are more likely +to rescue my cousin, at Toungoo, than we should be while on the +road. It would be next to impossible to find them among all the +hills and trees and, even if we did come upon them at night, and +could creep into the midst of them, we might find that my cousin is +too severely wounded to travel for, as there was a fight, it is +almost certain he must have been wounded before he was captured. +Therefore, I think it is best to make straight for Toungoo. + +"How many miles is it from here, do you think?" + +Meinik went over to the natives and asked the question. "About +forty-five miles, they say; very bad travelling; all mountains, but +ten miles to the north is a road that runs straight there." + +"Then we had better follow that, Meinik. In this broken country, +and forest, we should be losing our way continually." + +"How will you go, master? On horse or foot?" + +"We will go on horseback, as far as we can; we are not likely to +meet people travelling along the road, at present. Another thing is +that, if we can get the horses as near the town as possible, they +would be very useful for, if Mr. Brooke has been wounded badly, he +may not be able to walk far. + +"You do not know whether the country near the town is open, or +whether the forests approach it closely?" + +The natives were again applied to. + +"It is a rich country there, they say; and well cultivated, for +five or six miles round the town." + +"I will go and have a talk with them, presently. It will, of +course, be necessary for me to disguise myself again." + +Meinik nodded. + +"Yes, you must do that, master." + +"Do you think that we can get two or three men to go with us, from +here?" + +"If you will pay them, master, no doubt they will be ready to go. +They are well content with the white rulers. They find that they +are not oppressed, and everything is paid for; and that the white +officers treat them kindly and well. They have lost many things, in +this affair today, and would be glad to earn a little money. + +"How many would you like to have?" + +"Four or five, Meinik. I don't exactly know, at present, what there +would be for them to do; but they could help to make fires, and +keep watch, while we are doing something. At any rate, they may be +useful. + +"Of course, I shall get the trooper out, too, if I can. Very likely +they will be confined together and, if we rescue one, we can of +course rescue the other. + +"Now I must do some writing. Get me a torch of some sort, and I +will do it while you are speaking to the natives." + +Stanley always carried a notebook and pen and ink, to take down +statements and complaints, as he rode about. He now sat down and +wrote an account of what had taken place during his absence. + +"We had no previous news of the existence of the band," he went on, +"and the natives, themselves, had certainly no fear of any attack +being imminent. Had I thought that there was the slightest risk, I +should not have made the village my headquarters; or have left Mr. +Brooke there, with only his servant and two troopers. I regret the +matter, most deeply; and am about to set off to Toungoo, with my +man. I shall, of course, go in disguise; and shall make every +endeavour to free my cousin. + +"I trust, General, that you will grant me leave for this purpose. I +am, of course, unable to say how long it may take me but, however +long, I shall persevere until I learn that my cousin is dead, or +until I am, myself, killed. I trust that in starting at once, on +the assumption that you will grant me leave, I am not committing a +breach of duty. But if so, and you feel that you cannot, under the +circumstances in which you are placed, grant leave to an officer to +be absent on private business, I inclose a formal resignation of my +commission, stating why I feel myself constrained, even in the +presence of the enemy, to endeavour to rescue my cousin from the +band that has carried him off. At any rate, it could not be said +that I resigned in order to shirk danger. + +"I sent off two days ago, by one of the natives here, a report of +my proceedings up to that date; and have now the honour to inclose +the notes I took of my investigations, today, into the conduct of +the headman of Pilboora, and my reasons for depriving him of his +office. I shall leave the two troopers of my escort here, with +orders to remain until either I return, or they receive +instructions from Prome. I am taking a few of the villagers with +me. Should anything occur to me, at Toungoo, they will bring back +the news to the troopers; and I shall leave instructions with them +to carry it, at once, to you. If I find that Mr. Brooke has been +sent on to Ava I shall, of course, follow and endeavour to effect +his rescue on the road. + +"As it is possible, General, that I may not have another +opportunity of thanking you for the many kindnesses that you have +shown me, allow me to do so, most heartily, now." + +When Stanley had concluded the letter, and written the paper +offering his resignation, and giving his reasons for so doing, he +called Meinik to him. + +"Well, Meinik, have you found men willing to go with us?" + +"Yes, master, I have got five men; two of them know Toungoo well. +All are stout fellows. I offered them the terms that you +mentioned--fifty ounces of silver, to each man, if you succeeded by +their aid in rescuing the officer. They were delighted at the +offer, which would enable them to replace everything that they have +lost. + +"I told them, of course, that if it were necessary to fight, they +would have to do so; and that, as many of their countrymen were +enlisted, as gun lascars and in other occupations, with the +English; and are, of course, exposed to the attacks of their +countrymen, they would only be doing what others have been willing +to do. + +"They said that they were ready enough to fight. You were the +government, now; and you were a good government, and they would +fight for you and, besides, as the officer was carried off from +their village, it was their duty to help to get him back. + +"One of them said, 'These men who attacked us are Burmese soldiers. +As they attack us, there is no reason why we should not attack +them.' + +"So I think, master, that you can count upon them. The Burmese have +always been fond of fighting, because fighting means booty. The +troops don't want to fight any more, because they get no booty, and +a number of them are killed. But, now that the villagers have been +forced to go to the war against their will; and have been +plundered, and many killed, by Burmese soldiers, they are quite +ready to take sides with you. Three of them have had wives or +children killed, today; and that makes them full of fight." + +"Well, you had better tell them to cook, at once, food for two or +three days. At four o'clock they are to start, through the forest, +to the road you spoke of. We will set out at the same time, on +horseback; but we shall have to make a detour, so they will be on +the road before we are. Tell them when they get there to stop, +until we come up." + +"Yes, master. It is a good thing that I rode your second horse, +yesterday, instead of Mr. Brooke's animal." + +"Yes, he is worth a good deal more than the other, Meinik, and I +should certainly have been sorry to lose him." + +"One of the men who is going with us says that he knows of the +ruins of an old temple, eight or nine miles this side of Toungoo; +and that this would be a good place for us to leave our horses. It +is very, very old; one of those built by the people who lived in +the land before we came to it, and the Burmans do not like to go +near it; so that there would be no fear of our being disturbed, +there. Even these men do not much like going there; but I told them +that no evil spirits would come, where white men were." + +"It is rather far off, Meinik; but as you say the country is +cultivated, for some distance round the town, we shall certainly +have to leave our horses some six or seven miles away; and two or +three miles will not make much difference. We can put on our +disguises there. + +"You had better take a couple of boys to look after the horses, +while we are away." + +"They would not sleep there, at night," Meinik said, doubtfully. "I +don't think the men would, either, if you were not there." + +"That would not matter, Meinik, if as you say, there is no fear of +anyone else going there." + +"Certainly, no one else will go there at night, master." + +"At any rate, if you can get two boys to go, we may as well take +them. They might go there in the day, and feed and water the +horses; and sleep some distance away, at night." + +Meinik found two boys, sixteen years old, who said that they would +go with them and, at the hour agreed on, Stanley and Meinik started +on horseback. They descended the hill to the plain at its foot and, +turning to the right, rode for some ten or twelve miles; when they +struck into the road and, following this at an easy pace they came, +in the course of another hour, upon the party of villagers sitting +by the roadside. + +The sun was just rising, and they travelled for three hours without +meeting anyone; then they drew off into the wood, at a point where +a small stream crossed the road and, after eating a meal, and +giving a good feed to the horses, lay down to sleep till the heat +of the day abated--the natives, who were all armed with spears and +swords, keeping watch by turns. + +At four o'clock they started again and, at ten, approached the spot +where, in the depth of the wood, lay the temple. The man who knew +its position declared, however, that he could not find it, at +night. Stanley had no doubt that he was really afraid to go there +but, as he did not wish to press them against their will, he said +carelessly that it made no difference if they halted there, or +close by the road, and a fire being speedily lit, they bivouacked +round it. + +Meinik had procured the necessary dyes from a village, and Stanley +was again stained, and covered with tattoo marks, as before. + +"What am I to do about your hair, master?" he asked. "It will never +do for you to go, like this." + +Stanley had not thought of this point and, for a time, was +completely at a loss. His own hair was now short, and could not +possibly be turned up. + +"The only thing that I can see," he said, after a long pause, "is +for you and the men each to cut off a lock of hair from the top of +your heads, where it will not show. The six locks would be ample; +but I don't see how you are to fasten it, below the turban." + +"There are berries we can get wax from," Meinik said. "We boil them +in water, and the wax floats at the top. With that, master, we +could fasten the hair in among yours, so that it would look all +right." + +The men had all laughed at the proposal, but willingly consented to +part with a portion of their hair. Meinik therefore proceeded to +stain Stanley's close crop black and, the first thing in the +morning, the boys went out, soon returning with a quantity of +berries. Some water was poured over them, in an earthenware pot, +and placed over the fire and, in half an hour, a thick scum of oil +gathered on the surface. Meinik skimmed it off, as fast as it +formed and, as it cooled, it solidified into a tenacious mass, +somewhat resembling cobblers' wax. The six locks of hair had +already been cut off, and the ends were smeared with the wax, and +worked in among Stanley's own hair; then a little of the hot wax +was rubbed in, and the men all declared that no one would notice +anything peculiar in his appearance. The long tresses were curled +round, at the top of the head, and a ring of muslin tied round. The +Burmans were immensely amused at the transformation that had been +wrought in Stanley's appearance; and followed him through the wood, +to the temple, without any signs of nervousness. + +The ruins were extensive. A considerable portion of the building +had been hewn out of the face of a precipitous rock, in the manner +of some Hindoo temples; and it was evident that it had been the +work of a people more closely allied to the Indian race than to the +Tartar or Chinese people, from whom the Burmese sprung. Uncouth +figures were sculptured on the walls. At these the Burmese looked +with some awe but, as Stanley laughed and joked over them, they +soon recovered their usual demeanour. + +"I am a great deal more afraid of tigers than of ghosts," Stanley +said; "a deserted place like this is just the sort of spot they +would be likely to be in. At any rate, if these caves do not go any +further into the hill--and there are no signs of their doing so--it +may be hoped that the tigers have their superstitions about it, +too. At any rate, it will be a good thing to pile a great quantity +of firewood at the entrance; and I think one of you had better stay +here, with the boys. They and the horses would be a great deal +safer here, with a fire burning; than they would be in the woods, +where a tiger might pounce upon them, at any moment. As to this +folly about spirits, it is only old women's chatter." + +The Burmese talked among themselves, and one of the men finally +agreed to stay with the boys. An hour was spent in gathering a pile +of brushwood and logs, and the man said that he and the two boys +would gather plenty more, during the day. They were, at four +o'clock, to take the horses down to the river, a mile distant, and +let them drink their fill. They had brought with them a large bag +of grain--which had been carried by the men--a quantity of +plantains, and some fowls. Therefore, the party that were to remain +would be well provided. + +Moreover, in collecting the wood a score of snakes had been killed. +Some of these and a chicken had been cooking while they were at +work and, as soon as this was eaten, they started for the town. +When they came within a mile of it, Stanley entered a plantation of +fruit trees, and Meinik and the four men went on. + +They returned, in two hours, with the news that a party of ten men +had arrived in the town, on the previous day, with two prisoners. +One, a coloured man, had been able to walk. The other, a white man, +had been carried in on a litter. They had both been lodged in the +jail. + +By this time, the conduct of the English towards the natives, at +Rangoon and the territory they occupied, had had one good effect. +Signally as they had been defeated by them, the Burmese had lost +their individual hatred of the strangers. They knew that their +wounded and prisoners always received kind treatment at their hands +and, although the court of Ava remained as arrogant and bigoted as +ever, the people in lower Burma had learned to respect their +invaders, and the few prisoners they had taken received much better +treatment than those who had been captured at the commencement of +the war. + +As soon as it was dusk, Stanley went with Meinik into the town. It +was a place of considerable size, with buildings at least equal to +those at Prome. Toungoo had formed part of the kingdom of Pegu, +before it had been subdued by the Burmese. The peculiar and +characteristic facial outline of the latter was, here, much less +strongly marked and, in many cases, entirely absent; so Stanley +felt that, even in daylight, he would pass without attracting any +attention. + +The prison was surrounded by a strong and high bamboo fence, and in +the space inclosed by this were eight or ten dwellings of the usual +wooden construction. A dozen armed men were seated by a fire in the +yard, and two sentries were carelessly leaning against the gate. + +"There should be no difficulty in getting in there with two rope +ladders--one to climb up with, and one to drop on the other side," +Stanley said. "You may be sure that most of the guard go to sleep, +at night. The first thing to ascertain is which house the prisoners +are kept in and, in the second place, how my cousin is going on. We +can do nothing until he is able to walk for a short distance. + +"Let us move round to the other side of the inclosure. It may be +that a sentry is posted at their door." + +On getting to the other side, and looking through the crevices +between the bamboos, they could make out two figures squatted by +the door of one of the houses; and had no doubt that this was the +one in which Harry Brooke was confined. + +"Now, Meinik, the first thing is for you to go and buy a rope. When +the place gets quite quiet, we will make a loop and throw it over +the top of the palisade, behind that hut; then I will climb up and +let myself down, inside, and then crawl up to the hut and see what +is going on there. If my cousin is alone, I will endeavour to speak +to him; but of course there may be a guard inside, as well as at +the door. If he is very ill, there will probably be a light." + +"Let me go, master!" + +"No, Meinik, I would rather go myself. I shall be able to judge how +he is, if I can catch a sight of him." + + + +Chapter 13: Preparing A Rescue. + + +Stanley remained where he was until Meinik returned, in half an +hour, with the rope. Stanley made a loop at one end; and then +knotted it, at distances of about a foot apart, to enable him to +climb it more easily. Then they waited until the guard fire burnt +down low, and most of the men went off into a hut a few yards +distant, three only remaining talking before the fire. Then Stanley +moved round to the other side of the palisade and, choosing a spot +immediately behind the hut where the sentries were posted, threw up +the rope. It needed many attempts before the loop caught at the top +of one of the bamboos. As soon as it did so, he climbed up. + +He found that the position was an exceedingly unpleasant one. The +bamboos were all so cut that each of them terminated in three +spikes, and so impossible was it to cross this that he had to slip +down the rope again. On telling Meinik what was the matter, the +latter at once took off his garment and folded it up into a roll, +two feet long. + +"If you lay that on the top, master, you will be able to cross." + +This time Stanley had little difficulty. On reaching the top, he +laid the roll on the bamboo spikes; and was able to raise himself +on to it and sit there, while he pulled up the rope and dropped it +on the inside. Descending, he at once began to crawl towards the +hut. As he had seen before climbing, a light was burning within, +and the window was at the back of the house. This was but some +twenty yards from the palisade and, when he reached it, he stood up +and cautiously looked in. + +The Indian trooper was seated in a chair, asleep, without his +tunic. One arm was bandaged, and a blood-stained cloth was wrapped +round his head. On a bamboo pallet, with a dark rug thrown over it, +was another figure. The lamp on the wall gave too feeble a light +for Stanley to be able to make out whether the figure lying there +was Harry, but he had no doubt that it was so. + +In a low tone he said, in Hindustani, "Wake up, man!" + +The soldier moved a little. Stanley repeated the words in a +somewhat louder tone, and the trooper sprang to his feet, and +looked round in a bewildered way. + +"Come to the window," Stanley said. "It is I, your officer." + +The man's glance turned to the window but, surprised at seeing a +Burmese peasant--as he supposed--instead of the officer, he stood +hesitating. + +"Come on," Stanley said. "I am Lieutenant Brooke." + +The soldier recognized the voice, drew himself up, made the +military salute, and then stepped to the window. + +"I have come," Stanley said, "to try and rescue Lieutenant Brooke, +and yourself. I have some friends without. How is he?" + +"He is very ill, sir. He is badly wounded, and is unconscious. +Sometimes he lies for hours without moving; sometimes he talks to +himself but, as I cannot understand the language, I know not what +he says; but sometimes he certainly calls upon you. He uses your +name often. + +"I do what I can for him, but it is very little. I bathe his +forehead with water, and pour it between his lips. Of course he can +eat nothing, but I keep the water my rice is boiled in and, when it +is cool, give it him to drink. There is some strength in it." + +"Then nothing can be done, at present," Stanley said. "Tomorrow +night I will bring some fruit. You can squeeze the juice of some +limes into a little water, and give it to him. There is nothing +better for fever. As soon as he is well enough for us to get him +through the palisades, we will have a litter ready for him, and +carry him off; but nothing can be done until then. + +"How are you treated?" + +"They give me plenty of rice, sahib, and I am at liberty to go out +into the courtyard in the daytime and, now that I know that you are +near, I shall have no fear. I have been expecting that they would +send me to Ava where, no doubt, they would kill me; but I have +thought most that, if they were to send me away from here, and +there was no one to look after the sahib, he would surely die." + +At this moment Stanley felt a hand roughly placed on his shoulder. +Turning round, he struck out with all his strength, full in a man's +face, and he fell like a log. + +"If they ask you who was here," he said hastily to the trooper, +"say that you know not who it was. A Burmese came and spoke to you, +but of course you thought that he was one of the guard." + +Then he ran to the rope, climbed up and, as he got over, pulled it +up and threw it down to Meinik--as he thought that there might be +some difficulty in shaking it off from the bamboo--then he dropped +to the ground, bringing down the pad with him. + +"Did you kill him, master?" Meinik asked, as they hurried away. "I +was watching the window, and saw you talking to someone inside; +then I saw a man suddenly come into the light and put his hand upon +you, and saw you turn round, and he fell without a sound being +heard." + +"There is no fear of his being killed, Meinik. I simply hit him +hard; and he went down, I have no doubt, stunned. It is unfortunate +but, though they may set extra guards for a time, I think they will +not believe the man's story; or at any rate, will suppose that it +was only one of the guard who, not being able to sleep, wandered +round there and looked into the hut from behind. The worst of it is +that I am afraid that there is no chance of my being able to take +my cousin some limes and other fruit, tomorrow night, as I said I +would. He is very ill, and quite unconscious." + +"That is very bad, master. I will try and take him in some fruit, +tomorrow. If they won't let me in, I will watch outside the gates +and, when one of the guard comes out, will take him aside; and I +have no doubt that, for a small bribe, he will carry in the fruit +and give it to the trooper. I wonder that they put them into that +hut with the window at the back." + +"I don't suppose they would have done so, if my cousin had not been +so ill that it was evident that he could not, for some time, +attempt to escape." + +They joined the villagers outside the town and, telling them that +there was nothing to do that night, returned to the temple. They +found the man and the two boys, sitting by a great fire, but +shivering with terror. + +"What is the matter?" Stanley asked. + +"The spirits have been making all sorts of noises outside, and +there are other noises at the end of the cave, close to the +horses." + +Stanley took a brand and went over to them. They were both munching +their grain quietly. + +"Well, you see the horses are not frightened; so you may be sure +that whatever were the noises you heard, there was nothing +unnatural about them. What were they like?" + +The question was not answered for, at that moment, a sound like a +loud deep sigh was heard overhead. The natives started back; and +even Stanley felt, for a moment, uncomfortable. + +"It is only the wind," he said. "There must be some opening above +there; and the wind makes a noise in it, just as it does in a +chimney. We will see all about it, in the morning. + +"Now, as to the noises outside." + +"They were wailing cries," the man said. + +"Pooh! They must have been tigers or leopards, or perhaps only wild +cats. No doubt they smelt you and the horses, but were too much +afraid of the fire to come any nearer. Why, you must have heard +tigers often enough to know their cries." + +"I thought myself that they were tigers," the man said, rather +shamefacedly, "but the boys said they were certain that they were +not; and I was not sure, myself, one way or the other." + +Sitting down by the fire, Stanley told the men the exact position +of the prisoners; and said that he feared it would be altogether +impossible to get Harry out, for the present. + +"I would give anything to have him here," he said; "but it would be +impossible to get him over the palisade." + +"We might cut through it, master," Meinik said. "With a sharp saw +we could cut a hole big enough, in an hour, to carry his litter +out. The only thing is, we could not get his bed through that +window." + +"We might get over that, by making a narrow litter," Stanley said, +"and lifting him from the bed on to it. The difficulty would be, +what to do with him when we got him out? As to carrying him any +distance, in his present state it would be out of the question; +besides, the guard are sure to be vigilant, for some considerable +time. I think that the best plan would be for you all to go back to +your village, tomorrow, taking the horses with you; and for one of +you to come over, every other day, for orders. Then there would be +no occasion for anyone to watch the horses. They certainly will be +of no use to us, at present, for it will be weeks before my cousin +is strong enough to ride. + +"Meinik and I will take up our abode close to the edge of the +forest, for that will save us some four or five miles' walk, each +day. The first thing in the morning, you shall go with me and +choose a spot; so that you may both know where to find us. Two of +you have got axes, and we will make a shelter in a tree; so as to +be able to sleep without fear of tigers when we go out there, +though I dare say that we shall generally sleep near the town. +However, one or other of us will always be at the spot, at midday, +on the days when you are to meet us. + +"Now that I think of it, two of you may as well stay at the +shelter, for the present, while the other three and the two boys go +home. Then there will be no occasion to take the long journey so +often. When we do get my cousin out, we shall have to take up our +abode, for a time, either here or in the forest, until he is well +enough to bear the journey." + +In the morning Stanley closely examined the roof of the cave, but +could see no opening to account for the noise that he had heard. He +had, however, no doubt that one existed somewhere. He left a man +with the two boys in charge of the horses, and went with the others +until they approached the edge of the forest. They kept along +within the trees for half a mile, so that any fire they might light +would be unseen by people travelling along the road. The men +considered this precaution needless, as they declared that no one +would venture to pass along it after nightfall; partly owing to the +fear of tigers, and partly to the vicinity of the temple. + +A suitable tree was soon fixed on; and the Burmese, now in their +element, ascended it by driving in pegs at distances of two feet +apart. Once among the high branches, they lopped off all small +boughs that would be in the way and then, descending, cut a number +of poles, and many lengths of tough creeper and, with these, they +constructed a platform among the higher branches; and on it erected +a sort of arbour, amply sufficient to hold four or five people, +lying down. This arbour would hardly be noticed, even by persons +searching; as it was, to a great extent, hidden by the foliage +beneath it. Stanley told Meinik that they had better buy some rope +for a ladder, and take out the pegs; as these might catch the eye +of a passer-by, and cause him to make a close search above. + +As soon as the work was finished, two of the men went back to the +temple, to start at once for home with their companion, the boys, +and the horses. Stanley had brought with him his pistols, the two +horse blankets, and other things that might be useful and, when +these were stored above he, with Meinik and the two men, went +towards the town. He stopped, as before, a short distance outside. +Just as it was dusk, the men returned carrying the rope that Meinik +had bought, and a store of food. With these they were sent to the +shelter, and Stanley entered the town, where he met Meinik. + +"I have sent in the fruit," the latter said. "I had no difficulty +about it. I told the first soldier who came out, after I had bought +it, that I came from the village where the white officer had been +captured by the bandits. He had been very kind to us all and, as we +knew that he had been carried off badly wounded, I had come over to +get some fruit for him; but I found that they would not let me in +at the gate. I said I would give an ounce of silver to him, if he +would hand the things to the prisoner for me. + +"He said, at once, that he would do so. He had heard that the +whites always treated their wounded prisoners very well; and that +there would be no difficulty about it, for that there was a window +at the back of the hut where he was lying, and he could easily pass +things in there without anyone noticing it. If the prisoner was, as +I said, a good man, it was only right that he should be helped. + +"I told him that I should look out for him, and might want him to +do the same, another day. I think that he was an honest fellow, and +might have passed the fruit in, even without a reward. Still, +everyone is glad to earn a little money. + +"He told me that a strange thing had happened, last night. One of +his comrades had declared that he had found a giant, standing at +the window where the prisoner was. He put his hand upon him, when +he was struck down by lightning. No one would have believed his +tale at all, if it had not been that his nose was broken. The other +prisoner had been questioned but, as he did not understand Burmese, +they could learn nothing from him. Two guards were, in future, to +be placed at the back of the house, as well as in the front." + +"That part of the business is bad, Meinik." + +"I dare say we shall be able to bribe them, master. You may be sure +that most of them are eager to get back to their own villages and, +for a few ounces of silver, they would be glad enough to help us, +and then to make their escape and go off to their homes. The man I +saw today might find one among them ready to do so, with him; +especially if their homes happened to be on the other side of the +hills, and there would then be no chance of their being seized, and +sent back again, by their headman. The sentry would only have to +let us know what night he would arrange for them both to be on +guard, together, behind the hut; then we should be able to manage +it well." + +"It would be a capital plan that, Meinik, if it could be arranged. + +"Well, it is a great comfort to know that the fruit has got in +safely. The limes, especially, will be a great help to my cousin. +Next time you see the man, you must try and get him to find out how +he is going on." + +For a fortnight, Stanley remained in the forest. Meinik met the +soldier every other day, and sent in fruit and, at the end of the +ten days, he heard that the prisoner had recovered his senses. It +was said that, as soon as he was well enough to move, he was to be +sent to Ava. + +"Now you had better begin to sound the man, as to his willingness +to aid him to escape." + +"I have very little doubt about it, master, for I have already +learned that his home is on the other side of the hills. He went +down with Bandoola; and returned after his defeat, with a number of +others, travelling up the bank of the Pegu river. If they had not +had their military chief with them, they would have started +straight for home. But they were marched here, and have been kept +on duty in the town, ever since. He has heard how well off the +people are on the other side of the hills, under English rule; so I +feel sure that he will be glad to escape, if he sees a chance of +getting off." + +"That is good. In the first place, let him know that the other +English officer, who was at the village with the one they captured, +had said that he would be ready to pay well anyone who would aid in +his escape. If he says that he would willingly do so, if he also +could get away, tell him that one man would be of no use but that, +if he could get another to join him, so that they could both go on +guard together behind the house, it could be managed. + +"But say that, in the first place, I must myself speak to the white +officer, and learn exactly how he is, and whether he can endure a +journey as far as this tree, or the temple--whichever we may decide +upon as best. When I have seen him, I will send for the other men +from the village. I am in no hurry to get him away, for the longer +he stays quiet, the better. But at any moment the governor may +decide that he is sufficiently recovered to be carried, and may +send him off to Ava, under a strong escort. Therefore, although we +will put off moving him as long as possible, we must not run the +risk of his being sent away." + +Four days later, Meinik said that the man had arranged with another +to join him, and that both would be on duty behind the hut, that +evening, between nine and midnight. Accordingly, at ten o'clock +Stanley arrived, with Meinik and the two villagers, at the +palisade. Meinik had insisted upon accompanying him to the hut. + +"I believe that the man is to be trusted, master; indeed I am sure +he is, but I do not know the second man. He may have pretended to +accept the offer, only on purpose to betray his comrade, and to +obtain honour and reward for preventing the escape of the white +man. Therefore, I must be with you, in case you are attacked. Our +other two men may be useful, to give the alarm, if a party is sent +round to cut us off." + +Stanley, who had brought a horse blanket with him to lay on the top +of the palisade, was the first to drop into the inclosure. Meinik +followed him closely. Nothing had been said to the guard as to the +white officer, of whom Meinik had spoken, being himself of the +party; and Stanley had purposely left his pistols behind him, lest +he should be tempted to use them. In case he was attacked, he +carried a spear and a long Burmese knife. + +Meinik had begged to be allowed to go forward first, while Stanley +remained by the rope. He pointed out that some change might +possibly have been made, and that other men might have been placed +on sentry. + +"I know you, master," he said; "if you got there, and found two +strangers, and they attacked you, you would fight; then they would +give the alarm, and others would come up before you could cross the +palisade. I shall steal up. When I am close, I shall make a noise +like the hiss of a snake. If my men are both there, they will +repeat the sound. If they are not, and one comes forward to look +for and kill the snake, I shall slay him before he has time to +utter a sound. If the other runs forward at the sound of his fall, +I shall kill him, also. + +"If no alarm is given, you can come forward and speak to your +cousin. If there is an alarm, you must climb the rope. They will +not know which way I have run, and I shall have plenty of time to +get over the palisade and pull up the rope; then they will think +that the guards have been killed by some of their comrades." + +"I hope no such misfortune will happen," Stanley said, gravely, +"for there would then be no chance, whatever, of our getting him +away. He would probably be moved to some other place, and our one +hope would be that we might rescue him on the road; which would be +a difficult matter, indeed, if he were sent, as he certainly would +be, under a strong escort. However, your plan is no doubt the best +for, if I were killed or captured, there would be an end of any +chance of his being rescued." + +Meinik crawled forward and, in a minute or two, Stanley heard a low +hissing sound, followed by two others. He walked forward a step or +two to meet Meinik, as he came back. + +"It is all right, master; you can go on fearlessly." + +Meinik returned with him to the window, and posted himself outside, +standing in the shadow; while Stanley stepped in through the open +casement which, indeed, was provided only with a shutter outside. +This would ordinarily have been closed but, owing to the illness of +the prisoner, and the strong desire of the governor that he should +live to be sent to Ava, it had been opened to allow a free passage +of air. + +The trooper sprung from his couch, as Stanley made a slight sound +before attempting to enter; but Stanley said, in Hindustani: + +"Silence! It is I, Mr. Brooke." + +The trooper stared doubtfully at the dark, tattooed, half-naked +figure. + +"It is I, Runkoor, but I am disguised. I was like this when I spoke +to you through the window a fortnight since, but you could not then +see my figure. + +"Are you awake, Harry?" he asked in English, as he approached the +pallet. + +"Yes, I am awake; at least I think so. Is it really you, Stanley?" + +"It is I, sure enough, man," Stanley replied, as he pressed the +thin hands of the invalid. "Did not Runkoor tell you that I had +been here before?" + +But Harry had broken down, altogether. The surprise and delight was +too much for him, in his weak state. + +"Of course," Stanley went on quietly, "I knew that he could not +speak English, but I thought that he might make signs." + +"He did make a sign. Each time he gave me fruit, he said 'Sahib +Brooke,' pointed outside, and waved his arms about; but I could not +make head or tail of what he meant. Why he should keep on repeating +my name, each time he gave me the fruit, was a complete puzzle for +me. As to the signs that he made, it seemed to me that he had gone +off his head. I have been too weak to think it over, so I gave up +worrying about it; and it never once struck me that it was you who +sent me the fruit. + +"What an awful figure you are!" + +"Never mind about that, Harry. I have come in to see how strong you +are. I have bribed the two guards stationed behind." + +"I can just sit up in bed to take my food, Stanley, that is all. I +could not walk a step to save my life." + +"I did not expect you to walk. What I want to know is whether you +are strong enough to be carried a few miles, on a litter. I have +five men from the village where we were, and they can cut through +the palisading behind the hut. I want to give you as long a time as +possible; but I am afraid that, any day, the governor may have you +taken out and sent in a litter to Ava, under a strong escort." + +"I could bear being carried out, no doubt; but if I could not, I +should think it would do me no harm, so long as my wounds do not +break out afresh. I suppose the worst that could happen to me would +be that I should faint, before I got to the end of the journey. + +"Are you sure, old man, that this is not a dream?" + +"Quite certain; if you were well enough, I would give you a sharp +pinch. If you are willing to venture, I will make my preparations +at once. I have to send to the village; but in three days I shall +be ready and, the first night after that the men manage to be on +guard together behind, we shall be here. It may be a week, it may +be more but, at any rate, don't worry about it if they take you +away suddenly. I shall try to get you out of their hands, somehow." + +"My dear Stanley," Harry said, with a feeble laugh, "do you know +that you are spoiling your chance of an earldom?" + +"You may take it that if you don't succeed to the title, old +fellow, I sha'n't; for if you go under, I shall, too. + +"Now goodbye; it would be fatal were I to be caught here. Try to +get yourself as strong as you can, but don't let them notice that +you are doing so." + +Without giving Harry time to reply, Stanley pressed his hand and +left his bedside. He paused for a minute, to inform the trooper of +the plans for the escape, and then he got through the window. +Meinik joined him at once and, without a word being spoken, they +crossed the palisade, threw down the rope and blankets, and dropped +after them to the ground. + +On their way back to their tree, Stanley told the two men that the +officer was better; and that the next morning, at daybreak, one of +them must start for the village to fetch their three comrades. The +boys were also to come back with him, as they were big fellows and +carried spears; and might, as Stanley thought, be useful either in +a fight or in assisting to carry Harry. + +On the following morning, after the man had started, Stanley went +with Meinik to examine the temple more closely than he had done +before. He thought that it would be a far better hiding place than +their hut in the tree. There would certainly be a hot pursuit, and +the next day they might be discovered, whether in the temple or in +the tree; but in the latter they would be powerless to defend +themselves, for the Burmese, with their axes, would be able to fell +it in a few minutes; whereas in the temple a stout defence might be +made for a time. Moreover, the rock chambers would be far cooler, +in the middle of the day, than the hut. + +His chief object in visiting the temple was to find a chamber with +a narrow entrance, that could be held by half a dozen men against a +number of foes; and it was desirable, if possible, to find one so +situated that they might, in case of necessity, retreat into +another chamber, or into the open air. Meinik was so confident, in +the white man's power to combat even evil spirits, that he +approached the temple with Stanley without betraying any +nervousness. They had provided themselves with some torches of +resinous wood, and Meinik carried a couple of brands from their +fire. + +The chamber they had before been in was apparently the largest in +the temple, but there were several other openings in the rock. + +"That is the entrance we will try first," Stanley said, pointing to +one some ten feet from the ground. "You see there were once some +steps leading up to it. No doubt, where we are standing there was a +temple built against the face of that rock; and probably that +doorway led into one of the priests' chambers." + +It was necessary to pile three or four blocks of stone on the top +of the two steps that alone remained intact, in order to enable +them to reach the entrance. + +"Let me light the torches before you go in," Meinik said. "There +may be snakes." + +"That is hardly likely, Meinik. You see, the face of the rock has +been chiselled flat, and I don't think any snake could climb up to +that entrance." + +"Perhaps not, master, but it is best to be ready for them." + +They lighted two torches, and passed through the doorway. There was +an angry hiss, some distance away. + +"That is a snake, sure enough, Meinik. I wonder how it got here." + +Holding their torches above their heads, they saw that the chamber +was some fourteen feet wide and twenty long. In the corner to the +left something was lying and, above it, a dark object was moving +backwards and forwards. + +"It is a big boa," Meinik said. "Now, master, do you take the two +torches in one hand, and have your knife ready in the other. If it +coils round you, cut through it at once. This is a good place for +fighting it, for there is nothing here for it to get its tail +round; and a boa cannot squeeze very hard, unless he does that." + +Stanley, feeling that in a combat of this sort the Burman would be +perfectly at home, while he himself knew nothing about it, did as +he was told; determining to rush in, should it attack his follower. + +"You can advance straight towards him, master. I will steal round. +He will be watching you, and I may get a cut at him, before he +notices me." + +Illustration: The great snake moved his head higher and higher, +hissing angrily. + +Stanley moved slowly forward. As he did so, the great snake moved +its head higher and higher, hissing angrily, with its eyes fixed on +the torches. Stanley did not take his gaze from it; but advanced, +grasping his knife. He knew that the boa's bite was harmless, and +that it was only its embrace that was to be feared. + +He was within some eight feet of the reptile, when there was a +spring. The snake's head disappeared and, in a moment, it was +writhing, twisting, and lashing its tail so quickly that his eyes +could hardly follow its contortions. + +"Stand back, master," Meinik shouted. "If its tail strikes you, it +might do you an injury. It is harmless, otherwise. I have cut its +head off." + +Stanley stepped back a pace or two, and stood gazing in awe at the +tremendous writhing of the headless snake. + +"It is a monster, Meinik," he said. + +"It is a big snake, master. Indeed, I should say that it must be +about forty feet long, and it is as thick as my body. It would be +more than a match for a tiger." + +"Well, I hope there are not many more of them about, Meinik." + +"That depends, master. It may have its mate, but it is more likely +there will be no other. It would eat any smaller ones of its own +kind, of course; but there may be some small poisonous ones about." + +As the writhing of the snake ceased, Stanley looked round and saw a +narrow doorway, in the corner opposite that in which it had been +lying. + +"Here is a passage, Meinik. Let us see where it goes to." + +Meinik had, by this time, lighted two more torches. + +"The more light the better," he said, "when you are looking for +snakes," and, holding them in one hand and his knife in the other, +he passed through the doorway, which was about four feet high. + +Stanley followed him. The apartment was similar to the last, but +narrower; and was lighted by an opening not more than a foot +square. + +"See, Meinik, there is a staircase, in the corner facing us." + +The steps were very narrow, but in perfect preservation. Without +staying to examine the room, Meinik led the way up; examining every +step carefully, and holding the knife in readiness to strike. They +mounted some forty steps, and then entered a room about ten feet +square. Except a window, some eighteen inches by three feet, there +was no apparent exit from the chamber. + +"I should think that there must be some way out of this place, +Meinik. Why should they have taken the trouble to cut that long +flight of steps through the rock, just to reach this miserable +little chamber?" + +Meinik shook his head. The ways of these ancient builders were +beyond him. + +"There must be an outlet somewhere, if we could but find it. +Besides, we have not found where the snake came in, yet." + +"He could have come in at the door, master. A small snake could not +have climbed up, but that big fellow could rear his head up and +come in, quite easily. We have found no little snakes at all." + +"Well, that may be so, but I still think that there must be some +way out from here. Why should men go to the labour of cutting this +long stair, and excavating this chamber here, without any reason +whatever? Let us look through the window, Meinik." + +It was a passage, rather than a window; for the rock face had been +left four feet in thickness. Crawling out, Stanley saw that he was +fifty feet above the foot of the cliff. A yard below him was a +ledge of rock, some two feet wide. It was level, and had deep +grooves cut, at regular intervals, across it. He had no doubt that +the roof of the outside temple had started from this point; and +that the grooves were made for the ends of massive rafters, of teak +or stone. At that time the passage to the chamber that he had left +was, doubtless, used for an exit on to the flat roof. + +Stepping on to the ledge, he called Meinik to him. + +"Now, Meinik," he said, "we will follow this ledge. There may be +some way up from it." + +Walking with a good deal of care, Stanley made his way along to a +point where the ledge stopped, abruptly. Looking down, he saw the +remains of a wall of solid masonry, and perceived that he had been +correct in his surmise as to the purpose of the ledge. Then they +turned, and went back to the other end of the ledge. A few feet +before they reached this, Meinik--who was now leading the +way--stopped. + +"Here is a passage, master." + +The entrance was about the same size as that through which they had +stepped out on to the ledge but, instead of going straight in, it +started upwards. + +"Another flight of steps, Meinik. I am beginning to hope that we +shall find some way out, at the top. If we can do so, it will make +us safe. We could defend those stairs and the entrance for a long +time and, when we wanted to get away, we could make quietly off, +without anyone knowing that we had left." + + + +Chapter 14: In The Temple. + + +They went up the flight of steps for a considerable distance, then +they found the passage blocked by a number of great stones. Stanley +uttered an exclamation of disgust. + +"It has fallen in," he said. "No doubt we are near the top of the +rock. Either the staircase was roofed in, or there was a building +erected over the entrance; and either the roof or building, +whichever it was, has fallen in. That is very unlucky. When we go +down, we will climb up the hill and see if we can discover anything +about it. + +"With plenty of food and water," he went on, as they descended into +the lowest chamber, "one could hold this place for any time." + +"Yes, master, one could store away the food; but where should we +store the water? We might bring skins in that would last us for a +week, perhaps two weeks, but after that?" + +"After that we should make our way off, somehow, Meinik," Stanley +said, confidently. "Well, there is no doubt that this is the place +to shelter in. They are less likely to find us here than anywhere +and, if they do find us, we can defend ourselves stoutly. I should +say, too, that if we think it over, we ought to be able to hit upon +some plan for making noises that would frighten them. You know how +scared the man and the two boys were, at that sighing sound in the +other chamber. We certainly could make more alarming noises than +that." + +Meinik nodded. + +"That we could, master. With some reeds of different sizes I could +make noises, some as deep as the roar of a tiger, and others like +the singing of a bird." + +"Then we will certainly bring some reeds in here with us, Meinik. I +don't suppose they will mind, in the daytime, what sounds they +hear; but at night I don't think even their officers would care to +move about here, if we can but make a few noises they do not +understand. + +"Well, for the present we have done our work here; and you had best +go off with the Burman to buy food, to serve in case of a siege. +You had better go to some of the cultivators' houses, near the edge +of the wood, for rice and fruit. If you can get the food there, you +will be able to make two or three journeys a day, instead of one. + +"But, before we start back, we will climb round to the top of the +hill, and see what has happened to shut up the staircase." + +It took them a quarter of an hour's climbing, through the forest +and undergrowth, before they reached the upper edge of the rock +wall in which the chambers had been excavated. It had evidently, in +the first place, been a natural cliff for, when on the ledge, +Stanley had noticed that while below that point the rock was as +smooth as a built wall, above it was rough, and evidently untouched +by the hand of man. Following the edge of the cliff, until standing +as nearly as they could guess above the entrance to the steps, they +walked back among the trees. At a distance of some thirty yards, +they came upon a ruin. It was built of massive stones, like those +which strewed the ground where the temple had stood. A great tree +rose on one side, and it was evident that its growth had, in the +first place, overthrown the wall at this point. Climbers and shrubs +had thrust their roots in between the blocks that had been but +slightly moved, by the growth of the tree; and had, in time, forced +them asunder; and so, gradually, the whole building had collapsed. + +"This tree must be a very old one," Stanley said, looking up at it, +"for it is evident that this wall was thrown down a great many +years ago." + +"Very old, master. It is one of our hardest woods, and such trees +live, they say, five or six hundred years. There are some which are +known to be even older than that." + +"Well, it is clear that the staircase came up here; but we have no +means of knowing how far the point we reached is below this. I +should say that the stones we saw are the remains of the pavement +and roof, for you see these great blocks that formed the walls +don't go as far as the middle, where there is a great depression. +Still, of course, the steps may have come up on one side or the +other, and not just in the middle of this little temple--for, no +doubt, it was a temple. + +"Now, you see, the reason for the steps up to that little square +room are explained. Probably those three chambers were the +apartments of the principal priests, and from them they could +either go out on to the roof of the temple; or could, by taking the +upper staircase to this point, leave or enter without observation. + +"Now, let us be off." + +On arriving at their tree shelter, they found that the Burman had +got a meal ready and, after partaking of this, Meinik, with the +man, started to buy provisions. It was fortunate that Stanley had, +before starting from Prome, drawn some twenty pounds' worth of +silver from the paymaster. He had expected to be away for three or +four weeks and, during that time, would have had to buy provisions +for himself, Harry, and the four troopers; and might possibly have +occasion for money for other matters. He had not paid the men from +the village, for he knew that one of these would willingly +accompany him to Prome, to receive payment for them all. + +A very small amount of silver sufficed for the purchase of a +considerable quantity of food in Burma. Fruit, of which many kinds +grew wild in the woods, was extremely cheap; as was rice and grain. +Therefore as yet, with the exception of the small sum expended in +Toungoo, his money was virtually untouched. + +The two Burmans made three journeys before nightfall and returned, +each time, with large baskets of fruit, grain, and rice. On the +following morning, they went into the town and bought six of the +largest sized water skins--such as are carried for the use of the +troops in India, one on each side of a bullock. As soon as they +returned with these, they started for the temple. At a stream about +a hundred yards from the entrance they partially filled one of the +skins and, placing a strong bamboo through the straps sewn on it +for the purpose, Meinik and the Burmans carried it to the temple +and, with Stanley's assistance, lifted it into the lower chamber. +The others were, one by one, placed beside it; then water was +carried in the smaller skins and poured in, until they were all as +full as they could hold. + +"There is water enough to last us for a month, if needs be," +Stanley said as, after securely tying up the mouths, they laid the +skins down, side by side. + +The smaller mussucks were then filled and placed with the large +skins; and then, having done a long day's work, they returned to +their tree just as the sun was setting. The four men and two boys +were already there, they having done the sixty miles from the +village without a halt. They had already cooked some rice and some +slices of venison--which Meinik had brought, with the water skins, +from the town that morning--and were now lying smoking their cigars +with placid contentment. + +For the next six days Meinik went to the town every afternoon. On +his return on the last evening, he said that the guard had told him +that the governor had paid a visit to the prison, that day, and had +seen the white captive; and had decided that he was now well enough +to travel, and that in two days' time he was to start for Ava, the +court having sent down an urgent order that he should be carried +there as soon as he was well enough to bear the fatigue. + +"Then tomorrow we must get him out," Stanley said. "Will our two +men be on duty?" + +"Yes, master, they have not been on since the last night we were +there. They will form the second watch, and will go on guard at +midnight. I have bought two very sharp saws, and have cut two +strong bamboos for the litter." + +This was constructed the next day. It was very simple, being formed +by sewing a blanket strongly to the two bamboos. Two slighter +bamboos, each four feet long, were tied loosely to the main poles. +These were to be lashed across, as soon as they had got beyond the +palisade, so as to keep the poles three feet apart--which, as the +blanket was four feet, from pole to pole, would allow it to bag +comfortably. The cross pieces could not be attached until they were +beyond the palisade; for the window was but two feet wide, and it +was therefore proposed to make the gap through the palisade the +same width, only. + +Late in the evening they entered the town, and sat down in a +deserted corner until the time came for them to begin their work. +At last Meinik said that, by the stars, it was already past +midnight; and they then proceeded to the spot where they had before +climbed the palisade. Here they at once set to work. The saws were +well oiled and, in a very few minutes, five bamboos were cut away, +at the level of the ground and six feet above it. As the stockade +was bound together by cross pieces, behind, the other portions of +the bamboos remained in their places. + +Meinik and Stanley went first, followed by three of the Burmans, +one of whom carried the litter. The other two Burmans with the +boys, remained on guard at the opening. All were barefooted, except +that Stanley wore a pair of the lightest leather sandals. They went +noiselessly up to the window; the guard, as before, responding to +Meinik's hiss. Without a word, one after another entered the +chamber. The trooper had been sitting at the table, evidently +anxiously expecting their arrival. + +Stanley went up to the bed. + +"Are you better, Harry?" he asked, in a whisper. + +"Better, but still weak." + +Everything had been arranged beforehand. The litter was laid down +on the ground, with the poles as far apart as possible. Then +Stanley made a sign, to the trooper, to take one end of the rug on +which Harry was lying; while he took the other. The Burmans ranged +themselves on each side; and the blanket was lifted up, with the +occupant and the pillow composed of his clothes, and laid quietly +on to the blanket of the litter. Then two Burmans went outside, +while the other four men lifted the poles and carried one end to +the window. + +The Burmans outside held the ends well above their heads, Stanley +and the trooper raising their hands similarly. The other Burmans +then crawled, under it, out of the window. As the litter was moved +forward through the window, they took the places of Stanley and the +trooper at the poles, and silently moved on towards the palisade. +Stanley and Meinik followed, joined by the two Burmese guards. + +Not the slightest sound was made, as the eight men crossed the +short distance to the palisade and passed through the opening where +the others, spear in hand, were awaiting them; ready to rush in and +take part in the fray, should an alarm be given. Stanley breathed a +great sigh of relief, as they passed out. A few paces further they +halted, and the cross pieces were lashed to the poles. + +"Thank God that you are out, Harry!" Stanley said, as soon as they +did this. "Has it hurt you much?" + +"Nothing to speak of," Harry replied. "You managed it marvellously. +Am I really outside the place altogether?" + +"Yes, fairly out. You will be more comfortable when we have lashed +these cross pieces. You will not be lying, then, at the bottom of a +bag; as you are now." + +When the work was completed, they proceeded at a rapid pace; for +Harry's weight, reduced by fever as he had been, was a trifle to +his bearers. The others followed close behind and, in a quarter of +an hour, they were well beyond the town. Stanley spoke to Harry +once or twice, but received no answer; so he had no doubt that his +cousin had dozed quietly off to sleep. The gentle motion of the +litter would be likely to have that effect; especially as Harry had +probably been lying awake, for the last night or two, listening for +the friends who might arrive at any time. + +When they reached the confines of the forest the torches, which had +been carried by the boys, were all lit; and each carried two--with +the exception of the bearers, who had but one each--while all kept +close together round the litter. They waved their torches as they +went and, although they heard the cries of several tigers in the +forest, they had no fear of being attacked; as so many waving +lights would deter the most hungry beast from venturing near. + +Once in the chamber at the temple, the litter was laid down on a +pile of reeds and leaves that had been gathered the day before, +together with a great store of brushwood and logs. Harry still +sleeping quietly. In a short time a bright fire was blazing and, +with this and the light of the torches, the chamber assumed quite a +cheerful appearance. On the way, Stanley had spoken to the two +guards, thanked them for their service, and assured them that they +would receive the reward promised by Meinik. + +"I am the British officer," he said, "who was at the village with +my friend, though I was absent when he was carried off. As you see, +I am disguised." + +Both had shown signs of uneasiness, when they approached the +temple; but Meinik had assured them that the spirits would not +venture to approach a party having a white man with them, and that +a night had already been passed in the temple, without any harm +coming of it. A meal, consisting of slices of venison, was at once +prepared and, when this was eaten, and the whole party had lighted +cigars, their spirits rose at the success of the enterprise. The +soldiers, however, had been disappointed at hearing that there was +going to be a stay for some little time there, to enable the +wounded man to gain strength. + +"We may not stop long," Stanley said; "but, you see, with the +litter we could not travel fast; and you may be sure by this time +the alarm has been given for, when they came to relieve you at the +end of three hours, it would be found that you were missing; and +then they would, at once, discover that the captives had gone, too. +By daybreak the whole garrison will be out. How many are there of +them?" + +"There are three thousand men, in the town," the guard said. "After +a party of your soldiers came within a short distance of it, two +months ago, fifteen hundred men were added to the garrison." + +"Well, you see, with three thousand men they could scour all the +woods and, if they overtook us, we should be unable to make any +defence. Here, we may hope that they will not discover us; but if +they do we can make a desperate resistance for, as only one man can +enter that door at a time, it would be next to impossible for them +to force their way in. You have your guns, and I have a brace of +pistols and, as all the others have spears, it will be as much as +the three thousand men could do, to get in through that door. If +they did, there is a still narrower door in the corner to defend; +and beyond that there is a long, narrow, steep flight of stairs, +that one man could hold against a host. + +"The first thing in the morning, we will carry our stores to the +upper chamber. We have water and rice enough to last us for a +month, if we are careful; so that, although I hope they won't find +us, I shall not be at all afraid of our beating them off, if they +do so." + +As soon as it was daylight, the stones that had been added to the +steps at the doorway were flung down; and then, by their united +efforts, the two remaining steps were removed. Then they helped +each other up, the last man being aided by two of his comrades, +above. + +"There," Stanley said; "if they do come to search for us, they are +not likely to suspect that we have got a badly wounded man up here. +They may search the big chamber that we were in, before, and any +others there may be on the same level; but this narrow entrance, +ten feet above them, is scarcely likely to attract their attention. +If it does, as I said, we must fight it out; but it will be a +wonderfully hard nut for them to crack." + +He then ordered the men to carry all the stores to the upper +chamber. Just as they began the work, there was a slight movement +on the bed. Stanley at once went up to it. Harry was looking round, +in a bewildered way. + +"Well, Harry, how are you feeling? You have had a capital sleep." + +"Oh, is it you, Stanley? I was not quite sure but that I was +dreaming. Where am I? I must have gone off to sleep, directly we +started; for I don't remember anything, after you spoke to me when +they were making the hammock more comfortable." + +"You are in a temple--some four or five thousand years old, I +should say--and this is a rock chamber. The temple itself is in +ruins. We are ten miles from Toungoo, and shall wait here till the +pursuit for you has slackened. In another week, you will be more +fit to move than you are, at present. I should not like to carry +you far, as you are now. Besides, if we had pushed on, they would +have been sure to overtake us; for these fellows can run like +hares." + +"But why should not they find us here, Stanley?" + +"Well, of course they may do so, but the entrance to this chamber +is ten feet above the ground; and another thing is, they have all +sorts of superstitions about the place. Nothing would induce them +to approach it, after nightfall; and even in the daytime, they +don't like coming near it. Lastly, if they do find us, it will take +them all their time to force their way in. I have five men, and two +young fellows quite capable of fighting; then there are your two +guards, Meinik, the trooper, and myself. So you see, we muster +twelve. We have two guns, and a brace of pistols, and spears for us +all; and if we cannot defend that narrow passage, against any +number of Burmans, we shall deserve our fate. + +"Besides, there is another, and even narrower door, in the corner +behind you. They would have to force that; and in the chamber +beyond there is a narrow, straight staircase, some forty feet high, +which a man with an axe ought to be able to hold against an army. +They are taking the stores up there, now. We have got provisions +and water for a month. When everything is straight, there we shall +carry you up and, unless they sit down in front of this place and +regularly starve us out, we are as safe as if we were in Prome." + +"I wish to goodness you had that hideous dye off you, Stanley. I +know it is you by your voice but, what with the colour, and all +that tattooing, and your extraordinary hair, I don't know you in +the least." + +"I am in just the same disguise as that in which I made my way down +from Ava," Stanley laughed. "I felt very uncomfortable, at first, +with nothing on but this short petticoat thing; but I have got +accustomed to it, now, and I am bound to say that it is cool and +comfortable. + +"Now, tell me about your wounds." + +"They are not very serious, Stanley. I had a lick across the head +with a sword--that was the one that brought me down--and a slice +taken out of my arm from the elbow, nearly up to the shoulder. Also +a spear-wound in the side; but that was a trifle, as it glanced off +the ribs. If I had been left as I fell, and somebody had bound up +my wounds at once, I should have been all right by this time. The +fellows did bandage them up, to some extent; but the movement of +the litter set them off bleeding again, and I fancy that I lost +pretty nearly all the blood in my body. I think that it was pure +weakness, rather than fever, that kept me unconscious so long; for +I gather, from the pantomime of the trooper, that I must have been +nearly a fortnight unconscious." + +"Yes, you were certainly so when I came the first time, Harry; but +I think, perhaps, on the whole, it is lucky that you were. You +would probably have had a great deal more fever, if you had not +been so very weak; and if you had escaped that, and had gone on +well, you might have been sent off to Ava before I could get all +the arrangements made for your escape." + +"Tell me all about it," Harry said. "It seems to me wonderful how +you managed it." + +Stanley told him the whole story. By the time that he had finished, +the stores had all been taken upstairs; and the fire most carefully +extinguished, as the smoke would at once have betrayed them. The +cross pieces of the litter had been taken off, to allow Harry to be +carried in through the door, and he was now lifted. Two of the men +took off their cloths, and wrapped the materials of the bed into +these, carrying them up at once. As soon as they had gone on, Harry +was slowly and carefully taken to the upper chamber, and laid down +again on the bed. Stanley took his place beside him, and the rest +of the party went down to the lower room; having received the +strictest orders not to show themselves near the entrance, and not +to smoke until well assured that their pursuers must have passed on +ahead. + +The bamboos of the litter were converted into a rough ladder and, +on this, Meinik took his post at the little window in the second of +the lower rooms. Owing to the immense thickness of the rock wall, +he did not get an extensive view, but he could see the path by +which anyone coming up through the forest would approach the +temple. It was now about half-past seven and, by this time, the +pursuers might be at hand; in ten minutes, indeed, distant shouts +could be heard, and Stanley at once went down and joined the men +below. + +He placed himself in the line of the doorway. As the wall here was +four feet thick, the room was in semi-darkness and, standing well +back, he was certain that his figure could not be perceived by +anyone standing in the glare of sunshine outside. The sounds grew +louder and louder; and in a minute or two an officer, followed by +some twenty men, emerged from the trees. All paused, when they saw +the temple. The men would have drawn back at once; but the officer +shouted to them to advance, although showing small inclination to +do so, himself. + +They were still standing, irresolute, when a superior officer on +horseback, followed by some fifty footmen, came up the path. He +shouted orders for them to search the temple and, as the fear of +him was even greater than their dread of the spirits, the whole of +the men made their way over the fallen stones, and up to the face +of the rock. They first entered the chamber where the horses had +been stabled. The officer who had first arrived went in with his +men and, coming out, reported to his senior that there had been a +fire made, and that some horses had also been there; but that three +weeks, or a month, must have passed since then. + +"Are you sure of that?" + +"Quite certain, my lord. It is extraordinary that anyone should +have dared to enter there, still less to stable horses when, as +everyone knows, the temple is haunted by evil spirits." + +"I care nothing for spirits," the officer said. "It is men we are +in search of. Go and look into any other chambers there may be." + +At this moment a deep, mournful sound was heard. Louder and louder +it rose, and then gradually died away. The soldiers stood as if +paralysed. Even the high official--who had been obliged to leave +his horse, and make his way across the fallen blocks on +foot--stepped back a pace, with an expression of awe. He soon +recovered himself, and shouted angrily to the men to go on. But +again the dirge-like noise rose, louder and louder. It swelled, and +then as gradually died away; but this time with a quavering +modulation. + +The men looked up, and round. Some gazed at the upper part of the +rock, some straight ahead, while others turned round and faced the +forest. + +"Search!" the officer shouted, furiously. "Evil spirits or no evil +spirits, not a man shall stir from here, until the place is +searched." + +Then rose a shrill, vibrating sound, as if of eerie laughter. Not +even the officer's authority, or the fear of punishment, could +restrain the soldiers. With cries of alarm, they rushed across the +ruins and plunged into the forest; followed, at a rate which he +tried in vain to make dignified, by the officer who, as soon as he +reached his horse, leapt upon it and galloped away. + +The Burmese keenly appreciate a joke and, as soon as the troops had +fled, the villagers and guards inside the temple threw themselves +down on the ground, and roared with laughter. Stanley at once made +his way into the upper room. + +"Splendidly done, Meinik! It was like the note of an organ. +Although I knew what you were going to do, I felt almost startled, +myself, when that deep note rose. No wonder they were frightened." + +"Well, at any rate, master, we are safe for the present." + +"For the present, no doubt, Meinik; but I question if we sha'n't +hear of them, again. That officer was a determined-looking fellow +and, though he was scared, too, he stuck to it like a man." + +"That is the governor of the town, master. I saw him carried +through the streets in his chair. Everyone was bending to the +ground, as he passed. He was a famous general, at one time; and +they say that he is likely to command a part of the army, again, +when fighting begins." + +"Well, I think that we shall hear of them again, Meinik. I don't +suppose that he really thought that we were here for, certainly, no +Burman would take up his abode in this place, even to save his +life. They will push on the chase through the woods all day and, by +that time, they will feel sure that they would have overtaken us, +had we gone straight on. Then I should not be at all surprised if +he tries here, again." + +"Perhaps he will, master. Like enough, he will chop off the heads +of some of the men that ran away, and pick out some of his best +troops for the search. Still, I hope he won't think of it." + +Stanley shook his head. + +"I hope so, too, Meinik. There is one thing about which I feel +certain--if he does find us here, he will stay here or, at any +rate, leave some troops here, until he gets us. He would know that +he would get into trouble, at Ava, for letting the prisoners +escape; and it would be all important for him to recapture them. + +"Now we are up here, Meinik, we will go and have a look at that +upper staircase, again. If we are besieged, that is our only hope +of safety." + +They again went along the ledge, and up the staircase. Stanley +examined the stones that blocked the passage, for some time, and at +last exclaimed: + +"There, Meinik, look along by the side of this stone. I can see a +ray of light. Yes, and some leaves. I don't think they are more +than thirty feet above us!" + +Meinik applied his eye to the crevice. + +"I see them, master. Yes, I don't think those leaves are more than +that distance away." + +"That is what I came to look for," Stanley said. "It was evident +that this rubbish could only be the stones of the root, and +pavement over the depression in the middle of the ruin; and that +these could not block up this staircase very far. The question is, +will it be possible to clear them away? Evidently it will be +frightfully dangerous work. One might manage to get one stone out, +at a time, in safety. But at any moment, the loosening of one stone +might bring a number of others down, with a run; and anyone on this +narrow staircase would be swept away like a straw." + +Meinik agreed as to the danger. + +"Well, we need not think it over now, Meinik; but if we are really +besieged, it is by this way that we must escape, if at all. We must +hope that we sha'n't be beset; but if we are, we must try here. I +would rather be killed, at once, by the fall of a stone on my head, +than tortured to death." + +Meinik nodded, and they descended the stairs, put out the torches +that they had used there, and returned along the ledge to the +chamber where Harry was lying. + +"So Meinik scared them away," the latter said, as Stanley sat down +beside him. "I could not think what he was going to do when he came +up here with that long reed, as thick as my leg. He showed it to +me, and I saw that it had a sort of mouthpiece fixed into it; and +he made signs that he was going to blow down it. When he did, it +was tremendous and, as it got louder and louder, I put my hands to +my ears. Everything seemed to quiver. The other row--that +diabolical laughing noise--he made with a smaller one. It was +frightful; but the big note was more like a trombone, only twenty +times louder. + +"Well, do you think that we have done with them?" + +"I hope so, Harry. At any rate, you can be assured that they will +never fight their way up here and, long before our provisions are +finished, I have no doubt that I shall be able to hit on some plan +of escape." + +The day passed quietly. The woods were as silent as usual. The +Burmans were all in high spirits at the success of Meinik's horn. +When it became dark, they hung a blanket before the entrance, +placed one of the lads on watch just outside it, and then lighted a +fire. Stanley took a couple of torches and went up to Harry, taking +the precaution to hang a cloth before the window. + +"I have not said much about thanking you, old fellow," Harry said, +"but you must know how I feel." + +"You had better say nothing about it, Harry. I have only done what +you would have done, had you been in my place. Had you been in +charge of that party, and I had been carried off, I know you would +have done all in your power to rescue me. You might not have +succeeded quite so well, because you do not know their language; +but I know that you would have tried. After all, I have not run +anything like so much risk as I did when I rescued Meinik from the +leopard. And he, of course, was an absolute stranger to me. + +"Besides, you are not rescued, yet; and we won't holloa until we +are out of the wood." + +"It is very cool and pleasant here," Harry said, after lying +without speaking for a few minutes. "It was dreadfully hot in that +hut, in the middle of the day; and I used to feel that I lost +almost as much strength, in the day, as I picked up at night. I am +wonderfully better this evening. Of course, that long sleep had +something to do with it, and the pleasure of being free and with +you had still more; but certainly the coolness, and the air blowing +through that opening, have counted for something." + +"Well, we shall feed you up as long as you are here, Harry; and I +hope, in a fortnight, to see you pretty firm on your legs again; +and then, if there is nothing to prevent it, we will carry you off +triumphantly." + +Meinik here came in, with two bowls of broth; for they had bought a +few earthenware utensils on one of the visits to Toungoo. + +"That is first rate!" Harry said, as he finished his first one. +"What is it made of?" + +"I never ask questions," Stanley replied--who tried, successfully, +to keep down a smile. "Meinik is a capital cook, and turns out all +sorts of nice little dishes. Here comes his step again. + +"What have you there, Meinik?" he asked, as the Burman entered, +with two plates. + +"A slice of mutton done on sticks over the fire, master, and some +rice with it." + +"That is first rate!" Harry said heartily, when he had finished. +"They did not give me meat, in prison. I suppose they thought that +I was not strong enough for it." + +"They eat very little meat themselves, Harry. Now I fancy your +dinner is done, except some fruit. We have got plenty of that." + +There were, however, some fried bananas, and Harry declared that he +had feasted like a king. + +"If this goes on, Stanley, I will wager that I shall be about in a +week; and shall be offering to run a race with you, in a +fortnight." + +"You will be a good deal longer than that, before you are fit to +walk any distance. Still, with a good appetite--which you are sure +to have, after your illness--plenty of food, and the cool air in +these caves, I do expect that you will pick up fast." + +The next day passed quietly. + +"I shall be glad when tomorrow is over," Stanley said to Meinik, +the last thing before going up to Harry's cell. "Today I expect +they are all marching back again and, if they pay us another visit, +it will be early tomorrow morning. Be sure that two men are on +watch. They can relieve each other, every hour; and I shall come +down myself, occasionally, to see that all is right; but I don't +think that even the governor could get his men to come near this +place, after dark." + +"We will keep good watch, master, but I have no fear of their +coming." + + + +Chapter 15: The Attack. + + +Stanley got up several times during the night, and went below to +the watches; as he felt sure they would be nervous for, though they +had now, to a large extent, got over their superstitious fears, +they would still be timid at night. They reported that everything +was still round the temple, but that they had heard distant sounds +in the woods; and on the first of these occasions he had, after +returning to the room above, gone out on to the ledge; and from +that height could see the reflection, in the sky, of a number of +fires extending in a semicircle, at a distance of a mile or so from +the temple. From this he felt convinced that the governor was +determined to have a thorough search made in the morning. + +As soon as it was daylight, the sound of the blowing of horns and +the beating of drums was heard in the forest and, half an hour +later, a large body of men poured out from the trees, headed by the +governor, himself. + +"Now," he shouted, "this place is to be searched, in every hole and +corner. + +"As to the evil spirits, there is no fear of them, either by day or +night. Did you ever hear of their attacking a large body of men? +They may strangle a single traveller, who ventures into their +haunts; but no one ever heard of a Burmese army being attacked by +them. Now, every man has to do his duty; and the first who wavers, +his head is to be struck off, at once. + +"Forward!" + +The troops rushed impetuously across the ruins, penetrated into the +various chambers in the rock and, in a few minutes, all these were +reported to be empty. + +"There are chambers higher up," the governor said. "We will search +them, and--look at that door up there, it must lead to somewhere. +Bring stones, and make a stair up to it." + +It was evident now that there was no longer any hope of +concealment, and Stanley stepped to the entrance. + +"My Lord Governor," he shouted, "there is a strong force here, and +all your army could not gain an entrance. We do not wish to take +the lives of brave men; but if we are attacked we must defend +ourselves, and I pray you to withdraw with them, and not to throw +away life." + +This address from an apparent peasant excited the wrath of the +governor, who shouted: + +"Shoot him, men!" + +But before the order could be obeyed, Stanley had stepped back into +the chamber, where he had already ordered the men to stand out of +the line of the door. A number of muskets were fired, and several +bullets struck the back wall of the chamber. The firing continued, +and Stanley said: + +"Keep where you are, men, until they have finished; then approach +the door for, directly they begin the attack, the men behind must +stop firing. They will be some minutes, yet." + +He ran quickly up to Harry's room. + +"They are attacking us," Harry exclaimed; "oh, how I wish I could +come down and help!" + +"They can never get in, Harry. British soldiers might do it, but +not these fellows. They can only enter two abreast and, with a +dozen spear points facing them, what can they do? I thought that I +would just come up and tell you it was all right. It will take them +five minutes, at least, to pile up stones level with the doorway." + +Stanley again joined those below. Meinik, the trooper, and one of +the Burmese were to form the first line; the four other Burmese +were to stand behind, with their spears, between the men in front; +the two guards with their muskets, and the boys were to act as a +reserve. Stanley had armed himself with one of the axes, and was to +stand by the side of the entrance so that, if the spearmen were +pressed back, and any of the assailants succeeded in passing the +entrance, he would strike them down. + +Presently, there was a silence outside. + +"Keep well back," he said. "They have laid their stones, and we +shall have a rush, directly; but they will most likely pour in a +volley, first." + +The pause lasted for a minute or two. Then a drum was beaten, and a +hundred muskets were fired. A rain of bullets flew into the cave. + +"Now," Stanley shouted, "form up." + +Illustration: In vain the Burmese tried to force their way into the +chamber. + +A wild yell was raised by the Burmese. Now they knew that they were +fighting human foes, their courage returned, and there was a rush +of men up the pile of stones to the entrance; but in vain they +tried to force their way into the chamber. Those in front fell +pierced by the spears and, while the defenders could see their +figures against the light, the assailants, coming out from the +sunshine, could see nothing in the chamber, which was now darkened +by their filling up the entrance. Not once was it necessary for +Stanley to strike. The Burmans' spears did their work thoroughly +and, in two or three minutes, the entrance was nigh choked up with +dead bodies, adding to the difficulty of the assailants. + +Pressed on by those behind, the foremost fell over these obstacles, +and were instantly pierced by the spears; until it was no longer +possible to get through the outer entrance, much less make their +way into the chamber. Again and again the attack was repeated and, +as often, repulsed. Before advancing the Burmese, each time, +endeavoured to clear the passage by drawing out the bodies of their +comrades; but the two guards now posted themselves in front, and +shot man after man who made the attempt. At last the Burmese drew +off, but not till some fifty or sixty had been killed. + +The governor was seen gesticulating furiously to a party of +officers and, presently, a final attack was made, led by several +officers of rank. This was as unsuccessful as the others. The +bodies, indeed, of the killed now forming a well-nigh impassable +barrier and, after several of the officers and many of the bravest +men had fallen, the remainder withdrew suddenly. The governor +appeared to recognize that the task was an impossible one; and two +or three hundred men were at once set to work felling trees and, by +nightfall, a high stockade had been erected round the open ground +in front of the temple. + +"They are going to try to starve us out," Stanley said. "There is +no more chance of fighting, tonight." + +As soon as the stockade was finished, musketeers took their place +behind it and opened a dropping fire at the entrance, while the +woodcutters continued to fell trees. + +"We must get rid of these dead bodies, if we can," Stanley said, +"or the place will be uninhabitable, in a day or two. + +"Get those two bamboos we had for the litter, Meinik. We will push +the bodies out, one by one, beginning with those on the top of the +heap. We can keep down behind the shelter of the pile, till we have +got most of them out. After that, we must take our chance of a +shot." + +It took them some hours' work but, at last, the passage was +cleared, and the bodies all thrown outside. The fire was lighted in +the next room; and Stanley, bidding two men listen attentively for +any movement, went up again to Harry--to whom he had paid a flying +visit, as soon as the Burmese drew off. + +"We cannot risk having a light here, Harry," he said. "I don't want +them to have any idea that this chamber, which is nearly fifty feet +above the entrance, is in any way connected with the rooms below. +If such an idea struck them, they might lower men from above by +ropes, and so take us in the rear." + +"Did you say that we are regularly shut up, in front, by that +stockade?" + +"Yes; there is certainly no getting out, that way. Behind, you +know, it is a sheer wall of rock; and the only possibility, that I +can see, is that we may clear a staircase which runs up through the +rock, from a ledge on the level of this room, to the ruins of a +building above. At present, the upper part is entirely choked up +with blocks of stone and rubbish, and it will be a very awkward job +to get through it; but so far, it seems to me, it is that or +nothing." + +"What are they going on chopping down trees for?" + +"I believe their general is doing it to bring large numbers of his +troops close up to the stockade; partly perhaps to keep up the +spirits of the front line, by their company; partly to render +impossible any attempt, on our part, to make our way out by a +sudden rush. Of course, they don't know what our strength is; but +they have had so sharp a lesson, today, that they will take every +precaution, in future. + +"Well, what is it, Meinik?" + +"We have been talking together, master; and we think that, if we +were to call out that they might take the bodies away, without any +interference by us, they would do so. Several officers of rank have +fallen there, and it is our custom always to carry off the dead, +when it is possible." + +"It would be worth trying the experiment, anyhow, Meinik. But we +must all stand to arms, while they are doing it; as they might make +a sudden rush. However, we would risk that, for those bodies have +been worrying me very much, and I would give anything to have them +taken away. I will go down with you." + +Meinik accordingly went down to the entrance, and shouted out: + +"Peace, peace! I am ordered, by the English officer, to say that he +would wish those who have fought so bravely to be honoured, after +death; and that no shot shall be fired, and no interference made, +with those who come to carry away the dead." + +There was silence for two or three minutes, and then a voice called +back: + +"It is well; for two hours there shall be peace between us." + +"I have no doubt the governor is as glad to do this as we are. It +is considered a disgrace, if the dead are not carried off the +ground to burial; and if he sends despatches to Ava, he will be +glad to be able to put in that the brave men who fell have all been +buried, with due honours. Besides, Meinik, it would not be +encouraging to his troops for them to have that pile of dead bodies +before them and, indeed, would be enough to cause a pestilence, in +a few days." + +The men were formed up again, round the entrance. The Burmese did +their work silently. Occasionally a slight movement was heard, but +no one could have imagined that a hundred men were busy outside. A +number of them carried torches, and all worked steadily and in good +order, under the direction of two or three officers. One of the +posts of the stockade had been pulled up and through this the +bodies were carried. It was less than two hours before a horn +sounded, and there was a loud call of: + +"The peace is over; all is done." + +Beyond the stockade great fires blazed among the trees. The work of +chopping down the forest continued, and by the morning the ground +had been cleared for a distance of thirty or forty yards from the +paling. Then the Burmese raised another stockade forty feet behind +the first, so that, if by carelessness or treachery the besieged +should manage to pass through the first line, there would yet be +another in front of them. + +"I expect, master," Meinik said as, standing well back, he watched +the men at work, "the general is building this second line, not +because he thinks that there is a chance of our getting through the +first, but to keep the men at work, so as to prevent them from +thinking anything about the spirits. Now that they have passed one +night there, they will have got somewhat over their fear and, of +course, every day that passes, without ill befalling them, they +will think less and less about the evil ones." + +"Do you believe in them, Meinik?" + +Meinik hesitated. + +"Everyone knows, master, that evil spirits guard the treasures of +the people that lived in the land long, long ago. No one can doubt +that people who have rashly sought the treasures have been found +dead, with staring eyes and swollen bodies; but as, at present, +they must know well that neither we nor those outside are searching +for treasure, they may not interfere." + +"Then you think that there are treasures buried here, somewhere?" + +"I cannot say, master; everyone says so. The story has been handed +down that this was once the greatest of the temples of the old +people; and that, when they were defeated by tribes from the +east--I know not whether it was us, or some people before us--the +priests from all the other temples came here. The remains of their +army came here, too, and fought outside the temple until all were +killed. + +"When the conquerors entered, they found the priests all lying, in +regular lines, on the pavements. All were dead. One story is that +they had stabbed themselves; another, that they had taken poison. +At any rate, no treasures were found; although it was known that +the riches of the temple were great, and that all the other priests +that had come here had brought the treasures from their temples +with them. That was the beginning of the destruction of the place; +for the pavement was torn up, and the walls in some places +levelled, and the images of the gods broken up in search for the +treasures. + +"The work of the guardian spirits had already begun. They say that +all who took part in the search died, of a terrible pestilence that +broke out. Since that time, the place has been accursed. Once or +twice, kings have sent bodies of troops to search; and they say +that some could never find the temple, but wandered about the +forest for days, searching in vain for it. Others found so thick a +darkness, like the blackest of smoke, filling the forest, that even +the bravest dare not enter. I say not that those things were so; I +only say that these are the stories that have come down to us." + +"Well, Meinik, we are not going to search for the treasure; and it +is evident that the spirits bear us no ill will; indeed, I feel +obliged to them, for it is likely enough that the soldiers will put +down their misfortune to their influence, and that even the +governor may feel that it would be useless to try to get them to +renew the assault. This evening we will go up, and have another +look at the stairs; and see how we can best set to work to clear +them. There is no great hurry about it, but the sooner we set to +work, the better." + +All day long a dropping fire was maintained on the entrance, by the +troops behind the first stockade; but as, with the exception of +three men kept always on watch, the defenders were stationed in the +next chamber, the bullets pattered harmlessly against the wall. +During the night the accumulated dust of ages had been swept up +from the floor; and this had been strewn, three inches deep, in the +passage between the outer air and the chamber, so as to cover the +blood that had been shed there. + +As soon as it was quite dark, Stanley, Meinik, and three of the +villagers went out on to the ledge in front of the upper opening, +made their way along it to the entrance of the stairs, and mounted. +They carried with them two or three glowing brands from the fire, +in one of the earthenware cooking pots, which was covered with a +cloth to prevent the slightest glow being noticed by the enemy. The +men, by Stanley's order, brought with them the bamboos of the +litter, the saw they had used at the stockade, a hatchet, and some +blocks of firewood. + +When they got to the point where the steps were choked up, they +lighted the two torches--the men who brought up the rear of the +party holding up a rug, to prevent any reflection from the torches +being seen outside. When Stanley and Meinik had again examined the +obstacle, the latter retired; and the Burmans, one by one, came up +and looked at it. + +"What do you think of it?" Stanley asked them. + +"It would be dangerous to touch it, my lord," one of them said. "If +only one stone moved out from its place, it would be death to us +all. They are firm now, quite firm; but if two or three were +disturbed, the whole might come down at once." + +"I quite see that," Stanley said. "Can any of you suggest a plan by +which we could get out, without much risk of setting them in +motion?" + +The Burmese were silent, + +"I will tell you my scheme then. I propose to cut the bamboos into +lengths that will just reach across the passage. It is the lower +stones that one is most afraid of. So long as these remain fixed, +there is no fear of any general movement but, if they went, the +whole mass might come down. This passage is less than three feet +wide, and the bamboos are twelve feet long; so that each would make +four, the width of the passage. I propose to drive them tightly in, +and fix them firmly with wedges. They must be put in so that they +will actually touch the stones, so as to prevent their making the +slightest downward movement. If they began to slide, no doubt they +would carry away the bamboos; but if these were fixed firmly, by +wedges, they ought to be sufficient to prevent any movement from +taking place--especially as there would be enough of them almost to +touch each other, extending from this lowest step, on which the +rocks rest, some five feet upwards--that is, to within some two +feet of the roof, which would be sufficient for us to crawl +through, and the bamboos would serve as a ladder. Then I propose +that we should work our way along the top, passing the small stones +and rubbish backwards, after filling up all the cracks and crevices +below us. + +"I see, of course, that we should meet with many obstacles. Great +stones may be sticking up, perhaps jammed against the roof; these +would have to be broken off, or chipped in pieces. No doubt the +work will take time but, at any rate, there is plenty of food for +three weeks and, working by turns night and day, we ought to be +able to burrow our way out. As we get on, we may not find the +stones so tightly pressed together as they are, here. At any rate, +as we saw the light above us, only some thirty feet up, there ought +not to be above twenty feet of closely-packed stuff to get through. + +"No doubt the work will be dangerous, as well as hard but, as we +know that if we do not succeed all our lives are forfeited, we can +face the danger. Everyone of us will take his share in turn; I +shall do so, myself, and shall direct the work in general. What do +you think of the plan?" + +"I think that it is possible, master," Meinik said. "At any rate, +we must try it; since it is the only way that offers us any chance +of life." + +The Burmese all agreed, and they at once set to work. The bamboos +were first cut into lengths; and then, by means of the axe and +wedges, were jammed so firmly, from side to side, that it would +have required great force to dislodge them. These supports were +somewhat irregularly placed, as it was necessary that they should +absolutely touch the stones. As they proceeded with the work, the +spaces behind the bamboos were filled tightly up with rubble, so as +to solidify the whole. + +When the last support was in its place, Stanley said: + +"Now, Meinik, do you with these three work, tonight; four others +will take your place, before dawn. Mind, at first I don't want you +to attempt to move any fixed stones; but simply to clear away all +small stones, and rubble. You can stow a good deal behind the two +upper bamboos. The rest you must put on the stairs. I will see, +tonight, what we can manage in the way of tools for chipping away +the big stones that cannot be moved. You had better relieve each +other very often. The three who are not at work should sit down on +the ledge, outside, so that any stone accidentally dislodged will +not fall on anyone. Every ten minutes, one will come up to take the +place of the man at work. Be sure that each, as he passes up or +down, replaces the blanket carefully." + +They had, indeed, before beginning to saw up the bamboos, fastened +the blanket to one of the cross pieces of the stretcher and, +cutting this to the width of the passage, had jammed it close up to +the roof; so that the curtain, hanging down, effectually shut off +the light. + +Stanley then descended the steps, and rejoined Harry below. Before +going down further, Stanley, who had during the day informed Harry +of his plan, told him of the start that they had made. + +"Of course, it all depends upon what stones you meet with," Harry +said. "If you come to a big solid block, I don't see how you are +going to get through it." + +"We have the hatchets, and can whittle it away; and perhaps we can +make some chisels, from the ramrods of your guards' guns. A lot can +be done, with patience and plenty of hands." + +Stanley then went down below, and explained to the others the plan +proposed. The news gave them great satisfaction; for although +Meinik had told them there was a staircase above blocked with +stones, it had seemed so impossible, to him, to clear it that he +had placed no stress upon the fact; and the preparations made by +the enemy to cut off any possible retreat had greatly depressed +them. + +Stanley took one of the iron ramrods and, raking some of the embers +from the fire, placed it in them, about a foot from one end; then +he directed the others to fan the embers, until they raised them +almost to white heat. Taking the ramrod out, he laid the edge of +one of their knives upon it and, striking its back with a stone, +soon cut through the glowing rod. He repeated the operation and +had, then, three short rods of equal length. He now heated one end +of each and, laying it on an axe on the ground, hammered it into +chisel shape with the back of a light hatchet; repeating this +several times, until it had the required shape and sharpness; then +he plunged this into a pot of water. He did the same with the other +two; and had, now, three chisels with which he hoped to be able to +chip away the stones. The other ramrod he left intact, except that +he sharpened one end. + +Then, going up to Harry's room, he lay down and slept for some +hours; putting the two boys on watch, and bidding the trooper look +after them. The two Burmans, with one of the guards, were to go to +work with him. Several times he woke. The last time, on looking +out, he thought that there was a faint light in the sky and, going +down, called up the three men and, bidding them bring up the two +heavy axes, a light hatchet, and the three short chisels, he led +them up the steps to the working party. + +"How have you got on, Meinik?" + +"We have cleared four feet, master; but there is a big stone +sticking up, now, and we can do nothing with it." + +"We will have a try, and do you all go down, at once. + +"Take off your cloth, one of you, and fill it with this rubbish on +the steps. Do it as quickly as you can. The day will be breaking, +in a few minutes." + +Stanley now climbed up, and investigated the passage. The bottom +was level. Every crack and crevice between the stones being filled +up with rubbish. The obstacle Meinik had spoken of evidently formed +part of a flat slab. It reached within an inch of the roof and, at +one side, touched the rock wall; at the other there was an +interval, of some four or five inches, and the earth and rubbish +had already been scraped out from behind it. Putting his hand in, +he found that the block was some four inches in thickness. + +He thought that if he could but get a fair blow at it, with the +back of one of the heavy axes, he might break it off; but this was +impossible. The total width of the passage did not exceed three +feet; and as the men had, as they went, worked down somewhat, there +was now about thirty inches between the bed of earth and rubbish, +on which he was lying, and the roof. Taking the handle of the axe +in both hands, he used the head as a battering ram; but without any +success. He then called up the slightest of the three men, and told +him to crawl in beside him and, with their united strength, they +pounded the stone for some time. Finding that nothing could be done +this way, Stanley sent the man back again; and then, taking one of +the three chisels and a small hatchet, he proceeded to mark a line +along the bottom of the stone; and then, for ten minutes, worked +away on it with the chisel and hammer. Then he called up one of the +others, and showed him what he was to do. All day they worked by +turns and, though progress was very slow, by nightfall the groove +was half an inch deep. + +Stanley and the strongest Burman then went in together and, lying +on their backs again, tried the effect of the heavy axe; but still +without success. Then Stanley told the man to get down and take out +the wedge, at the top of the axe; and to cut away the wood below +the head, so that the latter would slip down, four or five inches; +then to take off the head of the other heavy axe and put it on +above it, and replace the wedge. In a few minutes, the man rejoined +him. + +"We must strike it as near the roof as we can," Stanley said. Both +grasped the handle firmly. "We will sway it backwards and forwards +three times and, the third time, strike. + +"One, two, three--hooray!" + +As the two-headed axe, driven with their united force, struck the +stone, there was a sharp crack. + +"That has done it," Stanley said, turning over. + +There was a dark line along the groove, and the top of the stone +inclined back, two inches from the perpendicular; being kept in its +place by the rubbish behind it. Stanley put his hand into the hole, +and got his fingers behind the stone; while the Burmese put the +chisel into the crack, and used it as a lever. In two or three +minutes the stone was moved out of its position, taken out of the +hole, and laid down on the steps. + +Half an hour later Meinik came up, with a trooper, another guard, +and one of the boys; and was delighted to find that the obstacle, +which had seemed to him fatal to their hopes, had been removed. +Stanley showed how they had carried out the work; and then, with +his party, went down into the rock chambers. + +"It was pretty tiring work, Harry," he said, "though we were only +at it about a quarter of an hour, at a time. My wrists and arms and +shoulders are aching, as if I had been beaten with sticks. Tomorrow +I will take up a good supply of firewood. The chisels got blunted +before we had worked an hour; and we should get on a deal faster, +if we could sharpen them frequently." + +"Is the stone hard?" + +"No; it is a sort of marble, I think. We had the underpart of the +slab on our side, and I did not think of looking when we took it +down. Anyhow, it was not very hard and, with a good strong chisel +and a short, heavy hammer, I am sure we could have done it in an +hour. + +"Anyhow, it is a comfort that nothing came down on top of us. I +examined the pile carefully, and there had not been the slightest +movement among the lower stones; so that part of the difficulty +seems to have been got over. + +"Now, I must go down and get something to eat, and then I will go +in for a good sleep. You are feeling all right, I hope?" + +"Could not be doing better, Stanley. I have eaten three solid +meals, today; and have been sitting up on the edge of my bed, for +some time. I tried standing, but it was no go; still, I do think +that, in a day or two, I shall manage it." + +For six days the work continued. One party watched, another slept, +and the third worked, by turns. Some of the stones gave much +greater trouble than the first they had met with; but having the +fire close by proved a great assistance, as the chisels could be +frequently sharpened. The men became more accustomed to the work, +and the steady progress they made greatly excited their hopes. + +At the end of the week, but one stone barred the way. This, +however, was much the most formidable that they had encountered. It +seemed to have been a pillar, or a huge gate post; and was square, +measuring some twenty inches on each face. The obstacle was all the +more formidable, as the upper end was inclined towards them, +greatly increasing the difficulty in using the chisel. Beyond this, +as far as they could see, there was merely a mass of smaller +stones. + +The party who had been working upon this block were much +disheartened, when Stanley went up to relieve them. Owing to the +inclination of the stone, their chisels could get but little bite +and, though they had been working for six hours at it, they had +scarcely made any impression; indeed, at only one point had they so +far broken the face that the chisel would cut. Meinik had come down +two hours before, to report to Stanley the nature of the obstacle +and, when he went up, he took with him the second ramrod, which had +not hitherto been used. + +He saw at once that, as Meinik had told him, it would be impossible +to get through this block by the same means as before for, as the +groove deepened, the labour would become greater and greater and, +from the inclination of the stone, they would in time arrive at a +point where the axe could no longer be used to strike the chisel. + +The point at which the slight indentation had been made was nearly +at the corner of the stone. This was gradually enlarged, by +hammering upon it with the head of the axe and, after an hour's +work, the surface had been so far pounded that the chisel could get +a flat hold upon it. Then Stanley and one of the Burmans lay down, +and placed the cutting end of the long ramrod against it; and the +others, by turns, struck the end with the back of a light hatchet, +those holding the rod turning it, slightly, after each blow. Every +half hour the edge of the chisel was resharpened and, by the time +the next party relieved them, a hole of half an inch in diameter, +and two inches deep, had been drilled in the stone. Stanley +remained with the newcomers for half an hour, instructing them in +the work, and then went below. + +"Well, Stanley, what are you going to do with this monstrous stone +Meinik tells me of?" + +"There is only one thing to do with it, Harry; that is, to blast +it. The block is so inclined that one can do nothing with the +chisels, and we are now drilling a hole. I don't know that I shall +succeed but, at any rate, I am going to have a try. If it fails, I +must hit on some other way. The provisions are holding out all +right; and Meinik calculates that, with a little stinginess, we +could manage for another three weeks. We have drilled the hole in +two inches today and, as we get more accustomed to the work, I dare +say we could do three inches in each shift. The block is twenty +inches through on the straight, and may be two feet on the line +that we follow; so that in four days we shall be nearly through it. + +"In three weeks we shall have made five holes, which will weaken it +so that we may be able to break it off. However, I hope we shall +find one hole sufficient. I shall make it fifteen inches deep, and +then charge it with the contents of a dozen cartridges. I think +that ought to do it." + +In two days and a half, the hole was of the required depth. Harry +had progressed so rapidly that he was able, that morning, to walk +across his room. + +"We must try the shot, at once," Stanley said, "because if it +fails, we must go on working. If it succeeds we can, if we like, +wait for another week before we make off. By that time you will be +strong enough to be got through that low passage, and walk for a +little distance; when we can cut some poles, and rig up that +hammock again. + +"Do you know anything about mining, for I know nothing? I only had +an idea how to drill the hole from seeing some engineers at work at +Agra, years ago; but I am sure I don't know how they fired the +shot, or prepared it." + +"I can tell you a little about it, Stanley; for I have been down a +coal mine once or twice, and watched the men doing it. They first +of all put in the charge; then they put in a wooden rod, just the +thickness of the fuse they use; then they dropped in a little dry +dust round it, which they pressed down very carefully, with a small +wooden rod; then they damped some dust, and hammered that down +hard. After putting in about half an inch of this, they used dust +slightly moistened, beating it down as before. When it was quite +full, they pulled out the centre stick, and put the fuse into the +hole that it left." + +"We have not got any fuse," Stanley said, "but I think that if we +take a narrow strip of cloth, moisten it, and rub gunpowder into +it; let it dry, and then roll it up, it would be all right. Then we +could lay a train of damp powder to it, set the end alight, and +bolt." + +"I should think that that would do," Harry agreed, "but you would +have to bolt very sharp for, if it went off before you got to the +bottom of the steps, it might be very awkward." + +"I don't think the effect of the shock will be as great as that, +Harry. It may crack the stone, but I should hardly think it would +send anything flying out of the hole." + + + +Chapter 16: Rejoining. + + +Every day, since the siege had begun, the defenders had fired an +occasional shot at the stockade; not with any idea of doing any +damage, but in order that the assailants should know that they were +still in the cavern. That evening, when the hole had got to the +proper depth, Stanley, having prepared his fuse, went up with +twenty cartridges in his pocket, accompanied by Meinik. The hole +was charged and tamped, and the fuse inserted. This took a +considerable time. The fuse had been cut so that an inch of it +projected outside the hole. The other eight cartridges were then +broken up, and the powder moistened; and a train some two feet long +laid, from the fuse towards the entrance of the hole. Then a piece +of rag was wrapped round one end of the ramrod; and this, again, +was tied to a long rod that had, the night before, been cut by one +of the boys, who had slipped out noiselessly from the entrance. The +rag had been moistened, and rubbed with gunpowder. + +"Now, Meinik," Stanley said, "everything is ready. This rod is +sixteen feet long, so that, lying down, my feet will be just at the +edge of the hole; and I shall be able to drop down, as soon as I +have lighted the train, and bolt. I shall fix a torch, a foot or so +from the train; then I shall only have to lift the rod to it, light +the rag, set fire to the train, and then slide down and bolt. + +"Now, you must go down first." + +"No, master," Meinik said firmly; "I will light the train. I do not +think that there is any danger but, whether there is or not, I +shall undertake it. If I am killed, it does not matter; while if +you were killed all would be lost for, if the explosion did not +burst the stone, I am sure that we should never be able to get +through it, without you to direct us. No, master, if you stay, I +stay; and that would only lessen our chances of running down the +steps in time." + +Stanley argued, and even ordered, but Meinik was obstinate and, +seeing that the faithful Burman was not to be moved, he reluctantly +left the matter in his hands, and went downstairs. He moved a short +distance along the ledge, and waited. The time seemed an age to +him, so that he gave an exclamation of delight when Meinik suddenly +came into sight, and took his place beside him. + +"I have lit the train, master. The powder fizzed up, but did not +seem to burn very fast." + +It was, indeed, another two minutes before a deep muffled roar was +heard. There was no further noise, but they heard shouts from the +Burmans, behind the stockades. + +"They will be wondering what the sound is," Stanley said, "but they +will not be able to tell from what direction it came; for I expect +they were pretty nearly all sound asleep. Now, let us go up and see +the result." + +They made their way up the steps, which were now in entire +darkness. The curtain still hung in its place, some ten feet below +the obstacle. They lit a torch, from the embers in the pan; and +then Stanley climbed up into the passage, and hastily crawled +along. + +He gave a cry of satisfaction, as he approached the end. The +explosion had been completely successful--the end of the block lay +on the ground. Whether the whole of it had been blown off, or not, +he could not see; but he felt sure that the greater portion must +have split off. It was evident that it would take a considerable +amount of time, and would require the strength of several men, to +get the block out. They therefore descended, at once, to gladden +the hearts of those below; with the news that the way out was now +available to them, whenever they chose to leave. + +Harry manifested no surprise, whatever, at the news. + +"I made sure that you would succeed, Stanley. After getting me off, +as you did; and making your own escape, before, it seems to me that +you have got hold of the 'open sesame' of Ali Baba, and have only +to use the cabalistic words to walk in and out, wherever you want +to go." + +"I don't feel, by any means, so certain of my own powers as you +seem to be, Harry; and I can assure you I was very doubtful whether +that shot would succeed. I hoped, at any rate, that it would blow a +good bit of the stone out and, in that case, we could have got the +chisels to work again. It was the slanting position of the block +that beat us. However, thank goodness, the work is done now; and +you have only to get a bit stronger, and we will be off." + +"I am quite ready to start now, Stanley. I think it is absurd +waiting any longer, for there is never any saying what might take +place. That Burmese general, who seems to be an obstinate beggar, +might take it into his head to place a guard on the top of the +hill; and then all your labour will have been thrown away." + +"That is true enough, Harry; and as I really don't think that +travelling now would be likely to do you any serious harm, I will +decide on tomorrow. At any rate, I will take some men up, at once, +and get that stone out." + +The task was a difficult one. The block of stone was so nearly the +size of the passage that they could not get a rope round behind it +and, after trying for two hours, in vain, they determined that the +only course was to push it before them. They soon found, however, +that this was impossible; and that a part, at least, of the stone +was remaining in its place. Finally, they succeeded in pushing a +loop in the rope over the top of the block; and then, by main +force, eight of them pulled it out of the hole, and lowered it on +to the top step. + +By the time that they had done this, dawn was approaching; and they +therefore returned, at once, to the chambers below. + +The men were all much pleased, when Stanley told them that they +would leave that night. Confident as they felt that the Burmese +could not force their way in, a new feeling of nervousness seized +them, now that the way was open, lest some unforeseen circumstances +might occur to prevent their going. The rice that remained was made +up into three or four packages. The meat had long before been +finished. + +Stanley had a discussion, with Meinik, as to how Harry had best be +taken through the passage. He could, they agreed, walk along the +ledge, with one before and one behind to steady him; and could then +be carried up the steps, in a blanket, by four men. He must, of +course, be lifted into the passage, and dragged through it to the +end; after that, it would be easy enough. Six men could carry him, +in a blanket, until far enough away for them to chop poles, without +the sound of the axes being heard by the Burmese. + +From the time they began their work, every pains had been taken to +deaden sounds. The blanket hung across the passage had acted as a +muffler, to some extent; but a piece of cloth had always been tied +over the hammer heads of the axes, to prevent the sharp clinking +sounds of the blows on the chisels, or stone, being heard. + +As soon as it was dark enough for them to pass along the ledge, +Meinik went with Stanley to examine the ground. Fortunately, the +portion of stone that remained above the level, and prevented the +rock from being rolled back, was but small; and they were able to +break it up in half an hour, with the axes. Then, making their way +along without difficulty for another four feet, they found +themselves standing upright in the depression in the centre of the +ruin. Mounting six more steps, they were among the bushes that +covered the site of the temple. + +They now carefully cleared away every fragment of stone from the +floor of the passage and, returning, Stanley gave orders for the +start to be made. Two or three shots were fired, from the lower +entrance, to show the enemy that they were there and on the watch; +and then all went up to Harry's room. He had been dressed, for the +first time, and was ready for the start. Two of the strongest of +the Burmans went on first. + +"Now, Harry, you are to put your hands on my shoulders. Meinik will +follow close behind you, and will keep his arms round you, in case +you need help. Of course, we shall go along very slowly." + +"I don't think that all these precautions are necessary," Harry +said. "I am sure that I can walk that distance, easily enough. Why, +you say the stair is only about forty feet." + +"I dare say you could, Harry; but we don't want to run any risks. +Your head is not very strong, at present; and you might turn giddy, +or you might stumble. So, at present, you will have just to do as +you are told. + +"Let us start." + +Harry did not find it as easy as he had expected, getting out +through the lower opening; and he was by no means sorry to have the +support of Stanley and Meinik, as he proceeded along the ledge. +They moved very carefully, and slowly; and all were greatly +relieved when he sat down, on a blanket laid on the steps. + +"Now lie back, Harry. We shall have no difficulty in getting you up +here." + +Two Burmans took the upper end of the blanket, Stanley and Meinik +the lower, and they were soon at the top of the steps. + +"You are not very heavy now, Harry; but you are a good deal heavier +than you were, when we brought you in below. + +"Now, the next is the most difficult part of the work--once we get +you through this passage, it will be plain sailing. You see, you +will have to be dragged. The place is only two feet high, so that +it would be impossible to lift you at all. We have made the floor +as smooth as we can, but I am afraid that there are a good many +projecting corners, that will try you a good deal." + +"It cannot be helped, Stanley. Fire away, as soon as you like." + +The rest of the party were now all gathered, on the steps below; +and Meinik and Stanley, getting up first into the hole, received +Harry as the others lifted him and, with the aid of two of the +Burmans, laid him on his blanket in the passage. + +"Now," Stanley said, to the two men who took the other end of the +blanket, "keep it as tight as you can and, when I say 'lift,' we +will all lift together, and move him forward a few inches. Do not +hurry over it--we have plenty of time before us." + +They were packed so closely that they had each but one arm +available. Little by little they moved him along, gaining some six +inches, each time; then all had to move, so as to place themselves +for the next effort. However, in five or six minutes they had him +through, and carried him up into the open air. The rest of the +party at once joined them and, with three of the natives on each +side of the blanket, they were soon beyond the circle of ruins, and +making at a brisk pace through the forest. After going for a +quarter of a mile they stopped, cut some poles for the hammock and, +in a short time, were on their way again; having placed in it one +of the bags of rice, as a pillow for Harry. + +They travelled for some hours, and then halted to cook some rice. +All had slept a good deal during the day so that, after resting for +an hour, they proceeded on their way again. They had no fear, +whatever, of pursuit; and the only danger that they could incur was +from meeting with a band, similar to that which had carried Harry +off. When they rigged up the hammock, they had cut wood for +torches, to protect themselves from tigers. These were thrown away, +as soon as daylight broke. + +At midday they halted again, for another hour; and then, continuing +their journey, arrived at the village before nightfall. They were +received with great joy, the villagers setting up a shout of +welcome--the friends of the men and boys being especially exuberant +in their joy, for they had become extremely anxious at their long +absence. The two troopers were still there; and these saluted +Stanley, with less than the usual stiff formality of the Mohammedan +soldier. + +He himself laughed. + +"I don't look much like a British officer, at present," he said, in +their language. "Well, has everything been quiet here?" + +"Yes, sahib. A sowar brought us orders, from the general, to remain +here; and to send at once, if we heard any news of you. We sent off +one of the villagers, when the man came back to fetch the others, +and said that you had good hopes of getting Lieutenant Brooke sahib +out of the hands of the Burmese." + +"I will write a note," Stanley said. "Get your horse saddled, at +once. Directly we have made Mr. Brooke comfortable, I will give you +the letter." + +During the time that Stanley had been absent, the houses had been +re-erected, and the village had assumed its general appearance. A +hut was at once handed over to them, and Harry laid on a bamboo +pallet. He had not slept, most of the way down. + +"You see I was quite right, Stanley. I told you that the journey +would be nothing." + +"Fortunately, it has turned out so. Meinik has already killed a +chicken, and will make it into broth for you. It will be a change, +for you, after your diet of rice. The cooking was excellent, for +the first three or four days; but it fell off sadly. That was one +of the reasons why I gave way to your wish to start at once. You +have done wonderfully well, but a constant diet of rice is not +quite the thing for building up a sick man. + +"Now, I am going to write a few lines to the general to say that +you have got safely down, but will need at least another week +before you are able to sit on a horse. Of course, you can be +carried on; but I think that the air here is a great deal more +healthy, and bracing, than it is at Prome and, the longer you stay +here, the better." + +Stanley's note was a short one. It merely said that he had +succeeded in getting his cousin, and the trooper who was carried +off at the same time, from the hands of the Burmese, but that Harry +was still very weak; and that, if he himself could be spared, he +would stay with him at the village for another week or ten days, at +the end of which time he would ride, by easy stages, to Prome. + +Three days later, the trooper returned with a note from the +general. + +"I congratulate you most heartily on having rescued your cousin," +he wrote. "By all means, stay where you are until he is quite +strong again. This place is not at all healthy, at present. We +shall not be moving forward for another three weeks." + +Stanley remained at the village for another fortnight and, at the +end of that time, Harry had so far recovered that he was quite +capable of making a short day's journey on horseback. Two of the +men who had aided in the rescue had gone to Prome, with an order +from Stanley on the staff paymaster, for the rewards that had been +promised to the villagers and the two Burmese soldiers. They +returned with the money, and the men were all highly delighted at +the result of the expedition. + +Stanley retained the services of the two soldiers, as long as he +remained in the village. He had no fear, whatever, of the same band +returning that had, before, visited the village; and he learned +that no others had been heard of in the neighbourhood but, at the +same time, he thought it as well that a man should be on guard, +night and day, at each end of the village. The peasants agreed to +watch at one end, while the two Burmese soldiers and the troopers +took charge of the other end. The bulk of the villagers were +engaged in forming a strong stockade round, it to defend themselves +in case of further attack; and Stanley promised to send them down +twenty muskets, and a supply of ammunition, as soon as he got to +Prome. + +There was real regret, on the part of the Burmese, when the time +came for the party to start. It had been something altogether new +to them to have officials among them who paid for everything. These +Englishmen had treated them kindly, and were pleased and contented +with everything. The money that the five men and two boys had +earned had enriched the village, and had enabled them to more than +replace their losses by the recent raid and, if Stanley had +accepted all the presents of fruit, fowls, and eggs they would have +given him, he would have needed a couple of extra horses to convey +them. A strong pony had been purchased for Meinik and, after taking +a hearty leave of the villagers, the party rode off. + +"I wish we had such a good cook as your man is, Stanley," Harry +said, as they journeyed along at a walk. "I never tasted better +soup than he serves up. I must really get him to teach our mess +cook how to make it." + +"Do you know what it is, Harry?" + +"I have not the least idea; it might be anything. I think that it +tasted, to me, more like stewed eels than anything else." + +"You are not very far out. It is made of the creatures you turned +up your nose at--snakes." + +"Nonsense, Stanley!" + +"It is, I can assure you. I would not tell you before, because it +might have set you against it. That soup you had in the cave was +made from snake flesh. The recesses in parts of the caves swarmed +with them, and the men laid in quite a store of them, before we +were besieged. Unfortunately they would not keep well, even in +these cool chambers, so we had to fall back on rice. You liked it +so much that, though there was no occasion to have gone on with +snake soup, after we got to the village, I continued to give it to +you; for it is very nourishing." + +"Well, I am glad you did not tell me, at the time; but I must own +that it was excellent, and I think that, in future, I shall have no +objection to snake in that form." + +"They are just as good, in other ways," Stanley replied. "The +Burmans are no fools, and I consider that snake and lizards are +very much better eating than their mutton; which is tasteless +stuff, at the best." + +"We shall have to have a big settlement, when we get back, Stanley. +Of course, all those men you paid, and the guards you bribed, are +entirely my account; to say nothing of my share of the general +expenditure." + +"The general expenses are practically nothing, Harry. I invited you +to come with me and, of course, you were my guest. As to the other +matter, that also is my business. I would not say so, if I had not +plenty of funds, but what with my pay as interpreter, and the year +of back pay that I got when the Gazette came out, I have plenty out +of my income to pay for it, without breaking in upon the amount I +told you I had got for those rubies." + +"I should pay you, Stanley, if you were rolling in money. Not that +I should mind taking money from you, if I wanted it, but my +expenses since I landed here have not been anything approaching my +pay and allowances; and I have besides, as I told you, an income of +500 pounds a year of my own. You have risked your life for me, and +I am not going to let you pay the piper, as well." + +"All right, if it pleases you, Harry. I am delighted at having been +able to save you and, just at present, money does not seem an +important matter one way or the other; so if it really would be a +satisfaction to you to pay, I will certainly not deprive you of +it." + +Although they only travelled ten miles the first day, Harry +acknowledged that he was as tired as a dog when he dismounted; and +was so stiff, the next morning, that he had to be helped on to his +horse. However, this gradually wore off and, on the evening of the +fourth day, they arrived at Prome. Leaving Harry at his regimental +camp, Stanley rode to the headquarters, and there dismounted. +Meinik had led the second horse, after Harry dismounted; and now +took them both across to the lines, with the air of a man who has +only been away a few hours. Stanley at once went up to the general. + +"Welcome back, lad!" Sir Archibald said. "You have been longer away +than we expected, when you started. I am glad, indeed, that you +succeeded in rescuing your cousin; and we are all burning to hear +about it. I wrote that note to you in a hurry, for I was on the +point of going on a round of inspection of the camp, when your +sowar arrived. I intended to question him concerning you, on my +return; for I had no idea that, after making such a long journey, +he would start back at once, but I found that he had ridden +straight off, directly the note was handed to him. You must dine +with me, today, and tell me all the story. I see, from the colour +of your skin, that you have been in disguise again." + +"Yes, sir. There were materials for dyeing the skin in the village, +but nothing that availed to take it off. It is gradually going and, +as I shall be now able to get some strong alkali, from the doctor, +I hope I shall be presentable by tomorrow." + +"They are honourable marks," the general said, with a smile. "I +don't think any of us would mind being so coloured, for a bit, if +we had done such good work as you have; but I won't detain you now, +for dinner will be ready in half an hour." + +Stanley hurried to his room, took a bath, donned his mess uniform, +and was ready by the time the bugle sounded. Three or four of the +staff were, as usual, members of the party. After the meal was +over, he was requested to narrate his adventures, at full length. +The story was necessarily a long one and, when he concluded, all +joined the general in hearty commendation for the manner in which +he had carried out the adventure. + +"Your last story was a stirring one, Mr. Brooke," the general said; +"but this is even more so. When I received your first note, I +thought it next door to madness for you to try to get your cousin, +badly wounded as you knew him to be, from the hands of the Burmese. +It is not an easy thing to get any man out of prison but, when the +man was unable to help himself, it seemed well-nigh impossible; and +I was greatly afraid that, instead of saving his life, you would +lose your own. Of course, the fact that you had successfully +traversed the country before was strongly in your favour; but then +you were unencumbered, and the two things were, therefore, not to +be compared with each other. I shall, of course, put you in orders +tomorrow as having performed a singularly gallant action, in +rescuing Lieutenant Brooke of the 47th and a sowar from their +captivity, by the Burmese, in a prison at Toungoo. + +"You have arrived just in time for, after endeavouring to fool us +for the past three months, by negotiations never meant to come to +anything, the enemy are now advancing in great force, and are +within a few miles of the town. So we are likely to have hot work +of it for from all accounts, they have got nearly as large an army +together as Bandoola had. I don't know whether they have learned +anything from his misfortunes, but I am bound to say that the court +does not seem to have taken the lesson, in the slightest degree, to +heart; and their arrogance is just as insufferable as it was before +a shot was fired." + +Stanley learnt that there had already been one fight. The enemy were +advancing in three columns. Their right--consisting of 15,000 men, +commanded by Sudda Woon--had crossed the Irrawaddy, and was marching +down the other bank; with the apparent object of recrossing, below +Prome, and cutting the British line of communication. The centre--from +25,000 to 30,000 strong, commanded by the Kee Wongee--was coming down +the left bank of the river, accompanied by a great fleet of war boats. +The left division--15,000 strong, led by an old and experienced general, +Maha Nemiow--was moving parallel with the others, about ten miles distant +from the centre, but separated from it by a thick and impenetrable +forest. A reserve of 10,000 men, commanded by the king's half-brother, +occupied a strongly fortified post at Melloon. In addition to these, a +large force was gathered near Pegu, and threatened an attack upon Rangoon. + +On the 10th of November, a fortnight before Stanley's return, two +brigades of native infantry--under Colonel M'Dowall--had marched +out to dislodge Maha Nemiow; whose division threatened to turn the +British right, and to move round to its rear. The force was divided +into three columns; one moving directly towards the enemy's +position, the others--marching by circuitous routes, so arranged as +to arrive at the point of attack at the same time--were to attack +in flank and rear, while the main body assailed the enemy in front. +The Burmese had, however, obtained information from spies of the +intended movement and, advancing boldly, met the British columns +half way; skirmishing with them hotly in the woods, and threatening +an attack by large bodies of horse. + +The centre drove the Burmese before them, and reached their +stockaded position. Colonel M'Dowall, while reconnoitring it, was +killed by a ball from a musket and, as the two flanking columns did +not arrive as expected, the force was compelled to fall back. The +retreat was conducted in good order, but the loss was heavy, as the +Burmese pressed hotly upon them for several miles. + +Since this unfortunate affair, the enemy had steadily advanced. +Maha Nemiow had moved directly upon Prome; advancing slowly, and +constantly stockading himself. The centre had also advanced; and +was now fortifying some heights above the river five miles away, +within sight of Prome. Sudda Woon was intrenching himself on the +opposite bank. All these divisions were working, day and night; +advancing steadily but slowly, and erecting formidable lines of +intrenchments as they went; and it seemed to be the intention of +the Burmese general to proceed in that manner, until the whole of +his troops were gathered within a very short distance of the town, +and then to rush upon it from all sides. + +In the morning, Stanley went to the lines of the 47th. Harry had, +of course, told his story on his arrival; and the tale had +circulated generally through the regiment and, as he rode in, the +men ran out from their huts and cheered him heartily. No less warm +a greeting did he receive from the officers, in spite of his +protest that there had really been no great difficulty or danger in +the affair. + +"What I specially admire," one of the officers said, laughing, "is +that any man should have run all this risk, on purpose, to prevent +himself from coming into an earldom. You had only to leave the +matter alone, and there you were--heir to title and estates." + +"I should have been haunted by Harry's ghost," Stanley laughed. "It +would have been as bad as Banquo and Macbeth; he would have sat at +my table, and stood at the head of my bed. No, no; that would have +been a much more serious affair, to face, than a party of Burmese. +The title and estates would have been too dear, at the price." + +"Well, you behaved like a brick, anyhow," the colonel said, "and +there is not a man in the regiment who would not have been proud, +indeed, if he had accomplished such a feat. Half my subalterns were +talking, at dinner last night, of learning the language so that, if +the chance fell in their way, they might emulate your doings." + +"It is rather a tough language to master," Stanley replied. "It +gave me more trouble than the four or five Indian languages I +speak. I am afraid the campaign will be over, a long time, before +any of your officers learn to talk Burmese well enough to pass as +natives." + +After the failure of the expedition of the 10th, no further effort +had been made against the enemy. Indeed, the troops had been +withdrawn from their outlying positions; and there had even been a +feint made of embarking stores, as if with the intention of +retiring down the river, in hopes of tempting the Burmese to make +an attack. + +The season had now come when operations could again be carried on, +and the general was anxious to strike a decisive blow at the enemy, +and then to set forward on the march towards Ava. As to the result +of the fight, no one entertained the slightest doubt; although the +disparity in numbers was very great for, while the Burmese +commander had nearly 70,000 men at his disposal, Sir Archibald +Campbell had no more than 6,000, of whom about one half were +British. + +It was determined that the main attack should be made on the +division of Maha Nemiow. This was now some six or seven miles away +and, beyond the fact that it was very strongly intrenched in the +jungle, no information whatever could be gained; for the most +vigilant watch was kept up by them, and all efforts to pass native +spies into their lines failed. But it was known that among his +division were 8,000 Shans, from Upper Burma and, as these men had +not hitherto come in contact with us, it was expected that they +would fight with more courage and resolution than those who had +become acquainted with our power. + +A large number of princes and nobles were with the force; and great +reliance was placed, by the Burmese, upon three young ladies of +high rank; who were believed by them to be endowed with +supernatural gifts, and to have the power of rendering the missiles +of the English innocuous. These young women, dressed in warlike +costume, constantly rode among the troops; animating them by their +presence, and exhorting them to deeds of courage. The English had +received vague rumours of the doings of these Burmese Joans of Arc, +and thought it probable that the enemy would fight better than +usual. + +On November 30th, arrangements were made for attacking the enemy on +the following morning. The flotilla were to open a furious +cannonade upon their works, on both sides of the river. A body of +native infantry were to drive in the advance posts of the centre; +while the main force was to attack their left in two columns, one +moving directly against it, while the other was to attack on the +right flank--thus preventing the enemy from retreating in the +direction of the centre. Four regiments of native infantry were +left in Prome. + +General Cotton commanded the main attack and, soon after the column +moved out from the camp, a tremendous cannonade showed that the +flotilla was engaged with the Burmese, on both sides of the river. +The column, which was composed of the 41st and 89th Regiments, with +two battalions of native infantry, proceeded some distance before +becoming engaged with the enemy's outposts; as the Burmese had been +deceived by the cannonade, and believed that the attack was +entirely upon the centre. The troops therefore reached their main +position, around two native villages, without serious opposition. + +Illustration: The old Burmese general was carried from point to +point in a litter. + +As they issued from the jungle into the cleared space in front of +the stockade they rapidly formed up, under a tremendous fire, and +rushed forward to the attack. The old Burmese general--who was too +infirm to walk--could be seen, carried from point to point in a +litter, cheering on his men, while the three Amazons exposed +themselves fearlessly to the fire. The ladder parties, however, +rushed forward unchecked and, in spite of the opposition of the +enemy, scaled the stockade at one point, and won a footing on the +rampart of earth behind it. Others pressed after them and, soon, a +destructive fire was opened upon the crowded mass, pent up between +the outer stockade and the next. The Burmese method of forming +stockade behind stockade was useful, against a foe of no greater +dash and energy than themselves; but was absolutely fatal when +opposed to English troops, who gave them no time to fall back +through the narrow openings in the palings. These were soon blocked +by the dying and dead. + +Some of the Shans, led by their chiefs, fought with desperate +courage; but were unable to stand the advance of the British, whose +steady volleys, poured in at distances of a few yards, swept them +away. Wounded horses, rushing wildly about in the throng, added to +the terrible confusion. Groups of men endeavoured to cut a way +through the stockades behind, others strove to climb over. Maha +Nemiow was killed, while bravely exhorting his men to stand their +ground, and one of the heroic Amazons was shot. As soon as the +troops reached the spot where she fell, and saw that she was a +woman, she was carried into a cottage; and there died, a few hours +afterwards. Stockade after stockade was carried, until the whole +position fell into our hands. + +In the meantime the other column, commanded by General Campbell +himself, and consisting of the 13th, 38th, 47th, and 87th +Regiments, and the 38th Madras Infantry, had moved down on the +other side of the Nawine river; and taken up a position to command +the ford there, by which the fugitives from the stockade must +cross, on their way to join the centre. As the crowd of frightened +men issued from the jungle, and poured across the ford, the +artillery opened upon them with shrapnel, and completed their +discomfiture. All thought of joining the centre was abandoned and, +re-entering the jungle, they scattered; and the greater portion of +them started for their homes, intent only on avoiding another +contest with their foes. Another of the Burmese heroines was +killed, at the ford. + +Three hundred men had been killed, at the storming of the stockade; +but a far greater loss took place in the retreat--very few of the +Shans ever regaining their country; the greater portion perishing +from starvation, in the great forests through which they travelled +in order to escape the Burmese authorities, who would have forced +them to rejoin the army. + + + +Chapter 17: The Pride Of Burma Humbled. + + +As soon as the victory was completed, the troops piled arms; and +were allowed two hours' rest. Then they marched back, to the point +where General Campbell's division had forded the Nawine river in +the morning. From this point, a path led towards the enemy's +centre; this it was determined to attack, at daybreak on the +following morning, before the news of the defeat of its left could +reach it. + +The day had been a long and fatiguing one, and it was late before +the troops all reached their halting place. A meal was served out, +and then all lay down to rest. A messenger was sent to Prome, to +announce the success that had been gained; and to request the +commander of the flotilla to open fire, in the morning, as soon as +the foe was seen to issue from the jungle in front of the Wongee's +main position at Napadee. + +Long before daylight, the troops were in motion. General Campbell's +division led the way, along the narrow track leading towards the +river; while General Cotton, who followed, was ordered to break off +at any path which led towards the Burmese division, to make his way +through the forest, and to attack the stockades directly he reached +them. The main division would attack, as soon as they heard his +guns. + +After a two hours' march, the first division came out on open +ground by the river side, signalled their arrival to the flotilla, +and formed up in front of the stockaded heights of Napadee. The +position was an extremely strong one. The enemy occupied three +ranges of hills, rising one behind the other, and each commanding +the one in front of it. One flank of these hills was protected by +the river, the other by the almost impenetrable forest. The hills +were all covered with stockades and, as they moved forward, the +troops were exposed to so heavy a fire from an enemy entrenched at +the edge of the jungle on the right that, before they could advance +further, it was necessary to first drive them from this position. +Six companies of the 87th were sent back into the forest and, +making their way through this, came down in the rear of the +stockades, speedily cleared them of their defenders, and compelled +the advance force of the enemy to join their main body. + +The troops then moved forward to the foot of the first hill, where +two strong redoubts had been erected by the enemy. The fleet opened +fire; but the column was halted, for a time, awaiting the sound of +firing that should tell them General Cotton's column was engaged. +No sound, however, was heard, for this force had been unable to +make its way through the dense forest; and General Campbell, at +last, gave the order for the attack. + +It was commenced by the 47th and 38th Native Infantry, under +Colonel Elvington; who pushed through the jungle and forest, until +they reached some of the flanking outworks on the hill. These they +attacked with such dash and determination that they speedily +obtained possession of them, and thus produced a favourable +diversion for the main attack. + +This, consisting of the 13th, 38th, and 87th Regiments, advanced +steadily, without returning a shot to the incessant fire from the +enemy's various entrenchments; captured the two redoubts at the +bottom of the hill; and then pressed upwards, carrying position +after position at the point of the bayonet, till they arrived at +the summit of the first hill. + +The Burmese fugitives, as they fled to the next line of defence, +shook the courage of the troops there; and the British, pushing +forward hotly on the rear of the flying crowd, carried work after +work until, in the course of an hour, the whole position, nearly +three miles in extent, was entirely in their possession. Between +forty and fifty guns were captured, and the enemy's loss in killed +and wounded was very great while, by desertion alone, the Wongee +lost a third of his army. While the attack had been going on, the +flotilla had passed the works protecting the river face of the +hills, and had captured all the boats and stores, filled with +supplies for the use of the Burmese army. + +Thus, two of the three Burmese divisions had now been completely +routed; and there remained only that of Sudda Woon, on the other +side of the river. The troops were allowed two days' rest and, on +the morning of the 5th, a force advanced on board the flotilla. +Their passage across the river was covered by the fire of a rocket +brigade and a mortar battery--which had on the previous night been +established on an island--and they landed at some distance above +the enemy's stockades. They then marched round and attacked these +in flank and rear, while the batteries and boats of the flotilla +cannonaded them in front. + +The enemy's troops were already disheartened, by the defeat they +had seen inflicted upon the Wongee's army and, after a feeble +resistance, fled to a second line of stockades in the jungle to +their rear. The troops, however, pressed so hotly upon them that +they were unable to make any effectual opposition here. Numbers +fell, while endeavouring to pass through the narrow entrances of +the work; and the rest fled, in terror, into the woods. + +These extensive operations had been carried out with the loss of +six officers, and some seventy or eighty men, only. + +It was known that the enemy had very strongly fortified several +positions, in and around Meaday; and it was determined to push +forward, at once, on the long march of three hundred miles to Ava, +before the enemy could rally from their defeat, and gather for the +defence of these positions. On the 9th the first division, under +General Campbell himself, started from Prome. The roads were +extremely bad, and they were able to move but slowly. + +Their course was first directed inland; as it was intended to turn +the enemy's position at Meaday, by following a road several miles +from the river, and thus forcing them to fall back as we advanced. +On the next day the force reached the spot where Colonel M'Dowall +had been killed, in the unsuccessful attack upon Maha Nemiow; and +it then turned north, and followed the road parallel to the river. + +On the 12th tremendous rains, for some hours, converted the road +into a morass and, although the march was but five miles long, the +greater portion of the column failed to reach its destination. +This, however, was not the worst. Cholera broke out at once, and +carried off a large number of victims--two of the British regiments +being rendered almost unfit for service by its ravages. + +On the 14th the division encamped on dry ground, on a ridge of +wooded hills, and waited for a couple of days to allow the baggage +train to come up. The change greatly benefited the health of the +troops, and amusement was afforded by the partridges, jungle fowl, +and deer which abounded in the neighbourhood of the camp. + +Up to this point, no single native had been seen. The villages were +all destroyed, and the country was completely deserted. On the 16th +a strong Burmese fortification was taken, it being unoccupied save +by a small picket, which retired on our advance. This had evidently +been erected for the purpose of preventing the river fortifications +from being turned, and its abandonment proved that the object of +the land march had been gained; and that the enemy had abandoned +the positions they had, with so much care, prepared for the defence +of the river. + +On the 18th they joined General Cotton's column and, the next day, +entered Meaday. Here a terrible spectacle was met with. The town +and the ground within the stockades was strewn with dead and dying; +some from wounds, others from cholera--for the ravages of this +plague had been as great, among the Burmese, as in the British +force. A number of men were found crucified on gibbets, doubtless +as a punishment for attempting to desert. The air was pestilent; +and the force was glad, indeed, to march on the next morning from +the locality. + +They gained something, but not much, from the change. For the next +fifty miles, dead bodies were met with at very short intervals and, +each day before camping, many corpses had to be removed before the +tents could be fixed. + +It was now known that the Burmese army, in its retreat, had been +concentrated at Melloon, where the reserve of 10,000 men had been +posted. On the 27th, the division encamped within four miles of +that town. They had now marched a hundred and forty miles, from +Prome, without meeting a single inhabitant of the country, or being +enabled to obtain any cattle, whatever, for the supply of the +troops, so effectually had the enemy wasted the country as they +retired. + +Melloon stood on the opposite bank of the Irrawaddy; and letters +had arrived from that town saying that a commissioner had arrived, +from Ava, with full powers from the king to conclude a treaty of +peace. Colonel Adair and Stanley, accordingly, were sent off the +next morning to Melloon, to arrange for an immediate meeting for +the commissioners. However, they could come to no arrangement, the +Burmese leaders insisting that so important a business could only +be carried on when a favourable day arrived; and that no time +could, at present, be stated. Seeing that the principal object of +the Burmese was to gain time, the colonel informed them through +Stanley that, as no arrangements had been made, the troops would +recommence their advance as soon as he returned to the camp and, +accordingly, the next morning the division moved forward to a town +immediately opposite Melloon. + +That place stood on the face of a sloping hill and, as the +Irrawaddy was here but 600 yards broad, a good view was obtained of +the fortifications. The principal stockade was in the form of a +square, about a mile on each face, mounting a considerable number +of guns--especially on the side facing the river; and a succession +of stockades extended for a mile farther along the banks. The great +work was crowded with men. In front of the town lay a large fleet +of war boats, and larger craft with stores. + +A short time after the troops reached the spot, a great noise of +gongs, drums, and other warlike instruments arose on the other +side, and crowds of boatmen were seen running down to the vessels. +These were soon manned, and oars got out, and they began to row up +the river. As, owing to the intricacy of the channel, the steamboat +and flotilla had not yet arrived, a few shots were fired at the +boats by the field guns. This had the desired effect, many of the +boatmen jumping overboard, leaving their craft to drift down the +river; while the great bulk hastily turned their vessels about, and +anchored in their former position. + +As soon as the steamer with the flotilla came up, two war boats +pushed off from shore, saluted the steamer, and rowed alongside of +her until she and the flotilla were safely anchored above the town. +This was so evidently a mark of a real desire for the suspension of +hostilities that the two officers were again sent across the river. +A truce was agreed upon, and an arrangement made for the meeting of +the negotiators, upon the following day. + +Four meetings were held, between the two commissioners and those +appointed by the British general, the meetings taking place on +boats moored in the centre of the river. At length the treaty was +accepted and signed, by the Burmese, and fifteen days' truce +allowed for the ratification of the treaty by the king. As the end +of that period approached, the Burmese protested that they had not +yet received an answer, and asked for further time; which was +refused, unless on the condition that Melloon was evacuated, and +the Burmese army fell back until the ratification of the treaty +reached them. As had been for some time strongly suspected, the +negotiations were simply a device to arrest our advance; and the +treaty was afterwards found in the Burmese camp, it never having +been forwarded to Ava. + +At midnight on the 18th, when the armistice came to a conclusion, +the troops began throwing up earthworks, the heavy guns were landed +from the flotilla and, at ten o'clock the next morning, +twenty-eight guns were in position ready to open fire. In spite of +remonstrances that had been made, the Burmese had, night after +night during the armistice, continued to work surreptitiously at +their entrenchments. It was hoped for a moment that, when they saw +the speed with which our batteries had been thrown up and armed, +they would offer no farther resistance. As, however, they were +evidently preparing for action, our guns opened fire at eleven +o'clock. + +This was kept up for two hours. While it was going on, the troops +intended for the assault were embarked in boats, some distance up +the river, so as to ensure their not being carried by the force of +the stream across the face of the Burmese works, and exposed to the +concentrated fire of the enemy. They were divided into four +brigades; the first of which--consisting of the 13th and 38th +Regiments, under Lieutenant Colonel Sale--were to land below the +stockade, and to attack its south-western angle; while the other +three brigades were to land above it, to carry some outworks there, +and to attack the northern face. + +A strong northerly wind, and the violent current, prevented the +assaults being made simultaneously. The first brigade was carried +too far across and, as it passed the stockade, was exposed to the +fire of the guns and musketry of the river defences; while the +three other brigades were unable, for some time, to reach their +intended landing places. Colonel Sale was among those wounded by +the Burmese fire but, directly the first brigade reached the shore, +they formed up under the partial cover of a shelving bank and, led +by Lieutenant Colonel Frith, moved forward to the assault in +admirable order. When within a short distance there was a forward +rush, in spite of the storm of shot. The ladder party gained the +foot of the stockade and, placing the ladders, climbed up, and +leapt down among the surging crowd of the enemy. Others followed +and, soon, a firm footing was obtained in the works. Then the men +of the two regiments--whose total strength did not exceed five +hundred--advanced steadily, drove before them some 10,000 armed +men, and expelled them from the works that the Burmese had deemed +impregnable. + +While this was going on, the other three brigades had landed above +the stockade and, now falling upon the enemy as they poured out +from their works, completed their defeat. All the stockades were +carried, and the whole of the artillery and stores fell into our +possession. + +Four days later, the army again began its advance. They were met by +four Englishmen, who had been taken prisoners; and an American, who +had also been held in confinement. These had been sent to assure +the English general that the king was in earnest in his desire for +peace. It was but too evident, however, that no confidence could be +placed in Burmese negotiations; and it was, moreover, known that +another army was being assembled, in the greatest haste, to bar the +advance. + +On the 14th of February the British reached Pakang-Yay, having +passed Sembeughewn on the opposite shore. This was the point where +the road from Aracan reached the Irrawaddy, and it had been +arranged that the force that had been operating in Aracan should, +if possible, effect a junction with Sir Archibald Campbell here. A +message brought down by a native was, however, received; stating +that the force had suffered very severely from fever and cholera, +and that the natural obstacles were found to be too great to be +overcome by troops debilitated by disease--that the attempt had, +therefore, been abandoned. Fortunately, the English general was +well able to do without this addition to his strength. He had +already proved that his command was perfectly capable of defeating +any Burmese force that could be brought against him, and an +addition would only have increased the difficulty of transport. + +On the 9th of March the British force which, owing to the necessity +for leaving strong bodies to hold Melloon and other points that had +been captured, now mustered less than 2,000 fighting men, advanced +to attack the enemy, whose numbers were estimated at 16,000. + +The new commander of the Burmese adopted other tactics than his +predecessors. His stockaded position was in front of the town of +Pagahn, but he occupied the jungle in great force, and attacked our +advance guard, five miles from the town. As the enemy occupied the +hills on both sides of the main road, Sir A. Campbell divided his +force and led half of it through the jungle on the right, while +General Cotton led the other half through the woods on the left. + +The Burmese fought with considerable obstinacy. General Campbell +and his staff, with thirty-eight troopers and fifty men of the +13th, were somewhat in advance of the column; when the enemy closed +in on both flanks, and even got in their rear. These were, however, +dispersed by the rest of the 13th and, driving back the Burmese on +the flanks, the advance was continued. Presently, however, as the +British issued from the jungle, a mass of the enemy's horse charged +down, drove back the skirmishers and, for a time, the position of +the general and his staff was one of great peril. His little body +of troopers, however, dashed boldly at the assailants and held them +in check, until the guns that had followed the staff were brought +forward from the jungle. Then the troopers divided and rode right +and left; and the guns, opening fire, checked the assailants until +the infantry came up. + +The Burmese army was now seen, drawn up in the form of a +semicircle, in the open. The two British columns were united and, +together, moved forward to attack the centre of the crescent, +disregarding the fire from its wings. When within charging +distance, they went forward with a rush and, cheering lustily, fell +upon the Burmese; and broke their centre, thus isolating the two +wings. The Burmese at once retreated, with the greatest haste, to +the stockaded position in their rear. As usual, the narrow +entrances to the stockades caused great delay; and the British were +upon them before they were, in any way, prepared to resist the +assault. + +Heralding their advance by sweeping volleys, they fell upon the +Burmese with the bayonet, and drove them out of their works. The +enemy made an attempt to rally, behind the walls and in the pagodas +of the town, but the effort was vain. They were driven out with +great slaughter, hundreds were drowned in endeavouring to swim the +river, and the army was finally dispersed in all directions. + +The effect of this victory was at once apparent. The country +people--who had, on the advance of the British force from Prome, +been cleared out from the villages along the whole line of +route--being now freed from the restraint of their troops, came +flocking back in great numbers--some by the roads and some in +boats--and it was evident that they regarded the struggle as +definitely terminated. There was, indeed, no possibility of further +resistance; as the armies of Burma, raised with immense difficulty +and by heavy bounties and the promises of great reward, were +hopelessly scattered, and Ava lay open to the British advance. + +In other directions their position was equally desperate. Aracan +had been wholly rescued from their grasp. A British force in Pegu +had marched up the river Sitang and, after the repulse of a party +of a hundred and fifty men, imprudently sent to attack Sitang +itself, captured the place after a sharp fight and, receiving +reinforcements from Rangoon, continued their way up the river and +captured Toungoo; while the northern force had driven the Burmese +out of Manipur, and had reached the river Ningti by the 2nd of +February, and were in a position to advance direct upon Ava. + +After a halt of two days, General Campbell advanced on the 12th of +February. Mr. Price, the American who had been sent down after the +capture of Melloon, went forward to Ava with the treaty that had +been drawn up before the capture of that place; and the king had no +longer any hesitation in complying with its terms--and was, indeed, +delighted to find that the recent victory of the invaders had not +increased their demands. He at once sent down to accept them but, +as no official ratification was sent, the march continued; while +Mr. Price again returned to Ava. When the force was within four +days' march of the capital, the latter returned with the Burmese +commissioners and other high functionaries, with the ratified +treaty, and the first instalment of the money that was to be paid. + +It was a disappointment to the army that, after their long march +and many sufferings, they were not to be allowed to enter the +enemy's capital in triumph. Undoubtedly, however, the course taken +was the wisest. Ava was regarded as a sacred city, and it was to +save it from the humiliation of being occupied by the invaders that +the king had brought himself to accept the terms of the treaty. Had +the English general insisted upon entering the capital, and signing +the treaty there, he would have found no one to meet him. The +population would have been driven out, the king and court would +have retired farther up the country, and the war might have +continued for an indefinite time. + +Already its cost had been enormous, exceeding 5,000,000 pounds +sterling. During the first eleven months after landing at Rangoon, +nearly half of the Europeans died and, from the time they advanced +from that town with fresh reinforcements from India, to the arrival +near Ava, a similarly heavy loss was sustained. Four percent of the +number engaged was killed in action. The climate of Aracan was +still more deadly, as three-fourths of the white troops employed +there died, and very few of the survivors were ever fit for service +afterwards. The sepoys suffered less in Aracan, losing only ten +percent of their number, though nearly half the force were in +hospital for some time. + +According to agreement the Burmese, as soon as peace was concluded, +sent down a large number of boats for the conveyance of the troops +down the river. As they descended it, the garrisons left at Melloon +and other places were withdrawn. One of the native regiments, with +some elephants and guns, left the force at Sembeughewn; and marched +thence to Aracan, for the purpose of investigating the country, and +proving whether it was practicable for the passage of troops in +case another advance upon Ava should ever be necessary. They found +the road unexpectedly good, and met with no resistance whatever, +except in the passage of some passes over the mountains. + +At Melloon, Stanley was very glad to meet his cousin again, for the +47th had been left in garrison there. Harry had been down again, +with a sharp attack of fever, but was now recovering. + +"So it is all over, Stanley, and your chances of an earldom have +nearly slipped through your fingers." + +"I am glad, indeed, that it is so," Stanley laughed, "in the first +place, because I could only have succeeded to it at your death; and +in the second place, because I have no ambition, whatever, for a +title. I am not nineteen yet, and should greatly prefer to make my +own way, than to find myself with nothing whatever to do, except to +spend money as it dropped into my lap. + +"Now that everything is settled, and that Aracan has become +English, and we have the seaports on the Tenasserim coast, trade +will increase tremendously. You may be sure that the Burmese will +be only too glad to flock into our provinces, and to live under a +fair rule, to escape the tyranny of their own officials; and my +uncle is just the man to take advantage of the new openings. I +don't say that I want to live out here all my life. At any rate, I +hope by the time that I am thirty, to be able to come home for a +year's holiday; and it is just possible that, by then, we may have +grown into such a big firm that we may establish headquarters in +London, instead of getting all our goods from Calcutta. + +"There is certain to be a very big trade here, in teak alone. The +price in Pegu is a great deal below that in India and, if we had a +house in London, we should avoid having to pay commissions, and +perhaps get better prices for our wood. Of course, my uncle may by +that time think of retiring himself and, in that case, I might have +to stay somewhat longer out here; but I know that he likes the +climate, and I have heard him say that, as he has very few +acquaintances in England, he thinks that he should prefer a life in +Calcutta to one in London." + +"I should not wonder if I go home, very shortly," Harry said. "My +last letter told me that my uncle was in failing health, and that +he would like to have me at home with him. If the next letter +confirms that, I am afraid I shall have either to resign my +commission, or exchange into a regiment at home. Of course, at his +death I should have to leave the army, anyhow. It would be +ridiculous for a subaltern to be an earl; besides, there are things +one would have to do. I suppose there are estates to be looked +after, and all sorts of nuisances. + +"Anyhow, I shall always be glad I have had my share in this +expedition. I have learned what campaigning is; and I must say +that, under such circumstances as we have gone through, it is not +quite so pleasurable as I had expected. Half one's friends are dead +or invalided home; and one never knows, when one wakes in the +morning, whether one may not be down with cholera before night. The +fighting is all well enough but, after all, that takes up but a +very small portion of one's time; and marching and, I may say, +living generally in this hot, sweltering climate, with its six +months of rain, is not enviable work. However, I have gone through +one regular campaign, and that as severe a one as British troops +have ever performed; and above all, old man, I have met you, and we +have come to be great friends, and I have learned what one fellow +will do for another." + +"I am sure I am very glad to have gone through it, too. I have been +fortunate, indeed, in never having been laid up for a single day; +and there is no doubt that having served on the staff will be of +great advantage to me, even as a trader. I own that I should like +to have retired a captain. Of course, promotion has been +tremendously fast, owing to the death vacancies, but I have still +two lieutenants over me." + +"You are sure to get the step, Stanley. You have been in general +orders twice, besides that notice you got for my rescue. Also, the +doctors say that a number of the men who have been sent down to the +coast are not likely to live many weeks and, as five of your +seniors have been invalided, you may get your step, in the natural +course of things, at any moment. + +"If I were you, I should ask for three months' leave before +rejoining your regiment. There will be no difficulty about that, +after you have been upwards of two years in constant work; and the +general will certainly not refuse. Before the end of that time you +will have seen your uncle, and talked matters over. Then, if you +choose to resign your commission, you can of course do so but, as +you are pretty sure to get your step, by death, before the end of +the three months; and as the general's despatches strongly +recommend your services, you may get your brevet majority before +your resignation reaches England. A man who has been mentioned two +or three times in despatches, and is specially recommended for +honours, is sure to get his brevet majority directly he gets his +company." + +On reaching Rangoon, Stanley learned that two of the invalids had +died, either on the way down or before they could be put on board a +ship; and that one of the majors, who had been sent to India for +change, four months before, had also succumbed; so that he had +already obtained his company--a promotion which would have been, at +any other time, extraordinary; but which, in a campaign where half +those engaged were carried off, was nothing remarkable. Being still +on the headquarter staff, he embarked with Sir Archibald Campbell. + +"You still hold firm to your determination to leave the service, +Captain Brooke?" the general said, in the course of the passage to +Calcutta. + +"Yes, sir. I am sure that it is best for me." + +"I think it is, Brooke. Of course, you have been exceptionally +fortunate in getting such rapid promotion. Still, a good business +is a great deal better than soldiering. I wrote very strongly in +your favour, when I sent off my despatches the day we came down to +the coast; and you are certain of your brevet. Still, it is just as +well that the news of your resignation should not get home before +the Gazette comes out, with your name in it. I think the best thing +that I can do is to give you leave, for a time, as soon as we get +to Calcutta. I am sure that you deserve a rest, for your work has +been terribly heavy." + +"Thank you, sir; that was just the favour that I was going to ask +you. I shall find out, as soon as I get there, where my uncle is; +and join him. My own mind is quite made up, but he has certainly a +right to be consulted, before I take any final step." + +"Quite right. I feel no doubt that his opinion will agree with +yours; and I think that you are showing a good deal more wisdom +than most fellows would do, to give up the service when you have +distinguished yourself, and have a much better chance than falls to +the lot of one man in a hundred. Still, there can be no real doubt +that a man in a good business, out here, can retire early and go +home with a fortune; while in the army you are liable at any time, +after you get to the rank of colonel, to be laid on the shelf for +years. + +"Besides, you will be your own master, which is more than anyone in +the army can say. You can go home when you like, either for a stay +or for a permanency; and you are not liable to have to run the risk +of another campaign such as this has been." + +"If one was sure of campaigns, I don't think that I could possibly +bring myself to leave the service; but it is the probability of +being kept, for three or four years at a time, doing nothing at +Calcutta or Madras that decided me." + +The general nodded. + +"You are quite right, Brooke; on active service a soldier's life +is, indeed, a stirring one; but there is nothing more dull and +monotonous than garrison life, in peace time." + +Accordingly, as soon as they landed in Calcutta, Stanley was put in +orders for absence on leave, for three months. He learned, from his +uncle's agent, that they had heard from him only a few days before, +at Chittagong; and that he was then on the point of leaving for +Aracan, whither he had ordered a large consignment of goods to be +forwarded to him, by the next ship. + +Three days later, Stanley started to join him, leaving his address +at Aracan with Sir Archibald Campbell, in case there should be need +to recall him before the three months' leave expired. The vessel in +which he was sailing carried the consignment of goods to his uncle; +and he had, therefore, no fear of finding that the latter had left +Aracan before his arrival. Meinik was still with him. He had left +the army after the last battle had been fought, and had travelled +to the spot where he had buried his money before embarking with +Stanley in the canoe and, after an absence of three days, rejoined +the force. On the way down to Rangoon, Stanley had a long talk with +him as to his future plans. + +"I have only one plan, master, and that is to stay with you, as +long as I live." + +"But you will have plenty to live comfortably upon now, Meinik. +For, after all that you have done for me, of course I shall arrange +for you to have a sum that will keep you in comfort." + +Meinik shook his head. + +"Burma is a bad country, master. After living with the English, I +would not go back to live under the king's officers, in any case. +Any money that I had would be squeezed out of me, before long. No, +master, I will go with you, unless you drive me from you; if you +do, I will go to Chittagong, and live there, but I do not think +that you will do that." + +"Certainly not, Meinik. As long as you are willing to remain with +me, I shall be very glad, indeed, to have you; but if, at any time, +you wish to marry and settle down on land of your own, I shall give +you five hundred pounds--which is only a small portion of the sum +those rubies, which you got your band to give me, brought me in." + +"I daresay I shall marry," Meinik said, "but that will make no +difference. As long as I live, I shall stay with you." + +Meinik had been astounded at Calcutta; which presented a strong +contrast, indeed, to the city which, as a Burman, he had regarded +as the most important place in the world. + +"The Burmese are fools, master. They should have sent two or three +men here, before they made up their minds to go to war. If they had +been truly told what Calcutta was like, they would never have +ventured to make war with the English." + + + +Chapter 18: In Business Again. + + +When the vessel arrived at the mouth of the Aracan river, a canoe +was seen coming out from Akyah--a town situated at the entrance to +the principal of the several channels by which the river makes its +way, through a number of sand banks and islands, into the sea. As +it approached, Stanley recognized his uncle sitting in the stern. + +"Well, uncle, how are you?" he called out, as the boat approached +the side. + +"What, is it you, Stanley? I am glad, indeed, to see you. I have +watched the papers anxiously, to see if your name appeared among +those who have been killed or have died; not seeing it, I hoped +that you were all right. Of course we heard, from the Madras +regiment that came across from Sembeughewn, that it was all over; +and that all the troops would be shipped off, as soon as they went +down to Rangoon; but I have not seen any papers lately, and so have +not had a chance of learning any news of you. I fancied, though, +that you would be back at Calcutta by this time; and thought that I +might get a letter from you, by this ship." + +By this time he was on deck, and after a hearty shaking of hands, +Stanley asked what he was doing here. + +"I did not expect to see you until we got to Aracan." + +"I have been up there, lad. It is a decaying old place, and the +stream is in many places shallow; so that it would be very +difficult to take up a ship of any size. I foresee, therefore, that +this is going to be the chief port of the province--timber will be +floated down here, and rice brought down in native boats--so I +shall make my headquarters here, as far as this district is +concerned, and put Johnson in charge. I doubt whether, for a time, +we shall do as much trade as we shall higher up the coast; but +everyone expects a great Burmese immigration, and a large trade is +likely to spring up, in time. + +"I have not quite determined on my next move, and it is not +improbable that I shall go down in this ship and establish myself, +for a time, at Martaban; and open a trade in Tenasserim. If I +decide on that, I shall only get on shore a portion of my goods, +and take the rest on with me there. + +"Now, what are you going to do, Stanley?" + +"Just what you think best, uncle. I should have thought that, as I +speak the language, it would be better for me to go on to Martaban; +and for you to work Chittagong, and the district up to Assam." + +"Then you are going to stay with me, lad!" his uncle exclaimed, in +a tone of much satisfaction. "I was afraid that you would have got +so fond of soldiering that you would have thrown this over, +altogether." + +"Not a bit of it, uncle. I am on three months' leave at present +and, at the end of that time, I shall resign. You know I am a +captain, now--that is to say, that I have got my rank by death +vacancies, though until the Gazette comes out from England, I can +hardly be said to be a pucka captain; and, what is more, the +general himself assured me that, after being mentioned in +despatches two or three times, and at his strong commendation of my +services, I was sure of the brevet rank of major." + +His uncle took off his hat, gravely. + +"I must apologize to you," he said, "for addressing you as 'lad.' I +had no idea that you were a full-grown captain, still less that you +might soon be a major." + +"I don't care a snap for the title, uncle," Stanley said, laughing, +"except that it may be an advantage to me, in places where there +are garrisons; and indeed, generally where there are white +officials." + +"A very great advantage, Stanley. + +"Well, lad, I have been coining money, since I saw you at Rangoon. +I have been sending a consignment of bullocks down there, every +week; and have done almost as much with the Manipur force. I have +also got the contract regularly, now, for the supply of the troops +at Calcutta. Other trade has, of course, been at a standstill. Now +that everything has quieted down, there will be a perfect rush; and +I have been sorely troubled, in my mind, whether it would be best +to stay up here and take advantage of it, or to be one of the first +to open trade at these new ports. Of course, if you are ready to +take Martaban, that will decide me; and I shall take passage in the +first ship going up to Chittagong. My own boat and the dhow are +both there, and I shall at once work up all the rivers, and set +things going again. + +"I have a capital fellow, a native, who is carrying on the cattle +business for me and, at Chittagong, I shall try and get hold of +three or four more trustworthy fellows, to take charge of depots. I +see a big future before us, and that before long. I did well with +those gems of yours--they fetched 3500 pounds, which I used, +besides what you handed over to me--for there was no buying up the +cattle without cash and, as I generally have to wait two months +after they are shipped, before I get paid, ready money was +invaluable and, indeed, I could not have gone into the thing on +anything like the same scale, if it had not been for your money. +The Calcutta people would have helped me, to a certain point; but +they would never have ventured upon such advances as I required. +Your 5000 pounds has doubled itself since I met you at Rangoon. I +calculate that our stores at the different depots are worth 4000 +pounds so that, at the present moment, the firm of Pearson & Brooke +have at their command a capital of 14,000 pounds." + +A portion of the cargo was landed at Akyah. Stanley went down with +the rest to Martaban, and his uncle sailed for Chittagong. A few +months later, a store was opened at Rangoon. Parsee store-keepers +were sent from Calcutta, by Tom Pearson; and these were placed in +control of the stores there, and at Martaban--Stanley being in +charge of these two stations, and Akyah; and having a native craft +of his own, and a boat for river work similar to that of his uncle. + +A year later he received a letter from Harry, saying that his uncle +had died, a month after his return to England; and that he was now +established as one of the pillars of the state. + +"As I went through London, on my arrival," he said, "I looked up +your mother at the address you gave me, at Dulwich. I found her +very well, and very comfortable. She was full of your praises and, +as I was equally so, your ears ought to have tingled while we were +together. Of course they wanted to hear all about you, and most of +it was new to them; for you had said nothing of your adventure with +that leopard, and only a few lines about the rescue of your humble +servant; though you had told them that I stood in your way of the +earldom. Your mother said that she was prouder of you than if you +were an earl, only that she would have liked to have you at home. I +told her that you and your uncle were shaking the pagoda tree, and +that you would come home as yellow as a guinea and as rich as a +nabob, in the course of a few years. + +"Your sisters are older than I expected to find them. Of course, +you always spoke of them as when you saw them last. They are both +growing into very pretty girls, the elder especially. I made your +mother promise to bring them down to stay with me, for a bit, when +I came into the title; which I knew could not be long, for I had +called that morning on my uncle's solicitors, and they told me that +he was not expected to live many weeks. As it is only a month since +he died, I suppose I ought not to have visitors, just yet; but in a +few weeks I shall go up to town, and bring them down with me. I +cannot help thinking that it is a little selfish for, when they see +this place, they would not be human if they did not feel that it +would have been yours, if it had not been for your getting me out +of the hands of those Burmese. + +"I see that you are gazetted captain, this week. I suppose, long +before this, you have settled down to your old work of going up +sluggish streams; and trying to stir up the equally sluggish native +to a sense of the advantages of British goods. At present, I am +quite content to do nothing particular--to ride and drive about, +return calls, and so on--but I expect, before very long, I shall +get restless, and want to be doing something. However, there is the +Continent open to one, and decent hotels to stop at. No fevers +there, and no Burmese brigands." + +A month later he had a letter from his mother, which had been +written before that of Harry, but had been sent to Calcutta and +thence to Akyah; and had there lain until his return, two months +later, from a boat journey up to Pegu. She said how kind it was of +his cousin to come in, to give them news of him, the very day he +arrived in London. + +"Of course, we were delighted with all that he told us about you; +but it made us anxious to think of your running into so many +dangers. We like him very much. We could not help laughing, because +he seemed quite concerned that you should not have the peerage, +instead of him. He seems likely to come into it soon, for he tells +us that the earl is very ill. He says that we must come down and +pay him a visit, as soon as he is master there; but I don't know +whether that can be. Of course it would be a nice change, and I +believe that it is a very fine place. I said that it would seem +strange our going there, when there are no ladies, and that +bachelors did not generally entertain; but he said that, in the +first place he should have his sisters there, who were about the +same age as my girls; and that as we were his nearest relations, +and you were at present his heir, it would be quite the right and +proper thing for us to come down. He seemed quite in earnest about +it, and I should not be surprised if we go." + +Three months later, Stanley heard that the visit had been paid, and +that they had stayed a fortnight there. + +"It feels quite funny, settling down here again after being in that +big house, with all those servants and grandeur; not that there is +any grandeur about Harry. He insists, being relations, that we +shall call him by his Christian name. Everything was delightful. +Every afternoon we used to go driving and, of a morning, he +generally rode with the girls. He had a very pretty, gentle horse +for Agnes; and a gray pony, a beauty, for Kate. I have a strong +suspicion that he had bought them both, on purpose. I should not be +surprised--but no, I won't say anything about it." + +Stanley puzzled over this sentence, which was followed by: + +"His sisters are very nice girls." + +"It is evidently something about Harry," he said to himself; +"possibly she has taken the idea into her head that he may fall in +love with Agnes. That, certainly, would be a very nice thing; but I +don't suppose it is anything more than an idea of mother's." + +However, four months later he received a letter from Harry, +announcing his engagement. + +"I told your mother that she must let me write by the mail, before +she did; as it was only right that I should have the pleasure of +telling you the news, myself. It is splendid, old man; upon my +word, I don't know which I ought to feel most grateful to you--for +saving my life, or for getting me to know your sister. It seems to +me a regular dispensation of Providence. You did everything you +could to prevent yourself from coming into a title; and now your +sister is going to take it, and me. It is quite right that we +should come to be brothers-in-law, for we are quite like brothers, +already. + +"We are to be married in the spring. How I wish you could be with +us. Your absence will be the only thing wanting, to make everything +perfect. I do hope you don't mean to stay, grilling out there, many +years. It seems to me monstrous that I should be having estates and +a big income, and all that sort of thing, when I have done nothing +to deserve it; and that you should be toiling in that beastly +climate. If I thought that there was the least chance of your +rushing home, when you get this letter, I declare that I would put +off the marriage for a month or so, so that you should be here in +time; but as I feel sure that you won't do anything of the sort, it +will be of no use for me to make such a noble sacrifice." + +Stanley had received the news that he was gazetted brevet-major, a +month after he was promoted to the rank of captain, and two months +before his name appeared as having retired from the army. He +derived, as he expected, much benefit from his connection with the +army in his position at his three receiving ports, as it placed him +on a very pleasant footing with the military and civil officials; +and it rendered his occasional visits to Calcutta and Madras +exceedingly pleasant, for in both towns he found many officers +whose acquaintance he had made, during the expedition. He was +always made an honorary member of the messes and clubs, during his +stays there. + +The business grew rapidly. The work of the earlier years had so +well paved the way for larger operations that they were able to +more than hold their own against other traders who, after the +troubles were at an end, sought to establish themselves at various +points on the western coast of the peninsula; and after six more +years of hard and continuous work, the business came to be a very +large and important one. + +"I think it more than probable," Stanley wrote to his mother, "that +before very long I shall be returning home. My uncle spoke about +it, the last time that I saw him; and said that we were outgrowing +Calcutta, and ought to establish ourselves in London. + +"'We can hold on a bit longer,' he said, 'but we must come to that, +sooner or later and, when it does, you must be the one to go to +England and take charge. I may go home before that for a few +months, but I have no wish or desire to stop there. We have now got +a good staff; and I shall probably fix myself, permanently, at +Calcutta.'" + +Two years later Tom Pearson, on his return from England, brought +back a wife with him, and established himself at Calcutta. Stanley +joined him there, three weeks after his return. They had a long +talk together, that evening. + +"I see, Stanley," his uncle said, "that things have gone on +improving, since I have been away; and that our turnover last year +was 150,000 pounds, and the profits close upon 15,000 pounds. I +think, now, that it is high time we opened a place in London. We +have almost a monopoly of the teak trade, in Burma; and it would be +much more advantageous for us to make our purchases in England, +instead of here. We should save in carriage and in trans-shipment, +besides the profits that the people here make out of their sales to +us. I have made a great many inquiries, at home, as to the prices +for cash in Manchester and Birmingham; and find that we should get +goods there some fifteen percent cheaper than we pay at Calcutta, +even after putting on the freights. So you see, it is an important +matter. Besides, there would be a better choice of goods, and you +know exactly the sort of thing that we require, and the quantities +that we can get rid of; and would be able, therefore, to send +consignments each month, without waiting for advices from me; and +so we should get the things just as readily as we do now, from +here. + +"I will give you the names of some of the firms that I have +visited, and with whom I have already paved the way for opening +extensive transactions. During the eighteen months that I have been +away, you have learned all about the banking business; and will +find no more difficulty in managing, in London, than here. Your +brother-in-law Netherly went with me to the Bank of England, and +introduced me to one of the directors. I told him that we intended +to open a house in London, and that as soon as we did so, we should +open an account with them by paying in 30,000 pounds; and that we +should, of course, require some facilities, but probably not to a +large extent, as our payments for teak there would fairly balance +our exports from England; and that I reckoned our trade to be, as a +minimum, 50,000 pounds, each way. + +"The matter was made extremely easy by Netherly saying, to my +astonishment: + +"'You can let them draw what they like, Mr. Townshend, for I will +give my personal guarantee, up to 50,000 pounds.' + +"I remonstrated, but he would not hear anything said. + +"'Ridiculous,' he exclaimed, hotly; 'Stanley is my brother-in-law. +He risked his life for me, and you don't suppose that I should mind +risking 50,000 pounds for him. + +"'Not,' he went on, turning to the director, 'that there is any +risk in the matter. I know all about the business they do in India, +and that there is not a shadow of risk in it. I know that my +guarantee will be a mere form but, as it may put them on a better +footing with you, to begin with, I shall be very pleased to do it.' + +"Of course, we know that there will be no risk in it. The greater +portion of our business is a ready-money one and although, of late, +we have been dealing more with native local firms instead of +selling direct from our own stores, the amounts are never large +and, so far, we have never lost a penny. Of course, I shall let you +know, by every mail, how things are going on at all our depots; and +you will then be able to form an estimate as to the amount of goods +you will have to despatch to each--sending them direct, of course, +if there happens to be a ship going. + +"But all these things, of course, we shall go into, at length, +before you start for England." + +"Did you go down to Harry's place?" + +"Yes, I stopped there a week. Your sister seems perfectly happy, +and plays the part of queen of the county admirably. The four +youngsters are jolly little things. As to your mother, you will +find very little change in her. I really don't think that she looks +a day older than when we saw her off, at Calcutta, something like +ten years ago. Of course, then she was cut up with her loss; but +quiet and comfort have agreed with her, and the climate is a good +deal less trying than it is out here. At any rate, I should not +take her for a day over forty, and she is something like five years +older than that." + +Three months later, Stanley sailed for England. There was the same +argument between him and Meinik that there had been when Stanley +first left Rangoon, but this time it terminated differently. + +"You would be out of your element in England, Meinik. Of course, my +life there will be very different from what it is here. I shall go +away from home to business, every morning, and not get back until +perhaps seven o' clock in the evening. As a consequence, there +would be nothing for you to do for me, and we should see very +little of each other. You know I should like to have you with me, +and would do all that I could to make you comfortable; but I am +sure that you would not like the life. Here you have always been on +the move, and there is always something for you to do, and think +of. + +"I have spoken to my uncle about you, and he will be glad to +appoint you to the position of purchaser, for our house, of teak +and other native products in these provinces. Besides being buyer, +you would go up the country, and see to the felling and getting the +timber down to the coast, as you have often done before. He knows +how absolutely I trust you, and how much you have done for me, and +he said that he should be very glad to have you in charge of the +buying side of the work, here. Besides, you know you have now a +wife and children and, even if you could make yourself comfortable +in England, they would never be able to do so; and the bitter cold +that we sometimes have, in winter, would try them terribly, and +might even carry them all off." + +To these arguments Meinik had reluctantly yielded. He was somewhat +proud of the position that he occupied, as one of some authority in +the establishment of the principal merchants on the coast. He was +fond of his wife and little children; and felt that to be +established among strangers, of different habits and race, would be +very terrible for them. Stanley bought him a nice house at Rangoon +and, as his rate of pay, which had been gradually increased, was +now sufficient to cause him to rank high among the native +population, he himself came to feel that he had done wisely in +accepting Stanley's advice. + +The voyage to England was an uneventful one; and to Stanley, after +the active life he had had for ten years, the five months spent at +sea seemed almost interminable. + +"I should not have known you, in the least," his mother said, after +the first joyful greetings were over. "How much you have gone +through, since we parted at Calcutta." + +"I had a pretty rough time of it for two years, mother, during the +war but, with that exception, my life has been a very pleasant one; +and I have had nothing, whatever, to grumble about. + +"This is a pretty house that you have chosen, mother, and the +garden is charming. How I have longed, sometimes, for the sight of +an English garden. Of course I have never seen one before, but I +have heard you talk of them, and thought how delightful the green +grass must be. Of course we had flowers in Burma--plenty of +them--and shrubs; but it was not green, like this. It is charming." + +"Yes, it is a pretty house, Stanley. We moved in here five years +ago--thanks to you, dear boy--and it has been a very quiet, happy +time. We have a good many friends now, among our neighbours; and +have quite as much society as I care for. + +"I suppose you have not yet decided whether you will live here, +with us," she said, a little anxiously, "or set up an establishment +of your own." + +"Of course I shall stay here, mother. I never thought of anything +else. I see that you have some stables. I shall get a couple of +horses, and drive into town, in the mornings. I have got out of the +way of walking, altogether. + +"And where is Kate?" + +"You will see her presently. She will be here to dinner, with Agnes +and Harry. I sent her off, because I wanted to have you all to +myself, for the first hour. The others came up to town, three days +ago, on purpose to be here when you arrived. Of course, we heard +when your ship called at Plymouth. We had been looking for her, for +your last letter told us the name of the vessel that you were +coming by; so I wrote to them, and they came up at once. They +wanted us to go and dine with them, but I would not hear of it. I +was sure that you would much rather dine quietly, here, than in +state in Portman Square, with three or four footmen behind our +chairs." + +"Ever so much better, mother. I suppose I shall hardly know Agnes, +but Harry cannot have altered much; besides, I have seen him four +years later than her." + +Harry's greeting was of the heartiest kind. Stanley's sisters felt, +at first, a little strange with this brother of whom they had but a +faint remembrance. + +"It does not seem to me, Harry, that your dignities have tamed you +down much." + +"No, indeed," Harry laughed. "I find it, sometimes, very difficult +to act up to my position. I never quite feel that I am an earl, +except on the rare occasions when I go to the House of Lords--which +I only do when my vote is wanted, on an important division. + +"The gloom of that place is enough to sober anyone. I can assure +you that, when I heard of the fire, I felt absolutely pleased. Of +course, they will build another one, perhaps grander than the last, +and as gloomy but, thank goodness, it must be years before it can +be finished and, until then, we shall have to put up with temporary +premises. + +"Your chances of an earldom are getting more and more remote, +Stanley. There are three boys barring the way, already. I had +proposed to myself not to marry--in which case you or a son of +yours would have followed me--but your sister overpersuaded me." + +Agnes tossed her head, as she said: + +"At any rate, Harry, if you made that resolution, it was not worth +much, as you gave it up at the first opportunity. I was the first +girl you met, when you arrived in England; and I doubt whether you +had seen another, before we came down to stay at Netherly. I had +not been there two days before you began to make love to me." + +"The temptation would excuse anything, my dear," Harry laughed. +"Besides, you see, I saw at once that it was but fair and right to +Stanley that, if he could not get the peerage himself, he might +some day have the satisfaction of being uncle to an earl. + +"And so you are home for good, old fellow?" + +"Yes, and just at present I feel very much at sea as to how to get +to work, as Tom Pearson arranged nothing except as to the banking +account. Everything else he has left to me. I know nothing of +London, and have no idea of the situation where I should look for +offices." + +"I will put you up to all that, Stanley. I don't know anything +about it myself, as you may suppose; but if you will go with me to +my solicitors, tomorrow, they will be able to tell you. But I do +know that Leadenhall Street is the centre of the Indian trade, and +it's somewhere about there that you will have to fix yourself. + +"Of course, when you have taken a place, you will have to get hold +of some clerks. If you put an advertisement in the paper, you will +get any number of applicants; or possibly my men may, through their +connection with merchants, be able to hear of some to suit you. +Anyhow, I am sure that you will find no difficulty." + +Thanks to Harry's introductions, Stanley was established in a +handsome suite of offices, with three clerks, with much greater +ease than he had anticipated. Being thoroughly versed in business, +he was not long before he was at home in his new life. + +Three years after his return, he married Harry's youngest sister. +The firm flourished greatly, and became one of the leading houses +in the Eastern trade. At the age of sixty, Stanley retired from +business with a large fortune. He could do this comfortably, as his +eldest son and a nephew had become active partners in the firm. He +still lives, at the age of eighty-six, in a noble mansion near +Staines; and retains all the faculties, even at advanced age. + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of On the Irrawaddy, by G. A. Henty + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ON THE IRRAWADDY *** + +***** This file should be named 21242.txt or 21242.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/2/4/21242/ + +Produced by Martin Robb + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/21242.zip b/21242.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..653242a --- /dev/null +++ b/21242.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..02da359 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #21242 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/21242) |
